JP7350352B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game performance (variable performance) is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common.

Among such gaming machines, there is also known one that executes a performance using a predetermined performance device (performance button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2019-033816A

However, conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and It is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and if a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) that does not involve the execution of the special game is satisfied in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) that is disadvantageous to the player, the player can play a predetermined number of times. In the variable display, a second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed, and after execution of the special game, a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed. ) , and in the fluctuating display, there is a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and multiple types of preview effects that make people expect the execution of the special game (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) ), and during the entire period of one variable display, the basic performance that does not include a performance that makes people expect the execution of the special game is executed, and the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances is restricted. A specific variation can be executed, and the preview effect is a first effect (for example, background change for SP, text preview, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice) that can be executed on the display means (image display device 70). , mode entry notice, etc.) and a second performance (movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.) that is executed in a different manner from the first performance, and the second performance in the second game state. The variable display based on the establishment of the first starting condition and the variable display based on the establishment of the first starting condition in the third gaming state are different from the variable display in which the first performance was executed. The ease of execution of the game is the same, and it is possible to execute a special effect that changes the symbol to a predetermined mode when the fluctuating display starts and/or ends, and the following (i) , (ii) . (i) The variable display based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition in the first gaming state is greater than the variable display based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition in the second gaming state or the third gaming state. However, the number of types of special effects performed when the variable display starts is greater. (ii) The variable display based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition in the first gaming state is greater than the variable display based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition in the second gaming state or the third gaming state. However, the number of types of special effects performed when the variable display ends is greater.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2; It is a figure showing a main board case. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case including the pedestal. FIG. 7 is a rear perspective view of the main board case when it is disassembled. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining the structure of a main control board. It is a front view of the main board case when the main control board is housed. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for normal use. It is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol variation pattern determination table for probability variation/normal time saving. It is a figure which shows an example of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination table for special time saving. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 2nd starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board. It is a diagram showing jackpot game end processing on the main control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. It is a diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section. It is a figure which shows an example of a demonstration standby time determination table. It is a figure which shows the menu operation process in a production control part. It is a figure which shows the prefetch type|system|group performance process in a performance control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing in a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure showing icon change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for pending icons. (a) is a diagram showing an example of a one-step change pattern determination table for the icon, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the icon. It is a figure which shows the continuous preview performance determination process in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous notice type determination table for performance modes D to H (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a continuous preview performance scenario determination table for performance modes D to H (specific game states). It is a figure which shows the continuous notice performance execution process in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows lamp change production execution processing in a production control part. It is a figure which shows the light emission effect determination process at the time of a prize in an effect control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the light emission effect pattern determination table at the time of a prize winning. It is a figure showing the fluctuating performance pattern judgment processing in a performance control part. It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a variable performance pattern determination table for performance mode H (specific game state). It is a figure showing timer performance decision processing in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows an example of an event timer frequency|count determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st suggestion event determination table for one timer. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd suggestion event determination table for timer 2 times. It is a figure which shows an example of an update pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing jackpot preview performance determination processing in the performance control section. It is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for determining a variable start accessory notice for performance modes A to C (normal game state). It is a diagram showing an example of a table for determining the accessory advance notice at the start of variation for performance modes D to H (specific game states). It is a diagram showing an example of a ready-to-reach advance notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is a diagram showing an example of a ready-to-reach advance notice determination table for production modes D to H (specific game states). It is a figure which shows an example of a dialogue notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo-continuous effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of an advanced production pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a re-lottery performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a fixed performance pattern determination table. It is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss variation performance in the performance modes A to C. It is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss variation performance in the performance modes D to G. It is a figure showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss fluctuation performance of the performance mode H. It is a diagram showing the types of vibration effects for each effect mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. It is a figure showing accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the origin return process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the initial operation process in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows an example of a board accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a first example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a third specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a fourth specific example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 in the case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 in which only the power supply to a main control board is restarted after stopping. It is a figure which shows the modification when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the modification of the accessory initial processing in a lamp control part. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power-on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member after power is turned on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power-on. It is a figure which shows the specific example when there is no recovery abnormality in various accessories after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 2nd movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the 1st movable member has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the production button has a return abnormality after power restoration. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the state after a power supply restoration is in the midst of the variable display of a special symbol, and with reservation memory. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (a power-on designation command, a power recovery designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a first example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. 11 is a diagram showing a third specific example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a fourth specific example in which power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped. FIG. It is a figure which shows the specific example when the connection state of various detection means changes in a customer waiting state. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where the operation unit is operated while waiting for a customer. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of performing performance customization while waiting for a customer. It is a timing chart in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the production example in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the 1st variable performance in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the 2nd variable performance in a specific game state. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a look-ahead motion performance and a step-up notice performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are performed. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is performed before a reach performance. It is a figure showing an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a ready-to-win performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a development performance is executed and an SP ready-to-reach performance is executed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the development performance is performed and the SPSP reach performance is performed. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance in the case where a cut-in performance is executed during the SP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 1 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 1 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a figure showing example 2 of a performance in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing a continuation of performance example 2 in the case where a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing the execution timing of the timer effect for each variable effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when two timer performances are performed during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a special SP ready-to-win performance is executed in the second variable performance in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a chance performance is executed in the first variable performance in performance mode G (specific game state) and a jackpot is achieved. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when a variable mission performance is executed during a jackpot. It is a diagram showing an example of opening performance and ending performance of a jackpot game for each game state. It is a diagram showing an example of the opening performance and ending performance of the jackpot game during the special time-saving game state. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a special time-saving game state occurs. It is a diagram showing an example of performance when a special time-saving game state that has occurred in a state where there is no jackpot history ends. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when the special time-saving game state which occurred in the state where there is a jackpot history ends. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance. It is a figure which shows the continuation of the example of a performance when restarting after the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of a look-ahead effect performance, a pending icon change performance, and a lamp change performance. It is a diagram showing a continuation of the example of the effect when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the look-ahead effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect. This is a timing chart 1 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 1. This is a timing chart 2 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example 1 of performance at various timings of timing chart 2. This is a second example of performance at various timings of timing chart 2. This is timing chart 3 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example 1 of performance at various timings of timing chart 3. This is a second example of performance at various timings of timing chart 3. This is a timing chart 4 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 4. This is a timing chart 5 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of timing chart 5. FIG. 6 is a timing chart 6 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of the timing chart 6. It is a timing chart 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is an example of a performance at various timings of timing chart 7. FIG. 8 is a timing chart 8 when a command cannot be received normally. This is an example of performance at various timings of the timing chart 8. This is a first modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a second modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a third modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a fourth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a fifth modification example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 9 where a command cannot be received normally. This is a tenth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 11 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a twelfth specific example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 13 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a 14th specific example in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 15 in which a command cannot be received normally. This is a specific example 16 in which a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of the gaming machine in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the fixed effect pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a specific example when a game ball hit to the left enters the starting hole in the normal gaming state. It is a diagram showing a specific example when a game ball hit to the left enters the starting slot in a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states). It is a figure showing special icon change production decision processing of a production control part in a 2nd embodiment. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table for the MAX hold chance. (b) is a diagram illustrating an example of a puzzle suspension chance performance pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a MAX pending chance performance is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when a puzzle suspension chance performance is performed. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a first specific example when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 1 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 2 to 4 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 2 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 2 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 3 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 3 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 4 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 4 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 5 to 7 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 5 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 5 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 6 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 6 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 7 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 7 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 8 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 8 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of a performance in the specific example 8 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of rendering in specific example 9 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 10 to 12 when commands cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 10 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 11 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 12 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing timing charts of specific examples 13 to 15 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 13 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 14 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 15 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 16 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 16 when a command cannot be normally received. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 17 when a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a timing chart of specific example 18 when a command cannot be received normally. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in the specific example 18 when a command cannot be normally received. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 1 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the test|inspection mode 2 of a main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a time chart of inspection mode 3 of the main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 4 of a main control board. It is a figure which shows the time chart of the inspection mode 5 of a main control board. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a first specific example of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the specific example 1 of image change production. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a second specific example of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the specific example 2 of image change production. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a third specific example of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the specific example 3 of image change production. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a timing chart of a fourth specific example of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation of the specific example 4 of image change production. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of an image change performance. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 1 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 2 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 3 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 4 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 6 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 7 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 8 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 9 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 10 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 11 when conditions are not met in a performance control part. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing specific example 1 of performance. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing specific example 1 of performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing the execution rate of presentation using color effects. It is a figure showing the execution rate of zone production. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of change notification sound production. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the pending icon change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of lamp change effect. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the operation|movement performance of a 1st movable member. It is a figure which shows the modification of the production example 1. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of a light-guide plate display effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the normal game state in the performance example 2. It is a figure showing the normal game state of production example 2. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific game state in the performance example 2. It is a diagram showing a specific game state of specific example 2 of performance. It is a figure which shows the production example 3. It is a figure which shows the production example 3. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a relationship between fluctuation times. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing the execution rate of preparation operations. It is a figure showing the execution rate of a stop operation. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of a fluctuation stop pattern. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of a fluctuation start pattern. It is a figure which shows the production example 4. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the aspect change production of a production pattern. It is a figure showing the execution rate of the display size change effect of the effect design. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the display size change effect of the reach effect. It is a figure which shows the timing chart of the specific example 5 of a performance. It is a diagram showing specific example 5 of performance. It is a figure which shows the production example 6. It is a diagram showing the execution rate of notification effects. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of a vibration effect. It is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of the first embodiment. 2 is a perspective view of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which a glass frame 150 and an inner frame 170 are opened with respect to an outer frame 160. FIG. 1 is a diagram showing functional blocks of a gaming machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a jackpot/hit determination table T1. It is a diagram showing an example of a symbol determination table T2. 3 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a main RAM 301c of the main control board 300. FIG. It is a block diagram showing details of the production control board 320. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 provided in a sub-RAM 320c. It is a diagram explaining the transition of gaming states. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by the main control board 300. FIG. It is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the production control board 320. It is a flowchart explaining special symbol stop processing which is one of the processing in the main control board 300. It is a flowchart explaining the transition determination process to the time-saving gaming state and the end determination process of the time-saving gaming state. It is a diagram explaining the end of the time saving game state 3 and the time saving game state 4. It is a figure explaining the detail of the information display 302c. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a counting period of base value B. FIG. It is a figure showing an example of display production for each production mode. It is a figure which shows the display performance example of the number of reservations. It is a diagram illustrating a time-saving entry effect executed at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2, and a display effect executed before the end of the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2. It is a figure explaining the display production performed before and after transition to the time-saving game state 3 or the time-saving game state 4. It is a diagram illustrating the display performance at the end of time-saving game states 1 to 4. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an overview of the state transition of the gaming machine 100 and the display mode of the main display device 131 after the fluctuation is stopped. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an overview of a customer waiting demonstration performance. This is a timing chart (1) when the variable performance in the normal gaming state ends and the player waits for a customer. 323 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 322. FIG. 323 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 322. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when winning a prize while waiting for a customer. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance when operating a sword handle unit during variable display. This is a timing chart when the variable performance in the time-saving game state 3 ends and the game enters a customer waiting state. 328 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 327. FIG. 328 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 327. FIG. This is a timing chart (2) when the variable performance in the normal gaming state ends and the player waits for a customer. 330 is a diagram showing examples of effects at various timings in FIG. 330. FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in other embodiments. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between gaming states. It is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of a first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance when shifting to a first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing example 1 of performance of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing example 1 of performance of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing example 3 of production of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing example 3 of production of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing example 4 of production of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing example 4 of production of the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing example 1 of performance of the normal gaming state immediately before transition to the second advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing example 2 of production of the normal gaming state immediately before transition to the second advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing example 3 of production of the normal gaming state immediately before transition to the second advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing the flow at the time of transition to the second advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of performance at the time of transition to a second advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of performance at the time of transition to a second advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing a mode of a second advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of continuous performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of continuous performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a performance of a pending change performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a reach promotion performance. It is an explanatory view showing example 2 of a continuous performance. It is an explanatory view showing example 2 of a continuous performance. It is an explanatory view showing example 2 of a continuous performance. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific image rendering. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of specific image rendering. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the basic performance and the preview performance in the normal game state. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the basic performance and the preview performance in the first advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the basic performance and the preview performance in the second advantageous gaming state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a preview performance. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of specific fluctuations. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of specific fluctuations. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between background change effects and jackpots. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a specific preview performance and a jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a preview performance by a display means and a jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between a preview performance by a movable member and a jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing the execution rate of the first notification of notification performance. It is an explanatory view showing an execution rate of the second notification of notification performance. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between settings and effects. It is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between modes and effects.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a on which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front-rear direction, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the front lower part of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting part (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, and is removable from the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism part 6 at one end in the horizontal direction. and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism part 7 at one end in the horizontal direction so as to cover the front of the mounting part of the game board mounting frame 3, It is rotatably supported using the second hinge mechanism section 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-back direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, and the game area 5a of the game board 5 mounted on the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3 can be viewed through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and game balls etc. put out from a payout device 100 described later. an upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls; a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into the overflow ball channel described later; and a game ball firing operation. A firing operation device 13 is provided for performing the following steps.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to perform sound (music, voice) production. It has become. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). The frame illumination device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a that is controlled to turn on/blink when the glass frame 4 is opened or when a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the firing operation device 13 (rightward), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball feed solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the center front side of the upper plate 11, there are a production button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for determining and selecting various productions to be described later. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation etc. (operation input), a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) that detects an operation on the performance button 17, and a performance button A button driving device 17b (see FIG. 9) for driving the gaming machine 17 is provided, and the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The production button 17 performs production light emission by lighting the production button LED (full color), which is a part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white, red, rainbow color). It is now possible. In addition, it is possible to move in the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located below and the production position located above by the driving force of the button drive motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b. The button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button is at the origin position. Furthermore, it is possible to perform a production operation by vibrating in a predetermined vibration mode using the driving force of a button vibration motor that is a part of the button drive device 17b, so that production can be performed even when the button vibration motor is vibrating. Button 17 can be operated.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) connected to the cross key 19 to detect operations on the cross key 19. (see FIG. 9) is provided, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a rental operation section 20 that can perform operations for lending game balls and returning a storage medium such as a card storing a balance. When the lending button of the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the remaining amount stored in the storage medium accepted by the ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 is subtracted, and the game balls are lent out. When the return button of the operation unit 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While this is being detected, the payout of game balls by the payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 9), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 9) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a plurality of firing volumes 15b (see FIG. 9) for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A handle LED (frame lighting device 10) is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting part 25 for mounting the game board 5, a firing device 26 for firing a game ball toward the gaming area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and a glass frame. A locking mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The firing device 26 includes a firing member 28 for firing a game ball, a firing solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the firing member 28, and a solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) that extends upward from the firing member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. An inclined firing rail 29 and a stopper 30 for stopping the game ball A at a firing position which is the inclined lower end of the firing rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A firing ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game ball fired by the firing device 26 to the upstream part of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, called a so-called center case, that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to A stage section 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior and making them flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always be entered are provided at intervals, and these general winning holes 43 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are ejected from the payout device 100 (not shown) as prize balls. It is dispensed onto plate 11.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal game gates 44 (normal game starting area) through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 9), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Note that the winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

At the lower part of the gaming area 5a and directly below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) is provided in which a game ball can always enter a prize (ball), and this first starting opening 45 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. It is about to be paid out. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

Below the first starting port 45, a game ball is placed in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a normal symbol winning lottery). A variable starting section 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball hitting) is possible or easy.

The variable starting section 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) through which a game ball can enter a prize (ball entering), and a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) that allows a game ball to enter a prize (entering ball) into the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 9). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are delivered from the payout device 100 to the top tray as prize balls. It is set to be paid out on the 11th. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information), which will be described later, is performed.

A prize opening lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 to illuminate the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect by emitting light from a panel illumination device 76 having a plurality of lamps (full color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general figure gate 44, there is a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the jackpot determination of the special symbol). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the basic mode to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won.

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can be won (balls entered), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (Fig. 9), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the big winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51. When the grand prize opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball, and when the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state, winning a game ball (entering a ball) is difficult. ) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are transferred from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls. paid out.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, An out ball flow path is provided that receives the game balls detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a and the big winning port detection switch 50a, and the game balls that have flowed into the out port 39, collects them, and allows them to flow down. An out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the ball flow path. The game balls flowing down this out ball channel and detected by the out ball detection switch 52a are discharged to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment) from the discharge port on the back side of the game machine 1.

Outside the gaming area 5a, there are a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, a second special symbol reservation display 64, as well as. A normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game) to be described later is executed, and a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) during a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state. A right-handed display 67 (see FIG. 9) that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side of the gaming area 5a, and a status confirmation display that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. A main information display device 59 consisting of a device 68 (see FIG. 9) is provided.

Further, a winning probability display sticker is attached near the main information display device 59 (not shown). On this winning probability display sticker, the jackpot winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and set value (4 to 1) of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment are printed. Note that the position where this winning probability display sticker 200 is pasted is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the game ball enters the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the prize gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot determination of the first special symbol means that when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a random number value for jackpot determination, etc. (first special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the first special symbol is performed, a variable display of the first special symbol is performed on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

Jackpot determination of the second special symbol means that when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, a random number value etc. for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) is acquired, and the acquired jackpot determination This corresponds to comparing the random number value and the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not it is a "jackpot". In addition, when the jackpot determination of the second special symbol is performed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of each special symbol, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order. do. When the special symbols are to be stopped and displayed, the LEDs are lit in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot determination (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In addition, in this embodiment, "jackpot" means executing a jackpot game (special game) in the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol or the jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol. refers to the state in which one has acquired the right to do something. The term "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls entered), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for the player in which the player can easily win the prize ball. In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to generate any of a plurality of types of jackpot games with different degrees of advantage to the player, which will be described in detail later.

The normal symbol winning lottery is to acquire a random number value for determining a hit when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, and compare the obtained random number value for determining a hit with the winning determination value to determine whether it is a "win". This corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when a winning lottery of a normal symbol is performed, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning manner or a losing manner).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. The winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) win a prize (balls entered). In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition for the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the first special symbol that is stored when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing a variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is used to determine the jackpot of the second special symbol that is stored when the game ball enters the second starting port 47 (balls entered). This is for displaying the number of rights (second pending memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second pending memories. In addition, although up to four second reservation memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a normal symbol winning lottery (fluctuating display of normal symbols) that is stored when a game ball enters (passes) the common symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Fuzuzu pending memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of Fuzuzuzu pending memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures are stored in the storage, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if you win a special symbol jackpot, "7" will be displayed as a stop sign, and if you lose, a "-" will be displayed as a stop sign, and while the variable display is in progress, the light will turn off and "-" will be displayed as a stop sign. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous fluctuation display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation display can be started by turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand what has started.

The round number display 66 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is for displaying the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. starts lighting up, continues lighting the LED during the jackpot game, and turns off the LED at the end of the jackpot game. For example, if it is a jackpot game with two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left will light up, and if it is a jackpot game with sixteen rounds, all the LEDs will light up.

The right-hand hitting indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is a right-hand hitting indicator 67 that prompts you to fire the game ball toward the right side gaming area (so-called right-hand hitting) during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state. This is for displaying a winning display, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-saving game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of one LED, and is for indicating that the setting change mode, which will be described later, or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the mode shifts to , the LED starts lighting up, and when the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode ends, the LED is turned off. In this way, the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine. It is possible to easily check whether the settings are set or not.

Note that the installation position of the status confirmation display 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation position of this embodiment, and may be any position in the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display is displayed in the same manner (lit display) regardless of whether it is set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, but the display is made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. You may do so. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be lit, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation display 68 may be blinking. When the setting change mode is set, either the status confirmation display 68 or the second game information display device 69 lights up, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status is displayed. Only the confirmation display 68 may be displayed by lighting.

Further, in this embodiment, the status confirmation display 68 is provided as a dedicated display to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may also be used as another display. good. For example, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69, which will be described later, are off, so these display devices may be used. Specifically, one LED of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or one LED of the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on. All LEDs may be turned on.

At the lower right inside of the gaming area 5a, there are a sub-first fluctuation display 81, a sub-second fluctuation display 82, a sub-first reservation display 83, a sub-second reservation display 84, and a sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85. A sub-information display device 80 is provided, which includes a sub-normal figure reservation display 86, and a sub-right-hitting display 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a (so-called right-handed hitting). Note that the sub-information display device 80 is not provided with a display indicating that the sub-information display device 80 is set to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, such as the status confirmation display 68 described above.

The sub-first fluctuation display 81 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot determination of the first special symbol, and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 is for displaying the result of the jackpot determination of the second special symbol. (notification), and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the corresponding special symbol starts to be displayed in a variable manner, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is displayed in a variable manner), and when the corresponding special symbol is stopped and displayed, it is a jackpot. The result of the judgment (lights up if it's a jackpot, turns off if it's a loss) is displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, in the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82, so that it can be grasped only whether or not the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed, it blinks and stops while the special symbol is being fluctuatedly displayed. It may be configured to turn on or off when displayed.

The sub-first reservation display 83 is for displaying the number of first reservation memories (number of reservations), and the sub-second reservation display 84 displays the number of second reservation memories (number of reservations). It is made up of two LEDs on the left and right. Then, when the number of reservations is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, when the number of reservations is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and when the number of reservations is "2", the LED on the right turns off. The left and right LEDs light up, and when the number of reservations is "3", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reservations is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the normal symbols is started, the LED blinks at predetermined intervals (variable display). Then, when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, an aspect indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights on in the case of a win, turns off in the case of a loss) is stopped and displayed.

In addition, in order to be able to grasp only whether or not the normal symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the sub-normal symbol fluctuation display 85 is configured to blink while the normal symbol is in the fluctuating display, and to turn on or off when the normal symbol is displayed in a stopped state. It's okay.

The sub-universal drawing reservation display 86 is for displaying the number of ordinary drawings (reservation number), and is constituted by two LEDs arranged on the left and right. Then, when the number of reserved general drawings is "0", the left and right LEDs turn off, and when the number of reserved general drawings is "1", the left LED lights up and the right LED goes out, and the number of reserved general drawings is ``1''. When the number of reservations is "2", the left LED blinks and the right LED lights up, and when the number of reserved ordinary cards is "4", the left and right LEDs blink.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a, and a , a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is provided, which is a liquid crystal display whose display area is smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A first movable member 73 is provided that resembles the same, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided on the right side of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. Performance displays include customer waiting demonstration performances that are executed during a customer waiting state (standby state where the game is not in progress) where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, and production symbols that are executed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of 70a.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) is formed with three columns of variable display areas: a left area, a center area, and a right area. By scrolling the effect pattern 70a vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, a special symbol display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area is changed to a special symbol variable display. By correspondingly scrolling in the vertical direction (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are composed of, for example, patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", and the special pattern displayed on the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. In response to (synchronized with) the fluctuating display of the symbols, the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a is performed. That is, in response to the start of the fluctuating display of the special symbol, the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and before the fluctuating display of the special symbol stops, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (swinging display), and the special symbol is fluctuating. In response to the stop display of the display, the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is stopped (still display). Note that, in addition to the symbols indicating numbers, symbols indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

Note that the "temporary stop display" is a display in which the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (completely stopped). (not done).

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of jackpot determination. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be. Note that the manner in which the performance symbols 70a are variably displayed is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (rotates) on the spot.

Also, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), depending on the result of jackpot determination. By being displayed on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectations for a jackpot (special game) to be executed (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") are increased. There is.

Here, "reach performance" is a jackpot game executed for the player in which a part of the combination of performance symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other performance symbols 70a fluctuate. It means a pattern of variation that is expected to occur. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

In addition, in this embodiment, the types of reach performances are "normal reach performance", "SP reach performance", "SPSP reach performance", "SPSP "7" reach performance", "full rotation reach performance", and "special SP reach performance". There are seven types.

"Normal reach effect" is a reach state in which the background image before reach is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is fluctuated in the center area. This is a reach performance that is performed with a .

"SP reach effect" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect pattern 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) is a reach performance where the performance is performed.

"SPSP reach performance" is a reach performance that is executed after the normal reach performance or SP reach performance, and has a performance effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach performance or SP reach performance.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In this embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning in the jackpot determination.

"Special SP Reach" is executed after the normal reach effect, and the effect symbol 70a with the reach state formed is displayed in a reduced size at the corner of the screen, and the effect is higher than the normal reach effect (the expectation of a jackpot is high) ) This is a reach performance that is different from the normal SP reach performance.

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation regarding the reach performance increases in the order of normal reach performance < SP reach performance < SPSP reach performance < full rotation reach performance (jackpot confirmed), and in the order of normal reach performance < special SP reach performance. It is getting high.

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a number of first special symbols with a number corresponding to the first reserved number of special symbols (U1), which is the number of the first reserved symbols currently stored in the normal gaming state, is displayed. A first reservation icon display area 70B for displaying reservation icons and a number of second reservation icons corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) which is the current number of second reservation storage in the specific gaming state. A second pending icon display area 70D for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) being executed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. A region 70C is formed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display area 70B1, a second display area 70B2, a third display area 70B3, and a fourth display area 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display the number of first reservation icons corresponding to the number of first reserved special symbols (U1). In other words, the number of first reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of first reserved special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first pending icon H11. The first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory is displayed on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third, and the third display section 70B3 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. A first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon H14 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display area 70D1, a second display area 70D2, a third display area 70D3, and a fourth display area 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display second reservation icons in a number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2). In other words, the number of second reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of second reserved special symbols (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon H21. A second pending icon H22 indicating a second pending memory is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A second pending icon H23 indicating a second pending memory is displayed, and a second pending icon H24 indicating a second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display section 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "first reserved number" and the "second reserved number of special symbols" may be referred to as the "second reserved number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second pending icon that was displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). As the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TI is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) The icon TI disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Note that in this embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

In addition, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), a first pending number indicating the current number of first reserved special symbols (U1) is displayed in the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. 1st special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second special figure reservation number display area 70E for displaying the second reservation number indicating the current number of second special figure reservation number (U2) in the normal game state and the specific game state. A number display area 70F is formed.

The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the first movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9), moves the vertical direction between the standby position (origin position) located above and the presentation position located below. By moving to , it is possible to perform a performance operation, and the first position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

The second movable member 74 can perform dramatic light emission by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission mode. The drive force of the second movable member drive motor, which is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9), moves between the standby position (origin position) located at the upper right and the production position located at the lower left. It is possible to perform a performance operation by moving diagonally up and down, and a second position detection sensor (not shown) detects that it is at the origin position.

Since the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 partially overlap each other's production positions, basically the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 operate at the same time. By not doing so, they avoid conflict with each other.

Note that if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, when one movable member moves to the production position and returns to a position that does not overlap with the production position of the other movable member, The other movable member may be moved to the presentation position.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize balls, ball rental), and game balls supplied from island equipment, etc. A game ball storage unit (not shown) that stores balls and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that includes a main control board 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game, and a main control board 110. A payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 according to a payout control command from the main control board 110, and a production that controls the production according to production control commands from the main control board 110. A production control device 130A (not shown) that includes a control board 130, a power supply device 160A (not shown) that includes a power supply board 160 that supplies power voltage to various control devices, and game information (not shown) external to the gaming machine. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 9) for outputting a game signal (game signal) is provided.

Further, an opening/closing door-type cover member is provided that opens and closes the left and right sides in the left-right direction around a rotation axis set on one left and right side so as to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire production control device 130A from the rear. The production control device 130A includes the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 9 so as to be covered by the cover member, display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and various lighting devices. A changeover switch 22 (see FIG. 9) is provided for switching adjustment modes related to adjustment of the amount of light of the devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there is a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, and a main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m to clear the memory contents or to indicate the level of advantage of the game. an RWM clear switch 111a that inputs a signal for updating the set value (different advantages); a signal for moving the set value to a state where the set value can be changed or a state where the set value can be confirmed by operation using the setting key; A setting key switch 112a for inputting information, an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values that allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped, and the like are installed.

The information display 113 is for displaying setting values and performance information (normal base values to be described later), and is composed of four 7-segment displays having decimal points DP arranged side by side. There is. An identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type) is configured on two 7-segment displays corresponding to the upper two digits, and two 7-segment displays corresponding to the lower two digits. A numerical value segment is configured to display numerical information indicating numerical values of setting values and performance information.

(Configuration of the back of the game board)
Next, the structure of the back side of the game board will be explained using FIGS. 2 and 3.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, a base frame 170 (liquid crystal base frame) having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction is assembled on the back surface (rear surface) of the game board 5. An image display unit (first image display device 70 and image display cover 185) 180 is assembled on the back side (rear side) of the image display unit 180 so as to close the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is assembled on the back (rear surface) of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover), and a main controller 110A (main control board) is attached to the lower back of the image display cover 185 below the lamp relay board 186. The main board case 200 containing the main board 110 is attached.

The base frame 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially rectangular annular body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its annular front surface 171 is attached to and fixed to the back surface of the game board 5. The back side of the base frame 170 has a space for arranging various circuit boards and parts.
An effect control board 130 is arranged on the back side of an image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the back side of the base frame 170. The image display unit 180 can be slid freely from the sides (left and right), up and down, or diagonally of the base frame into a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the production control board. It is configured so that it can be installed on the
Various circuit boards arranged on the back side of the base frame are covered by a lid member 190.

As shown in FIG. 2, on the back side of the main board case 200, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a included in the main control board 110 are exposed.
Furthermore, the information display 113 included in the main control board 110 is visible through the transparent main board case 200.
The staff of the game parlor open the door of the game machine, visually check the information display 113 on the back of the game machine, and operate the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a to clear the RWM, change the settings, and check the settings. You can perform operations such as checking the performance information of the gaming machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and the operation member 685 can be operated by the staff of the game parlor through an opening provided in the main board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a. stands out.
When a staff member or the like depresses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the depressed operating member 685. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.

The setting key switch 112a has a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110, and a keyhole into which a key is inserted is provided in the end surface of the cylindrical member.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a provided with a keyhole is exposed through an opening provided in the main board case 200.
A staff member of the game parlor can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(Main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to this embodiment will be described using FIGS. 4 to 6.
In addition, in this embodiment, the game board 5 side will be described as the front side with respect to the main board case 200, and the direction opposite to the game board 5 will be described as the rear side. Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when main board case 200 is viewed from the side opposite to game board 5.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the main board case 200, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the main board case 200 including the pedestal, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the main board case 200 when it is disassembled. be.
The main board case 200 of this embodiment is assembled to the back of a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine via a pedestal 280, with the main control board 110 carrying electronic components accommodated therein.

The pedestal 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to the gaming machine side holding part (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 186) provided on the back side of the gaming machine main body.
The main board case 200 that accommodates the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of a game board such as a pachinko game machine via the pedestal 280, so the main board case 200 houses the main control board. Electronic components mounted on the internal main control board 110 can be visually recognized through the case piece 220.

The pedestal 280 is a component used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear side of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. 5, the pedestal 280 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape in which two sides along the left and right directions are longer than two sides along the up and down direction, and a pair of shaft portions 281 are provided near both left and right ends of the lower side. It has a plate shape in the center of the upper side in the left and right direction. The shaft portion 281 has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hook parts 249 that are engaged with each shaft part 281. A pair of hook portions 249 are provided on the lower side of upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hook portion 249 is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

When attaching the main board case 200 to the pedestal 280, the main board case 200 is arranged so that the hook portion 249 is convex toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 249 become engageable with the shaft portions 281, so the main board case 200 is brought closer to the pedestal 280, and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.

Then, when the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the free end side of the main board case 200 is rotated upward around the shaft portion 281, and the main board case 200 is stacked on the pedestal 280. At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 280 is caught in the depression D provided on the upper side of the main board case 200. Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the pedestal 280 by the engagement between the hook part 249 and the shaft part 281 and the engagement between the plate-like hook 282 and the main board case 200.

Thereafter, the protective cover 229 is attached to the main board case 200. The protective cover 229 covers a lower portion of the main board case 200 including the hook part 249. In this way, the main control device 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

The main board case 200 consists of two transparent resin case pieces (lower case piece) that house a single-sided mounting type main control board 110 (printed board) with electronic components arranged only on one side. 210, an upper case piece 220), a cutting member 230 for cutting a tamper-proof seal held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and a main body to which a tamper-proof seal 250, which will be described later, is adhered. A cap 240 is detachably attached to the sealing base portion 310 of the board case 200.

Main board case 200 encloses main control board 110 with a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 mounted on main control board 110 exposed. The main board case 200 is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic, for example.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 constitute a main board case body (sealing body 300).
A protective cover 229 is disposed at the lower part of the upper case piece 220 to cover a connecting portion between an internal connector and an external connector provided on the main control board 110 inside.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 with the main control board 110 in between by a caulking member.

A caulking part 291 using a caulking member is arranged at a suitable location along the edge of the main board case 200, and a caulking member (locking member) is inserted into a caulking hole (sealing part) provided in the caulking part 291. ), the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state. By removing (breaking) the caulking member driven (locked) into the caulking fastening hole, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable, closable, and detachable.

In the caulking portion 291 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two caulking holes are provided (caulking holes 291A, 291B).
Each caulking fastening hole 291A, 291B is configured by a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220 communicating with each other.

Note that only one caulking hole is used for one time of fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. After removing (breaking) the caulking member and releasing the connection (after opening the main board case 200), if you want to perform the connection again, drive the caulking member into the other remaining caulking hole. conduct. That is, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an internal enclosing portion 581 for enclosing the main control board 110. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200, which is the main control unit 110m side. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200, which is the opposite side to the main control unit 110m side.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each include control board housing parts 211 and 221 that house the main control board 110, and sealing parts 212 and 222 that constitute a sealing base part 310, which will be described later. There is. The control board storage parts 211 and 221 are provided with plate parts 211a and 221a formed in a substantially rectangular shape, respectively, and protrude from the peripheral edges of these plate parts 211a and 221a, and are provided on one side of each of the plate parts 211a and 221a. It is formed in a shape having flange portions 211b and 221b surrounding the surface.

Further, on the left side of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210, a cylindrical portion 565 is provided that extends toward the rear, which is the main control board 110 side. A hole 566 is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 and extends in the front-rear direction. A thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the main control board 110, a hole 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

Main control board 110 is fixed to lower case piece 210. More specifically, the hole 567 of the main control board 110 is arranged behind the cylindrical part 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shaft portion of a screw for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 through the hole 567 from the rear side of the main control board 110. The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft of the screw. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

A portion of the flange portion 211b of the control board storage portion 211 that protrudes from the plate portion 211a along two long sides of the plate portion 211a (hereinafter referred to as the “male portion”) is formed in an L-shape. Three hooking pieces 211c are formed respectively. On the other hand, a portion of the flange portion 221b of the control board storage portion 221 that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along two long sides of the plate portion 221a (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board storage portion 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls forming a double wall. Furthermore, a hook piece 221d is formed in each insertion groove portion 221c.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed is combined with the upper case piece 220, the male part of the flange part 211b is inserted into the female part of the flange part 221b. Then, the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are slid relative to each other in the direction of arrow α in FIG. 6 along the left-right direction. Then, the hook piece 211c provided on the male part engages with the hook piece 221d, so the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are assembled together so that they will not come off unless they move in the opposite direction to the arrow α. It will be done.

When combined in this manner, the control board housing parts 211 and 221 form a box-shaped inner envelope part 581 that is shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is housed in the inner packaging part 581, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, etc. are illegally replaced.

The main control board 110 is attached inside the control board storage part 221 before the control board storage parts 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the IC and the like mounted on the main control board 110 are attached so as to face the plate section 221a of the control board storage section 221. Since the plate portion 221a is also made of transparent plastic, even if the main control board 110 is housed in the main board case 200, electronic components such as the main control unit 110m mounted on the main control board 110 can This is so that it can be confirmed from the outside via the plate portion 221a whether or not it has been illegally replaced. In this embodiment, when the main control device 110A including the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, the main control board 110A in the main board case 200 is mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 through the upper case piece 220 from the back side of the game machine 1. Electronic components can be visually recognized.

Sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided at the right end portions of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw stopper piece 91 and a second screw stopper piece 92 above the sealing parts 212 and 222. When the control board housing parts 211 and 221 are slid and combined, a sealing base part 310 is formed by the sealing parts 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of a sealed body 300 in which these parts are combined. Then, when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base 310, the first screw piece 91 and the second screw piece 92 are attached to the longitudinal end of the sealing body 300. , the third screw stopper piece 393 of the cap 240 overlaps to form a screw stop part 390 for screw fastening.

The sealing portions 212 and 222 are provided to protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board storage portions 211 and 221. The sealing parts 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction. In each of the sealing parts 212 and 222, elongated groove parts 212a and 222a are formed along the left-right direction. In the sealing part 222, two parallel grooves 222a are formed along the left-right direction, separated by a predetermined distance, and in the sealing part 212, one groove 212a is formed in the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing parts 212 and 222 form a sealing base part 310 on the right side of the combined control board storage parts 211 and 221. In the sealing base part 310, the sealing parts 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel with a constant interval, and an insertion/extraction space is formed between the faces of the sealing parts 212 and 222 facing each other.

The tamper-evident seal 250 is used as a means to seal the main board case 200, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization with certification qualifications. The tamper-proof seal 250 is made of an easily cutable material such as paper with an adhesive surface provided on one side, and has a plurality of cuts in consideration of cuttability. As will be described later, the tamper-proof seal 250 has, for example, a hologram, a QR code (registered trademark) printed thereon, and the like. Further, the words "Do not tamper" are also printed on the tamper-proof seal 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of pinching portions 361, and a cutting portion 364. A base portion 230a, which is the basis of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cutting portion 364 is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 230a. The cutting portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed into a blade shape. The knob portions 361 are provided at both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed into a shape that is bent into a dogleg shape overall. The left end of the knob 361 is referred to as a free end 361a.

The cap 240 is formed in a size that can be placed over the sealing base part 310 to cover the entire sealing base part 310, and is formed to be detachable from the sealing base part 310. The cap 240 includes a bowl-shaped cap body 241 that covers the sealing base 310 and a third screw stopper 393 formed at one end of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 382 is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base 310. It is provided. Furthermore, a groove portion 386 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/extraction space of the sealing base 310. Thereafter, a tamper-proof sticker 250 is attached. Further, when the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base portion 310, the groove portion 386 fits into a portion of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/extraction space 310a. Furthermore, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end 361a of the knob 361 of the cutting member 230.

When the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base 310, the third screw stopper 393 is a combination of the first screw stopper 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screw stopper 92 of the upper case piece 220. overlaps with each other to form a screw-fastening portion 390 for screw-fastening. When the caulking member 94 is driven into the screw fixing portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the main board case 200, the caulking member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310. The same applies when the seal on the main board case 200 is illegally broken. The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base 310 at the same time. Then, the tamper-proof seal 250 is irreparably damaged by the cut portion 364 and the like.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described using FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the main control board.
The main control board 110 that controls the game includes a main control section 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, and a plurality of electronic components 595 (IC, resistor, connector, etc.) different from the main control section 110m. capacitors, coils, etc.), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, etc. are mounted.

The main control unit 110m stores memory contents used for controlling games. The main control unit 110m also stores memory contents that affect the outcome of the game.
The main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer that integrates a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later.
The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the bottom of main control board 110. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

Among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776, two connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include one of the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the general winning opening detection switch 43a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, which detect that a game ball has won. Signals from at least some of them are input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a first starting opening detection switch 45a that detects that a game ball has won, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a general winning opening detection switch 43a, and a big winning opening detection switch. It is assumed that all the signals of the switch 50a are input. Detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a fluorescent color, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776 have a color different from the fluorescent color.

The main control unit 110m includes a plate-shaped main body extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end of the main body and electrically connected to the main control board 110. We are prepared. The signal pin (first signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.
The plurality of electronic components 595 each include a signal pin (second signal pin) provided on each of the plurality of electronic components. The signal pin (second signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.

The RWM clear switch 111a will be explained.
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. The upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 is provided with a recess 688, and an opening 687 is provided within the recess 688.
As can be seen from FIG. 5, the operating member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, and when a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the depressed operating member 685. be done. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided within the recess 688 . The cover member 686 is rotatably supported within the recess 688 between a first position in which the operating member 685 is closed and cannot be operated, and a second position in which the operating member 685 is opened and operable. has been done.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
By doing so, it is only necessary to provide the board case 200 with an opening 687 large enough to allow the operation member 685 to be inserted therein. Furthermore, the operation member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access to the inside of the board case 200 can be prevented.
The end of the RWM clear switch 111a may be exposed through the opening 687 so that it can be directly operated without being operated using the operating member 685.

The setting key switch 112a has a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110, and a keyhole into which a key is inserted is provided in the end surface of the cylindrical member.
The end face of the setting key switch 112a provided with a keyhole is exposed through the opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200, but is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200.
A staff member or the like can operate the setting key switch 112a by inserting a key into the keyhole.

(Identification display)
The identification display 520 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 520 is attached to the main control board 110, the main control section 110m, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240.
The identification display 520 is a display that includes information regarding the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification display 523, the identification display 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification display 524, and the identification display 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification display 523. It is called display 525.

As shown in FIG. 5, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the main control board 110 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the main control unit 110m by a stamp. The identification display 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the main board case 200 are information identification parts for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right side of the front surface of the lower case piece 210 by marking with a mold used to manufacture the lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 240 by marking with a mold for manufacturing the cap 240. The display mode of the identification display 523 will be described later.

Identification indicia 521-525 are related to each other and include at least the same identification indicia 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string "ABCD05". The same identification display 529 among the identification displays 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification display 529 is a display corresponding to, for example, a manufacturer name and a model name. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name, and "CD" represents the model name.

In the identification displays 521 to 525, instead of displaying the manufacturer name as "AB" included in "ABCD", the manufacturer name itself may be displayed. Furthermore, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed. Further, the model of the gaming machine may be displayed in the identification displays 521 to 525.

(Seal member)
The seal member will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 5 and 8, a seal member 1560 and a seal member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

The sealing member 1560 is attached to a position display section 561 provided at the lower left side of the upper case piece 220 in the left-right direction. is pasted on.
The sealing members 1560 and 1561 are both made of a light-transmitting material, and in this embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Seal members 1560 and 1561 are each placed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). Note that, in FIG. 5, illustrations of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 located in front of the seal members 1560 and 1561 are omitted.

The seal member 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, a seal member main body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560 is provided with a watermark for preventing forgery. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener display seal) is a processed seal in which a watermark is applied to the seal member main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types of watermarks can be applied, such as those using holograms and those that look different depending on the physical shape. .
However, the sealing member main body 1560A is transparent even though it has been subjected to a predetermined process (watermarking), and at least has high light transmittance to ensure a certain level of visibility.

The sealing member 1560 has a blank entry area 1570 (entry field), a code section 1572, and an information display section 1573 in a black frame with a heading such as "Main Board Management Number" on the sealing member main body 1560A. We are prepared.
The entry area 1570, the code area 1572, the information display area 1573, and the character displays associated with these areas, which will be described later, are non-transparent with low translucency because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is not exposed. Department.
The sealing member 1560 includes a plurality of non-transparent parts, and it is difficult to visually recognize the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 through these non-transparent parts.
The code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 as non-transparent portions are provided at a position on the seal member body 1560A that does not overlap with the main control portion 110m and the information display 113.

On the other hand, the transparent material of the seal member main body 1560A is exposed and the transparent material of the seal member main body 1560A is exposed, and the writing area 1570, the code section 1572, the information display section 1573, and the areas other than the character display attached to these areas, which will be described later, are translucent. The transparent portion 1574 has a high
The light transmitting portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion that allows the electronic component 595 on the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 to be seen and confirmed through the transparent material.

In the main board case 200, the main control board 110 is visible through the seal member 1560 and the main board case 200. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control board 110. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control board 110 through the seal member 1560 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the seal member 1560 is attached to a position where the seal member 1562 attached to the main control part 110m on the main control board 110 is visible from all angles. has been done.
Furthermore, regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent portion or a non-transparent portion, the entire sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, overlaps the main control portion 110m from all angles. It is set so that it is in a position where
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, main control section 110m is always visible through main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Regardless of the presence or absence of a transparent part or a non-transparent part, the seal member 1560 is located at a position where the entire seal member 1560, including the writing area 1570, code part 1572, and information display part 1573, does not overlap the information display 113 from any angle. It is set up so that
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, information display 113 can be visually recognized through main board case 200.

Although it cannot be said that the seal member 1560 and the information display device 113 are located in the vicinity in FIG. 8, the seal member 1560 does not overlap the main control unit 110m and the information display device 113, If the following conditions are satisfied: the seal member 1560 and the information display 113 are located at a sufficient distance from the connectors 771 to 776, and the seal member 1561 does not overlap the information display 113, the seal member 1560 and the information display 113 are located close to each other. It's okay.

The display contents of the seal member 1560 will be explained in detail below.
The entry area 1570 is an area for entering the person who opened the main board case 200 and the date of opening.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be done with a pen or the like.
For example, six entry areas 1570 are provided, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, in which three sets of "opener" and "opening date" can be entered.
The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base.

Above the entry area 1570, headings such as "Opened by" and "Date opened" are printed in black, and on the left side of each entry area, a circled number indicating the number of the entry area is printed.
That is, above the entry area 1570 in the upper left corner, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the entry area 1570 in the upper right corner, "date opened" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the upper left entry area 1570. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the entry area 1570 at the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the lower left entry area 1570.

For example, when the inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the inspector's name in the entry area 1570 on the left, and writes the date of opening the main board case 200 in the entry area 1570 on the right. . Note that the inspector may write in the entry area 1570 the date and time when it was confirmed whether or not the main control board 110 was tampered with.

The cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of the seal member 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code section 1572 is a section from which information is read by another device, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. There is. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is linked to, for example, information stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as "other device") and indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110.
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera installed in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access other devices via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the mobile information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1 was delivered), and whether the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of. Contains information such as. This allows the inspector to easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been discarded. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 110 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include the same information as the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string "EF001" is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area on the information display section 1573. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 110. Using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether or not the gaming machine 1 has been disposed of, based on information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. Further, the rectangular region of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The transparent portion 1574 (peeping portion) included in the sealing member 1560 will be described.
The transparent portion 1574 includes a writing area 1570, a code portion 1572, an information display portion 1573, a notation of “main board management number”, a frame, an opening person, an opening date notation, and circles 1 to 15 in the sealing member main body 1560A. This is an area other than the notation 3.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is, for example, a region extending in the left-right direction and existing between three rows of writing regions 1570 in the vertical direction.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also a region extending in the left-right direction and existing between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged left and right, and the upper two writing areas 1570.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also a region extending in the vertical direction between the two rows of writing regions 1570 in the left-right direction.
The inspector can check the electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through the light-transmitting portion 1574. Therefore, compared to the case where the transparent portion 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not tampering has been performed on the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The seal member 1561 will be explained.
The seal member 1561 is attached to the main control board 110 at a position where it can be viewed from any angle.
The seal member 1561 is provided at a position that does not overlap the main control section 110m from any angle.
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, main control section 110m is always visible through main board case 200.
The seal member 1561 is provided so as not to overlap the information display 113 from any angle.
Therefore, when main board case 200 is viewed from the front, information display 113 can be visually recognized through main board case 200.

Furthermore, the seal member 1561 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
For example, at least one of the model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage, and total capacity is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as a printing part 1563. Further, specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" including the model number, the manufacturer name "AA Company", the rated voltage and the total capacity (AC24V±5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the area where the model name is displayed, a base is formed on the transparent material in a conspicuous color such as red or yellow, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the base.

Further, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control section 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of a model name and a manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal member 1562 as predetermined information. Further, specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) indicating information specified by the identification display 1596 may be displayed on the seal member 1562.
Further, the seal member 1561 and the seal member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595 and 1596. In this embodiment, the species name "CR Aiu", the model type "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is only necessary that some of them are the same.
Note that although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the main board case 200 and the main control unit 110m, they may be attached to other members. For example, it may be displayed on the main control board 110 including the same identification display as the identification displays 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the sealing members 1560, 1561 are arranged to straddle at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), so for example, the sealing members 1560, 1561 and the electronic component 595 are By checking the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the main control board 110 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, since a region 1575 is provided in the sealing member 1560, the inspector can write the name of the inspector and the date when the main board case 200 was opened in the region 1575 (more specifically, in the entry region 1570). can be filled in. The inspector can also write in area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not fraud was committed on the main control board 110. Further, since the light-transmitting portion 1574 (peeking portion) is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the examiner to confirm the characters written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with a light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion), the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion). Therefore, compared to the case where the transparent part 1574 (peeping part) is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not tampering has been carried out with respect to the electronic component 595. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, the cord section 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control section 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control unit 110m and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the code section 1572 is linked with information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the main control board 110 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. Therefore, by checking the seal member 1562, the inspector can easily confirm that the main control unit 110m is being replaced illegally. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.
Further, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer's name is printed on the seal member 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name and the manufacturer's name. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name and manufacturer name and easily determine whether fraud is being committed. Therefore, players can play games with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the main control unit 110m to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, especially the upper case piece 220, does not have ventilation holes.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on a lower case piece 210 and an upper case piece 220.
A date mark is a mark for lot management that is added to a case, which is a plastic molded product, during manufacturing (molding).
A feature of this embodiment is that no component is provided near the main control unit 110m at a height that would make the seal member 1562 invisible.

As explained above, the main control board 110 is equipped with the main control unit 110m that controls the game, the information display 113 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components 595 different from these. There is. A transparent sealing member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110. Thereby, other electronic components 595 can be visually recognized through the transparent sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200. Further, the main control unit 110m and the information display 113 can be directly viewed through the main board case 200.

By watermarking the transparent portion of the sealing member 1560 that has a transparent portion and a plurality of non-transparent portions that need to be attached to the main board case 200, duplication of the sealing member 1560 can be prevented. In addition, by pasting the sealing member 1560 in a position that does not overlap the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the main control unit, which is an important board component, is not affected by watermarking or multiple non-transparent parts. 110m, the visibility of the information display 113 that needs to be read accurately can be ensured.

Regarding the electronic components 595 whose importance is lower than the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the status can be confirmed through watermarking from the gaps between the multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts 1574 (peeping parts). I can do it. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, visibility of the board components can be ensured by the transparent parts. Further, predetermined information, such as necessary information such as identifying the main control unit 110m, can be displayed in the non-transparent part. Different information can be displayed or written on each of the non-transparent parts.

Note that the information display 113 may be arranged at the lower end of the main control board 110 instead of at the upper end. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 be arranged on the opposite (opposite) upper end side to the information display 113.
The information display 113 may be arranged on the left end side or the right end side of the main control board 110. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 be arranged at the opposite (opposite) end to the information display 113.
Furthermore, as described above, the information display 113 may be arranged inside the main control board 110 instead of at the end thereof. Even in that case, it must be placed in a position that does not overlap with the cables, harnesses, seal members 1560, etc. extending from the connectors 771 to 776.

In the present embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being disposed on the main control board 110, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and it may be disposed on the payout control board 120. Further, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being disposed on the main control board 110, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The setting key switch 112a can be placed at a separate position from the main control board 110 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 110.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained using FIG. 9. FIG. 9 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 includes a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing. It is equipped with an input port for main control, an output port, etc. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the production control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is It is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the production control board 130.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and an out ball detection switch 52a. , a magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 includes a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a main information display device 59, a game information output terminal board 90, a payout control board 120, a performance control board 130, etc. is connected. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game notifications to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the gaming information output terminal board through the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of the payout command from the main control board 110, and also controls the firing of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, etc. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and operates the payout device 100. control, and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the production control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a saucer full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, etc. A dispensing motor 100b provided in the dispensing device 100 is connected to an output port of the dispensing control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and controls the payout ball detection switch 100a to pay out a predetermined number of game balls. When the payout of game balls is detected, the control for paying out game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, etc. (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to an input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feeding solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, etc. are connected to an output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is fired so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the solenoid 28b.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. . Note that the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the firing of the game ball in one minute is approximately 99.9 times per minute. The number is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main display control unit 140 that controls the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the panel drive device 75, and the panel lighting. It includes a lamp control section 150 that controls the device 76 and the like, and an input port, an output port, etc. for effect control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. In response to input signals from the display button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) are controlled to execute various effects (data and commands are transmitted). Output).

A performance button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, a button position detection sensor (not shown), etc. are connected to the input port of the performance control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives a command from the production control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image. or controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that collectively controls image display and audio output based on reception of production control commands from the production control unit 130m, and a control unit 141 that controls display control commands (display list) from the general control unit 141. A video control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71 based on reception, a CGROM 146 that stores image data, etc., and a voice control unit that receives voice control commands from the general control unit 141. It includes an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on the audio data, and an audio ROM 149 that stores audio data and the like.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 141b that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, an image control unit 145 (VDP), and an audio control unit 148 (audio It has an input/output port to which LSI is connected.

The overall CPU 141a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out an overall control program stored in the overall ROM 141b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while utilizing the overall RAM 141c as a work area. Thereby, a control process for generating a display control command (display list) for instructing the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and transmitting it to the display control unit 140, and an audio output device It performs control processing and the like for generating an audio control command instructing the effect sound to be output from the audio controller 9 and transmitting it to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) is a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , and a frame buffer area corresponding to the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the “frame buffer for drawing” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on the instruction (display list) from the general control unit 141. The drawing data is read from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, and a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated based on the read drawing data, and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second It is output to an image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display Generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Output to. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 150a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to performance instruction commands and the like, control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

The frame lighting device 10, button drive device 17b, panel lighting device 76, and sub information display device 80 are connected to the input/output port of the lamp control section, and the information is transmitted from the production control section 130m (sub CPU 130a). Based on the various production data (including commands), the lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80 is performed, and the button driving device 17b and, It also performs drive control of drive sources such as motors and solenoids of the panel drive device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine 1, and supplies the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, production control (substrate 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c will be retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state will be returned to the state before the power outage (power outage). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to jackpot determination of special symbols include a "low probability state" and "high probability state," and the states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 include a "non-time saving state" and ""time saving state".

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) Normal gaming state that is a “low probability state” and a “non-time-saving state” (low-probability non-time-saving gaming state)
(2) A time-saving gaming state that is a “low probability state” and a “time-saving state” (low-probability time-saving gaming state)
(3) A variable probability gaming state that is a "high probability state" and a "time saving state" (high probability time saving gaming state)

Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state." In addition, in this embodiment, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" and the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, so they may be referred to as "specific gaming states."

In this embodiment, the "low probability state" means, for example, when the set value (jackpot probability in jackpot determination), which is the stage of advantageousness of the game, is "1", the first starting port 45 or the 2 Refers to a game state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set as low as about 1/300 in jackpot determination of a special symbol performed on the condition that a game ball enters a starting hole 47. On the other hand, "high probability state" means that the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than in a low probability state, and when the setting value is "1", the probability of winning a jackpot is set as high as approximately 1/60. Indicates the game state.

Specifically, there are four setting values, ``1'' to ``4.'' When the setting value is ``1,'' the probability of winning the jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/300, which is a high probability. The probability of winning the jackpot in the state is approximately 1/60, and if the setting value is "2", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately If the setting value is "3", the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/58, and the setting value is "3". 4, the probability of winning the jackpot in the low probability state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning the jackpot in the high probability state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, in the "high probability state", it is easier to win the jackpot than in the "low probability state". Further, the low probability state changes to the high probability state after the jackpot game described later is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability state is referred to as a "probable jackpot." In addition, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low probability state is called a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time saving state" refers to the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. This is a game state that is set longer than the "time saving state" and in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is likely to be set short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and a variable display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 62, but after the variable display of the normal pattern starts, For example, the display stops after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time saving state" means that in a normal symbol winning lottery that is performed on the condition that a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the regular symbols corresponding to the lottery result is 0. .5 seconds, which is shorter than the "non-time-saving state", and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is set, for example, to 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time-saving state". Tells the game status. Furthermore, in the "non-time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time saving state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be low, for example 127/128. is set high. Therefore, in the "time saving state", when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time saving state". As a result, in the "time saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state where it is difficult to consume game balls.

The "time-saving game state" includes a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of the jackpot game (via the jackpot game), which will be described later, and the establishment of a predetermined condition (based on execution of RWM clear, end of the jackpot game). A special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) when the number of loss fluctuation displays of special symbols executed from 0 clear of the number of fluctuations reaches a specified number (900 times in this embodiment) is set.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time saving state" is set so that the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are more advantageous than the "non-time saving state". However, the "time saving state" is set so that only one of the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. Good too. Further, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to, for example, 0/128.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is five times the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state (common regardless of the setting value). The probability is not limited to 5 times, but may be set to any value such as 3 times or 8 times as long as it is 10 times or less.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the jackpot determination, a small win that is less advantageous to the winner than a jackpot is not won, but for example, a small win is set to be won with a probability of about 1/100. Good too. In this case, it is preferable that the small win probability be the same regardless of whether the set value is "1" to "4".

Also, the larger the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability), but conversely, the smaller the setting value is, the more advantageous it becomes to the player (higher jackpot probability). You can also do this.

In addition, the probability of being judged as a jackpot in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be set to be the same for all setting values (1 to 4), or for example, for two or three setting values (1 and 4), 2, 1 to 3, etc.), the probability of determining a jackpot in the low probability state and/or the high probability state may be the same. Further, although the setting values in this embodiment are in four stages from 1 to 4, they are not limited to four stages, and may be more or less than four stages (for example, even if it is one stage) good).

In addition, there are a normal time-saving game state and a special time-saving game state as time-saving game states, but as a result of the jackpot determination process, a special loss that is different from a normal loss is won, and as a result of the fluctuating display of special symbols, a special loss special In response to symbols being stopped and displayed, a specific time-saving game state may be generated for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the variable display of special symbols is executed 100 times, etc.). Various controls in the specific time-saving gaming state may be conducted in accordance with the special time-saving gaming state.

Next, details of various tables stored in the main ROM 110b will be explained with reference to FIGS. 10 to 15.

(Jackpot judgment table)
FIG. 10(a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the first starting port 45. , FIG. 10(b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special symbol for determining (jackpot determination) the special symbol determination information acquired based on the winning (ball entry) of the game ball into the second starting port 47. be.

As shown in FIGS. 10(a) and (b), the jackpot judgment table corresponds to the current setting value, the current probability state, the random value for jackpot judgment, and the jackpot judgment result (jackpot, loss). As a reference, the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot" is listed in the far right column.

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10(b), and determines the current setting value, probability state, and jackpot. Based on the random number value for determination, it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss".

For example, according to the first special symbol jackpot determination table shown in FIG. The random number value for determination is determined to be a "jackpot". Then, random numbers for jackpot determination other than those determined to be jackpots are determined to be "losses".

Note that the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is stored in the first special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c, The special figure determination information acquired based on the winning is stored in the second special figure determination information retention storage area of the main RAM 110c. Then, when making a jackpot determination, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information retention storage area or the second special symbol determination information retention storage area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c. , jackpot determination will be performed using the shifted special figure determination information.

In addition, the first special figure judgment information reservation storage area is divided into a first storage part to a fourth storage part, and the reservation corresponding to the special figure judgment information stored in these first storage part to fourth storage part is divided into the first to fourth storage parts. The icons are displayed on the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first pending icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special figure determination information reservation storage area is divided into first to fourth storage sections, and the reservation icons corresponding to the special figure determination information stored in these first to fourth storage sections are They are displayed on the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol judgment table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special symbol determination table for jackpot for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 11(b) is a special symbol determination table for determining the type of special symbol when a jackpot is determined. This is a special symbol determination table for losing to determine the type.

As shown in FIGS. 11(a) and 11(b), the special symbol determination table includes the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, the random value for special symbol determination, the determination result of the special symbol, and the information corresponding to the determination result. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result are associated.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are loss special symbols in which a jackpot game is not executed. Special symbols "01" and "04" are special jackpot symbols that execute the first jackpot game, and special symbols "02" and "05" are jackpot symbols that execute the second jackpot game. , the special symbol "03" is a jackpot symbol for executing the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to six times. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed. Further, after the first jackpot game ends, the normal time-saving game state (low probability non-time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 50 or 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", a round game in which the grand prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. Furthermore, after the second jackpot game ends, the variable probability game state (highly accurate time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", a round game in which the second jackpot 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then the jackpot is closed for two seconds is executed up to four times. Furthermore, after the third jackpot game ends, the variable probability game state (highly accurate time-saving game state) is set until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, judging from the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

Although one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, a plurality of losing special symbols are associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Good too.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of FIGS. 11(a) to 11(b), and determines the type of special symbol, based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed and the random value for special symbol determination. The stop special symbol data and the special symbol designation command are determined, and the special symbol designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the type of jackpot special symbol and the type of loss special symbol are the same without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the player can play the game with peace of mind without having complicated gameplay.

A second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratio of various jackpot special symbols and the selection ratio of various losing symbols are constant without changing depending on the set value. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for normal use)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the normal gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 12(a) is a normal special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 that is referred to when performing a basic special symbol variation display in the normal gaming state, and FIG. 12(b) is the normal special symbol fluctuation pattern determination that is referred to when executing the fluctuation display corresponding to the remaining number of reserved second special symbols at the end of the special time saving state when transitioning from the special time saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. This is table 2.

(Special figure variation pattern judgment table for definite variation/normal time saving)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for probability variable/normal time saving that is referred to when determining a special symbol variation pattern in the variable probability gaming state or the normal time saving gaming state.

Specifically, FIG. 13(a) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 1 for probability variation/normal time saving that is referred to when performing a basic special symbol variation display in the probability variation gaming state or the normal time saving gaming state. FIG. 13(b) is the normal time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 that is referred to when executing the final special symbol variation display in the normal time-saving gaming state.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment table for special time saving)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table for special time saving that is referred to when determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern in the special time saving game state.

Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table 1 for special time saving that is referred to when performing a special symbol fluctuation display when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c. 14(b) is a special symbol variation pattern determination table 2 for special time saving that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and a variable display of the special symbol that is the beginning of the special time saving gaming state is executed; FIG. 14(c) shows a special time-saving special symbol variation pattern determination table 3 that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and a variable display of special symbols before the final one of the special time-saving gaming state is executed. FIG. 14(d) shows the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination for special time saving that is referred to when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and the special symbol fluctuation display that is the final round of the special time saving gaming state is executed. This is table 4.

As shown in Figures 12 to 14, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening) that performs variable display, the jackpot determination result, and the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data). , the random number for reach determination, the first special figure reservation number (U1) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), the random value for special figure fluctuation pattern determination, the special figure fluctuation pattern as a determination result, and the special The variation time of the symbol is associated with a special symbol variation pattern designation command indicating the special symbol variation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol variation pattern" can be said to be one that can specify the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the type of special symbol, and the variation time of the special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, and determines the jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), random number for reach determination, and first special symbol reservation number (U1 ) or the second special figure reservation number (U2), the special figure variation pattern is determined based on the random value for special figure variation pattern determination, and the production control board 130 issues a special figure variation pattern designation command according to the special figure variation pattern. It is supposed to be sent to.

In addition, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, in accordance with the fluctuation pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special symbol determination result, etc.), as will be described later. Therefore, in the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, the production contents that can be executed with the variable production are described for reference.

As for the production contents shown in the variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, "normal variation", "shortened variation", and "ultra shortened variation" mean that the three production symbols 70a vary at high speed and reach It means to stop without stopping.

In addition, "reach" means that the player expects a jackpot game to be executed in which a part of the combination of presentation symbols 70a that informs a jackpot temporarily stops and other presentation symbols 70a change. means the manner in which it changes. For example, when a combination of three performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot, the same performance symbols 70a in the left and right regions temporarily stop at "7". , refers to a mode in which the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). refers to the manner in which the

In addition, "normal reach" means a reach effect in which the same effect pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a changes in the center area, and the expectation level of jackpot is the lowest. This is a reach production.

Moreover, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher expectation of a jackpot than normal reach effects, and are performed after the normal reach effect and the extended effect. For example, the two performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to the corners of the first image display device 70, and almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70 is used to perform a special reach performance. . Note that in the "Special SP Reach", a more special effect than in the "SP Reach" is executed.

Furthermore, "SPSP reach" and "SPSP '7' reach" are special reach performances that have higher expectations for a jackpot than super reach performances, and are executed after the normal reach performance or the super reach performance. For example, a normal reach performance is performed to a development performance, and then the three performance symbols 70a are reduced in size and moved to a corner of the first image display device 70, using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to perform a special reach effect than "SP reach". In addition, in "SPSP reach", a reach effect is performed with the effect pattern 70a other than "7", and in "SPSP "7" reach", a reach effect is performed with a pattern of "7".

In addition, the "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after the normal reach effect. For example, a development effect is executed from a normal reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a are all the same and change at a low speed, and "SPSP reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. It is designed to have a special reach effect (reach effect that guarantees a jackpot) than "SPSP '7' Reach".

In addition, "resurrection fluctuation (this)" is a performance in which a resurrection effect is performed that suggests that the player will return to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player due to a jackpot, and it changes from the special time-saving gaming state to the normal gaming state. This is executed without going through the reach after an end notification performance is performed that suggests the end of a specific game state that is advantageous to the player after the transition.

"Chance production variation (current)" is a variation production in which a chance production suggesting that it is a chance to execute a jackpot game is executed, and is executed without going through a reach. For example, after a character image "Chance Approaching" is displayed on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which three effect symbols 70a are displayed in a lined state.

"Result fluctuation" refers to the result of gaming during a series of advantageous periods in which the time-saving gaming state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal gaming state called the so-called first win, in the final fluctuation display of the normal time-saving gaming state. The result is displayed. Note that the results may be displayed not from the first win, but from a series of advantageous periods during which conditions advantageous to the player continue.

"Result revival variation (current)" is a production in which a revival effect is performed that suggests that the player will return to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player due to a jackpot, and is a variation in the final game of the normal time-saving gaming state. Executed without going through reach after the result is displayed on the display.

"(Sudden)～Fluctuation" means that when it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, a short entry effect is performed that suggests entering the special time-saving gaming state in a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), and the special time-saving gaming state is If it is not the first change in the time-saving game state, it indicates that the short entry performance is not performed.

"Long entry performance variation" means that in the first variation of the special time-saving game state, a long entry performance that suggests entering the special time-saving game state in a relatively long time (for example, 6 seconds) is performed. This is a variation pattern exclusively for the first variation of the special time-saving gaming state when there is a jackpot history.

"Immediate hit variation (win)" is a performance in which the player is notified of an advantageous result (jackpot) without going through the reach, and in the end, the three performance symbols 70a are aligned. It is designed to perform effects that are displayed depending on the state.

The "end suggestion variation" is a performance in which an end notification performance suggesting the end of the special time-saving game state is performed, and is executed in the final variation display of the special time-saving game state with a jackpot history.

"End Suggestion Revival Fluctuation (This)" is a performance in which a resurrection effect is performed that suggests a jackpot and a return to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player. It is executed without going through the reach after the end notification effect is started in the variable display.

In addition, when the first special symbol fluctuates and is displayed in the normal gaming state, the "immediate hit fluctuation" is not executed, but even when the first special symbol fluctuates and is displayed, the "immediate hit fluctuation" is not executed. "Win variation" may be executed.

The first feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that during the final variation display of the normal time-saving gaming state (series of advantageous periods), a variation effect in which a result display is performed is executed. There are several points that can be mentioned. By doing so, the player can check the results of the games during a series of advantageous periods, and it becomes possible to improve the interest in the games.

The second feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that during the fluctuation display, which is the final round of the special time-saving game state, the end notification effect is performed without displaying the result. Can be mentioned. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied with the display of the results of games during a series of advantageous periods even though no jackpot games have been executed, and to increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

A third feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that different special symbol fluctuation pattern determination tables are used for the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state. By doing this, even if they are in the same time-saving game state, the performance contents can be made different between the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the fluctuation display during the special time-saving gaming state, a special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table that differs depending on the presence or absence of jackpot history (RWM clear) is used. The following points can be mentioned. By doing so, the performance content during the variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the first fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that differs depending on whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear) is used. The following points can be mentioned. By doing so, the performance content during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the first fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, the number of special symbol fluctuation patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear) is higher than the number of special symbol fluctuation patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). , The number of special pattern fluctuation patterns that are determined is larger when there is no jackpot history. By doing so, the performance content during the first variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that if the first fluctuation in a special time-saving gaming state with a jackpot history (RWM clear) is a loss, a dedicated special symbol is used for the first time. One point is that the figure fluctuation pattern is determined. By doing so, a special performance (long entry performance) can be performed in the first fluctuation during the special time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the final fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table that differs depending on whether there is a jackpot history (RWM clear) is used. The following points can be mentioned. By doing so, the performance content during the last variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that in the final fluctuation during the special time-saving gaming state, the number of special pattern fluctuation patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear) is , The number of special pattern fluctuation patterns that are determined is larger when there is no jackpot history. By doing so, the performance content during the last variable display in the special time-saving game state can be varied depending on the presence or absence of a jackpot history, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that if the final fluctuation during a special time-saving gaming state with a jackpot history (RWM clear) results in a loss, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. One point is that the special figure fluctuation pattern is determined. By doing so, a special performance (end suggestion performance) can be performed at the final change during the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that during the special time-saving gaming state, when the loss variation display (first variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed, When the loss variation display (second variation performance) of the second special symbol is executed, there are more types of special symbol variation patterns (variation production pattern) to be determined (executed). By doing so, the player can be induced to display the second special symbol in a variable manner that is advantageous to the player in the special time saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is that the average fluctuation time of the special symbols (mainly the second special symbol) during the time-saving gaming state is different from that of the normal symbol during the time-saving gaming state. The average fluctuation time of By doing this, even in the time-saving gaming state where the average fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter than in the normal gaming state, the second pending memory is likely to accumulate, and by quickly executing the fluctuation display of the special symbols. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Pre-judgment table)
FIG. 15(a) is an example of a preliminary determination table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (pre-reading) the special figure determination information acquired based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 during the non-time-saving state. FIG. 15(b) is a diagram illustrating a time-saving state preliminary judgment for pre-determining (pre-reading) the special figure judgment information acquired based on the winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47 during the time-saving state. It is a figure which shows an example of a determination table.

As shown in FIG. 15, the preliminary determination table includes the type of special symbol (starting opening), the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. , a special figure scheduled variation pattern as a determination result and a prefetch designation command indicating the special figure scheduled variation pattern are associated.

Therefore, the "special pattern scheduled variation pattern" can be said to be able to specify the type of special symbol, the result of jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern scheduled to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in FIG. 15, and determines the planned special pattern fluctuation based on the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for special symbol determination, the random number for reach determination, and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The pattern is determined and a prefetch designation command corresponding to the special figure scheduled fluctuation pattern is sent to the production control board 130.

(Game status setting table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a gaming state setting table for setting the gaming state after the end of the jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 16, the gaming state setting table includes the stop special symbol data of the jackpot special symbol, the gaming state information at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state flag to be set (time saving flag indicating that it is a time saving state, (high probability flag indicating that it is a high probability state), the first time saving number (J1) which is the number of variable displays of the first special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state, and the second special symbol that ends the time saving gaming state The second time saving number (J2), which is the number of variable displays, corresponds to the third time saving number (J3), which is the total number of variable displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol that end the time saving gaming state. It is attached.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that the second time saving number (J2) set when the game is executed in the normal gaming state is higher than the second time saving number (J2) set when the game is performed in the normal gaming state. One point is that there is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the number of times shortened by 2 hours (J2) is greater. By doing this, the second time saving number (J2) set depending on the type of jackpot game can be varied, and it is possible to improve the gameplay and the interest of the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that three types of time saving times are set, so that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are changed during the time saving state. No matter which one is executed, the time saving state ends after an appropriate number of times, so it is possible to provide a fair time saving state among the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 17. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed by inputting a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a disables all interrupts in step S1, performs initial settings of the CPU such as setting of built-in registers in step S2, and performs startup wait processing for other boards in step S3. Specifically, in order to avoid missing commands from the main control board 110, the CPU waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130 to start up.

The main CPU 110a allows access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c in step S4, and transmits a firing permission designation command to the payout control board 120 in step S5. As a result, the payout control unit 121 performs processing to permit the shooting device 26 to shoot the game balls.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored is saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that the power has been restored, and the process moves to step S7; if the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that the power is turned on for the first time, and the process moves to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

The main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed in step S8. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are in the ON state. If there is a setting change operation, the process moves to step S9 as a transition to setting change mode, and if there is no setting change operation, the process moves to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current setting values saved in and sends a setting change designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the setting value is changed (updated) in the range of "1" to "4", the updated setting value is displayed on the 7-segment LED, and the setting key switch 112a is When there is a setting confirmation operation that changes the setting from the ON state to the OFF state, the changed (updated) setting value is saved in the setting value area to confirm the setting value, and the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended. At the same time, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing for terminating the setting change mode is performed.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting change designation command, processing for executing setting change notification for notifying that the setting value is being changed will be performed. Specifically, a settings change screen is displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71 to indicate that the settings are being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are displayed in a predetermined manner while the settings are being changed. All the lights are turned on with the same emission color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”) indicating that settings are being changed.

The main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal in step S10. Specifically, it is determined whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), the process moves to step S11, and if the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), Assuming that it is not possible to normally return to the control state before power-off, the process moves to step S12.

Note that if the backup flag has not been saved, that is, if the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum is determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the set value in the set value area is within an appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the set value in the set value area is within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S13, and if it is determined that the set value in the set value area is not within the appropriate range, the process moves to step S12. Move.

The main CPU 110a performs unrecoverable error processing in step S12. Specifically, after displaying error information "E" indicating an unrecoverable error on the information display 113 and transmitting an irreversible error designation command indicating that an unrecoverable error has occurred to the production control board 130. , sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, and after clearing the output port, outputs a non-recoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of a non-recoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90. Then, it waits until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for notifying an unrecoverable error.

The "unrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (no transition to game control occurs), and is not canceled unless a setting change process is executed. Therefore, if an unrecoverable error occurs, even if you turn off the power switch provided on the power supply board 160 and then turn on the power switch without changing settings, it will not be canceled and the It is now necessary to turn on the power switch in conjunction with the change operation. Note that during an unrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

Note that although the "unrecoverable error" is not cleared unless the setting change process is executed, it may also be cleared when RWM clear is executed without the setting change process.

"Unrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an unrecoverable error has occurred. "), the frame lighting device 10 and panel lighting device 76 are lit in a predetermined color (for example, red) until the power is turned off, or an unrecoverable error occurs from the audio output device 9. An unrecoverable error sound ("Unrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) indicating that the error has occurred is output until the power is turned off.
Note that the audio output device 9, the frame illumination device 10, the image display devices 70 and 71, and the board illumination device 76 may be collectively referred to as a "production device."

The main CPU 110a determines whether an RWM clear operation has been performed in step S13. Specifically, it is determined whether the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If there is an RWM clear operation, it is assumed that RWM clear is to be executed and the process moves to step S14, and if there is no RWM clear operation, the process moves to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs RWM clear processing in step S14. Specifically, processing is performed to initialize the gaming control state (initialize the gaming RWM area other than the setting value area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on designation command to the payout control board 120 and the power-on designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been initialized and the current gaming state (here, the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state as the normal gaming state). It is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the process moves to step S21. As a result, the production control board 130 performs processing for executing power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has been initialized, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect pattern "135" ), the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 are all lit up in a predetermined color (for example, red) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), and the RWM area is displayed from the audio output device 9. This means outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the device has been initialized.
Note that in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it is determined whether the setting key switch 112a is in the ON state. If there is a setting confirmation operation, the process moves to step S17 as a transition to the setting confirmation mode, and if there is no setting confirmation operation, the control state of the game is returned to the state before the power was cut off. The process moves to step S18.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, a status confirmation display indicating that the settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed is displayed on the status confirmation display 68, and a setting value area of the gaming RWM area is displayed on one 7-segment LED of the information display 113. Displays the current set values saved in and sends a setting confirmation designation command to the production control board 130.

Furthermore, when there is a confirmation end operation that changes the setting key switch 112a from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, and the state confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, Performs processing to end setting confirmation mode.

In addition, in the production control board 130 which received the setting confirmation designation command, processing for executing setting confirmation notification for notifying that setting confirmation is being performed will be performed. Specifically, the image display devices 70 and 71 display a setting confirmation screen indicating that the settings are being confirmed, and the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 emit a predetermined light while the settings are being confirmed. Turn on all lights in a color (for example, white). Note that the audio output device 9 may output a setting confirmation notification sound (“Setting values are being confirmed”) indicating that the settings are being confirmed.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the gaming RWM area, and sets the gaming RWM area when the power is restored. As a result, the progress state (control state) of the game is restored (restored) to the state before the power was turned off, so it is possible to resume the game from the state before the power was turned off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a transmits to the production control board 130 a power recovery designation command indicating that the gaming control state has been restored and the gaming state before the power outage occurred. As a result, the production control board 130 performs a process for terminating setting confirmation notification, etc., which will be described later, and executing power recovery notification.

"Power restoration notification" is a notification for recognizing that the control state of the game has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and the initial screen (background image and initial effect The frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are fully illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period (e.g. 60 seconds), the audio output device 9 A power restoration notification sound ("power has been restored" + buzzer sound) indicating that the power has been restored (from a power outage) is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds).
Note that in the power restoration notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a executes other commands (a command for specifying the number of reserved special symbols (U1) and a second reserved number of special symbols (U2), and the number of reserved regular symbols (G)). A command for specifying the number of reserved general figures shown) is transmitted to the production control board 130. As a result, the performance control board 130 can grasp the number of reserved special symbols and the number of reserved regular symbols, and also perform processing for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon on the first image display device 70. It will be done.

The main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the production control board 130 in step S21. This makes it possible for the effect control board 130 to grasp the current set value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the production control board 130 before the power-on designation command and the power recovery designation command are transmitted. Furthermore, the setting value designation command may be transmitted each time a variable display of special symbols starts, or each time a jackpot game starts.

The main CPU 110a activates a CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds) in step S22, and permits all interrupts in step S23.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol determination to determine the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S25, An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it is determined whether a power outage detection signal is input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power outage detection signal is not input, the process moves to step S24, and the power outage detection is performed. If a signal is input, the process moves to step S27.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step S27, clears the output port in step S28, and clears the gaming RWM area (set value area) of the main RAM 110c in step S29. In step S30, a process is performed to save a backup flag in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S31, Processing is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the process waits until the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, since multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, it is not possible to change settings easily, which makes it possible to suppress fraudulent acts and improve the security of gaming machines. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, the number of conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation is greater than the conditions (operations) set for the RWM clear operation and setting confirmation operation, making it possible to avoid the most fraudulent setting changes. It is possible to increase the security of events where acts are likely to be committed, and it is possible to effectively prevent fraudulent acts.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, unrecoverable error processing is executed and the progress of the game is stopped, causing the game machine to perform unexpected operations and causing inconvenience to the game parlor and players. This eliminates the need for overtime, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power-off may have occurred while changing the settings, irreversible error processing will be executed even if the checksum is normal. By stopping the progress of the game, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding with setting values that are not intended by the game parlor, thereby improving the reliability of the game machine. Become.

Also, while changing settings (setting change mode) or checking settings (setting confirmation mode), on the front (surface) of gaming machine 1, there are a status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70 and 71, and a frame lighting device. It is possible to recognize that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113 on the back side (back side). ing. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front) or the back (back) of the gaming machine 1.

Note that the condition for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. By doing so, the number of conditions increases, so fraudulent acts can be suppressed, and the security of the gaming machine can be further improved.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power is turned on) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is performed. is executed, but when it is determined that there is no backup flag, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. Then, the process may be moved to step S13.

Additionally, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and there is no setting change operation, and if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in subsequent step S10, unrecoverable error processing is executed. However, when the checksum is determined to be abnormal, the gaming program initializes the gaming RWM area (clears it to 0) and saves the initial value "1" in the setting value area. , the process may be moved to step S13.

In addition, the power-on designation command and the power-recovery designation command are sent including information indicating the current gaming state, but after transmitting the power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command, the current gaming state Alternatively, a gaming state designation command indicating the game state may be transmitted.

In addition, when the power is turned off or turned on, the gaming program calculates the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program calculates the checksum. may be calculated. In this case, it is preferable to save the calculated checksum in the information RWM area.

Also, when the power is turned off or turned on, the checksum of the gaming RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but even if the checksum of the entire RWM area is calculated. Alternatively, the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area may be calculated separately, and if either checksum is abnormal, the process may proceed to irreversible error processing.

Additionally, a settings change designation command is sent at the start of the settings change process, and a power-on designation command is sent after the settings change process ends, but instead of the settings change designation command, a settings change start designation command is sent. However, instead of the power-on designation command, a setting change end designation command may be sent. In this case, the settings change end designation command may be sent at the end of the settings change process, or may be sent after the settings change process ends.

Further, when a setting change is made, the RWM clearing process is performed after the setting change is made, but the RWM clearing process may be performed before the setting change is made.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 18. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, etc. It performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as updating processing of , normal symbol time counter updating processing, and updating processing of opening/closing time of the movable member 48 . Specifically, 1 is subtracted from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting port opening timer counter, and a starting port closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination, a random value for hit determination, a random value for normal symbol determination, and a regular symbol fluctuation pattern determination. Performs specific random number update processing to update random numbers. Specifically, each random value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial value random value is set as a new round initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination. Perform initial value random value update processing to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the out ball detection switch 52a, etc. It determines whether or not there is an input to each switch, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. The details will be described later using FIG. 19.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a operates a special figure special electric line for determining the number of reserved special figures (judgment of jackpot, etc.), controlling the display of special symbols, controlling opening/closing of the grand prize opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), controlling the gaming state, etc. Performs control processing. In addition, the details of the special figure special electric control process will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a executes a normal pattern and general electric power control process for determining the number of normal patterns stored (hit determination, etc.), controlling the display of normal symbols, controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), etc. conduct.

It should be noted that the type of winning normal symbol and the type of losing normal symbol determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol determination information performed in the ordinary symbol and electric power control process are the same without changing depending on the setting value. By doing so, the gameplay is not too complicated and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratio of various winning ordinary symbols and the selection ratio of various losing ordinary symbols, which are determined as a result of the determination of the ordinary symbol judgment information performed in the ordinary symbol general electricity control process, do not change depending on the setting value and remain constant. ing. By doing so, the degree of advantage of the player will not change drastically depending on the set value, and the player can play the game with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation command to the payout control board 120 for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, and sends a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 award balls counter, 15 award balls counter), and performs payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and issues a magnetic abnormality error specification command and a radio wave abnormality error specification command. Performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting commands to the production control board 130. In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality or the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, it performs control to perform magnetic abnormality error notification or radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (gaming information) from the gaming information output terminal board 90, starting opening opening/closing data outputting to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, and performs data creation processing to create data such as special symbol pending display data to be output to the second special symbol pending display 64 and normal symbol pending display data to be output to the normal symbol pending display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing to output signals such as the external information data, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data created in step S700, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , a display output process that outputs signals such as special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and a payout command transmission process that transmits a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Also, an output control process is performed to execute a production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130.

The main CPU 110a performs information program call processing in step S800. Specifically, after disabling interrupts, the flag register is saved in the gaming RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using a CALL instruction.

The main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program) in step S810. Specifically, the number of payouts during normal play, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the winning of game balls to various winning holes (general winning hole, big winning hole, starting hole) during normal gaming state, Processing is performed to count the number of normal outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, and the total number of outs, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a, regardless of the gaming state. .

In addition, the total number of outs, the number of payouts during normal play, and the number of outs during normal play are gaming information that is not affected (unrelated to the setting value) even if the setting value is changed, so these By counting, it becomes possible to calculate performance information (normal base value to be described later) that excludes the influence of the set value, and it becomes possible to use it for understanding the performance of the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs performance information calculation processing (information program) in step S830. Specifically, the normal base value ((Number of payouts during normal play ÷ Number of outs during normal play) x 100) in the current game section divided by the total number of outs is calculated, and the base storage area set in the information RWM area is calculated. Processing is performed to save the normal base value rounded to the first decimal place in the first area.

The game section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base storage area is divided into a first area where the normal base value in the current game section is stored, and a one-time storage area. A second area for storing the normal base value in the previous gaming section, a third area for storing the normal base value in the two previous gaming sections, and a normal base value in the three previous gaming sections. A fourth area for playing the game is provided, and the base values for four game sections including the current one are saved in each area.

The main CPU 110a performs performance display data setting processing (information program) in step S850. Specifically, the normal base value (performance information) for four game sections calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base storage area is displayed on the information display 113 while being switched every 5 seconds. Performs processing to set performance display data.

The main CPU 110a performs test data creation processing (information program) in step S870. Specifically, processing is performed to create test data (test information) to be output to test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

The main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program) in step S880. Specifically, display output processing is performed to output signals such as performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various indicators, and processing is performed to output signals such as test data created in step S870 above. .

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing upon returning to the gaming program. Specifically, processing is performed to restore the flag register from the gaming RWM area, enable interrupts, and return to the gaming program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

In this way, the timer interrupt is not executed in the setting change processing, RWM clear processing, and setting confirmation processing, so it is not possible to count the number of payouts and outs, calculate the performance information of the gaming machine, and perform the processing of the gaming machine. Since the performance information is not displayed, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

Although the performance information calculation process was performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Further, the game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 19. FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. In this general winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process moves to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, data indicating 5 prize balls is added to the prize ball counter (5 prize ball counter) for the general winning hole used for prize balls and updated. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updating it (D←D+1), the general winning hole detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this big winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process moves to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the big winning opening used for winning balls. Update and add "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that entered the winning slot and update (D←D+1) to determine whether the current jackpot game (special game) is in progress. Determine whether If you are currently playing a jackpot game, add "1" to the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 50 and update it (C←C+1). Detection switch input processing ends.

If the current gaming state is not a special gaming state, the number of illegal winning balls that have won (balls entered) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, big winning opening 50) outside the winning winning period. Add "1" to the counter (E) and update it (E←E+1), determine whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number (for example, 10), and If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, an illegal prize winning (unauthorized winning ball) in which a game ball wins a prize (balls entered) outside the winning period has occurred, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is designated. Set the command to the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an error specifying command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 issues a fraudulent winning error notification to notify that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening is detected. End switch input processing. As a result, a fraudulent winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to grasp (specify) that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or not. Note that details of the first starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. In this second starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second starting port 47 or not. Note that details of the second starting port detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the regular figure gate 44 or not. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control process ends.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of regular symbols held, which is the number of regular symbols stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved general drawings is not less than 4, the input control process is ended.

If the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, the number of reserved symbols is updated by adding "1", and the ordinary symbol judgment information (random value for hit determination, random value for determining ordinary symbols, fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols) is updated. Random value for determination) is acquired, and the vacant storage sections are searched in order from the first storage section in the normal symbol storage area, and the acquired ordinary symbol determination information is stored in the empty storage section and input. Control processing ends.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input (a game ball enters the first starting port 45). If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, the main CPU 110a updates the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls. A random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to update the first special symbol pending number (U1). A first special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U1) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the first special figure reservation number designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the first special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reservation storage area in step S230-7. Specifically, since the first special symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage part to the fourth storage part, the empty storage parts are searched in order from the first storage part, and the empty storage part is searched in order. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A first pending memory (first pending) consisting of random numbers, etc.) is stored.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current gaming state is in a non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state). If it is in a non-time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S230-9, and if it is not in a non-time-saving gaming state (in a fixed-variable gaming state or a time-saving gaming state), it is assumed that a left-handed hit error has occurred. The process moves to step S230-12.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the special time-saving gaming state is reached within a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, five times). If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process moves to step S230-10, and if it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, it is assumed that the pre-read determination of the special figure determination information is not executed and the current first starting opening detection switch input processing is performed. end.

The main CPU 110a performs a first prefetch determination process in step S230-10. In this first look-ahead determination process, a preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special symbol determination information (first pending memory) acquired this time is pre-determined prior to execution of the variable display of special symbols based on the determination information. Then, a planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the first prefetch designation command corresponding to the determined scheduled fluctuation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends the current first starting opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the first prefetch designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 starts changing the special symbol corresponding to the first prefetch designation command. It is possible to execute a prefetched preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over a plurality of variable displays. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the panel lighting device 76. This is done using

In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a sets a left-handed hit error designation command in the presentation transmission data storage area, and ends the current first starting opening detection switch input process. As a result, a left-handed hitting error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a left-handed hitting error notification to promote right-handed hitting.

(Input processing of the second starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The second starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the second starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input (a game ball enters the second starting port 47). If the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is input, the process moves to step S240-2, and if the detection signal from the second starting port detection switch 47a is not input, the current 2. End the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the one-prize ball counter used for the prize ball by adding data indicating one prize ball, and in step S240-3, the main CPU 110a updates the one-prize ball counter used for the prize ball with the special figure determination information ( A random value for jackpot determination, a random value for special symbol determination, a random value for reach determination, a random value for special pattern fluctuation pattern determination) is acquired.

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) stored in the second special symbol reservation storage area is less than four. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process moves to step S240-5, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, the current second start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) and updating it (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, the main CPU 110a performs processing to add "1" to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) and update it (U2←U2+1). A second special figure reservation number designation command corresponding to the figure reservation number (U2) is set in the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, the second special figure reservation number designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 can grasp the second special figure reservation number.

The main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the second special symbol retention storage area in step S240-7. Specifically, since the second special symbol holding storage area is divided into the first storage section to the fourth storage section, the empty storage sections are searched in order from the first storage section, and the empty storage section is searched sequentially from the first storage section to the fourth storage section. The special figure determination information obtained in the above is stored.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A second pending memory (second pending) consisting of random numbers, etc.) is stored.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current gaming state is a variable probability gaming state or a time saving gaming state. If the game is in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, the process moves to step S240-9, and if it is not in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state (if it is in the normal gaming state), it is determined that a right-handed hit error has occurred. As such, the process moves to step S240-12.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of fluctuations is within a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, five times) after the start or before the end of the time saving state. If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process moves to step S240-10, and if it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, it is assumed that the pre-read determination of the special figure determination information is not executed and the current second starting opening detection switch input processing is performed. end.

The main CPU 110a performs a second prefetch determination process in step S240-10. In this second look-ahead determination process, a preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the special symbol determination information acquired this time (second pending memory) is pre-determined prior to execution of the variable display of special symbols based on the determination information. Then, a planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a sets a second prefetch designation command corresponding to the determined scheduled variation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends the current second starting opening detection switch input process.

As a result, the second prefetch designation command is sent to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 starts the first or previous execution before the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the second prefetch designation command starts. It is possible to execute a prefetched preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over a plurality of variable displays. Note that the pre-read preview effect is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74, and the panel lighting device 76. This is done using

In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a sets a right-hand hit error designation command in the effect transmission data storage area, and ends the current second starting opening detection switch input process. As a result, a right-handed hitting error designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 issues a right-handed hitting error notification to promote left-handed hitting.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the special figure special electric line processing data loaded in step S302, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, The current special map special electric train control process ends.

Specifically, if the special figure special electric processing data = 0, the variable display of the special symbol is started based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special figure judgment information), the variable time is set, and the start command (special figure judgment information) is started. Performs processing for transmitting (symbol memory designation command, gaming state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) to the production control board 130, processing for changing special symbol special electric processing data to "1", etc. A special symbol storage determination process (step S310) is executed. The details of the special symbol storage determination process will be described later.

If the special pattern special electric processing data = 1, the variable display of the special pattern is stopped as the variation time elapses, the stop time (for example, 0.5 seconds) is set, and the stop command (special pattern stop command) is produced and controlled. A special symbol variation process (step S320) is executed to perform a process for transmitting to the board 130 and a process for changing the special figure special electric process data to "2". The details of the special symbol variation process will be described later.

If the special pattern special electricity processing data = 2, the special pattern special electricity processing data will be changed to "0" if the special symbol is a loss as the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has passed, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, it will be a jackpot. The opening time of the game is set, and processing for transmitting an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and special symbol stop processing (step S330) for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "3" are executed.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 3, the round game is started as the opening time of the jackpot game has elapsed, and the jackpot is executed based on the processing for transmitting the round number designation command to the production control board 130 and the end of the final round game. Executes jackpot game processing (step S340) for setting the ending time of the game and transmitting an ending designation command to the production control board 130, processing for changing the special figure special electric processing data to "4", etc. do.

If the special figure special electric processing data = 4, the process for ending the jackpot game as the ending time passes, and the game state after the jackpot ends (low-accuracy time-saving game state, high-accuracy time-saving game state, high probability number of times, time-saving number) ), a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to set the special figure special electric line process data to "0", etc. The details of the jackpot game ending process will be described later.

(Special symbol memory determination processing of main control board)
The special symbol storage determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing special symbol storage determination processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner. If the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the special symbol is not in the variable display state, the process moves to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is 1 or more. If the second special figure reservation number (U2) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-3, and if the second special figure reservation number (U2) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S310-4. move.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special figure reservation number (U2) by subtracting "1," and in step S310-6, the second special figure reservation number (U2) corresponds to the second special figure reservation number (U2) after the subtraction. A special symbol storage designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, sets the gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data stored in the storage section, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage sections is shifted to the previous storage section.

For example, the special figure determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the second special figure determination information reservation storage area. In addition, the special figure judgment information stored in the first storage part of the second special figure judgment information reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage part which is the special figure judgment information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage part. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is 1 or more. If the first special figure reservation number (U1) is 1 or more, the process moves to step S310-5, and if the first special figure reservation number (U1) is not 1 or more, the process goes to step S319-1. move.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special figure reservation number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and in step S310-6, the main CPU 110a updates the special figure reservation number (U1) corresponding to the first special figure reservation number (U1) after the subtraction. A symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol storage designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for updating the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon is performed.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a gaming state designation command corresponding to the current gaming state in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, stores it in the first special symbol holding storage area. Shift processing is performed on the data, and the special figure determination information stored in the first to fourth storage units is shifted to the previous storage unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the third storage part of the first special symbol reservation storage area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area is shifted to the 0th storage section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, and is stored in the 0th storage section. The special figure determination information used in the previous game will be deleted.

In addition, with the shift processing of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, the special symbol reservation display data indicating the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction is stored in the main RAM 110c. set in a predetermined area. As a result, the display contents of the first special symbol reservation display 63 and the second special symbol reservation display 64 are updated.

In addition, in this embodiment, in steps S310-2 to S310-8, the second special figure determination information reservation storage area is prioritized over the first special figure determination information reservation storage area and shifted (the second special figure reservation number is However, in the order in which the game balls enter the starting hole, the first special figure judgment information holding storage area or the second special drawing judgment information holding storage area is It may be shifted (subtracting the number of reserved 1st special symbols and the number of reserved 2nd special symbols in the winning order), or the 1st special symbol determination information retention storage area may be prioritized over the 2nd special symbol determination information retention storage area. You may also shift (subtract the first special figure reservation number with priority over the second special figure reservation number).

The main CPU 110a performs jackpot determination processing in step S311. Specifically, the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special figure determination information execution storage area, is checked against the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10, and a jackpot is determined. Determine whether or not. In addition, the special symbol determination information (random value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is checked against the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11, and the special symbol is stopped. Performs processing to determine the type of.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be stopped and displayed as a result of the variable performance.

The main CPU 110a performs special figure fluctuation pattern determination processing in step S313. Specifically, the special symbol determination information stored in the 0th storage unit, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is compared with the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18, and the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is determined. Performs processing to determine the special figure fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). In addition, the details of the special figure fluctuation pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special figure variation pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special figure variation pattern determined in the special figure variation pattern determination process in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing for determining a variable performance pattern which is a performance mode of a variable performance performed during the variable display of special symbols is performed.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol variation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol variation pattern determined in the special symbol variation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316. , starts changing display of special symbols. As a result, the LED lighting data for executing the variable display of the special symbol is created in the data creation process of step S700, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process of step S800, so that the first A variable display of special symbols will be performed on the special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag for ending the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "1", and ends the current special symbol memory determination process. do.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is ended, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process moves to step S319-2. In addition, the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbols are not displayed fluctuating and the special game (jackpot game) is not being executed, but the requirement also includes that the fluctuating display of the normal symbols and the auxiliary game are not being executed. You can.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the customer is waiting for a customer in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c. It is set in the transmission data storage area, and the current special symbol storage determination process is completed. As a result, a customer waiting state designation command is transmitted to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demonstration performance to encourage the player to play.

(Special figure fluctuation pattern judgment process of main control board)
The special figure fluctuation pattern determination process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special figure variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is the normal gaming state. If it is in the normal gaming state, the process moves to step S313-2, and if it is not the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the game is in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state, and the process moves to step S313-3.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects a corresponding table (matching the gaming situation) from the normal special symbol variation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12) for determining the special symbol variation pattern in the normal gaming state. Then, the process moves to step S313-4.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a determines the special pattern fluctuation pattern that corresponds to the game situation (matches the gaming situation) from the special pattern fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIGS. 13 and 14) for determining the special pattern fluctuation pattern in the variable probability gaming state or the time-saving gaming state. A table is selected and the process moves to step S313-4.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a determines the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random value for reach determination, the number of reservations (U1 or U2), and the random value for special symbol fluctuation pattern determination. The special figure variation pattern is determined by comparing it with the special figure variation pattern determination table.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the variation time corresponding to the determined special figure variation pattern in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern. A pattern designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a special figure variation pattern designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and a process for determining a variation production pattern which is a production mode of the variation production is performed.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current state is a low probability state. If it is not a low probability state (it is a variable probability gaming state), the process moves to step S313-9, and if it is a low probability state, in step S313-8, the number of fluctuations and specifics stored in the main RAM 110c are Specifically, the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner is updated by +1 after a predetermined condition is satisfied (RWM clear, the number of changes based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0). The number of variations is updated by +1 regardless of whether it is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, a variable display of the first special symbol, or a variable display of the second special symbol. In addition, this number of fluctuations will be referred to in the special symbol fluctuation processing described later.

In step S313-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current state is a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or special time-saving game state). If it is not in the time-saving game state, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination table is ended, and if it is in the time-saving game state, in step S313-10, a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the remaining time-saving number is transmitted for production purposes. Set in the data storage area. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified. When this process is finished, the current special figure fluctuation pattern determination process is ended.

(Special pattern variation processing of main control board)
The special symbol variation process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 25. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the variation time set in the above-described special symbol variation pattern determination process has elapsed. If the variation time has elapsed, the process moves to step S320-2, and if the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process ends.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbols determined in the above-described jackpot determination process, and in step S320-3, sets a stop time (basically 0.5 seconds) according to the gaming situation. Set it in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the time saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time saving flag is set, the remaining number of working hours is to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5; if the time saving flag is not set, the remaining number of working hours is not to be updated and the process moves to step S320-5. The process moves to S320-10.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time saving number (J1), which is the time saving number of the first special symbol saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the first special The third time saving number (J3), which is the total time saving number of the symbol and the second special symbol, is subtracted by 1, and if it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the main The second time saving number (J2), which is the time saving number of the second special symbol saved in the gaming RWM area of the RAM 110c, and the third time saving number (J3) mentioned above are subtracted by one.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether any one of the first number of time reductions (J1), the second number of time reductions (J2), and the third number of time reductions (J3) has become "0". If it becomes "0", the time-saving gaming state is terminated and the process moves to step S320-9, and if it does not become "0", the process moves to step S320-12.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a clears the high probability flag, time saving flag, and various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and starts the normal gaming state.

In step S320-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the jackpot special symbol is stopped and displayed. If it is not a jackpot special symbol, the process moves to step S320-12, and if it is a jackpot special symbol, in step S320-11, the high probability flag and time saving flag saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c Then, the various time saving times (J1, J2, J3) are cleared and the normal game state is started. When this process is finished, the process moves to step S320-16.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of fluctuations saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (900 in this embodiment). If the number of fluctuations has reached the specified number of times, the process moves to step S320-13 as a special time-saving gaming state is to be started, and if the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number of times, the special time-saving gaming state is started. The process moves to step S320-15 as not to be allowed.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a sets the special time saving number of times (J1=100, J2=750, J3=750) in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-14, sets the number of time reductions in the main RAM 110c. A special time-saving flag is set in the gaming RWM area to shift to a special time-saving game state.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sends a time saving number designation command corresponding to the various time saving numbers (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. set. As a result, a command for specifying the number of time reductions is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the remaining number of time reductions is notified.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a sets the special figure special electric processing data to "2", and in step S320-17, the main CPU 110a sets the current gaming state (the gaming state specified from the presence or absence of the high probability flag and the time saving flag). A corresponding game state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 performs processing for updating the gaming state. When this process is finished, this special symbol variation process ends.

In this way, when the number of variable displays of the special symbol executed after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of variations based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0), the special time saving game state is activated. Since this is designed to generate, it is possible to give the player the surprise of a time-saving state occurring without going through a jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of fluctuations (900 times) that the special time-saving game state occurs is larger than the maximum time-saving number (100 times) set in the normal time-saving game state, so that during the normal time-saving game state, Since a special time-saving game state does not occur, the inconvenience that the player loses track of the progress of the game does not occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when a special time saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not cleared to zero. Therefore, between jackpot games (after the special time-saving gaming state starts or ends), the special time-saving gaming state will not occur again, making it possible to ensure a balance of profits between the gaming parlor and the player. It is also possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the maximum number of time savings in the normal time saving game state (100 times) is not set to be less than the number of fluctuations (900 times) at which the special time saving game state occurs, but the maximum number of time saving times in the normal time saving game state. and the number of fluctuations in which the special time-saving gaming state occurs may be the same number of times. In this way, the normal time-saving gaming state and the special time-saving gaming state will be seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the normal time-saving gaming state has been extended, and making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

In addition, when a special time-saving gaming state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is cleared to 0, and a special time-saving occurrence flag indicating that the special time-saving gaming state has already occurred is set in the main RAM 110c (for gaming RWM). In this case, if there is no special time-saving occurrence flag when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of fluctuations is cleared to 0 and a special time-saving gaming state is generated, and if there is a special time-saving occurrence flag, It is preferable to clear the number of fluctuations to 0 to prevent the special time-saving gaming state from occurring.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The jackpot game ending process (gaming program) of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 26. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game ending process in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a acquires the stop special symbol data set in the main RAM 110c in step S350-1, selects the gaming state setting table (see FIG. 16) in step S350-2, and in step S350-3, The stop special symbol data is checked against the game state setting table to determine the game state after the end of the jackpot game.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a sets gaming state information (high probability flag, time saving flag, number of time saving times) corresponding to the determined gaming state in the main RAM 110c. As a result, a variable probability gaming state or a normal time saving gaming state will occur.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a sets a time saving number designation command corresponding to the set time saving number (J1, J2, J3) in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, a time saving number specifying command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing such as displaying the remaining number of time saving times is executed.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the set game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-7, sets "0" in the special figure special electric processing data. ” is set, and the current jackpot game ending process is ended. As a result, a gaming state designation command is transmitted to the effect control board 130, and processing for performing an effect according to the current gaming state is executed.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 27. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control section 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, flags etc. stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial settings is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control section)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, the process determines whether or not various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands are being transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs a setting change/confirmation process in step E170. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the above-mentioned settings are A process for executing change notification is performed, and if a setting confirmation designation command is received, a process for executing the above-mentioned setting confirmation notification is performed.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, processing is performed to execute a power failure restoration notification. In detail, a power recovery notification command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to output audio. For example, the device 9 may output a power restoration sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a command has been received, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demonstration effect after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. conduct. To be more specific, a customer waiting production command is sent to the display control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and to A customer waiting demo sound is outputted from the output device 9. The details of the customer waiting performance process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs menu operation processing in step E320. Specifically, depending on the operation of the production button 17 or cross key 19, various menu items ("model description" that explains information about the model, settings that set the execution rate of various productions executed during variable production) are selected. ``Customize the effect'' to select, ``Pachilog'' to manage the game history in conjunction with the player's mobile phone or other terminal, and ``Exit'' to end the menu operation. Performs processing. Note that details of the menu operation process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved or a command for specifying the number of regular drawings reserved is received, and if the command is received, it is stored (ascertained) in the sub-RAM 130c. ), the number of reserved first special symbols, the number of second reserved special symbols, the number of regular symbols, etc. are updated.

In step E500, the sub CPU 130a performs a prefetch effect process. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a prefetch designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if a prefetch designation command is received, icon change effects, continuous preview effects, and lamps are performed as prefetch effects. Performs processing related to change effects. Note that the details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

"Icon change performance" is a type of pre-reading preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the pending icon and the display mode of the icon. The timing of the performance sometimes overlaps with the performance. In the present embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

"Continuous preview performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances, and after the start of the variable performance. However, the timing of the performance does not overlap with the jackpot preview performance described later.
"Lamp change performance" is a type of advance notice performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the prize opening lamp over one or more variable performances, and is described below. The timing of the performance may overlap with the jackpot preview performance.

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command are executed. etc., and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E700, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and receives a normal symbol designation command, a regular symbol variation pattern designation command, a regular symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the command is received, and if the command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs production mode update processing in step E800. Specifically, updating the production mode (production stage) in which production elements (background image, production image, production sound, etc.) in the audio output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc. are defined. It is determined whether the conditions (changes in the game state, winning of the mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, multiple production modes are executed. Perform processing to update to one of the modes.

"Production mode" includes production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state, production modes D to E set in the variable probability gaming state, production modes FG to G set in the normal time saving gaming state, and special production modes. A production mode H is provided which is set in the time-saving gaming state. In addition, when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode set is always performance mode A, and when the power is turned on, When the power is turned on, the production mode that is set first is always production mode D, and when the power is turned on and the production is controlled to the normal time-saving gaming state, the production mode that is first set is always production mode D. The mode is always production mode F, and the production mode that is first set when the special time-saving game state is controlled when the power is turned on is always production mode H.

In addition, in production modes A to C, the production pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decoration part) + design effect images (decoration part) that decorate the backgrounds of the numbers and characters, Numbers and character designs differ between production modes. In the performance modes D to H, the performance pattern 70a is composed only of numbers (identification characters), and the design of the numbers is common among the performance modes. Furthermore, in production modes A to H, the background image corresponding to each production mode is normally scrolled left and right (reciprocating movement, dynamic display).

Also, in the normal gaming state, the production mode is better when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed. Because the following change conditions are likely to be met (SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss is likely to be executed, mode update lottery is likely to be won, look-ahead zone effect is likely to be executed, etc.), the second special symbol fluctuating display ( The production mode is easier to change when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable production) is executed than when the second variation production is executed. Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable display (variable performance) of special symbols executed in the normal gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in various time-saving game states than when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in the normal gaming condition, It is more difficult for the update conditions of the production mode to be satisfied (SP/SPSP reach production that results in a loss is difficult to execute, it is easy to win the mode update lottery, it is difficult to execute the look-ahead zone production, there are fewer production modes) etc.). Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable presentation) is executed depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, we have increased the number of production modes in variable probability gaming states and various time-saving gaming states (normal working-time saving gaming state, special working-time saving gaming state), and increasing the number of production modes in variable-probability gaming states and various time-saving gaming states (normal working-time saving gaming state, special working-time saving gaming state). , the production mode changes more easily when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable production) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variation production) is executed. You can do it like this.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. , or terminate the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150.

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control department)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process moves to step E300-4, and if the customer waiting state designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E300-2 until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Select the demonstration standby time determination table (see FIG. 30) for determining the standby time of . Note that details of the demonstration standby time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub CPU 130a determines the demo standby time and sets it in the demo standby timer. Specifically, with reference to the demonstration waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30, one demonstration waiting time is determined from among a plurality of demonstration waiting times based on the current gaming state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is on standby for a demonstration. Specifically, it is determined whether a demonstration standby timer is set. If the demo is not on standby, the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated as not to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and if the demo is on standby, the demo waiting timer is updated by -1 in step E300-5. .

The sub CPU 130a determines whether the demo standby timer=0 in step E300-6. If the demo standby timer is not 0, it is assumed that the customer waiting demonstration performance has not yet been executed, and the current customer waiting performance processing is terminated.If the demo waiting timer = 0, the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed in step E300-7. The command is set in the transmission buffer and the current customer waiting performance process is ended. As a result, a customer waiting demonstration performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a customer waiting demonstration performance that appeals to the player to play the game is executed.

(Demo standby time determination table)
FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a demonstration waiting time determination table that is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration production.

In the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30, the gaming state, the current state, and the selected demo standby time are associated with each other. Four types of demonstration standby times from 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the normal gaming state, and four types of demonstration standby times from 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demonstration standby time in the specific gaming state. is set.

The first characteristic of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The demonstration waiting time after the is displayed statically, the demonstration waiting time after the fluctuating display of the production symbol ends (the fluctuation time has elapsed) and the production symbol is statically displayed, and the demonstration symbol after the end of the customer waiting demo production. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after it is displayed statically is different. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the current state, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The second feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the fluctuating display of the performance symbols ends (variation The point is that the demonstration waiting time is longer after the performance pattern is displayed statically after the time has elapsed. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the demonstration pattern waits for a longer time after the performance symbols are displayed statically on the image display device. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. The difference is that the waiting time for the demonstration after the design is statically displayed is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

A fifth feature of the demonstration standby time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demonstration standby time is the shortest after the performance symbols are statically displayed after the end of the customer waiting demonstration performance. Therefore, the appeal of the game to players can be effectively increased, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

The sixth feature of the demo standby time determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is longer. Therefore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the probability that the player is playing the game, and it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Menu operation processing of production control section)
Menu operation processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing menu operation processing in the production control section 130m.

In step E320-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not it is currently in a customer waiting state. If the customer is in the waiting state, the process moves to step E320-2, and if the customer is not in the customer waiting state (the fluctuating performance or jackpot performance is in progress), the process related to the menu operation is not performed and the process moves to step E320-2. Processing moves to step 7.

In step E320-2, the sub CPU 130a obtains the menu process number that is updated in each process of the menu operation process, refers to the branch destination address from the menu process number, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address.

Specifically, if the menu processing number = "0", various menu items (model description, customization, pachilog, exit) are displayed according to the operation of the production button 17, and the menu is displayed by operation of the cross key 19. Select an item and determine the menu item by operating the effect button 17, and enter the menu processing number corresponding to the determined menu item (“1” for “Model Description”, “2” for “Customize Effect”) , "3" for "Pachilog" and "0" for "End") is executed (step E320-3), and the menu operation process ends.

If the menu processing number = "1", a model description that sequentially displays various explanatory information regarding the model according to the operation of the cross key 19, and sets the menu processing number to "0" by selecting and deciding the end item. The process (step E320-4) is executed, and the menu operation process ends.

If the menu processing number = "2", various performances (for example, icon change performance, continuous preview performance, timer performance, etc.) executed during the variable performance according to the operation of the cross key 19 are executed at the normal rate. Select the normal setting (normal mode) and the simple setting (simple mode) that is executed at a lower rate of decline than the normal rate, and execute the effect customization process (step E320-5) determined by operating the effect button 17; Ends menu operation processing.

If the menu processing number = "3", the input of the history password using the production button 17 and the cross key 19 is accepted, and the update of the play history is started, and the updated version according to the production button 17 and the cross key 19 is Performs processing such as issuing a history password according to the gaming history, and executes pachilog processing (step E320-6) to manage the gaming history in cooperation with a terminal such as a mobile phone owned by the player; Ends menu operation processing.

If the menu operation number is "4", a termination process (step E320-7) is executed to terminate the menu operation and set the menu process number to "0", and the menu operation process is terminated.

In this way, based on the operations of the production button 17 and the cross key 19, various productions (such as icon change production, continuous preview production, timer production, and role-playing preview production at the start of variation, etc., which will be described later) performed during the fluctuation production can be performed. Can be set to a normal setting (normal mode) and a simple setting (simple mode) with different execution ratios (execution ratios can be set for icon change effects, continuous preview effects, timer effects, variable start announcement effects, etc.) Therefore, the player can customize the performance balance to his/her preference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, rather than customizing the execution ratio of various performances (customized performances) executed during variable performances by selecting between normal settings and simple settings, the execution ratio of various performances (customized performances) executed during variable performances is not customized. ) can be set individually to customize the performance balance, or the user can select between normal settings and simple settings and set the high and low execution ratios of various performances (customized performances). The presentation balance may be customized by allowing individual settings.

In addition, the customization targets are not only the above-mentioned icon change performance, continuous preview performance, timer performance, and role-playing announcement performance at the start of fluctuation, but also the role-playing announcement performance at the start of fluctuation, and the pre-reach preview performance (line preview). Performances, step-up preview performances), confirmed performances, etc. may be customizable performances, and the execution ratio may be set for normal settings and simple settings.

In addition, the execution rate of specific performances among the customization target performances (for example, dialogue preview pattern 6 for extremely hot dialogue with high expectations, dialogue preview pattern 1 for normal dialogue with low expectations, etc.) is executed. may be set individually.

(Pre-reading performance processing by the performance control unit)
The pre-reading performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing the pre-reading performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process for determining whether or not to perform the icon change effect, the mode of effect of the icon change effect, and the like. Note that details of the icon change effect determination process will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a executes the icon change effect determined to be executed in the icon change effect determination process in step E520 (changes the already displayed pending icon or the display mode of the icon). Perform execution processing. Note that details of the icon change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process for determining whether to execute the continuous preview performance, the presentation mode of the continuous preview performance, and the like. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process for executing the continuous preview performance determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. Note that details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (light up the prize opening lamp NR so that the display mode becomes a light emitting mode corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed). The details of the lamp change effect execution process will be described later.

In step E560, the sub CPU 130a sets the top lamp 10b located at the upper center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 in a different light emission mode from the normal light emission mode according to the result of the pre-read determination when the game ball enters the starting slot. Winning light emitting effect for determining whether to execute a winning light emitting effect that indicates the level of expectation that a special game will be executed by emitting light in a special light emitting mode, and the presentation mode of the winning light emitting effect to be executed. Perform decision processing. The details of the process for determining the light emitting effect upon winning will be described later.

In step E570, the sub CPU 130a performs a winning light emitting effect execution process for executing the winning light emitting effect determined to be executed in the winning light emitting effect determining process, and ends the current pre-reading effect process.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 33. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-7.

The "executable period of icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, an icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. In addition, if the received prefetch designation command is based on winning at the first starting port 45, it is a normal gaming state, and the received prefetching designation command is based on winning at the second starting port 47. In some cases, it may be provided that the game is in a specific gaming state (a low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, a high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), or the like.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-5. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 34) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-6. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. One icon final display mode is determined from among the icon final display modes.

In step E510-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) in which an icon change effect is executed. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-9, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. One change scenario is determined from among the change scenarios.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the pending icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). , a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) will be output.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table includes the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode in the normal setting and simple setting by effect customization, and the icon final display mode to be selected. For reference, the type of notification sound when the icon is generated is listed for each type of icon.

The final icon display mode includes a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game will be executed). has been done.

The expectation level of winning a jackpot related to special icons increases in the order of (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, and the rainbow icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot.

When the white icon is displayed on the image display device, the first occurrence alarm sound is output, when the blue icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output, and when the red icon is displayed, the second occurrence alarm sound is output. , the third occurrence notification sound is output, and when the rainbow icon is displayed, the fourth occurrence notification sound is set to be output.

Note that the rate at which blue icons and red icons are selected in simple settings is set to be 1/2 of the rate at which blue and red icons are selected in normal settings, but the rate at which blue icons and red icons are selected in simple settings is 1/2. It may be more or less.

Here, the first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, special icons are selected at a higher rate than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. It is supposed to be done.

A second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the execution rate of the icon change effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) by the player. By doing so, it is possible to set the performance balance that suits the player's preference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that in the case of a jackpot, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode, but it may be selected.

In addition, different notification sounds were set for multiple icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a white icon was generated changed to a blue icon, a red icon, and a rainbow icon. There may be two types of sound, including a time change notification sound, or the notification sound may not be output when a white icon is generated, and the notification sound may be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Further, for the rainbow icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table is associated with the icon final display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the selected change scenario, and is used as a reference. Preliminary changes in each change scenario and how icons are updated in the changes are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change effect and the icon change effect is executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario is determined in which the display mode of the icon is changed regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach effect other than a normal reach effect may be performed) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that uses as a determining factor whether or not a reach effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed in advance variation is executed. Alternatively, the scenario in which the When using such a change scenario determination table, the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, the display mode of the icon changes during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed, and the pre-variation in which a reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is lower than during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set in such a way that changes in the display mode of the icon occur at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon change performance execution processing of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing icon change performance execution processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E520-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current icon change production execution process is ended.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the pre-read information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not to change (update) the display mode in the current variable performance. Determine whether there is an icon. If there is a pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for hold icons (see FIG. 37) for determining a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for pending icons will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for pending icons shown in FIG. 37, one of the multiple pending icon change patterns is selected based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%). One pending icon change pattern is determined from the following.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the pending icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) of the icon is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the scenario of the icon is stored, the process moves to step E520-8, and if the scenario of the icon is not stored, the scenario is cleared from the pre-read information storage area when the power is restored or when winning a prize. The current icon change performance execution process is terminated on the assumption that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to failure to normally receive the time command (special map reservation number designation command, pre-read designation command).

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-9, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon change effect execution process is ended.

In step E520-9, the sub CPU 130a selects from among the change pattern determination tables for a plurality of icons for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed in the current variation performance. A change pattern determination table (see FIG. 38) for the icon is selected according to the change stage at which the icon changes. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the selected icon, multiple icons are selected based on the mode of icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern. One icon change pattern is determined from among the change patterns.

In step E520-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect execution process. As a result, a change production command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 according to the change timing according to the icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing. The display mode of the icon will change, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) will be output.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for hold icons that is referred to when determining a change pattern for hold icons.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the pending icon change mode in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of a pending icon change effect and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change pattern includes normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the icon disappearing. , normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, and the display of the icon as a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as a starting point is performed. A character action change pattern 01 in which the aspect changes, and a change notification pattern indicating that the display form of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect are temporarily stopped and displayed, and an effect effect that acts on the pending icon using the change notification pattern as a starting point. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which the display mode of the pending icon changes as a result of this change.

The timing at which the pending icon change effect occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect: when the variable effect starts (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect occurs during the change effect. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the pending icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation level to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, or a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation level. 2UP (for example, change from a white icon to a red icon) is set to change the display mode to a two-step higher display mode.

Note that, although the change effect generation timing of the pending icon is set to the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon that is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. This is a table to be referred to, and FIG. 38(b) is a table to be referred to when changing the display mode of the icon in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing at which the icon change effect occurs and the change stage in each icon change pattern are described.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 are set in which a character appears and an action effect is performed that acts on the icon starting from the character and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing at which the change effect of the icon occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and is classified as when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the execution of the change effect (during change), and when the change effect is in progress. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the icon includes 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation to one level higher (for example, a change from a white icon to a blue icon, a change from a blue icon to a red icon), and a jackpot winning expectation. 2UP (for example, a change from a white icon to a red icon, a change from a blue icon to a rainbow icon) is set to change the display mode to a higher level by two levels.

Note that in the change pattern determination table for the icon of this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selected. For example, in a fluctuating performance that performs a pseudo-continuous performance, when the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

"Pseudo continuous performance" is a fluctuating display of performance symbols as if multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball landing) in one starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). In order to make it appear as if the game has been executed, all prizes will be awarded within the special figure fluctuation time determined for each winning (ball entering) into the starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). This is a special form of fluctuating display of the performance symbol in which a re-fluctuation display in which the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops and then starts fluctuating again is performed once or multiple times.

In addition, although the change effect generation timing of the said icon was set to the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Continuous preview production decision processing by production control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance determination processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E530-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current continuous preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E530-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the performance contents (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is an executable period for continuous preview presentation. If it is the executable period for continuous notice performances (pre-read action production, pre-read effect production, pre-read vibration production, pre-read zone production), the process moves to step E530-4, and if it is not the executable period for continuous notice production. , the process moves to step E530-16 assuming that the continuous preview performance based on the currently received prefetch designation command is not to be executed.

In the "pre-reading motion performance", a special game is executed by executing an operation performance (notice performance) that operates the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that intermittently hints at the level of expectation.

The "look-ahead effect performance" is a special game by executing an effect performance (notice performance) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the performance symbol 70a at the timing immediately after the start of the variable performance in one or more variable performances. The performance intermittently hints at the level of expectation that will be carried out.

"Pre-read vibration performance" is a vibration performance (advance performance) that vibrates the performance button 17 in a predetermined manner without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 to occur at the timing immediately after the start of the fluctuation performance in one or more variable performances. This is a performance that intermittently suggests the level of expectation that a special game will be executed when executed.

"Pre-reading zone performance (pre-reading mode performance)" refers to the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed by executing a mid-zone performance (notice performance) that displays a zone image from a predetermined timing in one or more variable performances. It is a performance that continuously suggests the following.

The "executable period of continuous notice performance" means that there is no continuous notice performance in advance pending, that the jackpot game is not in progress, and that a prefetch designation command based on winning in the first starting opening 45 is received. In this case, it is a normal gaming state, and when a prefetch designation command based on winning to the second starting port 47 is received, it is a specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), etc. Can be mentioned.

In step E530-4, the sub CPU 130a selects the continuous notice type determination table (see FIGS. 40 and 41) according to the current production mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous notice type determination table and The type of notice (whether or not to execute a continuous notice performance, and the type of continuous notice performance to be executed) is determined. Note that details of the continuous notice type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the type of continuous preview is to execute a continuous preview effect. If the continuous notice effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-16, and if the continuous notice effect is to be executed, in step E530-7, the continuous notice scenario determination table (Fig. 42 , see FIG. 43). Note that details of the continuous notice scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch action effect is to be executed has been determined. If the prefetching motion effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-10, and if the prefetching motion effect is to be executed, in step E530-9, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the prefetching motion effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for which the prefetch effect production is to be executed has been determined. If the look-ahead effect performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-12, and if the look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-11, and the preview scenario of the look-ahead effect performance is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous notice type for which the pre-read vibration effect is to be executed has been determined. If the pre-reading vibration effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E530-14, and if the pre-reading vibration effect is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous notice scenario determination table is referred to and the preview scenario of the pre-read vibration effect is determined. is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type for executing the prefetch zone effect (prefetch mode effect) has been determined. If the prefetch zone (prefetch mode effect) effect is not to be executed, the current continuous preview effect determination process is ended, and if the prefetch zone effect is to be executed, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referred to in step E530-15. A preview scenario for the prefetch zone performance (prefetch mode performance) is determined and set in the prefetch information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous preview performance determination process is completed.

In step E530-16, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-previous scenario for the continuous preview performance (a preview scenario indicating that the continuous preview performance will not be executed), sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the current continuous preview performance. End the determination process.

Note that the preview scenario or the non-previous scenario set in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to in the above-described continuous preview performance execution process of step E540, and the process for executing the continuous preview performance or the continuous preview performance is executed. Steps will be taken to prevent this from happening.

In this way, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, in the normal game state, the pre-reading action performance related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is not executed. , when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reading motion effect (the second movable member 74 actions) are easier to perform. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, in the normal game state, the pre-reading vibration performance related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) is not executed. The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more effective when the variable display of the first special symbol (fluctuating effect) is executed than when the variable display of the second special symbol (fluctuating effect) is executed. It is easier to implement. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable presentation) in the normal game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, in a specific game state, the look-ahead motion performance related to the variable display of the first special symbol (variable performance) is not executed. The look-ahead motion effect (movement of the second movable member 74) is better when the variable display (variable effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variable effect) of the first special symbol is executed. is becoming easier to implement. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display of the second special symbol (variable performance) in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the continuous notice performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, the pre-reading vibration performance is not executed in the variable display of the first special symbol (fluctuating performance) in a specific game state. The pre-read vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is executed more when the variable display of the second special symbol (fluctuating effect) is executed than when the variable display of the special symbol (fluctuating effect) is executed. It is becoming easier to Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variable performance) of the second special symbol in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a continuous notice type determination table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous notice type in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a continuous preview performance determination table that is referred to in order to determine the continuous preview type.

As shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the continuous notice type determination table includes the read-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each continuous notice type in the normal setting and simple setting by effect customization, and the selected number. Continuous notice types are associated with continuous notice types, such as ``non-execution'' in which continuous notice effects are not executed, ``look-ahead motion effect'' in which one of multiple types of continuous notice effects is executed, and `` "Look-ahead effect performance", "Look-ahead vibration performance", "Look-ahead zone performance", "Look-ahead effect performance & Look-ahead vibration performance" where two types of multiple types of continuous notice performances are executed, "Look-ahead motion performance & Look-ahead zone performance" ” has been established.

For example, if the prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern) is a loss and the SP reach effect is executed, "non-execution" is determined at 85%, "prefetch effect production" is determined at 5%, At 4%, "look-ahead motion effect" is decided, at 3%, "look-ahead vibration effect" is decided, at 2%, "look-ahead zone effect" is decided, and at 1%, "look-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration effect" is decided. be done.

Note that the rate at which various types of continuous preview effects are selected in the simple setting is set to be 1/2 of the rate at which various types of continuous preview effects are selected in the normal setting. It may be more or less.

Here, the first feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-read effect effect, pre-read chance effect, pre-read movement effect, pre-read vibration effect, pre-read zone effect) The execution rate of any one of these) is the first rate, and the second consecutive notice effect (the first consecutive of the pre-read effect effect, pre-read chance effect, pre-read action effect, pre-read vibration effect, and pre-read zone effect) The execution rate of (one other than the preview effect) becomes the second rate, and the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization. In this case, the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead action performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). and the execution ratio of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead motion performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in performance customization, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the second feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect, pre-reading action presentation, pre-reading vibration presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in performance customization, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the third feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (among them: look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance eye performance, look-ahead movement performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the first variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in performance customization, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the fourth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (among them: look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance eye performance, look-ahead movement performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of one of the effects (one other than the effect) becomes the second rate, and the first variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the production customization, the production effect can be changed depending on the type of variable production (special symbol), making it possible to improve the interest of the game. .

Furthermore, the fifth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect, pre-reading action presentation, pre-reading vibration presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Additionally, the sixth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect, pre-reading action presentation, pre-reading vibration presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, the seventh feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect, pre-reading action presentation, pre-reading vibration presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) The execution rate of any one of the above) is the first rate, and the second continuous notice performance (the first continuous notice among the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance look performance, look-ahead action performance, look-ahead vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance) The execution ratio of (one other than the performance) becomes the second ratio, and the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. If the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is different from the first ratio (in this case, 0%). , the execution rate of the second continuous notice performance (one of the look-ahead effect performance, look-ahead chance performance, look-ahead movement performance, and look-ahead vibration performance other than the first continuous notice performance) is different from the second ratio (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

In addition, the eighth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the second specific game state (special time-saving game state), the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect presentation, pre-reading action presentation, The execution ratio of the pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone production) is the first ratio, and the second consecutive notice production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading chance production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone) In the first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) after the execution rate of the performance (one of the performances other than the first continuous notice performance) becomes the second ratio and the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance look performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is a ratio different from the first ratio (here, 0%), and the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effects, look-ahead chance effects, look-ahead motion effects, and look-ahead vibration effects other than the first continuous notice effect) The execution ratio of the first one) is different from the second ratio (in this case, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, the ninth feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in FIGS. When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the first specific gaming state (normal time-saving gaming state), the first continuous notice performance (pre-reading effect presentation, pre-reading chance effect presentation, pre-reading action presentation, The execution ratio of the pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone production) is the first ratio, and the second consecutive notice production (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading chance production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration production, pre-reading zone) In the second specific game state (special time-saving game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the execution ratio of the performance (one of the performances other than the first continuous notice performance) becomes the second ratio. When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first continuous notice performance (any one of the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead chance look performance, the look-ahead movement performance, and the look-ahead vibration performance) is a ratio different from the first ratio (here, 0%), and the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effects, look-ahead chance effects, look-ahead motion effects, and look-ahead vibration effects other than the first continuous notice effect) The execution ratio of the first one) is different from the second ratio (in this case, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be changed depending on the game state and the type of variable performance (special symbol), which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Continuous preview performance scenario determination table)
FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 43 is a diagram showing a continuous notice scenario determination table for performance modes D to H (specific gaming state). It is a diagram.

The continuous notice scenario determination table is associated with the number of special symbols on hold, the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each notice scenario, and the selected notice scenario. Preliminary fluctuations (before 4 fluctuations, before 3 fluctuations, before 2 fluctuations, before 1 fluctuation) and the performance mode of continuous preview performance in the fluctuations are described.

"Pre-variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command. The "variation" is a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received prefetch designation command.

The presentation mode of "weak notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion, and a weak motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a blue effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a blue effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating the zone 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the production button 17 flashes white. In the case of a pre-read zone production, a blue zone image is displayed and a zone sound effect is output. It is to be done.

The presentation mode of "strong notice" differs depending on the type of continuous notice, and in the case of a look-ahead motion production, the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion, and a strong motion sound effect is output. In the case of a look-ahead effect production, a red effect image is displayed around the production pattern 70a, and a red effect sound effect is output, and in the case of a look-ahead vibration production, the production button The vibrator for vibrating 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the production button 17 flashes red. In the case of pre-read zone production, a red heat zone image is displayed and a heat zone sound effect is displayed. is output.

Continuous notice performance scenarios include scenarios in which weak or strong notices are not executed during advance fluctuations and weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations (for example, scenario 11), and scenarios where weak notices or strong notices are executed during the fluctuations in advance, A scenario (for example, scenario 22) in which a weak notice or a strong notice is executed is set therein.

The first feature of the various tables related to continuous preview effects shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that they are more useful when multiple types of continuous preview effects are executed than when a single type of continuous preview effect is executed. However, there is a point where the expectation of jackpot is high. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the performance modes D to H (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that continuous preview performances are likely to be executed (execution rate is high), that is, the expectation level of jackpot when continuous preview performances are executed is low. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that instead of differentiating the execution rate of continuous preview performances between production modes A to C and production modes D to H, for example, continuous preview production is executed more in production mode B than in production mode A. For example, the execution rate of continuous preview performances may be made different between production modes A to C, or for example, continuous preview production may be made easier to execute in production mode E than in production mode D. For example, the execution rate of the continuous preview performance may be made different between the performance modes D to H. In this way, the expectation of a jackpot in the continuous preview performance changes between performance modes, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), Also, in production modes D to H (specific game states), if the normal reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), it is easier to execute the continuous notice production (here, pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production). There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), the SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result). In production modes D to H (specific game states), when the SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), it is better to use continuous preview production (here, pre-read effect performance, pre-read movement performance, pre-read zone). One of the points is that it is easy to carry out the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where there are more (super) shortening fluctuations than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), the SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result). In performance modes D to H (specific gaming states), when SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (pre-read result), continuous preview production (here, pre-read effect performance, pre-read movement performance, pre-read zone) One of the points is that it is easy to carry out the performance. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The sixth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the full rotation reach performance is scheduled to be executed in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) (pre-read results). In production modes D to H (specific gaming states), when the full rotation reach production is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), the continuous notice production (in this case, pre-reading action production, pre-reading zone production) One point is that it is easy to implement. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous in a specific game state where super shortening fluctuations tend to occur more frequently than in performance modes A to C (normal game state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than the performance modes D to G (specific game state). The point is that the pre-reading vibration performance (vibration performance without displaying the valid period of the performance button 17 or the operation promotion image) is easily executed (high execution rate = different jackpot expectation level). Therefore, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) where the stay period tends to be longer than production modes D to H (specific gaming states), it is possible to make it easier for the player to experience the pre-reading vibration production, and increase the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the In addition, in production modes D to H (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), the pre-reading vibration production can be given rarity, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Note that the pre-reading vibration performance may be executed more easily (the execution rate may be higher) in the performance modes D to H than in the performance modes A to C. In addition, in the normal gaming state, by making it easier to execute pre-reading continuous effects in production mode A than in production modes B or C, the execution rate of pre-reading vibration effects can be reduced between production modes A to C. In a specific game state, the pre-read vibration effect can be executed more easily in the effect mode D than in the effect modes E-H. The performance execution ratio may be varied. In this way, it is possible to vary the expectation level of a jackpot when the pre-read vibration performance is executed between the performance modes, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to continuous notice performances shown in FIGS. ) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result), a specific reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is scheduled to be executed in performance modes D to H (specific game state) ( If the result is a pre-read result, the pre-read vibration effect is more difficult to execute (the execution rate is lower). Therefore, in production modes D to H (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The ninth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the performance modes D to H (specific game state) are better than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). One of the points is that the look-ahead motion effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, in production modes D to H (specific gaming states) where the fluctuation time tends to be shorter than production modes A to C (normal gaming states), it is possible to give rarity to the pre-reading vibration production and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

The tenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in production modes D to H (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are difficult to execute (the rate of execution is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes D to H (specific game states). In the case where a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), it is better to perform a reach performance (normal reach performance) in a variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance. , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. In modes A to C (normal game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed, while in performance modes D to H (specific game state), a continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed. If it is executed, it is difficult to execute the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the preview target of the continuous preview performance. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 13th feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , When a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), the reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the target of the continuous preview performance , SPSP reach performance) can be easily executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables related to continuous preview performances shown in FIGS. , when a continuous preview performance that spans three variable performances is executed in production modes D to H (specific game states), it is better to perform a reach performance that has a higher expectation of a jackpot in the variable performance that is the subject of the continuous preview performance (for example, , SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) are easy to execute. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the movable members are the same in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to H (specific game state). (The second movable member 74) can be used to perform the pre-reading action effect, but the pre-reading action effect is not possible in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot when executed is different. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the pre-read motion performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to H (specific game state). In this case, the ratio (100%) of operating the second movable member 74 not used in the final performance is higher than the ratio (0%) of operating the first movable member 73 used in the final performance described later. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an inconvenience in which the player mistakenly assumes that there will be a jackpot just because the look-ahead motion effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of operating the second movable member 74 at the strong notice of the pre-reading action performance. Even in this case, when performing the pre-reading motion performance in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and performance modes D to H (specific gaming state), the ratio of operating the first movable member 73 is , it is preferable that the rate at which the second movable member 74 is operated becomes higher.

The seventeenth feature of the various tables related to the continuous notice performance shown in FIGS. 40 to 43 is that the pre-reading vibration performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance mode D to H (specific game state). In this case, the percentage of the production button 17 in the normal state (0%) is higher than the percentage of the production button 17 in the protruding state (0%). Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the performance button 17 being in the protruding state (it is in the protruding state only in the fixed performance described later), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the strong notice of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 may not be vibrated in the normal state, but may be vibrated in the protruding state. Even in this case, when performing the pre-reading vibration performance in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to H (specific game state), the ratio of the performance button 17 to the protruding state is , it is preferable to set the ratio of the normal state to be higher.

The 18th feature of the various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), a weak preview of the look-ahead motion performance (weak motion of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) and a weak notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a blue effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. The point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a weak preview of the pre-reading vibration effect (weak vibration of the effect button 17 for 1 second) is executed without displaying an operation promotion image than when the operation promotion image is displayed. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to continuous notice effects shown in FIGS. During the high-speed fluctuation period), a strong notice of the look-ahead action performance (strong action of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) and a strong notice of the look-ahead effect performance (display of a red effect image around the performance pattern 70a) are executed. One point is that the expectation level of a jackpot is higher when a strong preview of the pre-reading vibration performance (3 seconds of strong vibration of the performance button 17) is executed than when the pre-reading vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations by using the operating means that the player can operate, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous preview performance execution processing by the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not a special figure variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the special figure variation pattern designation command is received, the process moves to step E540-2, and if the special figure variation pattern designation command is not received, the current continuous notice performance execution process is ended.

In step E540-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview effects (prefetch action effects, prefetch effect effects, prefetch vibration effects, and prefetch zone effects) stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and executes the step E540-2. At E540-3, it is determined whether a preview scenario for continuous preview performance is stored. If the preview scenario is stored, the process moves to step E540-4, and if the preview scenario is not stored, it is assumed that power has been restored or a command abnormality (such as missing a prefetch specified command) has occurred. The continuous notice performance execution process ends.

In step E540-4, the sub CPU 130a determines the preview pattern (type of continuous preview performance, weak preview, strong preview) to be executed in the current variable performance according to the preview scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. Then, in step E540-5, a continuous preview presentation command corresponding to the determined preview pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a continuous notice performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a continuous notice performance according to the determined notice pattern is executed. When this process is finished, the current continuous notice performance execution process is finished.

According to the continuous preview performance execution process shown in FIG. 44, if the performance scenario for the continuous preview performance is not stored in the prefetch information storage area due to power restoration or a command abnormality (missing of a prefetch designation command, etc.), the continuous preview performance execution process will start from now. Continuous preview performances are not executed during variable performances. Therefore, it is possible to avoid inconveniences such as the execution of continuous preview effects becoming unstable due to power restoration or the occurrence of a command abnormality, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Lamp change effect execution processing of the effect control unit)
The lamp change effect execution process of the effect control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the lamp change effect execution process in the effect control section 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c. If the icon change scenario is stored, it is assumed that an icon change effect is to be executed and the process moves to step E550-2; if the icon change scenario is not stored, the change scenario is stored from the sub-RAM 130c. Step E550-6 assumes that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the pre-read information storage area due to the power supply being cleared or the winning command (special drawing reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) not being received normally. Transfer processing.

In step E550-2, the sub CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is the icon change timing, the process moves to step E550-3, and if it is not the icon change timing, the current lamp change effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-3, the sub CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color after the icon change in the transmission buffer. As a result, a lamp effect command is sent to the lamp control unit 150, and a lamp change effect is executed by changing the lighting mode (emission color, lighting/blinking) of the winning slot lamp NR in accordance with the color change of the icon. It turns out.

In step E550-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag indicating that a lamp changing effect is being executed is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp change performance execution process ends; if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set, and the current lamp change performance is executed. End the execution process.

In step E550-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process moves to step E550-7, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the current lamp changing effect execution process is ended.

In step E550-7, the sub CPU 130a clears the lamp changing flag set in the sub RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp effect end command in the transmission buffer, and executes the current lamp change effect execution process. finish. As a result, the lamp effect command is transmitted to the lamp control section 150, and the lamp change effect that was being executed is ended.

In this way, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, the lamp change is performed by changing the light emitting mode (light emitting color, lighting/blinking) of the winning opening lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. It is designed to perform a performance. Therefore, the presentation effect can be enhanced by the synergistic effect with the icon change presentation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, unlike the icon change effect or the continuous notice effect, even if power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect is executed again. It is designed not to. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change performance while reducing the control burden, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed in the normal gaming state, the icon change effect is not executed, Change effects are also not executed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to encourage the winning of the game ball into the first starting port 45, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. Change effects are also not executed. Therefore, in a specific game state, it is possible to encourage the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that when power is restored, such as in the icon change performance, the lamp change performance may be executed again in the variable performance that is started after the power is restored. In this case, it is preferable to perform the lamp change effect so as to correspond to the icon change effect that is started after the power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing the lamp change effect in response to the icon change effect, the final lighting mode of the prize opening lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the preliminary change to the relevant change, etc. are determined by lottery and the lamp change effect is executed. You can do it like this.

In addition, when a variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is executed in the normal gaming state, or when a variable display of the first special symbol (first variable performance) is executed in the specific gaming state, If a lamp change effect (a lamp change effect for a suspended memory that will be executed later) has already been executed, the lamp change effect may be ended and not restarted, or the lamp change effect may be interrupted and the corresponding It may be restarted after the variable display of the special symbols is finished.

(Production control unit's winning lighting effect decision process)
With reference to FIG. 46, the winning light emission effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a winning light emission effect determination process in the effect control section 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric effect process.

In step E560-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E560-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current prize winning light emission effect determination process is ended.

In step E560-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the prefetch designation command received from the main control board 110, and in step E560-3, determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the winning light emission effect. If it is the executable period for the winning light emitting effect, the process moves to step E560-4, and if it is not the winning time emitting light effect executable period, the winning emitting light effect is executed based on the prefetch designation command received this time. Assuming that it is not the case, the process for determining the light emitting effect at the time of winning this time is ended.

"Period during which the light emission effect can be executed at the time of winning" means that the jackpot game is not in progress, that when a prefetch designation command based on winning at the first starting port 45 is received, the normal gaming state is present, and that the second starting For example, when a prefetch designation command based on winning in the mouth 47 is received, the game is in a time-saving gaming state.

In step E560-4, the sub CPU 130a acquires a random value for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern to determine a winning light emitting effect pattern to be executed in the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E560-4. 5, a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining a winning light emitting effect pattern is selected. The details of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E560-6, the sub CPU 130a determines a winning light emission effect pattern. Specifically, with reference to the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, the type of special symbol, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each winning light emitting effect pattern are determined. Based on this, one winning light emitting effect pattern is determined from among a plurality of winning light emitting effect patterns.

In step E560-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light emitting effect pattern is a pattern for executing the winning light emitting effect. If the pattern is to execute the light-emitting effect when winning, the process moves to step E560-8, and if the pattern is not to execute the light-emitting effect when winning, the current light-emitting effect determining process is terminated.

In step E560-8, the sub CPU 130a sets a winning light emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current winning light emitting effect determining process. As a result, the winning light emitting effect execution command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the winning light emitting effect is executed in the presentation mode corresponding to the winning light emitting effect execution command.

(Light emission pattern determination table when winning a prize)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a winning light emitting effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a winning light emitting effect pattern.

The winning lighting effect pattern determination table includes the type of special symbol, the type of prefetch designation command (scheduled variation pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning lighting effect pattern, and the selected winning lighting effect pattern. For reference, the performance mode for each winning light emission performance pattern is described.

The winning light emitting effect pattern includes a winning light emitting effect pattern 00 in which the winning light emitting effect is not executed, and winning light emitting effects patterns 01 and 02 in which the winning light emitting effect is executed. In the winning light emission patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light, and the audio output device 9 outputs a predetermined sound effect.

The first feature of the winning light emission effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with a high jackpot expectation level is better than the look-ahead designation command (scheduled variation pattern) with a low jackpot expectation level. However, one point is that the light-emitting effect when winning a prize is easier to execute. By doing so, it becomes easier to increase the player's expectations for the execution of a variable performance with a high expectation of a jackpot, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the winning light emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the winning light emitting effect is easier to execute in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectation of winning a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the winning lighting pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that, unlike the icon final display mode shown in FIG. Can be mentioned. By doing so, the player's sense of expectation can be maintained from the time the game ball enters the starting slot until the result of the variable performance is derived, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, it is also possible to provide a light emission effect pattern (for example, the top lamp 10b emits light in rainbow colors and a confirmation sound is output from the audio output device 9) when a jackpot is confirmed, and in this case, a full rotation reach It is preferable that a winning light emitting effect pattern is determined that will ensure a jackpot at the lowest rate when the above is executed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern determination processing of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described using FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the above-described special figure special electric performance process.

First, in step E610-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received variation pattern designation command, and in step E610-2, selects a variation effect pattern determination table (see FIGS. 49 to 51) according to the current effect mode. do. The details of the variable effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub CPU 130a refers to the selected variable effect pattern determination table, determines one variable effect pattern from among the plurality of variable effect patterns, and sets it in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub CPU 130a sets a variable effect pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable effect pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current variable effect pattern determination process. As a result, a variable effect pattern instruction command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the variable effect is performed.

(Fluctuating performance pattern judgment table)
FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes A to C that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state), and FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance modes D to G (specific game states) that is referred to in order to determine a variable performance pattern in performance mode H. It is a diagram showing a variable performance pattern determination table for performance mode H (specific game state) that is referred to for determination.

As shown in FIGS. 49 to 51, the variable effect pattern determination table associates the special figure variable pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable effect pattern, and the selected variable effect pattern. The performance configuration for each variable performance pattern is described as follows.

"Variation" in the production structure column indicates that a normal variation display in which a ready-to-win state is not formed due to the production symbol 70a is executed.
"Short variation" indicates that a shortened variation display in which a reach state is not formed is executed for a shorter time than a normal variation display.

"Pseudo-failure" refers to a pseudo-successful performance after the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the fluctuating display of one special symbol, and then a pseudo-sequential performance is performed to determine whether or not a pseudo-sequential performance will be executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure effect is executed, which results in the failure of the sequence.
"Pseudo-success" indicates that, after performing a performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed, a pseudo-successful performance that results in the pseudo-successful performance is performed.
"(Fluctuation → Pseudo Success) x 2" means a performance in which a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo consecutive performance will be executed. This shows that two sets of effects will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.
"(Fluctuation → pseudo-success) x 3" is a performance in which a pseudo-successful performance that results in a pseudo-successful performance is performed after an inciting performance that incites whether or not the pseudo-successful performance will be executed. This shows that three sets of performances will be performed, with 1 set being 1 set.

"Variation (Episode 1)" refers to the first stage of a stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production that includes pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and that can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the first episode of the story will be performed.
"Fluctuation (Episode 2)" refers to the second stage of a stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the second episode of the story following the first episode will be performed.
"Fluctuation (Episode 3)" refers to the third stage of the stage production (story production) that can be performed in a variable production including pseudo-failure and pseudo-success, and the production can progress in stages. This indicates that the movie playback of the third episode of the story that follows the second episode will be performed.

"N reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed.
"N '7'reach" indicates that the normal reach effect described above is executed in a state where the reach state is formed by the effect pattern 70a of "7".
"SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP reach effect is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach effect is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach effect is executed.
"Full rotation reach" indicates that the above-mentioned full rotation reach effect is executed.

"SP development" indicates that a development effect suggesting that an SP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"SPSP development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed is executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development effect that suggests that a full rotation reach is executed is executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a plurality of cut-in performances with different jackpot expectation levels will be executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Decision" indicates that a determination performance that suggests whether or not a jackpot game will be executed is executed in accordance with the operation of the performance button 17 during the validity period or the passage of the validity period.
"Failure" indicates that as a result of the deciding performance, a deciding failure performance indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed is executed.
"Success" indicates that as a result of the winning performance, a successful winning performance that suggests that a jackpot game will be executed is executed.

"Loss" means a temporary stop after forming a losing number (a losing display mode such as "358" or "948" which is different from the initial number described later) by the performance pattern 70a that does not include a character but only numbers. It shows.
"c pattern loss" means to form a loss result (a loss display form such as ``358'' or ``948'' which is different from the initial appearance described later) by the performance pattern 70a of the display form including the character and temporarily stop. It is shown that.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is displayed on the image display device.
"Symbol alignment" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the effect pattern 70a that does not include characters and includes only numbers, and the game is temporarily stopped.
"C symbols aligned" indicates that a jackpot is formed (a jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") by the production symbol 70a in a display mode including characters, and the game is temporarily stopped.

"Re-lottery" refers to whether or not the performance symbol 70a that is temporarily stopped at a jackpot (jackpot display mode) will become a jackpot that is advantageous for the player (from an even-numbered performance symbol that normally results in a jackpot, it will become a probability-variable jackpot). (Whether it will be an odd-numbered production symbol or not, or whether it will be a "7" production symbol where the most advantageous jackpot game will be executed), a promotion success production will be performed that will result in an advantageous jackpot. , indicates that a re-lottery performance is executed, such as a promotion failure performance that does not result in an advantageous jackpot.

"Strong vibration 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmed vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second.

"Special symbol fluctuation (end notification performance continuation)" means that the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a is not executed while the end notification performance executed during the last fluctuation performance in the special time-saving gaming state described later is continued. This shows that only the variable display of the symbol TZ is performed.
The "resurrection performance" indicates that a resurrection performance is performed to falsely notify the player of a jackpot after the special time-saving game state ends.
"Special symbol alignment" indicates that the special symbol TZ forms a jackpot (jackpot display mode such as "222" or "777") and is stopped and displayed in a state where the production symbol 70a is not displayed.

The "chance performance" indicates that the above-mentioned chance performance (a performance in which a text image of "chance approaching" is displayed on the first image display device 70) is performed.
"Acquisition effect (role object strong descending motion)" is a jackpot acquisition effect (effect in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum movement position and the success effect image SEF is displayed) that suggests that a jackpot has been won. indicates that it will be done.

"Result display" indicates that the above-mentioned result display is performed.
The "resurrection performance (strong descending motion of the role object)" is a resurrection performance (the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operation position and the success effect image SEF This indicates that a performance (in which a is displayed) will be performed.

"Fluctuation (short entry performance)" means that the above-mentioned short entry performance is performed when it is the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state, and the above-mentioned short entry performance is not performed when it is not the first fluctuation of the special time-saving gaming state. It is shown that.
"Variation + long entry effect" indicates that the above-mentioned long entry effect is performed in the first variation of the special time saving game state.

"Immediate win success" indicates that an effect is performed in which the player is notified of an advantageous result (big win) without going through reach.
"Immediate hit success (role object strong descending motion)" is an effect in which the player is notified of an advantageous result (jackpot) without going through reach (the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position) This indicates that an effect in which a success effect image SEF is displayed will be performed.

The "end notification performance (door closed)" indicates that the above-mentioned end notification performance (a performance in which the door image is closed and a text image is displayed to notify the end of the special time-saving game state) is performed.

The first feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the SP reach effect or the SPSP reach effect is executed, the eye catch effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is After execution, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to feel strange due to the change in the display mode of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the performance symbols 70a will be stopped and displayed, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

The second feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that in the case of a jackpot, there are variable effect patterns in which the winning effect is executed and the symbols are aligned, and variable effect patterns in which the symbols are aligned and the symbols are aligned and the winning effect is successful. One point is that there is a variable performance pattern in which the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect in the case of a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that in the variable effect pattern that results in a jackpot, when the effect patterns 70a that do not include characters line up, the effect button 17 is pressed for 4 seconds. One point is that a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is performed in which the machine vibrates strongly. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is the strong vibration that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate strongly for one second when the effect patterns 70a including characters are aligned (c patterns aligned). One point is that a performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively produce a big hit, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the reach performance (normal reach The point is that the proportion of reach effects performed with even-numbered effect symbols 70a (the effect symbols that usually result in a jackpot when a jackpot roll is made) is higher than the proportion of effects that are performed (performance, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the rate at which reach performance is performed with even-numbered performance symbols 70a (production symbols that usually result in a jackpot when the result is a jackpot) is The point is that the percentage of reach effects (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) being performed is lower with the production pattern 70a of "7" (the production pattern that is the most advantageous probability variable jackpot by getting a jackpot). Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the reach performance (normal reach Direction, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) One point to note is that the ratio of "reach performance" and "SPSP reach performance" is lower. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's joy when the player hits a jackpot with the performance symbol 70a of "7", and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the ready-to-win performance is executed with an even-numbered performance symbol 70a or an odd-numbered performance symbol 70a other than "7", "7" When the ready-to-win effect is executed with the effect pattern 70a, the expectation of a jackpot is higher. Therefore, it is possible for the player to increase his or her expectations as to which type of performance symbol will be used to perform the ready-to-win performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the effect modes D to G (specific game state) are the most advantageous than the effect modes A to C (normal game state). In the case of a probability variable jackpot, a reach performance (SPSP reach performance) is likely to be executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7" (the performance symbol which becomes the most advantageous probability variable jackpot when the jackpot roll is made). Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), even if the reach effect is executed with the effect symbol 70a of "7", the jackpot is guaranteed. However, in performance modes D to G (specific game states), if the ready-to-win performance is executed with the performance symbol 70a of "7", a jackpot is guaranteed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effects in performance modes D to G (specific game states), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the special time is shorter than when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect of loss) is executed in the normal gaming state. The point is that the same variable performance pattern is more easily executed when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation performance of loss) is executed in the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the production effect when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed depending on the gaming state, and also to enter the game ball into the second starting port 47 in the special time-saving gaming state. It is possible to encourage the player to play the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the variation performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the variation performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 has a special The point is that the same variable performance pattern is more easily executed when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation performance of loss) is executed in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the game state and the type of special symbol, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the loss variation display of the second special symbol (the second variation effect of loss) is executed in the special time reduction gaming state, and when the special time reduction In the gaming state, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect of loss) is executed, the foreshadowing effect (reach stimulation effect) that suggests the possibility that the reach effect will be executed is executed. One point is that the execution rate of the variable performance in which the ready-to-win performance is not executed is different (the execution rate is high when the second special symbol lose first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state). Therefore, the production effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the special time-saving game state, the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol (the second fluctuation of loss) is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol (the first fluctuation performance of loss) is executed. However, when a reach effect (direction) is executed, the execution rate of a fluctuating effect in which a foreshadowing effect indicating the possibility of a reach effect (a reach promotion effect) is executed but a reach effect is not executed is higher. , and vice versa. In this case, in the special time-saving gaming state, when the first variation performance of losing is executed and when the second variation production of losing is executed, the reach promotion effect is executed, but the variation where the reach effect is not executed. After the performance is executed, the execution ratio of the first variable performance that is a loss may be increased.

The fourteenth feature of the variable effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that the first period in the normal gaming state (during the expiration period of the second reservation remaining after the end of the time-saving gaming state); In the second period (after the expiration period of the remaining second hold after the end of the time-saving gaming state), which is different, a foreshadowing performance (reach inciting performance) that suggests the possibility of a reach performance is executed, but the reach performance is The difference is that the execution rate of the loss variation effect that is not executed is different. Therefore, even in the normal gaming state, the effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be varied, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the variation effect pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that when the loss variation display of the second special symbol (the second variation effect of loss) is executed in the normal time reduction gaming state, and when the special time reduction In the gaming state, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (the first variation effect of loss) is executed, the foreshadowing effect (reach stimulation effect) that suggests the possibility that the reach effect will be executed is executed. The difference is that the rate of execution of variable effects in which reach effects are not executed is different. Therefore, the production effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixteenth feature of the variable performance pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 49 to 51 is that it is possible to execute a staged performance (story performance) that can progress step by step in a variable performance in which a pseudo continuous performance is executed, and the expectation level It is possible to perform the second stage of the stage performance (playing the movie of the second story episode) after executing the normal reach performance with a low level of reach, while the second stage of the stage performance (playing the movie of the second story episode) can be executed after the execution of the SP/SPSP reach performance with high expectations. Movie playback of the second episode) is not executed. Therefore, by varying whether or not the stage performance progresses depending on the type of reach performance, the performance effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the variable performance pattern in which the pseudo-continuous performance is executed, the ready-to-win performance is always performed, but a variable performance pattern may be provided in which the ready-to-win performance is not performed even if the pseudo-continuous performance is performed.

In addition, if you stop temporarily due to a loss after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance, it is guaranteed to be a loss, but a resurrection performance that is guaranteed to be a jackpot after a cut-in performance or a failed decision performance. may also be executed.

In addition, when a variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, a foreshadowing effect (reach inciting effect) indicating the possibility of a reach effect is executed, but the reach effect is Although the variable effect is not executed, it may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the loss variation display (second variation performance) of the second special symbol is executed at a lower rate than when it is executed in the normal game state or the normal time-saving game state.

(Timer effect determination process in the effect control unit)
The timer performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a timer effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m, and this process includes a variable effect pattern determination process (a variable effect pattern is determined based on a special figure variable pattern designation command) in the above-mentioned special figure special electric effect effect process. (determining process).

In step E620-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the current variable performance pattern, and in step E620-2, performs a reach performance (including a chance performance) or higher (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, It is determined whether special SP reach, chance performance) is executed. If a performance equal to or higher than the ready-to-reach performance is executed, the process moves to step E620-3, and if a performance equal to or higher than the SP ready-to-reach performance is not executed, the current timer performance determination process is ended.

In step E620-3, the sub CPU 130a uses the event timer frequency determination table (see FIG. 53) to determine the number of event timer effects ("0 times" to "2 times") to be executed during the current variable effect. do. Specifically, the jackpot lottery results, variable performance patterns, etc. are checked against the event timer count determination table. Note that details of the event timer count determination table will be described later.

An event timer effect indicates that any one of multiple suggestive events (excluding icon changes) will occur during the execution process of the variable effect, and indicates the timing at which the suggestive event will occur. However, when the event timer effect is executed, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of suggestion event, and it becomes possible for the player to determine the type of suggestion event at the time the suggestion event occurs. There is.

Suggestive events include normal reach performance, pseudo-continuation, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance, special SP reach performance, valid period, jackpot symbol stop, etc.

In step E620-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined number of event timer effects is one for executing the event timer effect. If the event timer effect is to be executed (the number of event timer effects is "once" or "twice"), the process moves to step E620-5, and if the event timer effect is not to be executed (the event timer effect is "once" or "twice"), the process moves to step E620-5. If the number of performances is "0"), the current timer performance determination process is ended.

In step E620-5, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the determined number of event timer effects is one. If it is once, the process moves to step E620-6, and if it is not once but twice, the process moves to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, the sub CPU 130a uses the one-time timer suggestion event determination table (see FIG. 54) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the event timer presentation and the timer type classified by the type and length of the timer. Determine. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the suggestion event determination table for one timer. Note that the details of the suggestion event determination table for one timer will be described later.

The timer types include short timer, which is a classification of short timer time, middle timer, which is a classification of long timer time, and long timer, which is a classification of long timer time. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

In step E620-7, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot lottery results, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Note that details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-8, the sub CPU 130a sets the timer effect pattern command indicating the suggested event and the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 130c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, the timer effect pattern command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-9, the sub CPU 130a uses the first suggestion event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(a)) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the first event timer presentation and the timer's suggestion event. Determine timer types classified by type and length. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the first suggestion event determination table for the two-timer. Note that the details of the first suggestion event determination table for the two-time timer will be described later.

In step E620-10, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the first event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot lottery results, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Note that details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-11, the sub CPU 130a sets a timer effect designation command indicating a suggested event and an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c. As a result, a timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the first event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

In step E620-12, the sub CPU 130a uses the second suggestion event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(b)) to determine the suggestion event suggested by the second event timer presentation and the timer. Determine timer types classified by length. Specifically, the variable effect pattern, etc. is checked against the second suggestion event determination table for the two-timer. Note that the details of the second suggestion event determination table for the two-timer will be described later.

In step E620-13, the sub CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (effect mode) in the second event timer effect. Specifically, the timer type, jackpot determination result, etc. are checked against the update pattern determination table. Note that details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a timer effect pattern command indicating a suggested event and an update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 120c, and ends the current timer effect determination process. As a result, a timer effect designation command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and processing for executing the second event timer effect during the variable effect is performed.

(Event timer count determination table)
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing an event timer number determination table that is referred to when determining the number of event timer performances performed during a variable performance. The event timer number determination table includes the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern, the distribution ratio (%) for each event timer performance in the normal setting and simple setting by customizing the performance, and the determined number of event timer performances. are associated.

The number of event timer effects includes "0 times" which means the event timer effect will not be executed, "1 time" which means the event timer effect will be executed once, and "1 time" which means the event timer effect will be executed twice. Three types of "twice" are set.

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, in simple settings, the rate at which each number of times the event timer effect is executed (1 time, 2 times) is selected is the rate at which each number of times (1 time, 2 times) the event timer effect is executed is selected. Although it is designed to be 1/2, it may be more or less than 1/2.

The first feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when it is a loss, and the reach with a low jackpot expectation One point is that the event timer performance is more likely to be executed when a reach-for-win performance with a high expectation of a jackpot is executed than when a performance is executed. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the number of times the event timer effect is executed is likely to be greater when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's interest in the number of executions of the event timer effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. An example of this is that the number of executions of the performance tends to increase. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the event timer frequency determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the execution rate of the timer effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) by the player. By doing so, it is possible to set the performance balance that suits the player's preference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C, when the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP reach production pattern, the timer production is executed. The performance may not be performed (limited). In this case, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed during the performance modes A to C, and when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed during the performance modes D to H, If the variable display) is executed, the timer effect will not be executed.

(Suggestive event determination table for one timer)
FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a suggestion event determination table for a single timer that is referred to when determining a timer type and a suggestion event when an event timer production is executed once during a variable production. The suggestion event determination table for one timer is associated with a variable performance pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type.

Eight types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo-continuation, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, special SP reach, valid period, and jackpot symbol stop.

Furthermore, three types of timers are set: a short timer, which is a classification of short timer times, a middle timer, which is a classification of long timer times, and a long timer, which is a classification of long timer times. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

The first feature of the one-time timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. 54 is that the types of suggestion events are set to differ depending on the variable performance pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the one-time timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. The higher the degree, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Suggestion event determination table for two timers)
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a suggestion event when the event timer effect is executed twice during the variable effect and a suggestion event determination table for the two-time timer that is referred to when determining the timer type. In the suggestion event determination table for two timers, a variable performance pattern, a distribution ratio (%) for each suggestion event, a suggestion event to be determined, and a timer type are associated with each other.

Note that FIG. 55(a) is a diagram showing a first suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the first suggestion event and the type of timer type, and FIG. ) is a diagram showing a second suggestion event determination table for two timers for determining the type of the second suggestion event and the type of timer type.

Seven types of suggestion events are set: normal reach, pseudo-continuation, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, valid period, full rotation reach effect, and jackpot symbol stop.

Furthermore, three types of timers are set: a short timer, which is a classification of short timer times, a middle timer, which is a classification of long timer times, and a long timer, which is a classification of long timer times. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timer<middle timer<long timer.

The first feature of the suggestion event determination table for the two-timer timer shown in FIG. 55 is that the types of suggestion events are set to differ depending on the variable performance pattern. By doing so, it is possible to increase the variations of the timer effect, prevent the player from getting bored, and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second feature of the two-timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. One point is that both events that are executed late in the variation performance are likely to be determined as suggestion events. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation over a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the third feature of the two-timer suggestion event determination table shown in FIG. The higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Update pattern determination table)
FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a timer update pattern (effect mode). The update pattern determination table is associated with the timer type, jackpot determination result, allocation ratio (%) for each update pattern, and update pattern to be determined.For reference, the timer time, timer display mode, and timer display mode for each update pattern are associated. The timer display position and whether or not a standby display indicating that execution of the timer effect is on standby are described.

The "normal pattern" is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds.
A "special pattern" means that after the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 is decremented by 1 from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, the timer (number of seconds) is rewound. This is a special update pattern in which the time is subtracted by 1 until it reaches 0 seconds again.

The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The jackpot expectation for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The expected jackpot for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2< The normal pattern is 28.

In this way, in the timer effect, multiple timer times (update patterns) are set, but by counting down to 0 seconds, the timer effect can be used for predetermined events (icon change effect, various reach effects, zone effect, count up). This is a performance that suggests the timing of a predetermined event, so no matter what timer time (update pattern) , the count value is counted up to the final arrival point (in this embodiment, 0 seconds).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that, regardless of the timer type, the update pattern has a longer timer time when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a loss. There are some points that are easy to determine. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer effect, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have a sense of expectation regarding the length of the timer time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

A second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that even if the timer time is the same, the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the timer display mode (font color). By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the display mode of the timer, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Specifically, the jackpot expectation level according to the timer display mode (font color) is white < blue < red < rainbow (jackpot confirmed).

(Jackpot preview production decision process by production control department)
The jackpot preview performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the jackpot preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process includes the variable performance pattern determination process in the above-mentioned special figure special electric performance process (variable performance pattern based on the special figure fluctuation pattern designation command). (determining process).

In step E650-1, the sub CPU 130a refers to the variable effect pattern to be executed in the current variable effect, and in step E650-2, the sub CPU 130a creates an accessory that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed at the start of the change. The variation start accessory notice determination table (see FIGS. 58 and 59) for determining the notice pattern is selected, and the notice pattern is determined. Note that details of the change start accessory advance notice determination table will be described later.

The "fluctuating starting accessory advance notice performance" is a type of jackpot advance notice performance in which the accessory (first movable member 73) is operated in an operation mode according to the jackpot expectation level at the start of the fluctuation performance.

In step E650-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the accessory preview performance at the start of variation is one for executing the accessory preview performance at the start of variation. If the performance is not to execute the accessory notice at the start of the fluctuation, the process moves to step E650-5, and if the purpose is to execute the accessory notice at the start, in step E650-4, the accessory advance notice is executed. Set the accessory preview performance command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the accessory preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the accessory preview performance at the start of the variation according to the accessory preview pattern is executed at the start of the fluctuation performance.

In step E650-5, the sub CPU 130a performs a pre-reach preview determination process to determine a preview pattern of a pre-reach preview performance that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be executed during the pre-reach performance period (high-speed fluctuation period). Select the table (see FIG. 60) and decide on the notice pattern. Note that the details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a dialogue preview performance. If the dialogue preview performance is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-7, and if the dialogue preview performance is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-9.

"Speech preview performance" means that a valid period occurs during a variable performance (high-speed fluctuation period), and according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period or the elapse of the valid time, the image display device indicates the expectation of a jackpot. This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which a dialogue image is displayed and a sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-7, the sub CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 62) for determining a dialogue preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance, and determines a dialogue preview pattern. Set a dialogue preview production command according to the preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, a line preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a line preview performance according to the line preview pattern is executed during the fluctuating performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the ready-to-reach preview performance is one for executing a step-up preview performance. If the step-up preview effect is to be executed, the process moves to step E650-10, and if the step-up preview effect is not to be executed, the process moves to step E650-12.

"Step-up notice performance" means multiple steps from the 1st step (first stage) to the 5th step (final stage) without causing the effective period of the performance button 17 during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). This is a type of jackpot preview performance in which step performances are executed in a predetermined order until reaching one of the steps.

In step E650-10, the sub CPU 130a selects the step-up notice pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the step-up notice pattern of the step-up notice performance, determines the step-up notice pattern, and executes the step-up notice pattern in step E650-10. At step 11, a step-up notice performance command corresponding to the step-up notice pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a step-up notice performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up notice performance according to the step-up notice pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Note that details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a pseudo continuous effect. If it is a variable performance pattern that performs a pseudo continuous performance, the process moves to step E650-13, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that does not perform a pseudo continuous performance, the process moves to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub CPU 130a selects the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the pseudo continuous effect pattern of the pseudo continuous effect, and determines the pseudo continuous effect pattern, and in step E650-14. At , a pseudo continuous effect command corresponding to the pseudo continuous effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a pseudo continuous performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo continuous performance according to the pseudo continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-15, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variation performance pattern is a variation performance pattern for executing a development performance (SP development performance, SPSP development performance, full rotation development performance). If it is a variable effect pattern that executes an advanced effect, the process moves to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes an advanced effect, the process moves to step E650-18.

In step E650-16, the sub CPU 130a selects the development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance and determines the development performance pattern, and in step E650-17, the development performance pattern is determined. Set the advanced production command according to the pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and the development effect according to the development effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the advanced performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-18, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that executes a reach performance (post-reach performance). If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the process moves to step E650-19, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a ready-to-win performance, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-19, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-20, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a cut-in effect, the process moves to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub CPU 130a selects the cut-in effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for determining the cut-in effect pattern of the cut-in effect, and determines the cut-in effect pattern. At , a cut-in effect command corresponding to the cut-in effect pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a cut-in effect command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a cut-in effect according to the cut-in effect pattern is executed during the variable effect. Note that details of the cut-in effect pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern for executing a fixed performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a fixed effect, the process moves to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub CPU 130a selects the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 67) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance and determines the final performance pattern, and in step E650-24, the final performance pattern is determined. Set the determined production command according to the pattern in the sending buffer. As a result, a fixed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a fixed performance according to the fixed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Note that details of the fixed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current variable effect pattern is a variable effect pattern for executing a re-lottery effect. If it is a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable effect pattern that executes a re-lottery effect, the process moves to step E650-28.

In step E650-26, the sub CPU 130a selects the re-lottery effect pattern determination table (see FIG. 68) for determining the re-lottery effect pattern of the re-lottery effect, and determines the re-lottery effect pattern, and in step E650-27. At , a re-lottery performance command corresponding to the re-lottery performance pattern is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, a re-lottery performance command is transmitted to the display control section 140 and the lamp control section 150, and a re-lottery performance according to the re-lottery performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-28, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that allows execution of a confirmed performance (results in a jackpot). If the variable performance pattern is such that a confirmed performance can be executed, the process moves to step E650-29, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that allows a confirmed performance to be executed, the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended.

In step E650-29, the sub CPU 130a selects the final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 69) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance, and determines the final performance pattern. A confirmed performance command corresponding to the pattern is set in the transmission buffer, and the current jackpot preview performance determination process is ended. As a result, a confirmed performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance according to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The details of the confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described later.

(Accessory notice determination table at the start of fluctuation)
FIG. 58 shows a fluctuation start accessory notice determination table for performance modes A to C (normal game state) that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for the fluctuation start accessory advance notice performance in performance modes A to C. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the accessory notice at the start of variation for production modes D to H (specific game states), which is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the performance. It is a figure showing a decision table.

The fluctuation start accessory notice determination table includes the performance mode, jackpot judgment result, fluctuation performance pattern, selection rate (%) of each fluctuation start accessory notice pattern, and selected fluctuation start accessory notice pattern. are associated.

The accessory notice pattern at the start of the variation includes no notice, a rattling motion in which the first movable member 73 is moved up and down in the initial position (standby position) at the start of the variation production, and the start of the variation production. A weak lowering operation is set in which the first movable member 73 is lowered from the initial position to an intermediate position between the initial position and the presentation position and then returned to the initial position.

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the fluctuation start accessory notice determination table shown in FIGS. 58 to 59 is that when the second fluctuation performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), The weak descending motion is not executed as the object notice pattern, that is, the execution of the accessory object notice effect at the start of fluctuation is restricted. By doing this, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) in which it is advantageous for the player to play left-handed, the first variation is performed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45. It is possible to promote the execution of the performance and improve the interest of the game.

As a second feature of the variation starting accessory notice determination table shown in FIGS. 58 to 59, in production modes A to C (normal game state), the second variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is When executed, the weak descending motion is not executed as the fluctuation start accessory notice pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start accessory advance notice effect is restricted. By doing this, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) in which it is advantageous for the player to play left-handed, the first variation is performed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45. It is possible to promote the execution of the performance and improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the change start accessory notice determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59 is that in performance modes D to G (probability change game state, normal time-saving game state), it corresponds to the change display of the first special symbol. When the first variation performance is executed, the weak descending motion is not performed as the variation start accessory notice pattern, that is, the execution of the variation start accession notice performance is restricted. By doing this, in production modes D to G (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) in which it is advantageous for the player to play right-handed, the game ball enters the second starting port 47. It is possible to promote the execution of the second variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the variation starting accessory notice determination table shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, in production mode H (special time-saving game state), the first variation performance corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed. In this case, the weak descending motion is not executed as the fluctuation start accessory object notice pattern, that is, the execution of the fluctuation start accessory object notice effect is restricted. By doing this, in performance mode H (special time-saving game state) in which it is advantageous for the player to hit right, the second variable performance is performed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47. It is possible to promote the execution of the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the second variation production corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP reach production pattern, a role item notice (rattling movement) at the start of variation is ) is executed, however, the announcement of the accessory at the start of fluctuation may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in performance modes D to G (probable variable game state, normal time-saving game state), when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the chance performance pattern, a notice of the accessory at the start of the fluctuation is given. (rattling motion) is executed, however, the announcement of the accessory at the start of the fluctuation may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in production mode H (special time saving game state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a special SP reach production pattern, or when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, When the first variation effect is executed in the end-suggestion revival effect pattern, the accessory notice (rattling motion) at the start of the variation is set to be executed, but the accessory notice at the start of the variation is not executed (limited). ).

In addition, in production modes D to H (specific game states), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the weak downward movement of the first movable member 73 is no longer executed. However, the first movable member 73 may be moved slightly downward. In this case, the weak downward movement of the first movable member 73 is performed at a lower rate than when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is recommended that it be executed.

Further, although the variable start role preview performance is not a customization target performance whose execution rate changes depending on the normal setting and simple setting, it may be a customization target performance. In this case, as with other customization target effects, the selection rate (execution rate) of "rattling motion" and "weak descending motion" in the simple setting will be lower than the selection rate (execution rate) in the normal setting (e.g. , 1/2, 1/3, etc.).

(Pre-reach notice determination table)
FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a pre-reach advance notice determination table for production modes A to C (normal gaming state) that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for pre-reach notice production in production modes A to C (normal gaming state). FIG. 61 is a pre-reach notice determination table for production modes D to H (specific gaming states) that is referred to when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance in production modes D to H (specific gaming states). FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the pre-reach notice determination table is associated with the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern, selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and selected notice pattern. .

There are three pre-reach preview patterns: ``No notice'' in which the pre-reach preview is not executed, ``Speech preview'' in which the dialogue preview is executed, and ``Step-up notice'' in which the step-up notice is executed. The types are set, and the expectation level for the jackpot game to be executed (the rate at which the vibrating effects associated with the alignment of the symbols described above are executed) is as follows: no advance notice < dialogue advance notice performance < step-up advance notice performance.

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the pre-reach preview determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when the jackpot determination result is a loss, and when the jackpot determination result is The point is that the pre-reach preview performance is more likely to be executed when a variable performance pattern with a high jackpot expectation level is determined than when a variable performance pattern with a low probability is determined. By doing so, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the execution of the jackpot game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that there is a higher chance of losing in production modes D to G (specific gaming state) than in production modes A to C (normal gaming state). In this case, a pre-reach preview performance (both a line preview performance that allows a vibration performance to be executed with the validity period of the production button 17, and a step-up preview performance that allows a vibration performance to be executed without the validity period of the production button 17) The problem is that it is difficult to implement (execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the reach pre-notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61 is that the jackpot is higher in production modes D to G (specific gaming state) than in production modes A to C (normal gaming state). Even in this case, when the variable performance pattern is a pattern for performing a normal reach performance and a pattern for performing a SP ready-to-reach performance, the ready-to-reach advance notice performance is difficult to be executed (the execution rate is low). Therefore, in performance modes D to G (specific game states) in which the variable time tends to be short, wasteful pre-reach preview performances are less likely to be executed, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

As a fourth feature of the reach advance notice determination table shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, a step-up without the effective period of the effect button 17 is more effective than when a dialogue preview effect with the effective period of the effect button 17 is executed. When a preview performance is executed, the expectation level of a jackpot (rate of execution of the vibration performance in conjunction with the above-mentioned pattern alignment, rate of execution of vibration performance in the deciding performance described later, etc.) is higher. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, when the step-up notice performance is executed, the jackpot expectation level (the rate at which the vibration performance associated with the alignment of symbols mentioned above is performed, and the success performance described later) is higher when the dialogue preview performance is executed. (e.g., the rate at which accompanying vibration effects are performed) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), when the second variable production corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the pre-reach preview production (line preview production) will be executed. However, the pre-reach preview effect may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in production modes D to G (probability variable gaming state, normal time saving gaming state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance) Although it is designed to be executed, the pre-reach preview performance may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in production mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the pre-reach preview production (line preview production) will now be executed. However, the pre-reach preview effect may not be executed (limited).

In addition, in production modes D to H (specific game states), when the first variable production corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the validity period of step-up notice production (pattern 5 etc. to be described later) occurs. However, a step-up preview effect may be executed. In this case, the step-up notice performance (such as pattern 5 described later) is performed at a lower rate than when the first variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). It is preferable that a vibration effect (vibration effect that does not occur during the valid period) is executed.

Further, although the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is not a customization target performance whose execution rate changes depending on the normal setting and simple setting, it may be a customization target performance. In this case, as with other customization target effects, the selection rate (execution rate) of the "line preview effect" and/or "step-up preview effect" in the simple setting is higher than the selection rate (execution rate) in the normal setting. It is preferable to set it to a lower value (for example, 1/2 or 1/3).

(Serif notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a dialogue preview pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a preview pattern for a dialogue preview performance.

As shown in FIG. 62, the dialogue announcement pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue announcement pattern, and selected dialogue announcement pattern. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestive production, validity period, content of production) of each line preview pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the dialogue preview performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, operation sound 1 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for a jackpot.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period, and "3 seconds dialogue display period" means that the dialogue image display period is 3 seconds. It shows that there is.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue production mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being executed is displayed in black letters, and that the normal dialogue is output as audio. It shows.
"Chance speech (black)" indicates that a chance speech that has a possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in black letters, and that the chance speech is outputted as voice.
"Reach line (black)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in black letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that the reach line that confirms the execution of the reach effect is displayed in red letters, and that the reach line is output as audio.

"Heat dialogue (red)" indicates that a heat dialogue that has a high possibility of executing a jackpot game is displayed in red letters, and that the heat dialogue is outputted as a voice.
The term "hot line (gold)" indicates that a line with a very high probability of winning a jackpot game is displayed in golden letters, and at the same time, the line is outputted as a voice.
The "confirmed line (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed line that confirms the execution of the jackpot game is displayed in rainbow-colored characters, and that the confirmed line is outputted as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts from the time the lines start to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is strong for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the production button 17 is operated or the valid period ends). This indicates that a strong vibrating effect will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each dialogue production mode is: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Heat dialogue (red)" < "Extreme heat" ``Serif (gold)'' < ``Confirmed line (rainbow)''. In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that when a line with high expectation of jackpot (hot line or higher) is displayed, a vibration effect can be executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the line preview performance of the super hot line, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the hot line, is executed, compared to the case where the line preview performance of the hot line is executed. In this case, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the dialogue preview effect of the heat dialogue is executed. One point is that the expectation of a big hit is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when it is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the dialogue preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue with a high probability of winning a jackpot (hot dialogue or higher) is displayed has a relatively short duration. Can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are several types of points. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the period of vibration of the production button 17 (1 second) while the dialogue image is displayed is shorter than the display period of the dialogue image (3 seconds). can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but not to have an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects performed during the dialogue preview production, but it is also possible to use only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects, or the vibration effects may be stronger than the vibration duration of the weak vibration effects. The vibration time may be increased.

Furthermore, the expected level of jackpot when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect mode D to G (specific game state). However, the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), or the expectation level of jackpot may be higher in production modes D to G (specific gaming state). You can also do this. In this way, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is also possible to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the effective period ends and the dialogue preview performance is executed by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, but if the effective period ends due to the elapse of the effective time, the dialogue preview performance is executed. You may choose not to execute it.

Also, although the dialogue preview performance is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the dialogue preview performance without generating a valid period. It is also possible to perform only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a step-up notice pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a notice pattern for a step-up notice performance.

As shown in FIG. 63, the step-up notice pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up notice pattern, and selected step-up notice pattern. The performance contents (step-up (SU) performance mode, button vibration) of each step-up notice pattern are described for reference.

"1→2" in the step-up effect mode column indicates that the first to second step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step effects are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step effects are executed in order, the fourth step effect is skipped and the fifth step effect is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the last step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the last step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at 5" in the button vibration column means that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect. It shows that it will be done.

"Button state" indicates the state of the production button 17 while the step-up preview production is being executed, and "Normal (off)" in the button state column is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This shows that the production button 17 is turned off.

The jackpot expectation for each step-up production mode is "1 → 2" < "1 → 2 → 3" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5" < "1 → 2 → 3 → 5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates 17. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration effect that is executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with high expectation of jackpot is displayed is for a relatively short time. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is the vibration mode (vibration intensity, vibration One point is that there is only one predetermined type of time (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up preview performance in which the player does not operate the performance button 17 and it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration performance, it is possible to suppress the performance form from becoming complicated, and improve the interest of the game. becomes possible.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , Step-up preview performances with low expectations are difficult to execute (execution rate is low). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the weak vibration effect is easily executed (execution rate is high). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is high when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 without a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the ready-to-win effect is executed, but not to have an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) when the performance button 17 does not have a valid period (display of an operation promotion image) in the step-up notice performance. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when the vibration effect is executed. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

(pseudo continuous performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for a pseudo-continuous performance.

As shown in FIG. 64, the pseudo continuous effect pattern determination table is associated with the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each pseudo continuous effect pattern, and selected pseudo continuous effect pattern. The performance structure (effective suggestive performance, effective period, performance content) of each pseudo-continuous performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the pseudo continuous performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that encourages the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 is displayed at a specific position, and The effect is to display a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 2 different from the operation sound 1 described above is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button white" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for a jackpot, and "protruding (red)" is a protruding state in which the production button 17 is protruding and the production button 17 has a low expectation of a jackpot. This indicates that it emits light in a high red color.

"Production content" refers to the content of the production related to the pseudo-continuous production, and "temporary suspension period of pseudo-continuation pattern 2 seconds" means that the period in which the pseudo-pattern, which will be described later, is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds. It shows.

"Pseudo-failure" in the pseudo-sequence production mode column means that the normal production pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo-symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo-sequence as the central production pattern 70a, and the failure sound effect is emitted. This indicates that the outputted pseudo consecutive failure performance will be executed.
"Pseudo success" means that the pseudo symbol 70a in the center that suggests the execution of a pseudo series temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, the second movable member 74 moves weakly, and the pseudo series is executed. This indicates that a pseudo consecutive success performance will be executed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 starts when the pseudo pattern temporarily stops (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a weak vibration effect that vibrates weakly for one second will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each promotional performance is "normal button white" < "protruding button white". Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the vibration performance executed when the pseudo continuous success performance is performed is a variable performance pattern with high expectation of jackpot and is performed for a relatively short time. There are several points that can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the situation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration Although it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the motor, second movable member 74, etc., it is possible to execute a pseudo continuous performance using the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) rather than performance modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) has a higher expectation of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo-sequence performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are cases in which a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is executed using a button vibration motor that vibrates. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo-continuous performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the pseudo-sequence production pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the period (1 second) is shorter. Therefore, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation before the SP reach performance or the SPSP reach performance is executed, but to prevent the player from having an excessive sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the performance button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, but it may not be in a protruding state.

Further, although there are a weak vibration performance and a strong vibration performance as the vibration performance executed in the pseudo consecutive success performance, only the weak vibration performance or only the strong vibration performance may be used.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute a pseudo consecutive success effect or a pseudo consecutive failure effect, it is also possible to execute a pseudo continuous success effect or a pseudo continuous failure effect without generating a valid period. The vibration performance that is often performed during the pseudo consecutive success performance may be only a 3-second weak vibration performance or only a 3-second strong vibration performance, or only a 1-second weak vibration performance or only a 1-second strong vibration performance. You can also do this.

Furthermore, performance modes A to C (normal game state) are better than performance modes D to G (specific game state) because they are simulated using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a consecutive performance (pseudo successive success performance) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration). The expectation level of a jackpot when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using a motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed may be made higher, and performance modes D~ than performance mode G may be set. Even if F is made to have a higher jackpot expectation when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous success performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed. good.

Further, in the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo continuous successful performance), the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is performed, but the motion performance using the first movable member 73 may be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the second movable member 74 is higher than that of the motion performance using the first movable member 73.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an advanced performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a performance pattern for advanced performance.

As shown in FIG. 65, the advanced performance pattern determination table includes the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, advanced performance type for which the advanced performance pattern is determined, selection rate (%) of each advanced performance pattern, The selected advanced performance patterns are associated with each other, and the performance configuration (effective suggestive performance, valid period, and performance content) of each advanced performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
``None'' in the effective suggestion effect column indicates that the effective suggestion effect is not executed, and ``Yes (gase)'' indicates that the effective suggestion effect is executed but the validity period does not occur after that. This indicates that this is an effective suggestion effect, and "present" indicates that the effective suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

The "validity period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the advanced performance progresses step by step by long pressing the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the advanced performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, as a result of a plurality of translucent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect is created. The button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 3 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 and 2 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Normal button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. "Normal (red)" means the normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude, and the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for a jackpot. This indicates that it emits light in a high red color.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production related to the development production, and "Temporary stop period of development symbol 2 seconds" indicates that the period in which the development symbol is temporarily stopped is 2 seconds, which will be described later. ing.

"SP notification" in the column of development performance mode means that as a result of the development performance, an SP development design that suggests development to SP reach performance is derived and displayed, and an SP development performance that outputs the first development sound effect is executed. Which indicates that.
"SPSP notification" indicates that as a result of the development performance, an SPSP development design that suggests development to the SPSP reach performance is derived and displayed, and an SPSP development performance that outputs a second development sound effect is executed. .
"Full rotation notification" refers to the execution of a full rotation development effect that derives and displays a full rotation development symbol that suggests development to a full rotation reach effect as a result of the development effect, and outputs a third development sound effect. It shows.

The "weak motion" in the accessory motion column is a weak motion effect in which the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak motion with a small motion width when various symbols are displayed (at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.
"Strong motion" means that a strong motion performance is executed in which the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong motion with a large swing width when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). It shows.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 is weak for 1 second from the time when various advanced symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). This indicates that a weak vibration effect will be executed.
"Strong vibration (1 second)" is a weak vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 1 second from the time when various symbols are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

The jackpot expectation level of each action performance is "weak action" < "strong action". In addition, the jackpot expectation level of each vibration performance is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration".

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect period of the button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the development performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. , the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and when the SPSP development effect is executed, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. One point is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, when the SPSP development effect is executed, the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed can be increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that it is a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot, and is executed when an advanced performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed. One of the points is that the vibration performance is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to perform highly effective performances while suppressing inconveniences such as misunderstanding that the execution of the jackpot game has been confirmed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is the vibration of the vibration performance that is executed when the advanced performance (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed in a variable performance pattern with high expectation of jackpot. There are two types of strength depending on the degree of jackpot expectation. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fifth feature of the advanced performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the same performance device (performance button vibration motor , second movable member 74, etc.), but the performance modes D to G (specific game state) are more effective than the performance modes A to C (normal game state). On the other hand, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when an advanced performance is executed using a performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development pattern is the same as the vibration period (2 seconds) of the effect button 17 during the temporary stop of the development pattern. Or, the ratio of the difference between the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the development symbol and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the performance button 17 is smaller than the pre-reach preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the advanced effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

In addition, production modes A to C (normal gaming state) are more advanced than production modes D to G (specific gaming states) using the same production device (production button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.). The expectation level of a jackpot when a performance (SPSP advanced performance, etc.) is executed may be set higher, and performance mode B or C may be set higher than performance mode A using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, etc.). , the second movable member 74, etc.), the expectation level of a jackpot may be higher when an advanced effect is executed using the second movable member 74, etc. The expectation level of a jackpot may be increased when an advanced presentation is performed using the device (the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.).

(Cut-in production pattern determination table)
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a cut-in effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the cut-in effect.

As shown in FIG. 66, the cut-in effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, jackpot determination result, variable effect pattern type, selection rate (%) of each cut-in effect pattern, and selected cut-in effect pattern. The production structure (effective suggestive production, effective period, content of production) of each cut-in production pattern is listed for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 4 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the cut-in performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 4 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 4 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 3 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the production button 17 during the validity period, and "normal (white)" is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This shows that it emits white light, which is unlikely to be a big hit. "Protruding (red)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 is protruding, and indicates that the production button 17 emits red light with high expectations for a jackpot. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 protrudes, and indicates that the production button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to ensure a jackpot.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed. "Cut-in display period 3 seconds" means This indicates that the image display period is 3 seconds.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in effect mode column means that a blue cut-in effect is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a first cut-in sound effect is output. It shows that it will be done.
“Green cut-in” indicates that a green cut-in effect is executed in which a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a second cut-in sound effect is output. .
“Red cut-in” indicates that a red cut-in effect is executed in which a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a third cut-in sound effect is output. .

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means when the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 starts displaying the cut-in image (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the validity period ends) This indicates that a weak vibration performance in which weak vibrations are produced for 3 seconds is to be executed.
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates for 3 seconds from the start of displaying the cut-in image (= when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This indicates that a strong vibration effect in which the camera vibrates strongly will be executed.

The expected jackpot for each cut-in is "Blue Cut-in" < "Green Cut-in" < "Red Cut-in". In addition, the jackpot expectation of each vibration performance is "weak vibration performance" < "strong vibration performance".

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the second variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when a cut-in image with high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed), the validity period of the effect button 17 is generated. One point is that a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high expectation of jackpot is displayed (cut-in effect is executed) takes a relatively long time. There are some points that have been made. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the cut-in performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. There are two types of points depending on the degree. Therefore, the degree of expectation of a jackpot can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the display period (3 seconds) of the cut-in image is the same as the vibration period (3 seconds) of the effect button 17 while the cut-in image is displayed. (The ratio of the difference between the cut-in image display period (3 seconds) and the vibration period (3 seconds) of the presentation button 17 is smaller than the pre-reach preview presentation). Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as the vibration effects executed in the cut-in effect, only the weak vibration effects or only the strong vibration effects may be used.

Also, although the cut-in effect is executed with a valid period, it is also possible to execute the cut-in effect without generating a valid period. It may be possible to have only a weak vibration performance for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration performance for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 67, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each determination performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which button images are moved and displayed at 70, and button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the final performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "promotional performance" in the valid period column is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of executing the effective suggestion performance without performing the effective suggestion performance, An opaque effect button image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 4 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the production button 17 during the validity period, and "normal (white)" is the normal state in which the production button 17 is not protruding. This shows that it emits white light, which is unlikely to be a big hit. "Protruding (red)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 is protruding, and indicates that the production button 17 emits red light with high expectations for a jackpot. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates a protruding state in which the production button 17 protrudes, and indicates that the production button 17 emits light in a rainbow color to ensure a jackpot.

The "performance content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed, and includes "determined successful performance period 11 seconds (production mode H is 6 "Seconds)" means that the execution period of a performance related to a successful decision performance in production modes other than production mode H is 11 seconds, and that the execution period of a production related to a successful decision production in production mode H is 6 seconds. It shows.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the button vibration motor to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period ends. This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which the strong vibration is performed for 4 seconds from the time of 10 minutes, and then the strong vibration is performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17).

The jackpot expectation of each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``protruding button rainbow.'' Moreover, the jackpot expectation level of each button state is "normal" < "prominent".

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the final effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that when a successful successful effect is executed, a vibration effect that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17 is executed. . Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the valid period of the performance button 17 that occurs during the variable performance is the longest period. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the performance button 17 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 ends, the player's feeling of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the winning effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the ratio is smaller than the pre-reach preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the decision performance (decision success performance), the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is performed, but the motion performance using the second movable member 74 may also be performed. In this case, it is preferable that the execution rate of the motion performance using the first movable member 73 is higher than that of the motion performance using the second movable member 74.

(Re-lottery performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 68, the re-lottery performance pattern determination table includes the performance mode, the presence or absence of promotion (promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-lottery performance pattern, and the selected re-lottery performance pattern. They are associated with each other, and the performance structure (effective suggestion performance, validity period, performance content) of each re-lottery performance pattern is described for reference.

The "effective suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur, and specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are displayed on the first image display device. This is an effect in which translucent effect button images are moved and displayed at 70 and gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 3 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the re-lottery performance ends when the performance button 17 is operated once or 3 seconds elapse.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is a effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 during the effective period, and specifically, displays an opaque effect button image at a specific position without executing the effective suggestion effect. At the same time, a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 6 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 5 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Normal button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

"Button state" in the valid period column indicates the state of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and "Normal (white)" in the button state column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 does not protrude. This indicates that the production button 17 emits white light with low expectations for promotion. "Normal (red)" indicates a normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude, and indicates that the production button 17 emits red light with high expectations for promotion. "Normal (Rainbow)" indicates a normal state in which the production button 17 does not protrude, and indicates that the production button 17 emits a rainbow color indicating promotion.

"Production content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed. This indicates that the performance period is 4 seconds.

"Promotion failure performance" in the re-lottery performance mode column refers to non-promoted symbols that do not result in a performance symbol that is advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery performance (for example, even number design → even number design, odd number design other than "7" → This indicates that an odd number symbol other than "7" is derived and displayed (temporarily stopped) and a non-promoted sound effect is output.
"Promotion success performance" means that promotion symbols that are advantageous to the player as a result of the re-lottery production (for example, even number symbols → odd number symbols, odd number symbols other than "7" → "7" symbols) are derived and displayed. (temporary stop) and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that the button vibration motor for vibrating the production button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed. "Strong vibration (2 seconds)" is a strong vibration effect in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 2 seconds from the time the promotion symbol is derived (= at the end of the valid period). indicates that it will be executed.

"Rainbow light emission (4 seconds)" in the button light emission column means that the production button LED for causing the production button 17 to emit light is activated for 4 seconds (when the production button 17 is activated) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow light is emitted over a period longer than the period of strong vibration. "Rainbow light emission (3 seconds)" means that the production button LED for making the production button 17 emit light is vibrating strongly for 3 seconds (the production button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the time when the promotion symbol is derived (= the end of the valid period). This shows that rainbow luminescence occurs over a longer period than the previous one.

The expected jackpot for each promotional performance is ``normal button white'' < ``normal button red'' < ``normal button rainbow.''

The first feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed that generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17. It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify the player that the effect symbol has been promoted to an advantageous effect symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the re-lottery effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature of the re-lottery performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is the execution period (4 seconds or 3 seconds) of the promotion success performance and the vibration period (3 seconds or 2 seconds) is smaller than the pre-reach preview performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the players' sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that although the re-lottery effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect) is executed by generating a valid period, the re-lottery effect may be executed without generating a valid term.

(Fixed performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a confirmed performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the performance pattern of the confirmed performance.

As shown in FIG. 69, the confirmed performance pattern determination table is associated with the jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each confirmed performance pattern, and confirmed performance pattern to be selected. The performance structure (execution timing, performance content) of each confirmed performance pattern is described.

"-" in the execution timing column indicates that the confirmed performance is not executed, and "○" indicates that the confirmed performance is executed.
The "confirmation sound" in the audio column indicates that a confirmation sound indicating that a jackpot game will be executed is output.
"Handle rainbow light emission" in the light emission column means that the handle LED for making the firing handle 15 emit light will emit rainbow colors from the time the final sound is output until the variation stops (for more than 4 seconds until the production pattern stops displaying). It shows that.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column means that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds from the time the final sound is output. It shows.

In addition, "(Special 1)" written in the variable performance pattern column means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the first variable performance that corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol, and "(Special 1)" 2) means that it is a variable performance pattern related to the second variable performance corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol.

The first feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that when a confirmed effect is executed, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating a valid period is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the confirmed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that the rainbow emission of the firing handle 15 is performed over a longer period than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, even after the strong vibration effect ends, the player's sense of exhilaration can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Summary of various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69)
Here, the first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in the dialogue preview effect with the validity period of the effect button 17. When the vibration performance (weak vibration 1 second) is executed as a step-up notice performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, the jackpot expectation level (vibration performance associated with pattern alignment (strong vibration 4) The high rate of performance (seconds) and the high rate of vibration performance (strong vibration 4 seconds → 5 seconds) in the final performance, etc. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is more effective in a dialogue preview effect with a valid period of the effect button 17 than when the vibration effect (weak vibration 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect without the effect period of the effect button 17. 2 seconds or strong vibration 1 second) is executed, the jackpot expectation level (rate of execution of the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) accompanying the alignment of the symbols mentioned above, the vibration effect (strong vibration 4 seconds) with the deciding effect described later) 4 seconds → 5 seconds) may be increased. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance that is executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance that has a relatively short vibration period (during the dialogue preview performance, step-up Vibration performance (1 second) during preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) and second vibration performance (during cut-in performance, decisive success performance) with a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance There is a vibration performance (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) that is longer than 1 second, such as during the time and confirmed performance, and after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), there is a second performance period (normal reach performance). ) and a variable performance with a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is more likely to be executed during the first performance period (higher rate of execution) than during the second performance period. There are several points. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players without making them think that they will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Regarding the look-ahead vibration performance, the first vibration performance has a relatively short vibration period, but even if the look-ahead vibration performance is included, the second performance will start after the first performance period (pre-reach performance). In a variable performance that has a period (normal reach performance) and a third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance), the first vibration performance is easier to be executed (performed) during the first performance period than during the second performance period. The ratio is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players without making them think that they will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a fluctuating performance in which there is a fluctuating performance (direction), the first vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, etc.) is more likely to occur during the first performance period than during the third performance period. An example of this is that the performance (1 second) is easy to execute (the rate of execution is high). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectations of the players without making them think that they will win the jackpot, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

A fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) , a vibration performance (1 second) during a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance with a longer vibration period than the first vibration performance (such as during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and after the first effect period (pre-reach effect), there is a second effect period (normal reach effect) and a third effect period ( In a variable performance with SP/SPSP reach performance), the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the second performance period than during the first performance period. Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that after the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the second performance period (normal reach performance), and the third performance period (SP/SPSP reach performance). In a variable performance that has a second vibration performance (vibration performance that is longer than 1 second such as a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), the third performance period is longer than the first performance period. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)) is easy to execute (has a high execution rate). Therefore, the expectations of the players can be effectively raised, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the rate at which the first vibration performance (1 second) is executed with the performance button 17 in the normal state is This is higher than the rate of executing the first vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the protruding state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the third performance period (during SP/SPSP reach performance), the performance button 17 is in the protruding state and the second vibration performance (for 3 seconds or more) is activated. The point is that the rate of execution is higher than the rate of execution of the second vibration performance with the performance button 17 in the normal state. Therefore, the expectations of the players are not excessively aroused during the first performance period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a first vibration performance with a short vibration period (during dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) , vibration effects (1 second) during pseudo-continuous effects, development effects, etc.), and second vibration effects (during cut-in effects, successful performance, etc.) that have a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effects. There are vibration performances that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds)), and a continuous performance (pseudo continuous performance) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). In a variable performance in which a reach performance is executed, the second vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the first vibration performance is executed than when the first vibration performance is not executed (the rate of execution is high) ) points can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance executed as a jackpot preview performance includes a second vibration performance (performance period) that has a longer vibration period (performance period) than the first vibration performance. There are vibration effects that are longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds → 5 seconds) during cut-in effects, successful decision effects, confirmation effects, etc., and during production modes A to C (normal gaming state). In the variable performance, the reach performance using the second type of performance symbol (even numbered symbol) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than the reach performance using the first type of performance symbol (odd numbered symbol other than "7"). ), the reach effect is more difficult to execute with the third type of effect symbol (the “7” effect symbol) than the reach effect with the second type of effect symbol (the rate of execution is lower), The point is that the second vibration performance is easier to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the ready-to-reach effect is executed using the third type of effect symbol than when the ready-to-reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of effect symbols used to execute the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A tenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that in the jackpot fluctuation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (display of the operation promotion image) without the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) during the pre-reach performance ( Vibration effects without a valid period (display of operation promotion images) during post-reach effects (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect) are more effective than the number of executions of pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects). ) is likely to be executed more often. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation during the post-reach performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that a specific reach performance (SP reach performance) is more effective than a jackpot variable performance in which a predetermined reach performance (normal reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed. , SPSP reach effect) is more likely to be executed than the jackpot fluctuation effect in which vibration effects without a validity period (development effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, fixed effect) are more likely to be executed during the post-reach effect. can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that in the loss variation performance in which the reach performance is executed, the vibration performance (development performance, pattern alignment, C The point is that the number of executions of vibration performances without a validity period (pre-read vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance) during the pre-reach performance is likely to be greater than the number of executions of the number of executions of the pattern alignment, confirmed performance). . Therefore, the expectation level of a jackpot can be suggested by the vibration performance without a validity period, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is executed in the variable performance, When a post-reach preview performance (cut-in performance) with high expectations for a jackpot is executed, the vibration performance of the production button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (execution rate is high), and a pre-reach preview performance When the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the vibrating effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the post-reach preview performance is better in performance modes D to G (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state). In this case, the expectation level of a jackpot increases when a vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) is executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in production modes A to C (normal gaming state) than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states), vibrations accompanying the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion image) in the post-reach preview production are more effective than in production modes D to G (specific gaming states). The expectation level of a jackpot when the performance is performed may be increased. Even in this case, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easy to increase the expectations of the players in the performance modes D to G that are advantageous to the players, thereby improving the interest of the game. becomes possible.

A fifteenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the first performance period (before reach) in the fluctuating performance, the vibration of the performance button 17 is lower than when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is not executed. The jackpot expectation level is higher when the effect is executed, and in the jackpot variable effect, regardless of whether the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the pre-reach effect, the after-reach effect (decision success effect) In the later period), the vibration performance of the performance button 17 (vibration performance when the symbols are aligned or the C symbols are aligned) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of a jackpot through the vibration effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 16th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a vibration performance (during dialogue preview performance, pseudo One of the vibration performances such as continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) is executed in one of multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectations, A vibration performance that does not involve the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation promotion image) that is executed during a variable performance (one of the vibration performances during a step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) is executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, in the case where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode because there is no validity period, it is possible to suppress the presentation mode of the vibration performance from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A seventeenth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the pre-reach performance period in the jackpot fluctuating performance, the vibration performance (line preview performance) with the valid period of the performance button 17 (display of the operation promotion image) After that, ( Vibration performances (vibration performances for 3 seconds or more such as successful execution, when the symbols are aligned, when the C symbols are aligned, etc.) are executed at different rates during the post-reach performance period) and are not accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17. (Vibration performance during step-up notice performance) is easier to execute (execution rate is higher) during normal game states (performance modes A to C) than during specific game states (performance modes D to G). can be mentioned. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 18th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the types of jackpot effect symbols (even symbols, "7") that match the symbols (including the C symbols) It is possible to change the execution mode of the vibration effect (execution or non-execution, execution timing, etc.) in the jackpot notice effect depending on odd number symbols other than "7" symbol, but depending on the execution of the winning success effect or confirmed effect. When performing the vibration effect, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of jackpot effect symbols that match the symbols (including the C symbols). Therefore, while increasing the expectation of a jackpot through the vibration effect, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the jackpot, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 19th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that after a vibration performance (decision success performance, etc.) with a validity period (display of an operation promotion image) is executed in a jackpot fluctuation performance, the validity period ( It is possible to perform vibration effects (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that are not accompanied by operation promotion images (display of operation promotion images), and vibration effects (decision effects, etc.) that involve a valid period (display of operation promotion images) can be performed by operating the effect button 17. The point is that while the timing to start the vibration is variable depending on the timing, the timing to start the vibration is predetermined for vibration performances (symbol alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.) that do not have a valid period (display of operation promotion image). It will be done. Therefore, it is possible to perform the vibration effect at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not the validity period (display of the operation promotion image) is involved, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twentieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the same movable member (second Although it is possible to perform specific performances (pseudo continuous performances, advanced performances, etc.) using the movable member 74), specific performances can be performed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state). The difference is that the expected jackpot is different when executed. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have multiple tables with different jackpot expectations. It is possible to perform stage performances (step-up preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, etc.) that progress to any of the stages, but in production modes A to C (normal game state) and production modes D to G (specific game state). If the stage effects (step-up preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, etc.) are the same stage (if the step-up preview effects are any of the 3rd step effects, 4th step effects, or 5th step effects; if the pseudo continuous effects are the same, One point is that the expected level of jackpot is different if the game progresses to 1 or 2 times. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of production mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-second feature of the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the performance modes A to C (normal gaming state) and the performance modes D to G (specific gaming state) have different jackpot expectations. In addition to being able to execute any of the operation promotion effects, it is also possible to execute operation effects (any of the development effects, cut-in effects, and final effects) according to the operation of the effect button 17, and the effect modes A to C (normal The expected level of jackpot when the same operation promotion effect (for example, normal button white) is executed is different between production modes D to G (specific gaming states) and production modes A to C (normal gaming state). ) and performance modes D to G (specific game states), when the operation performance is executed, the effective suggestion performance is executed and the operation is promoted more than when the operation promotion performance is executed without the effective suggestion performance. One point to note is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations as to whether or not the effective suggestion performance will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the vibration performance with a relatively short vibration period (for example, 1 second) that is executed in conjunction with the jackpot preview performance is There are cases in which it is executed with a validity period and cases in which it is executed without a validity period, but vibration performances with a relatively long vibration period (more than 3 seconds) that are executed in conjunction with jackpot preview performances. is executed with a validity period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect for the operation of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A twenty-fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that in the special time-saving gaming state, the first special symbol loses variable display (first loses variable effect) is 2 When the special symbol loss variation display (the second loss variation display) is executed, the operation production that involves the operation of the validity period (line preview production, development production, deciding production, re-lottery production) is executed. It's getting easier. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of special symbol (variable performance), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The twenty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Execution of the first vibration performance when the first variation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state and when the second variation performance is performed in the specific game state. The ratios are different (the execution ratio when the second variable effect is executed is high). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution of the first vibration performance is better when the second fluctuation performance is executed in a specific game state than when the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the specific game state. Although the ratio is high, the opposite may be possible.

The twenty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, repeat performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. (vibration effects related to lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmed effects, etc.) that are executed without an expiration period, and in a specific game state. When a first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game is executed, and when a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state. In the case where the second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that makes people expect The execution rate is different (the execution rate when the second variable effect is executed is high). Therefore, when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in a specific game state is executed, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of the variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, in a specific game state, the specific performance is higher than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes you expect to execute a jackpot game is executed. When a second variable effect (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game in the gaming state is executed, the specific effect is better. Although the execution ratio of the first vibration effect during execution is high, it may be made to be the opposite.

The twenty-seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific gaming state, and a case where a second variable production (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect is different between the two (the execution rate when the second variable effect is executed is high). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state than when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the specific game state, Although the execution rate of the second vibration effect is higher in this case, the opposite may be true.

The twenty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, repeat performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. A vibration performance related to a lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a fixed performance, etc.) that is executed without an expiration period, and includes specific gaming states (variable probability gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) When a first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes you expect the execution of a jackpot game is executed, and when a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state. A second vibration performance during execution of a specific performance is different from a case where a second variable performance (variable display of a second special symbol) is performed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes people expect execution is executed. The execution ratio is different (the execution ratio when the second variable effect is executed is high). Therefore, when a variable performance in which a specific performance is executed in a specific game state is executed, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of the variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, in a specific game state, the specific performance is higher than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed in which a specific performance (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that makes you expect to execute a jackpot game is executed. When a second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game in the gaming state is executed, the specific effect is better. Although the execution ratio of the second vibration effect during execution is high, it may be made to be the opposite.

A twenty-ninth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a first motion performance (a look-ahead motion performance, a variation start It is possible to execute a second action performance (such as a winning success performance) that operates in the second mode (such as a special symbol announcement performance, etc.), and a first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) of a loss in the normal gaming state. ), the first motion performance can be executed, but in the first variable performance of loss in specific gaming states (variable probability gaming state, various time-saving gaming states), the execution of the first motion performance is restricted, and the execution of the first motion performance is restricted in the normal gaming state. In the first variable performance of a jackpot and the first variable performance of a jackpot in a specific game state, a second action performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to change whether or not the action performance is executed depending on whether or not it is a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirtieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that it is possible to perform a lamp change effect that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed by causing the winning hole lamp to emit light in a predetermined manner, An action performance that suggests the possibility that a jackpot game will be executed by operating the first movable member 73 (or second movable member 74) during the execution of the fluctuation performance (pre-reading action performance, role-playing preview performance at the start of fluctuation) It is possible to execute the light emission effect and the movement effect while the first variable effect of losing in the normal game state (variable display of the first special symbol), and the first variable effect of losing in the special time-saving gaming state is possible. While the 1-variation effect is being executed, it is possible to restrict the execution of the light emission effect and the movement effect. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A thirty-first feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the modes of the lighting device (winning hole lamp NR, top lamp 10b, etc.) include the first mode (white blinking of the winning hole lamp) and the first mode (white blinking of the winning hole lamp). Including the 2nd mode (winning hole lamp blue emission), the 3rd mode (top lamp emission), and the 4th mode (winning hole lamp & top lamp off), when the lamp change effect is executed, the lighting device is turned on. It is possible to set the lighting device to the first mode and the second mode, and when executing the lighting effect at the time of winning, it is possible to set the lighting device to the third mode. The ratio of the illumination device being in the fourth mode is higher when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the first variable display of special symbols) is executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 32nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that operation effects (line preview effects, pseudo continuous effects, advanced effects) that suggest the degree of jackpot expectation according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period are as follows. , cut-in performance, decisive performance, etc.), and the first variation performance of a loss (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, compared to the case where the first variation performance of a loss (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state. The operation performance is more difficult to execute when the 1-variation performance is executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 33rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, and when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the first vibration performance The execution ratio is different (higher when the first variable performance is executed in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first vibration performance is better when the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state than when the first fluctuation performance is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. Although the execution rate is high, the opposite may be true.

The 34th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state, and when the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the second vibration performance The execution rate is different (the execution rate is high when the first variable performance is executed in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second vibration performance is better when the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the regular game state than when the first fluctuation performance is performed in the special time-saving game state. Although the execution rate is high, the opposite may be true.

A thirty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and a case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the first vibration performance (the vibration performance mainly related to the fixed performance) is different depending on the case where the second variation performance is executed (the execution ratio is high when the second variable performance is executed). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the first vibration performance (the vibration performance mainly related to the final performance) is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The thirty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and a case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration performance (mainly the vibration performance related to the confirmed performance) is different depending on the case where the second vibration performance is performed (the execution ratio is high when the second variable performance is executed). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration performance (the vibration performance mainly related to the confirmed performance) is higher, but the opposite may be true.

A thirty-seventh feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a first motion performance (pre-read motion performance, start of fluctuation) that causes the first movable member 73 (or second movable member 74) to operate in the first mode It is possible to execute a second movement performance (such as a winning success performance) that operates in the second mode, and a second variable performance of a jackpot in the normal time-saving gaming state (a second variation of the second special symbol). display) and the first variable performance of a jackpot in the special time-saving gaming state, the second movement performance can be executed, and in the second variable performance of a loss in the normal time-saving gaming state (variable display of the second special symbol), Although the first motion performance can be executed, in the first variable performance of losing in the special time saving game state, the execution of the first motion performance is restricted. Therefore, it is possible to change whether or not the action performance is executed depending on whether or not it is a jackpot, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The thirty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including the case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state, and the case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the first vibration performance is different depending on the case (the execution rate is high when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time saving game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state. In this case, the execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 39th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including the case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state, and the case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration performance is different depending on the case (the execution rate is high when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time saving game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state than when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be true.

A fortieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (Vibration performance related to in-performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 without causing the validity period (Vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) The execution ratio of the vibration performance during a predetermined period after the start of the fluctuating performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A 41st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (Vibration performance related to in-performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 without causing the validity period (Vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) Including, the execution rate of the vibration performance that does not generate the valid period during the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state (normal game state The execution rate is high). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of vibration effects that do not generate a valid period during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is higher in the normal game state than in the special time-saving game state. , and vice versa.

A forty-second feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (Vibration performance related to in-performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 without causing the validity period (Vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) The effect button 17 can be vibrated in different manners between the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after the power is turned on and the vibration effect. Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the vibration effect Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A forty-third feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (Vibration performance related to in-performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 without causing the validity period (Vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) For example, when a vibration effect is executed while operating an operating means such as the cross key 19, vibrations related to the vibration effect are transmitted to the player via the operating means. Therefore, even if the vibration performance is executed without the validity period of the performance button 17 occurring, it is possible to suppress inconveniences that the player does not notice, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A forty-fourth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is an operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut (vibration effects related to in-game effects, deciding effects, re-lottery effects, etc.) and vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects) that vibrate the effect button 17 without generating an expiration period according to the pre-reading result, during the normal gaming state. When a variable performance in which a ready-to-win performance is performed is executed, the rate at which the vibration performance is executed is higher before the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations even before the execution of the reach effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The forty-fifth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state; The execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different depending on when the first variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state). When the first variable performance is executed in the gaming state, the execution rate is high). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) than when the first variable production is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), the variation is higher. Although the execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period after the start of the performance (until the first temporary stop) is high, the opposite may be true.

The forty-sixth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state; The execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is different depending on when the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state). When the first variable performance is executed in the gaming state, the execution rate is high). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, the case where the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state is better than the case where the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). Although the execution rate of the second vibration performance is high during the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (until the first temporary stop), the opposite may be true.

The 47th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first game performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state; The execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the fluctuation performance differs depending on when the first fluctuation performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state (when the first fluctuation performance is executed in the normal gaming state) (when the performance is executed, the execution rate is high). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first game performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state than when the first fluctuation performance is performed in the special time-saving gaming state, the time after the start of the variable performance is higher. Although the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) is high, the opposite may be true.

The forty-eighth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) Including a case where the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal gaming state; In the case where the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, the execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable performance is (higher when the first variable performance is executed in the normal gaming state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal gaming state than when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 49th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the second fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). The execution rate of the second vibration performance in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop) is different depending on when is executed and when the second fluctuation performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state ( (It is higher when the second variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the second variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the case where the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) is better than the case where the second variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. However, the execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (until the first temporary stop) is high, but the opposite may be true.

The fiftieth feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and when the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving game state. , the execution rate of the second vibration performance in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop) in the case where the second fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration performance during the second variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 51st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the first fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). is executed, and when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (first (up to temporary stop), the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different (higher when the second fluctuation effect is executed). Therefore, in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state), the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) than when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). When the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher, but the opposite is true. You may do so.

The 52nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and when the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time saving gaming state. , the execution rate of the second vibration performance in the predetermined period after the start of the fluctuation performance (until the first temporary stop) in the case where the second fluctuation performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance related to the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration performance during the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (until the first temporary stop) is high, but the opposite may be true.

The 53rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the performance button 17 is moved in different manners between the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after the power is turned on and the second vibration performance. It is possible to make it vibrate. Therefore, the game clerk will not be mistaken as thinking that the initial vibration was performed when the second vibration performance was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the gaming machine on and off), and the vibration performance It is possible to improve the performance effect and increase the interest of the game.

The 54th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to look-ahead vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and it is possible to vibrate the performance button 17 in different manners for the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance. It has become. Therefore, it becomes easier to distinguish between the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 55th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and for example, when the second vibration performance is performed while operating the operation means such as the cross key 19, the second vibration performance is executed. Vibration related to the vibration performance is transmitted to the player via the operating means. Therefore, even if the second vibration performance in which the validity period of the performance button 17 does not occur is executed, inconveniences that the player does not notice can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 56th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, The first vibration performance includes a vibration performance related to a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance) that is executed without generating a valid period according to the pre-read result. It is possible to perform the second vibration effect so that the effect periods do not overlap, and when a variable effect in which a reach effect is performed during the normal gaming state is executed, the second vibration effect is more effective before the reach effect than during the reach effect. The rate at which vibration effects are executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations even before the execution of the ready-to-win effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 57th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes the first vibration performance (line preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, Vibration performances related to cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without expiring the validity period (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the second vibration performance can be performed during the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal gaming state. The jackpot game is executed more when the second vibration effect is executed during the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state) than when it is executed. Expectations are high. Therefore, expectations for the second vibration performance can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 58th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance include a vibration performance that is executed without a valid period (vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, pattern alignment, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without a valid period. It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that they do not overlap, and during the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state, the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed, and in the normal time-saving game state ( During the first fluctuating performance in (or fixed variable gaming state), the execution of the first vibration performance is restricted, but the second vibration performance can be executed, and the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the first vibration performance are restricted. It is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in different manners. Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the vibration effect Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 59th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 during the valid period. The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance include a vibration performance that is executed without a valid period (vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, pattern alignment, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without a valid period. It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that they do not overlap, and during the first variation performance (variation display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state, the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed, and in the normal time-saving game state ( During the first fluctuating performance in (or fixed variable gaming state), the execution of the first vibration performance is restricted, but the second vibration performance can be executed, and the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the second vibration performance It is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in different manners. Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the vibration effect Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 60th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance) that is executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance. , when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), and when the second variable production (second variable display) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). The execution rate of the first vibration performance is different depending on the case where the variable display of special symbols is executed (it is higher when the second variable display is executed). Therefore, in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state), the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) than when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). Although the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is higher when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the opposite may be possible.

The 61st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state), and when the second variable production (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state). The execution rate of the second vibration performance is different depending on the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed (it is higher when the second variable display is executed). Therefore, in the normal time-saving game state (or variable probability game state), the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) than when the first variable production (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state). Although the execution rate of the second vibration performance is higher when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, the opposite may be possible.

The 62nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the first vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 63rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that the first vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state, and when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed). Therefore, in the special time saving game state, the performance of the vibration performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state rather than the case where the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is performed in the special time-saving gaming state. In this case, the execution rate of the second vibration effect is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The 64th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, the execution rate of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the variable probability game state), and the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the first vibration performance differ from the performance button 17. It is possible to vibrate in different ways. Therefore, when the first vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine ON and OFF), and the first vibration It is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance and to improve the interest of the game.

The 65th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the variable probability game state), and the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after turning on the power and the second vibration performance differ when the performance button 17 is pressed. It is possible to vibrate in different ways. Therefore, when the second vibration effect is performed, the game clerk will not be mistaken that the initial vibration was performed (there was an illegal act such as turning the power of the game machine ON and OFF), and the second vibration It is possible to improve the performance effect of the performance and to improve the interest of the game.

The 66th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, when the first vibration effect is executed than when the second vibration effect is executed in the jackpot variable effect, the effect button 17 is in the first light emission mode (white light emission, etc.) with low jackpot expectation. It is easier to emit light. Therefore, the lighting mode of the performance button 17 can be varied depending on the type of vibration performance and the degree of expectation of a jackpot, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 67th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is the first vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the variable performance. etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). Including, the execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between the normal gaming state and the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state), and the first vibration performance is executed more than when the second vibration performance is executed in the jackpot variable performance. In this case, the effect button 17 is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode (white light emission, etc.) with low expectation of jackpot. Therefore, the lighting mode of the performance button 17 can be varied depending on the type of vibration performance and the degree of expectation of a jackpot, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 68th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the valid period of the production button 17, the first valid period (line preview production, dialogue preview production, (validity period related to pseudo-continuous effects) and a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in effects, decisive effects, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period. 2. When the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period, the vibration performance of the performance button 17 can be executed, and the performance button 17 can be vibrated in different manners depending on the initial vibration of the performance button 17 after power-on and the vibration performance. It is possible to output different operation sounds depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the first valid period or when the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period. Therefore, the presentation effect can be made different depending on whether the first validity period occurs or the second validity period occurs, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 69th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the valid period of the production button 17, the first valid period (line preview production, dialogue preview production, (validity period related to pseudo-continuous effects) and a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in effects, decisive effects, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period. 1 When the production button 17 is operated during the valid period, the vibration production of the production button 17 can be executed, and the production button 17 can be vibrated in different manners depending on the initial vibration of the production button 17 after power-on and the vibration production. It is possible to output different operation sounds depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the first valid period or when the effect button 17 is operated during the second valid period. Therefore, the presentation effect can be made different depending on whether the first validity period occurs or the second validity period occurs, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 70th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the valid period of the production button 17, there is a first valid period (a dialogue preview production, (validity period related to pseudo-continuous performance) and a second validity period (validity period related to development performance, decisive performance, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period; The execution rate of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first valid period is different between the state and the normal time-saving gaming state (or the variable probability gaming state) (higher in the normal gaming state), and during the first valid period The number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period is different from the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period (the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period is large). It has become. Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of validity period, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first validity period in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) is higher than the execution rate of the vibration production according to the operation of the production button 17 during the first validity period in the normal gaming state. Although the execution rate of the vibration effect according to the above is higher, the opposite may be possible. In addition, the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period is greater than the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the first validity period, but the opposite is true. You can.

The 71st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that during the valid period of the production button 17, there is a first valid period (line preview production, (validity period related to pseudo-continuous performance) and a second validity period (validity period related to development performance, decisive performance, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period; The execution rate of the vibration performance according to the operation of the performance button 17 during the first valid period is different depending on the state and the special time saving game state (higher in the normal game state), and the vibration performance according to the operation during the first valid period is different. The number of vibrations in the presentation is different from the number of vibrations in the vibration presentation according to the operation during the second valid period (the number of vibrations according to the operation during the second valid period is greater). Therefore, the performance effect can be varied depending on the gaming state and the type of validity period, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the vibration effect according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period in the normal gaming state is higher than the execution rate of the vibration effect according to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period in the special time saving game state. Although the execution rate is higher, the opposite may be true. In addition, the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the second validity period is greater than the number of vibrations in the vibration performance according to the operation during the first validity period, but the opposite is true. You can.

A 72nd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios of effects, etc.), and the first variable effect (first special symbol) can be set in the normal gaming state after setting to the normal setting state. (variable display) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g. continuous preview effect) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g. timer effect) is the second rate (high). High), and when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio. (low ratio), and the execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low ratio). Therefore, even in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, When the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance and the execution rate of the second specific performance are higher. You may do so.

The 73rd feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios of effects, etc.), and the first variable effect (first special symbol) can be set in the normal gaming state after setting to the normal setting state. (variable display) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g. continuous preview effect) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g. timer effect) is the second rate (high). If the first variable performance is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low ratio ), and the execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (lower ratio). Therefore, even in the first variable performance after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, When the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance and the execution rate of the second specific performance are higher. You may do so.

The 74th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios (effects, etc.), and the second When a variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance (for example, continuous notice performance) is the first ratio (high) and the execution rate of the second specific performance (for example, timer performance) is When the execution ratio becomes the second ratio (high) and the first variable performance is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low The execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (lower ratio). Therefore, even in the second variable performance after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state after setting to the normal setting state , when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the execution ratio of the second specific performance are higher. It may be made higher.

The 75th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios (effects, etc.), and the second When a variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance (for example, continuous notice performance) is the first ratio (high) and the execution rate of the second specific performance (for example, timer performance) is When the execution rate becomes the second rate (high) and the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance becomes the second rate (high). The execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low ratio). Therefore, even in a specific game state after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the execution ratio of the first specific effect and the second specific effect when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state Rather than the performance execution ratio, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the first variable performance (fluctuating display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after setting to the normal setting state. The execution rate may be higher.

The 76th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It is possible to set a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) in which the execution ratios of performances, etc.) are different, and the second variable performance (second special When a variable display of symbols) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific effect (for example, continuous preview effect) is the first rate (high), and the execution rate of the second specific effect (for example, timer effect) is the second rate. (High), and when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is The execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the first ratio (lower ratio) than the second ratio (lower ratio). Therefore, even in a specific game state after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable performance (fluctuating display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution ratio of the first specific performance is higher than the execution ratio of the second specific performance. , the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state The execution rate may be higher.

The 77th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer It can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode), which have different execution ratios (effects, etc.), and the second When a variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance (for example, continuous notice performance) is the first ratio (high) and the execution rate of the second specific performance (for example, timer performance) is When the execution rate becomes the second rate (high) and the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is The execution ratio of the second specific performance is different from the first ratio (lower ratio) than the second ratio (lower ratio). Therefore, even in a specific game state after setting to the normal setting state, the performance effect can be varied depending on the type of variable performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving gaming state (or variable probability gaming state) after setting to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is the second specific performance. Rather than the performance execution ratio, the execution ratio of the first specific performance and the second specific performance when the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after setting to the normal setting state The execution rate may be higher.

A 78th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the first variable performance is executed in a specific game state, a predetermined first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, The vibration performance related to the cut-in performance) is not executed, but the specific first vibration performance (vibration performance related to the development performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed in a specific game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 79th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when the first variable performance is executed in a specific gaming state and when the second variable performance is executed in a specific gaming state, The execution ratio of the vibration performance related to the re-lottery performance (the execution ratio of the variable performance related to the re-lottery performance) is different. Therefore, in a specific game state, the performance related to the vibration performance related to the re-lottery performance can be varied depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 80th feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 includes a valid suggestion effect that indicates the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17, etc.) ) is not carried out (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, etc.), and the second operation production (development production, cut-in preview production, etc.) in which an effective suggestion production that suggests the occurrence of the effective period of the production button 17 is performed. . The first operation effect is easier to execute when the first operation effect is executed. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be varied depending on the gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

An 81st feature related to the various tables shown in FIGS. 34 to 69 is that when a vibration effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period, the vibration effect is performed by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period. The motion performance of the movable performance member 73 is easier to perform than when it is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations for the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, a specific operation effect is provided in which a predetermined effect is executed in response to the operation during the valid period, but the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed, and the effect of the effect button 17 during the valid period is more effective than when the specific operation effect is executed. If the first vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) is executed in response to the operation of It is preferable to make it easier to perform a validity suggestion effect (display of a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17, etc.) that indicates the occurrence of the valid period of the button 17. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's expectations for the first vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Percentage of advance notice restriction period)
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss fluctuation performance in the performance modes A to C, and FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss fluctuation performance in the performance modes D to G. Yes, and FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the ratio of the advance notice restriction period related to the loss variation performance in the performance mode H.

The "notice restriction period" means that the fluctuating display of the production pattern 70a and/or the special symbol TZ and the dynamic display of the background image are executed, but the jackpot notice performance (the role part notice performance at the start of fluctuation, the dialogue notice performance, the step It is a period in which the execution of (up-notice performance, cut-in notice performance, final performance, etc.) is restricted (regulated), and the "notice period" refers to the fluctuation display of the above-mentioned performance symbol 70a and/or special symbol TZ, etc. The dynamic display of the background image is executed during the period in which there is a possibility that the jackpot preview performance will be executed.

For example, in variable performance pattern 3, the first half of the normal fluctuation is the notice period, the second half of the normal fluctuation and the normal reach performance are the restriction period, the ratio of the restriction period in the fluctuation performance is 70%, and the number of times the restriction period occurs will be once.

Although the loss fluctuation effect is illustrated here, the jackpot fluctuation pattern is basically the same as the only difference is the final result of the fluctuation effect and whether or not a re-lottery effect is executed. When compared with the loss fluctuation performance which is a performance composition, the ratio of the notice period and the limit period is the same.

The first feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the advance notice restriction period occupies more of the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the reach effect is not executed than the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the reach effect is executed. One point is that the ratio tends to be high. Therefore, the period during which the jackpot preview performance can be executed changes according to the jackpot expectation level of the variable performance pattern, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that the advance notice restriction period occurs more in the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the reach effect is not executed than in the loss fluctuation performance pattern in which the reach effect is executed. One of the points is that the number of times is likely to decrease. Therefore, the number of times the jackpot preview performance can be executed changes depending on the jackpot expectation level of the variable performance pattern, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The third feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state), Another point is that the proportion occupied by the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time saving game state). Therefore, in performance mode H (special time-saving game state), it is possible to encourage execution of the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

The fourth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state), Another point is that the number of occurrences of the advance notice restriction period is more likely to be reduced when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in performance mode H (special time saving game state). Therefore, in performance mode H (special time-saving game state), it is possible to encourage execution of the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. .

The fifth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when a loss variation display (first variation production) of the first special symbol is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state), , the execution rate of the variable performance that is a notice restriction period over the entire period is different depending on the case where the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol (first fluctuation performance) is executed in the performance mode H (special time-saving game state) (special An example of this is that the execution rate is high when the first variable performance is executed in the time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in performance mode H (special time-saving game state), the first special symbol is displayed more easily than in the case where the loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance) of the first special symbol is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). When the losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed, the execution rate of the variable effect that is the advance notice restriction period over the entire period is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The sixth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production modes A to C (normal game state), Also, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time-saving gaming state), it is easier to execute the variation production that has a notice restriction period for the entire period. can be mentioned. Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The seventh feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is when a loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation performance) of the second special symbol is executed in performance modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). Rather than that, the proportion of the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time-saving gaming state). . Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The eighth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is when a loss variation display (second variation production) of the second special symbol is executed in production modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). The point is that the number of occurrences of the advance notice restriction period is more likely to be reduced when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time-saving game state). . Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is when a loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation performance) of the second special symbol is executed in performance modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). In the case where the first special symbol loss fluctuation display (first fluctuation performance) is executed in the performance mode H (special time saving game state), the execution rate of the fluctuation performance that is the advance notice restriction period over the entire period is different ( An example of this is that the execution rate is high when the second variable performance is executed in the special time-saving gaming state. Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the first special symbol is displayed in performance mode H (special time-saving game state) more than when the loss fluctuation display (second fluctuation performance) of the second special symbol is executed in performance modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). When the losing variable display (first variable effect) is executed, the execution rate of the variable effect that becomes the advance notice restriction period over the entire period is higher, but the opposite may be true.

The tenth feature related to the advance notice restriction period shown in FIGS. 70 to 72 is that when a loss variation display of the second special symbol (second variation production) is executed in production modes D to G (normal time-saving game state). Rather, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time saving game state), the proportion occupied by the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger. Therefore, the performance effect when the variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed in production mode H (special time saving gaming state), when the loss variation display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed, when it is a normal variation production pattern (first pending number = 0) Although the length of the advance notice restriction period is different depending on the case of the ultra-shortened variable performance pattern (first number of reservations = 1 to 3), the length of the advance notice restriction period may be the same. In this case, on the premise that both the normal variable performance pattern and the super shortened variable performance pattern will be executed, the length of the advance notice restriction period may be the same, or the normal variable performance pattern and the super shortened performance pattern may be the same regardless of the first reservation number. The length of the notice restriction period may be set to be the same on the assumption that only one of the variable performance patterns will be executed.

(Types of vibration effects for each production mode)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the types of vibration effects for each effect mode.

There are 7 types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in production modes A to C (normal gaming state), and which have valid periods. There are five types of vibration effects that do not expire.
In addition, the vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in effect modes A to C (normal gaming state) are limited to the types of vibration effects that have a validity period of 1. There are three types of vibration effects that do not have a valid period.

Vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in production modes D to G (variable game state/normal time-saving game state) are limited to vibration effects that have an expiration period. There is only one type of vibration effect, and there is only one type of vibration effect that does not have a valid period.
In addition, vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in effect modes D to G (variable game state/normal time saving game state) are vibrations that have an expiration period. There are six types of effects, and four types of vibration effects that do not have a valid period.

The vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in production mode H (special time-saving game state) have only one type of vibration effect that has a valid period. There is only one type of vibration effect that does not have a valid period.
In addition, there are four types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in production mode H (special time-saving game state), which have valid periods. Therefore, there are three types of vibration effects that do not have a valid period.

In addition, in the initial operation of the performance button 17 executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the vibration operation of the performance button 17 is strong continuous vibration for 2.5 seconds or strong intermittent vibration for 2.5 seconds, so during the variable performance The vibration mode (vibration time, vibration pattern, etc.) is different from the vibration operation of the production button 17 that has a valid period of execution (vibration performance) and the vibration operation of the performance button 17 that does not have a valid period (vibration performance). It has become.

In this way, the types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the effect modes D to G (variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) and which do not have an expiration period. The number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state) and which do not have an expiration period is greater than the number. ing. Therefore, the performance effect when the first variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display (first variable effect) of the first special symbol in effect mode H (special time-saving game state) and which do not have an expiration period is greater than the number of types of vibration effects in effect mode A. The number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in ~C (normal game state) and in which the validity period does not occur is increasing. The performance effect when the first variable performance is executed can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, from the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in effect modes D to G (variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state), and which do not have an expiration period. Also, the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in the effect modes A to C (normal gaming state) and which do not have a valid period are increasing. . The performance effect of the variable performance can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in the effect mode H (special time-saving game state) and in which the validity period does not occur is greater than the number of types of vibration effects in the effect mode A. The number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in ~C (normal game state) and in which the validity period does not occur is increasing. The performance effect of the variable performance can be varied depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Main processing of the overall control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed when a system reset generated by supplying power supply voltage from the power supply board 160 is input to the central CPU 141a.

First, the supervising CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, the initial settings of the CPU such as the settings of built-in registers, permission to access the general RAM 141c, initialization (clearing to 0) of all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, and CTC (counter timer circuit) for generating timer interrupts are performed. ), and in step T3, all interrupts are permitted.

The overall CPU 141a performs adjustment mode switching processing in step T4. Specifically, the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 70, Adjustment of the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the image display device 71), and adjustment mode related to the adjustment of the volume and light intensity (whether the volume can be adjusted, whether the light amount can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any one from 0 to 5) ), the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5), and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5). I do.

Note that setting (adjustment) of the volume value and the light amount value using the changeover switch 22 can be performed at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is in a power-on state (after activation of the general control unit 141).

The supervising CPU 141a performs volume adjustment processing in step T5. Specifically, the sound is output from the audio output device 9 based on a detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. Performs processing to adjust the volume (value) of the performance sound.

The supervising CPU 141a performs light amount adjustment processing in step T6. Specifically, the display device (the first image display A process for adjusting the amount of light (value) of the backlight of the device 70 and the second image display device 71 is performed.

In addition, the setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 is regulated (limited) at the start of the variable effect and at the end of the variable effect (stopping of the effect pattern 70a). . In addition, during the period from power ON to the start of game progress control (specifically, during setting change mode, RWM clear preparation mode, setting confirmation mode, initial operation of various drive sources of board unit 500, etc.) (until a timer interrupt is started on the main control board 110), important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unauthorized prize winning) that should be notified with priority over tray full errors and payout abnormalities , abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) are also restricted (restricted) during notification (output of notification sound).

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume, and when the abnormality notification sound output ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop.

The overall CPU 141a performs eco-mode control processing in step T7. Specifically, processing is performed to control the start and end of an eco mode that reduces power consumption by reducing the amount of backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71).

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not the production instruction command or the notification instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m has been received. If the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has not been received, the process moves to step T11, and if the production instruction command or the notification instruction command has been received, the process moves to step T9.

The supervising CPU 141a performs animation pattern setting processing in step T9. Specifically, a process is performed in which an animation pattern is determined from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command, and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

The supervising CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process in step T10. Specifically, a process is performed in which a sound pattern is determined from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command or notification instruction command and is set in a predetermined area of the general RAM 141c.

In step T11, the supervising CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the supervising RAM 141c, indicating that it is frame update timing to update the display image of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). Determine whether or not. If there is a frame switching flag, the process moves to step T12, and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4.

Note that the frame switching flag is a V blank signal transmitted from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30 seconds (the scheduled time when drawing and displaying one frame of effect images is completed) to the general control unit 141. It is set in the V blank interrupt processing that is executed every time a blank is received. Therefore, the processes of steps T12 to T15 described below are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

The supervising CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the supervising RAM 141c in step T12, and performs scene update processing in step T13. Specifically, with reference to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, the address of the animation scene is updated based on the animation pattern determined in step T9 above. , performs a process of updating the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The supervising CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, it consists of a group of drawing control commands based on the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the anime scene at the updated address, according to the priority order (drawing order) of the anime group to which the anime scene belongs. It generates a display list, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs a process of instructing drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and also transfers the image (effect image, abnormality notification image) drawn on the display frame buffer to the display device ( Processing for displaying on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71) will be performed. In other words, the frame update timing is the start timing of various effects performed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 (image display and sound output such as pending display, variable effect, jackpot preview effect, look-ahead effect, etc.) The timing has come to end.

In addition, performances that are directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m and the lamp control unit 150 (a reservation display by the sub-first reservation display 83 and the sub-second reservation display 84, performances by the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74) (Operation) may match the frame update timing or may not match the frame update timing.

The overall CPU 141a performs voice control processing in step T15. Specifically, a process is performed in which a voice control command is generated from the sound information at the updated address, and this voice control command is output to the voice control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs a process of outputting various performance sounds and notification sounds from the audio output device 9 based on the audio control command. When this process is finished, the process moves to step T4.

In this way, at the start of the variable presentation and at the end of the variable presentation (stopping of the presentation pattern 70a), it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by the game clerk, but Volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 are regulated (limited). Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to miss important points such as the start of the variable performance and the end of the variable performance, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power restoration, unrecoverable error, unauthorized prize winning, abnormal prize winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, During notification (output of notification sound) of a door opening error, it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a game store clerk, but it is possible to adjust the volume and light intensity using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player. has come to be regulated (restricted). Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience of volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment on the game parlor side, while avoiding the inconvenience that a player who is trying to adjust the volume and light intensity does not notice the occurrence of an abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, various performance sounds output from the audio output device 9 When the volume of BGM (BGM, etc.) is lowered than the previous volume and the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of various performance sounds is returned to the volume before the drop. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing abnormality notification sounds due to various performance sounds, and it is possible to ensure the security of the gaming machine.

Note that during abnormality notification (output of notification sound), setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player may be disabled, or the adjustment range of the volume value and light intensity value may be disabled. may be limited to, for example, between 0 and 2.

(Initial processing of accessories in the lamp control section)
Accessory initial processing by the lamp control unit 150 will be explained using FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the accessory initialization process of the lamp control unit 150, and this process is executed within the timer interrupt process executed in the lamp control unit 150 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) has been received from the main control board 110. If the power-on command has been received, the process moves to step R102, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a executes the return-to-origin process for the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of the accessory initialization process. Set "1".

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial process number is not "1", it is assumed that the origin return process of the accessory is not executed and the process moves to step R105, and if the initial process number is "1", the origin return process is executed in step R104. and complete the initial processing of this accessory. Specifically, based on the input signal from the position detection sensor, the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is returned to its original position, and the initial processing number is Perform processing such as setting it to "2". Note that the details of the origin return process will be described later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the initial processing for the accessory is not performed and the current initial processing for the accessory is terminated, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial action processing is performed. , this time the accessory initial processing ends. Specifically, processing is performed such as performing an initial operation and initial light emission to check whether the accessory works normally or not, and setting the initial processing number to "0". Note that details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. It is designed not to execute the operation process at the same time. Therefore, the movement of returning various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements and initial light emission of various objects do not coexist, and it becomes possible to separate and check the return movement, initial movement, and initial light emission. .

Further, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 75, the origin return processing is executed before the initial movement processing. Therefore, the various accessory objects will initially move from the origin position, making it easier to understand whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various accessory objects.

(Lamp control unit return-to-origin processing)
The origin return process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 76. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control section 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is "0". do. If the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-3, and if the board accessory processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the drive target to be returned to the origin is set to the first point. 1 movable member 73, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R105-12, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", in step R105-4, the drive target to be returned to the origin is The second movable member 74 is set, and the process moves to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the movable member to be driven is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is at the original position is determined. If the movable member to be driven is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives a drive motor for moving the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, the movable member moves for a predetermined time. The board accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the board does not return to the original position within a certain period of time is updated by +1.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). When the board accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and the process is moved to step R105-9, and when the board accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the process is moved to step R105-9. , the process moves to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets return error information (first movable member return error information, second movable member return error information) indicating that a return error has occurred in the movable member to be driven, in the lamp RAM 150c. , In step R105-10, the board accessory abnormality determination timer is cleared.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-11. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to make the second movable member 74 the drive target, and the board accessory processing number is changed to "1". If it is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the origin return status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R105-13, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not the production button 17 is at the origin position (standby position). Specifically, an input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the production button 17 is at the origin position is determined. When the effect button 17 is not at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-14, and when the effect button 17 is at the origin position, the process moves to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives a button drive motor for moving the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to the origin position, and in step R105-15, the effect button 17 is moved within a predetermined time. The frame accessory abnormality determination timer for determining the occurrence of a return abnormality that does not return to the origin position is updated by +1.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at an upper limit value (for example, 5 seconds). If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is at the upper limit value, it is assumed that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, and the process moves to step R105-17. If the frame accessory abnormality determination timer is not at the upper limit value, the current The return-to-origin process ends.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets return abnormality information indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame accessory abnormality determination timer.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R105-19. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to end the process of returning the frame accessory (performance button 17) to the origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number, and in step R105-22, sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to the initial operation processing of the accessory. Set "2" and end the current return-to-origin process.

As described above, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. (in the order of member 73→second movable member 74), the movable member 73 is returned to the original position. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily confirm whether the various board accessories have returned to their original positions. Furthermore, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other in a manner that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent both movable members from applying loads to each other, and to prevent both movable members from being damaged at the same time. This makes it possible to suppress such inconveniences.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) It is possible to perform the return operation at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of various accessories to be executed next.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, an upper limit is set for the time required for each accessory object to return to its origin position. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the return operation of various accessories does not end forever. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the various accessories are performing return operations even during the variable performance and the performance operation is not performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, the operation of returning the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the origin position of the frame accessory (direction button 17) When both of the return operations are completed, processing for transitioning to initial operation processing is performed. Therefore, the return movement of various accessories to their origin positions and the initial movements of various accessories are not executed at the same time, and it becomes possible to separately check the return movements and initial movements of various accessories. .

Note that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed to return to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74), but at the same time, the origin position It may also be possible to start an operation to return to . In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 can be shortened, and it is possible to smoothly transition to the initial motion of various accessories to be executed next. becomes.

(Initial operation processing of lamp control unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control section 150 will be explained using FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control section 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operating status of the board accessory is "0". If the board accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-2, and if the board accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-4 assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, the process moves to step R107-3. In step R107-7, the board accessory processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial movement of the board accessory is not performed.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects the board accessory initial motion pattern determination table (see FIG. 78) for determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory. Note that details of the board accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial operation pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information by referring to the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table. do.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the board accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-6. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "0", the board accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the board accessory.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number is "1". If the board accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-11, and if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-8. The initial motion of the board accessory is executed according to the initial motion pattern of the board accessory.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all the initial operations of the board accessories have been completed. If all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have not been completed, the process moves to step R107-11, and if all steps of the initial movement of the board accessory have been completed, in step R107-10, the process moves to step R107-11. Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board accessory processing number is "1", the board accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the board accessory.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number indicating the transition of the initial operation status of the frame accessory (production button 17) is "0". If the frame accessory processing number is "0", the process moves to step R107-12, and if the frame accessory processing number is not "0", the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether return abnormality information for the production button 17 is set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information is not set, the process moves to step R107-14 assuming that the initial movement of the frame accessory is performed, and if the return abnormality information is set, in step R107-13, the frame Assuming that the initial movement of the accessory is not performed, the frame accessory processing number is set to "2", and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table (see FIG. 79) for determining the initial movement pattern of the frame accessory. Note that details of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, one initial motion pattern is determined from among a plurality of initial motion patterns based on the type of power-on command with reference to the frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table.

The lamp CPU 150a updates the frame accessory processing number by +1 in step R107-16. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "0", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "1" in order to execute the initial operation of the frame accessory.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame accessory processing number is "1". If the frame accessory processing number is not "1", the process moves to step R107-21, and if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is set in the lamp RAM 150c in step R107-18. The initial motion of the frame accessory is executed in accordance with the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether all steps of the initial motion of the frame accessory have been completed. If the initial motion of the frame accessory has not completed all steps, the process moves to step R107-21, and if the initial motion of the frame accessory has completed all steps, in step R107-20, the frame accessory Update the processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame accessory processing number is "1", the frame accessory processing number is updated to "2" in order to end the initial operation process of the frame accessory.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number satisfy the end condition. Specifically, it is determined whether the board accessory processing number is "2" and the frame accessory processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process moves to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

The lamp CPU 150a clears the board accessory processing number and the frame accessory processing number in step R107-22, clears the above-mentioned initial processing number in step R107-23, and ends the current initial operation processing. .

In this way, according to the initial motion process shown in FIG. 77, the initial motion of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial motion of the frame accessory (production button 17) are controlled. They can be executed at the same time (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial movements of various accessories can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the production operations of various accessories during the game from being inhibited.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board accessory, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, The initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely failing or being damaged by forcing the movable member in which the return abnormality has occurred to undergo initial operation.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, if there is a return abnormality in the effect button 17 forming the frame accessory, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences such as complete malfunction or damage of the performance button 17 by forcibly initializing the performance button 17 in which a return abnormality has occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, even if the initial operation of the board accessory in which the return error has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame accessory in which the return error has not occurred is executed, and the return error is performed. Even if the initial motion of the frame accessory in which the error has occurred is not executed, the initial motion of the board accessory in which the return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is any abnormality in the operation of the accessory object in which the return abnormality has not occurred.

Further, according to the initial operation processing shown in FIG. 77, both the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame accessory (production button 17) are completed. In this case, the initial operation process ends. Therefore, even though one of the board and frame accessories is performing an initial action, the other may perform a production action, where it is unclear whether it is an initial action or a production action. It disappears.

(Board accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a board accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the board accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The board accessory initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of power-on command, the presence or absence of return error information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected.For reference, the operation mode at the initial operation and the initial operation The number of steps is listed.

Initial operation patterns include patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a power-on designation command is received, and patterns 01 to 03 that are determined when a first power restoration designation command indicating that the device is waiting for a customer is received. Patterns determined when receiving patterns 04 to 06, the second power recovery designation command indicating that the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or the third power recovery designation command indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. 07 to 09 are set.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 moves in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin After operating, the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement→return to the origin, and during this period, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (light emit light) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, in which the first movable member 73 does not operate and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, During that period, the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and during that period, the first movable member LED lights up (lights up) in blue and white.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the initial operation is performed except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue. This is the same as pattern 01.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (lights up) only in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 06" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and since the second movable member LED does not light up in blue, it is ultimately the same as initial operation pattern 03.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and except for the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED being turned off, This is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04.
“Initial operation pattern 08” is determined when the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 or initial operation pattern 05 except that the second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is determined when the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, and is the same as initial operation pattern 03 or initial operation pattern 06 except that the first movable member 73 is turned off.

Note that in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08, the lighting color of the first movable member LED is not described. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

In addition, in the initial operation pattern 03, the initial operation pattern 06, and the initial operation pattern 09, the lighting color of the second movable member LED is not described, but this point is caused by the return abnormality of the second movable member 74. This is because the component LED flashes red to notify of an abnormality.

The first feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the board accessory One point is that the operation mode (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operation of (the first movable member, the second movable member) is the same. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored, it is possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the board accessory.

In addition, the movement mode of the initial movement is the same as long as at least the movement pattern of the board accessory in each process is the same, the movement time in each process may be the same, or the movement time in each process is the same. May be different.

Further, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. The operation modes (the number of steps, the operation of each step) of the initial operations of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be made different. In this way, it is possible to easily determine whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

In addition, when the initial operation mode (number of processes, operation of each process) of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is to be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, it is possible to An operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed in the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it is easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). It becomes possible.

A second feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the board accessory (first movable member 73, second The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the movable member 74) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The third feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Although they are the same, there is a difference in the light emission mode of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

It should be noted that while the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state, the light emitting manner of the initial light emission of the second movable member LED is different. However, on the contrary, the initial light emission mode of the first movable member LED is different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, while the light emission mode of the second movable member LED is different. The light emission mode of the initial light emission may be the same.

Furthermore, both the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED are made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state. Good too. In this way, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to the power being restored (the control state of the game has been restored). becomes.

The fourth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fifth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that when the power is restored to the customer waiting state, and when the power is restored when the special symbol is being displayed in fluctuation or during a jackpot game. The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board accessory (first movable member, second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore to a customer waiting state, or the initial operation is due to power restoration to restore during a special symbol fluctuation display, or during a jackpot game.

In addition, during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off, but the first movable member LED The member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same light emitting manner as when the power is restored to return to the customer waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. When there is no return abnormality in the movable member 74, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed without performing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and when there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73, the second movable member If there is a return abnormality in 74, the initial movement of the first movable member 73 is performed and the initial movement of the second movable member 74 is not performed. By doing so, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation depending on the presence or absence of a recovery abnormality.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial motion pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial motion pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17).

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during that period, the production button LED is Lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, During that period, the production button lights up (lights up) in blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received; The production button operates in the order of large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and the production button LED turns off during this period.

Regarding the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the performance button 17, the vibration time of the vibration performance executed during the variable performance (the vibration time during the dialogue preview performance) Vibration performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo continuous performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance, vibration performance during re-lottery performance, The time is different from the vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of confirmed performance).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the frame accessory The difference is in the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of (production button 17). Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One of the points is that it is designed to allow Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. This differs from the time during which the performance button 17 vibrates during the operation performance performed when the button 17 is operated. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that the process is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17 in which the detection of the process is performed. Therefore, the operation of the production button 17 and the button vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of main RAM 110c.

Note that power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. However, here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound elapses at timing T8, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T10, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 82 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At the timing T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T8, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the initial light emission ends in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the light is turned on while waiting for a customer (white light), and at the timing of T7, the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound starts. After the time has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 83, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized when the power is turned on without the setting change processing being performed has been described; however, the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change is performed. In the case of power-on, after the initial screen is displayed, the production control board 130 receives a setting change designation command, and the setting changing screen is displayed, and then the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command. By doing so, the first standby screen is displayed and the return operations and initial operations of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are started. Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after power restoration without initialization of main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ).

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 85 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality, and the initial The operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and turns on (lights white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 86 is a diagram illustrating a specific example where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the first movable member LED notifies the occurrence of the return abnormality. The second movable member 74 starts blinking in red (abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED maintain a state in which the lights are turned off.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends. Then, the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights up white).

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes “1”, the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing “1”, and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the return-to-origin process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed with a return error occurring in the production button 17, the production button LED flashes red ( abnormality notification mode), and the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

When the initial movement of the first movable member 73 ends at timing T5, the initial movement of the second movable member 74 starts, and when the initial movement of the second movable member 74 ends at timing T6, the initial movement process ends. Then, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn on (white light) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 88 is a diagram showing a specific example where the state after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c is a special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and with reservation memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen including the words "Please resume the game." , the audio output device 9 maintains silence.

In addition, when the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings = 3, number of second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays the returning screen, so the A state is maintained in which the second reserved numbers are not displayed in the 1st special figure reserved number display area 70E and the 2nd special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second hold display 84 has a display mode showing "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain a state of being turned off.

At timing T5, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at timing T7, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED maintain the extinguished state.

At timing T8, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the stop display of the "753" production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static state (static display) is displayed, and a stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

In addition, if the state after the power is restored is in the special symbol fluctuation display (loss fluctuation display) and there is no hold memory, "0" is displayed on the sub-first hold display 83 at the timing of T2, and at the timing of T9. The basic flow of operations from the timing T1 to the timing T8 described above is the same, except that the variable performance is not started upon receipt of the customer waiting state designation command.

(Specific example of when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where a power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

A case where the power-on designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected ( A first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and the command Although there is a third case in which the communication line connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed, and after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production control board 130 responds to the command. A control state is entered in which the performance can be executed.

At timing T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to initialize the control state of the game, and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen is displayed in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display). Further, the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of a warning and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ). Thereafter, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and the system becomes silent.

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the first standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen was displayed as a type of initial screen. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 90 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

A case where the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is disconnected ( A first case in which power (main power only) is not supplied due to a situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and a command communication line Although there is a third case in which the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed, and after a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the production control board 130 responds to the command. It becomes a control state in which it is possible to execute the desired effect.

At timing T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to restore the control state of the game, and a power restoration designation command for waiting for a customer is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, a return-to-origin process is started, and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and A second standby screen is displayed in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Furthermore, the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (lighted white). ).

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, the second standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it displayed a dark color display screen as a type of initial screen. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the second standby screen.

In addition, the audio output device 9 was configured to be silent when receiving the power restoration designation command, but it now outputs a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (so that it can be understood). You can do it like this. In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

(Specific example of when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be normally received when the power is turned on.

The case where the command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on is the first case where power is supplied to the production control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, and the production control is not performed from the main control board 110. Examples include a second case in which the command communication line to the board 130 is disconnected, and a third case in which the connector of the command communication line is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state). Case 3 will be explained.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power supply to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is started. At this time, as an initial operation of the image display device, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed.

At the timing of T2, the production control board 130 does not receive the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) sent from the main control board 110, and the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first special drawing reservation) is sent from the main control board 110. number and the second pending number = 0), the image display device maintains the state where the initial screen is displayed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn off. maintain.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing of T3, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pon♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T4, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the production symbol 70a of "753" which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration. , and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable production (production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or the icon concerned) , BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example 1 when restarting after only power supply to the main control board is stopped)
FIG. 92 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a first specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) has stopped.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The member LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration effect screen is displayed in which the losing effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed. , sub-information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general figure fluctuation display 85, sub-general figure The hold display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the customer waiting state designation command can be executed while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the fluctuating effect has finished). If the demonstration standby time has elapsed after the reception (or after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the power supply instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, if the return movement, initial movement, or initialization notification sound output of various characters has already been completed, a variable effect (loss variable effect) is in progress, or a jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is in progress. The timing of T4 also applies when restarting after only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a control state in which the performance control board is able to execute a performance according to a command, such as during execution. The screens displayed on the image display device until the power-on designation command is received in ), except that the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped while waiting for a customer, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button The return operation and initialization operation described in step 17) are performed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 81, 82, or 83. will be held.

(Specific example 2 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 93 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which the system is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted after the main power supply has stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable The component LED and the production button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display), and the audio output device 9 becomes silent.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

In addition, when there is a recovery abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories or light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode is similar to the specific example shown in FIG. 85, FIG. 86, or FIG. 87. will be held.

(Specific example 3 where power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 94 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the variation effect after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 3 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At timing T1, a variable effect is being executed, a variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, a variable display is performed on the sub-first variable display 81, and a pending number “1” is displayed on the sub-first pending display 83.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power source) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a recovery screen that includes the words "Please resume the game." The audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, second sub variable display 82, first sub hold indicator 83, second sub hold indicator 84, The sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85 and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) maintain the display contents.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is turned off. Initial operation of member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn off.

At the timing of T10, when the production control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display for the loss of the variable production is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display). is displayed, and the stop sound "Don♪" is output from the audio output device 9. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 takes a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that it is a loss.

In addition, if the result of the current variable performance is a jackpot, when the special figure stop designation command is received by the performance control board 130, a confirmation display of the variable performance as a jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a finalization screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a such as "777" and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 Now, it becomes a jackpot display mode indicating that it is a jackpot.

At timing T11, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". ”, and the variable performance (variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

In addition, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED become the initial light emission mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or have special light emission that is different from the initial light emission mode when the power is restored. In this manner, it may be possible to understand that a power recovery designation command has been received during a variable performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 85, 86, or 87. will be held.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has elapsed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display or stop display of the production pattern 70a is not performed. , the variable display on the sub-first variable display and the sub-second variable display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 95 shows the power supply to the main control board 110 during the execution of the jackpot effect after the origin return process and the initial operation process have already been completed (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the effect control board 130). It is a figure which shows the specific example 4 in the case where only supply is restarted after being stopped.

Here, during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the right hit effect is displayed at the top right of the screen. The suggestive right-hitting image MU is displayed, and at the bottom right of the screen, a jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Further, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variable display 81.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for jackpots transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 return to their origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a jackpot that includes the words "Please restart the game (jackpot in progress)". The intermediate recovery screen is displayed, and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first hold display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and sub-normal pattern pending display 86) maintain their display contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for the jackpot, the same returning screen that is displayed when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 94 is displayed. You can do it like this.

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the light is turned off. At the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the second movable member 73 is turned off. Initial operation of member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED end their initial light emission and turn off.

At timing T10, when the performance control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot performance (round performance) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of a normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F. Furthermore, jackpot performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED light up during the jackpot.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a special jackpot production (round production) screen is displayed on the image display device. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the production control board 130 receives an ending specification command instead of when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command while displaying a special jackpot production screen, the normal ending production is displayed. A screen will be displayed.

In addition, if a round number designation command is received while a special jackpot production screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot production screen, the special jackpot production will continue until the production control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but the light is turned off or the special light emitting mode is different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 85, 86, or 87. will be held.

In addition, in FIGS. 92 to 95, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display suggesting the restart of power supply is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the restoration to the state where the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and there is no pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display later displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made to be different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is displaying a specific display (resuming screen display) indicating that the power supply is to be resumed, the hold icon display area does not display the hold icon, but the sub hold display displays the hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. becomes.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, reducing the processing load related to display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the power supply that was stopped during the fluctuation performance is restarted for the sub-variation display devices (the first sub-variation display device 81 and the second sub-variation display device 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the special symbol is being fluctuated (returning screen is displayed), if the special symbol is being fluctuated, the fluctuating display ( (blinking display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, for the sub-hold display devices (the first sub-hold display device 83 and the second sub-hold display device 84), the resuming screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures is received), the display mode starts to show the number of reserved numbers. Therefore, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, Alternatively, the sub-hold indicators (first sub-hold indicator 83, second sub-hold indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the case, that is, from the timing when the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (timing when the initial screen ends). Therefore, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light emitting parts of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, if any of the various accessories has a return abnormality, the light emitting part of the accessory that has the return error will blink red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the accessory that has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next fluctuating effect is started. Abnormality notifications continue. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory that has experienced a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the effect pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device. The initial motion of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) is started from the timing after the return operation is completed (when the return operation is completed immediately, the timing at which the production pattern 70a is displayed). However, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the timing before the effect symbol 70a is displayed on the image display device (the display of the recovery screen (Middle), the initial movements of various accessories are performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform initial operations of various accessories at appropriate timings depending on the state when power supply occurs.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, and initialization of the main RAM 110c is performed. In the case of a power recovery without a power recovery, when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-hold display (sub-first pending display 83 , the initial operation is performed after the sub-second hold display 84) changes to a display mode showing the number of holds. Therefore, the initial movement of the board accessory can be performed after the player grasps the number of reservations (the progress of the game in the future), and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the frame accessory (effect button 17) is activated when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , When the returning screen is displayed on the image display device (during the special symbol fluctuation display and before the production symbol 70a is displayed), the sub-holding display (sub-first holding display 83, sub-second holding display 84) ) is designed to perform the initial operation after the display format changes to indicate the number of reservations. Therefore, after the player is made aware of the number of reservations (the progress of the game in the future), the initial movement of the frame accessory can be performed, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, the power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. From the same timing as when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (in case the return operation is completed immediately, the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed) to the initial stage of the various accessories It is designed to take action. Therefore, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even when the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, various accessories can be restored by simply displaying the initial screen. The operation, initial operation, and initial light emission are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to know that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the When the control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production according to the command, and receives a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved based on the winning of game balls to the starting port from the main control board 110, it emits a winning sound. It is designed to be output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the If the control board 130 receives a variation start command from the main control board 110 while it is in a control state in which it can execute a production according to the command, the variation production will be executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the fluctuating performance is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to perform the fluctuating performance from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the If the control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 when it is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, the fluctuation performance will start without performing the return movement or initial movement of various accessories. is designed to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform performances using various accessories without being hindered by the return action or the initial action during the execution of the variable performance.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the production control board 130 is in a state of waiting for a customer after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in the control state where the corresponding performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, even during a jackpot game after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed, the main control board 11 When the power supply to the main control board 110 is received again from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply after stopping, the restoration operation of various accessories and the initial operation ( (including initial light emission). Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, it is possible for the performance control board 130 to execute a performance in response to a command, such as during a customer waiting state after the initialization notification sound has already been output. Even in the control state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the performance control board 130 responds to the command during a jackpot game (opening performance, round performance, ending performance) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even if the main control board 110 is in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. , the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Note that when a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of performing the return operation and initial operation (including initial light emission) of various accessories. You can just output .

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the production control board 130 is in a state of waiting for a customer after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even if the controller is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has finished or during a jackpot game, the main control board 130 When the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, the first standby screen is displayed instead of the initial screen. ing. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the effect control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable effect after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the performance control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a jackpot performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen for jackpots is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, the performance control board 130 may execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in a control state where power is enabled, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the initial screen will be displayed. If the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen and a power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 80 to 95, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed after the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

(Modification 1 when only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 96 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 1 when restarting after stopping.

Here, during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the production control board 130 can execute production according to commands, only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is turned off. A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped.

At the timing of T1, the various accessories have already finished their return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound, and are now waiting for customers, and the image display device shows the initial pattern when the power is restored. A second standby screen is displayed in which a certain "753" production symbol 70a and special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are displayed. The lights are on while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the return operation of various accessories, the initial operation, and the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance that was executed after the output of the initialization notification sound, the image display device In this case, a standby screen is displayed in which the losing effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed).

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen and displays the sub Information display device 80 (sub-first fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable effect, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the completion of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen containing the words "Loading" instead of the second standby screen, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are turned off. do.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, is displayed on the image display device. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 issues an initialization notification consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared". Sound is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, or during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or jackpot Even in the case where the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is 93 to 95 except for the customer waiting demonstration production screen, variable production screen (loss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen), and jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). This is basically the same as the example shown.

(Modification 2 when only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 97 shows only the power supply to the main control board 110 in the customer waiting state (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the production control board 130) after the return-to-origin process and the initial operation process have already been completed. It is a figure which shows the modification 2 when restarting after stopping.

Here, during a customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned off. A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted while the supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

Note that even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable effect, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the completion of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the control state of the game. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Reading", and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub regular fluctuation display 85, sub The general figure holding display 86) is hidden.

At timing T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 are activated. A return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed on the image display device. A second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T7, when the initial operation of the production button 17 ends, the initial emission of light in the production button LED ends and turns on while waiting for a customer (lights white), and at timing T8, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends. Then, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ).

In addition, during the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance after the return operation of various characters, the initial operation, and the output of the initialization notification sound, or during the execution of variable effects (loss variable effect, jackpot variable effect), or jackpot Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding backup power supply) is stopped and restarted during the performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is 93 to 95 except for the customer waiting demonstration production screen, variable production screen (loss variation production screen, jackpot variation production screen), and jackpot production screen (opening production screen, round game production screen, ending production screen). This is basically the same as the example shown.

In addition, in FIGS. 96 and 97, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the effect pattern 70a is displayed is different from the standby screen. It is designed to switch to the initial screen. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

Further, according to the modification shown in FIGS. 96 and 97, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are , and turn off the performance button LED. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, the initial movements of various accessories do not start from the timing when the initial screen switches to the standby screen, but from the timing when the initial screen switches to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial operation may be started.

In addition, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen is switched to the initial screen when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) is received. It may also be possible to switch to a screen. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started at the timing when the standby screen switches to the initial screen, or at the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial movements of various accessories may be started at the switched timing.

Further, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the initial screen may be displayed after switching from the standby screen to the non-display state. In this case, the initial movements of various accessories may be started from the timing when the hidden state is switched to the initial screen, or from the timing before switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or from the initial screen to the standby screen. The initial motion of various accessories may be started at the timing when the switch is made.

(Modified example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 98 is a diagram illustrating a modification in a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen on which the words "Reading" are displayed is displayed as an initial operation of the image display device.

At timing T2, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 are returned to their origin positions. The operation begins.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and A first standby screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T4, when the return-to-origin process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality. (abnormality notification mode), the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the effect button 17 is started. At this time, the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, the initial emission of light in the production button LED is completed and the lighting is turned on while waiting for a customer (white lighting), and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is completed. The initial operation process ends without any operation being performed.

At the timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing T7, the game ball is not inserted into the first starting port 45. When receiving the first reserved number of special drawings designation command based on winning (first reserved number of special drawings = 1), the first reserved number in the first reserved number of special drawings display area 70E becomes "1", and the first reserved icon is displayed. The first hold icon is displayed in the area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 outputs the winning sound "Pon♪".

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED light up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that even if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will blink red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return error. , the first movable member 73, and the second movable member 74 are configured to complete the initial motion processing without performing the initial motion.

Furthermore, even when the power is restored, if there is a return error in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will notify the occurrence of the return error. In order to do so, it flashes in red (abnormality notification mode), and the initial operation process ends without performing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the return abnormality is detected not only in the movable member with the return abnormality. Initial operations are also not performed for movable members that are not present. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that one movable member collides with the other movable member and breaks down. In addition, it is possible to prevent the movable members (especially the movable member in which the return abnormality has not occurred) from ceasing to operate during the execution of the game (variable performance, jackpot game), thereby reducing the interest in the game. This makes it possible to prevent

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, when there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red to notify you of a recovery error. Therefore, compared to the case where only the movable member LED provided on one of the movable members having the return abnormality blinks red, it becomes easier to understand that there is an abnormality in the movable member.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, even if one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 The initial operation is performed for the effect buttons 17 that have no risk of colliding with the member 74. Therefore, the operation of the performance button 17 can be confirmed, and it becomes possible to grasp an abnormality of the performance button 17.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 98, even if there is a return abnormality in one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the production button LED provided in the production button 17 is restored. It is designed to emit an initial light without flashing red to notify of an abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to easily understand that there is no return abnormality in the production button 17.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the production button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

Further, when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17, the initial operation process may be completed without performing the initial operation for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED may blink red to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality.

(Variation example of initial processing of accessories in lamp control unit)
A modification of the accessory initial processing performed by the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to FIG. 99. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing a modification of the accessory initial processing performed by the lamp control unit 150.
In addition, here, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same process as the accessory initial process shown in FIG. 75, description is abbreviate|omitted, and a different process is demonstrated.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether there is a power ON flag set in the lamp RAM 150c at the time of starting power supply. If there is no power ON flag, the process moves to step R102A, and if there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 has been received. Then, the process moves to step R102B, and if the power-on command has not been received, the process moves to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 60 seconds after the last power ON, when the return operation and initial operation should have been completed), the process moves to step R103, and if the predetermined time has not elapsed. If so, the process moves to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a executes the origin return process of the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) at the initial processing number updated in each process of accessory initial processing. Set "1".

As described above, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initial operation of various accessories are started. Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether the control state of the game is initialized or restored, and the processing load associated with the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation after the start of power supply. It becomes possible to reduce the

Furthermore, according to the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration command, When a specified command is received, the various accessories return operations and initial operations are performed again. Therefore, the main control board 110 did not start up normally and the power-on command was sent later than usual (an abnormality occurred regarding the power line from the power board 160 to the main control board 110). It becomes possible to understand the

In addition, when a power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) is received, the return operation of various accessories and , the initial operation may be performed. In this way, the player does not need to be aware of the period of time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, and it becomes possible to simplify the process when the power-on command is received.

(Specific example when there is no return abnormality in various accessories after power is turned on)
FIG. 100 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery abnormality.

Note that power-on with initialization of the main RAM 110c includes power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized after the setting change process is performed, and power-on where the main RAM 110c is initialized without the setting change process being performed. However, here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. Then, the lighting mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become. At timing T7, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T9, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the second movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. . Further, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white, and the production button LED changes from red to white. Lights up in the order of green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. finish.

At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is a return error in the first movable member after power is turned on)
FIG. 102 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the light emitting mode of the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. , the lighting mode of the production button LED changes and lights up in the order of red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being performed. finish.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where there is a return error in the production button after the power is turned on)
FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the performance button 17 after the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. Here, a case will be described in which the power is turned on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing being performed.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the performance button LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in red and white. do.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer. At timing T6, when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound is stopped and a silent state occurs.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

Note that in the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 103, the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized when the main RAM 110c is initialized without any setting change processing has been described. In the case of power-on, after a dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, the production control board 130 receives a setting change designation command, and a setting changing screen is displayed, and then the power-on designation command is sent to production control. When the board 130 receives the signal, a first standby screen is displayed and the return operations and initial operations of various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) are started. . Note that the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving the setting value designation command.

(Specific example when there is no abnormality in various accessories returning after power is restored)
FIG. 104 shows various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17 ) is a diagram showing a specific example when there is no recovery abnormality.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. At the same time, the light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit while waiting for a customer (lights white). Become.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the second movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. .

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. . At this time, the second movable member LED blinks red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, and the performance The light emission mode of the button LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74. When the process is finished, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the first movable member returning after power is restored)
FIG. 106 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99. .

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED blinks in red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the second movable member LED and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes and lights up in blue. .

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T4, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is performed without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being executed. When the process is finished, the first movable member LED and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for the customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED It lights up during fluctuation, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when there is an abnormality in the production button returning after power is restored)
FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a specific example when there is a return abnormality in the production button 17 after the power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 maintain the non-display state. do.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed in a state where a return abnormality has occurred in the production button 17, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the production button LED flashes red to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality (abnormality notification mode), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED maintain the off state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started. The operation will not start.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives a power restoration designation command for waiting for customers transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white. 2 The light emitting mode of the movable member LED changes and lights up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

Furthermore, upon receiving a command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings and second number of reserved drawings = 0) as a power-on command, the first number of reserved special drawings display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit (white) while waiting for a customer.

At the timing of T6, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is The first hold number becomes "1", the first hold icon is displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "1", and the audio output device 9 The winning sound “Pon♪” is output.

At timing T7, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the production button LED ends, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED are fluctuating. The light is turned on, and the sub-first hold display 83 becomes a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example when the state after the power is restored is that the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner and there is a pending memory)
FIG. 108 shows that, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, the state after the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c is in the special symbol fluctuation display (losing fluctuation display) and with pending memory. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a specific example of the case.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the operation of returning the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 to the origin position is started. be done.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. Further, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-normal fluctuation display 85 are in a non-display state. ing.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for special figure fluctuations transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emitting mode of the first movable member LED changes and lights up alternately in blue and white, The light emitting manner of the second movable member LED and the production button LED changes and lights up in blue. At this time, the image display device displays a returning screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when the command for specifying the number of reserved special drawings (first number of reserved special drawings = 3, number of second reserved number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays the returning screen, so the A state is maintained in which the second reserved numbers are not displayed in the 1st special figure reserved number display area 70E and the 2nd special figure reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Further, the first sub-holding display 83 has a display mode showing "3", and the second sub-holding display 84 and the sub-universal drawing holding display 86 have a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are turned off.

At timing T7, when a special symbol stop designation command is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the stop display of the "753" production symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ ( A stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in a static state (static display) is displayed, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, the three first pending icons are displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state where the display area can display an effect image such as a background image ( (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icon is not displayed.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reservation number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "2". Then, a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "2".

(Specific example of when the power-on designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the power-on designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99.

A case where the power-on designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is not connected ( A first case in which power (main power supply and backup power supply) is not supplied due to the situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and the command Although there is a third case in which the communication line connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but when power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73, Then, the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, in the image display device, a dark initial screen is displayed as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, a sub-first fluctuation indicator 81, a sub-second fluctuation indicator 82, a sub-first hold indicator 83, a sub-second hold indicator 84, a sub-normal figure fluctuation indicator 85, and a sub-normal figure hold indicator. 86 is in a non-display state.

At timing T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started, and then the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed. At the timing T5, when the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, at the timing T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the second movable member 74 is started. When the initial operation of the member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the effect control board 130 enters a control state in which it is possible to execute the effect according to the command.

At timing T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process for initializing the control state of the game is performed and a power-on designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power-on designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "135", which is the initial symbol when the power is turned on, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying "RAM is cleared."

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in red and white as initial light emission, and the production button LED is lit in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED ends, and the system is waiting for customers. When the initialization notification sound output period (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power-on designation command, the first standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the first standby screen immediately, a dark color display screen was displayed as a type of initial screen. The first standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output from the start of displaying the dark color display screen, or may be output from the start of displaying the first standby screen.

(Specific example of when the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
FIG. 110 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of a case where the power recovery designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99.

A case where the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally means that power is being supplied to the production control board 130, but the power line of the main control board 110 is disconnected or the connector of the power line is disconnected ( A first case in which power (main power only) is not supplied due to a situation (including a half-plugged state), a second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and a command communication line Although there is a third case in which the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state), the first case will be described here.

Note that since the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in FIG. 109, the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing after T7 will be explained.

At timing T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed and a power restoration designation command is transmitted. Then, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 , and the operation of returning the production button 17 to its original position is started.

At this time, the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the sound The output device 9 maintains a silent state.

Thereafter, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED remain in an extinguished state.

At timing T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the production button LED light up in blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED ends, and the system is waiting for customers. It lights up (white light).

In addition, when the production control board 130 received the power recovery designation command, the second standby screen was displayed, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it displayed a dark color display screen as a type of initial screen. The second standby screen may be displayed after being displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds).

In addition, the audio output device 9 was set to be silent when receiving the power restoration designation command, but a notification sound (alarm, etc.) indicating that the power has been turned on (so that it can be understood) is emitted for a predetermined period of time. (For example, it may be output for 30 seconds). In this case, the alarm may be the same as when the power-on designation command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

In addition, in FIGS. 109 to 110, the various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

(Specific example of when the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on)
Figure 111 shows a specific example of the case where the power-on command (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command) cannot be received normally when the power is turned on, based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in Figure 99. FIG.

Cases in which the power recovery designation command cannot be received normally include cases in which power is not supplied to the main control board 110, cases in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 is disconnected, and cases in which the command communication line Examples include cases where the connector is in an unconnected state (including a half-plugged state).

Note that since the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in FIG. 109, the explanation here will be omitted, and the timing after T5 will be explained.

At the timing of T5, the production control board 130 does not receive the first power recovery designation command as the power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, and the special drawing reservation number designation command (the first special drawing reservation number and , second pending number=0), the image display device maintains the initial screen displayed.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the display modes of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED change and are turned off. becomes.

At the timing of T7, when the first special figure reservation number designation command (first special figure reservation number = 1) based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 is received, the initial screen is displayed on the image display device. However, the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pon♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T8, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. , and the second standby screen in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) is displayed for a moment, and then the variable production (production symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ, movement of the pending icon, or the icon concerned) , BGM output) starts.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

(Specific example 1 when restarting after only power supply to the main control board is stopped)
FIG. 112 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and performance control board 130 FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a first example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the main control board 110.

The case where only the power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped is a case where the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 is disconnected and then comes into contact with it due to an external factor. , the case where the connector of the power line (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 becomes connected after being disconnected (including half-plugged). Can be mentioned.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) is restarted after the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) has stopped.

At the timing of T1, various accessories are already in the state of waiting for customers after the return operation and initial operation are completed, and the image display device shows the production symbol "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. 70a, and a second standby screen or a customer waiting demonstration performance screen with the special design TZ being stopped and displayed (stationary display), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button are displayed. The LED lights up while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub 1 fluctuation display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-general fluctuation display 85, sub-general reservation display 86) also display contents. maintain.

At timing T3, when power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives a power-on designation command as a power-on command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in red and white as initial light emission, the production button LED is lit in white as initial light emission, and the image display device is powered on. A first standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "135" which is the initial symbol at the time of insertion and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and "RAM An initialization notification sound consisting of a voice saying "It's clear" is output.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation processing is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED, and the LED lights are turned on while waiting for a customer (white light is lit). ), and when the output period (for example, 60 seconds) of the initialization notification sound has elapsed at timing T10, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent.

In addition, if the return movement, initial movement, or initialization notification sound output of various characters has already been completed, a variable effect (loss variable effect) is in progress, or a jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is in progress. The timing of T4 also applies when restarting after only the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during a control state in which the performance control board is able to execute a performance according to a command, such as during execution. The screens displayed on the image display device until the power-on designation command is received in ), except that the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped while waiting for a customer, and various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button The return operation and initialization operation described in step 17) are performed, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound.

In addition, when there is an abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in Figures 101, 102, or 103. It will be done.

(Specific example 2 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
FIG. 113 shows a customer waiting state (main control board 110 and production control board 130 FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a second specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the main control board 110.

Here, during a customer waiting state (including execution of a customer waiting demonstration performance), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the main control board 110 is A case will be described in which the main power supply is restarted after the main power supply has stopped and the backup power supply continues.

At the timing of T1, if the various accessories are already waiting for customers after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound have finished, the image display device will display the initial symbol when the power is restored. A second standby screen or a customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the first movable member LED and the second movable member The LED and the performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, when the image display device is waiting for a customer after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various accessories have finished, the image display device will display a message indicating the loss. A standby screen or a customer-waiting demonstration performance screen in which the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ shown in FIG.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first reservation display 83, the sub-second reservation display 84, and the sub-standard reservation display 86 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state where the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and displays the sub information. Device 80 (sub first fluctuation indicator 81, sub second fluctuation indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general figure fluctuation indicator 85, sub general figure pending indicator 86 ) also maintains the displayed content.

At timing T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, processing for restoring the control state of the game is performed. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub The first hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84, the sub-normal figure fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal figure pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

Note that even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, while the standby screen is being displayed (regardless of whether or not after the completion of the variable performance, after receiving the customer waiting state designation command, or If the demonstration standby time has elapsed (after the end of the previous customer waiting demonstration performance), the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command as the power ON command transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, On the image display device, instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demonstration production screen, the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). A second standby screen of the status is displayed.

In addition, when receiving the special figure reservation number designation command (the first special figure reservation number and the second reservation number = 0) as the power ON command, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E of the image display device and , "0" is displayed as a reservation number in each of the second special figure reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-second fluctuation display 82, and the sub-population fluctuation display 85 continue the non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. Moreover, the sub-first hold display 83 and the sub-second hold display 84 have a display mode that shows "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is performed. After that, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At timing T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return-to-origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission is completed in the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED, and the system is waiting for customers. It lights up (white light).

In addition, in the case where various accessory objects have a return abnormality, the initial operation and initial light emission of the various accessory objects will be performed in the same way as the specific example shown in FIG. 105, FIG. 106, or FIG. 107.

(Specific example 3 where power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped)
FIG. 114 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a third specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At timing T1, a variable effect is being executed, a variable effect screen is displayed on the image display device, and variable effect sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED are lit during fluctuation. Further, a variable display is performed on the sub-first variable display 81, and a pending number “1” is displayed on the sub-first pending display 83.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power source) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the fluctuation effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the variable effect screen is displayed, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for the special figure fluctuation transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 The return operation to the origin position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, The image display device displays a return screen including the words "Please resume the game," and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub The second fluctuation display 82, the first sub-pending display 83, the second sub-pending display 84, the sub-privilege fluctuation display 85, and the sub-pending pending display 86) maintain their display contents.

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED end the initial light emission and turn off. becomes.

At the timing of T10, when the production control board 130 receives the special figure stop designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, a confirmation display for the loss of the variable production is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the production symbol 70a of “753”, which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the audio output device 9 A stop sound is output. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, the sub-first variable display 81 takes a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating that it is a loss.

In addition, if the result of the current variable performance is a jackpot, when the special figure stop designation command is received by the performance control board 130, a confirmation display of the variable performance as a jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a such as "777" and the special pattern TZ are stopped (statically displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 In this case, the jackpot display mode shows that it is a jackpot, and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At timing T11, when a fluctuation start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control board 110 is received, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "0". ”, and the variable performance (variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, movement of the pending icon or change to the icon, output of BGM) is started.

At this time, a variable display starts on the sub-first variable display 81, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED turn on during variation, and the sub-first pending display 83 , the display mode shows "0".

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but they must be turned off or have a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 105, 106, or 107. It will be done.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable production recognized by the production control board 130 has elapsed before receiving the special figure stop designation command, the temporary stop display or stop display of the production pattern 70a is not performed. , the variable display on the sub-first variable display and the sub-second variable display will not end.

(Specific example 4 when restarting after only the power supply to the main control board has stopped)
115 is based on the modified example of the accessory initial processing shown in FIG. 99, and shows that the main control board 110 and the effect control 13 is a diagram illustrating a fourth specific example in which only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the power supply to the board 130). FIG.

Here, during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the backup power supply is turned on. A case will be explained in which the supply of main power is restarted while the supply of power continues.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot effect (here, the first round effect) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot effect (round effect) screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot effect sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, a jackpot display (lighting) is performed on the sub-first variable display 81.

At timing T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 (excluding the backup power supply) is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variation Display 81, sub-second fluctuation display 82, sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, sub-routine fluctuation display 85, sub-routine reservation display 86) also maintain the display contents. .

At timing T3, when the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is not initialized and processing is performed to restore the gaming control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the state where the jackpot effect screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first pending display 83, The sub-second hold display 84, the sub-normal pattern fluctuation display 85, and the sub-normal pattern pending display 86) also maintain their display contents.

At timing T4, when the production control board 130 receives the power recovery designation command for jackpots transmitted from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and production button 17 return to their origin. A return operation to the position is started.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as initial light emission, and the production button LED lights up in white as initial light emission, The image display device displays a returning screen for jackpots that includes the words "Please restart the game (during jackpots)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82, sub first reservation display 83, sub second reservation display 84, sub general figure fluctuation display 85, sub ordinary The figure pending display 86) maintains the displayed content.

In addition, instead of displaying the returning screen for jackpots, the same returning screen as when the power supply to the main control board 110 (only the main power supply) is stopped during the fluctuating performance shown in FIG. 114 is displayed. You can do it like this.

At the timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the production button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing T6, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is finished. Then, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 are started.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the production button 17 is completed, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED end the initial light emission and turn off. becomes.

At timing T10, when the performance control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the second opening (second round) transmitted from the main control board 110, the jackpot performance (round performance) is restarted. At this time, the image display device displays a special jackpot effect (round effect) screen instead of a normal jackpot effect screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

Further, "1" is displayed as the reserved number in the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second reserved number of special symbols display area 70F. Furthermore, jackpot performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and production button LED light up during the jackpot.

After that, when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the third opening (third round) transmitted from the main control board 110, a special jackpot production (round production) screen is displayed on the image display device. Then, the normal jackpot effect (round effect) screen is displayed.

Note that when the production control board 130 receives an ending specification command instead of when the production control board 130 receives a round number designation command while displaying a special jackpot production screen, the normal ending production is displayed. A screen will be displayed.

In addition, if a round number designation command is received while a special jackpot production screen is being displayed, instead of switching to the normal jackpot production screen, the special jackpot production will continue until the production control board 130 receives the ending specification command. The screen may be continued, or the special jackpot effect screen may be continued until the effect control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED become the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored, but they are turned off or have a special light emitting mode different from the initial light emitting mode when the power is restored. It may also be possible to make it possible to recognize that a power restoration designation command has been received during a fluctuation performance.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in various accessories, the initial operation of various accessories and the light emission (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode are similar to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 105, 106, or 107. It will be done.

In addition, in FIGS. 112 to 115, when the power-on designation command or the power restoration designation command was received, various accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17) were performing the return operation. However, the initial motion of various accessories may be performed without performing the return motion.

In this way, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the control state of the game is initialized, the identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) in the plurality of performance symbols 70a are set to the first combination. When the first initial effect symbol ("135") is displayed and the control state of the game is restored, the second initial effect symbol ("135") in which the identification characters in the plurality of effect symbols 70a are the second combination is displayed. 753'') is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the control state of the game is restored, a specific display indicating that the power supply should be restarted is performed before displaying the effect pattern 70a on the image display device. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when restoring to the customer waiting state (initial screen display only), and the restoration to the state where the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner and there is no pending memory/with pending memory. The display mode of the specific display later displayed on the image display device (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made to be different. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the hold icon display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) and the sub hold display (sub first hold display It is possible to perform a hold display indicating the number of held memories on each of the sub-second hold display 84), and the power supply that was stopped while there is a held memory is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, when the image display device is displaying a specific display (resuming screen display) indicating that the power supply is to be resumed, the hold icon display area does not display the hold icon, but the sub hold display displays the hold display. It is possible. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of pending memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. becomes.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demonstration performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the customer waiting demonstration performance screen is displayed again. Instead, a second standby screen is displayed in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, is displayed in a stopped state (still display). Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether or not the state before the power supply was stopped was during a demonstration while waiting for customers, reducing the processing load related to display control when restoring the game control state after the power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the power supply that was stopped during the fluctuation performance is restarted for the sub-fluctuation display devices (sub-first fluctuation display device 81, sub-second fluctuation display device 82). When the control state of the game is restored, even if the special symbol is being fluctuated (returning screen is displayed), if the special symbol is being fluctuated, the fluctuating display ( (blinking display). Therefore, it is possible to reduce the processing load when restoring the control state of the game after power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the control state of the game is restored and the special symbol fluctuation display is executed (returning screen is displayed), the sub fluctuation display (sub first fluctuation display 81, sub second fluctuation display 82), a variable display (blinking display) may be performed. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it becomes easy to understand that the variable display of the special symbols is being executed.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, for the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84), the returning screen is displayed on the image display device. (before the variable display is performed on the sub-variable display and when the command for specifying the number of reserved special figures is received), the display mode starts to show the number of reserved numbers. Therefore, the player can be made aware of the number of pending games immediately after the control state of the game is restored, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when performing a variable display (blinking display) on the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, Alternatively, the sub-hold indicators (first sub-hold indicator 83, second sub-hold indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of holds in accordance with the start of this variable display. In this way, when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to easily understand that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner and the number of reservations at that time.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The return operation of various accessories is performed at the same timing as in the previous case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (timing when the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, the control related to the return operation of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of various accessories.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c, various accessories (first movable member 73, During the return operation of the second movable member 74 and the production button 17), the light emitting parts of various accessories (the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the production button LED) are turned off. ing. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish it from the initial motion of various accessories, and it becomes possible to understand that it is in the process of returning to its original state.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, if any of the various ornaments has a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the accessory with the return error flashes red (abnormality notification mode). By doing so, an abnormality is notified. Therefore, it becomes possible to grasp the accessory that has had a return abnormality.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, if the abnormality is notified by flashing red on the light-emitting part of the accessory that has returned abnormally, until the next fluctuating effect is started. Abnormality notifications continue. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the user of the accessory that has experienced a return abnormality.

In addition, when there is a return abnormality in the accessory, a return operation may be performed to return the accessory with the return abnormality to the original position at the timing when the next fluctuating performance is started. Further, in a case where the abnormality notification is performed by blinking the light emitting part of the accessory in which the recovery abnormality occurred in red, the abnormality notification may be canceled when the effect button 17 is operated.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, when power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, power is restored to the customer waiting state without initialization of the main RAM 110c. The initial operations of various accessories are performed at the same timing as in the previous case, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing at which the initial screen is displayed). Therefore, the control related to the initial movements of various accessories does not become complicated, and it becomes possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial movements of various accessories.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, for the board accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c, and the main RAM 110c is initialized. In the case of power restoration without a power recovery, the sub-hold display (the first sub-hold display 83, the second sub-hold display 84) changes to the display mode showing the number of holds (the image display device does not display the recovery screen). Initial operations are performed before Therefore, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial movements of the board accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the frame accessory (effect button 17) is activated when the power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c. , performs an initial operation before the sub-hold display (first sub-hold display 83, second sub-hold display 84) changes to the display mode indicating the number of holds (returning screen is displayed on the image display device). It looks like this. Therefore, it becomes easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial movements of the frame accessories. It becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the stop screen is displayed after the returning screen is displayed, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a is output. Therefore, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, when displaying the stop screen after displaying the returning screen, the stop sound of the effect pattern 70a may not be output.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the return operation, initial operation, etc. of various accessories, Then, while performing initial light emission, the initial screen continues to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to know that an abnormality has occurred in which a command cannot be received when the power is turned on.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the initial screen continues to be displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, , When the production control board 130 is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the production according to the command, and receives a command for specifying the number of special drawings reserved based on the winning of the game ball to the starting hole from the main control board 110, the prize is won. It is designed to output sound. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a game ball has entered the starting hole.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command) cannot be received, the When the control board 130 receives a variation start command from the main control board 110 after it is in a control state in which it can execute a production according to the command, the variation production is executed without displaying the standby screen. There is. Therefore, the start of the fluctuating performance is executed without delay, and it becomes possible to perform the fluctuating performance from beginning to end within the range of the varying time of the special symbol.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the production control board 130 responds to commands while in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even in the control state where the corresponding performance can be executed, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted, and the main control board 110 issues a power-on designation command or a power restoration designation. When the command is received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 responds to commands during a jackpot game after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and the power supply command or power recovery designation command is issued from the main control board 110. When received again, the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. becomes possible

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, it is possible for the performance control board 130 to execute a performance in response to a command, such as during a customer waiting state after the initialization notification sound has already been output. Even in the control state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, control allows the performance control board 130 to execute a performance according to a command, such as during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in the state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Note that when the power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 instead of executing the return operation, initial operation, and initial light emission of various accessories. You can just do it.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the production control board 130 responds to commands while in the customer waiting state after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed. Even if the controller is in a control state in which it is possible to execute the corresponding performance, the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110. In this case, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and when the power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. It looks like this. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

In addition, the performance control board 130 is capable of executing a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or a jackpot performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have ended. Even in this state, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is restarted after being stopped, and a power-on designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the initial screen is not displayed. The first standby screen is displayed. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 responds to commands, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various accessories and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 responds to commands such as during a jackpot performance after the return operation of various characters and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have been completed. Even in a control state where it is possible to execute a performance, the main control board 110 may issue a power recovery designation command by stopping and restarting only the power supply (main power supply) to the main control board 110. When received, the returning screen for jackpots is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, the performance control board 130 may execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished. Even in a control state where power is enabled, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed, and a power-on designation command is received from the main control board 110 again, the initial screen will be displayed. If the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen and a power recovery designation command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the production control board 130, the discrepancy can be resolved. It becomes possible.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 100 to 115, in a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to a command, the performance Even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed after the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can be continuously displayed. . Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Note that the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances according to commands are a customer waiting state, a fluctuating performance, and a jackpot performance. The state of waiting for a command (for example, while the initial screen is being displayed) may also be included in the control state in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance according to the command.

(Specific example when the connection status of various detection means changes)
FIGS. 116(a) and 116(b) are diagrams showing specific examples when the connection states of various detection means change during the customer waiting state.

Here, the wiring from the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector of the main control board 110. shall be.

First, FIG. 116(a) will be explained.
FIG. 116(a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-plugged and only the first starting port detection switch 45a becomes unconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error. Then, connection error notification is executed by the production control board 130.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the words "Connection error detected" indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 outputs an alarm and a message "Connection error detected." A connection error notification sound consisting of the voice is output.

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the first starting port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been released. However, the connection error notification continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Next, FIG. 116(b) will be explained.
FIG. 116(b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a changes during the customer waiting state.

It is assumed that the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110 at timing T1. At this time, the image display device displays a first standby screen in which the production symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display). .

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 is in a half-plugged state and the first starting port detection switch 45a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, and radio wave detection sensor 54a are in an unconnected state, The main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, a radio wave error, and a connection error, and the production control board 130 executes a magnetic error notification, a radio wave error notification, and a connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays the words "Magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the words "Radio wave error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the words "Connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error. An error notification image EG including the words ``Detection'' is displayed, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound consisting of an alarm and a voice saying ``Magnetic error.''

At timing T3, when the half-insertion of the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first starting port detection switch 45a return to the connected state, the main control board 110, it is detected that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been canceled, but various error notifications continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Note that if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error and will not issue an error. Notification is not executed.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection When the sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from a connected state to a disconnected state, an error notification is performed. Therefore, the occurrence of an abnormality (partially inserted connector, wire breakage, fraudulent activity) can be detected, and prompt response can be taken.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, specific detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) for detecting a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) is non-operating. Even when the connected state is restored from the connected state, error notification of magnetic errors and radio wave errors continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts against the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, even if the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to an unconnected state, no error notification is performed. Therefore, in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, the game can be continued as is, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

Note that this also applies when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while the specific detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 is not connected. , various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, in the same notification mode as in FIG. Radio wave error notification) may also be performed.

In this case, even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a change from the unconnected state to the connected state, the error notification (magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification) continues, but the first starting port detection switch 45a The connection error notification may be canceled when the state changes from the unconnected state to the connected state. In this way, the game can be continued as is in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, and it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In addition, the radio wave error notification sound related to a radio wave error that has a lower priority (importance) than a magnetic error, and the connection error notification sound related to a connection error that has a lower priority (importance) than a radio wave error, are considered to be magnetic errors. Although the notification sounds are not output when they occur simultaneously, the notification sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in order.

Furthermore, in magnetic error notification, radio error notification, and connection error notification, an error notification sound may be output without displaying the error notification image EG, or an error notification sound may be output while the error notification image EG is displayed. You may also choose not to output it.

In addition, when the first starting port detection switch 45a changes from the unconnected state to the connected state, it is assumed that a starting winning has occurred and special symbol determination information is acquired, and the first special symbol pending number (U1) is increased, thereby causing the special symbol A variable display or a variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol) may be executed.

(Specific example of operating the operation panel while waiting for a customer)
A specific example of the case where the operation unit (production button 17, cross key 18) is operated while waiting for a customer will be explained using FIG. 117.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the state shifts to a customer waiting state in which variable effects and jackpot effects are not executed, effective suggestion effects (introductory effects) indicating that a valid period may occur are not executed. Valid period while waiting for a customer during which the operations of the production button 17 and cross key 18 are valid (since the valid period while waiting for a customer is maintained until the fluctuating performance starts, it is longer than the various valid periods that occur during the fluctuating performance. (which can occur over a long period of time) is initiated.

At this time, a guide image AG (operation promotion image) is displayed on the lower right side of the first image display device 70 to guide the game assistance function started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. Specifically, a first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) suggesting that a menu is displayed by operating the effect button 17, and a volume adjustment possible by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18. A second image suggesting that the light intensity can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18 (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright up and down buttons) and a third image (an image that imitates the cross key 18 with bright colored up and down buttons) and a third image that suggests that the light amount can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the A light-colored image imitating the cross key 18) is displayed.

When the production button 17 is operated in this state, the menu image MG is displayed so as to overlap in front of the production pattern 70a without the production button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 117(b), and the menu image MG The display sound is output.

The menu image MG includes an "end" item for ending the menu display, a "model explanation" item for explaining the model, a "performance customization" item for setting the appearance rate of a predetermined effect (for example, confirmed effect, etc.), A "Pachilog" item has been set up to manage gaming history in conjunction with a mobile device (smartphone, etc.), and currently selected items are displayed in bright colors, while currently unselected items are displayed in dark colors. It is now displayed.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "end" item selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 117(c). Further, a sound for erasing the menu image MG is output, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated in this state, the volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 117(d). At the same time, a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating. Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period of time (for example, 15 seconds) passes without the cross key 18 being operated in this state, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 117(f). .

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the production buttons 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during the variable production are Even if the effect button 17 or cross key 18 is operated during the customer waiting period, which can occur for a period longer than the valid period, a vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (because the effect button 17 vibrates) (including indirect vibrations of the cross key 18 that are transmitted) are not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the production button 17 or cross key 18 is operated while waiting for a customer, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player. becomes.

In addition, the valid period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during the fluctuating performance (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot performance (jackpot game) also differs depending on the various preview performances (speech lines) that occur during the fluctuating performance. This can occur over a period longer than the validity period of the preview performance, pseudo-sequence performance, development performance, cut-in performance, final performance, etc.), but during the validity period of the cross key 18 related to volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment. Even if the cross key 18 is operated, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate (including the indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the jackpot performance, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, regarding the validity period while waiting for a customer, the validity suggestion effect (introduction performance) that suggests that the validity period may occur before the validity period occurs is not executed. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

In addition, regarding the valid period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during variable effects (variable display of special symbols) and jackpot effects (jackpot games), effective suggestion effects (introduced) before the effective period occurs. (direction) will not be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming defensive even though information useful to the player (effects that make the player expect a jackpot game to be executed) is not executed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, during the customer waiting period that can occur for a period longer than the period of validity of the performance button 17 (the display period of the operation promotion image) that occurs during the variable performance. The effective period (operation) of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, final production, etc.) that occur during variable production is more important than when the production button 17 is operated. When the effect button 17 is operated during the display of the promotion image, the vibration effect that causes the effect button 17 to vibrate is more likely to be executed. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to various preview effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (operation promotion related to dialogue preview effects, etc.). There is a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of images) and a relatively long second validity period (validity period accompanied by the display of operation promotion images related to fixed performances, etc.), but the validity period of the production button 17 that occurs during variable production When the performance button 17 is operated during the second valid period, the performance button 17 will be It is easier to perform a vibrating effect. Therefore, the performance effect of the variable performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period while waiting for a customer, a vibration effect may be executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates at a predetermined rate. At a lower rate than when the production button 17 is operated during the effective period of the production button 17 related to various preview productions (line preview production, pseudo-continuation production, development production, cut-in production, decisive production, etc.) that occur during the period. It is best to perform a vibration effect.

(Specific example of customizing the performance while waiting for a customer)
With reference to FIG. 118, a specific example will be described in which performance customization (setting to normal setting or simple setting) is performed by operating the operation unit (performance button 17, cross key 18) while waiting for a customer.

As shown in FIG. 118(a), when the production button 17 is operated while waiting for a customer, the menu image MG is displayed on the first image display device 70 so as to be superimposed in front of the production pattern 70a. In the menu image MG, the menu items "Exit", "Model Description", "Customize Performance", and "Pachilog" are set, and the currently selected item is displayed in bright color, indicating the currently selected item. Items that have not been selected are displayed in a dark color and can be selected using the cross key 19.

After that, when the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated twice, the "Customize effect" item becomes selected, as shown in FIG. 118(b), and when the effect button 17 is operated in this state, the As shown in 118(c), effect customization is determined and menu image MG changes to effect customization image KG. The production customization image KG has two settings: "Normal setting" in which the appearance frequency of various productions (continuous preview production, icon change production, timer production, role material notice at the start of fluctuation, etc.) is normal, and a "normal setting" in which the frequency of appearance of various productions is low. The "simple setting" item is set, the currently selected item is displayed in bright color, the currently unselected item is displayed in dark color, and the item can be selected using the cross key 19.

Then, when the production button 17 is operated with the "Normal Setting" item selected, the confirmation text "Normal Setting (Normal Mode) has been set" appears as shown in Figure 118(d). Is displayed. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, the menu image MG is redisplayed as shown in FIG. 118(e).

In this way, it is possible to set the frequency of appearance of various effects (continuous notice effect, icon change effect, timer effect, role material notice at the start of change, etc.) by operating the effect button 17 or cross key 19 while waiting for a customer. (customizable). Therefore, the player can make his or her favorite settings, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Specific example when variable performance starts from customer waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state will be explained using FIGS. 119 to 121. FIG. 119 is a timing chart in which the variable performance is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 120(a) to (f) and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to.

First, the timing T0 is the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), in the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the reservation icon and the icon TI are not displayed. .

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (4th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, a non-animated increase display of the first special figure reservation number and a non-animation increase display of the first reservation icon (completed in one frame) are performed, and the first occurrence, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is performed. The output of the notification sound starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". ", and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the normal size on the first display section 70B1. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved special symbols (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variable pattern starts (start of customer waiting state). 5th frame). At this timing, the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change (decrease display). will be started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". ”, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Moreover, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling at the same time that the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) in a state where it is not scrolled (updated to another performance symbol).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the output of the first notification sound starts (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 continues to be moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C, and the effect is The reduced display (preparation operation) of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame after the change display (decreasing display) of the first hold icon starts (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has been moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and When the icon becomes TI, the reduced display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the center variable display Scroll (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is in a scrolling state in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame from the start of the variable effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the center and right side variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the right variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(j), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the central variable display area, and the result is a loss. A state is reached in which a combination of effect patterns 70a indicating a certain thing is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped in the left center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is displayed as a effect. It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of reserved special drawings increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the number of reserved numbers and the non-animated increase of the reserved icon will be displayed for the shortest time, 1 frame. Since it ends in a period (hour) of minutes, it is possible to immediately shift to a variable effect (displaying a decrease in the pending number and displaying a change in the pending icon) to avoid delays, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

In addition, the occurrence notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon is a frame after the timing (frame update) at which the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon ends (frame update). Since this continues until the update timing, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of reserved special drawings decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), a non-animated reduction display of the reserved number and an animated change display of the reserved icon to the corresponding icon are performed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the display of the decrease in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), the special figure is pending. While presenting the effect that the number changes, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next effect symbol) starts, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, in which the variable effect starts after the pending memory decreases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special drawings on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, instead of displaying an increase in the number of hold icons without animation, it is displayed instead of increasing the number on hold. The animation may be executed over multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of reserved special drawings, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the display of a decrease in the pending number and the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), the display of the decrease in the pending number is completed (frame update). You can start either one first, if it's faster. By doing this, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special figures has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the effect symbols (updating to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon is It may be possible to start scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) of the effect pattern at a timing slightly before completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a variable performance will be explained using FIGS. 122 and 123. FIG. 122 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance, and FIGS. 123(a) to 123(c) are diagrams showing performance examples corresponding to (a) to (c) in FIG. 122.

First, the timing T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Further, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the corresponding icon (white icon) TI is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number and the animated increasing display of the first pending icon are started, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, is started. Ru.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". '', and the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size on the first display section 70B1, and enlarged display starts. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special drawings on hold increases, the number on hold is displayed non-animated and the number on hold is displayed as an animation. This makes it possible to make the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of reserved special drawings changes because the timing at which the increase in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update). While presenting this effect, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased based on the reserved numbers, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Additionally, if the number of special drawings on hold increases during the execution of a variable effect, the increased display of the holding icon will be executed for a longer period of time compared to the case where the number of special drawings on hold increases while waiting for a customer. Therefore, it is possible to make the player reliably aware that the number of reserved special figures has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending number and the pending icon ends in synchronization with the timing when the increasing display of the pending icon ends (frame update), the special figure pending It is possible to effectively represent the increase in the number of games, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons (10 frames) is shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons (20 frames), so it is easy to know that the variable effect will start. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending digits and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing for the increasing display of the pending digits to complete (frame updating) is earlier, which one? may be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, the period for displaying an increasing number of pending icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special drawings has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, both periods may be made to have the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be explained using FIGS. 124 and 125. FIG. 124 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 125(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 124.

First, the timing T0 is the fifth frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbols 70a of "4", "6", "8" indicating a loss, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state. It becomes. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, a first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variation pattern is started (the 20th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first special symbol pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the first pending icon is displayed as an animated change to the corresponding icon, and the first pending icon is displayed as a non-animated change. Animated display of decrease starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". ”. Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon (white icon) H11 that was displayed on the second display section 70B2 1 hold icon (white icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display section 70B1. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon is changing and decreasing, the first pending icon is increasing and the icon The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound at the time of occurrence, is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the change display of the first pending icon and the start of the decrease display (40th frame after the production pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon end. Further, the animation of the first pending icon that has been on standby starts to be displayed in increasing numbers, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and the first pending icon H11 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C. When the icon becomes TI, the first pending icon H12 that has moved from the second display section 70B2 is located at the center of the first display section 70B1, and the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance symbol 70a stops. Further, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display section 70B2 and starts to be enlarged, and at the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. Ru.

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (45th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing number of the first hold icons and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2, and the enlarged display continues. At the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (pico) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (50th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the pending icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of pending icons, this change display and decrease display will be completed. (Frame update) Even before the timing, the number on hold will start to increase, so even if the number on hold icon is changing and displaying a decrease, the player will be able to see that the number on hold has increased. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special drawings on hold increases while displaying a change in the hold icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of hold icons, the display of an increase in the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby ( (restriction), and at the timing when the change display and decrease display of the hold icon is completed (frame update), the increase display of the hold icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started, so the change in the number of special drawings held It is possible to prevent the game from becoming difficult to grasp, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon that is executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good too.

In addition, instead of starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons and outputting the occurrence notification sound at the timing when the display of the pending icon changes and decreasing display is completed (frame update), (the start is delayed from normal), The increasing display of the pending icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the changing display of the pending icon and the decreasing display are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special drawings from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases while the number of hold icons is increasing, the display of the number of hold icons will increase and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby in the same way as when the number of hold icons is changing or decreasing. On the other hand, it is sufficient to start displaying an increasing number of pending digits, and to start displaying an increasing number of pending icons and outputting an occurrence notification sound at the timing when displaying an increasing number of pending icons is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect will be explained using FIGS. 126 and 127. FIG. 126 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 127(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 126. .

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the center variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TI is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect pattern 70a scrolling in the center variable display area are displayed on the screen. The movement to the upper left and the reduced display are started, and the effect pattern 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(b), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the "5" effect symbol 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and The scrolling performance pattern 70a is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen, and is also displayed in a smaller size than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, while the development performance ends, the SP reach performance starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a in the variable display area at the center left is displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen, and at the center of the screen A confrontation performance in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 confront each other begins. In addition, the pending icons (here, (only the first hold icon) is hidden together with the hold icon display area.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the SP reach effect (showdown effect) is being executed, the first pending icon increases and the icon occurs at this timing. The output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound of the time, will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the final performance of the showdown performance (a decisive performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final performance (decisive performance) of the confrontation performance is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(e), on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 defeats the enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a that is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. The game will temporarily stop (it will be in an oscillating state) at the combination ("555") that indicates a jackpot.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the first pending icon is returned to the non-animated state and is displayed in an increased manner.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (in a swaying state). become). Further, the first pending icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2.

Then, the effect pattern 70a, which had been temporarily stopped in the left-center right variable display area, returns to the display mode consisting of characters and numbers, and finally, the effect pattern 70a stops displaying, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "555" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific production (SP reach production), even before the timing when this specific production ends (frame update), the number of pending numbers will increase. Since the increase display starts, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special drawings increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is put on standby (restricted), and the specific performance ends (the display is reduced). Since the number of pending icons starts to be displayed at the same time as the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (frame updated), it is possible to prevent the change in the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of reserved special drawings increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons and the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons, it is possible to reduce the player's discomfort and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbols on hold increases at the timing when the specific performance ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult for players to misunderstand that they have played the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special drawings on hold increases multiple times during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), while displaying an increase in the number of reservations, the system waits for the display of an increase on the reservation icon to be executed (restriction). It is preferable to display the increased number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update).

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number of reservations. Good too.

Moreover, although the SP reach-to-reach performance has been illustrated as the specific performance, the specific performance may include the SPSP reach-to-reach performance or may include the full-rotation reach-to-reach performance.

(Specific example of when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state will be explained using FIGS. 128 to 130. FIG. 128 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state, and FIGS. 129(a) to (f) and FIGS. 130(g) to (i) are shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to (i).

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(a), "1" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. ing. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, and second pending icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be performed in a specific gaming state (here, "0 times remaining") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU is displayed that encourages firing.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special figure reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415th frame after the start of the variable production). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first special figure pending number starts, but since the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon occurs Therefore, the output of the occurrence notification sound will not be performed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special symbol reservation number displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". ”, and the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left-center-right variable display area temporarily stop at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area at the center left, and A state is reached in which a combination of performance symbols 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops (445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display is started showing the results of the game during a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG becomes dark, and "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific gaming state and a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The characters "Jackpot x 1" are displayed, indicating the number of jackpot games played during the game. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the start of the result display (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(e), the first image display device 70 displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period. Additional information will be displayed.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the start of the result display (475th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state ends and the first variable performance in the normal gaming state starts (490th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the first pending icon is returned to a non-animated display, and the first pending icon is increased in a non-animated manner. Display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reservation number in the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3", and the second reservation number changes from "4" to "3". The second pending icon display area 70D is hidden together with the pending icon, and the first pending icon display area 70B is redisplayed together with the pending icon.

Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be reduced in size (preparation operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling. Further, a left-handed hitting image HU is displayed at the upper left of the screen, which prompts the user to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, as shown in FIG. 130(h), in the first image display device 70, the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect pattern 70a is stopped.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

In this way, when the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, while waiting (restricting) the increasing display of the first pending icon, the increasing display of the first special figure pending number is Therefore, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of a specific performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the first special figure pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, an increase in the first pending icon will be displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the display of an increase in the number of reserved first special drawings that was executed before, you can recognize that the number of reserved first special drawings has increased, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of first pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect in) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that can be completed in one frame, so the special figure pending Even if there is an extreme difference between the timing at which the number increases and the timing at which the display of an increased number of pending icons is executed, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the special image is displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult to mislead people into thinking that the number of reservations has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next performance symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of first special figures on hold increases by multiple numbers during a specific gaming state, while displaying an increase in the number of pending numbers, the display of an increase in the number of pending icons is on standby (restricted). It is only necessary to display an increase in the number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update).

Further, when the number of first special symbols on hold increases during a specific gaming state, instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number on hold.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the first pending icon display area 70B is set (displayed) in the normal gaming state, the second pending icon display area 70D is not set (displayed), and in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B is set (displayed). While the hold icon display area 70B was not set (displayed), the second hold icon display area 70B was set (displayed), but now the second hold icon display area 70D is set (displayed) in the normal gaming state. Alternatively, the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) in a specific gaming state.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is being executed during the variable performance. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect, or the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during execution of a specific effect. The icon may be hidden.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special figure reserved number display area 70E and the second special figure reserved number display area 70F were set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but the second image display device 71 It may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display different from the image display device (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.). If a dedicated LED is used, the number of reserved special symbols may be displayed by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Example of performance when the player changes the performance element during the first variable performance in a specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 131, an example of a performance in which a player changes a performance element (here, a volume value) during the first variable performance in a specific game state will be described.
In addition, here, an example is shown in which the specific game state is a variable probability game state, but the same is basically true in the case of a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state).

First, as shown in FIG. 131(a), on the first image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. When a game ball enters the first start opening 45 in this state, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9. Never.

When the first variable performance is started from this state with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to " 0", but the shift display (decreasing display) of the hold icon is not performed, the production symbol 70a starts to display a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the current volume value "4" is changed to "0". BGM is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to "."

Further, in the specific game state, a left-handed hit error notification based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 is carried out over a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

Note that in a specific gaming state, the left-handed hit error is not notified when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, but when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first starting port 45. A left-handed hitting error may be notified based on this.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", a generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9, and the second special figure is reserved. The number display area 70F becomes "1". Further, a hold icon H21 (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the second hold icon display area 70B.

Note that the left-handed hit error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 47, and in this case, the left-handed hit error image HUE is erased before the left-handed hit error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed player error sound may be deleted before the left-handed player error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 131(c), the volume value image OG shows the current volume value "4" without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound increases by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 131(d). The BGM that is updated and currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and a stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 131(e), the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a losing number of "379". At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "379". Further, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stop display of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first variable effect ends, and the second variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 131(f) As shown in , the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the second reservation icon (white The icon) H21 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the production pattern 70a starts to display a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the volume ( BGM continues to be output in the performance element).

Here, an example was shown in which the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. The same is basically true for cases as well.

Also, when the left button or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light amount value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, the light amount value is not displayed as the volume value image OG by the operation of the cross key 19. It is basically the same except that an image is displayed and the light amount of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes in accordance with the increase/decrease in the light amount value.

In addition, if the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in a specific game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance to change the performance mode, the background The image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next second variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in a specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not changed, but the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may not be changed.

Also, in the case where the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in the normal gaming state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance and the performance mode is changed, The background image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the first variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next second variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the normal game state, when the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance symbol 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special symbol TZ is not changed.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, by operating various operation sections (production button 17, cross key 19) during execution of the first variable production in a specific game state, the second variable production to be executed next It is possible to change the performance elements (volume value, light amount value, performance mode, etc.) used in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player and to increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during a specific game state in which the first hold icon is not displayed, the occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to only the occurrence notification sound being output even though the first hold icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 131, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, if the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generation notification sound ( If a special icon is displayed without a winning sound (winning sound) being output, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in a specific game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and displayed, but the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed instead of being shifted. .

(Example of performance when the player changes the performance element during the second variable performance in a specific game state)
With reference to FIG. 132, an example of a performance when the player changes the performance element during the second variable performance in a specific game state will be described.
Here, an example is shown in which the specific game state is a variable probability game state, but the same is basically true for the time-saving game state.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in this state, the second special figure reservation number (U2) becomes "1", the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and the second reservation icon A hold icon H21 (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the display area 70B. Note that even if a game ball wins in the second starting port 47 during the specific gaming state, a white icon is displayed, so no notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9 (a special icon is displayed) (If this occurs, an alarm sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output.)

When the second variable performance is started from this state with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to " 0'', and the second pending icon (white icon) H21 displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the second pending icon display area 70D starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), the special pattern TZ starts to scroll, and BGM is outputted from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first start opening 45, the first special figure reservation number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific gaming state, the first pending icon is not displayed, and any generated notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9. Never.

Further, in the specific game state, a left-handed hit error notification based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first starting port 45 is carried out over a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

Note that in a specific gaming state, the left-handed hit error is not notified when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, but when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first starting port 45. A left-handed hitting error may be notified based on this. Furthermore, the left-handed hitting error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 47. In this case, the left-handed hitting error image HUE is erased before the left-handed hitting error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed player error sound may be deleted before the left-handed player error image HUE.

After that, when the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 132(c), the volume value image OG shows the current volume value "4" without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating. is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound increases by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 132(d). The BGM that is updated and currently being output is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the variable time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. 132(e), the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a is stopped and displayed with a losing number of "379". At the same time, the special symbol TZ is stopped and displayed at the loss of "379". Further, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stop display of the effect pattern 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second variable effect ends, and the first variable effect starts with the start of the variable display of the next first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 132(f) As shown in , the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the shift display (decrease display) of the reservation icon is not performed, and the production symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation). At the same time, the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the BGM continues to be output at the volume (performance element) according to the volume value "5" that was adjusted (changed) during the previous second variation performance. .

Here, an example was shown in which the upper button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase the volume value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, but the lower button of the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value. The same is basically true for cases as well.

Also, when the left button or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light amount value during the first variation performance in a specific game state, the light amount value is not displayed as the volume value image OG by the operation of the cross key 19. It is basically the same except that an image is displayed and the light amount of various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, panel lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes in accordance with the increase/decrease in the light amount value.

In addition, if the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in a specific game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the second variable performance to change the performance mode, the background The image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second variable performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and the light amount value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next first variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in a specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is not changed, but the display manner of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ may not be changed.

Also, in the case where the first variable performance is executed after the second variable performance in the normal gaming state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the second variable performance and the performance mode is changed, The background image is changed to a background image according to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM according to the changed performance mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second variable performance (only during the pre-reach performance) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and the light amount value can be changed (other than when the fluctuation starts and when the fluctuation stops).

In this case, instead of changing the background image and BGM during the second variable effect, even if the background image and BGM are changed from the start of the next first variable effect to the changed effect mode. good. Furthermore, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Further, in the normal game state, when the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance symbol 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special symbol TZ is not changed.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, the operation of the various operation parts (production button 17, cross key 19) during the execution of the second variable production in a specific game state causes the first variable production to be executed next. It is possible to change the performance elements (volume value, light amount value, performance mode, etc.) used in the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the convenience for the player and to increase the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, even if a game ball wins in the first starting port 45 during a specific game state in which the first hold icon is not displayed, the occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is not output. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is confused due to only the occurrence notification sound being output even though the first hold icon is not displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 132, even if a game ball enters the second starting port 47 in the specific game state, if the normal icon (white icon) is displayed, the generation notification sound ( If a special icon is displayed without a winning sound (winning sound) being output, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the player is fed up with the generated notification sound in a specific game state where it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting port 47, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and displayed, but the icon is not displayed, but the pending icon may be displayed instead of being shifted. .

(Example of performance when pre-reading action performance and step-up notice performance are executed)
An example of a performance when a prefetch action performance and a step-up notice performance are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(a), on the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the variation effect (corresponding to advance variation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2", The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the look-ahead motion performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

Thereafter, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (the left end in the figure) that is the target of the prefetch action effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 133(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position and the first performance of the pre-reading action performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 133(d), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to the preliminary variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 133(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the look-ahead motion effect, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak motion sound effect. be done.

After that, immediately after the movement of the pending icon HI is completed, when the pending icon that is the preview target of the look-ahead motion performance changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparation motion) of the performance symbol 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 133(f). After finishing, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size is started, and then the second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the second performance of the look-ahead motion performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 134(g), the production pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance symbol has elapsed and the fluctuation performance (corresponding to the fluctuation) that is the subject of advance notice of the look-ahead motion performance is started, as shown in FIG. 134(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the look-ahead motion performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the look-ahead motion performance, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong motion of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong motion sound effect. be done.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 134(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a ends, the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) in the normal size starts, and then The second movable member 74 returns to the initial position, and the third performance of the pre-reading motion performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the performance symbol 70a, the first step performance of the step-up preview performance is started, as shown in FIG. 134(j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step effects are sequentially executed.

Furthermore, when the fourth step effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 134(k), the fifth step effect is started, the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the fifth step sound effect is is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 remains off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) at the time of the game is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

When one second passes, as shown in FIG. 134(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, and two seconds after that, the fifth step effect ends. After that, according to the variable performance pattern, the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed after the normal ready-to-reach performance is performed, or the SPSP ready-to-reach performance is performed after the normal reach performance is performed.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, after the number of reserved special symbols displayed in the special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a starts the preparation operation). The pre-reading operation effect (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started before the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) of the effect pattern 70a is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable effect, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed, the look-ahead motion effect is performed. (Light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started. Therefore, while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, it is possible to make it easier for the player to notice that the pre-read motion performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the vibration production is not performed during the first to fourth step production of the step-up notice production, but the vibration production is performed during the fifth step production, which has the highest expectation level. It is set to run. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the 5th step production is longer than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step production of the step-up notice production. seconds) is shorter. Therefore, the vibration effect does not surpass the appearance of the fifth step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up notice effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, since the vibration production executed during the fifth step production does not involve the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image ( The sound effect when displaying the opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 133 and 134, even during the vibration effect of the effect button 17, the effect light emission and lamp change effects by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the fifth step production in the step-up notice production, but the production button 17 can be held in a predetermined mode (for confirmation of jackpot) during the execution period of the vibration production. It may be made to emit light in a color other than the rainbow color that is the emitted light color, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the vibration effect is being executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It may also be possible to emit light for a dramatic effect.

(Example of production when pre-reading vibration production and dialogue preview production are executed)
An example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(a), on the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a of "468" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the fluctuation performance (corresponding to advance fluctuation) is started from this state, as shown in FIG. 135(b), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2", The two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first performance of the pre-reading vibration performance that spans three variable performances is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues.

Thereafter, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon (left end in the figure) that is the preview target of the pre-read vibration effect changes to a blue icon, the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size, as shown in FIG. 135(c). (Preparation operation) is completed, a scroll display in normal size (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the first performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed. In addition, the prize opening lamp NR (not shown) emits light in the same blue color as the blue icon, and a lamp change effect is started.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 135(d), the effect pattern 70a stops displaying when a losing number is "365", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying when a losing number shows "365". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the production symbol has elapsed and the next variable production (corresponding to advance variation) is started, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is set to "2" as shown in FIG. 135(e). to "1", and the two pending icons HI start moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the second performance of the pre-read vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a weak preview of the pre-read vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the effect button 17 flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) or the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, immediately after the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, when the hold icon that is the preview target of the pre-reading vibration effect changes to a red icon, the reduced display (preparatory action) of the effect pattern 70a is displayed as shown in FIG. 135(f). After the end, a scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) is started, and then the weak vibration and white blinking of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the second performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed. In addition, the winning opening lamp NR (not shown) emits the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

Then, when the variable time period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 136(g), the production pattern 70a stops displaying at the losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ stops displaying at the losing number of "635". .

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance symbol has elapsed and the fluctuation performance (corresponding to the fluctuation) that is the subject of advance notice of the pre-read vibration performance is started, as shown in FIG. 136(h), the number of reserved special symbols is displayed. As the area 70E changes from "1" to "0", one pending icon HI starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparation operation), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is started. Specifically, as a strong preview of the pre-read vibration performance, the performance button 17 strongly vibrates for 3 seconds, and the performance button 17 flashes in red for 3 seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the effect sound when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. Although the effect sound (sound effect) of the time is not output, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 136(i), the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a ends and the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation) starts, but the pre-reading vibration effect The strong warning will remain in place. Thereafter, the strong vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 are stopped, and the third performance of the pre-read vibration performance is completed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance is completed, as shown in FIG. 136(j), the valid period of the performance button 17 (single press 3 seconds) occurs and the dialogue preview performance starts. be done. Specifically, an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, and the operation promotion image SG is At the same time as the display sound effect is output, the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the production button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the heat line "What is this!? It's hot!!" is displayed in red letters, as shown in FIG. 136(k). , a sound (direction sound) corresponding to the heated dialogue is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 is turned off, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and The lamp change performance continues.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 136(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, a pseudo continuous effect is executed according to the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed, an SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect, or an SP SP reach effect is executed after a normal reach effect. It will be executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, after the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area decreases with the start of the variable production (the production pattern 70a performs the preparation operation). The pre-reading vibration effect (vibration of the effect button 17, flashing white) is started before the start of the scroll display (high-speed fluctuation). Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pre-reading vibration production is performed after the movement (shift) of the pending icon is started with the start of the variable production, but before the movement of the pending icon is completed. (Vibration of production button 17, flashing white) is started. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed while letting the player know that the variable performance has started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, when the pre-reading vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is made to flash white, although the effect period of the effect button 17 is not accompanied. Therefore, even when the performance button 17 is not operated, it is possible to easily make the player aware that the pre-read vibration performance is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the lighting mode of the production button 17 in the pre-reading vibration production is different from that of the preview production (line preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production) with the occurrence of the validity period. This is different from the lighting mode of the performance button 17 during the valid period in (performance, fixed performance, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of causing the player to misunderstand that the effective period of the performance button 17 has expired in the pre-read vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) is not executed until the pre-read vibration performance ends. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice due to the pre-ready notice performance that a pre-read vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the pseudo continuous effect is not executed until the pre-reading vibration effect is completed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that it becomes difficult to notice that a pre-reading vibration performance that is difficult to judge visually is being executed due to the pseudo-continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration performance executed during the dialogue preview performance is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue preview performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the dialogue preview performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the vibration effect executed during the pre-reading vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque The display sound effect when displaying the production button image, gauge image) and the production sound when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are no longer output. There is. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the vibration production performed during the speech preview production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production) A display sound effect when displaying a button image, a gauge image) and a production sound (operation sound effect, dialogue voice, etc.) when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the dialogue preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the speech preview production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, even during the vibration production accompanied by the validity period of the production button 17, the production light emission and lamp change production by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continue. There is. Therefore, by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the effect light emission or lamp change effect due to the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect can be maintained and the interest of the game can be improved. Become.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production that is executed during the dialogue preview production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) for the duration of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

Furthermore, regarding the vibration performance that is executed during the dialogue preview performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, it is possible to draw attention to the effect button 17 by the lighting mode of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (for example, moving light emitting light toward the effect button 17, etc.). It may also be possible to emit light for a dramatic effect.

(Example of performance when pseudo continuous performance is executed before reach performance)
With reference to FIG. 137, an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo-continuous performance (a staged performance accompanying a pseudo-continuous performance without straddling the ready-to-reach performance) is executed before a ready-to-reach performance will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(a), in the first image display device 70, a "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, a "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the right area, In the middle area, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues. At this time, the pseudo consecutive success performance is started without the validity period of the performance button 17 occurring. Specifically, an inciting effect is executed in the middle region to incite whether or not a pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo continuous effect will be temporarily stopped. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the inciting effect ends, the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and a success sound effect is output, as shown in FIG. 137(b). Further, as shown in FIG. 137(c), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and performs a weak movement of moving toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again. “×2” indicating the number of pseudo fluctuations (the progress of the production stage) is displayed in blue. Furthermore, the first stage performance (movie of the first episode of the story) of the stage performances executed in conjunction with the pseudo continuous performance is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(d), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area, and the "5" effect pattern is temporarily stopped in the right area. 70a is temporarily stopped, the fluctuating display of the performance pattern 70a continues in the middle area, and a pseudo-inciting performance is executed in the medium area to incite whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo series is temporarily stopped. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the operation promotion image SG is displayed. The display sound effect of the promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(e), the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. . In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 137(f), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red. Furthermore, the second stage performance (movie of the second episode of the story) of the stage performances performed in conjunction with the pseudo-continuous performance is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 has elapsed, the pseudo consecutive success effect ends, and as shown in FIG. is temporarily stopped and a normal reach effect is executed, and then, depending on the variable effect pattern, a normal reach effect is executed and then an SP reach effect is executed, or a normal reach effect is executed and then an SP SP reach effect is executed. It turns out.

(Example of a performance when a pseudo continuous performance is executed after a reach performance)
With reference to FIG. 138, an example of a performance in a case where a pseudo-continuous performance (a staged performance accompanying the pseudo-continuous performance across the ready-to-reach performance) is executed after the ready-to-reach performance will be described. Note that FIGS. 138(a) to 138(c) are the same as FIGS. 137(a) to 137(c), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 138(c), as shown in FIG. 138(d), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138(e), when the pseudo-continuation effect is started, a pseudo-inciting effect is executed to incite whether or not the pseudo-symbols suggesting the execution of the pseudo-continuation will temporarily stop in the middle area. At this time, the validity period of the production button 17 occurs, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and the production promotion image SG is displayed. Button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 138(f), the pseudo symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends, as shown in FIG. 138(g). In addition, the second movable member 74 emits red light and makes a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the effect pattern 70a changes again and the number of pseudo changes (the stage of the effect progresses). ``x3'' indicating what has been done) is displayed in red. Furthermore, the second stage performance (movie of the second episode of the story) of the stage performances performed in conjunction with the pseudo-continuous performance is performed over a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds).

After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 138(h), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed, and thereafter, according to the variable effect pattern. After the normal reach effect is executed, the SP reach effect is executed, or after the normal reach effect is executed, the SPSP reach effect is executed.

As described above, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the vibration effect can be executed when the pseudo continuous effect is executed when the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs in the pseudo continuous effect. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the player's sense of expectation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production performed during the pseudo consecutive success production is longer than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo consecutive success production. It's shorter. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive success performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the pseudo consecutive success performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, since the vibration production executed during the pseudo-continuous production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), the operation promotion image (opaque production Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, success sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the pseudo continuous performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, the execution period of the vibration production executed in the pseudo-sequence production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration performance depending on whether or not the performance button 17 is operated and the timing of the operation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, in the case where the pseudo-continuous production is executed after the ready-to-reach production, the type of production symbol that forms the ready-to-win state after the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is the pseudo-continuous production. Downgrade from the type of production symbol that formed the reach state before execution (downgrade from reach with odd numbered symbols to reach with even numbered symbols, reach from reach with "7" symbol to reach with even numbered symbols or odd numbered symbols other than "7") (downgrade to 1). Therefore, the player will not feel dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo-continuous performance, and the interest in the game will not be improved.

Further, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, in a fluctuating production in which a pseudo-continuous production is executed, the production can progress in stages according to the pseudo-continuation (temporary stop and re-variation of the production pattern 70a). It is possible to perform stage effects (playback of story episodes 1 to 3 movies). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect when the pseudo continuous performance is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 137 and 138, there are cases in which the stage production starts before the pseudo series is performed, and cases in which the stage production starts after the pseudo series is performed. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where a pseudo consecutive performance is performed after a staged performance has been started, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the pseudo continuous production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, regarding the vibration performance executed during the pseudo continuous performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 0.5 seconds after (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the effective period of the effect button 17 is generated during the pseudo continuous effect and the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed, the effective period of the effect button 17 is not generated during the pseudo continuous effect. The vibration effect may be executed, or the effect period of the effect button 17 may be made to occur, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 139, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SP ready-to-reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach effect is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SP development effect is started, the SPSP development pattern that suggests the development to the SPSP reach effect, the SP development pattern that suggests the development to the SP reach effect, the pseudo continuous effect A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as a pseudo symbol that suggests the execution of the ``game'' and a waste symbol that suggests that the performance will not develop (a loss), are displayed in a diagonal direction at low speed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(c), an effect is performed in which SPSP development symbols, SP development symbols, pseudo symbols, and waste symbols are displayed in a high-speed variable manner. Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 139(d), it is reported that the SP development symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and develops into an SP ready-to-reach effect. In addition, in the roulette performance, the type of special performance symbols that are variably displayed changes depending on the fluctuation performance pattern, so the special performance symbols that are variably displayed (special performance symbols that are not ultimately temporarily stopped and special performance symbols that are temporarily stopped) Depending on the type of performance, it suggests whether or not it will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (expectation level for jackpots).

After that, the screen becomes white out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. It will be displayed in a reduced size in the corner and the SP reach effect will start. It should be noted that the icon becomes hidden with the start of the SP reach effect.

(Example of production when development production is executed and SPSP reach production is executed)
With reference to FIG. 140, an example of a performance in a case where the development performance is executed and the SPSP reach performance is executed will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 140(a), the performance symbol 70a of "5" is temporarily stopped in the left area and the right area, and the normal reach performance is executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SPSP development effect is started, the SP development symbol suggests development to SP reach effect, the SPSP development symbol suggests development to SPSP reach effect, and the full rotation reach effect. A roulette performance is performed in which a plurality of special performance symbols, such as full rotation symbols that suggest the development of a performance, are displayed diagonally and at low speed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

After that, as shown in FIG. 140(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development symbol, the SPSP development symbol, and the full rotation symbol are displayed in a high-speed variable manner, and the operation of the production button 17 may become effective. An effective suggestive performance that suggests that is started. Specifically, a plurality of translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are moved and displayed, and an effect is performed in which the translucent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position at the lower right of the screen.

Then, when the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position at the bottom right of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (long press for 4 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. , the production button 17 emits red light. Note that the words "long press" are displayed on the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the production button 17 is pressed and held for a long time, a production is performed in which the speed of the variable display of various development symbols is gradually slowed down, and the time of the long press reaches a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) or the valid period has passed. Then, as shown in FIG. 140(e), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. be done. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 140(f), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. SPSP reach performance starts. It should be noted that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the pending icon and the icon are hidden.

In this way, according to the performance examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, depending on the type of special performance symbols (special performance symbols that are not finally temporarily stopped, special performance symbols that are temporarily stopped) that are variably displayed in the roulette performance, , suggests whether or not the performance will develop into a production with high expectations for jackpots (jackpot expectations). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of special effect symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, an effective suggestion production may be executed in the development production, thereby increasing the player's expectations for the development of a reach production with high expectations for a jackpot. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration production executed during the development production is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development production. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance without the vibration performance being superior to the appearance of the development performance. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience that the long vibration performance causes the player to misunderstand that a jackpot has been won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the vibration production performed during the advanced production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image). Display sound effects when displaying images (images, gauge images) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, temporary stop sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the development performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the advanced production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. There is. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 139 and 140, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light in the vibration production executed during the advanced production, but the production button 17 can be set in a predetermined mode (other than rainbow color, which is the emitting color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. The light may be emitted in a different color from the light emission mode during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.

In addition, the vibration performance that is executed during the development performance will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, from the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated). The vibration effect may be executed until after 0.5 seconds (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, during the development performance, the valid period of the performance button 17 is generated and the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the development performance, the vibration performance is performed without generating the validity period of the performance button 17. Alternatively, the vibration effect may be generated during the effective period of the effect button 17, but the vibration effect may not be executed.

(Example of performance when cut-in performance is executed during SP reach performance and becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 141 and 142, an example of a performance in which a cut-in performance is executed during the SP ready-to-win performance in variable performance pattern 13 and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(a), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are reduced and displayed in the left and right corners of the upper part of the screen, and the SP ready-to-reach effect is being executed. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SP reach effect reaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 141(b), an effective suggestion effect appears indicating that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect. will be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are brought together from the left and right lower portions of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (single click 4 seconds) occurs, and the projecting state occurs at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 141(c). An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect is started as shown in FIG. 141(d). Specifically, a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is turned off and the effect button 17 is vibrated weakly for 3 seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow emission) by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. are doing.

After that, when one second passes after the output of the third cut-in sound effect ends, the cut-in effect and the weak vibration effect end, and as shown in FIG. 141(e), the effect of "5" in the middle area is An effect is performed in which the symbol 70a stops or the effect symbol 70a of "6" stops.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(f), it is temporarily stopped with three "5" production symbols 70a aligned (symbols aligned), and the production button 17 is pressed strongly for 4 seconds. At the same time as a strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 142(g), the strong vibration performance ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 142(h), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion failure effect is started as shown in FIG. 142(i). Specifically, when three of the "5" production symbols 70a, which had been displayed in a reduced size, are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the front of the screen and enlarged, and a non-promoted sound effect is output, but multiple The effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the game board decoration LED continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(j), the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, and the promotion failure performance ends. Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 142(k), an eye-catching effect indicating that the effect pattern 70a will be stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 142(l), and the first special image If there is a pending number, the pending icon will be redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 142(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A right-handed image MU suggesting a right-handed hit is displayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, in the case of a variable performance pattern in which the re-lottery performance is not executed, the process moves to FIG. 142(k) after FIG. 142(g), and the eye-catching performance is executed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, effective suggestion production may be executed in the cut-in production, so in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, there is a high expectation of jackpot. This can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the execution period (3 seconds) of the cut-in production is the same as the execution period (3 seconds) of the vibration production performed during the cut-in production. . Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the production effect of the cut-in production. In addition, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the vibration production performed during the cut-in production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of the operation promotion image), so the operation promotion image (opaque production Display sound effects when displaying a button image, gauge image) and performance sounds (operation sound effects, cut-in sound effects, etc.) when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period are output. Therefore, the effect of the cut-in performance can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when the production patterns 70a in a display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), the vibration during the cut-in production Since the strong vibration performance (big hit confirmation vibration performance) is executed for a longer period of time than the performance, it is possible to effectively inform the player that a jackpot has been won, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation (vibration effect) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, jackpot confirmation vibration production, Vibration effects, opening vibration effects) do not involve the validity period of the production button 17 (display of operation promotion images), so the display sound effects and validity period when displaying operation promotion images (opaque production button images, gauge images) During the operation, the effect sound (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, the execution period of the vibration production executed during the cut-in production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, when a jackpot occurs as a result of the SP reach production, while the vibration production is executed while the production symbol 70a that becomes the jackpot is temporarily stopped, The vibration effect is not executed during the main stop. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the fluctuating performance is still continuing due to the vibration performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the effect example shown in FIGS. 141 and 142, even during the vibration effect accompanied by the valid period of the effect button 17, the effect light emission by the plurality of game board decoration LEDs continues. Therefore, the performance effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily stopping the performance light emission due to the vibration performance accompanied by the valid period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the production button 17 is designed not to emit light during the vibration production executed during the cut-in production, but the production button 17 is set in a predetermined mode (rainbow color, which is the luminous color that guarantees a jackpot) over the execution period of the vibration production. It is also possible to emit light in a color other than the above, and in a light emitting manner different from the light emitting manner during the effective period of the effect button 17 (for example, white blinking, yellow blinking, etc.).

In addition, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the cut-in performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will expire. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of board decoration LEDs may be turned off, and then the effect light emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be restarted. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SP reach effect is executed, the eye-catching effect or the effect of returning the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character is executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. If the SP reach effect results in a loss, perform an eye-catching effect or a effect that returns the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character, and then stop the effect pattern 70a, and if it becomes a jackpot. In this case, the performance pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without performing an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires when the effect button 17 is not operated) The vibration effect may be executed until 2 seconds after the start (the execution period of the vibration effect is variable).

Furthermore, although the vibration effect is executed during the cut-in effect or promotion success effect, it is also possible to execute the vibration effect during the cut-in effect, but not to perform the vibration effect during the promotion success effect. The reverse may be done, or the vibration effect may not be performed during the cut-in effect and promotion success effect.

In addition, the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character. While the vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped, the vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character, or vice versa, or only numbers The vibration effect may not be executed when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped for a jackpot and when the effect pattern 70a including a character is temporarily stopped for a jackpot effect.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect symbol 70a stops displaying (even during the cut-in effect, the winning opening lamp NR corresponds to the display mode of the icon) However, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emitting mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Example 1 of the effect when the decisive effect is executed during the SPSP reach effect and results in a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 143 and 144, performance example 1 in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 20 and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 143(a), three performance symbols 70a form a ready-to-win state and are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, thereby executing the SPSP ready-to-reach performance. At this time, since the player is not waiting for a customer, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting dramatic light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

When the SPSP reach performance reaches its final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. will be started. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

Then, when the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, the effective period of the effect button 17 (single click 5 seconds) occurs, and a protruding state occurs at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 143(c). An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque production button image imitating the production button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output. At the same time, the effect button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a success performance is started as shown in FIG. 143(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between, and at the top left of the screen. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect buttons 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143(f), a temporary stop is made when the three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned), and a strong vibration production (which makes the production button 17 vibrate strongly for 4 seconds) is performed. At the same time as the jackpot confirmation vibration performance is started, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

After 4 seconds have elapsed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 continue to emit light in rainbow colors. Further, when one second has elapsed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light for effect, and the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144(g), the re-lottery effect is started. Specifically, when three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs aligned), they are moved to the back direction and displayed in a reduced size, and the validity period of the production button 17 (single hit 3 seconds) occurs, An operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining validity period is displayed at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is displayed. is output, and the production button emits red light.

Thereafter, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a promotion success performance is started as shown in FIG. 144(h). Specifically, the "7" production symbol 70a, which has been switched from the "5" production symbol 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size, is moved to the front of the screen in a state where three of the "7" production symbols 70a are aligned (designs are aligned) and is enlarged and displayed. , a promotion sound effect is output. Further, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 emit light in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration performance (promotion vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 3 seconds is started.

Then, when the strong vibration effect ends and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has elapsed after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at the normal size, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs will emit effect light (other than rainbow light). At the same time, the effect button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed, as shown in FIG. 144(j). Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Thereafter, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 144(k), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 144(l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "777", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the first round game is started.

(Example 2 of the performance when the decisive performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance and it becomes a jackpot)
With reference to FIGS. 145 and 146, performance example 2 will be described in which a deciding performance is executed during the SPSP ready-to-win performance in the variable performance pattern 16 and a jackpot is achieved. Note that FIGS. 145(a) to 145(c) are the same as FIGS. 143(a) to 143(c), so a description thereof will be omitted here.

When the production button 17 is operated from the state shown in FIG. 145(c) or the validity period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 145(d), a state where three "5" production symbols 70a are aligned (symbols aligned) A temporary stop is performed at , and a jackpot is notified by the performance symbol 70a, but no strong vibration performance is performed at this point. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, a success effect is started as shown in FIG. 145(e). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between. It temporarily stops when three "5" performance symbols 70a are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the winning success effect and strong vibration effect are completed, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 are displayed in rainbow colors, as shown in FIG. A celebration performance will begin to celebrate the jackpot while the light continues to emit light. Then, when the blessing performance ends, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs restarts the performance light emission, and the performance button 17 turns off.

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 146(g), an eye-catching effect suggesting that the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed is executed. Specifically, the eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance symbols 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and becomes temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG. 146(h), and the icon is displayed again. At the same time as being displayed, if there is a first special figure pending number, the pending icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration performance (jackpot confirmation vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started, and a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and the performance button 17 are activated. It glows in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output.

When one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 146(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are completed, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555", and the special The symbol TZ is also stopped at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has passed, as shown in FIG. A strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without any accompanying movement is started, and the performance button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. The production sound (sound effect) when playing is not output. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow emission of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are finished, the opening effect of the jackpot game is finished, and the round game is started.

In addition, if the performance button 17 is operated during the validity period related to the winning performance, or if the validity period has elapsed and a failure performance is performed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate. A failure effect image is displayed on the single-image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and then the three performance symbols are temporarily stopped when the number of reach misses (for example, "565") is rolled. After that, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, an eye-catching effect that suggests that the effect pattern 70a is to be displayed in a stopped state is executed, and when the eye-catching effect is completed, the effect pattern 70a returns to the display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped. Then, the icon is re-displayed, and if there is a number of reserved first special symbols, the reserved icon is re-displayed. When one second has elapsed, the performance symbol 70a is permanently stopped when the reach is missed, and the special symbol TZ is also permanently stopped when the reach is missed.

In this way, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the effective suggestion production may be executed in the deciding production, so in addition to the occurrence of the validity period, there is a high expectation of jackpot. It is possible to suggest this to the player, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, there is a determined success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful production in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. Since there is a winning success performance, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the winning performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, there is a determined success production in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned, and a successful production in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. The period from when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period to when the vibration effect (successful vibration effect) is executed is different between the success effect and effect. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of elation from the beginning, or to give the player a feeling of elation after stirring up the player's anxiety, and the contrasting effect can effectively improve the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the successful decision production and the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration production executed at the successful decision production. are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the performance effect of the success performance. In addition, the vibration effect can indicate to the player that he has won a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the vibration production (decision success vibration production) executed at the time of the final production is accompanied by the valid period of the production button 17 (display of an operation promotion image), Display sound effects when displaying promotion images (opaque effect button images, gauge images) and effect sounds when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period (operation sound effects, success sound effects, operation sound effects of movable members, etc.) ) is now output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, when the production patterns 70a in the display mode that does not include characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (designs aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) Since the player can effectively notify the player that he or she has won a jackpot, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, when the production symbols 70a of the display mode including characters are temporarily stopped in a state where three of them are aligned (C symbols aligned), a strong vibration production (jackpot confirmation vibration) performance) is now executed. Therefore, the player can reconfirm that he or she has won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the vibration production (opening vibration production) that is executed at the time of a temporary stop when three production symbols 70a are aligned or at the opening of a jackpot game can be performed by pressing the production button 17 does not have a valid period (display of operation promotion image), so the display sound effect when displaying the operation promotion image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and the effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. Sounds (operation sound effects, other sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an inconvenience that confuses the player during the vibration performance without the validity period of the performance button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 143 to 146, the execution period of the vibration production that is executed at the time of a successful decision production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. ing. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs were configured to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the fixed performance, but if the performance button 17 is operated immediately before the validity period occurs or from the start of the occurrence, or the validity period changes. Until the time elapses, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when a successful performance is determined by operating the performance button 17 or by elapse of the valid time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may also be made to emit light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light when the game board was successfully executed. Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. It's okay.

Furthermore, when executing the success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 started emitting the rainbow light at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. It's okay.

In addition, after the blessing performance ended, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resumed their light emission and the performance button 17 turned off, but even after the blessing performance ended, the game board decoration LEDs continued to emit rainbow light. The effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the effect light emission may be restarted before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow emission may be restarted until the main stop of the effect pattern 70a. may be continued.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, multiple game board decoration LEDs and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first, and then the multiple game board decoration LEDs were started simultaneously. The rainbow light emission of the game board decoration LED may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the production button 17 may be started first, and then the rainbow light emission of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the eye-catching effect and the effect that returns the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character are executed, and then the effect pattern 70a is stopped. If the SPSP reach effect results in a loss, perform an eye-catching effect or a effect that returns the effect pattern 70a to the display mode including the character, and then stop the effect pattern 70a. In this case, the performance pattern 70a may be permanently stopped in the display mode of only numbers without performing an eye-catching performance or a performance of returning the performance pattern 70a to the display mode including characters.

In addition, regarding the vibration performance that is executed at the time of successful decision performance, the timing is the same regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing (for example, the timing when the valid period expires when the performance button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later).

In addition, although the vibration effect is executed when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful, the vibration effect may be executed when a successful decision is made, but not when the promotion is successful. The reverse may be done, or the vibration presentation may not be performed during the successful decision presentation and the promotion successful presentation.

Further, a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a containing only numbers after a blessing effect, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the effect pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching effect. However, when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, a vibration performance is executed, while a vibration performance is executed when a jackpot roll is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including a character after an eye-catching performance. You may choose not to do so, or vice versa, or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by the number-only performance pattern 70a after the blessing performance, and a jackpot by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching performance. The vibration effect may not be performed during the temporary stop.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops displaying (even during the deciding effect, the icon before the winning opening lamp NR is hidden) Although the light is emitted in a color corresponding to the display mode, the light may be emitted and turned off in conjunction with the light emission mode of a plurality of game board decoration LEDs.

(Timer effect and execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the timer effect for each variable effect pattern will be explained using FIG. 147.

The timer effects include event timer effects such as ``pseudo continuous occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the occurrence of a pseudo continuous effect, ``normal reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of a normal reach effect, and ``SP reach effect'' that suggests the start of a SP reach effect. ``SPSP reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of the SPSP reach effect, ``Full rotation reach occurrence timer effect'' that suggests the start of the full rotation reach effect, indicating the occurrence of the effective period of the effect button 17 There is a ``validity period occurrence timer effect'' and a ``jackpot symbol stop timer effect'' that suggests that the jackpot symbol will be stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 147(a), in the case of variable performance patterns 7, 15, and 20, there is a possibility that three of the pseudo continuous occurrence timer performance, normal reach occurrence timer performance, and SP reach occurrence timer performance may be executed.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the normal reach occurrence timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 147(b), in the case of variable performance patterns 8, 16, and 21, four of the normal reach occurrence timer performance, SP reach occurrence timer performance, SPSP reach occurrence timer performance, and valid period occurrence timer performance are executed. There is a possibility that

In this case, the normal reach occurrence timer performance starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the SP reach generation timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SPSP reach occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. Further, the valid period generation timer effect is started between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 147(c), in the case of variable effect patterns 11 and 22, four types can be executed: a pseudo continuous occurrence timer effect, a normal reach occurrence timer effect, an SPSP reach occurrence timer effect, and a valid period occurrence timer effect. There is sex.

In this case, the pseudo continuous timer effect is started between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. Further, the normal reach occurrence timer effect is started between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. Further, the SPSP reach occurrence timer effect is started between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. Further, the valid period occurrence timer effect is started between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 148, a presentation example in which two timer presentations are executed during a variable presentation will be described. Here, in the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the execution of the variable performance pattern 22, the pseudo continuous timer performance (normal pattern 7), and the valid period occurrence timer performance (normal pattern 21) has been decided.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(a), when the white character timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is being executed (the timer time is subtracted), the same "7" as the left and right effect symbols is temporarily stopped. When the reach state is formed, the normal reach effect will start.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(b), after the white character timer STW reaches "0 seconds left", the pseudo symbol is temporarily stopped in the middle area as a pseudo continuous success effect, and a success sound effect is output. , the pseudo 2 fluctuation period ends (the red flame effect accompanying the pseudo continuous effect is omitted from the illustration).

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(c), the effect pattern 70a changes again and "x3" indicating the number of pseudo changes (that the stage of the effect has progressed) is displayed in red.

After that, as shown in FIG. 148(d), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. be done. At this time, when the effective period generation timer effect is started, a white character timer YTW of "35 seconds remaining" which is a normal display is displayed on the image display device 70, and subtraction of the timer time is started.

After that, the screen whites out and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 148(e), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen. SPSP reach performance starts. It should be noted that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the pending icon and the icon are hidden. At this time, the white text timer YTW indicates "33 seconds left", which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, when the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage, as shown in FIG. 148(f), an effective suggestion effect that suggests that the operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the decisive effect starts. be done. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four translucent effect button images imitating the effect button 17 are gathered from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white character timer YTW indicates "2 seconds left", which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, after the translucent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen and the white text timer YTW reaches "0 seconds remaining", the effective period of the effect button 17 (single press 5 seconds), an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes from a specific position in the center of the screen and emits red light, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period. is displayed, the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 is in a protruding state and emits red light.

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, a successful decision effect is started as shown in FIG. 148(h). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. In addition, after strongly vibrating the production button 17 for 4 seconds, a strong vibration production (decision success vibration production) is started in which the production button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between, and at the top left of the screen. It temporarily stops when three performance symbols 70a of "7" are aligned. Furthermore, a plurality of game board decoration LEDs and performance buttons 17 emit light in rainbow colors.

(Example of performance when a special SP reach performance is executed in the second variable performance in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and a jackpot is achieved)
With reference to FIG. 149, an example of a performance in which a special SP ready-to-win performance is executed in the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) in performance mode A (normal gaming state) and results in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 149(a), on the image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "635" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped display state. Further, "2" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F. At this time, since the mode is production mode A (normal gaming state), the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed.

When the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is started from this state, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 149(b). Change. Note that although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 149(c), a development effect that suggests development into a special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed, and a special SP ready-to-reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 149(d), the effect symbol 70a is fully stopped at "555", and the special symbol TZ is also fully stopped at "555", and the second variation The performance ends.

In addition, when a game ball passes through the normal game gate 44 and enters the first starting port 45, a right-handed hit error notification based on the right-handed hit in the normal gaming state is sent for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). carried out over a period of time. Specifically, a right-handed hitting error image MUE indicating that the game ball should be fired towards the left side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed near the center of the screen, and the audio output device 9 says "Please hit left-handed." The right-handed error sound is output.

After the second variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 149(e), the opening performance of the jackpot game starts during the execution period of the right-handed error notification, and the right-handed hit image MU that suggests right-handed hit is displayed at the top right of the screen. is displayed, a right hit notification is performed, and jackpot effect 1 is executed. At this time, the right-handed player error image MUE is erased due to the start of the right-handed player notification, but the output of the right-handed player error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has elapsed. Note that when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variable effect, the jackpot effect 2 will be executed.

(Example of performance when a chance performance is executed and a jackpot occurs in the first variable performance in performance mode G (specific game state))
With reference to FIG. 150, an example of a performance will be described in which a chance performance is executed in the first variable performance in performance mode G (specific game state) and a jackpot is achieved.

First, as shown in FIG. 150(a), on the image display device 70, the production symbol 70a of "285" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are in a stopped state. Further, "2" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. At this time, since it is the performance mode G (specific game state), the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed.

When the first variable performance is started from this state, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 150(b). Note that although the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, the icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150(c), a text image saying "Chance approaching" is displayed, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, indicating that it is a chance to play a jackpot game. A chance performance that suggests this is executed.

Furthermore, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the chance performance was started, a jackpot acquisition performance is started as shown in FIG. 150(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

Then, when the jackpot acquisition effect ends and the first movable member 73 returns to the initial position, the effect pattern 70a is stopped at "555" as shown in FIG. 150(e), and the special symbol TZ also changes to "555". 555'', the main stop is made, and the first variation effect ends.

After the first variable performance ends, as shown in FIG. 150(f), the opening performance of the jackpot game is started, and the jackpot performance 1 is executed. Note that when the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variable effect, the jackpot effect 2 will be executed.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, in a specific game state, there is a case where the first variation production (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed, and a case where the second variation production (the second variation display) is executed. Variable display of special symbols) is executed in different manners (whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various preview effects are executed, whether or not a specific reach effect is executed, whether or not the relevant icon is displayed, the type of background image) However, the jackpot effect after the first variable effect in a specific gaming state and the jackpot effect after the second variable effect in a specific gaming state have the same aspects (background image, BGM type, etc.). , round effect images, etc.). Therefore, during the jackpot performance, the player does not have to be aware of whether the first variable performance is the trigger or the second variable performance is the trigger, so the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without having to think about it. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, if a right-handed player is hit during the normal gaming state, a right-handed player error notification (display of a right-handed player error image HUE indicating a left-handed player), "Please play left-handed. '') is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but if a jackpot game is started while the right-handed error notification is being executed, the right-handed error notification is continued while the right-handed error notification is continued. is designed to be executed. Therefore, while making the player aware that hitting the right hand during the normal gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to notify the player that hitting the right hand so that the player does not suffer any loss due to the start of the jackpot game. It becomes possible to improve interest.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, if a jackpot game is started while the right-handed hit error notification is being executed, the display of the right-handed hit error image HUE is ended, but the message "Please hit left '' left-handed error audio continues to be output. Therefore, it is not necessary to excessively inhibit right-handed hitting notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIGS. 149 and 150, when a jackpot game is started while the right-handed error notification is being executed for a predetermined period, the left-handed error message "Please hit left" is heard. The output continues, but it ends in a shorter time than usual (before the predetermined period has elapsed). Therefore, it is not necessary to excessively inhibit right-handed hitting notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal gaming state, there are different aspects between the case where the first variable performance (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed and the case where the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed. (Whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various preview effects are executed, whether or not there is a specific reach effect, whether or not the relevant icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), and the normal game state The jackpot performance after the first variable performance in the normal game state and the jackpot performance after the second variable performance in the normal game state may be executed in a common manner (background image, BGM, round performance image, etc.). In this way, during the jackpot performance, the player does not have to be aware of whether the first variable performance is the trigger or the second variable performance, so the player can enjoy the jackpot performance without having to think about it. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of production when a fixed mission production is executed during a jackpot)
With reference to FIG. 151, an example of a performance in a case where a variable probability mission effect is executed to determine whether or not a variable probability game state will be entered during a jackpot (round game) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 151(a), when the opening performance of the jackpot game starts, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the validity period of the performance button 17 is started. ) is started, and the effect button 17 emits light in rainbow colors. Thereafter, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round game begins.

After that, when the interval period after the first round game ends and the second round game starts, as shown in FIG. is started, and the words ``You are guaranteed to defeat the enemy'' are displayed until the second round game ends.

Then, when the interval period after the second round game ends and the third round game starts, the effective period of the production button 17 (single press for 5 seconds) occurs, as shown in FIG. 151(c). The mission performance will begin. Specifically, the words "Destroy" are displayed, and an operation promotion image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period is displayed. , the display sound effect of the operation promotion image SG is output, and the production button 17 emits white light. At this time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continue to emit light (a light emitting mode other than rainbow light).

Thereafter, when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the mission success effect is started as shown in FIG. 151(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays the success effect image SEF. At the same time, a success sound effect is output. Further, a strong vibration performance (promotional vibration performance) in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds is started, and a part or all of the performance button 17 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success effect is completed, as shown in FIG. The effect light emission of the decorative LED is restarted, and when the third round game ends, the word "defeat" is erased and the round effect is restarted.

Then, when the ninth round game is started, as shown in FIG. A time period of at least 11 seconds (from the start until 5 seconds has elapsed) occurs, and mode selection performance for selecting the performance mode in the variable probability game state is started. Specifically, the option image for production mode D and the option image for production mode E are displayed, and the text "Please select the mode that is currently changing with the cross key and confirm with the button!" is displayed as an operation promotion image, and the white text is displayed. An opaque effect button image imitating the light emitting effect button 17 is displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, as shown in FIG. 151(g), the option image of production mode D is selected (the option image of production mode E is displayed in dark color). A state is reached in which the option image of presentation mode E is selected (the option image of presentation mode D is displayed in dark color).

Then, when the performance button 17 is operated or the validity period has elapsed, the selection image of the performance mode E is enlarged and displayed as shown in FIG. E is notified and the mode selection performance ends. Thereafter, when the 10th round game ends, an ending performance is executed, and when the ending performance ends, a variable probability game state is started.

Further, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, a left-handed hit error notification based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 45 during the jackpot game is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

Note that when the mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and the first image display device 70 displays a failure effect image and outputs a failure sound effect. . Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed and the ending effect is shifted to.

As described above, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success production and the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed during the mission success production. (5 seconds) are the same. Therefore, it is possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the mission success presentation. Further, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that the result is advantageous to the player, that is, that a probability change state will occur, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is accompanied by the validity period of the production button 17, so the operation promotion images (opaque production button image, gauge image ) when displaying the display sound effect and the effect sound (success sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period are output. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the winning success performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the execution period of the vibration production (promotion vibration production) executed at the time of the mission success production is the same regardless of whether or not the production button 17 is operated during the valid period and the operation timing. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the vibration effect cannot be fully experienced depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, even if the production button 17 or the cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection production, the vibration production is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences in which players are misled into thinking that the jackpot expectation is higher in the selected presentation mode than in the unselected presentation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, it is possible to execute a right-handed hit notification (display of a right-handed hit image MU) that suggests a right-handed hit during a jackpot game, but it is possible to execute a right-handed hit notification (display of a right-handed hit image MU) during a jackpot game. When a game ball enters the starting hole 45, the right-handed hitting notification (display of the right-handed hitting image MU) continues, and the left-handed hitting error notification (the display of the left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests right-handed hitting, "Please hit right. '') is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, by encouraging players who hit left-handed despite the right-handed hitting notification to play right-handed, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 151, the right-handed hit image MU that was displayed during the jackpot game and the left-handed hit error image HUE (right-handed hit notification image) are displayed so as not to overlap. There is. Therefore, it is possible to accurately encourage the player to play right-handed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, multiple game board decoration LEDs were designed to continue emitting light during the validity period related to the variable mission production, but if the production button 17 is operated immediately before or from the start of the validity period, the validity period will change. Until the elapse of time, some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off, and when performing a mission success effect by operating the effect button 17 or by elapse of the effective time, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs are turned off. It may be possible to emit rainbow light. In this way, it is possible to make the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 stand out, and to inform the player that the scene is tense, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

Furthermore, during the mission success presentation, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the presentation button 17 were configured to emit rainbow light; Some or all of the game board decoration LEDs may be turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light, while the production button 17 and some or all of the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may be turned off. It's okay.

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the first movable member 73, the plurality of game board decoration LEDs, and the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 were started at the same time, but the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 was started first. After the start, the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs may start emitting rainbow light, or the first movable member 73 may first start emitting rainbow light, and then the plurality of game board decoration LEDs start emitting rainbow light. And the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 may be started, or the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is started first, and then the rainbow emission of the first movable member 73 and the plurality of game board decoration LEDs is started. It's okay.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the mission success effect will be performed at the same timing regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the operation timing (for example, the timing when the effective period expires if the effect button 17 is not operated) (The execution period of the vibration effect may be varied) until 3 seconds later.

Further, although the vibration effect is executed when the mission is successful, the vibration effect may not be executed when the mission is successful.

In addition, although the right-handed player image MU and the left-handed player error image (right-handed player notification image) are not designed to be dynamically displayed, for example, it is possible to have a dynamic display that swings left and right at a predetermined period. It's okay. In this case, it is preferable not to synchronize the periods of dynamic display of the right-handed player image MU and the left-handed player error image (right-handed player notification image).

(Examples of opening and ending performances for jackpot games for each game state)
Examples of the opening performance and ending performance of the jackpot game for each game state will be explained using FIG. 152.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(a), in production mode A (normal game state), a variable display of the first special symbol (first variation production) is executed, and the first image display device 70 displays the production The symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and the first reservation icon display area A first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of 70B, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stop at the jackpot number "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152(b), the jackpot game (so-called first win) from the normal game state When the opening effect is started, a right-handed hit image MU indicating a right-handed hit is displayed at the upper right of the screen, and a first right-handed hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, as shown in FIG. 152(c), a large right-handed hit image MUD is displayed, and a right-handed hit voice says "Aim to the right." is output and the second right hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting right-handed play is displayed, and furthermore, a character image saying "Aim to the right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called first win) from the normal game state is finished and the ending effect is started, as shown in FIG. 152(d), the " A text image reading ``Chance time has begun'' is displayed, and an alert alert is started to alert the player. Specifically, the "Forgot to take out a card" message is used to warn players about forgetting to take out the card (storage medium) that stores the value owned by the player, which is inserted into the gaming media lending machine attached to the gaming machine 1. A first caution image KG1 includes the words ``Please be careful about this.'' and a second caution image KG2 includes the words ``Please be careful not to get too absorbed in the game.'' is displayed.

After that, when the ending performance is finished and the jackpot game ends, the normal time-saving game state is controlled and the performance mode F is set, and the first pending icon display area 70B is not set on the first image display device 70, and the icon This is the screen where the display area 70C and the second pending icon display area 70D are set, but the display of the right-handed image MU continues, and a new variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is started.

Then, as shown in FIG. 152(e), in production mode G (normal time saving game state), when the variable display of the second special symbol (variable effect) is started when the remaining time saving number (J2) is the 49th time. In the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward).

After that, when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ come to a final stop with the jackpot number "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. ) starts, a right-handed hit image MU indicating a right-handed hit is displayed at the top right of the screen, and a first right-handed hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, a large right-handed hitting image MUD is displayed, and a right-handed hitting voice saying "Aim to the right" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 152(g). is output and the second right hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting right-handed play is displayed, and furthermore, a text image saying "Aim to the right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called consecutive winnings) from the normal time-saving game state ends and the ending effect starts, it is suggested that the normal time-saving game state will be entered, as shown in FIG. 152(h). Although a character image saying "Chance time has entered" is displayed, the ending performance continues without any warning notification to call the player's attention.

After that, when the ending performance is finished and the jackpot game ends, the normal time-saving game state is controlled and the performance mode F is set, and the first pending icon display area 70B is not set on the first image display device 70, and the icon This is the screen where the display area 70C and the second pending icon display area 70D are set, but the display of the right-handed image MU continues, and a new variable display (variable effect) of the special symbol is started.

(Example of opening and ending effects of jackpot game during special time saving game state)
An example of the opening performance and ending performance of the jackpot game during the special time saving game state will be explained using FIG. 153.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(a), in production mode H (special time-saving game state), a variable display of the second special symbol (second variable production) is executed, and on the first image display device 70, The effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are being scrolled (moved downward). In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "1" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and "1" is displayed in the second reservation icon display area 70B. , four second hold icons (white icons) are displayed, and the icons (white icons) are displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ come to a final stop with the jackpot result of "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. When the opening effect starts, a right-handed hit image MU indicating a right-handed hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a first right-handed hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, as shown in FIG. 153(c), a large right-handed hit image MUD is displayed and a right-handed hit voice says "Aim to the right." is output and the second right hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image simulating the upper part of the game board surface (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting right-handed play is displayed, and furthermore, a character image saying "Aim to the right" is displayed.

Then, when the round game of the jackpot game (so-called first win) from the special time-saving game state ends and the ending effect starts, it is suggested that the normal time-saving game state will be entered, as shown in FIG. 153(d). A text image reading "Chance Time Enters" is displayed, and an alert alert is started to call the player's attention. Specifically, the "Forgot to take out a card" message is used to warn players about forgetting to take out the card (storage medium) that stores the value owned by the player, which is inserted into the gaming media lending machine attached to the gaming machine 1. A first caution image KG1 includes the words ``Please be careful about this.'' and a second caution image KG2 includes the words ``Please be careful not to get too absorbed in the game.'' is displayed.

At this time, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, a left-handed error notification based on the fact that the game ball enters the first starting port 45 in a specific gaming state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests firing a game ball toward the right side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed at a position closer to the center of the screen in a larger size than the right-handed hitting image MU, and the audio output device From 9, a left-handed hitting error voice saying "Please hit right-handed" is output.

On the other hand, if it is determined in advance that there is a jackpot game to be executed in the second suspension memory, and the conditions for executing the pre-read suspension continuous performance to notify that fact are satisfied, as shown in FIG. 153(e) As shown in the figure, the prefetch pending continuous effect is executed. Specifically, in parallel with the warning notification, the consecutive game character RC is displayed on the first image display device 70, and it is notified that there is a jackpot game in the second pending memory. Ru.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, when a jackpot game (so-called first win) is executed during the normal gaming state, specific information regarding the game is It is possible to carry out notifications (alert notifications), and if a jackpot game (so-called consecutive winnings) is executed during the normal time-saving gaming state, a specific notification (alert notification) related to the game can be issued in connection with the end of the jackpot game. If a jackpot game (so-called first win) is executed during a special time-saving game state in which the execution of the jackpot game is restricted (not executed) and is executed without going through the jackpot game, the termination of the jackpot game It is possible to execute specific notifications (alert notifications) related to games. Therefore, it is possible to notify the players of the game to the necessary and sufficient extent, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, variable mission production (which generates a valid period and responds to the operation of the production button 17 during the valid period) determines whether or not a variable game state will occur during a jackpot game. It is possible to execute a fixed-variable promotion performance in which movable parts are moved, but the execution of a fixed-variable mission production (a fixed-variable promotion production) is restricted (not executed) while an alert alert is being executed. . Therefore, it is possible to appropriately alert the players and increase the interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, it is possible to execute a warning notification regarding the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game, but even while the warning notification is in progress, it is possible to execute the warning notification regarding the game. It is possible to carry out a look-ahead holding sequence effect that informs (suggests) that there is something that will become a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to keep the players calm and give them a sense of expectation through the alert notification, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 152 and 153, it is possible to issue an alert notification regarding the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game, but even while the alert alert is being executed, it is not possible for the player to If a disadvantageous left-handed hit is performed, a left-handed hit error notification indicating a right-handed hit can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering unnecessary losses, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when a jackpot game is executed during the normal game state or the special time-saving game state, an alert alert is issued, but if the prize ball (balls put out) exceeds the specified amount (for example, 300 balls), When a jackpot game in which players can obtain prize balls is executed, a warning notification may be executed, and in a case where a jackpot game in which a prize ball exceeding a prescribed amount cannot be obtained is executed, a warning notification may not be executed.

(Example of production when a special time-saving game state occurs)
An example of a performance when a special time-saving game state occurs will be explained using FIG. 154.

Here, the number of times the special symbol lose fluctuation display is executed after the predetermined condition is met (RWM clear is executed, the number of fluctuations based on the end of the jackpot game is cleared to 0) is 800 times (remaining time until the occurrence of the special time-saving game state). It is assumed that from the time when the number of fluctuations reaches 100 times, an activation counter display indicating the timing of occurrence of the special time-saving game state is performed. Specifically, a notification logo LG including the words "Help Time" which means a special time-saving game state and a character image "Remaining ○○" which shows the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed.

Further, it is assumed that a countdown effect indicating that the special time-saving game state will occur is performed from the time when the number of fluctuations remaining until the special time-saving game state occurs reaches three times. Specifically, each time a variable effect is started, a character image indicating the remaining number of times is displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second).

As shown in FIG. 154(a), when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in which the remaining number of variations until the special time saving game state occurs is started (first variable effect), the effect symbol 70a and the special The variable display of the symbol TZ starts, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B change to the corresponding icon. One of the icons is shifted toward the display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a character image of "1" is displayed as a countdown effect.

After that, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, as shown in FIG. The icon disappears and the remaining number of fluctuations displayed on the activation counter becomes "1".

Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in which the number of remaining variations until the occurrence of the special time saving game state is one is started, as shown in FIG. 154(c), the effect symbol 70a And the variable display of the special symbol TZ is started, the number in the first pending number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are One of the icons is shifted toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. At this time, a character image of "0" is displayed as a countdown effect.

Next, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as the loss number "635", as shown in FIG. , the icon disappears and the remaining number of fluctuations displayed on the activation counter becomes "0".

When the game ball passes through the regular figure gate 44 at this timing, a right-handed hit error notification based on the fact that the right-handed hit was performed in the normal game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a right-handed hitting error image MUE indicating that the game ball should be fired towards the left side area of the gaming area 5a is displayed near the center of the screen, and the audio output device 9 says "Please hit left-handed." The right-handed error sound is output.

After that, when the special time saving game state occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, as shown in FIG. 154(e), the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and accordingly A blackout effect is performed to restrict the visibility of the image, and a right-handed hit image MU indicating a right-handed hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a right-handed hit is notified. At this time, the right-handed player error image MUE is erased due to the start of the right-handed player notification, but the output of the right-handed player error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has elapsed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 154(f), a character image saying "Help Time Enter" is displayed, indicating that the special time saving game state will be entered, and the entering effect will be displayed. (Long entry performance or short entry performance) is executed. Further, right-handed hitting image MU2 indicating right-handed hitting is displayed, and a sound saying "right-handed hitting" is output to notify that right-handed hitting is performed.

Further, when the execution time of the entry effect has elapsed, the character image "Enter help time" is erased, and the background image of the effect mode H becomes visible. In addition, a band image saying "Help time" is displayed at the top left of the screen, and a remaining time saving number image KG indicating the remaining number of times of the second time saving number (J2) is displayed at the bottom left of the screen as "799 remaining times". .

Next, when the variation time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ become a losing number "416" as shown in FIG. 154(g). ” The display will stop and display.

Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a left-handed hit error notification based on the left-handed hit in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE indicating that the game ball should be fired toward the right side of the gaming area 5a is displayed near the center of the screen, and the audio output device 9 says "Please hit right." The right-handed error sound is output.

Note that in a specific gaming state, the left-handed hit error is not notified when one game ball enters the first starting port 45, but when a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls enter the first starting port 45. A left-handed hitting error may be notified based on this. Furthermore, the left-handed hitting error notification may be terminated at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting port 47. In this case, the left-handed hitting error image HUE is erased before the left-handed hitting error sound. Alternatively, the left-handed player error sound may be deleted before the left-handed player error image HUE.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the special time-saving game state occurs reaches a predetermined number (here, 100 times), the activation counter display starts. . Therefore, the player can grasp the number of times the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (variable performance) until the state shifts to the special time-saving game state, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the character image indicating the remaining number of fluctuations as an activation counter display is made up of only numbers and does not include unit display such as times or number of times. As a result, players are more likely to look up what this number means, and by increasing their chances of seeing machine information, they can deepen their understanding of gaming machines and increase their interest in gaming. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the character image indicating the remaining number of fluctuations as an activation counter display is displayed at the start of the fluctuation, rather than at the start of the fluctuation performance when the jackpot preview performance or look-ahead performance is likely to be executed (started). It is updated when the performance symbol is stopped and displayed, which makes it difficult to execute (start) the jackpot preview performance or the pre-read performance compared to the time. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the subtraction of the activation counter, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is suggested that the special symbol is changed a predetermined number of times (three times in this case) before the transition to the special time-saving game state (variable performance). A countdown effect will be executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand when the special time-saving gaming state occurs, and it is also possible to improve the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Become.

Further, according to the example of performance shown in FIG. 154, when the special time saving game state is entered, a rush performance (long rush performance or short rush performance) can be executed. Therefore, the player can be made to accurately recognize that the special time-saving game state has entered, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance example shown in FIG. 154, right hit notification is performed in conjunction with the start of the first variable display of special symbols in the special time saving game state. Therefore, even a player who does not have knowledge about the special time-saving gaming state can understand that the player is hitting right, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the performance example shown in FIG. 154, the entry performance of the special time-saving game state is executed in a performance mode different from that when shifting to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player that a time-saving gaming state that is different from the normal time-saving gaming state has occurred, and also to inform the player that a special time-saving gaming state has occurred in a novel manner, thereby increasing the interest in the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, if a right-handed player is hit during the normal gaming state, a right-handed player error notification (display of a right-handed player error image MUE indicating a left-handed player, a left-hand player with a message "Please hit left") Output of hitting error sound) is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but if the special time saving game state is started while the right hitting error notification is being executed, the right hitting error notification is continued while the right hitting error notification is being executed. It is executable. Therefore, while making the player aware that hitting right during the normal gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to notify the player of hitting right so that the player does not suffer losses due to the start of the special time-saving gaming state. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, if the special time-saving gaming state is started while the right-handed hitting error notification is being executed, the display of the right-handed hitting error image MUE is ended, but the message "Please hit left-handed" is displayed. The left-handed hit error audio continues to be output. Therefore, it is not necessary to excessively inhibit right-handed hitting notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the number of images suggesting right-handed hitting (right-handed hitting image MU, right-handed hitting image MU2) is greater than the number of images suggesting left-handed hitting (right-handed hitting error image MUE). There are more people. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the right-handed game appropriately, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, if the special time-saving game state is started while the right-handed player error notification is being executed, the display of the right-handed player image MU2 ends after the display of the right-handed player error image MUE ends. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the right-handed game appropriately, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, it is possible to execute right-handed hitting notification (display of right-handed hitting image MU) that suggests right-handed hitting during the special time-saving game state; When the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the right-handed hitting notification (display of the right-handed hitting image MU) continues, and the left-handed hitting error notification (the display of the left-handed hitting error image HUE that suggests right-handed hitting, the “right-handed hitting error image HUE”) continues. "Please hit left-handed error voice output)" is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, by encouraging players who hit left-handed despite the right-handed hitting notification to play right-handed, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering a disadvantage and improve the enjoyment of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 154, the right-handed hitting image MU that was displayed during the special time-saving game state and the left-handed hitting error image HUE (right-handed hitting notification image) are displayed so that they do not overlap. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to accurately encourage the player to play right-handed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the special time-saving game state is generated in the same performance mode regardless of the presence or absence of a jackpot history, but when the special time-saving game state is generated with a jackpot history, the special time-saving game state is The production mode may be shifted to the countdown mode from a predetermined period before the occurrence (for example, when the 800th variable display is executed after the predetermined condition is satisfied). In this way, it is possible to effectively increase the player's expectations for the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, regarding the countdown mode, it is possible to shift to the normal gaming state before the special time-saving gaming state occurs between jackpot games, but it is not possible to shift to the normal gaming state after the special time-saving gaming state occurs. good. In this way, it is possible to determine whether the special time-saving gaming state is before or after the occurrence of the special time-saving gaming state depending on whether or not the countdown mode occurs, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the countdown mode can be generated, the rate of change in the performance mode will be different between the normal gaming state before the special time-saving gaming state and the normal gaming state after the special time-saving gaming state occurs ( It is possible to make it easier for the performance mode to change in the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs, and to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when a special time-saving gaming state that occurs without a jackpot history ends)
With reference to FIG. 155, an example of performance will be described when a special time-saving game state that occurs without a jackpot history ends.

Here, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed in which the remaining second time saving number (J2) of the special time saving game state is "1", and the remaining time saving number image KG displayed at the bottom left of the screen is " It is assumed that the message ``1 session remaining'' is displayed.

After that, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the losing number "416", as shown in FIG. The icon is displayed disappearing.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) that ends the special time saving game state is started, as shown in FIG. 155(b), the variation of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The display starts, the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are moved to the icon display area 70C. One of the icons is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the character image "LAST" is displayed as a countdown performance started from the second variable performance five times before the end of the special time saving game state, and the remaining time saving number image KG becomes "0 times remaining".

Next, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed as the loss number "285", as shown in FIG. , the icon will disappear.

When a game ball enters the first starting port 45 at this timing, a left-handed hit error notification based on the left-handed hit in the specific game state is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-handed hitting error image HUE indicating that the game ball should be fired toward the right side of the gaming area 5a is displayed near the center of the screen, and the audio output device 9 says "Please hit right." The left-handed hit error sound is output.

After that, when the special time-saving game state ends, as shown in FIG. 155(d), the display of the right-handed player image MU ends and the left-handed player notification (display of the left-handed player image HU, voice of "please play left-handed") output) is started. Further, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the variable display of the special symbol TZ starts, and the performance image (background image, performance symbol 70a, the icon display area 70C, the A shielding image SY that shields the second hold icon display area 70D, second hold icon, etc.) is displayed, and by retreating to the left side of the screen, the effect image (background image, effect pattern image, etc.) corresponding to the effect mode A is displayed. etc.) become visible. At this time, the left-handed player error image HUE is erased due to the start of the left-handed player notification, but the output of the left-handed player error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has elapsed.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 155(e), the shielding image SY is completely retracted to the left side of the screen, and the effect image (background image, effect pattern 70a, first hold icon) corresponding to the effect mode A is The display area 70B and the first hold icon, etc.) become completely visible, the reduced display of the performance symbol 70a (preparation action) becomes visible, and the words "Help Time", which means a special time-saving game state, become visible. The notification logo LG including ``Remaining ???'' indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations is unknown becomes visible.

Thereafter, when the reduction display (preparation operation) of the effect pattern 70a is completed, the scroll display of the effect pattern 70a is started, as shown in FIG. 155(f). Further, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the left-handed hit notification ends.

In addition, there are different performances between the normal gaming state before the special time-saving gaming state and the normal gaming state after the special time-saving gaming state ends (remaining number of fluctuations "○○" and remaining number of fluctuations "???") However, the rate of change of the production mode according to the progress of the game is made to be the same.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, the transition to the normal gaming state from the variable display of special symbols (variable production) a predetermined number of times (in this case, 5 times) before the end of the special time-saving gaming state is performed. A suggested countdown effect is now executed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly understand when the special time-saving gaming state ends, and it is also possible to arouse the player's sense of impatience regarding the end of the special time-saving gaming state, making it possible to improve the interest in the game. .

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, if a left-handed hit is made during the special time-saving game state, a left-handed hit error notification (display of a left-handed hit error image HUE indicating a right-handed hit, a message saying "Please hit right") The output of the left-handed hitting error sound is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds), but if the normal gaming state is started while the left-handed hitting error notification is being executed, the left-handed hitting error notification is continued while the left-handed hitting error notification is being executed. It is set to run. Therefore, while making the player aware that hitting left during the special time-saving gaming state is disadvantageous to the player, it is possible to notify the player of hitting left so as not to cause a loss to the player due to the start of the normal gaming state. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, if the normal game state is started while the left-handed hitting error notification is being executed, the display of the left-handed hitting error image HUE is ended, but the message "Please hit right" is terminated. The right-handed hit error audio continues to be output. Therefore, it is not necessary to excessively impede left-handed player notification, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, if the normal game state is started while the left-handed hitting error notification is being executed, the display of the left-handed hitting error image HU ends after the display of the left-handed hitting error image HUE ends. It looks like this. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the left-handed game appropriately, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving game state ends and shifts to the normal game state, the notification logo LG containing the words "Help Time", which means the special time-saving game state, and the remaining The character image "Remaining???" indicating that the number of changes is unknown becomes visible, suggesting that the special time-saving game state has already occurred. Therefore, useful information can be suggested to the player, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, when a special time-saving gaming state that occurs without a jackpot history ends, an end notification production (described later) that notifies the end of the special time-saving gaming state ( When the game enters the normal gaming state (display of the character image "Time is over") is not executed, and the game enters the normal gaming state, a production (display of the background image of production mode A, etc.) indicating that the game is in the normal gaming state is executed. . Therefore, it is possible to enjoy the special time-saving game state to the end, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of effect when a special time-saving gaming state that occurs while there is a jackpot history ends)
With reference to FIG. 156, a presentation example will be described in which a special time-saving game state that occurs without a jackpot history ends.

Here, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed in which the remaining second time saving number (J2) of the special time saving game state is "1", and the remaining time saving number image KG displayed at the bottom left of the screen is " It is assumed that the message ``1 session remaining'' is displayed.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the losing special symbol is stopped and displayed, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed at the losing number "416", as shown in FIG. The icon is displayed disappearing.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) that ends the special time saving game state is started, as shown in FIG. 156(b), the variation of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ The display starts, the number in the second pending number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four pending icons HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D are moved to the icon display area 70C. One of the icons is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. At this time, the character image "LAST" is displayed as a countdown performance started from the second variable performance five times before the end of the special time saving game state, and the remaining time saving number image KG becomes "0 times remaining". Further, an end notification effect is executed to notify that the special time saving game state ends. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the door image TB that blocks the background image, the effect pattern 70a, etc. is closed, and a character image "Help time is over" is displayed in front of the door image TB.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol has passed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a loss, as shown in FIG. Stop and display.

After that, when the special time saving game state ends, as shown in FIG. 156(d), the display of the right-handed hitting image MU ends while the end notification effect continues, and the left-handed hitting notification (display of the left-handed hitting image HU) starts. will be started. Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol starts, the second special symbol pending number display area changes from "3" to "2", and only the variable display of the special symbol TZ remains in the closed state of the door image TB. The variable performance to be performed begins.

Then, when the variation time of the second special symbol has passed and the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, the special symbol TZ is displayed as a loss number "471" while the end notification effect continues, as shown in FIG. 156(e). Stop display. Thereafter, a variable effect is executed in which only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed while the end notification effect continues until the second hold is exhausted.

Next, when the fluctuation time of the second special symbol based on the last second hold has elapsed and the loss special symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 156(f), the special symbol TZ remains hidden with the production symbol 70a The display stops when the number of failures is "569".

After that, when the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the door image TB opens and the end notification effect ends, as shown in FIG. 156(g), and the effect image (background image, (effect design images, etc.) become visible. In addition, the reduction display (preparation operation) of the production pattern 70a is started, and the variable display of the special pattern TZ is started, and the two pending icons displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are moved to the corresponding icon display area 70C. , and one is displayed as the corresponding icon.

In addition, if there is a jackpot among the remaining second holds when the special time-saving gaming state ends, a revival performance will be executed while the end notification performance continues, and a notification will be given that the jackpot will be achieved. It looks like this.

In this way, according to the production example shown in FIG. 155, there are two cases: a case in which a special time-saving gaming state that occurred in a state where there is no jackpot history ends, and a case in which a special time-saving gaming state that occurred in a state in which there is a jackpot history ends. The performance modes (start timing, end timing, content of the end notification performance, etc. of the end notification performance) when the special time saving game state ends are different. Therefore, depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, it is possible to improve the performance effect when the special time-saving game state ends, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Furthermore, it is possible to infer whether there is a jackpot history (whether or not RWM has been cleared) from the performance mode when the special time-saving game state ends, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 156, when the special time-saving game state ends while the end notification production continues, the variable production (variation display of the special symbol TZ) corresponding to the remaining second hold is made inconspicuous. It is supposed to run like this. Therefore, when the end notification performance ends, the display starts with the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display), allowing the game to be played with a new feeling and improving the interest of the game. becomes.

Furthermore, according to the production example shown in FIG. 156, if there is a jackpot in the remaining second hold when the special time-saving game state ends, the jackpot will be played as a revival production while the end notification production continues. It has been announced that this will happen. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear as if a jackpot has been won during the special time-saving game state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the special time-saving gaming state ends, the left-handed hit notification (left-handed hit image HU) is started immediately regardless of the presence or absence of the second hold. Instead of starting left-handed notification, if there is no second hold when the special time-saving gaming state ends, start left-handed notification to the immediate material, and if there is second hold, respond to the second hold. The left-handed hit notification may be started after the variable performance is completed.

(Example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during the execution of the icon change performance and lamp change performance)
An example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is restarted after being stopped during execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 157 and 158.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), when the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, "728 ” is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. The first pending icon (white icon) displayed in the section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the display mode of the icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, thereby starting the icon change effect, and accordingly, the winning opening lamp NR changes from the off state to blinking red. When the state changes, the lamp change effect starts.

After that, as shown in FIG. 157(c), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

Then, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 157(d), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased together with the pending icon.

Thereafter, when the SPSP reaches, as shown in FIG. 157(e), the SPSP reach effect is started, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning a prize opening lamp NR does not turn off as the icon disappears, and the lamp change performance in the winning a prize opening lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 157(f), the image display device becomes non-displayed and the prize opening lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 158(g), an initial screen including the words "Loading" is displayed on the image display device, but the winning slot lamp NR is turned off. maintain the condition.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. The returning screen including is displayed for the duration of the SPSP reach effect (including the execution period of the re-lottery effect to determine whether or not the temporarily stopped jackpot effect symbol will be promoted to a jackpot effect symbol with higher value for the player). However, the winning opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a loss ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. 158(i), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( A stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the production pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display) without any shaking fluctuation). , the variable effect ends without restarting the lamp change effect.

At this time, the same white icon as before the power supply was stopped is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular icon is displayed. By displaying the area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable effect is started, as shown in FIG. 158(j), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started and is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. The first pending icon (white icon) shown in FIG.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special pattern stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 158(k), a temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a ( The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "777" (which formed the reach state before the power cutoff) indicates the type of the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot game) without performing any swing fluctuation/swing display). A combination of performance symbols different from the reach combination according to the production symbol "3↓3") and a stop screen with the special symbol TZ displayed in a stopped state (static display) will be displayed, and a lamp change effect will be displayed with the winning opening lamp NR. The variable performance ends without restarting.

In addition to the variation production in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variation productions (variation production in which a normal variation is executed, variation production in which a shortened variation is executed, variation production in which a normal reach production is executed, SP reach production) Regarding the fluctuating performance), when the power supply that was stopped during the execution is restarted and the execution period of the performance ends, the temporary stop display (swinging fluctuation/swinging display) of the performance pattern 70a is not performed and " 753'' loss effect pattern 70a, or a jackpot effect pattern that is the same combination of effect patterns or a combination of different effect patterns as the reach combination based on the effect patterns that formed the reach state before the power cut-off is displayed in a stopped state (static display). will be done.

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, it depends on whether the game control state is initialized or restored, whether the subsequent state is the normal gaming state, or the specific gaming state (low accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state). Regardless of whether there is a special symbol TZ, the special symbol TZ has the same display mode (shape, design) and is statically displayed (statically displayed) with numbers that are the same combination as the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 158(l), the image display device displays information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game). The opening performance including the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking variation) and then stopped is restarted. After the control state of the game is restored, the special symbol stop designation command is issued after the special symbol fluctuation time has passed (if the special symbol stop designation command is missed and the state then shifts to the customer waiting state, the customer waiting state When a state designation command) is received, the performance pattern 70a is not temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) but is displayed stopped (still display). Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the production symbols 70a are displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the combination of performance symbols that are the initial symbols when the power is restored is displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) instead of the normal loss performance symbols. Therefore, there is no need to perform complicated processing such as determining by lottery the performance symbols to be displayed statically, and the power restoration restores the control state of the game, and is executed when the power supply stops. It becomes possible to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being performed has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the production symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot fluctuation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the jackpot effect symbol combination is displayed in a stopped state (static display). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the control state of the game is restored due to the power supply restoration, and that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot fluctuating performance.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, when the combination of jackpot production symbols is displayed in a stopped state (static display) after the control state of the game is restored, a reach state is formed before the power supply is stopped. It is possible to stop display (still display) a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect patterns that were previously used. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the jackpot effect symbols that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed before the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, if the fluctuation production that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped includes the execution period of the promotion production described above, the power supply is resumed and the control is performed. After the state is restored, the jackpot effect symbols are stopped and displayed (stationary display) without executing the promotion effect. Therefore, since no unnecessary effects are performed before the effect symbols are stopped and displayed (statically displayed), the player is immediately informed that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped was a jackpot variable effect. It becomes possible to understand the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, there are two cases in which the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and a case in which the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the loss variation production is restored, and a case in which the power supply is stopped during the execution of the jackpot variation production. The display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screens) of the image display device after power supply is restarted is the same as when power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it is possible to perform simple display control without being aware of whether a loss fluctuation effect or a jackpot fluctuation effect is being executed, and the processing load associated with display control after power supply is resumed. It becomes possible to reduce the

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the special symbol TZ will be displayed in the same manner as before the power supply was stopped after the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. Then, numbers that are in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed). Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that the fluctuating performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next screen is displayed after the display of the returning screen is finished. Until the fluctuation effect (scrolling of the effect pattern 70a) starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, so that the display space (display area) of the icon is changed to a background image, etc. The effect image is secured in a state where it can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the example effects shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, if the power supply that was stopped while the pending icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the fluctuation effect starts, a rectangular area image is displayed in the hold icon display area, so that the display space (display area) of the hold icon is in a state where it is possible to display a effect image such as a background image. It is now reserved and a pending icon is displayed. Therefore, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to know that the suspended variable performance has not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 157 and 158, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. If the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will change to , rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning opening lamp NR will be hit as a jackpot without restarting the lamp change effect. The notification mode (lights off or lit in white) does not indicate the degree of expectation of winning. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation effect ends, a stop screen with the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stopped is displayed, but as in the case of a loss, when the power is restored, A second standby screen may be displayed in which the initial symbol "753" production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (still display).

In addition, after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuating effect ends, a stop screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped and displayed is displayed, but the jackpot effect pattern 70a is displayed without displaying the stop screen. It is also possible to start an opening performance of a jackpot game in which the is not displayed. In addition, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed in the opening performance, a jackpot special symbol TZ of "777" may be displayed, or a special symbol "753" which is the initial symbol when the power is restored. TZ may also be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the loss fluctuation performance ends, the performance symbol 70a, which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot fluctuation performance ends, the jackpot The opening performance of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen in which the performance symbols 70a and the special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed.

In addition, if it is possible to perform a specific performance that incites whether or not a jackpot game will be executed without displaying the production symbol 70a in a reach state in a variable production (makes people expect that a jackpot game will be executed), the specification After the power supply that was stopped during execution of the performance is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a loss, the performance symbol 70a which is the initial symbol at the time of power restoration is stopped (statically displayed), and if it is a jackpot, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state (static display). The jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

In addition, when the combination of jackpot effect symbols is stopped and displayed (statically displayed) after the control state of the game is restored, one of the combinations of jackpot effect symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter. may be stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the second jackpot game is "222" and " 444'', ``666'', and ``888'', and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting execution of the third jackpot game is ``111'', ``555'', and ``999''.

If the reach combination before the power supply is stopped is "1↓1" which constitutes a part of the jackpot effect symbol combination that suggests the execution of the third jackpot game, then the jackpot game to be executed after that is the first jackpot game. In the case of a jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is different from the reach combination based on the effect symbols that formed the reach state) is stopped and displayed, and then the game is executed. If the jackpot game is the third jackpot game, any one of "111", "555", and "999" (a combination of jackpot effect symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the effect symbols that formed the reach state) It is a good idea to stop and display the .

In addition, regarding the special symbol TZ, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, instead of being displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) with numbers that are the same combination as the production symbol 70a, it becomes a combination different from the production symbol 70a. The display may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display) using numbers.

In addition, if the normal gaming state and the customer waiting state occur after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (stationary display), while the power supply is stopped. After restarting and restoring the control state, if the specific gaming state (low-accuracy time-saving gaming state, high-accuracy time-saving gaming state) and customer waiting state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in a stopped state (static display), The special symbol TZ may be displayed in a stopped state (stationary display).

(Example of effects when restarting after power supply to the gaming machine is stopped during execution of look-ahead effect effect, pending icon change effect, and lamp change effect)
FIGS. 159 and 160 are diagrams showing examples of effects when the power supply to the gaming machine is restarted after being stopped during execution of the prefetch effect effect, the pending icon change effect, and the lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), the first pending icon (white icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, and third display section 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the loss effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed when the player is in the game.

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the variation display of the production pattern 70a is started, and the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and The first pending icon (white icon) displayed on the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed on the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, thereby starting the first effect of the look-ahead effect, and the first pending icon ( When the display mode of the final icon display mode (red icon) changes to a blue icon, the pending icon change effect starts, and accordingly, the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a blinking blue state, and the lamp changes to a blue icon. The change production begins.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 159(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the pre-variation variation effect is started, as shown in FIG. 159(e), the variation display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first display part 70B1 and the second display part 70B2 The displayed first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, by displaying the effect image EF around the effect symbol 70a that starts the variable display, the second look-ahead effect effect is started, and the pending icon change effect and lamp change effect continue. Become.

Then, as shown in FIG. 159(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, as shown in FIG. 159(g), the image display device becomes non-display and the winning slot lamp NR is turned off.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. To maintain a state where the lights are turned off without restarting the change performance.

Then, when the production control board 130 receives the second power restoration designation command transmitted from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. A returning screen including the above is displayed during the execution period of the advance variation, but the winning a prize opening lamp NR remains in the off state here as well.

After that, when the execution period of the advance variation ends (the production control board 130 receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating a loss), as shown in FIG. Without doing so, a stop screen with the initial symbol 753, the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state (statically displayed), and the lamp change effect is restarted beforehand. The fluctuation ends.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon instead of the blue icon before the power supply is stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C. By displaying a rectangular area image, a display space (display area) for the icon is secured in a state where an effect image such as a background image can be displayed.

After that, when the variable effect in which the SPSP reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 160(k), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the 1 pending icon (white icon) is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 160(l), the lines uttered by ally A are displayed in the lines window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 emits a voice corresponding to the lines, "Your chance has arrived!" When the is displayed, the dialogue preview performance is executed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160(m), the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, and the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. The pending icon display area 70D is erased.

Then, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 160(o), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special figure stop designation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 160(p), the current jackpot game (here, the first The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" indicating the type of one jackpot game (1 jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

Although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or returning screen is displayed, the lighting mode (for example, white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change effect (does not indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot) ) may turn on the winning opening lamp NR.

In addition, if the special figure stop designation command cannot be received during the fluctuation performance (temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped displaying (shaking fluctuation) will not be displayed stop. , the temporary stop display (shaking fluctuation) will continue.

In addition, for icons that have changed from pending icons to new icons after power supply is resumed, a lottery will be held regarding the icon change effect at the start of the change, and if a winner is selected, the display mode of the icon will be changed according to the result. However, the lottery related to the lamp change effect may not be executed anew, and the winning slot lamp NR may be maintained in a turned off state so that the lamp change effect is not restarted.

As described above, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect production is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the special figure that was stored at the time of restoration is restored. The continuous preview performance is not restarted in the variable performance corresponding to the judgment information. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the continuous preview presentation from being restarted in an incomplete state due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. The same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored.

Furthermore, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, when the icon is displayed as a special icon (including cases where the final display mode has not changed and cases where the final display mode has changed) When the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the pending icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

In addition, according to the production examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 160, the variable production (winning opening lamp NR) corresponding to the pending icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change production is changed to the lighting color (blue, red, etc.) with high expectation of winning the jackpot. Even if the power supply that was stopped during the memorization of the special figure judgment information that will cause the lamp to change to a rainbow) is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the winning slot will not restart without restarting the lamp change effect. The lamp NR is set in a notification mode (unlit or lit white) that does not suggest the degree of expectation of winning a jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is restarted, and to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being restarted even though the fluctuating performance has not been executed.

(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 and 162. FIG. 161 is a timing chart 1 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 162(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of FIG. 161. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is "2" with one frame of non-animation. becomes "1", and the two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the corresponding icon TI. will be displayed as . In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Incidentally, the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81, but since blinking cannot be expressed in the drawing, the variable display is expressed by double circles. It shall be. Further, the LED of the sub-first hold display 83 is also indicated by a double circle to indicate that it is blinking.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 162(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 162(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 162(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 162(d)). .

Thereafter, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons was completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 162(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 162(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation accordingly (see FIG. 162(f)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start a variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 162(g)).

Then, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 162) (see g)).

Then, at timing T9, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 162(h)).

Next, at timing T10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("962"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the icon TI continues to rotate (actual effect) (see FIG. 162(i)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. (See FIG. 162(i)).

Then, at timing T12, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the state is set to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). to move to. When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the special symbols TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ comes to a real stop in a losing mode (extinguished) (see FIG. 162(j)).

In addition, at the timing of T7, although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The case where the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command is the same as the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. processing will be performed.

Here, specific example 1 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state has been described, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the basic The flow is similar to the explanation above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

In addition, if the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed, but the main control In the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communication between the board 110 and the production control board 130, no abnormality notification is performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A second specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 164. FIG. 163 is timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 164(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 163. This is example 1 of the performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 164(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 164(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 164(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 164(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 164(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 164(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 164(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 164(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 164(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed third in the hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past fluctuations) including the effect pattern 70a that is shifted from the stop position are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 164(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). (See Figure 164(h)).

Note that when the surplus reservation icons are deleted and the necessary reservation icons are displayed in a shifted manner, the surplus reservation icons may be left as they are and the necessary reservation icons are displayed in a shifted manner.

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 164(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is able to normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first special symbol pending number being “0”. Also in (target of expectation suggestion by look-ahead zone effect), normal zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are executed according to the preview scenario, and the effect pattern 70a is the main one. The look-ahead zone effect ends when it stops.

Note that at timings T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T10, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "1". 4" to "2", and when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number grasped by the production control unit 130m. If the deviation from the current number of reservations is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, we have explained the second specific example where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A third specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 163 and 165. FIG. 163 is a timing chart 2 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 165(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of FIG. 163. This is a second example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 164 and FIG. 165 differ in that a look-ahead effect performance is performed instead of a look-ahead zone performance as a continuous preview performance, and an icon change performance is also performed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI (FIG. 165). d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 165(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 165(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 165(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 165(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the number of pending special symbols decreases from "3" to "2". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 165(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 165(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI displayed is erased with one frame of non-animation. Displayed second. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 165(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a according to the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 165(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the completion of the shift display of the icon, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is moved at high speed. will be in a scrolled state. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 165(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation that is executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first special symbol pending number becomes “0” Also in the performance (the object of which the expectation level is suggested by the pre-read preview performance), the pre-read effect performance (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T7 to T9, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T10, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "1". 4" to "2", and when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "2" to "0", that is, the number of reservations grasped by the main control unit 110m and the number grasped by the production control unit 130m. If the deviation from the current number of reservations is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, here, we have explained the third specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (first hold icon) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) are If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while displaying the reserved number of special figures (information), the surplus reserved icon of the specific number of reserved icons (for example, the third The required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner, without shifting display of pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) (first hold information) If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, the number of reserved icons that are one less than the specific number is displayed, and then the predetermined number of reserved symbols are displayed. The icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 163 to 165, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. For example, if the performance control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while displaying the number of reservations (for example, 3), the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number will be displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items without having to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A fourth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 166 and 167. FIG. 166 is a timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 167(a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of FIG. 166. This is example 1 of the performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 167(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 167(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 167(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 167(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 167(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 167(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect continues (see FIG. 167(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus hold icons HI displayed in the second and third positions of the hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (including the effect pattern 70a that is shifted from the stop position) are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 167(h)).

Then, one necessary hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). (See Figure 167(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 167(i)).

Thereafter, if the performance control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead zone performance ends when the performance symbol 70a comes to a final stop.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T12, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". If the difference between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is ``3'', the basic flow changes from ``4'' to ``1''. is the same as the explanation above.

In addition, here, we have explained the specific example 4 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 166 and 168. FIG. 166 is timing chart 3 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 168 (a) to (i) correspond to (a) to (i) in timing chart 3 of FIG. 166. This is a second example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 167 and FIG. 168 differ in that a prefetching effect performance is performed instead of the prefetching zone performance as a continuous preview performance, and an icon change performance is also performed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here. However, only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols begins. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI.

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol LZ is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 168(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 168(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 168(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. Further, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 168(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 168(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 168(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 168(g) is maintained without performing the prefetch effect production (displaying the effect image EF, outputting the effect sound effect).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period is extended (see Figure 168(g)).

Thereafter, at timing T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus hold icons HI displayed first and second in the hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the third hold icon HI is erased with one frame of non-animation. Displayed first in non-animated form. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position.

Then, one necessary hold icon HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol LZ continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 168(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T13, the icon change performance is executed at the same time as the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect performance is completed, and the performance pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotation operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 168(i)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of T7 to T11, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T12, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "0". If the difference between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is ``3'', the basic flow changes from ``4'' to ``1''. is the same as the explanation above.

In addition, here, we have explained the specific example 5 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold icon) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) in the hold icon display area information), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined number of reserved icons will be displayed without displaying a number of reserved icons that are one less than the specific number. The hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (first hold information) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while the number of reserved special drawings is displayed, the number of reserved special figures will be one less than the specified number without displaying the reserved icon that is one less than the specified number. Two fewer hold icons are displayed, followed by a predetermined number of hold icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 166 to 168, in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E, a specific number (for example, one) that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. For example, if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reserved special drawings reaches a predetermined number while displaying the number of reservations (for example, 4), the number of reservations that are one and two fewer than the specific number is A predetermined number of pending items is displayed without displaying the number. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 6 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 169 and 170. FIG. 169 is timing chart 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 170(a) to (h) correspond to timing charts 4 (a) to (h) in FIG. 169. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbols starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One pending icon HI is additionally displayed in the pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 170(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 170(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 170(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (understood) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The four pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 170(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the shift display of the icons is completed, the pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Additionally, the third hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 170(e)).

Then, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("531"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 170(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of the zone BGM) is maintained to continue the prefetch zone effect, and the blue icon is maintained and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 170 ( (see g)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Thereafter, at timing T11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing T12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable production is not performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Next, at timing T13, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 170(g) is maintained.

Thereafter, at timing T14, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the game enters a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0". ” and a process is performed to set a waiting timer until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The surplus pending icons HI displayed in the first to third positions of the pending icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the icon change effect and The look-ahead zone performance ends. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), and , the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol LZ comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished) (see FIG. 170(h)).

Note that at timings T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, a case has been described in which the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command in a state where the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) is "3" at timing T14. Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the number of reservations is ``4'', ``2'', or ``1'', the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, we have explained the specific example 6 in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 169 to 170, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position that has been set, are now displayed at the stop position (actual stop). ing. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable performance has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 7 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 and 172. FIG. 171 is timing chart 5 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, and FIGS. 172(a) to (h) correspond to (a) to (h) in timing chart 5 of FIG. 171. This is an example of a performance.

Note that FIG. 169 and FIG. 171 differ only in that the command received at timing T14 is a customer waiting designation command or an opening designation command, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and the differences will be omitted here. Only parts will be explained.

At timing T14, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains “3”, and it is a jackpot. Processing for starting the opening performance of the game is performed.

At this time, the first special symbol reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed on the production pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon HI and the corresponding icon are deleted, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed. In addition, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol LZ comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished), and the opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 172 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), if the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special figure reservation number designation command from the main control unit 110m. , the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E is updated to the number according to the command with one frame of non-animation.

Note that at timings T7 to T13, the production control unit 130m successfully received the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, a case has been described in which the opening designation command is received at the timing of T14 when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "3". Even when the opening designation command is received when the number is "4", "2", or "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

In addition, here, we have explained the specific example 7 in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 171 and 172, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All of the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position, are not displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the jackpot game The opening performance image is displayed. Therefore, the opening performance is not hindered by the performance symbols, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 173 and 174. FIG. 173 is a timing chart 6 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 174 (a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of FIG. 173. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 174(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 174(b)).

Thereafter, at timing T3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 174(c)).

Next, at timing T4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 174 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the number of reserved symbols decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit Processing is performed to change the first special figure reservation number stored (kept) by 130m from "1" to "1", that is, to start the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) second in the hold icon display area 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 174(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 174) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (production operation) (FIG. 174) f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance (the SP ready-to-win performance ends), the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a reach-missing mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (presentation operation) of the pending icon HI and the relevant icon TI continue (see FIG. 174(g)).

Then, at timing T8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 174(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start a variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 174(i)).

Next, at timing T10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, and A changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 174(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timings T2 to T4, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the commands (commands at the time of winning, commands at the time of stopping) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the command (winning command, stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received.

Here, at the timing of T5, a case has been described in which the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", but the first special figure pending number is "1". 0" to "0", when the number of reserved 1st special drawings changes from "2" to "2", when the number of 1st reserved special drawings changes from "3" to "3", in other words, the main control If the number of reservations stored (understood) by the section 110m and the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 130m are the same, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In addition, although specific example 8 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reservation icons (first reservation information) are displayed in the reservation icon display area, the number of reserved special drawings is set to a predetermined number. When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a number, display one more (for example, two) pending icons than a predetermined number, and then shift-display those pending icons. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reserved numbers is displayed on the sub-first reserved display 83 or the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of pending figures becomes a predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending figures is displayed without displaying the number of pending figures that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two) It is designed to display the number. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, although the reservation icon (first reservation information) is not displayed in the reservation icon display area, while the icon is displayed, the number of reserved special drawings is "0". When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display, it displays a number of hold icons that are one more than "0" (for example, 1), and then shifts and displays the hold icons. The hold icon is no longer displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 173 and 174, while the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is displaying the reservation number of "0", the special symbol reservation number is When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that becomes "0", the number of pending items is "0" without displaying the number of pending items that is one more than "0" (for example, one). is designed to be displayed (maintained). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 9 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 175 and 176. FIG. 175 is a timing chart 7 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 176(a) to (f) correspond to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 175. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, when the shift display of the icons is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 176(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176(b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176(b)).

Next, at timing T4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". . If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176(b)).

Then, at timing T5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotating operation (acting operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 176(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable production will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern LZ is displayed in a variable manner. period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Fig. 176 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure pending number stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first A hold icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed in the second to fourth positions of the hold icon display area 70B as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 176(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 176) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (effect movement) (Fig. 176 ( f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

It should be noted that at timings T2 to T6, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stopping, command at the time of starting) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, Even when the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m, the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m ) is not normally received by the production control unit 130m, the same process will be performed.

Here, at the timing of T7, a case has been described in which the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", but the number of reserved first special symbols is "3". When the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "1" to "2", when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "2", when the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1", in other words, the main control If the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 110m is greater than the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control section 130m, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation. .

In addition, although specific example 9 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state has been described here, even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of reservation icons (first reservation information) are displayed in the reservation icon display area, the number of reserved special drawings is set to a predetermined number. If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than the specific number, it displays a hold icon that is one more than the specific number (for example, three), and then , a specific number of pending icons are displayed by shifting and displaying those pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of reserved numbers is displayed on the sub-first reserved display 83 or the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, When the effect control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of pending figures becomes a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than a predetermined number, the number of pending figures is one more than the specific number (for example, three). It is designed to display a specific number of pending items without displaying the . Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, although the reservation icon (first reservation information) is not displayed in the reservation icon display area, when the number of reserved special drawings is the predetermined number ( For example, if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is 1), it displays a number of hold icons that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2), and then shifts those hold icons. By displaying, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 175 and 176, while the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E is displaying the reservation number of "0", the special symbol reservation number is When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a predetermined number (for example, one), the predetermined number of changes is displayed without displaying a pending number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). The number of pending items is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Summary of specific examples shown in Figures 161 to 176)
As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. The period, the period of variation of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and the output period of the BGM during variation are extended (continued) compared to the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which no performance is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, while the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a is extended (continued), the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotation of the icon continue. ing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming extremely static and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed). It looks like this. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Furthermore, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, when the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, Even if there is, the preview mode (type of icon, type of zone performance) of the pre-read preview performance does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, there is no abnormality in the progress of the pre-read preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined stop The variable display starts after all the effect symbols 70a including the effect image 70a that is out of position (the effect symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be made better than when the variable display is started with the performance symbols 70a deviated from the stop position, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern LZ does not stop and display, but continues to be displayed in a fluctuating manner. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and it is possible to reduce the control load. Furthermore, even if the performance symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ can inform the player that a variable performance is being performed, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the icon changes to normal time. It is designed to be erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make the newly executed variable performance less likely to be hindered by the deletion of the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the prefetch notice performance (icon change performance, prefetch zone performance) is continued (executed), the performance control unit 130m If the start command is normally received, the pre-read preview performance can be executed even in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 161 to 176, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a in which the prefetch notice performance (icon change performance, prefetch zone performance) is continued (executed), the performance control unit 130m If the starting command is normally received, in the newly executed variable performance, it is possible to execute a performance with contents corresponding to the scenario of the pre-read preview performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the progress of the pre-read preview performance will not be abnormal, thereby avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A tenth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 178. FIG. 177 is a timing chart 8 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 178(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 177. This is an example of a performance.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) No processing is performed to update the number of reserved first special drawings, which remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command for which the first special figure reservation number is "2" has not been received, the first special figure reservation displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved figures remains "1", and the reserved icon HI is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first reserved special figure number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B (FIG. 178(a)) reference).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first In the second part of the hold icon display area 70B, which corresponds to the first special figure hold number "2" for which the winning command could not be received, the hold icon HI is not displayed and the first special figure hold number "3" is displayed. The third hold icon HI corresponding to `` is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 178(b)).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 178(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 178(d)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "2" and a process is performed to start the variable production.

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and the first In the pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon HI corresponding to the first special figure pending number "2" for which the winning command could not be received is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (in normal size from the beginning). The three currently displayed pending icons HI are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 178(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T7, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 178(f)).

Next, at timing T8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Furthermore, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 178(g)).

Then, at timing T9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special figure stop command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 178(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the number of reserved symbols decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 178(i)).

Next, at timing T11, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon, and A changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 178(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

Note that at timing T2, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on reception of this command Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the command, the same processing as in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (winning command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m is performed. You will be killed.

Here, at timing T3, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received that makes the first special figure pending number "3". As explained above, when the first special figure pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received that causes the first special figure pending number to be "4". In this case, when the first number of reserved special symbols stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m is "0", the winning number becomes one of "2", "3", or "4". Even when a time command is received, the basic flow is the same as that described above.

In addition, here, we have explained specific example 10 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), The basic flow is the same as described above.

Specifically, the first special figure reservation number, the first special figure reservation number designation command, the first special symbol, the sub-first reservation display 83, the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, the first reservation icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first starting port 45, respectively, the second special figure reservation number, the second special figure reservation number designation command, the second special symbol, the sub-second reservation display 84, the second special figure It may be read as the pending number display area 70F, the second pending icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second starting port 47.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. is not displayed, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), a predetermined number of reserved icons in the reserved icon display area is displayed. Instead of displaying the hold icon in the area corresponding to the number (for example, the second), the hold icon is displayed in the area (for example, the third) that corresponds to a specific number of the hold icon display areas. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the number (for example, one If the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, 3) that is one more than the predetermined number while displaying the number of reserved It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying them. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

As described above, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. is not displayed, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings is a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number, a predetermined number of reserved icons in the reserved icon display area are displayed. (for example, the area corresponding to the specific number of the pending icon display areas) without displaying the pending icon in the area corresponding to the number one less than the specific number (eg, the third) from the area corresponding to the specific number (for example, the second) For example, the hold icon is displayed at the fourth position. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the number (for example, one If the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than a predetermined number while displaying the number of pending special drawings (4), A specific number of pending numbers is displayed without displaying a pending number that is one less. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, the hold icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas, and If the production control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a predetermined number while displaying a reservation icon in an area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than that, After displaying a specific number of pending icons by additionally displaying a pending icon in an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, the second) of the pending icon display areas, by shifting and displaying those pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons can be displayed. A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific examples shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and a number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, If the number of special drawings on hold is When the production control unit 130m receives a start command that is one less than the specific number, an area corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, the second) of the pending icon display areas and a number one more than the predetermined number are displayed. (for example, 3) to display a specific number of pending icons, and then shift and display those pending icons to display one less than the specific number of pending icons. It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 177 and 178, regarding the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command, while it is displayed as a pending icon, Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Modification example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 2 described in FIGS. 163 and 164 (modification 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 163 and 179. 179(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (i) in timing chart 2 of FIG. 163.

Note that since FIG. 164 and FIG. 179 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained here.

At timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (ordinarily there is a discrepancy of 1). However, since an abnormality (deviation of 2 or more) has occurred, the look-ahead zone performance is terminated.

Specifically, the pre-reading zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the fluctuating BGM is output (see FIG. 179(h)).

In addition, the surplus hold icon HI displayed second in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased as a non-animation for one frame, and the hold icon HI displayed third is erased for one frame. It is displayed second in non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 179) (see (h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 179(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 179(i)).

(Modification 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification example (modification example 2 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) of the specific example 3 described in FIGS. 163 and 165 will be described using FIGS. 163 and 180. FIGS. 180(a) to (i) are examples of effects corresponding to timing charts 2 of FIG. 163 (a) to (i).

Note that since FIG. 165 and FIG. 180 are the same up to the timings T0 to T9, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained.

At timing T10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (ordinarily there is a discrepancy of 1). However, since an abnormality (deviation of 2 or more) has occurred, the icon change performance and the look-ahead effect performance are terminated.

Specifically, the surplus hold icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 180(h)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 180(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 180(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, a variable production is executed to display a variable display of a special symbol whose first special symbol reservation number becomes “0”. (The target of the expectation level suggestion by the pre-read preview presentation) also, the pre-read effect presentation and the icon change presentation will not be executed.

In this way, according to the modified examples shown in FIGS. 179 to 180, the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the main control section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control section 130m are If an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality (normally a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction, but an error of 2 or more in the decreasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect) , icon change performance, look-ahead effect performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 8 described in FIGS. 173 and 174 (modification 3 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 173 and 181. 181(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in timing chart 6 of FIG. 173.

Note that since FIG. 174 and FIG. 181 are the same up to the timings T0 to T4, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained here.

At timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols begins. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit Processing is performed to change the first special figure reservation number stored (kept) by 130m from "1" to "1", that is, to start the variable production without changing the first special figure reservation number.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the production control section 130m (original number of 1 in the decreasing direction). Since an abnormality in which the numbers are the same even though they are different from each other) has occurred, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated.

Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Additionally, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation ( (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 181(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 181) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (effect operation) (Fig. 181 ( f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the left center right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops in a reach-miss mode ("878"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 181(g)).

Then, at timing T8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 181(h)).

Thereafter, at timing T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start a variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first One hold icon HI displayed in the hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 181(i)).

Next, at timing T10, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 181(j) )reference).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 181, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (normally a deviation of 1, but an abnormality where the number is the same), the pre-reading notice presentation (pre-reading zone presentation, icon change presentation, pre-reading effect presentation) will be terminated. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 9 described in FIGS. 175 and 176 (modification 4 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described using FIGS. 175 and 182. 182(a) to (f) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of FIG. 175.

Note that since FIG. 176 and FIG. 182 are the same up to the timings T0 to T6, a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described.

At timing T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special symbol is Variable display of symbols begins. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first special figure pending number stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the main control There is an inconsistency caused by a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special symbols notified from the section 110m and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control section 130m (original number is decreasing). Since an abnormality, which is a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction, occurs, the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are terminated.

Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to the background image corresponding to production mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are finished, and the changing BGM is output. Additionally, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon after one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth pending icons HI (white icons) become one frame of non-animation. Additional display (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 182(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation) (FIG. 182) (see e)).

Thereafter, at timing T8, the shift display of the icons is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (effect movement) (Fig. 182 ( f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed.

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 182, a command is created between the first special figure reservation number notified from the main control unit 110m and the first special figure reservation number stored in the production control unit 130m. If an inconsistency occurs due to an abnormality (an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction instead of a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction), a pre-reading notice effect (pre-reading zone effect, icon change) It is designed to end the performance (pre-read effect performance). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of inconveniences such as the execution of a pre-read preview effect during the execution of a variable effect that is not normally subject to execution of the pre-read preview effect, thereby preventing a decrease in the interest of the game. It becomes possible to suppress this.

(Variation 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modification of the specific example 10 described in FIGS. 177 and 178 (modification 5 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command) will be described with reference to FIGS. 177 and 183. 183(a) to (j) are examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of FIG. 177.

Note that since the timings from T6 to T11 in FIG. 178 and FIG. 183 are the same, the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be explained here.

First, at timing T0, as the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. Ru. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number specification command, special symbol specification command, special pattern fluctuation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The memorized (kept) number of reserved first special symbols changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special figure pending number displayed on the sub first pending display 83 and the first special figure pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The two pending icons HI displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation).

Next, at timing T1, the icon shift display is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (production operation).

Then, at the timing of T2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning commands (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m will memorize (understand) The process for updating the first special figure pending number remains at "1" (see FIG. 183(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the number of first special symbols reserved that is stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special figure reservation number specification command, pre-read specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m receives the commands stored (understood). The number of reserved special drawings will be changed from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first The second hold icon HI in the hold icon display area 70B is displayed as a non-animated frame of 1 frame, and the third hold icon HI is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (gradually increasing from a very small size). (see FIG. 183(b)).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon HI and the icon TI are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 183(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives a stop command (special figure stop designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable production is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ changes to a loss mode (lights out). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 183(d)).

In this way, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. When the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than the predetermined number when the number of reserved special drawings is A hold icon is additionally displayed in an area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the second) and an area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the third). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, a number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. When the presentation control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than a predetermined number while displaying the number of reserved numbers, display the predetermined number of reserved numbers. Instead, it displays a specific number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the hold icon display areas. In some cases, when the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number, an area corresponding to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display areas ( For example, a hold icon is additionally displayed in an area corresponding to a specific number (for example, the 4th place) from the 2nd place. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, a number (for example, one) less than a predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. While displaying the number of pending special drawings, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special drawings becomes a specific number (for example, four) that is more than the predetermined number, the number will be one less than the specific number from the predetermined number. It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying a number of pending numbers. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the modification shown in FIG. 183, for the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the presentation control unit 130m could not normally receive the command at the time of winning, the icon change presentation is performed while the icon is displayed as a pending icon. Although the icon is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 184. The upper diagram in FIG. 184 is a timing chart 9 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 184(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) displayed as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, an auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting right, or a second starting opening is performed in an auxiliary game executed during a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) before entering the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting occurring in the movable member 47 (movable member 48) being resolved, the second special figure hold stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is activated. The number increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 184(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 184(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 184(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 184(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Further, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 184(e)). It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 184(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the first variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved second special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “814”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A tenth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 185. The upper diagram in FIG. 185 is a timing chart 10 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 185(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ", and one pending icon HI displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) displayed as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, an auxiliary game is executed by the player hitting right, or a second starting opening is performed in an auxiliary game executed during a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) before entering the normal gaming state. When a game ball enters the second starting port 47 due to reasons such as the ball biting occurring in the movable member 47 (movable member 48) being resolved, the second special figure hold stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is activated. The number increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning occurs because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the normal gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 185(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 185(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 185(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 185(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 185(e)). It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the production control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 185(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the first variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the first variable performance ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 will display the loss state (lights out) as a stop. In this way, the sub-second variable display 82 does not stop displaying the jackpot mode (lit) lamp symbol LZ. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol is displayed. When a command to stop the display (stop signal) is received, and a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 184 and 185, in the normal gaming state, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second holding display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the loss of the second special symbol that started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 186. The upper diagram in FIG. 186 is a timing chart 11 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. 186(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 186(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 186(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. No termination processing will be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 186(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 186(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 186(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 186(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit The number of reserved first special drawings stored (kept) by 130m changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. It should be noted that if the continuous notice performance is being executed for the loss fluctuation display of the first special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A twelfth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 187. The upper diagram in FIG. 187 is the timing chart 12 when the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the command in the normal gaming state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state) changes to the normal gaming state, and the second special symbol pending number stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific gaming state changes from "1" to "0". As the second special symbol decreases, a loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the second pending icon display area 70D is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the second pending icon display area 70D. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, so that the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70B1 of the pending icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since it is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the normal gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 187(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the second variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 187(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command error has occurred), the second variable production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 187(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 187(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 187(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 187(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) will be performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the second variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the second fluctuation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the second special symbol, the second special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-second fluctuation display 82 will display a stop state of loss (lights out). However, the sub-first variable display 81 is configured not to stop displaying the jackpot mode (lit) lamp symbol LZ. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 186 and 187, in the normal gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 188. The upper diagram in FIG. 188 is the timing chart 13 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in a specific game state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D, and a winning sound based on the current winning is output because the winning is entered into the second starting port 47 during the specific gaming state. (See Figure 188(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 188(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 188(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 188(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-first variable display 81 is stopped and displayed (turned off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 188(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until the demonstration effect is executed or the variable display of the special symbol starts (see FIG. 188(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, processing is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved second special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ permanently stops at “814”, which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved second special symbols displayed in the display area 70F will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 14 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIG. 189. The upper diagram in FIG. 189 is the timing chart 14 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command in a specific game state, and FIGS. This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 by the player hitting left, or a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during the normal gaming state before entering the specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). As the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as a game ball entering the first starting hole 45, the number of reserved first special symbols decreases from "1" to "0". Loss fluctuation display starts. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the first variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first reserved number of special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C without being shifted (reduced) from the first pending icon display area 70B. Displayed as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the second starting port 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". . When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (second special figure pending number designation command as a winning signal, pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ) The number of reserved second special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, and the second A pending icon HI is additionally displayed (increased display) in the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D in a normal addition mode, and the winning is based on the current winning since the winning is in the second start opening 47 during the specific gaming state. Sound is output (see FIG. 189(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 189(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 189(c)).

Thereafter, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 2. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (2nd special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If this is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the second variable production is not performed (Fig. 189(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 stops displaying (turns off) in a losing mode, but the second lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-second variable display 82. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 189(e)).

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the second start opening 47. The command (winning signal) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (2nd special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 189(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the first start opening 45, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the performance control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70F. The number of second special drawings reserved is maintained at "1".

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the performance control unit 130m, processing is performed to end the variable performance started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol and start the opening performance at this timing.

Then, the relevant icon TI (normal icon, special icon ) will be displayed as one frame of non-animation, and the opening image will be displayed (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received, the first variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, since the first variable performance ends upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, during the execution of the first variation performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the first special symbol, the first special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the first fluctuation performance (fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the first variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the first special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In any case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to carry out processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Furthermore, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is being displayed, the first special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the second special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Further, since the icon is deleted at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in a specific game state, the first special symbol changes while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the first special symbol changes. When a command to stop the display (stop signal) is received, and a command to stop the variable display of the second special symbol while the icon (first running information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 188 to 189, in the specific gaming state, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub-second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of reserved special drawings is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-second holding display 84 and the second number of reserved special drawings display area 70F. The number of reserved 2nd special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the second special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the first variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol, the loss of the second special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the first variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 19 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 190. The upper diagram in FIG. 190 is a timing chart 15 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 190(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Further, one pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the second lamp pattern LZ is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state where it is performing a rotating action (acting action).

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 190(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 190(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop designation command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command abnormality has occurred), the first variation production will be executed. The process to terminate is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 190(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. Loss fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains at "1", and the process to start the first variable production is not performed (Fig. 190(d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-second variable display 82 stops being displayed (turns off) in a losing manner (see FIG. 190(e)).

After that, at timing T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of second reserved symbols stored in the main control unit 110m are "0", so the customer Shifts to a waiting state (game standby state). When the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0". ”.

At this time, the second special figure pending number displayed on the sub second pending display 84 and the second special figure pending number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and the customer is waiting. The player waits until a demonstration effect is executed or a new variable display of special symbols starts (see FIG. 190(f)).

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the customer waiting command sent from the main control unit 110m If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the state designation command, at this timing, a process is performed to end the variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the production control unit 130m The stored number of reserved first special symbols changes from "1" to "0".

Then, although the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop at "814", which is the same as the production symbol 70a, and the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number are displayed. The number of reserved first special symbols displayed in the display area 70E will be displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 20 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIG. 191. The upper diagram in FIG. 191 is a timing chart 16 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command in a specific game state, and FIGS. 191(a) to (f) are ( This is an example of a performance corresponding to a) to (f).

First, at timing T0, the second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol starts. be done. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (second special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as the start signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The second special symbol pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the second variable production.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the second special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-second reservation display 84 and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F changes from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. ” is displayed. Furthermore, the pending icon HI displayed in the second pending icon display area 70D is shifted and displayed (reduced) as a 20-frame animation in the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts, but the production pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/contraction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI rotates. (direction action) is in progress.

Next, at timing T1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45 due to reasons such as the player hitting left-handed, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases. Increases from "0" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (the first special figure pending number designation command as the winning signal, the pre-reading designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m memorizes (recognizes) ), the number of reserved first special drawings changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is increased and displayed from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, Since the first pending icon display area 70B is not displayed, the pending icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased display), and the winning sound based on the current winning is a winning to the first start opening 45 during the specific gaming state. will not be output (see FIG. 191(a)).

Thereafter, at timing T2, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, the effect pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position. Further, the rotation operation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 191(b)).

Then, at timing T3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (command error has occurred), the second variable production will end. processing is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the periods of temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, variable display of the special pattern TZ, and variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended. Accordingly, the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 191(c)).

After that, at timing T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". 1. The jackpot fluctuation display of special symbols starts. At this timing, the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m. If it is not possible (a command abnormality has occurred), the number of reserved first special symbols stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains "1", and the process to start the variable production is not performed (Fig. 191 ( d)).

Thereafter, at timing T5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a jackpot mode. When the production control unit 130m receives the stop command (special figure stop command as a stop signal) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the second special figure is started in response to the fluctuating display of the second special symbol. Processing to end the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. . In addition, the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a in the losing mode comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop at "814", which is the same as the performance symbol 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being variably displayed on the sub-second fluctuation display 82 stops displaying (turns off) in a loss mode, but the first lamp pattern LZ in a jackpot mode is displayed on the sub-first fluctuation display 81. It becomes a state where it is not stopped and displayed (see FIG. 191(e)). In addition, in the case where the continuous notice performance has been executed for the loss fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the continuous notice performance will end at this timing.

Thereafter, at timing T6, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game starts. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs a process of starting the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the words "Jackpot" is displayed. In addition, "1" of the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is when a prize is newly won based on a prize in the first start opening 45. The command (win signal at the time of winning) is normally received, or the start command based on the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (first special symbol pending number designation command as the start signal, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation) This is maintained until the effect control unit 130m receives the pattern designation command (see FIG. 191(f)).

In other words, a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning in the second starting port 47, a starting command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (second special symbol pending number as a starting signal), etc. Even if the production control unit 130m receives a specified command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command), it is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings that is "1" is maintained.

In addition, at the timing of T3 and timing of T4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 cannot normally receive the directed production command (command abnormality has occurred), the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are produced. The same process as in the case where the control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (command abnormality has occurred) is performed.

In addition, at the timing of T5, the production control unit 130m could not properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m, and at the timing of T6, the opening designation sent from the main control unit 110m. If the command is successfully received by the production control unit 130m, at this timing, processing is performed to end the second variable production that was started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol and start the opening production. .

Then, the relevant icon TI displayed in the relevant icon display area 70C is changed to one frame's worth without stopping and displaying the temporarily stopped loss mode production pattern 70a and the fluctuatingly displayed special design TZ. The opening image will be displayed without being erased as an animation (actually, the effects other than the opening effect will end).

As described above, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variable performance that is started in response to the variable display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol When a stop command (stop signal) for the first special symbol variable display that is started after the end of the first special symbol variable display is received, the second variable performance is ended. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the second variable effect ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the second variable effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, during the execution of the second variation performance that is started in response to the loss variation display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol is If a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the fluctuation display is received, the second fluctuation performance (variation display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ) is received in a loss mode. (fluctuating display). Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the performance symbols from a losing mode to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the second variable performance without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that is started in response to the loss variable display of the first special symbol, the second special When a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the symbol fluctuation display is received, the sub-first fluctuation display 81 and the sub-second fluctuation display 82 are In either case, the lamp pattern LZ in the jackpot mode (lit) is not displayed in a stopped state. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform processing such as switching the lamp pattern from a loss mode (lights out) to a jackpot mode, and it is possible to end the variable display of the second lamp pattern LZ without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, the second special symbol is When a command (stop signal) for stopping the variable display of the first special symbol that is started after the end of the variable display is received, the icon is erased. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the icon is deleted upon reception of the stop command, it is possible to delete the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in a specific game state, the second special symbol changes while the icon (second running information) corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. When the stop command (stop signal) is received, and when the stop command for the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed while the corresponding icon (second running information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed. (stop signal) is received, the icon is erased in the same manner as when the stop signal is received. Therefore, it becomes possible to naturally erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 190 and 191, in the specific gaming state, the first special figure reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 and the first special figure reservation number display area 70E is When a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the number of special drawings on hold is "0" is received when the number is not "0", the number of reserved special drawings is displayed on the sub-first holding display 83 and the first number of special drawings on hold display area 70E. The number of reserved first special drawings is reduced to "0" and displayed. Therefore, the player is not given any doubt that the variable performance will not be executed even though the first special figure reservation number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific gaming state, during the execution of the second variable performance that was started in response to the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol, the loss of the first special symbol that was started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol. When a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display is received, the second variable performance (variable display of the performance symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in a jackpot mode.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a production lever device 23 is provided in addition to the production button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that a description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 192, a production lever device 23 that functions as an input device is provided on the central bottom side of the upper plate 11 so as to face the production button device 16 on the front and back sides.
The production lever device 23 is provided on the center bottom side of the upper tray 11 so as to be on the opposite side of the production button device 16, and includes a production lever 24 that can be pulled toward the front by the player, and a production lever 24. A production lever detection switch (not shown) that detects an operation on the production lever 24 and a lever vibration motor (not shown) that vibrates the production lever 24 are provided. Predetermined information can be input to 1.

The effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11, so when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibrations cause the upper plate 11 to act as a transmission member. The signal is transmitted to the production lever 24 via. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the production lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the production button 17 via the upper plate 11. In other words, when the player is manually operating one operation part, the other operation part vibrates (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut). When a vibration performance with/without the validity period of the operation part related to an in-performance, final performance, re-lottery performance, confirmed performance, etc. is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part. It is now possible to do so.

In addition, since the production button device 16 and production lever device 23 are provided on the upper plate 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the production button 17 is driven, the vibration acts as a transmission member. It is also transmitted to the firing handle via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4, which perform the function. Further, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper plate 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Decision production pattern determination table)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a fixed effect pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the fixed effect in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 193, the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each successive performance pattern, and selected performance pattern are associated with the final performance pattern determination table. For reference, the production structure (effective suggestion production, validity period, production content) of each fixed production pattern is described.

"Effective suggesting effect" is an introductory effect that suggests that a valid period may occur. Specifically, it includes a semi-transparent effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a semi-transparent effect imitating the effect lever 24. This is an effect in which a transparent effect lever image is moved and displayed on the first image display device 70, and a translucent effect button image and a translucent effect lever image are gathered toward a specific position.
"Validity period (single hit 5 seconds)" indicates that the validity period in the fixed performance ends when the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 is operated once or when 5 seconds elapse.

The "operation target" in the valid period column indicates the type of the operation part (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the valid period. The operation becomes valid, and if it is the "production lever", the operation of the production lever 24 becomes valid.

"Promotional performance" is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation unit (performance button 17, performance lever 24) during the valid period, and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that prompts the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, performance lever 24), and specifically, it is a performance that encourages the operation of the operation part (performance button 17, production lever 24). As a result, an opaque effect button image or an opaque effect lever image is displayed at a specific position, and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge is displayed. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 5 different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 to 4 is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state without protrusion and emitting white light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image. There is.
"Protruding button red" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting red light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image imitating the effect button 17 in a protruding state and emitting rainbow light is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque effect button image.

The "normal lever" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.
"Large lever rainbow" indicates that a production lever image imitating the production lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the above-mentioned opaque production lever image.

“Operation unit status” in the valid period column indicates the status of the operation unit (production button 17, production lever 24) during the validity period, and “normal (white)” means that the target operation unit is not in production. If it is the button 17, it is in a normal state where it does not protrude and the effect button 17 emits white light. "Normal (red)" indicates that if the target operation section is the effect button 17, it is in a normal state in which it does not protrude, and the effect button 17 emits red light. "Normal (Rainbow)" indicates that if the target operating section is the effect lever 24, it is in a normal state in which it does not protrude, and the effect lever 24 emits light in rainbow colors. "Protruding (red)" indicates that if the target operation section is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state and the production button 17 emits red light. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates that if the target operation section is the production button 17, it is in a protruding state, and the production button 17 emits a rainbow color that confirms a jackpot. In addition, since the production lever 24 does not have a protruding state, it is only in a normal state.

The "performance content" indicates the content of the production that will be executed when the production button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has passed, and includes "determined successful performance period 11 seconds (production mode H is 6 "Seconds)" means that the execution period of a performance related to a successful decision performance in production modes other than production mode H is 11 seconds, and that the execution period of a production related to a successful decision production in production mode H is 6 seconds. It shows.

"Failure" in the column of winning presentation mode refers to a failed presentation indicating that the jackpot game will not be executed because the first movable member 73 does not operate and the screen of the first image display device 70 changes to a dark color. indicates that it will be executed.
"Success" means that the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and emits rainbow-colored light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, so that a jackpot game is executed. This indicates that a successful performance will be executed.

"Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" in the button vibration column is determined by the vibrator to vibrate the performance button 17 and is determined by the start of a successful performance (= when the performance button 17 is operated or the valid period ends) This shows that a strong vibration performance (decision success vibration performance) is executed in which strong vibrations are performed for 4 seconds and then strong vibrations are performed for 5 seconds with an interval of 1 second in between.

"Rainbow light emission (11 seconds)" in the button light emission column is determined by the effect button LED for causing the effect button 17 to emit light and starts from the start of a successful effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or the validity period ends). This shows that rainbow light is emitted for 11 seconds (longer period than the strong vibration of the production button 17). Note that even if the operation target is the effect lever 24, the effect button 17 emits a rainbow light.

The expected jackpot for each promotional effect is ``normal button white'' < ``protruding button red'' < ``normal lever'' < ``protruding button rainbow'' = ``large lever rainbow.'' Furthermore, the jackpot expectation level for each operation unit state is "normal" < "prominent".

The first feature of the deciding performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that the performance (direction) is carried out. Therefore, it becomes possible to effectively notify that a jackpot game will be executed, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

A second feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the valid period occurs over the longest period of time that occurs during the variable performance. Therefore, inconveniences such as the player missing the operation of the performance button 17 can be suppressed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A third feature of the fixed performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 vibrates for the longest period as a strong vibration performance that occurs during a variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of exhilaration at the time of successful performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

A fourth feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the rainbow emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, even after the vibration of the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24 ends, the player's sense of elation can be maintained, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table)
FIG. 194 is a diagram showing a frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table that is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame accessory (production button 17, production lever 24) in the second embodiment.

In the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table, the type of power-on command and the initial operation pattern to be selected are associated with each other, and the operation mode at the initial operation and the number of steps for the initial operation are listed for reference. ing.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on designation command is received, and the production button 17 rises greatly, and the production button 17 and production lever 24 continuously vibrate for 2.5 seconds, After that, the production button 17 returns to its origin, and then the production button 17 and the production lever 24 vibrate intermittently for 2.5 seconds (1.25 seconds of vibration → 1 second interval → 1.25 seconds of vibration). During that period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in the order of red → green → blue.

"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power recovery designation command indicating that the customer is waiting is received, and the production button 17 is raised greatly, and the production button 17 and production lever 24 are The effect button 17 vibrates continuously for 2 seconds, after which the effect button 17 returns to its origin, and during this period, the effect button 17 lights up (lights up) in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration designation command indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner or a third power restoration designation command indicating that a jackpot game is in progress is received; As the performance button 17 rises greatly, the performance button 17 and the performance lever 24 vibrate continuously for 2 seconds, and then the performance button 17 returns to its original position, and during that period, the performance button 17 is turned off.

Note that the continuous vibration time (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration time (2.5 seconds) of the production button 17 and production lever 24 are based on the vibration duration (dialogue) of the vibration production performed during the variable production. Vibration performance during preview performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo-sequence performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance, vibration performance during re-lottery performance The time is different from the vibration performance (vibration performance at the time of confirmation performance).

The first feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the frame accessory (Production button 17, production lever 24) are different in the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step). Therefore, it is possible to easily understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored).

The second feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the initial movement of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on performs an operation that is not present in the initial movement of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One of the points is that it is designed to allow Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the production button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it becomes possible to appropriately confirm whether or not there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame accessory, regardless of whether the power is turned on or the power is restored.

The third feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. The difference lies in the light emission mode of the initial light emission. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

The fourth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the board accessory The difference is that the light emission mode of the initial light emission during the initial operation of (the first movable member and the second movable member) is different. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the gaming control state has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the gaming control state has been restored).

In addition, the performance button LED is designed to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is being displayed in a fluctuating manner or during a jackpot game, but this is the same as when the power is restored to restore the performance button LED to the customer waiting state. It may be made to light up in a light emitting manner.

The fifth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is the number of colors of light emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on, and the color of light emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. One point is that the numbers are different. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of emitted light colors in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

As a sixth feature of the frame accessory initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. One point is that it includes luminescent colors that are not present in other models. Therefore, it is possible to more easily understand whether the initial operation is due to the power being turned on (the control state of the game has been initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the control state of the game has been restored). .

Note that the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a light emitting color that is not included in the light emitting color in the initial light emission of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. Vibration time (vibration performance during dialogue preview performance, vibration performance during step-up preview performance, vibration performance during pseudo-sequence performance, vibration performance during development performance, vibration performance during cut-in performance, vibration performance during decisive performance) , vibration performance during re-lottery performance, vibration performance during confirmed performance). Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is caused by the initial operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever 24.

The eighth feature of the frame accessory initial movement pattern determination table shown in FIG. The point is that it is executed over the initial operation of the effect button 17, in which the presence or absence of the effect is detected. Therefore, the operation of the production button 17 and the operation of the button vibration motor and lever vibration motor can be checked at the same time, and the time required for operation confirmation can be shortened.

Note that the production lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the production position, and may be operated (moved, vibrated) at the same time as the production button 17 during the initial operation, or in a predetermined order (for example, the production button 17 →It may be operated (moved, vibrated) using the production lever 24 or vice versa. In this case, the performance lever 24 may be placed in the normal position when the "normal lever" is selected in the final performance, and the performance lever 24 may be moved to the performance position when the "large lever" is selected.

In addition, although the effective period of the production lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to a determined production, the production lever 24 was made to be operated multiple times, for example, for 5 seconds in a row, and each time the production lever 24 was operated. As the performance progresses (for example, by increasing the level gauge), when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), a success performance or a failure performance may be executed. The production lever 24 is caused to continue to be operated, and while the production lever 24 continues to be operated, the production progresses (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and the duration is determined to be a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds). A success performance or a determined failure performance may be executed.

In addition, during the validity period related to the advanced performance or the pseudo continuous performance, the performance lever 24 may be operated once when a performance with high expectation of jackpot is executed, or the performance lever 24 may be operated continuously. Alternatively, the production lever 24 may be held down for a long time (for example, 2 seconds). In the case of consecutive pulls, the performance advances each time the performance lever 24 is operated (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3 times), an SPSP development performance or a pseudo continuous success performance is executed. It is a good idea to do so. In addition, if the effect lasts for a long time, the effect is advanced while the effect lever 24 continues to be operated (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds), the SPSP development effect is started. It is preferable that a pseudo continuous success effect be executed.

Furthermore, when the effect button 17 or effect lever 24 is extended or continuously pulled, the effect button 17 or effect lever 24 may be made to vibrate weakly each time the effect progresses (the level gauge increases to the next stage). good.

In addition, the vibration intensity of the production button 17 has weak vibrations and strong vibrations, and the vibration intensity of the production lever 24 has strong vibrations, but even with the same strong vibration, the production lever 24 has a higher vibration intensity than the production button 17. The stronger vibration may have a higher vibration intensity, or the stronger vibration of the effect button 17 may have a higher vibration intensity than that of the effect lever 24.

Further, the type of vibration (vibration time, vibration intensity) may be varied depending on the type of validity period (operation promotion image: single press, long press, repeated press, prolonged press, continuous press). For example, a single press of the production button 17 for 3 seconds during a dialogue preview production or a pseudo-continuous production will be treated as 1 second of weak vibration, and a long press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during an advanced production will be treated as 1 second of weak vibration, and a cut will be made. A single press of the production button 17 for 4 seconds during the in-performance will result in a weak vibration of 3 seconds, a single press of the production button 17 for 5 seconds during the final production will result in a strong vibration of 4 seconds → 5 seconds, and a production during the advanced production. If you press and hold the lever 24 for 4 seconds, it will be considered a strong vibration for 1 second.

Further, when the pending icon or the icon changes to a display mode with high expectation of jackpot (for example, red or rainbow), the production button 17 or production lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second. .

(Third embodiment)
A third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In addition, in the third embodiment, a starting winning device 430 including a first starting port 450 and a second starting port 470 is provided at the position where the first starting port 45 in the first embodiment was located, and the first The variable display of the special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed in the order of winning the first starting hole 450 or the second starting hole 470, and the holding for displaying the first pending icon and the second pending icon. The feature is that the icon display area 70B is provided, and the preliminary determination of special figure determination information based on winnings in the first starting port 450 and the preliminary determination of special figure determining information based on winnings in the second starting port 470 in the normal gaming state. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a judgment is made and a pre-read preview effect is executed. Note that a description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

(Configuration of starting winning device)
First, the configuration of the starting prize winning device 430 in the third embodiment will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 195, the starting prize winning device 43 has an internal space S having a ball entrance 440 at the upper part. Openings 440c and 440d are provided on both left and right sides of the vertically central portion of the internal space S to allow the inflow of game balls from the gaming area 5a. A port 450 and a first starting port detection switch 450a are provided, and a second starting port 470 and a second starting port detection switch 470a are provided at a position on the right side of the internal space S.

Further, directly below the ball entry port 440 and above the first starting port 450 and the second starting port 470, the game balls flowing in from the ball entering port 440 are placed into the first starting port 450 and the second starting port 470. A distributing member 440a that alternately distributes and flows downward is provided, and an exhaust is provided at the lower part of the internal space S for discharging the game balls that have entered the first starting port 450 or the second starting port 470 to the outside of the starting winning device 43. An outlet 440d is provided.

The distribution member 440a has a substantially inverted T-shape with an upright part rising upward from the left-right center of a flat plate part extending in the left-right direction, and a left ball receiving part is formed on the left side of the upright part. A right ball receiving part is formed on the right side of the upright part, and can swing in the left-right direction with the intersection of the flat plate part and the upright part being pivotally supported. In the right-slanted state, the left ball receiving part is located below the ball entrance 440, and when a game ball is received in the left ball receiving part, the left ball receiving part changes to the left-slanted state due to the weight of the game ball. The game ball flows down toward the first starting port 450, while the right ball receiving part is located below the ball entry port 440 in the left tilted state, and when the game ball is received in the right ball receiving part, the game ball is By changing the state of tilting to the right due to the weight and causing the game ball in the right ball receiving part to flow down toward the second starting port 470, the game ball flowing in from the ball entry port 440 is connected to the first starting port 450 and the second starting port. The liquid is distributed alternately to the ports 470.

(Specific example when a game ball hit to the left enters the starting hole in the normal gaming state)
Next, using FIG. 195, a specific example will be described in which a game ball hit to the left in the normal game state enters the starting hole.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), in the normal gaming state, the second special symbol changes while "0" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The display (second variation effect) is being executed, and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, and the distribution is It is assumed that the member 44a is tilted to the right. When a game ball enters the ball entrance 44 in this state, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving part of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a is tilted to the left by the weight of the game ball. move in the direction of

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(b), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left-inclined state, the game balls received in the left ball receiving part flow down toward the first starting port 450, and the game balls are After the ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reservation number increases by 1, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reservation icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entry port 440, as shown in FIG. 195(c), the game ball is received in the right ball receiving part of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entry port 440, and The ball moves in a direction tilting to the right due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the right-inclined state, the game balls received in the right ball receiver flow down toward the second starting port 470, and the game balls are After the ball enters the second starting port 470, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reservation number increases by 1, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and a reservation icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. The game ball moves in a direction tilting to the left due to its own weight.

Also, at this time, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) being stopped and displayed, the variable effect is ended (the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed), and the icon display area 70C is The displayed icon disappears. Furthermore, with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), the first special symbol pending number display area 70F becomes "0", and the pending icon displayed in the pending icon display area 70B changes. The icons are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(f), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left-inclined state, the game balls received in the left ball receiving part flow down toward the first starting port 450, and the game balls are After the ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reservation number increases by 1, the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reservation icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B.

(Specific example when a game ball hit left-handed enters the starting hole in a specific game state)
Next, using FIG. 196, a specific example will be described in which a game ball hit to the left enters the starting slot in a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states).

As shown in FIG. 196(a), in a specific game state, the second special symbol changes when "0" is displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area 70E and the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E. The display (second variation effect) is being executed, and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the pending icon is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, and the distribution is It is assumed that the member 440a is tilted to the right. When a game ball enters the ball entrance 440 in this state, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving part of the distribution member 440a located directly under the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a is tilted to the left by the weight of the game ball. move in the direction of

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(b), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left-inclined state, the game balls received in the left ball receiving part flow down toward the first starting port 450, and the game balls are After the ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reservation number increases by 1 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", but since it is a specific game state, the reservation icon display area 70B shows the reservation corresponding to the first special symbol. Icon is not displayed.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entry port 440, as shown in FIG. The ball moves in a direction tilting to the right due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the right-inclined state, the game balls received in the right ball receiving part flow down toward the second starting port 470, and the game balls are After the ball enters the second starting port 470, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reservation number increases by 1, the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "1", and a reservation icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when the game ball enters the ball entry port 440, as shown in FIG. The game ball moves in a direction tilting to the left due to its own weight.

Also, at this time, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) being stopped and displayed, the variable effect is ended (the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed), and the icon display area 70C is The displayed icon disappears. Furthermore, with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect), the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "0", but the reservation displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B The icon is not shifted and displayed, and the variation effect is executed in a state where the icon is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(f), when the distribution member 440a is converted to the left-inclined state, the game balls received in the left ball receiving part flow down toward the first starting port 450, and the game balls are After the ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reservation number increases by 1 and the first special symbol reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", but since it is a specific game state, the reservation icon display area 70B shows the reservation corresponding to the first special symbol. Icon is not displayed.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, in the normal gaming state, the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the pending icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the pending icon display area 70B. are displayed in the order in which they entered the first starting hole and the second starting hole, and in a specific gaming state, the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70B, but the pending icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. The hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to easily grasp the number of times the variable effect is executed, while in the specific gaming state, it is easier to prompt the user to hit the right hand to win the second starting hole 47, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, in a specific game state, the reservation icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B, but the reservation icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the first special symbol reservation number display area. The display of the number of reservations on the sub-first reservation display 83 is updated. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole in a specific gaming state, it is possible to know the number of reservations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 195 and 196, in the normal gaming state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the icon display area 70B. In the specific game state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the icon display area 70B, but the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the game can be played without worrying about the type of special symbol, while in the specific gaming state, it is easier to prompt the user to hit the right hand to enter the second starting hole 47, which increases the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

In addition, in the specific gaming state, the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon are not displayed, but the pending icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed and the icon is not displayed. The icon may be displayed. In this way, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort that a variable performance is executed without the icon being displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 197. FIG. 197 is a flowchart showing special icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m. It should be noted that the special icon change performance determination process is executed after the winning light emission performance execution process of the pre-reading performance process of the performance control unit 130m described above.

In step E580-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a prefetch designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the prefetch designation command is received, the process moves to step E580-2, and if the prefetch designation command is not received, the current special icon change effect determination process ends.

In step E580-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received prefetch designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the content of performance (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E580-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for a special icon change effect (MAX hold chance effect, puzzle hold chance effect to be described later). If it is the executable period for the special icon change effect, the process moves to step E580-4, and if it is not the executable period for the special icon change effect, the current special icon change effect determination process is ended.

The "executable period for special icon change performance" refers to a case where a jackpot game is not being executed, a normal icon change performance is not being executed, or an icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided.

In step E580-4, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current total number of reservations is the upper limit of "8". If the total number of reservations is the upper limit "8", the process moves to step E580-5, and if the total number of reservations is not the upper limit "8" (1 to 7), MAX The process moves to step E580-8 assuming that the pending chance effect is not to be executed.

"MAX hold chance performance" is a performance that can be executed when the total number of holds reaches the upper limit of 8, and all hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 70B are displayed in a special display mode. This is a kind of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the icon to a normal display mode or a special display mode when the icon appears.

In step E580-5, the sub CPU 130a creates an icon final form determination table for MAX hold chance (FIG. 198(a ). The details of the icon final mode determination table for the MAX hold chance will be described later.

In step E580-6, the sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode of each pending icon by referring to the icon final display mode determination table for MAX pending chance, and in step E580-7, the sub CPU 130a determines the icon final display mode for each pending icon according to the determined icon final display mode. A MAX pending chance performance execution command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current special icon change performance determination process is completed. As a result, a MAX hold chance performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the MAX hold chance performance is executed.

In step E580-8, the sub CPU 130a determines whether the current total number of reservations is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4). If the total number of reservations is 2 or more and less than 5, the process moves to step E580-9, and if the total number of reservations is 2 or more and not less than 5, the puzzle reservation chance performance is not executed this time. The special icon change effect determination process ends.

"Puzzle hold chance performance" is a performance that can be executed when the total number of holds is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4), and changes the target hold icon to a special display mode, This is a kind of pre-read preview performance that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by executing a staged performance in response to the pending icon displayed in a special display mode becoming the relevant icon.

In step E580-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current pending memory (the latest pending memory according to the prefetch designation command) is one for which an SP ready-to-win effect or higher is to be executed. If the SP reach effect or higher is executed, the process moves to step E580-10, and if the SP reach effect is executed less than the SP reach effect (no reach, normal reach effect, etc.), the puzzle is executed. The current special icon change performance determination process is terminated by assuming that the pending chance performance is not to be executed.

In step E580-10, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is any jackpot or ready-to-win effect stored in the preceding pending memory. If there is no jackpot or reach effect, the process moves to step E580-11, and if there is a jackpot or reach effect, it is assumed that the puzzle pending chance effect is not executed. The special icon change effect determination process ends.

In step E580-11, the sub CPU 130a selects a puzzle hold chance pattern determination table (see FIG. 198(b)) for determining a puzzle hold chance production pattern (progress scenario). The details of the puzzle hold chance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E580-12, the sub CPU 130a refers to the puzzle hold chance pattern determination table to determine a puzzle hold chance performance pattern, and in step E580-13, the determined puzzle hold chance performance pattern executes the puzzle hold chance performance. Determine whether it is a performance pattern. If the performance pattern is to execute the puzzle hold chance performance, the process moves to step E580-14, and if the performance pattern is not to execute the puzzle hold chance performance, the current special icon change performance process is ended.

In step E580-14, the sub CPU 130a sets a puzzle hold chance performance execution command corresponding to the determined performance pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current special icon change performance determination process. As a result, a puzzle hold chance performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the puzzle hold chance performance is executed.

(Icon final display mode determination table for MAX hold chance)
FIG. 198(a) is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table for the MAX pending chance that is referred to when determining the final icon display mode in the MAX pending chance effect.

The icon final display mode determination table for the MAX pending chance is associated with the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the prefetch designation command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the icon final display mode to be selected.

The final icon display mode includes a character A card icon, which is a normal card icon, a character B card icon, a character C card icon, and a character C card icon, which are special card icons that indicate that a special game may be executed. A D card icon is set.

The expectation of winning a jackpot for special card icons is in the order of (Character A card icon <) Character B card icon < Character C card icon < Character D card icon, and the character D card icon is expected to be a jackpot. It is a card icon that confirms.

Here, the first feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX hold chance shown in FIG. 198(a) is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied according to the schedule variation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the planned variation pattern is SP reach or SPSP reach, the ratio of special card icons is higher than when the planned variation pattern is normal variation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not result in reach. The following points are selected. Therefore, the performance effect of the MAX holding chance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, the second feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX hold chance shown in FIG. 198(a) is that the special card icon is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. One of the points is that it is selected based on the ratio. Therefore, the performance effect of the MAX holding chance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, as a third feature of the icon final display mode determination table for MAX hold chance shown in FIG. However, there is no indication that which card holding icon is likely to cause the ready-to-win effect to be executed, and whether or not the ready-to-reach effect is executed changes depending on the special figure determination information corresponding to the card holding icon. Therefore, the player has a sense of expectation regarding any card holding icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the icon change performance in the MAX hold chance performance does not change depending on the player's performance customization settings, but the icon change in the MAX hold chance performance does not change depending on the performance customization settings (normal setting, simple setting). The execution rate of the performance may be changed.

(Puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 198(b) is a diagram showing a puzzle holding chance performance pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a puzzle holding chance performance pattern (progress scenario).

The puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table is associated with the scheduled fluctuation pattern indicated by the look-ahead designation command, the selection rate (%) of each puzzle hold chance performance performance pattern, the number of holds, and the selected puzzle hold chance performance performance pattern. For reference, the advance variation in each performance pattern and the progress mode of the progress performance executed in the variation are described.

The performance patterns include performance pattern 0 in which the puzzle hold chance performance is not executed, and performance patterns 1 to 6 in which the puzzle hold chance performance is executed.

For example, in production pattern 6, four pending icons are displayed as puzzle pending icons, including the three pending icons that were already displayed when the game ball entered the starting slot and the newly displayed pending icon, and the puzzle progresses. The effect is started, and when the puzzle pending icon changes to the relevant icon before 3 changes, a puzzle piece appears from the relevant icon and an effect is performed to cover the background of the first image display device 70, covering 1/4 of the screen. 2, when the puzzle pending icon changes to the icon, a puzzle piece appears from the icon and covers the background of the first image display device 70, covering 1/2 of the screen. Before the change, when the puzzle pending icon changes to the icon, a puzzle piece appears from the icon and covers the background of the first image display device 70, covering 3/4 of the screen, and in the change, the puzzle piece appears. When the pending icon changes to the icon, a puzzle piece appears from the icon to cover the background of the first image display device 70, thereby covering 4/4 of the screen.

Here, the first feature of the puzzle suspension chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the selection rate of each effect pattern is varied according to the scheduled variation pattern. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern in which the puzzle hold chance performance is executed is better when the planned fluctuation pattern is SPSP reach or full rotation reach than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is SP reach. One point is that it is selected by a high percentage of respondents. Therefore, the performance effect of the puzzle hold chance performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The second feature of the puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the performance pattern in which the puzzle hold chance performance is executed is higher in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. One of the points is that it is selected based on the ratio. Therefore, the performance effect of the puzzle hold chance performance can be enhanced, and the interest of the game can be improved.

The third feature of the puzzle hold chance effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that, similar to the MAX hold chance effect, multiple hold icons are displayed with puzzle hold icons that are different from the normal display mode. , the reach effect is not executed with the variable effect corresponding to the preceding puzzle hold icon, but the reach effect is executed with the variable effect corresponding to the last puzzle hold icon. Therefore, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectations for the final puzzle pending icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the puzzle hold chance production pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that when the background of the first image display device 70 is covered and 4/4 of the screen is covered as a result of the progress production, One point is that the reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectations through the progress effect executed while the puzzle pending icon is displayed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the normal display mode and The rate at which the reach effect is executed during the variable effect corresponding to the specific pending icon (for example, the first one) before the last pending icon displayed in different display modes is different (MAX pending) Chance production has a higher point). Therefore, the timing at which the player feels anticipation can be made different between the MAX hold chance performance and the puzzle hold chance performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the puzzle hold chance performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the normal display mode and The difference is that the rate at which the reach effect is executed during the fluctuating effects corresponding to the last pending icon displayed in different display modes is different (higher for the puzzle pending chance effect). Therefore, the timing at which the player feels anticipation can be made different between the MAX hold chance performance and the puzzle hold chance performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the MAX hold chance effect is executed than when the puzzle hold chance effect is executed, the specific number before the last hold icon (which is displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode) For example, the rate at which the reach effect is executed is higher during the variation effect corresponding to the hold icon that is the first), but the chance effect for puzzle hold is higher than the change corresponding to the hold icon that is the specific position. You may make it so that the rate at which the reach performance is performed during the performance is increased.

In addition, depending on the player's performance customization settings, the execution rate of whether or not the puzzle pending chance performance is executed does not change, but depending on the performance customization settings (normal setting, simple setting), the puzzle pending chance performance The execution ratio of whether or not is executed may be changed.

(Example of effect when MAX hold chance effect is executed)
An example of a performance when the MAX hold chance performance is executed in the normal gaming state will be explained using FIG. 199.

First, as shown in FIG. 199(a), a variable display of a first special symbol (first variable effect) is being executed in production mode A (normal game state), and the first image display device 70 displays a variable display of a first special symbol. 70a and the special symbol TZ are being scrolled (downward movement). In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special figure reservation number display area 70E, "4" is displayed in the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and 7 is displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B. Two pending icons (white icons) are displayed, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting port 450, as shown in FIG. 199(b), the first special figure reservation number display area 70E becomes "4" and the total number of reservations reaches the upper limit "8". ”, the MAX hold chance effect starts. Specifically, a character is displayed near the icon display area 70C, and a character image saying "MAX Hold Chance" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 199(c), all eight hold icons are displayed. The card icon changes to show the card turned over.

Then, when the variable time has elapsed and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "728" as shown in FIG. 199(d), and the corresponding icon is displayed disappearing.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 199(e), the second special symbol pending number display area 70F becomes "3" and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are started, the pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

After that, when the character displayed in the vicinity of the icon display area 70C performs an action of turning over the card icon that is the icon, the icon is turned over and displayed as the character A card icon as shown in FIG. 199(f). A performance that suggests the level of expectation for the fluctuation performance is performed.

Then, when the game ball enters the second starting port 470, as shown in FIG. 199(g), the second special symbol reservation number display area 70E becomes "4", and the eighth display part of the reservation icon display area 70B A hold icon is additionally displayed, but since it is a hold icon that was displayed after the start of the MAX hold chance effect, it is displayed as a normal white icon.

Next, when the variable time has elapsed and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "872", as shown in FIG. 199(h), and the corresponding The icon will disappear. From then on, the effects shown in FIGS. 199(f) to (h) are performed until the variable effect corresponding to the hold icon displayed as a card icon ends, and finally the character is deleted and the MAX hold chance effect is performed. ends.

In this way, in the MAX hold chance performance, all eight hold icons are displayed as the same card hold icon, and when the icon becomes the same, the card is turned over, indicating the expectation of a jackpot. . Therefore, the player will have a sense of anticipation for each hold icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, the hold icon that is additionally displayed after the start of the MAX hold chance effect is displayed as a normal hold icon instead of a card hold icon. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to grasp the extent of the hold icon that is the object of the MAX hold chance performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Example of performance when puzzle hold chance performance is executed)
With reference to FIG. 200, an example of a performance when a puzzle hold chance performance is executed in a normal game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(a), the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed in the effect mode A (normal game state), and the first image display device 70 displays the effect symbol. 70a and the special symbol TZ are being scrolled (downward movement). In addition, "1" is displayed in each of the first special figure reservation number display area 70E and the second special figure reservation number display area 70F, and two reservation icons (white icons) are displayed in the reservation icon display area 70B. The icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting slot 450, as shown in FIG. Chance production begins. Specifically, a text image reading "Puzzle Hold Chance" is displayed, and all three hold icons change to puzzle icons shaped like puzzle pieces.

Then, when the variable time period has passed and the variable display of the second special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "728" as shown in FIG. 200(c), and the corresponding icon is displayed disappearing.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. 200(d), the first special symbol pending number display area 70E becomes "1" and the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are started, the puzzle pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon. In addition, a progress effect is started, a puzzle piece appears from the icon, and an effect is performed in which 1/2 of the screen is covered by covering the upper right and lower left of the background image of the first image display device 70. , the expectation that the final puzzle pending icon, which is the target of the preview, will be a jackpot is gradually suggested.

After that, when the variable time period passes and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "872", as shown in FIG. 200(e), and the corresponding icon is displayed disappearing.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is started, as shown in FIG. The variable display of the special symbols TZ is started, and the puzzle pending icons displayed in the pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon. In addition, the progress effect continues, and a puzzle piece appears from the icon, and an effect is performed in which 3/4 of the screen is covered by covering the lower right part of the background image of the first image display device 70, The level of expectation that the final puzzle pending icon, which is the target of the preview, will be a jackpot is gradually indicated.

After that, when the variable time period passes and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop display at the losing number "827" as shown in FIG. 200(g), and the corresponding icon is displayed disappearing. In addition, when a game ball enters the second starting port 470, the second special figure reservation number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reservation icon is additionally displayed on the second display part of the reservation icon display area 70B. Since this is a pending icon that was displayed after the start of the puzzle pending chance effect, it is displayed as a normal white icon.

Next, when the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) is started, the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is started, and the pending icon display area The last puzzle hold icon and the normal hold icon displayed in 70B are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C, and the last puzzle hold icon is displayed as the icon. In addition, the progress effect continues and a puzzle piece appears from the icon, and an effect is performed in which 4/4 of the screen is covered by covering the upper left part of the background image of the first image display device 70. The level of expectation that the target final puzzle pending icon will be a jackpot is gradually suggested.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of variation, the normal reach effect is started, and then the SPSP reach effect is executed, and when the variation time has elapsed and the variable display of the first special symbol ends, it is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon that was previously used as a puzzle icon will be deleted.

In this way, in the puzzle hold chance effect, all the plurality of hold icons are displayed as the same puzzle hold icon, and a progress effect is performed each time the icon is displayed. Therefore, the player will have a sense of anticipation for the last pending icon, which is the subject of the preview, and it will be possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the degree of expectation of a jackpot for the final puzzle pending icon, which is the target of the preview, is gradually suggested by the progress effect. Therefore, it is possible to gradually increase the player's expectations for the last pending icon, which is the subject of preview, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the puzzle hold chance performance, the puzzle pieces simply covered the screen, but we drew objects and text information on each piece that expected the execution of the SPSP reach performance, and the four pieces When the entire screen is covered, the object or character information suggesting the execution of the SPSP reach effect may be completed.

In addition, the puzzle hold chance effect suggested the degree of expectation (possibility) that the SPSP reach effect would be executed, but even if it was made to suggest the degree of expectation (possibility) that the SP reach effect would be executed. Alternatively, it may suggest the degree of expectation (possibility) that a chance performance that is not a reach performance will be executed, or it may simply indicate the degree of expectation (possibility) that a jackpot will occur.

In this embodiment, all three performance symbols 70a temporarily stop (shaking motion) after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance, but the left and right performance symbols 70a stop and the center performance stops. Only the symbol 70a may be temporarily stopped (swinging motion). At this time, all three performance symbols 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), or the left and right performance symbols 70a may not perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion), and only the center performance symbol 70a may perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion). ).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the decoration part are made to fluctuate (production movement). Only one of them may be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric part (identification character) does not perform a fluctuation motion (performance motion). The texture (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion), or the identification portion may be caused to perform a fluctuation motion (presentation motion) by adding a light emitting effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may be expanded/contracted. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the production pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) or in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). (large), it is recommended that it be displayed in the normal size at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a does not swing and the decorative part and number part protrude from the base image. It may also be made to fluctuate as shown in FIG. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), since the effect pattern 70a is composed of only a number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the movement (performance movement) is not performed, the performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It may also be made to perform a fluctuating motion (direction motion).

Further, in this embodiment, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, but the frame illumination device 76 is not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units 10 may be set in the same manner as during the temporary stop before the extension (emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation). , at least one of the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the board lighting device 76 is set in the same light emission mode as during temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation) mode, lights out). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 change (switch) to a light emission mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the production control unit transmits the start commands (special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. When 130m is received, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ continues, but even if the variable display is started after being instantaneously derived and displayed as in the production symbol 70a. good. In this case, regarding the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ that is shifted from the predetermined stopping position at the stopping position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation, but when the icon TI is stopped It only needs to be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI based on reception of a command, 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a start command is received while displaying a number of pending icons greater than the number of reserved special drawings, the excess pending icons HI are erased with one frame of non-animation. However, the number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI based on reception of the stop command, 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon, for example. The data may be erased after 5 frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special symbols becomes a predetermined number, the production control unit 130m stores the number of reserved special symbols and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m ( If there is an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality where the number is the same, an abnormality where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that was known (understood), one more than the predetermined number. After displaying a large number of pending icons, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed, but instead of displaying one more pending icon than the predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending icons are displayed as they are. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special symbols becomes a predetermined number, the production control unit 130m stores the number of reserved special symbols and the production control unit 130m notified from the main control unit 110m ( If there is an inconsistency due to a command abnormality (an abnormality where the number is the same, an abnormality where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of reserved special drawings that was known (understood), the reception of this starting command Although the icon is displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the start command, the icon may not be displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of the start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of performance mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of performance mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or game state.

In addition, when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon depending on the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (performance movement mode) during the variable production should be made different depending on the form of the normal icon. Good too. Furthermore, even when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon depending on the type of performance mode or game state, the operation mode (performance operation mode) during the variable performance can be changed depending on the form of the special icon. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but special icons that suggest a change to a special icon (displayed in the process of changing to a special icon) and specific A specific icon indicating that a reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) is to be executed may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to make the form and presentation operation of the special icon or specific icon different from the form and presentation operation of the normal icon or special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the hold icon is displayed when both the command for specifying the number of special drawings on hold and the pre-reading specifying command as commands at the time of winning are successfully received, but when the command for specifying the number of special drawings on hold is received. If the pre-reading designation command is not received successfully, a pending icon is displayed, while the pending icon is displayed if the pre-reading designation command is successfully received without receiving the special figure reservation number designation command. You may choose not to do so, or vice versa. In addition, when displaying a pending icon by receiving only one of the special figure pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the performance mode cannot be changed by operating the performance button 17 by the player, but the performance mode may be changed by operating the performance button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, no operation for changing the production mode is accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to restrict changes in the production mode based on the operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and An operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon in response to the effect button 17 being operated while the button icon is displayed. . In this case, in the operation change production, the production button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protrusion state in the production position) You can do it like this. In this case, the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change production is higher than the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the dialogue preview production or final production. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the effective suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but it may also be a effect button image that is not translucent but only an outline, or a effect button image that is only a silhouette. good.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a pre-reach preview performance (line preview performance, step-up preview performance) or a development performance is executed, a vibration performance of the performance button 17 (activation of the button vibration motor) can be executed. However, a movable frame member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action performance that moves the frame movable member may be performed when the vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed in the pre-reach preview performance or development performance. Instead of the vibration effect, an action effect that moves the frame movable member may be performed.

In addition, in this embodiment, it is possible to perform a vibration effect of the effect button 17 when performing a post-reach preview effect (pseudo continuous effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decisive effect, confirmed effect) or when the symbols are aligned. , a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when the symbols are aligned, an action effect may be executed in which the frame movable member is operated, or instead of the vibration effect. It may also be possible to perform an action effect that moves the frame movable member.

In addition, in this embodiment, while the SP reach effect or SPSP reach effect is being executed, the title is not displayed to indicate that the reach effect is being performed. The title may be displayed using either red text, which has a higher jackpot expectation than white text, or rainbow text, which guarantees a jackpot, etc. After the title is displayed in white text, it changes to red text or rainbow text. You may also do so.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cut-in performance was performed at the end of the SP reach performance, but it is made to be performed in the middle (first period) or the end (second period) of the SP reach performance. Even if the production button 17 is more likely to be in the protruding state (the proportion of the protruding state is higher) when the cut-in production is performed at the end of the SP reach production than when the cut-in production is performed in the middle. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, a valid period is generated in which the performance button 17 is held down for a long time in the development performance, but a validity period is generated in which the performance button 17 is held pressed as a jackpot preview performance other than the development performance. At the same time, it may be possible to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the long press period during the valid period. In this case, it is preferable to determine whether the long press continues at a plurality of determination timings during the validity period, and determine to which stage the performance should be advanced based on the determination result.

<Contents 1 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, judgment information obtained when acquisition conditions are met is stored as a reserved memory, and based on the judgment information, it is judged whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the judgment information is processed based on the judgment result. It is common to perform variable effects based on this. Some of these gaming machines display an increase or decrease in the number of pending images corresponding to each pending memory, or display an execution image corresponding to a pending memory in which a variable effect has been executed. There are some that allow players to grasp the progress of the game (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of reservations when the number of reservations changes.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game effect that controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information. The display of the first pending information is decreased (subtracted by 1) before the frame update timing at which the decreased display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update (update to the pending number) is completed is earlier. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and displays the second pending information on which the fluctuating effect has started. It is possible to display a change in the execution information (the icon), and the display of the change in the second pending information to the execution information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the corresponding frame update timing. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information. When the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and an increase in the second pending information. If the number increases, even before the frame update timing at which the reduction display of the second hold information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the hold icon display area) is completed, the first hold information Incremental display of information (updating to the pending number by adding 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decreasing display of the first pending information and displays the second pending information for which the variable display has started. It is possible to display a change in execution information (the icon), and when the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and to display an increase in the second pending information. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during the change display of the second pending information, the reduction display of the second pending information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. Even before the frame update timing becomes, the display of an increase in the first reservation information (updating to a reservation number incremented by 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means that can execute a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means is configured to display information at a predetermined frame update timing (1/1). The display image is updated every 30 ms), and the information display means is capable of displaying an increasing number of the first pending information and an increasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories increases. Yes, and if the number of pending memories increases during execution of the fluctuating performance, the increasing display of the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to a normal size) is completed. The frame update timing at which the increment display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame updating timing at which the first pending information is displayed. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not yet been performed as a reserved memory; The slave control means includes a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect on an image display means (image display device) according to the result of the determination, and first hold information (hold information) indicating the number of hold memories. information displaying means capable of displaying second holding information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, and the fluctuating effect executing means is configured to display a second hold information (holding icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the holding memories, and the fluctuating effect execution means It is possible to execute a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) that makes the execution of the special game expected, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means displays the first pending information. It is possible to display an increase in the number of pending memories and to display an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, an increased display of the first pending information (one added (updating to the pending number) is executed, but the increasing display of the second pending information is executed until a predetermined condition is met (the specific effect is completed, the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that was displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner) It is designed so that it will not happen. By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance is controlled based on signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a slave control means (production control board 130), the main control means controls judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entering of a game ball into a starting hole). ), a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game), and a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; A game state control means capable of controlling a normal game state and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and the slave control means controls an image of a variable performance according to the result of the determination. A variable performance execution means executable by a display means (image display device), first reservation information (reservation number) indicating the number of said reservation memories, and second reservation information (representing an identifier corresponding to each of said reservation memories). and information display means capable of displaying a hold icon), and when the number of hold memories increases, the information display means displays an increase in the first hold information and an increase in the second hold information. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port) as a first pending memory, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting port), and The judgment information based on (entering the game ball into the second starting port) is stored as a second pending memory, and when the number of the first pending memories increases in the specific gaming state, the first pending memory The increase display (update to the pending number added by 1) is executed, but the predetermined condition is satisfied for the increase display of the second pending information (the last variable performance in the specific gaming state is completed, and the normal gaming state is returned) It will not be executed until By doing this, it becomes easier to understand the number of reservations.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
Conventional gaming machines are generally capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and executing the special game according to the result of the determination. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the power supply started, or restored it to the state before the power supply stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that it is difficult to determine whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 73, member 74, production button 17), and initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control capable of performing an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing an effect operation (presentation operation, effect emission) of the movable effect means during the execution of the game. means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means controls the operation mode of the initial operation (operation) when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. mode, light emission mode, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, an operating means (effect button 17) that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, and a power source are provided. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the stop of power supply, and the operation means after the start of power supply. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission and effect light emission of the operation means during execution of the game, and the performance control means is configured to initialize the control state of the game. The light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission is made different depending on the case where the control state of the game is restored and the case where the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply, and performing the effect operation and effect light emission of the movable effect means during the execution of the game; ), and the performance control means is configured to control the initial operation mode (number of steps and Although the operation mode, etc. of each step is the same, the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable presentation means is made different. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, a movable effect means (first movable member 73 , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before power supply was stopped. , effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of performing initial light emission of the movable effect means after the start of power supply and effect light emission of the movable effect means during execution of a game, The performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means is configured to control the performance when the control state of the game is initialized. and when the control state of the game is restored, at least a part of the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the first movable effect means is the same, but the light emission mode of the initial light emission in the second movable effect means are designed to differ. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a variable display of a plurality of effect symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by the performance; each of the plurality of performance patterns includes identification characters (numbers, alphabets, etc.) that enable each to be identified; When the control state of the game is initialized, the control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of performance symbols displayed on the display means to a first combination (for example, "135"), and adjusts the control state of the game. is restored, the identification characters in the plurality of effect patterns displayed on the display means are set to a second combination (for example, "753"). Therefore, it becomes possible to easily understand whether the gaming control state has been initialized or whether the gaming control state has been restored.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 3>
Conventional gaming machines generally initialize the control state of the game after power supply starts, or restore it to the state before power supply was stopped. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that caused the movable performance means to perform an initial operation after the start of power supply (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the movable performance means may not be able to perform a suitable initial operation.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), and the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) in which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, the initial operation is performed after the movable presentation means returns to the first position. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the effect control means is such that the movable effect means is in the second position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) in which the control state of the game is restored. In this case, an operation is performed to return the movable presentation means to the first position, and when the movable presentation means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable presentation means does not return to the first position, The above-mentioned initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the first movable presentation means is Instead, the initial operation of the second movable effect means is performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect element is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored. If the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, perform the initial operation of the second movable presentation means. It is designed not to do this. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means includes a first movable effect means (first movable member 73) and a second movable effect means (second movable member 74), The effect control means is configured such that the first movable effect means is in the second position and the second movable effect means is in the first position at the time of start of power supply (power-on) at which the control state of the game is initialized. position, the first movable presentation means performs a return operation to the first position, and when the first movable presentation means does not return to the first position, the first movable presentation means initializes. The initial operation of the second movable presentation means is performed without performing the above. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, there are a first position (origin position) and a second position (position near the center of the first image display device 70). The movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply, and a performance capable of performing the performance operation of the movable performance means during execution of a game. A control means (effect control board 130), the movable effect means has a first movable effect means (first movable member 73), a second position of the first movable effect means, and a second position of itself. and a second movable presentation means (second movable member 74) which has an overlapping portion, and the presentation control means is configured to perform the above-mentioned operation at the time of start of power supply (power-on) to initialize the control state of the game. When the first movable presentation means is at the second position and the second movable presentation means is at the first position, the first movable presentation means is returned to the first position, and If the presentation means does not return to the first position, the initial operation of the second movable presentation means is not performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to perform a suitable initial operation for the movable presentation means.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 4>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and the interest in the game decreases. The problem was that it could happen.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when acquisition conditions are satisfied, A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after starting power supply, or stopping power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring to the previous state, and a fluctuation accompanied by a fluctuating display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a performance is provided, and in the fluctuating performance, the performance symbol being displayed in a fluctuating manner is oscillatedly displayed (temporarily stopped display) and then statically displayed ( When the power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating performance in which the performance symbols are oscillatedly displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means performs a predetermined display. At the timing of (when receiving a special figure stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command), the effect pattern can be displayed statically on the display means without being oscillatedly displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information); An initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of displayed performance symbols; The effect control means includes a reach variation effect that executes a reach effect by forming a formation display, and the effect control means controls the control means at a predetermined timing ( When the special pattern stop designation command is received, when the customer wait command is received), it is possible to display on the display means in a static state a combination of the performance symbols that is different from the reach combination according to the production symbols that formed and displayed the reach state. There is. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 5>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there were gaming machines that initialized the control state of the game after the power supply started, or restored it to the state before the power supply stopped (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-189604 (see publication). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, are a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state, and the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. and the mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped in the customer waiting state is restarted and the power supply is restored to the customer waiting state, and the power supply stops in the first state or the second state. The display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different when the power supply is restarted and the first state or the second state is restored. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 6>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting effect on a display unit when a player is not playing a game (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the customer waiting effect is not executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. Initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing or restoring to the state before the power supply was stopped, and display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the displayed performance design; When a predetermined period of time has elapsed, it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and the case where the performance pattern is displayed statically after the elapse of the variable time of the variable performance, and the case where the control state It is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is executed different depending on the case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the initialization or after the recovery of the control state. Therefore, the customer waiting effect can be executed at an appropriate time depending on the state of the gaming machine, and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

<Contents 7 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information on a display means corresponding to determination information on whether a variable performance is being executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2018-064835). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a possibility that the interest in the game will decrease. There was a problem that there was.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the information), and a determining means (main control board 110) that can determine the control state of the game after starting power supply. An initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing or restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped, and an effect displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of symbols, and when the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means displays the performance on the display means. It is possible to perform a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying a symbol, and to display the determination information during execution of the variable effect in a predetermined display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. It is possible to display the corresponding execution information (the relevant icon), and if the power supply that was stopped while the execution information was displayed is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the next Until the variable display starts, the predetermined display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which an effect image such as a background image can be displayed), but the execution information is not stored in the predetermined display area. It is not displayed. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the variable performance that was being executed at the time the power supply stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 8>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a look-ahead preview performance that spans multiple fluctuating performances based on the preliminary determination result of the determination information (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-143904 reference). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem that the interest in the game may be reduced when the power supply that has been stopped during the pre-read preview performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored. there were.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to execute a predetermined pre-reading notice performance (continuous notice performance) over a period of time, and if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the above-mentioned pre-reading notice performance It is possible to execute a preview performance (for example, an alternative preview performance) different from the pre-read preview performance in the variable performance that is executed next to the fluctuating performance in which the power supply is stopped without restarting the power supply. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the player caused by the termination of the continuous notice performance due to the stoppage of power supply, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 9>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that executed a specific performance that gradually indicated the degree of expectation that the special game would be executed over multiple variable performances (for example, -Refer to Publication No. 143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that when the power supply that was stopped during a specific performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the interest in the game may decrease. Ta.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display; It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) suggested by Although the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance that is executed next to the stopped variable performance, it is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to execute an icon change performance that matches the content of the current variation performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 10 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific performance that gradually changes the display mode of identification information that is displayed corresponding to each piece of judgment information for which execution of the variable performance has not been completed. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply that was stopped during a change performance is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted is high. There was a possibility that something would happen.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determination by the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display; It is possible to display identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each piece of the judgment information that has not been started, and the special game can be executed by changing the display mode of the identification information in stages. It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that suggests the level of expectation for icon) and a third stage mode (red icon), and the power supply that was stopped during the display of the identification information in the second stage mode that changes up to the third stage mode is restarted and the gaming control state is restored, the identification information that was displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, the user does not need to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is restarted.

<Contents 11 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that displayed the number of pending memories, which is determination information that has not yet been determined, in a display area (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-061728). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of suspended memories, which reduces the interest in the game. There was a problem that there was a possibility that the

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a determination by the determination means. A performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the result, and the control state of the game is controlled. In the case of restoration, it is possible to perform a specific display (display of the initial screen, etc.) before displaying the effect design on the display means, and the first display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second A hold display indicating the number of hold memories is displayed in each of a hold indicator 84) and a second display area different from the first display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D). If the power supply that was stopped while the suspended memory exists is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the suspended display may be executed in the second display area while the specific display is being executed. However, the suspended display can be executed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the number of pending memories can be grasped before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing. It becomes possible.

<Contents 12 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the acquired determination information, and the performance symbols displayed on the display means are changed depending on the result of the determination. Gaming machines that can perform performances are common. Among these gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a performance that suggests the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-143904). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, when the power supply is restarted and the control state of the game is restored after being stopped during a performance that indicates the degree of expectation that a special game will be executed, the interest in the game is lost. There was a problem that there was a possibility of a decline.

◆As a first configuration to solve the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, judgment information (special figure judgment It is possible to determine whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) and the determination information. A determining means (main control board 110), a preliminary determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining the determination information before the determining means, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or an initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; The performance control means includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display, and a light emitting means (winning hole lamp NR) that can be changed to any of a plurality of notification modes, The means is capable of executing a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode, and during execution of the change effect. When the power supply that has been stopped is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is set to a notification mode (white lighting or extinguishment) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, while reducing the control load after the power supply is resumed, it is possible to avoid a situation where the player is confused, such as when the lamp change effect is restarted even though the variable effect has not been executed. It becomes possible to suppress a decline in interest.

<Contents 13 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines are equipped with a main control means that can control the progress of the game, and a performance control means that can control performances according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. is common. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a movable performance means that can operate in a predetermined manner (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate from each other.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. is possible, and a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command etc.), it is possible to carry out said initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which no game is in progress, and during the execution of the customer waiting effect, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to execute a variable effect for informing the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and during execution of the variable effect, the main control means When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means are provided. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and the production control means executes an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable production means and a production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means. It is possible to perform a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to perform special game performances (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance), and If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during execution, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling , a second movable member 74), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. , the effect control means is capable of executing an initial operation and an initial light emission of the movable effect means, and is also capable of executing a effect operation and an effect light emission of the movable effect means. , The operation mode of the initial operation of the movable presentation means (operation mode such as the number of steps and the movement of each step) is the same when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored. However, by changing the light emission mode (emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable effect means, a control state (customer waiting state, variable effect, jackpot If a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the presentation), it is possible to execute the initial operation of the movable performance means. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the acquisition condition (game ball winning in the starting hole). ), a determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply. or initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of restoring the state to the state before the power supply was stopped; (initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and production operation of the movable production means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and the judgment of the judgment means Depending on the result, it is possible to execute a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and in the fluctuating performance, the fluctuating performance symbol is shaken. It is possible to perform a static display (stop display) after a dynamic display (temporary stop display), and the production control means is capable of restarting power supply that was stopped during execution of the fluctuating production in which the production symbols are displayed in a oscillating manner. When the control state of the game is restored, the performance symbols may be statically displayed on the display means without being oscillated and displayed at a predetermined timing (when receiving a special symbol stop designation command, when receiving a customer waiting command). A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to perform a performance according to the signal. ), it is possible to carry out said initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the The states include a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating performance is not executed, a first state that is an execution period of the fluctuating performance without the pending memory, and an execution period of the fluctuating performance in a state with the pending memory. and a second state in which the performance control means performs a specific display (displaying an initial screen, etc.) before displaying the performance symbols on the display means when the control state of the game is restored. is possible, and the display mode of the specific display (display of the initial screen only) when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is restarted and the customer waiting state is restored, and the first state or the first state When the power supply that was stopped during the second state is resumed and the first state or the second state is restored, the display mode of the specific display (initial screen + display of the returning screen) is made different, and according to the signal. If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which the performance can be executed, the initial It is possible to perform the actuation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance symbols displayed on the display means (image display device), and the display means When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after statically displaying the performance design, it is possible to perform a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demonstration performance) on the display means, and after the variable time of the variable performance has elapsed, the performance design can be displayed. The period until the customer waiting performance is executed can be made different between when the performance pattern is statically displayed and when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored; A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance can be executed in accordance with the signal. In this case, it is possible to carry out the initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command etc.) from the main control means In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of the performance design displayed on the display means (image display device), and the above-mentioned advance Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a predetermined prefetched preview performance (continuous preview performance) over a plurality of the variable performances, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the prefetched preview performance is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, the prefetched preview performance is not restarted, and a different preview performance from the prefetched preview performance (for example, When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command , power restoration designation command, etc.), the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can control the performance, a performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner (operation, light emission, sound output, image display). , second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and determination information (special figure determination a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information) as a pending memory; and a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) based on the determination information. a main control board 110), and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped; The control means controls the initial operation of the effect means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the effect operation of the effect means (effect operation, effect light emission, effect sound output, effect image display). According to the judgment result of the judgment means, it is possible to execute a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern displayed on the display means (image display device), It is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an icon change effect) that gradually indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed over the variable effect, and the power supply that was stopped during execution of the specific effect is restarted. When the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to execute the specific performance in the variable performance that is executed next to the variable performance for which the power supply has stopped, but the specific performance has been suggested before the power supply was stopped. A predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, When a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received, the initial operation can be performed. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means. In a gaming machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling (Operation, light emission, sound output, image display) Possible production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) and fulfillment of acquisition conditions A storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing the judgment information (special figure judgment information) obtained by (entering the game ball into the starting hole) as a reserved memory, and A determining means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute an advantageous special game (jackpot game), and initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or before the power supply is stopped. initial processing means (main control board 110) for restoring to the state of It is possible to execute the production operation of the means (production operation, production light emission, production sound output, production image display), and it is expected that the special game will be executed by changing the light emission means to a specific notification mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of change, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is restarted and the control state of the game is restored, the light emitting means is The main control is performed during a control state (customer waiting state, fluctuating performance, jackpot performance) in which it is possible to control a notification mode (white lighting or turning off) different from a specific notification mode and execute a performance according to the signal. When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the means, it is possible to execute the initial operation. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the gap between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) from the sound output device, and If a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which the performance can be executed (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance), the predetermined signal It is possible to output notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound indicating the start of power supply, such as a power-on notification sound, a power restoration notification sound, etc., when the game is in progress. It is possible to execute a customer waiting effect in a standby state (a customer waiting state) where there is no customer waiting, and a predetermined signal (a power-on designation command, a power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means while the customer waiting performance is being executed. In this case, it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance to notify whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game), and during execution of the fluctuating performance, a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration command, etc.) is sent from the main control means. When a specified command, etc.) is received, the predetermined notification sound can be output. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means In a game machine equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the game, a sound output means (sound output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.) The performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) while a special game (jackpot game) is being executed, and a predetermined signal is sent from the main control means during execution of the special game performance. When receiving a command (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), it is possible to output the predetermined notification sound. Therefore, it becomes possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

<Contents 14 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine equipped with a display means capable of displaying an effect image (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-187648). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the performance control means continues.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and an effect according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. The gaming machine is equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance, and is equipped with display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of displaying performance images (variable performance, jackpot performance, etc.). , the performance control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a static display screen of performance symbols) on the display means in a standby state (a customer waiting state) in which a game is not in progress; If the power supply to the main control means is stopped during display, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player is not made to feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

<Contents 15 of the invention described in this embodiment>
Conventional gaming machines are generally equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are those that execute an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-113441). However, in the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document, there is a possibility that an abnormality notification may not be properly performed.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on input signals from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality alarm (wire breakage alarm, magnetic wire breakage alarm, etc.) is provided. abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.). Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, wire breakage, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (wire disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification) is issued. , radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and if the control means and the detection means are in a connected state during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, for a predetermined period (30 seconds elapsed, until the power is turned off, etc.) The execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) will be issued. notification, etc.) was made possible. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can play games, detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or production control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means. If the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector disconnected, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification) will be issued. If the control means and the detection means are in a connected state while the predetermined abnormality notification is being executed, the predetermined alarm will continue for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds elapse, until the power is turned off, etc.). Continue to perform abnormality notification. Therefore, it becomes possible to appropriately notify the abnormality.

<Contents 16 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the winning of the game medium in the starting area, and the game performance is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Some of these gaming machines were equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means for controlling the performance according to commands (signals) from the main control means (for example, , see Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2017-143904). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means deviate from each other.

◆The first configuration for solving the above problems includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. The first pending information (first pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) in response to an increase in the first pending memory, and the first pending information (first pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) as the first pending memory decreases. Each of the pending information can be reduced by shifting display, and when the plurality of presentation symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating presentation, the first pending information is subjected to a presentation operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.). It is possible that the first suspension information indicates that the plurality of performance symbols that are performing a performance operation are temporarily stopped, and a specific number (for example, three) that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one). During the display of the first reservation information, when the first reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) in which the first reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; , without starting the fluctuation effect and shifting displaying the first pending information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of first pending information, The first hold information (at least the first hold icon from the icon display area) corresponding to the predetermined number is displayed in a shifted manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls effects according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in front of a background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first pending information (first pending icon) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and When a plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and it is possible to temporarily stop the plurality of performance symbols for which the background image is performing a performance operation. start of the fluctuating display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, one); When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first After displaying the hold information, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first hold information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. A first pending number indicating the number of the first pending memories can be displayed in the first display area (sub-first pending display 83), and a first pending number corresponding to each of the first pending memories can be displayed. 1 hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in a second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating effect, the effect symbols It is possible to make a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) making a presentation movement (fluctuation movement, etc.), and the predetermined element is temporarily stopping the plurality of presentation patterns in which the predetermined element is performing a presentation movement. a signal at the start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one); (Pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command), the execution of the fluctuation effect is started, and the first reservation, which is one less than the specific number, is received in the first display area. Displaying the predetermined number of the first reserved number (for example, one) without displaying a number (for example, two), and displaying a number one less than the specific number (for example, two) in the second display area. The present invention is characterized in that after the first suspension information is displayed, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first suspension information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. It is possible to display first reservation information (first reservation icon) corresponding to each of the first reservation memories in the display area (image display device 70), and in the variable performance, the plurality of performance symbols are displayed. It is possible to cause the first hold information to perform a performance operation (fluctuation, rotation, etc.) while temporarily stopping, and during the temporary stop of the plurality of performance symbols for which the first hold information is performing a performance operation. and while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first hold information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one), at the start of the variable display when the first hold memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first reservation is performed in a number one (for example, three) less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information is displayed without displaying any information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. In the normal gaming state, the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in front of a background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information. It is possible to display the first pending information (first pending icon) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and When a plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and it is possible to temporarily stop the plurality of performance symbols for which the background image is performing a performance operation. start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one); When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation performance is started, and the first Displaying the first pending information in a number two (for example, two) less than the specific number without displaying any pending information, and then displaying the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information. . Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. Preferably, the performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. A first pending number indicating the number of the first pending memories can be displayed in the first display area (sub-first pending display 83), and a first pending number corresponding to each of the first pending memories can be displayed. 1 hold information (first hold icon) can be displayed in a second display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of effect symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating effect, the effect symbols It is possible to make a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) making a presentation movement (fluctuation movement, etc.), and the predetermined element is temporarily stopping the plurality of presentation patterns in which the predetermined element is performing a presentation movement. a signal at the start of the variable display in which the first pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, four) of the first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one); (Pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the fluctuation effect is started, and the first storage number (which is two less than the specific number) in the first display area is received. The predetermined number of the first memory numbers (for example, one) are displayed without displaying the first memory number (for example, two), and the first memory number (for example, three) that is one less than the specific number is displayed in the second display area. Displaying the first pending information in a number two (for example, two) less than the specific number without displaying one pending information, and then displaying the predetermined number (for example, one) of the first pending information. do. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein the performance control means performs a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the first determination information in the normal gaming state. When the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the fluctuating performance, predetermined elements (the tactile image of the character, the pattern effect image) constituting the performance symbol are subjected to a performance motion (fluctuation motion). etc.), and based on the determination result of the first determination information when the predetermined element is in the performance operation in the variable performance and the temporarily stopped performance symbol is deviated from the stop position. When a signal at the start of the fluctuating display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the production symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuating production, and then Display fluctuations. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eighth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) as the second pending memory increases, and the second pending information is displayed as the second pending memory decreases. can be shifted and displayed to decrease by one, and while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the second hold information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the second hold information is displayed in the second hold memory. When a signal at the start of the fluctuating display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuating display is started, and the second display of the specific number is received. Without shifting and displaying the second hold information (the third hold icon from the icon display area side) that corresponds to the specific number of hold information, the second hold information (the icon display that corresponds to the predetermined number) Shift-display the first and second hold icons from the area side. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to the signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a number (for example, three) of the second reservation information, a signal at the start of the fluctuation display when the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number (reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern When a specified command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and after displaying the second pending information one less than the specific number (for example, two), the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second pending information is displayed. Display the second pending information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A tenth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to signals (commands) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage memories in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage storages, and a second storage number corresponding to each of the second storage storages. 2 pending information (second pending icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (for example, three) of the above information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) During the display of the second reservation information, when the second reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; The variable performance is started, and the second memory number (for example, one) is the predetermined number without displaying the second memory number (for example, two) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area. , display a number (for example, two) of the second reservation information that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, and then display the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information. indicate. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆An eleventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second pending information, the second pending memory becomes the predetermined number. If a figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the predetermined number (for example, one ) is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. The second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and the second pending information (second pending icon) corresponding to each of the second pending memories can be displayed in the display area (image display device 70). During the display of a specific number (for example, four) of the second pending information, the second pending memory becomes the predetermined number. If a figure fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the fluctuation effect is started, and the second hold information is one less than the specific number (for example, three) without displaying the second pending information, and the number is two than the specific number. A small number (for example, two) of the second reservation information is displayed, and then a predetermined number (for example, one) of the second reservation information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and an effect control that controls the effect according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination means; A storage means for storing the second judgment information of execution as a second pending memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. The performance control means is capable of executing a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance symbols 70a) in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific gaming state. It is possible to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage memories in the first display area (sub-second storage display 84), and to display a second storage number indicating the number of the second storage storages, and a second storage number corresponding to each of the second storage storages. 2 hold information (second hold icon) can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70), and a specific number (for example, four) of the During the display of the second reservation information, when the second reservation memory receives a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (a reservation number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command), the second reservation memory becomes the predetermined number; The variable effect is started, and the second memory number (for example, one) is the predetermined number without displaying the second memory number (for example, two) that is two fewer than the specific number in the first display area. is displayed, and the second pending information that is one less than the specific number (for example, three) is displayed in the second display area, and the second pending information that is two less than the specific number (for example, two) is displayed. The second hold information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one) of the second hold information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control that controls the performance according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with means (performance control board 130), the main control means first judgment information (special figure judgment information) acquired by the establishment of the first starting condition (ball entering the first starting opening). or a determining means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on second determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the second starting condition is met (ball entering the second starting hole); , a variable display means that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and controls between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, wherein the performance control means executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols in the specific gaming state so as to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information. When the performance symbol temporarily stopped in the fluctuation performance is shifted from the stop position, a signal at the start of the fluctuation display based on the determination result of the second determination information (pending number designation command, When a special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation performance, and then the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. The production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display based on the determination result of the determination information, In accordance with the increase in the pending memory, additional pending information (pending icon) is displayed in the display area (image display device 70), and in accordance with the decrease in the pending memory, the pending information is shifted and displayed, and one of the pending information is displayed as execution information. (the icon), and while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one), the pending memory becomes the predetermined number. When a signal at the start of the fluctuation display (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special pattern fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased and the fluctuation display is started, and the specified number of the suspension Without shifting and displaying the pending information (the third pending icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of information, the required amount of the pending information (the first to second pending icons from the icon display area side) (hold icons) are shifted and displayed, and one of them is displayed as the execution information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls a performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a storage means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means It is possible to display the pending information (pending icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the pending information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), During the display of a specific number (for example, 3) of the pending information that is two more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command , special figure variation pattern designation command), erases the execution information, starts the variation effect, and displays the pending information of the number one (for example, two) less than the specific number. The predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls a performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. storage means for indicating the number of pending memories, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display, and a storage unit that indicates the number of pending memories. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F). Displaying the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories in a second display area (holding icon display area), and displaying the holding information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon) and the start of the fluctuating display in which the pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (for example, three) of the pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (eg, one). When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation performance is started, and the specific number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of pending numbers (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the pending number (for example, 2) that is one less than the specific number, and a number that is one less than the specific number (for example, 1) is displayed in the second display area. After the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a memory means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the performance control means It is possible to display the hold information (hold icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and display the hold information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), While displaying a specific number (for example, 4) of the pending information that is 3 more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command) , special figure variation pattern designation command), erase the execution information, start the variation production, and display the pending information of the number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, the predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether or not to execute; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. and a memory means for performing a variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a) corresponding to the variable display, and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the effect control means is capable of executing a variable effect (such as a variable display of the effect pattern 70a), and the performance control means It is possible to display the hold information (hold icon) in the display area (image display device 70), and display the hold information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon), While displaying a specific number (for example, 4) of the pending information that is 3 more than 1), a signal at the start of the fluctuating display when the pending memory becomes the predetermined number (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command) , special figure variation pattern designation command), erase the execution information, start the variation production, and display the pending information of the number one less than the specific number (for example, three). Instead, two fewer (for example, two) pieces of the hold information than the specific number are displayed, and then the predetermined number (for example, one piece) of the hold information and the execution information are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆A twentieth configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that controls the performance according to a signal from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a control board 130), the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determining means for determining whether to execute or not; a variable display means for performing a variable display of a symbol (special symbol) based on the determination result of the determining means; and storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a pending memory. storage means for indicating the number of pending memories, and the production control means is capable of executing a variable production (such as a variable display of the production pattern 70a) to correspond to the variable display, and a storage unit that indicates the number of pending memories. It is possible to display the number in the first display area (sub-first reservation display 83, sub-second reservation display 84, first special figure reservation number display area 70E, second special figure reservation number display area 70F). Displaying the pending information (holding icon) corresponding to each of the holding memories in a second display area (holding icon display area), and displaying the holding information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon) and the start of the fluctuating display in which the pending memory becomes the predetermined number while displaying a specific number (eg, 4) of the pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (eg, 1). When a time signal (pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the execution information is erased, the fluctuation performance is started, and the specific number is displayed in the first display area. The predetermined number of pending numbers (for example, 1) is displayed without displaying the pending number (for example, 2) that is two fewer than the specified number, and the second display area displays a number that is one less than the specific number (for example, 1). 3) of the pending information is displayed, and then the predetermined number (eg, 1) of the pending information and the Display execution information. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a production control that controls production according to a signal (command) from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means executes a special game (jackpot) based on determination information (special figure determination information) acquired upon establishment of a starting condition (ball entering the starting hole). a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a game); and a fluctuation display means for performing a fluctuation display of symbols (special symbols) based on the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to It is possible to execute a fluctuating performance accompanied by a fluctuating display of performance symbols in accordance with the display, and the fluctuating display can be started when the temporarily stopped performance symbol in the fluctuating performance is deviated from the stop position. When a time signal (retention number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol fluctuation pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbols are displayed at the stop position with the start of the fluctuation performance, and then are displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the effect control means.

<Contents 17 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine determines whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and executes a game performance according to the result of the determination. is common. Among such gaming machines, there is also known a game machine that executes a performance using a predetermined performance device (performance button, movable member, etc.) (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816). However, the gaming machine described in the above-mentioned patent document has a problem in that the game is not very interesting.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a first performance (pre-reach performance). The vibration performance includes a specific game performance (reach variation performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed later, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (during a line preview performance, a step-up preview performance, and a pseudo continuous performance). , a 1-second vibration performance such as during a development performance), and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (a vibration performance of 3 seconds or more during a cut-in performance, a successful decision performance, a confirmed performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.) In the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is easier to execute during the first performance than during the second performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, once or twice). The vibration performance includes a specific game performance (reach variation performance) in which a specific performance (reach performance) that makes people expect to execute the special game is executed after a predetermined performance (pseudo continuous performance) is executed, and the vibration performance includes a first A vibration performance (a 1-second vibration performance during a dialogue preview performance, a step-up preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (when a cut-in performance is performed, (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more at the time of a successful decision performance, at the time of a confirmed performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.), and in the specific game performance, the first vibration performance is performed more than when the first vibration performance is not performed. In this case, the second vibration effect is more easily executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), and the performance control means includes a suggestive performance (a look-ahead effect performance, a look-ahead motion performance) that suggests that the special game may be executed during the execution of the game performance; It is possible to perform a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means (a pre-reading vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.), and the vibration effect includes a vibration effect in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. A first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed with the above operation promotion display, and a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, etc.) that is performed without the operation promotion display, During a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a ends), the second vibration performance is more effective than the case where the suggestion performance is performed. The level of expectation that the special game will be executed is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the information, a normal gaming state, and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. a game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance that variably displays a plurality of types of performance symbols according to the determination result of the determination unit. ), the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the variable performance, and the fluctuating performance includes a first type of performance pattern (an even number pattern). A first specific variation performance in which a reach effect is executed, a second specific variation effect in which a reach effect is executed by a second type of effect pattern (an odd numbered pattern other than "7"), and a third type of effect pattern ("7"). 7'' pattern), in which a reach effect is performed, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (at the time of a dialogue preview performance, during a step-up preview performance, during a pseudo-continuous performance, and during a development performance). 1 second vibration performance such as) and a second vibration performance different from the first vibration performance (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more such as during cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance, etc.), In the normal gaming state, the first specific variation performance is more likely to be executed than the second specific variation effect, the third specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect, and the first specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect. The second vibration effect is easier to execute when the third specific variation effect is executed than when it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display, and the operation promotion display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (display sound effect of an operation promotion image) corresponding to the operation of the operating means is included. , effect sounds corresponding to the operation of the effect buttons, and sound effects of the operation of the accessories), while the predetermined effect sounds are not output when the second vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the game performance includes a specific performance that makes the user expect to execute the special game. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance) that is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display. (cut-in effect, decision success effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display, and when the first vibration effect is executed, the operation means While a predetermined effect image (operation promotion image, effect image corresponding to the operation of the effect button) related to the operation of is displayed, when the second vibration effect is executed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed. , in the specific game performance (jackpot reach variation performance) in which the special game is executed, the number of times the second vibration performance is executed (maximum 3 times) before the start of the specific performance is greater than the number of times the second vibration performance is performed (up to 3 times) before the start of the specific performance. The number of times the second vibration effect is executed (maximum 7 times) is likely to increase. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes: It is possible to perform a vibration effect (a pre-reading vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means during the execution of the game effect, and during the operation of the second operating means. When the vibration effect is executed, vibrations related to the vibration effect are transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, a gaming frame (a frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided. The frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance during execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a suggestion performance (jackpot notice performance) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and an operation performance (vibration performance) that activates (moves, vibrates) the frame performance section while the suggestion performance is being executed. , action presentation, etc.), and the suggestion presentation includes a first suggestion presentation (weak notice, pre-reach notice presentation) and a second suggestion presentation (strong When the second suggestion effect is executed, the operation effect is more likely to be executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, and the first suggestion effect is easier to execute than when the first suggestion effect is executed. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation effect is executed during execution of the first suggestion effect than when the operation effect is not executed during execution of the effect. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), A vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (when a line preview is displayed, a cut-in effect) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. a second vibration performance (a vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the second vibration performance is executed is different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), and the performance control means is capable of controlling a first performance mode (performance modes A to C) and a second performance mode (performance modes D to G), A vibration effect that vibrates the operating means can be executed, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (when a line preview is displayed, a cut-in effect) that is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. a second vibration performance (a vibration performance such as a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed without the operation promotion display; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the first vibration performance is executed is different between the performance mode and the second performance mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, a gaming frame (a frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4) is provided. The frame production unit (production button 17 (button vibration motor), production lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to control the performance during execution of the game performance. , execute a change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) that changes the frame effect part from a first state (standby state, extinguished state) to a second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state). It is possible, and the variable performance includes a specific game performance (reach variable performance) in which a second performance (post-reach performance) is executed after the first performance (pre-reach performance), and the execution of the first performance The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed during the game, and the specific game effect (jackpot) in which the special game is executed is higher. In the reach variation effect), the change effect is executed during execution of the second effect regardless of whether or not the change effect is executed during execution of the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes an operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. The first vibration performance (one of the vibration performances such as a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, etc.) is performed in accordance with the operation promotion display, and a first vibration performance is performed without accompanying the operation promotion display. The first vibration performance includes a second vibration performance (one of the vibration performances at the time of step-up notice performance, when the symbols are aligned, and when the C symbols are aligned), and the first vibration performance has a different degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. Multiple vibration modes (weak vibration or strong vibration for 1 second for vibration performances during dialogue previews, pseudo continuous performances, or advanced performances, weak vibrations or strong vibrations for 3 seconds for vibration performances during cut-in performances) The second vibration performance is performed in one of the predetermined vibration modes (vibration during step-up notice performance) when performing a predetermined performance (step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment). A vibration performance is performed with a weak vibration for 1 second, a vibration performance when the symbols are aligned, a strong vibration for 4 seconds, and a strong vibration for 1 second when the C symbols are aligned. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (production button 17, production lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, a normal game state, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A game state control means (main control board 110) that controls the gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. , the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes a predetermined vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up notice). The predetermined vibration performance includes a vibration performance for 1 second (at the time of performance, etc.) and a specific vibration performance different from the predetermined vibration performance (vibration performance for 3 seconds or more at the time of a successful decision performance, when the symbols are aligned, etc.). , a first vibration performance (vibration performance during dialogue preview performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation promotion display, and a second vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that is performed without the operation promotion display. In the game performance in which the special game is performed, the first vibration performance is executed, and the second vibration performance is The rate at which the specific vibration effect is subsequently executed differs depending on when it is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the normal gaming state than during the specific gaming state. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and performance control that executes a variable performance that displays a plurality of types of performance symbols in a variable manner according to the determination result of the determination means. means (performance control board 130), the performance control means, during execution of the variable performance, a special performance (successful performance, confirmed performance, etc.) that suggests execution of the special game, and the operation means. A vibration performance that vibrates in one of several vibration modes (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, successful decision performance, confirmed performance) When the special game is executed, the type of the performance symbol that suggests the execution of the special game ( The execution mode of the vibration performance (execution or nonexecution, execution timing, etc.) differs depending on the even number design, odd number design other than "7", and "7" design, and the vibration performance is performed in conjunction with the execution of the special performance. In this case, the vibration mode of the vibration performance is the same regardless of the type of performance symbol that suggests execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the operation means includes a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means includes: It is possible to perform a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.) that vibrates the first operating means during execution of the game performance, and the vibration performance includes an operation promotion display. A first vibration performance (vibration performance such as a dialogue preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means in the middle, and a vibration performance that is executed without the operation promotion display. The first vibration performance includes a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a vibration performance at the time of a step-up notice performance, etc.), and the first vibration performance has a vibration start timing that differs depending on the operation timing of the first operating means. In the two-vibration effect, the start timing of the vibration is predetermined, and when the vibration effect is executed during operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the game via the second operating means. The information is now communicated to the public. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means, and the effective period of the operating means includes a first effective period (a line preview effect, a pseudo continuous effect, a development effect). during the second validity period (validity period related to performance, cut-in performance, fixed performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second validity period (validity period while waiting for customers) different from the first validity period. The vibration effect is more easily executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period than when the operating means is operated during the first valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball in the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47); A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on information, and a performance control means (performance control board 110) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means. 130), wherein the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the validity period of the operation means includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance, etc.). , a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in performances, fixed performances, etc.) different from the first validity period, and a third validity period (validity period related to customer waiting) different from the first validity period and the second validity period. (a middle effective period), and the vibration effect is executed more when the operating means is operated during the second effective period than when the operating means is operated during the third effective period. It is becoming easier to Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, a production section (production button 17 (button vibration motor) that can be operated in a predetermined manner) is provided. , production lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74), and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of the acquisition condition (winning of the game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). ); a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance), and the performance control means operates in a first performance mode (performance mode A to C) and a second performance mode (performance mode D). ~G), and changes the performance section from a first state (standby state, light-off state) to a second state (vibration state, operating state, predetermined light emitting state) during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a change performance (vibration performance, movement performance, light emission performance, etc.), and the expectation is that the special game will be executed when the change performance is executed in the first performance mode and the second performance mode. The degrees are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). mode A to C) and a second performance mode (performance mode D to G), and can be controlled to any one of a plurality of stages with different expectations for the special game to be executed during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a progressive stage performance (step-up preview performance, pseudo-continuous performance), and in the first performance mode and the second performance mode, the stage performance is at a predetermined stage (in the case of a step-up preview performance, The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the game progresses to 3-step performance, 4th-step performance, 5th-step performance, or 1 time or 2 times in the case of pseudo-continuous performance is different. . Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twentieth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading (vibration performance, look-ahead zone performance, etc.), and in the game performance, it is possible to execute a specific performance (ready-to-reach performance) that makes you expect the execution of the special game, and a predetermined number of times (once) in the first performance mode. In the case where the continuous performance is executed the predetermined number of times in the second performance mode, the specific performance in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance is better than when the continuous performance is executed. is becoming more difficult to implement. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration effects, look-ahead zone effects, etc.), and in the game effects, it is possible to execute a specific effect (ready-to-reach effect) that makes people expect to execute the special game, and in the second effect mode, it is possible to perform The case where the continuous performance is executed the predetermined number of times in the first performance mode is better than the case where the continuous performance is performed three times) in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. The specific performance is easier to execute. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the acquisition condition is satisfied (to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the winning of game balls), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the determination result of the determination means, and the performance control means is configured to operate in a first performance mode (performance mode). modes A to C) and second production modes (production modes D to G), and continuous productions (pre-reading effect production, pre-reading action production, pre-reading vibration presentation, look-ahead zone presentation, etc.), and in the game presentation, it is possible to execute a specific presentation (ready-to-reach presentation) that makes one expect the execution of the special game, and the specific presentation includes a first specific presentation (normal reach presentation, etc.). performance) and a second specific performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) in which the degree of expectation for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first specific performance, and the first performance mode is higher than the second performance mode. In this case, when the continuous performance is executed the first number of times, the specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance, and the specific performance is more likely to be executed in the second performance mode than in the first performance mode. In the performance mode, when the continuous performance is performed a second number of times greater than the first number of times, the second specific performance is more likely to be executed in the game performance that triggered the execution of the continuous performance. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button 17, performance lever 24) that can be operated by the player are provided. , a display means (image display device) capable of displaying a production image, and judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (winning of a game ball to the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires the information; a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance), and the performance control means displays an operation promotion display (an opaque button image) that prompts the operation of the operation means during the execution of the game performance. ) at the same time, it is possible to execute an operation effect (development effect, cut-in effect, final effect, etc.) according to the operation of the operation means, and before performing the operation promotion display, the operation promotion display is displayed on the display means. It is possible to perform a suggestion display (semi-transparent button image) indicating that the operation may be performed, and the operation promotion display includes a first operation promotion display (white button image in normal state) and the operation promotion display (a white button image in a normal state). The first operation promotion display includes a second operation promotion display (a red button image in a normal state, a red button image in a protruding state, a rainbow button image in a protrusion state) having a different degree of expectation that the special game will be executed; The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed when the first operation promotion display is performed is different between the first performance mode and the second performance mode, and in the first performance mode, the suggestion display is not performed. The degree of expectation that the special game will be executed is higher when the operation promotion display is performed after the suggestion display is performed than when the operation promotion display is performed at the time. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 18 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game performance (variable performance) is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Among such gaming machines, some are known that perform effects using predetermined effect devices (effect buttons, movable members, lamps, image display devices, etc.) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816 reference). However, conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, judgment information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires special figure determination information); a storage means (main control board 110) that stores the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as a reserved memory; A determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute a game, and a game performance (a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. , a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance of only flashing lamps), the performance control unit is capable of displaying pending information according to the number of the pending memories, and is capable of displaying pending information according to the number of the pending memories, A first display effect (MAX8 tarot card change) that displays the pending information in a predetermined manner different from the normal mode, and a second display effect (Puzzle Reach) that displays the plurality of pending information in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode. (puzzle change), and it is possible to execute a specific performance (a predetermined preview performance, various reach performances, etc.) that makes people expect that the special game will be executed during the execution of the game performance, and When the first display effect is executed and when the second display effect is executed, the pending information corresponds to a specific number (for example, the first) before a predetermined number (for example, the fourth). The rate at which the specific performance is executed during the game performance is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and the determination based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. storage means (main control board 110) for storing information as a first pending memory and storing the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition as a second pending memory; and executing the special game based on the determination information. determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to play, and state control that can be controlled to a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) in which the second acquisition condition is more likely to be met than in the normal gaming state. means (main control board 110), and executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. production control means (production control board 130), and the determination means includes the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and the determination information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The performance control means can display a number of pending information (pending icons) according to the pending memory, and in the normal gaming state, the first pending information and the and second pending information in the order in which the determination information was acquired, and in the specific gaming state, the first pending information is not displayed and the second pending information is displayed in the order in which the determination information was acquired. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, judgment information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires the special game determination information); a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A variable display execution means (main control board 110) that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) according to the above, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state (special time-saving game state), initialization means capable of initializing the control state of the game at the start of power supply, and according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps), The state control means terminates the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the variable display execution means terminates the specified game state controlled in a state where the special game has not been executed after the initialization. The fluctuation pattern table is different between the fluctuation display which is the final round in the gaming state and the fluctuation display which is the final round in the specific gaming state controlled in a state where the special game has been executed after the initialization. It is now possible to determine the fluctuation pattern using Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, judgment information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires the special game determination information); a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A variable display execution means (main control board 110) that executes a variable display of symbols (special symbols) according to the above, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state (special time-saving game state), initialization means capable of initializing the control state of the game at the start of power supply, and according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps), The state control means terminates the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the performance control means terminates the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game has not been executed after the initialization. When the state ends, and when the specific game state that is controlled in a state where the special game has been executed after the initialization ends, the performance mode (end notification performance) when the specific game state ends It is possible to vary the start timing, end timing, content of the end notification effect, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed; a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the determination that the execution is not executed; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of performance symbols, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable performance with only flashing lamps); The performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information, and the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is executed. The number of types of game performance patterns when the second game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state is greater than the number of types of game performance patterns when the special game is executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , a normal time-saving game state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. The performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance with only blinking lamps), and the performance control unit executes a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. performance, step-up preview performance, line preview performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes a valid operation period, and the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period. The first vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decisive performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation, and the vibration performance that is executed without the expiry of the above-mentioned validity period. The game performance includes a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the game performance includes a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result, and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (corresponding variable performance), and the first vibration performance is different from when the first game performance is performed in the specific game state and when the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratio is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , a normal time-saving game state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps); (vibration performance, step-up notice performance, dialogue notice performance, cut-in performance, decision success performance, etc.), and specific performances (various reach performances, chance performances, etc.) that make the player expect to execute the special game, The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. (vibration performance related to) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes: , a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and the first game performance is executed in which the specific performance is performed in the specific game state; The execution ratio of the first vibration performance during execution of the specific performance is different depending on the case where the second game performance in which the specific performance is performed in a specific game state is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (special time-saving game) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game production according to the result of the judgment (a variation production with a variation display of production symbols, a variation production with only a variation display of the fourth symbol, a blinking lamp) a performance control means (performance control board 130) that performs a vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up vibration performance) that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a preview performance, a dialogue preview performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation valid period, and an operation of the operating means during the operation valid period. The first vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed according to a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the game performance includes a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. of the second vibration performance) in the case where the first game performance is performed in the specific game state and the case where the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratios are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , a normal time-saving game state, a special time-saving game state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, change of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. vibrating effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up preview effects, line preview effects, cut-in effects, winning success effects, etc.), and specific effects (various reach effects, special effects, etc.) that make people expect to execute the special game. The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (development performance, cut-in performance, final performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, and the vibration performance includes a valid operation period. , a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without causing the validity period, and the game performance includes a vibration performance related to the first vibration performance, etc. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance corresponding to the second special symbol (a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), a case where the first game performance in which the specific performance is performed in the specific game state is executed; The execution ratio of the second vibration performance during execution of the specific performance is different depending on when the second game performance in which the specific performance is performed is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to players, movable performance members (a first movable member, a second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner movable member), and the determination information (special figure determination information) is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the ball enters the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the ball enters the second starting port). an acquisition means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the result of the determination; and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps), The effect control means is configured to perform a first operation effect (a look-ahead movement effect, an accessory notice effect at the time of start of fluctuation, etc.) for operating the movable effect means in a first mode during execution of the game effect, and a second operation effect for causing the movable effect means to operate in a first manner. A second action performance (such as a successful decision performance) that is operated in a certain manner, and the game performance includes a first game based on the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. a performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; In the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the normal gaming state, the first action performance can be executed, but notifies non-execution of the special game in the specific gaming state. In the first game performance, the execution of the first action performance is restricted, and the first game performance notifies execution of the special game in the normal game state, and the execution of the special game in the specific game state. In the first game performance, the second motion performance can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to players, a light emitting means (winning hole lamp) capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner, and a predetermined manner movable production members (first movable member, second movable member) that can operate in an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the ball entering), and a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. The effect control means is capable of executing a light emission effect (lamp change effect based on pre-reading) that indicates the possibility that the special game will be executed by causing the light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, By operating the movable presentation means in a predetermined manner during the execution of the game presentation, it is possible to perform an action presentation (a look-ahead motion presentation, a role-playing notice presentation at the start of variation) that suggests the possibility that the special game will be executed. , the game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to a determination result of the determination information based on the first game, the first game notifying non-execution of the special game in the normal game state. While the performance is being executed, the light emission performance can be executed, and the action performance can be executed, and during the execution of the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the specific game state, It is possible to restrict the execution of the light emission effect, and also to restrict the execution of the motion effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to players, a performance means for performing a predetermined performance (winning hole lamp NR, top lamp 10b, etc.) and determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port). an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring, a determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the above, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variation of performance symbols) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with a display, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp; It is possible to perform a suggestive effect (a lamp change effect based on prereading, a light emitting effect upon winning, etc.) that suggests the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed using a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the determination information; and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol), and the mode of the presentation means includes a first mode (winning slot lamp flashing white) and a second mode (winning suggestion mode) different from the first suggestion mode. A third aspect (top lamp emission) different from the second aspect (mouth lamp blue emission), and a fourth aspect different from the third aspect (winning opening lamp & top lamp off), includes a first suggestion effect (lamp change effect based on pre-reading) and a second suggestion effect (light emission effect upon winning) that is different from the first suggestion effect, and when the first suggestion effect is executed, , the presentation means may be in the first mode and the second mode, and when the second suggestion presentation is executed, the presentation means may be in the third mode. , the presentation means is in the fourth aspect more when the first game presentation is executed in the specific gaming state than when the first game presentation is executed in the normal gaming state. The percentage is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A possible state control means (main control board 110) and a game effect (a variable effect with a variable display of effect symbols, a variable effect only with a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect only with flashing lamps) according to the result of the above-mentioned determination. ); the performance control means is capable of executing the game performance in any of a plurality of game performance patterns (variable performance patterns); includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the information determination, and the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the normal game state is executed. The same game performance pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state than when the first game performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit is configured to perform an operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute an operation performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a decisive performance, etc.) that indicates the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the validity period. The game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to a determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the game, and the first game performance notifies non-execution of the special game in the normal game state. The operation performance is more difficult to execute when the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state than when the game performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. A possible state control means (main control board 110) and a game effect (a variable effect with a variable display of effect symbols, a variable effect only with a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable effect only with flashing lamps) according to the result of the above-mentioned determination. ), the performance control means is capable of controlling any one of a plurality of performance modes (including a look-ahead mode), and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to Changes in the production mode are less likely to occur when the production is executed (SP/SPSP reach production that results in a loss is difficult to execute, mode update lottery is more likely to be won, and look-ahead zone production is difficult to execute) , fewer production modes, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the means (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation validity period and the above-mentioned. A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period; The game performance includes a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes a second vibration performance that is executed without causing the validity period to occur, and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performances (variable performances corresponding to the second special symbols), the first game performance is executed in the normal gaming state, and the first game performance is executed in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the means (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation validity period and the above-mentioned. A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period; The game performance includes a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes a second vibration performance that is executed without causing the validity period to occur, and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performances (variable performances corresponding to the second special symbols), the first game performance is executed in the normal gaming state, and the first game performance is executed in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, The effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image of the display means and a plurality of preview effects indicating the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during execution of the variable effect, and Although the dynamic display of the background image is performed, it is possible to generate a notice restriction period in which execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effects include the above-mentioned change based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information, and a second variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (a variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol), which notifies non-execution of the special game in the specific gaming state rather than the first variable performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the normal gaming state. In the first variable performance, the proportion occupied by the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. a possible state control means (main control board 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, The effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image of the display means and a plurality of preview effects indicating the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during execution of the variable effect, and Although the dynamic display of the background image is performed, it is possible to generate a notice restriction period in which execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effects include the above-mentioned change based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information, and a second variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol), in a case where the first variable performance is executed in the normal gaming state and a case where the first variable performance is executed in the specific gaming state, The proportion of the entire performance period falling within the notice restriction period is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 20th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. a determining means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the special game is executed, and control to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, The performance control means is capable of executing a predictive performance (such as a reach promotion performance) that indicates the possibility that a reach performance will be performed during execution of the fluctuation performance, and the fluctuation performance requires the satisfaction of the first acquisition condition. A first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the above, and a second fluctuation performance according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a variable presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol), and a case where the second variable presentation is executed to notify non-execution of the special game in the specific gaming state; The rate at which a performance in which the predictive performance is performed but the ready-to-win performance is not performed is different from when the first variable performance for notifying the non-execution of the special game is performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the means (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation validity period and the above-mentioned. A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period; The game performance includes a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes a second vibration performance that is executed without causing the validity period to occur, and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game effects (variable effects corresponding to a second special symbol), where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, and the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance that vibrates the means (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, etc.), and the vibration performance includes an operation validity period and the above-mentioned. A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period; The game performance includes a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and the game performance includes a second vibration performance that is executed without causing the validity period to occur, and the game performance includes A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game effects (variable effects corresponding to a second special symbol), where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, and the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different depending on the case. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not the game is the same, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control specific gaming states (variable probability gaming states, various time-saving gaming states) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols on the display means according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is the special game state. A first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled in accordance with the end of the game, and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. ), and the performance control means dynamically displays a background image on the display means and a plurality of preview performances suggesting the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed during execution of the variable performance. It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the background image, but it is possible to generate a notice restriction period during which the execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the variable effects include the first A first variable performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol (variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol), the second specific variation presentation is more effective than the second variation presentation that notifies non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state. The proportion of the advance notice restriction period is likely to be larger in the first variable performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not the game is the same, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control specific gaming states (variable probability gaming states, various time-saving gaming states) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination, wherein the specific game state is a first specific state that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state), and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed, and the effect control means is capable of dynamically displaying a background image on the display means and a plurality of preview performances that suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed while the variable performance is being executed; Although the dynamic display is executed, it is possible to generate a notice restriction period in which the execution of the plurality of notice effects is restricted, and the game effect includes the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (a variable performance corresponding to a symbol), in a case where the second game performance is performed in the first specific game state, and a case where the first game performance is performed in the second specific game state. , the proportion of all of the performance periods falling within the notice restriction period is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to players, movable performance members (a first movable member, a second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner are provided. movable member), and the determination information (special figure determination information) is acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the ball enters the first starting port) or the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the ball enters the second starting port). a determining unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; and a determining unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) that can control the state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination. The specific gaming state is controlled based on a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and that the special game is determined not to be executed. a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) in which the performance is performed, and the performance control means is configured to control a first motion performance (pre-reading motion performance) for operating the movable performance means in the first mode during the execution of the game performance. , a role advance notice performance at the start of fluctuation, etc.) and a second action performance (decision success performance, etc.) in which the movable performance means is operated in a second mode, and the game performance includes the first A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition, and a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. a second game performance corresponding to the second special symbol (a variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), the first game performance notifying execution of the special game in the first specific game state, and the second specific game state. In the first game performance that notifies execution of the special game in , the second action performance can be executed, and in the second game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state. , the first motion performance can be executed, but in the first game performance that notifies non-execution of the special game in the second specific game state, execution of the first motion performance is restricted. ing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, the first acquisition condition is satisfied (the ball enters the first starting hole) or an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting port); and an acquisition unit (main control board 110) that executes the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not the game is the same, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control specific gaming states (variable probability gaming states, various time-saving gaming states) that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. 110), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination, wherein the specific game state is a first specific state that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state), and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed, and the effect control means is capable of executing the game performance using any of a plurality of game performance patterns (variable performance patterns), and the game performance includes a method according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. ), the non-execution of the special game is notified in the second specific gaming state more than when the second game effect is executed, which informs the non-execution of the special game in the first specific gaming state. When the first game performance is executed, the same game performance pattern is more likely to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time saving), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination, and the specific game state is , a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific gaming state that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. (special time-saving game state), and the performance control means includes a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up preview performance, line preview performance, cut-in performance, A first vibration performance (speech preview performance, etc.) can be executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, and a vibration performance can be performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without the expiry of the validity period (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up preview performance) , a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.), and the game performance includes a first game performance (corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, the first specific game The execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between when the second game performance is executed in the state and when the first game performance is performed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the determination, The states include a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific gaming state that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. a game state (special time-saving game state), and the performance control means is configured to perform a vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance, step-up preview performance, dialogue preview performance, cut-in performance) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. The vibration performance includes a valid operation period, and a first vibration performance (speech) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period. Vibration performances related to preview performances, pseudo continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (pre-read vibration performances, step-up performances, etc.) that are executed without the expiration of the validity period. (a vibration performance related to a preview performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the game performance includes a first game performance (a first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; The execution ratio of the second vibration performance is different between when the second game performance is executed in a specific gaming state and when the first game performance is executed in the second specific gaming state. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, determination information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires special figure determination information), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state advantageous to the player (variable probability gaming state, various time-saving gaming states), and an effect control means (main control board 110) that executes a gaming effect according to the result of the determination. an effect control board 130), wherein the specific gaming state is a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a state in which the special game is not executed. a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the determination that , card forgetting prevention display, etc.), and if the special game (so-called consecutive game winning) is executed during the first specific game state, execution of the specific notification is restricted, and the first specific notification is executed. 2. If the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the specific game state, the specific notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 30th configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, determination information ( an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires special figure determination information), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) advantageous to the player, and an effect control means (presentation control means) that executes a game effect according to the result of the determination. a control board 130), and the specific gaming state includes a first specific gaming state (variable probability gaming state, normal time-saving gaming state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a non-execution of the special game. and a second specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is controlled based on the determination, and the effect control means is configured to provide a specific notification (an addictive prevention display, If the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the normal gaming state, the specific notification can be executed, and the first specific gaming state If the special game (so-called consecutive win) is executed during the second specific game state, execution of the specific notification is restricted, and if the special game (so-called first win) is executed during the second specific game state. is capable of executing the specific notification. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, it is possible to introduce gaming media into a starting area (starting port) provided in the gaming area. Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on winnings, Judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information. , a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the determination that the special game is not executed; a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance according to the result of the game, and the performance control means is configured to fire a game medium into a second area of the game area during the normal game state. A first notification effect (right hit error notification) that urges the firing of game media into a first area of the game area can be executed for a predetermined period of time, and when the specific game state is started, It is possible to execute a second notification effect (right-handed notification) that prompts the firing of game media into a second area, and when the specific gaming state is started while the first notification effect is being executed, the first notification effect is executed. The second notification effect can be executed while continuing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp; A first setting state (normal setting) in which it is possible to execute a specific performance (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer performance, etc.) that makes people look forward to its execution, and the execution rate of the specific performance varies depending on the operation of the operating means. and a second setting state (simple setting), and the game performance includes a first game performance (first special symbol (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, the specific performance includes a first specific performance (for example, a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the normal game after the first setting state is set. When the first game performance is executed in the state, the execution rate of the first specific performance is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific performance is a second rate (high appearance rate). When the second game effect is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is different from the first rate (low appearance rate). The execution rate of the second specific effect is different from the second rate (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps), and the performance control means executes a specific performance (continuous notice) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the game performance. a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which execution ratios of the specific effects differ depending on the operation of the operating means. The game performance may include a first game performance (a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific performance includes a first specific performance (e.g. a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the first game performance is executed in the normal game state after the first setting state is set. When the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate), the execution rate of the second specific effect is a second rate (high appearance rate), and the first setting state is set. When the first game performance is executed in the specific game state after the first specific performance is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low appearance rate) and the second specific performance is The execution rate is different from the second rate (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variable performance of only flashing lamps), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable performance) that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; A first setting state (1) in which a specific effect (such as an icon change effect, a timer effect, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected to be performed during the effect can be performed, and the execution rate of the specific effect varies depending on the operation of the operating means. Normal setting) and a second setting state (Simple setting). a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; The specific performance includes a first specific performance (for example, a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) that is different from the first specific performance, and after the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a second rate. (high appearance rate), and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is the first rate. The execution ratio of the second specific effect is different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps), and the performance control means executes a specific performance (continuous notice) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the game performance. a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which execution ratios of the specific effects differ depending on the operation of the operating means. The game performance may include a first game performance (a variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition; A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific performance includes a first specific performance (e.g. a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the second game performance is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set. When the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate), the execution rate of the second specific effect is a second rate (high appearance rate), and the first setting state is set. When the first game performance is executed in the specific game state after the first specific performance is executed, the execution rate of the first specific performance is different from the first ratio (low appearance rate) and the second specific performance is The execution rate is different from the second rate (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variable performance of only flashing lamps), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable performance) that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; It is possible to perform a specific performance (continuous notice performance, icon change performance, timer performance, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the performance, and the execution rate of the specific performance varies depending on the operation of the operating means. The first setting state (normal setting) and the second setting state (simple setting) can be set. a game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. , the specific performance includes a first specific performance (for example, a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the second specific game state after the second specific effect is executed, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is becomes a second ratio (high appearance rate), and when the first game performance is executed in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific performance becomes the second ratio (high appearance rate). The ratio of execution of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variable performance of only flashing lamps), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable performance) that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; It is possible to perform a specific performance (continuous notice performance, icon change performance, timer performance, etc.) that makes the execution of the special game expected during the performance, and the execution rate of the specific performance varies depending on the operation of the operating means. The first setting state (normal setting) and the second setting state (simple setting) can be set. a game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. , the specific performance includes a first specific performance (for example, a continuous preview performance) and a second specific performance (for example, a timer performance) different from the first specific performance, and the first setting state is set. When the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state after the execution of the first specific effect, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is becomes a second ratio (high appearance rate), and when the first game performance is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific performance becomes the second ratio (high appearance rate). The ratio of execution of the second specific performance is different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Contents 19 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the game performance (variable performance) is performed according to the result of the determination. Gaming machines that run the game are common. Among such gaming machines, some are known that perform effects using predetermined effect devices (effect buttons, movable members, lamps, image display devices, etc.) (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2019-033816 reference). However, conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above-mentioned patent documents have a problem in that the interest in playing the games is low.

◆ As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, A light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can change to any one of multiple notification modes, and an acquisition means (main control) that acquires judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole). a board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends. A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, a fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control means corresponds to the determination information indicating that the game performance has been started. Execution information (the icon) can be displayed, and by displaying the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed. possible, and by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode, a change effect that suggests the degree of expectation ( During a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation), an operation valid period is generated, and the above operation during the operation valid period is executed. An operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means (vibration performance related to a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) and the operation validity period are generated. It is possible to perform a vibration performance (such as a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.) that vibrates the operating means without any action, and both during the normal gaming state and the specific gaming state. The execution rate of the vibration performance during the predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different between the middle and the middle, and the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change performance is resumed and the game is started. When the control state is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means assumes a notification mode (white light emission, lights out) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making a judgment, and state control capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. means (main control board 110), and performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a fluctuating performance that displays performance symbols in a variable manner according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means is configured to display the fluctuating performance. During a predetermined period after the start of (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation), an operation effect period is generated, and a predetermined effect is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation effect period (line preview). (Vibration performance related to performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) and vibration performance that vibrates the operating means without causing the operation validity period (pre-reading vibration performance, step It is possible to execute a vibration display related to an up notice display), and in a specific variable display (a variable display with a pseudo series) in which the fluctuating display of the above-mentioned performance symbol is simulated multiple times, the display can be performed in stages. It is possible to execute a stage production (story production) in which the game progresses, and a reach production that makes people expect that the special game will be executed, and the stage production includes a first stage production (story 1). and a second stage performance (story 2) that is executed after the first stage performance, and the reach performance includes a first reach performance (normal reach performance), and a second stage performance (story 2) that is executed after the first stage performance. It includes a second reach performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) in which a special game is highly expected to be executed, and in the specific variation performance, the second stage performance can be executed after the first reach performance is executed. However, after executing the second reach effect, the second stage effect is not executed, and the execution ratio of the vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect during the normal gaming state and during the specific gaming state. are different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, A light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can change to any one of multiple notification modes, and an acquisition means (main control) that acquires judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole). board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a game performance (variation accompanied by a fluctuating display of performance symbols) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit executes the operation after the start of power supply. It is possible to perform an initial vibration that vibrates the means, and it is possible to display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information that the game production has started, and the execution information is displayed in a different form from the normal mode (normal icon). It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed by displaying it in a special mode (special icon), and a specific notification mode corresponding to the execution information that is being displayed in the special mode with the light emitting means. It is possible to execute a change performance (lamp change performance) that suggests the level of expectation by changing the light emission (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.). At the same time, a vibration related to an operation performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) that performs a predetermined performance according to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. It is possible to perform a vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.) in which the operating means is vibrated without causing the operation validity period to occur. , when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means emits a notification mode different from the specific notification mode (white light emission). , lights out), and the operating means can be vibrated in different manners between the initial vibration and the vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever, firing handle) that can be operated by the player are provided. ), an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), and whether to execute the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not the present invention has been determined, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a variable performance (variable performance) for displaying performance symbols in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. , the operation means includes a first operation means (a production button) and a second operation means (a production lever, a firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the production control means controls the execution of the variable production. The operation performance includes generating an operation validity period and performing a predetermined performance according to the operation of the first operation means during the operation validity period (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance). A vibration performance related to a performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a vibration performance that vibrates the first operating means without causing the operation validity period (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, etc.). In a specific variation performance (variation performance with pseudo series) in which the performance symbols are displayed in a simulated manner multiple times, a stage performance (story performance) in which the performance can progress step by step, and the special game It is possible to perform a reach effect that makes people expect that it will be executed, and when the vibration effect is executed during operation of the second operation means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the second operation means. The stage performance includes a first stage performance (Story 1) and a second stage performance (Story 2) executed after the first stage performance, The reach performance includes a first reach performance (normal reach performance) and a second reach performance (SP/SPSP reach performance) in which the degree of expectation for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first reach performance, and the reach performance includes the specified reach performance. In the variable performance, the second stage performance can be executed after the first ready-to-reach performance is executed, but the second stage performance is not executed after the second ready-to-reach performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, A light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can change to any one of multiple notification modes, and an acquisition means (main control) that acquires judgment information (special figure judgment information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole). a storage unit (main control board 110) that stores the determination information acquired by the acquisition unit as a pending memory; and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. a main control board 110), a preliminary determination means (main control board 110) that determines in advance whether or not to execute the special game, and a specific game state (probability variable game state, various a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the time-saving gaming state), and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance in which the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the determination. , the performance control means is capable of displaying execution information (the icon) corresponding to the determination information on which the variable performance has been started, and displays the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon). ), it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed, and the light emitting means can be displayed in a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, red light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the level of expectation by changing the display to a light emitting light, rainbow light emission, etc., and during the execution of the variable effect, an operation valid period is generated, and the above-mentioned An operation performance that performs a predetermined performance in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period (vibration performance related to a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.); It is possible to perform a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect) in which the operating means is vibrated without generating an operation validity period, and the vibration effect is executed according to the result of the preliminary determination, and the vibration effect is executed according to the result of the preliminary determination, When the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change production is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light emitting means is displayed in a notification mode different from the specific notification mode (white light emission, lights out). ), and when the fluctuating performance in which a ready-to-win performance is performed during the normal gaming state, the vibration performance is executed at a higher rate before the execution of the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances include: A first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period while generating an operation validity period. (a vibration performance related to a performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a pre-read vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, and the vibration performance related to the first vibration performance. It is possible to perform the vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes a vibration performance based on the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. ), and a predetermined period after the start of the game performance ( The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during the period (up to the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances mentioned above In addition to generating a valid operation period, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. after the start of the game performance, in the case where the first game performance is performed in the normal game state and the case where the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (a variable performance corresponding to a symbol), and the first game performance is executed in the normal game state and the first game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) that are advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (variable effects corresponding to the symbols), and when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, the game effect The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , a normal time-saving game state), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance, a variable performance of only flashing lamps), and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability variable performance) that is controlled according to the end of the special game. a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed; Executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) The vibration performance includes a valid operation period, and a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period. , vibration performances related to development performances, cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.) and second vibration performances that are executed without the expiration of the validity period (pre-read vibration performances, step-up notice performances, confirmed performances, etc.) ), the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), a case where the second game performance is executed in the first specific game state, and a case where the second game performance is executed in the second specific game state. The execution rate of the second vibration performance during a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different depending on when the second vibration performance is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period. It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (a variable performance corresponding to a symbol), and the game performance is different between a case where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state and a case where the second game performance is executed in the specific game state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances mentioned above In addition to generating a valid operation period, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) and a second game performance (corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. after the start of the game performance, in the case where the first game performance is performed in the specific game state and the case where the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without the expiration of the validity period, It is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination, and a second game performance (second special (a variable performance corresponding to a symbol), and the game performance is different between a case where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state and a case where the second game performance is executed in the specific game state. The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making the judgment, and game effects according to the result of the judgment (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects with only flashing lamps) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes an initial vibration for vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration to vibrate the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance, the performance control means It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the operating means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.). , the vibration performance includes a valid operation period, and a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, an advanced performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid operation period. a vibration performance related to a performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without the expiration of the validity period (a vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.). It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the operation means is operated in different modes for the initial vibration performance and the second vibration performance. It is possible to make it vibrate. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making the judgment, and game effects according to the result of the judgment (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects with only flashing lamps) a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing the game performance; , a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) can be executed, and the vibration performance has a valid operation period, and also has a valid operation period. The first vibration performance (vibration performance related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the said operating means inside, and the validity period. A second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating a vibration performance, and the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance are included in the performance period. It is possible to perform the vibrations so that they do not overlap, and it is possible to vibrate the operating means in different manners in the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a game performance (accompanied by a fluctuating display of performance symbols) according to the result of the determination. A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable performance with only flashing lamps, and the operation means is configured to perform a first operation means (a performance button ) and a second operation means (a production lever, a firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the production control means is configured to perform a vibration production () that vibrates the first operation means during execution of the game production. It is possible to perform vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuation performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc., and the vibration performances include operations. A first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance, and a repeat performance) is generated in response to the operation of the first operating means during the operation validity period. a vibration performance related to a lottery performance, etc.) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without causing the validity period, and It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that their performance periods do not overlap, and when the second vibration performance is performed during operation of the second operating means, the second vibration performance Vibrations related to the performance are transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventeenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), and stores the determination information acquired by the acquisition means as a pending memory. storage means (main control board 110), determination means (main control board 110) for determining whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and determining in advance whether or not to execute the special game. a preliminary determination means (main control board 110); a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state; A performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance in which a performance pattern is displayed variably according to the result of the determination, and the operation means includes a first operation means (performance button) and a first operation. and a second operation means (a production lever, a firing handle) different from the first operation means, and the production control means is configured to perform a vibration production (pre-reading vibration production, dialogue preview production) that vibrates the first operation means during execution of the variable production. , a pseudo continuous performance, a developed performance, a cut-in performance, a decisive performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the vibration performance has an operational validity period, and A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a dialogue preview performance, pseudo-continuation performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-lottery performance, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means during the operation validity period. ), and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without causing the validity period, and the second vibration performance is the same as in the previous article. It is possible to perform the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the above-mentioned where the ready-to-win performance is performed during the normal gaming state. When the variable performance is executed, the rate at which the second vibration performance is executed is higher before the execution of the ready-to-win performance than during the ready-to-win performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. The performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance with only blinking lamps), and the performance control unit executes a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances related to production, dialogue preview production, pseudo continuous production, development production, cut-in production, decisive production, re-lottery production, confirmed production, etc., and the vibration production has a valid operation period. At the same time, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. (vibration performance) and a second vibration performance (vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, confirmed performance, etc.) that is executed without generating the validity period, and a vibration performance related to the first vibration performance. It is possible to execute the second vibration performance so that the performance period does not overlap, and the game performance includes a first game based on the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. a performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol); and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition; The case where the second vibration performance is performed during the second game performance in the specific game state is higher than the case where the second vibration performance is performed during the first game performance in the normal game state. , the expectation level that the special game will be executed is higher. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a nineteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances mentioned above In addition to generating a valid operation period, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, symbols aligned, C symbols aligned, vibrations related to confirmed effects, etc.) that are executed without the expiration of the validity period. performance), it is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance is based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (Variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the specific game state (vibration related to pattern alignment, etc.) performance), the number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the normal gaming state (pre-read vibration performance, step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmed). Vibration effects related to presentations, etc.) are on the rise. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 20th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without the expiration of the validity period (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect, etc.) ), the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed such that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the specific game state (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol). The number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the normal gaming state (pre-read vibration performance, step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern, etc.) There are more vibrating effects related to matching, confirmed effects, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the vibration performances mentioned above In addition to generating a valid operation period, a first vibration performance (a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a final performance) is performed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.) and second vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, symbols aligned, C symbols aligned, vibrations related to confirmed effects, etc.) that are executed without the expiration of the validity period. performance), it is possible to execute the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance is based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. (Variation performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the second game performance in the specific game state (pre-read vibration performance, step-up vibration performance) The number of types of the second vibration performance that may be executed during the first game performance in the normal gaming state (pre-read vibration performance, etc.) Vibration effects related to step-up notice effects, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmed effects, etc.) are becoming more common. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation validity period, as well as generating an operation validity period. , a vibration performance related to a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance that is executed without the expiration of the validity period (pre-reading vibration performance, step-up notice performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation effect, etc.) ), the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed such that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes the first acquisition condition. A first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game performance according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. 2 game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol), and the number of types of the second vibration performance (pre-read vibration performance) that may be executed during the second game performance in the specific game state. , symbol alignment, vibration effects related to confirmed effects, etc.), the number of types of the second vibration effects that may be executed during the first game effect in the normal gaming state (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up vibration effects, etc.) Vibration effects related to preview effects, pattern matching, C pattern matching, confirmed effects, etc.) are becoming more common. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps), and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply. , a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a line preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) ), and the game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing ( A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) that is executed before the reach) and a second vibration performance that is performed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during the reach). The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed during execution of the first game performance in the normal gaming state. , during execution of the first game performance in the specific game state, execution of the first vibration performance is restricted, but the second vibration performance can be performed, and the initial vibration and the first vibration performance are , it is possible to vibrate the operating means in different ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a specific game state (probability variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. , various time-saving game states), and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game performance (variable performance with variable display of the performance symbols, variation of only the variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance of only blinking lamps), and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply. , a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a line preview performance, a pseudo-continuation performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.) ), and the game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. and a second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing ( A first vibration performance (vibration performance related to pseudo-continuous performance, development performance, cut-in performance, etc.) that is executed before the reach) and a second vibration performance that is performed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during the reach). The first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be performed during execution of the first game performance in the normal gaming state. , during execution of the first game effect in the specific game state, execution of the first vibration effect is restricted, but the second vibration effect can be executed, and the initial vibration and the second vibration effect are different. , it is possible to vibrate the operating means in different ways. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the above-mentioned game performances includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of information determination, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (pre-reading) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach). Vibration performances related to vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. , a vibration effect related to a re-lottery effect), and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determination means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a determination unit (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (variable probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance with only a variable display, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), and the above-mentioned game performances includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and the determination based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of information determination, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance (pre-reading) executed at a predetermined timing (before reach). Vibration performances related to vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. , vibration effects related to re-lottery effects, etc.), in the case where the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and the case where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute special games (jackpot games) advantageous to the player, operation means (performance button, performance lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the above-mentioned determination information, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) Performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. , a deciding performance, a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.), where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state, and when the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between the two. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; The acquisition means (main a control board 110), a determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information, and a control board 110 that determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information; A state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is advantageous to the player; a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a variation performance of only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variation performance of only a flashing lamp, and the performance control unit performs the operation during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.), The game performance includes a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a first game performance (variable performance corresponding to the first special symbol) based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. A second game performance (variable performance corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the determination result of the determination information based on the above-mentioned determination information, and the vibration performance includes a first vibration performance executed at a predetermined timing (before reach) Performances (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. , a deciding performance, a vibration performance related to a re-lottery performance, etc.), where the first game performance is executed in the specific game state, and when the second game performance is performed in the specific game state. The execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between the two. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twenty-ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that makes a determination, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. The effect control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and is capable of performing a vibration effect of vibrating the operating means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, It is possible to perform a vibration performance related to a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc., and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing (before reaching ) is performed (vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, line preview performance, step-up notice performance, etc.), and a second vibration performance is performed at a timing different from the first vibration performance (during reach). production (vibration production related to development production, cut-in production, deciding production, re-lottery production, etc.), the execution ratio of the first vibration production is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the The operating means can be vibrated in different manners between the initial vibration and the first vibration performance. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 30th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that makes a determination, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, various time-saving gaming states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state. Performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. The effect control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and is capable of performing a vibration effect of vibrating the operating means during execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, It is possible to perform a vibration performance related to a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc., and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing (before reaching ) and a second vibration performance that is performed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration performance (vibration performance related to a look-ahead vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up notice performance, etc.). performances (vibration performances related to development performances, cut-in performances, deciding performances, re-lottery performances, etc.), and the execution ratio of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the The operating means can be vibrated in different manners between the initial vibration and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner. (production button, production lever), acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), A determining means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute a special game, and a game performance (a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of performance symbols, a variation of only a variable display of the fourth symbol) according to the result of the determination. The performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a performance control unit (performance control board 130) that executes a performance (variable performance with only blinking lamps), and the performance control unit executes a vibration performance (pre-reading vibration) that vibrates the operating means during execution of the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance related to a performance, a dialogue preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a confirmed performance, etc.), and the vibration performance is performed at a predetermined timing ( The first vibration performance (vibration performance related to pre-reading vibration performance, dialogue preview performance, step-up notice performance, etc.) that is executed before the reach) and the first vibration performance that is performed at a different timing from the first vibration performance (during the reach). 2 vibration performances (vibration performances related to development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, etc.), and the light emission mode of the operating means includes a first light emission mode (white light emission, red light emission), A second light emitting mode (rainbow light emission) in which the expectation level for the special game to be executed is higher than that of the first light emitting mode, and in the game effect that notifies that the special game will be executed, the second light emitting mode When the first vibration effect is executed, the operating means is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode than when the vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a thirty-second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means that can be operated by the player and can emit light in a predetermined manner. (production button, production lever), acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting port), Judgment means (main control board 110) that determines whether or not to execute a special game, and state control that can be controlled to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. means (main control board 110), and executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. A performance control means (performance control board 130), the performance control means is configured to perform a vibration performance (a pre-reading vibration performance, a line preview performance, a pseudo continuous performance, an advanced performance) that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game performance. , a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-lottery performance, a vibration performance related to a confirmed performance, etc.). Vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, line preview performances, step-up preview performances, etc.) and second vibration performances (development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances) that are executed at a different timing (during reach) from the first vibration production. (a vibration performance related to a performance, a re-lottery performance, etc.), the execution rate of the first vibration performance is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the light emission mode of the operating means includes a first vibration performance. The special game includes a light emission mode (white light emission, red light emission), and a second light emission mode (rainbow light emission) that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than the first light emission mode, and the special game is executed. In the game performance that notifies the operator, the operating means is more likely to emit light in the first light emission mode when the first vibration performance is executed than when the second vibration performance is executed. There is. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making the judgment, and game effects according to the result of the judgment (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects with only flashing lamps) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes an initial vibration for vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration to vibrate the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance, the performance control means It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the operating means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.). , the validity period of the operating means includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance and pseudo-continuation performance) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance, and a first validity period that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance; a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in performance, fixed performance, etc.) occurring at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period, and the operation means during the second validity period. The vibration effect can be executed when the operating means is operated, and the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operating means is operated during the second valid period are different from each other when the operating means is operated. and can output different operation sounds depending on whether the operating means is operated during the first valid period or when the operating means is operated during the second valid period. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making the judgment, and game effects according to the result of the judgment (variable effects with variable display of effect symbols, variable effects with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable effects with only flashing lamps) and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes an initial vibration for vibrating the operating means after the start of power supply, and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration to vibrate the operation means after the start of power supply, and during execution of the game performance, the performance control means It is possible to perform vibration performances that vibrate the operating means (vibration performances related to pre-reading vibration performances, dialogue preview performances, pseudo-continuous performances, development performances, cut-in performances, decisive performances, re-lottery performances, confirmed performances, etc.). , the validity period of the operating means includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance and pseudo-continuation performance) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance, and a first validity period that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance; a second validity period (validity period related to cut-in performance, fixed performance, etc.) occurring at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period, and the operation means during the first validity period. The vibration effect can be executed when the operating means is operated, and the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operating means is operated during the first valid period are different from each other. and can output different operation sounds depending on whether the operating means is operated during the first valid period or when the operating means is operated during the second valid period. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. A determination means (main control board 110) that makes a determination, and a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends. control board 110), and a performance control means that executes a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of performance symbols, a variable performance with only a variable display of the fourth symbol, a variable performance with only a flashing lamp) according to the result of the determination. (performance control board 130), the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration of vibrating the operation means after the start of power supply, and the operation means during the valid period that occurs during the game performance. It is possible to perform a vibration performance (a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, a promotion success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operating means in accordance with the operation of the The validity period includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performance and pseudo continuous performance) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game performance, and the first validity period during the game performance. A second validity period (validity period related to advanced performances, decisive performances, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period, and the game performance in the normal gaming state and the specified The execution rate of the vibration performance according to the operation during the first valid period is different for the game performance in the gaming state, and the number of vibrations ( time) and the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration performance executed in response to an operation during the second valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirty-sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player; Acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires determination information (special figure determination information) based on the establishment of acquisition conditions (ball entering the starting hole), and determines whether or not to execute the special game based on the determination information. Judgment means (main control board 110) for making a judgment, and state control capable of controlling to a specific gaming state (special time-saving gaming state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special game is determined not to be executed. means (main control board 110), and executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only flashing lamps) according to the result of the determination. performance control means (performance control board 130), the performance control means is capable of performing initial vibration to vibrate the operating means after the start of power supply, and the performance control means is capable of performing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means during the validity period that occurs during the game performance. Executing a vibration performance (a pre-reading vibration performance, a step-up notice performance, a dialogue notice performance, a pseudo continuous performance, a cut-in performance, a decision success performance, a promotion success performance, etc.) that vibrates the operation means in response to the operation of the operation means. The validity period includes a first validity period (validity period related to dialogue preview performances and pseudo-continuous performances) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before reach) during the game production, and a second validity period (validity period related to development performance, decisive performance, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during reach) after the first validity period, and the game performance in the normal gaming state and , the execution rate of the vibration performance according to the operation during the first validity period is different from the game performance in the specific game state, and in the vibration performance executed according to the operation during the first validity period. The number of vibrations (time) is different from the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration performance executed in response to an operation during the second valid period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment shifts to a low probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game when the type of jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, and when the type of jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol. Although the game machine is configured to shift to a high-probability game state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of a jackpot game, the game machine may shift to a high-probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are finished, the game is moved to a high probability game state, and if the player wins the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display in the high probability game state, the high probability game state is ended and the normal A gaming machine that returns to a gaming state may also be used.

Furthermore, when a game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round game of a jackpot game, the gaming machine may be configured to shift to a high probability game state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot game ends.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority. However, a gaming machine may be used in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

(Fourth embodiment)
(Specific example 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 1 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 201 and 202. FIG. 201 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 202(a) to (j) are productions corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG. 201. This is an example.

First, at the timing of P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol changes to the first special symbol. It begins with the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number (numeric information) displayed in the first pending number display area 70E is "2" for one frame of non-animation. becomes “1”. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two pending icons H1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the special symbol (referred to as the first lamp symbol when specifically distinguished) on the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but the production symbol 70a does not perform the preparation operation. Start scrolling after doing so.

In addition, in the 1st special symbol reservation display 63, the 1st reservation number U1 (reservation memory) which the main control part 110m memorize|stores (ascertains) is displayed by lighting/extinguishing/blinking of LED. The variable display of the first lamp pattern is performed by blinking the LED of the sub-first variable display 81. In addition, the sub-first reservation display 83 displays the first reservation number U1 (retention memory) stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m by lighting/extinguishing/flashing the LED.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one pending icon T12 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B2 (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 202(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 202(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 202(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". A variable display of one special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two pending icons H1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the 1 lamp pattern on the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started. In addition, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as partially operating the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 202(d)) reference).

Thereafter, at timing P5, when a predetermined period of time has passed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 202(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (presentation operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 202(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 202(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first A variable display of special symbols is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, one hold icon H1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C and displayed as the icon TH. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 202(g)).

Then, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the first lamp pattern on the special pattern TZ and the sub-first holding display 83 continues, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in the decorative part as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as partially operating or enlarging/reducing the whole or part, scrolling is started (see FIG. 202(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to be scrolled. At this time, since the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the icon is in a state where it is performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 202(h)).

Next, at timing P10, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("365"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the icon TH continues to rotate (actual effect) (see FIG. 202(i)).

Thereafter, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuating period (see FIG. 202(i)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At this time, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation in P8), ), the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues (see FIG. 202(j)). Furthermore, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may continue to fluctuate. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). In this way, the customer waiting demonstration performance (predetermined performance) is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the change in P8.

As a predetermined production that is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation of the production symbol 70a (special symbol) in a state where the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is “0”. This is not limited to a customer waiting demonstration performance, but may also be an adjustment guidance performance such as adjusting the volume or brightness of an image display device, a guidance performance regarding game operations, or other performance. In this case, the customer waiting demonstration performance may be performed after performing a performance other than the customer waiting demonstration performance. In this way, the predetermined performance includes a performance in which the performance symbol 70a which is temporarily stopped or permanently stopped is executed until the next variable performance is started. Note that the predetermined effect is not limited to being executed by a customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), but may be executed by other commands, time set by a timer, or the like.

As described above, according to the first specific example shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, when a predetermined state in which a command is not normally received in the production control section 130m occurs while the variation production of the production symbol 70a is being performed, The performance pattern 70a after the fluctuating performance can be displayed in an oscillating state, and the oscillating state of the performance pattern 70a can be continued even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating performance, thereby providing a customer-waiting demonstration performance. It is no longer executed. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Thereafter, since the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the state shifts to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the special The symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing mode (for example, turned off).

In addition, at the timing of P7, although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot receive the commands normally, the production control unit 130m will normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. The same processing as when it is not possible will be performed.

(Specific example 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A second specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 204. FIG. 203 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 204(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 203. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the image, scrolling is started.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the winning command (first special symbol When the production control unit 130m receives the storage specification command and the first starting opening prize specification command (pre-read specification command), the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from “3” to “4”. ”. In addition, in the specific example 2, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the first pending memory due to winning at timing P1. In the following explanation, the pending memory that serves as the standard for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target pending memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 204(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 204(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 204(c)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Also, at this timing when the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol pending display 63 changes from "4" to "3", a start command (first special symbol memory When the production control unit 130m receives a specification command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command), the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from “4” to “4”. 3" and processing for starting the variable effect is performed.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and after a preparatory operation is performed, scrolling is started (see FIG. 204(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 204(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 204(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern continue. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, and output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 204(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 204(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 204(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 204(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (FIG. 204(h) )reference).

Note that when the surplus reservation icon T1 is deleted and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus reservation icon T1 may be left as is and the necessary reservation icon T1 is displayed in a shift manner.

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the pre-reading zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 204(i)). Here, in specific example 2, the effect control unit 130m normally receives a command before the target pending memory is consumed, and in this case, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

After that, if the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production ( Also in the prefetch effect target), normal zone effects (display of the prefetch zone background, display of a blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are performed according to the preview scenario (see FIG. 204(i)), and the effect pattern 70a The look-ahead zone effect ends when the actual stop occurs.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 205, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the variable effects (target of look-ahead effects) executed during display, the normal zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are continued according to the preview scenario. The prefetch zone effect may be ended without being executed. If the look-ahead zone effect is not to be executed continuously, the look-ahead zone effect is deleted at the timing of P10, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background or the like which has a lower expectation level for a jackpot than the look-ahead effect.

(Specific example 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A third specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 206. FIG. 203 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 206(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that specific example 3 in FIG. 206 differs from specific example 2 in FIG. 204 in that it executes a prefetch effect production instead of the prefetch zone production as a prefetch preview production, and also executes an icon change production, so it is common here. The explanation of the different parts will be omitted, and only the different parts will be explained.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a includes a part of the decorative part moving as in the present embodiment, and a whole or a part expanding and contracting. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 206(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 206(d)), and an effect sound is output.

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational operation (production operation). (See Figure 206(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 206(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 206(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is continuously executed, and the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 is "2". Except for , the state shown in FIG. 206(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 is "2". As a result, the state shown in FIG. 206(g) is maintained.

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the prefetch effect presentation (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". A variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 206(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a according to the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 206(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues, and the prefetch effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and scrolling of the background image continue. is executed.

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is scrolling at high speed. Specifically, the first hold icon T11 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 206(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first pending number U1 being “0”. Also in (target of expectation level suggestion by pre-read preview performance), pre-read effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 3, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 207, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the fluctuating effects that are executed during display (target of expectations suggested by pre-reading effects), icon change effects and pre-reading effect effects (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) are continued according to the preview scenario. The prefetch effect may be ended without being executed. If the pre-reading effect is not to be executed continuously, the pre-reading effect presentation is deleted at the timing of P10, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background only, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the pre-reading effect presentation. Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which had been changed into a character due to the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of presentation with low expectations for a jackpot.

(Specific example 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A fourth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 203 and 208. FIG. 203 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 208(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

In addition, in the specific example 4 of FIG. 208, an icon change effect as a pre-read preview effect is executed on the first image display device 70, and at the same time, an effect (motion effect and light emission effect) by the first movable member 73 as a pre-read advance notice effect. This example differs from the third example shown in FIG. 206 in that the following is executed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. Note that in the third specific example, a look-ahead effect performance can also be executed, but since it is the same as the second specific example, the explanation is omitted.

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". A variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is such that a part of the decorative part moves or the whole or a part expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 208(d)).

In addition, variable display of the performance symbol 70a, special symbol TZ, and first lamp symbol is started, and a performance by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-read preview performance. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed above the first image display device 70 operates in a manner in which expectations for a jackpot are high (for example, large movements or a manner similar to a jackpot). 208(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. It should be noted that the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the ready-to-reach performance of the performance pattern 70a, and in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances of the performance pattern 70a. A partial period of a variable performance is a variable performance period from the start of the variable performance to the stop (temporary stop or permanent stop) of the variable performance, for example, the first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing of the start of the variable performance. The first movable member 73 operates a predetermined number of times at the timing of the end of the variable performance. It is possible to perform a look-ahead effect at various times, such as by executing a look-ahead effect. In this specific example, the pre-reading effect executed during a part of the variable effect period is scheduled to be executed in two or more variable effects.

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational operation (production operation). (See FIG. 208(e)). In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 continues to be performed.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Furthermore, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 208(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 208(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. 208(g), except that the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-read preview performance and the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2". state is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 208(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-read preview performance (the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) by the operation of the first movable member 73 may be continuously executed.

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". A variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T3 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 208(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T13 is The icon is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs a preview preview performance. Specifically, the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73 are performed according to the preview scenario, and sound effects are output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 208(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the pre-read preview effect and scrolling of the background image by the operation of the first movable member 73 are continued.

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the pre-reading preview effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, the icon change effect is executed, and the effect pattern 70a is It will scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 208(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first pending number U1 being “0”. Also in (target of expectation level suggestion by pre-read preview performance), the first movable member 73 executes the pre-read preview performance and icon change performance (the icon change performance). Then, the pre-read preview performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 4, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and in this case, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 209, when the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the variation of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0” Based on the fluctuating effect executed during display (target of expectations suggested by pre-reading effect), icon change effect and pre-reading preview effect (motion effect of first movable member 73 and light emitting effect) are continued in accordance with the preview scenario. The prefetch effect may be ended without being executed. If the pre-reading performance is not to be executed continuously, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is stopped at the timing of P10, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode such as mode A background only, which has a lower expectation level for a jackpot than the pre-reading preview performance. In addition, the pending icon T1, which has been changed into a character due to the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of presentation with low expectations for a jackpot. Furthermore, the look-ahead performance by the first movable member 73 and the like is not performed.

According to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, at timings P7 to P9, the production control unit 130m normally receives commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the main control unit 110m may receive the production command. The same process as in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, when the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at the timing of P10. As explained above, when the first reservation number U1 changes from "4" to "2" and when the first reservation number U1 changes from "2" to "0", that is, when the main control unit 110m grasps the If the discrepancy between the number of reservations currently held and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. In this way, in specific examples 2 to 4, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Further, during a predetermined period, the performance symbol 70a whose variable performance has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and it is also possible to maintain the performance symbol 70a in a temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (two more than a predetermined number (for example, one)) are displayed in the hold icon display area. If the performance control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number while displaying the first reservation information), if the production control section The required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner, without shifting display of the pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the reservation information), the production control unit 130m displays the number of reservation icons one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number of reservation icons. A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 203 to 208, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. (for example, 3), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 5 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 210 and 211. FIG. 210 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 211(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is activated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the image, scrolling is started.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "3" to "4". In addition, in specific example 5, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the pending memory due to the winning at timing P1. In the following explanation, the pending memory that serves as the standard for the look-ahead effect may be referred to as the target pending memory.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Further, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B4 as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from the minimum size) (see FIG. 211(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the pending icons T1 to T4 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 211(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 211(c)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". A variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 211(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 211(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 211(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 211(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 211(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 211(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 211(g) is maintained except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 211(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1". Note that at the timings P7 to P11, the prefetch zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Next, at timing P12, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. "3" directly becomes "0". Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 and the surplus hold icon T12 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 are erased with one frame of non-animation, All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 211) (see (h)). In this way, when the difference between the first pending number U1 that the main control unit 110m knows and the first pending number U1 that the production control unit 130m knows is "3", the pending icon T13 is The icon is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Further, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1. At this time, the look-ahead zone effect and the scrolling of the background image continue.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (FIG. 211(h) )reference).

Note that when the surplus reservation icon T1 is deleted and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus reservation icon T1 may be left as is and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed.

Thereafter, at timing P13, when a predetermined time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a is in a state of being scrolled at high speed while the pre-reading zone effect and the scrolling of the background image are continued. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 211(i)). Here, in specific example 5, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

After that, if the production control unit 130m can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production ( Also in the target of look-ahead performance), normal zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are performed according to the preview scenario (see FIG. 211(i)), and the effect pattern 70a The look-ahead zone effect ends when the actual stop occurs.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 212, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P13, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the variable effects (target of look-ahead effects) that are executed during display, the normal zone effects (display of look-ahead zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are continued according to the preview scenario. The prefetch zone effect may be ended without being executed. If the pre-reading zone effect is not to be executed continuously, the pre-reading zone effect is erased at the timing of P13, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background or the like which has a lower expectation level for a jackpot than the pre-reading effect.

(Specific example 6 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 6 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 210 and 213. FIG. 210 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 213(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 6 in FIG. 213 differs from the specific example 5 in FIG. 211 in that a prefetching effect production is executed instead of the prefetching zone production as a prefetching preview production, and an icon change production is also executed. Explanation of common parts will be omitted, and only different parts will be explained.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is such that a part of the decorative part moves or the whole or a part expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 213(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a (see FIG. 213(d)), and an effect sound is output.

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, and the icon change production is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 213(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 213(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 213(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 becomes "2". , the state shown in FIG. 213(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 213(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 213(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 213(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Note that the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) may be continuously performed at timings P8 to P11.

Next, at timing P12, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. "3" directly becomes "0". In addition, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without passing through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the two extra hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect symbols 70a (including the effect image 70a that is shifted from the stop position) are erased. The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 213(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 known to the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 known to the production control unit 130m is "3", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Moreover, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed as an animation for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the pre-read effect production is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a according to the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 213(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues, and the pre-read effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and scrolling of the background image continue. is executed.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the display of the pending icon T1 is completed, at the timing of P13, the effect image EF is erased, the pre-reading effect production is temporarily stopped, the icon change production is executed, and the production pattern 70a is displayed at high speed. It becomes scrolled. Specifically, the first hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 213(i)).

After that, if the production control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production is executed while the special symbol is displayed with the first pending number U1 being “0”. Also in (target of expectation level suggestion by pre-read preview performance), pre-read effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (the icon change performance) are executed. Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 6, the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command before the target pending memory is exhausted, and in this case, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 214, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the fluctuating effects that are executed during display (target of expectations suggested by pre-reading effects), icon change effects and pre-reading effect effects (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effects) are continued according to the preview scenario. The prefetch effect may be ended without being executed. If the look-ahead effect is not to be executed continuously, at the timing of P12, the look-ahead effect is erased (if it is displayed) and the effect is lower in expectations for a jackpot than the look-ahead effect, such as mode A background only. Changes are made to the aspect. Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which had been changed into a character due to the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of presentation with low expectations for a jackpot.

(Specific example 7 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 7 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 210 and 215. FIG. 210 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 215(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

In addition, in the specific example 7 of FIG. 215, an icon change effect as a pre-read preview effect is executed on the first image display device 70, and at the same time, the effect of the first movable member 73 as a pre-read preview effect (movable effect and light emitting effect) This example differs from Example 6 in FIG. 215 in that the following is executed, so a description of the common parts will be omitted here, and only the different parts will be described. In addition, in the specific example 7, a look-ahead effect performance can also be executed, but since it is the same as the specific example 6, the explanation is omitted.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a includes a part of the decorative part moving as in the present embodiment, and a whole or a part expanding and contracting. After performing the following preparatory operations, scrolling is started (see FIG. 215(d)).

In addition, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern is started, and a movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-read preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed above the first image display device 70 operates in a manner in which expectations for a jackpot are high (for example, large movements or a manner similar to a jackpot). At the same time (see FIG. 215(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, a predetermined sound effect is output. It should be noted that the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the ready-to-reach performance of the performance pattern 70a, and in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances of the performance pattern 70a.

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the third hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational operation (production operation). (See FIG. 215(e)). In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 continues to be performed.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 215(f)). At this time, the first movable member 73 may continue to perform the pre-read preview effect.

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 215(g)).

After that, at the timing of P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without the pre-reading preview performance by the first movable member 73 being executed, as shown in FIG. 215(g). state is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 215(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". 1. The variable display of special symbols starts. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 215(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 215(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Note that, at the timings of P8 to P11, the pre-read preview performance (the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P10, when the stop time of the special symbol passes, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. "3" directly becomes "0". Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B2 is erased. T12 is erased with one frame of non-animation. All the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (FIG. 215) (see (h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 known to the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 known to the production control unit 130m is "3", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2. Moreover, the hold icon T12 is deleted from the first hold icon display area 70B2 without being shifted and displayed from the first hold icon display area 70B2 to 70B1.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T11 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol continues, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the first movable member 73 performs a preview preview performance. Specifically, a motion effect of the first movable member 73 is performed according to the preview scenario, and a sound effect is output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 215(h)). In this way, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued, and the pre-read preview effect and scrolling of the background image by the first movable member 73 are continued.

Thereafter, at timing P13, the pre-read preview effect by the first movable member 73 is temporarily stopped, and the icon change effect is executed, so that the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed. Specifically, the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a red character icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 215(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, a variable performance ( The first movable member 73 performs the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the icon change performance) also in the case where the expectation level is suggested by the pre-read preview performance. Then, the pre-read preview performance ends at the timing when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a stops displaying, and the icon change performance ends. Here, in specific example 7, the effect control unit 130m normally receives a command before the target pending memory is consumed, and at this time, it is possible to continue executing the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory. It has become.

As in the modification shown in FIG. 216, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m at the timing of P10, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the fluctuating effect executed during display (target of expectation level suggested by pre-read effect), icon change effect and pre-read preview effect (motion effect of first movable member 73 and light emitting effect) are continued in accordance with the preview scenario. The prefetch effect may be ended without being executed. If the pre-reading performance is not to be executed continuously, the execution of the pre-reading preview performance is stopped at timing P12, and the performance mode is changed to a performance mode such as mode A background only, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the pre-reading preview performance. Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which had been changed into a character due to the icon change effect, is changed to a normal mode (CD), which is a mode of presentation with low expectations for a jackpot.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, at timings P7 to P9, the production control unit 130m normally receives commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the main control unit 110m may receive the production command. The same process as in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, at the timing of P10, the first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0". As explained above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "1", that is, the discrepancy between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is " 3'', the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

In specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P12. In this way, in specific examples 5 to 7, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Further, during a predetermined period, the performance symbol 70a whose variable performance has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and it is also possible to maintain the performance symbol 70a in a temporarily stopped state.

As described above, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (for example, three more than a predetermined number (for example, one)) are displayed in the hold icon display area. If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the first reservation information), the predetermined number of reservations will be displayed without displaying the number of reservation icons that are one less than the specific number. A number of pending icons are now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, four) of hold icons (the first If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of pending items reaches a predetermined number while displaying the pending information (holding information), the number of pending items will be displayed as a predetermined number without displaying a holding icon that is one less than the specific number. Also, two fewer pending icons are displayed, and then a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 5 to 7 shown in FIGS. 210 to 215, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is three more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. (for example, 4), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations is one and two fewer than the specific number. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items without displaying . Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 8 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 217 and 218. FIG. 217 is a timing chart 4 when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 215(a) to (h) correspond to timing charts 4 (a) to (h) in FIG. 213. This is an example of a performance.

Note that the specific example 8 in FIG. 218 is the same as the specific example 5 in FIG. 210 from the timings P0 to P11, so the explanation will be omitted.

At timing P12, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" and the first special symbol The variable display of will start. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the state is as shown in FIG. 218(g).

Next, at timing P13, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state shown in FIG. 218(g) is maintained.

At this time, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", and even if the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed (a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation in P12), ), the temporary stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues (see FIG. 218(h)). Furthermore, the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol may continue to fluctuate. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). In addition, the look-ahead effect continues to be executed. In this way, the customer waiting demonstration effect is not performed on the first image display device 70 even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the change in P12.

As described above, according to the specific example 8 shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, when a predetermined state in which a command is not normally received in the production control unit 130m occurs while the variation production of the production symbol 70a is being performed, The performance pattern 70a after the fluctuating performance can be displayed in an oscillating state, and the oscillating state of the performance pattern 70a can be continued even after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuating performance, thereby providing a customer-waiting demonstration performance. It is no longer executed. Therefore, it becomes easier to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players and to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

As shown in FIG. 219, since the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m is "0", the state may be shifted to a customer waiting state (game waiting state). When the performance control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the special The symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol comes to a permanent stop in a losing mode (for example, turned off).

Here, when the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting command (customer waiting state designation command), the production pattern 70a may be permanently stopped instead of continuing the temporary stop display of the production pattern 70a. In this case, all the performance symbols 70a including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position (the performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed at the stop position (main stop), and the special The symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), and the first lamp symbol comes to a final stop in a loss mode (extinguished). Even in this case, the customer waiting demonstration performance is not performed on the first image display device 70.

As described above, according to the modification of the specific example 8 shown in FIG. All the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbols 70a that are deviated from the predetermined stop position are displayed at the stop position (actual stop). It has become. Therefore, it is possible to notify the player that the variable performance has ended (transition to the customer waiting state), and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that at timings P7, P11, and P13, the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m did not send the command. Even if the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m displays commands (stop commands, start commands) sent from the main control section 110m. The same process will be performed when the message cannot be received normally.

Here, a case has been described in which the production control unit 130m receives the customer waiting state designation command at the timing of P14 when the first pending number stored (understood) is "3", but the first pending number is "3". Even when the customer waiting state designation command is received in any of the states "4", "2", and "1", the basic flow is the same as described above.

(Specific example 9 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 9 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 and 221. FIG. 220 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 221(a) to (h) are productions corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart of FIG. 220. This is an example.

Note that specific example 8 in FIG. 218 and specific example 9 in FIG. 221 differ in that the command received at the timing of P14 is an opening designation command, so the explanation of the common parts will be omitted here, and the different parts will be explained. I will only explain.

At the timing of P14, when the special symbol stop time elapses, a jackpot game (special game) is started. When the production control unit 130m receives the opening designation command transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m remains “3”, and the jackpot game Processing is performed to start the opening performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E remains "3", and is displayed on the effect pattern 70a and the icon display area. The pending icon T1 and the icon TH are erased, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect are completed. In addition, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode (“248”), the first lamp symbol comes to a final stop in a loss mode (for example, turned off), and the opening effect image is displayed (Fig. 221 ( h)).

After that, during the jackpot game or after the end of the jackpot game (time saving game state, variable probability game state), if the production control unit 130m can normally receive the first special symbol storage designation command from the main control unit 110m, The first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E is updated to the number according to the command using one frame of non-animation (see FIG. 221(j)). . Note that FIG. 221(j) shows a case where the number of pending commands at the start is "1". At this time, no matter what combination of performance symbols 70a results in a jackpot, a predetermined (same) performance symbol 70a is displayed. For example, even if you hit the jackpot with the combination of the production symbols 70a of "777", or hit the jackpot with the combination of "222", the production symbols 70a of "135" in the same sequence as shown in FIG. 221(j) Is displayed. By doing so, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the performance control section 130m, and it becomes possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, at the timing of P7 to P13, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m, the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m are displayed for production control. The same process as in the case where the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, a case has been described in which the opening designation command is received at the timing of P14 when the first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "3", but the first pending number is "4". ”, “2”, or “1” when the opening designation command is received, the basic flow is the same as described above.

As described above, according to the specific example 9 shown in FIGS. 220 and 221, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the predetermined All the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production), including the performance symbols 70a that are shifted from the stop position that is currently in play, are not displayed at the stop position (actual stop), and the jackpot game is played. The opening performance image will be displayed. Therefore, the opening performance is not hindered by the performance symbols, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 10 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A tenth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 223. FIG. 222 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 223(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the image, scrolling is started.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B4 as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from the minimum size) (see FIG. 223(a)).

In specific example 10, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the first hold memory corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 223(a). Specifically, the background image changes to a look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image with the word "ZONE" scrolling left and right is displayed, and a look-ahead zone production (normal zone production) in which zone BGM is output. ) is being executed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 223(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 223(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 223(c)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 223(d)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 223(f)).

Note that the pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed at timings P0 to P6. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the effect pattern 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performing operation).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 223(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 223(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 223(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T13 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 223(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T13 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Furthermore, the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp pattern is not continued, but the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (Fig. 223 (see (h)).

Note that when the surplus reservation icon T1 is deleted and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus reservation icon T1 may be left as is and the necessary reservation icon T1 is displayed in a shift manner.

At the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) Based on the target of the pre-reading effect), normal zone effects (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are not continuously executed in accordance with the preview scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a performance mode such as Mode A background, which has a lower level of expectation for a jackpot than the look-ahead performance (see FIG. 223(h)). In this way, specific example 10 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory has been digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 223(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”.The variation is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. Based on the effect (object of prefetch effect), normal zone effects (display of prefetch zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) may be continuously executed along with the preview scenario.

(Specific example 11 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 11 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 222 and 224. FIG. 222 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 224(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 10 in FIG. 223 and the specific example 11 in FIG. 224 differ in that a prefetching effect production is performed as a prefetching preview production instead of the prefetching zone production, and an icon change production is also performed. Here, we will omit the explanation of the common parts and only explain the different parts.

In specific example 10, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 223(a). In specific example 11, a prefetch effect presentation and an icon change presentation are executed as the prefetch effects. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Further, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, the variable display of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the production pattern 70a is such that a part of the decorative part moves or the whole or a part expands and contracts as in the present embodiment. After preparatory operations such as these are performed, scrolling is started (see FIG. 224(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. In addition, an icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon continues to be executed. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 224(d)). At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation). (See FIG. 224(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 224(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 224(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 becomes "2". , the state shown in FIG. 224(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 224(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the prefetch effect presentation (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without going through "2". Furthermore, the surplus hold icon T3 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all the effect patterns 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 224(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T3 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B3 without being shifted and displayed from the pending icon display area 70B3 to 70B2.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display areas 70B1 and 70B2 are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the corresponding icon. Displayed as TH. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 224(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 224(i)).

At the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) Based on the pre-read effect (target of the pre-read effect), the pre-read effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (pending icon change effect or the icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the preview scenario. do not. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the look-ahead effect performance is not executed, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background, which has a lower level of expectation for a jackpot than the look-ahead performance (see FIG. 224(h)). Further, the hold icon T1, which was a blue character icon, becomes a normal CD image hold icon T1. In this way, specific example 11 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”.The variation is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. Based on the performance (target of the look-ahead performance), the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) are continued in accordance with the preview scenario. You can also execute it by

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A twelfth specific example in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 and 225. FIG. 222 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 225(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 203. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 12 in FIG. 225 differs from the specific example 11 in FIG. 224 in that a pre-reading effect (action effect or issue effect) is executed by the first movable member 73 as a pre-reading preview effect, so they are common here. The explanation of the parts will be omitted and only the different parts will be explained.

In specific example 12, based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 225(a), a pre-read effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance. In specific example 12, a performance by the first movable member 73 and an icon change performance are executed as the look-ahead performance. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Further, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 225(d)).

In addition, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern is started, and a movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-read preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed above the first image display device 70 operates in a manner in which expectations for a jackpot are high (for example, large movements or a manner similar to a jackpot). At the same time, the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, sound effects are output. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 225(d)). Note that the pre-read preview performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed in a period before the ready-to-reach performance of the performance pattern 70a, and in a partial period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances of the performance pattern 70a.

Further, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is performing a predetermined action effect. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 225(e)). In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 continues to be performed.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 225(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period will be extended. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued (see FIG. 225(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2" without the pre-read preview effect being executed by the operation of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 225). g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 225(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P9, the pre-read preview performance (the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" without passing from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. It becomes "1" directly. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "1" without passing through "2". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 225(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that is known by the main control unit 110m and the first pending number U1 that is known by the production control unit 130m is "2", the pending icon T1 is It is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the pending icon display area 70B.

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 225(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P11, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 225(i)).

At the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) The first movable member 73 does not continue to perform the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance or the icon change performance) based on the pre-read performance (object of the pre-read performance) according to the preview scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P10, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-read notice performance, and the first movable member 73 stands still at the standby position, and the light is turned off or the light emission effect is performed in a more modest manner than the pre-read notice performance. As shown in FIG. 225(h), the presentation mode is changed to one in which the level of expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead presentation (see FIG. 225(h)). Further, the hold icon T1, which was a blue character icon, becomes a normal CD image hold icon T1. In this way, specific example 11 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P10, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the first pending number U1 becomes “0”.The variation is executed during the variation display of the special symbol. Based on the performance (target of the pre-read performance), the first movable member 73 may continuously perform the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) in accordance with the preview scenario.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, at timings P7 to P9, the production control unit 130m normally receives commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the main control unit 110m may receive the production command. The same process as in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, at the timing of P10, the first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1". As explained above, when the first hold number changes from "4" to "2" and when the first hold number changes from "2" to "0", that is, the hold that the main control unit 110m knows If the discrepancy between the number and the number of reservations grasped by the production control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period before timing P10. In this manner, in specific examples 10 to 12, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is not performed during the predetermined period. Further, during a predetermined period, the performance symbol 70a whose variable performance has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and it is also possible to maintain the performance symbol 70a in a temporarily stopped state.

In this way, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (two more than a predetermined number (for example, one)) ( If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the first reservation information), if the production control section The required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner, without shifting display of the pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (the first If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the reservation information), the production control unit 130m displays the number of reservation icons one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number of reservation icons. A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 10 to 12 shown in FIGS. 222 to 225, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. (for example, 3), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 13 in the case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 226 and 227. FIG. 226 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 227(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the image, scrolling is started.

Next, at timing P1, a game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T14 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from the minimum size) in the first pending icon display area 70B4 (see FIG. 227(a)).

In specific example 13, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the first hold memory corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 227(a). Specifically, the background image changes to a look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image with the word "ZONE" scrolling left and right is displayed, and a look-ahead zone production (normal zone production) in which zone BGM is output. ) is being executed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See Figure 227(a)).

Thereafter, at timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 227(b)).

Then, at timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("248") (see FIG. 227(c)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 227(d)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 227(f)).

Note that the pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) is continuously executed at timings P0 to P6. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the effect pattern 70a is performing a variable effect, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performing operation).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the zone effect (display of the prefetch zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, and the prefetch zone effect is continuously executed (see FIG. 227(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 227(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "2".

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 227(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Thereafter, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 227(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1".

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 227(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Next, at timing P12, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. “3” directly becomes “0”. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 227(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that the main control unit 110m knows and the first pending number U1 that the production control unit 130m knows is "3", the surplus pending icon T1 is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the look-ahead zone effect, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (Fig. 227(h) )reference).

Note that when the surplus reservation icon T1 is deleted and the necessary reservation icon T1 is shifted and displayed, the surplus reservation icon T1 may be left as is and the necessary reservation icon T1 is displayed in a shift manner.

At the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) Based on the target of the pre-reading effect), normal zone effects (display of the pre-reading zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) are not continuously executed in accordance with the preview scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the look-ahead zone performance is erased and changed to a performance mode such as mode A background, which has a lower level of expectation for a jackpot than the look-ahead performance (see FIG. 227(h)). In this way, specific example 13 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory has been digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

Thereafter, at timing P13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 227(i)).

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the effect (object of prefetch effect), normal zone effects (display of prefetch zone background, display of blue zone image, output of zone BGM) may be continuously executed along with the preview scenario.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 14 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 226 and 228. FIG. 226 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 228(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

Note that specific example 13 in FIG. 227 and specific example 14 in FIG. 228 are different in that a prefetching effect production is performed as a prefetching preview production instead of the prefetching zone production, and an icon change production is also performed. Here, we will omit the explanation of the common parts and only explain the different parts.

In specific example 13, a look-ahead effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the hold memory corresponding to the hold icon T12 in FIG. 227(a). In specific example 14, a prefetch effect production and an icon change production are executed as the prefetch effects. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Further, an icon change effect is being executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 228(d)).

In addition, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first lamp symbol is started, and a pre-read effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF (blue EF) is displayed at the lower rear of the production pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. In addition, the icon change effect in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon continues to be executed (see FIG. 228(d)). At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 228(e)).

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 228(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period is extended, and the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern are continued. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Furthermore, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect continues (see FIG. 228(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 becomes "2". , the state shown in FIG. 228(g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 228(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Thereafter, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. Therefore, the prefetch effect production (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) is not executed, except that the display of the first pending number U1 on the first special symbol pending display 63 becomes "1". , the state shown in FIG. 228(g) is maintained.

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 228(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Note that at the timings of P8 and P11, the prefetch effect production (display of the effect image EF, output of the effect sound effect) may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P12, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. “3” directly becomes “0”. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B3 is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 228(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that the main control unit 110m knows and the first pending number U1 that the production control unit 130m knows is "3", the surplus pending icon T1 is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 228(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 228(i)).

At the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) Based on the pre-read effect (target of the pre-read effect), the pre-read effect effect (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change effect (pending icon change effect or the icon change effect) are continuously executed according to the preview scenario. do not. Specifically, at the timing of P13, the prefetch effect performance is not executed, and the effect mode is changed to a mode A background or the like, which has a lower level of expectation for a jackpot than the prefetch effect (see FIG. 228(h)). Further, the hold icon T1, which was a blue character icon, becomes a normal CD image hold icon T1. In this way, the specific example 14 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the performance (target of the look-ahead performance), the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) are continued in accordance with the preview scenario. You can also execute it by

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 15 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 226 and 229. FIG. 226 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 229(a) to (i) are productions corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart of FIG. 203. This is an example.

Note that the specific example 15 in FIG. 229 differs from the specific example 14 in FIG. 228 in that the first movable member 73 executes a pre-reading effect (action effect or issue effect) as a pre-reading preview effect, so the same is common here. The explanation of the parts will be omitted and only the different parts will be explained. In addition, in the specific example 15, a look-ahead effect production can also be performed, but since it is the same as the specific example 14, the explanation is omitted.

In specific example 15, a pre-read effect (advance notification) indicating that the expectation level of a jackpot is high is executed in advance based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending icon T12 in FIG. 229(a). In specific example 15, a performance by the first movable member 73 and an icon change performance are executed as the look-ahead performance. Specifically, an action effect in which the first movable member 73 performs a predetermined action and a light emission effect in which the first movable member 73 emits light are executed, and a sound effect is output. Further, an icon change effect is executed in which the pending icon T1 changes to a blue character icon or a red character icon.

At the timing of P4, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first special The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Additionally, the four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 229(d)).

In addition, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern is started, and a movable effect by the first movable member 73 is executed as a pre-read preview effect. Specifically, the first movable member 73 installed above the first image display device 70 operates in a manner in which expectations for a jackpot are high (for example, large movements or a manner similar to a jackpot). At the same time (see FIG. 229(d)), the first movable member 73 emits light. Also, sound effects are output. In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the operation of the first movable member 73 can be executed continuously in a partial period of each variable performance in multiple variable performances of the performance pattern 70a in the period before the reach performance of the performance pattern 70a. be.

Further, the first pending icon T13 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 changes to a blue character icon, and the blue character icon is performing a predetermined action effect. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 229(e)). In addition, the pre-read preview performance by the first movable member 73 continues to be performed.

Then, at timing P6, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 229(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period will be extended. The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion). Further, the pending icon T1, which has become a blue character icon, is maintained and the icon change effect is continued (see FIG. 229(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first reservation number U1 of the first special symbol reservation display 63 is displayed as "2" without the pre-read preview effect being executed by the operation of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 229). g) is maintained.

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 229(g) is maintained, except that the display of the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "2".

Thereafter, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". The variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design designation command, first special symbol variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and the process for starting the variable performance is not performed. At this time, the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 becomes "1" without the pre-reading preview effect being executed by the operation of the first movable member 73 (see FIG. 229). The condition g) is maintained.

Then, at timing P11, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, the state shown in FIG. 229(g) is maintained, except that the first reservation number U1 on the first special symbol reservation display 63 is "1".

Note that, at the timings of P8 and P11, the pre-read preview performance (the motion performance and light emission performance of the first movable member 73) by the first movable member 73 may be continuously performed.

Next, at timing P12, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" and "1" without passing through one frame of non-animation. “3” directly becomes “0”. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes directly from "3" to "0" without going through "2" and "1". Furthermore, the surplus pending icon T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and all performance symbols 70a (past The effect pattern 70a) that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the variable effect is displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position (see FIG. 229(h)). In this way, when the discrepancy between the first pending number U1 that the main control unit 110m knows and the first pending number U1 that the production control unit 130m knows is "3", the surplus pending icon T1 is deleted from the first pending icon display area 70B without being shifted and displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Then, one of the necessary pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B is shifted and displayed as an animation of 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. Moreover, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp pattern continues. Then, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation (see FIG. 229(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P13, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the shift display of the icons is completed, the effect pattern 70a will be in a state of being scrolled at high speed. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 229(i)).

At the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variable production (which is executed during the variable display of the special symbol in which the first pending number U1 becomes “0”) The first movable member 73 does not continue to perform the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance or the icon change performance) based on the pre-read performance (object of the pre-read performance) according to the preview scenario. Specifically, at the timing of P12, the first movable member 73 does not execute the pre-read notice effect, and the first movable member 73 stands still in the standby position, and the light is turned off or the light emission effect is performed in a more modest manner than the pre-read notice effect. As shown in FIG. 229(h), the presentation mode is changed to one in which the level of expectation for a jackpot is lower than that of the look-ahead presentation (see FIG. 229(h)). Further, the hold icon T1, which was a blue character icon, becomes a normal CD image hold icon T1. In this way, the specific example 14 is a case where the effect control unit 130m normally receives the command after the target pending memory is digested, and at this time, the prefetch effect based on the target pending memory is not continued to be executed. Or, the pre-read effect is changed to one with lower expectations for a jackpot than the previously executed pre-read effect, or the pre-read effect is deleted.

In addition, at the timing of P13, if the production control unit 130m successfully receives various commands from the main control unit 110m, the variation executed during the variation display of the special symbol where the first pending number U1 becomes “0”. Based on the performance (target of the pre-read performance), the first movable member 73 may continuously perform the pre-read preview performance and the icon change performance (the pending icon change performance and the icon change performance) in accordance with the preview scenario.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, at timings P7 to P11, the production control unit 130m normally receives commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m. Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the main control unit 110m may receive the production command. The same process as in the case where the effect control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command (stop command, start command) will be performed.

According to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, at the timing of P12, the first pending number stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0". As explained above, when the first number of reservations changes from "4" to "1", that is, the discrepancy between the number of reservations known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reservations known by the production control unit 130m is " 3'', the basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

In specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, a predetermined state in which the first command cannot be received normally occurs at timing P7, and the predetermined state continues for a predetermined period up to timing P12. In this way, in specific examples 13 to 15, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a is not executed during the predetermined period. Further, during a predetermined period, the performance symbol 70a whose variable performance has been completed can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and it is also possible to maintain the performance symbol 70a in a temporarily stopped state.

In this way, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (two more than a predetermined number (for example, one)) ( If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the first reservation information), if the production control section The required number of pending icons (for example, the first and second pending icons) are displayed in a shifted manner, without shifting display of the pending icons. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, in the hold icon display area, a specific number (for example, three) of hold icons (the first If the production control unit 130m receives a command to start a variable display in which the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number while displaying the reservation information), the production control unit 130m displays the number of reservation icons one less than the specific number, and then displays the predetermined number of reservation icons. A hold icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific examples 13 to 15 shown in FIGS. 226 to 229, in the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, a specific number that is two more than a predetermined number (for example, one) is displayed. (for example, 3), if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which the number of reservations becomes a predetermined number, the number of reservations that is one less than the specific number is displayed. It is designed to display a predetermined number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 16 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 230 and 231. FIG. 230 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 231(a) to (j) correspond to (a) to (j) in timing chart 6 of FIG. 230. This is an example of production.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, while the fluctuating BGM is being output, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. becomes. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B1 are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. . In addition, variable display of the first lamp pattern is started on the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation.

Next, at timing P1, when the icon shift display is completed, a pre-read zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 231(a)).

Then, at the timing of P2, when the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The process for updating the first pending number U1 stored (kept) by the unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 231(b)).

Thereafter, at timing P3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 231(c)).

Next, at timing P4, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Figure 231 (see (d)).

Thereafter, at timing P5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", that is, a process is performed to start the variable performance without changing the first pending number U1.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon display area Second in 70B, a hold icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 231(e)).

Then, the necessary two pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 231(e)).

Thereafter, at timing P6, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 231(f)).

Next, at timing P7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance (the SP ready-to-win performance ends), the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a reach-missing mode ("161"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 231(g)).

Then, at timing P8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (extinguished). The main stop is performed (see FIG. 231(h)).

After that, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. One pending icon T1 displayed in the area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames and displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 231(i)).

Next, at timing P10, when the icon shift display is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon TH is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 231 ( See j).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2 to P4, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (command at the time of winning, command at the time of stopping) transmitted from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, the production control unit 130m Even if the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 cannot normally receive the production commands sent from the main control section 110m, the production control will display the commands (winning commands, stop commands) sent from the main control section 110m. The same process as in the case where the unit 130m cannot receive normally is performed.

Here, at the timing of P5, a case has been described in which the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", but the first pending number U1 is "0". If the first pending number U1 changes from "2" to "0", if the first pending number U1 changes from "3" to "3", in other words, the main control unit 110m If the number of reservations (kept) and the number of reservations stored (kept) by the production control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

As described above, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 230 to 231, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, the predetermined number of pending icons (first pending information) is displayed. When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a number, display one more (for example, two) pending icons than a predetermined number, and then shift-display those pending icons. A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of the number of reservations is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display in which is a predetermined number, the predetermined number of pending numbers is displayed without displaying the number of pending numbers that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, two). It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example 16 shown in FIGS. 230 to 231, the pending icon (first pending information) is not displayed in the pending icon display area 70C, but the pending number is "0" while the icon is being displayed. When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display, it displays a number of hold icons that are one more than "0" (for example, 1), and then shifts and displays the hold icons. The hold icon is no longer displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example shown in FIGS. 230 and 231, while the sub-first pending display 83 or the first pending number display area 70E is displaying the pending number of "0", the pending number is "0". When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display, the number of pending items of "0" is displayed (maintained) without displaying the number of pending items that is one more than "0" (for example, 1). ). Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

(Specific example 17 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 17 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 and 233. FIG. 232 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 233(a) to (f) are productions corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart of FIG. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". The two pending icons T1 displayed in 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation.

Next, at timing P1, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, a look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and an icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to a prefetch zone background, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and the zone BGM is output. Further, the first hold icon T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B changes to a blue character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See FIG. 233(a)).

Then, at timing P2, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The process for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 233(b)).

Thereafter, at the timing of P3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "3". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The process for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 233(b)).

Next, at timing P4, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control The process for updating the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m remains at "1" (see FIG. 233(b)).

Then, at timing P5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (effecting operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 233(c)).

Thereafter, at timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the first lamp pattern is displayed in a variable manner. The period will be extended. In addition, the zone effect (display of the pre-read zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of zone BGM) is maintained, the pre-read zone effect continues, the blue character icon is maintained, and the icon change effect continues (Figure 233 (see (d)).

Thereafter, at timing P7, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". If the production control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon display area The hold icon T1 (CD icon) is additionally displayed as a non-animation for one frame (displayed in normal size from the beginning) in the second to fourth positions of 70B. In addition, all the performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable production) including the performance symbol 70a that is shifted from the stop position are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position ( (See FIG. 233(e)).

Then, the necessary four pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Is displayed. In addition, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started while the variable display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern continues, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 233(e)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) is started. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, and a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the hold icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (Fig. 233(f)).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2 to P6, the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the commands (winning command, stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but based on the reception of this command, Even if the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the production commands sent from the production control unit 130m, the commands sent from the main control unit 110m (winning command, stop command) , start command) is not received normally by the production control unit 130m.

Here, at the timing of P7, a case has been described in which the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3", but the first pending number U1 is "1". When the first reservation number U1 changes from "0" to "2", when the first reservation number U1 changes from "0" to "1", in other words, the main control unit 110m stores If the number of reservations (understood) is greater than the number of reservations stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m, the basic flow will be the same as the above explanation.

In this way, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, when a predetermined number (for example, one) of the pending icons (first pending information) are displayed in the pending icon display area, the pending number is a predetermined number. If the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is a specific number (for example, two) that is greater than the specific number, display a hold icon that is one more than the specific number (for example, three), and then By shifting and displaying these pending icons, a specific number of pending icons are displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, while a predetermined number (for example, one) of the number of reservations is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the time of starting a variable display in which is a specific number (for example, two) that is larger than a predetermined number, it displays a pending number that is one more than the specific number (for example, three). It is now possible to display a specific number of pending items without having to do so. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, although the hold icon (first hold information) is not displayed in the hold icon display area, when the hold icon (first hold information) is displayed, the hold number is a predetermined number (for example, 1) When the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display, it displays one more (for example, two) pending icons than the predetermined number, and then shifts and displays those pending icons. By doing so, a predetermined number of pending icons will be displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to the specific example 17 shown in FIGS. 232 and 233, when the number of reservations of "0" is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E, the number of reservations reaches a predetermined number ( For example, if the production control unit 130m receives a command at the start of a variable display that is 1), the predetermined number of pending numbers will be displayed without displaying the pending number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2). It is designed to be displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

According to the above-described specific example, if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command while the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the variation period of the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern , the output period of the fluctuating BGM is extended (continued) compared to the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which no performance is performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, while the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a is being extended (continued), the scrolling of the background image, the pending icon, and the rotating operation of the icon are continued. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming extremely static and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 70a, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the pre-read notice performance (icon change performance, pre-read zone performance) is continued (executed). Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, even if the pre-reading notice presentation (icon change presentation, pre-reading zone presentation) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a, the presentation pattern During the extension (continuation) of the temporary suspension period 70a, the preview mode (type of icon, type of zone performance) of the pre-read preview performance does not change. Therefore, there is no abnormality in the progress of the pre-read preview performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned specific example, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, if the production is deviated from the predetermined stop position. The variable display is started after all the effect patterns 70a including the pattern 70a (the effect patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect) are displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed). . Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable performance can be made better than when the variable display is started with the performance symbols 70a deviated from the stop position, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the specific example described above, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the lamp pattern are not stopped and displayed. The variable display continues. Therefore, it is not necessary to perform complicated processing such as stopping and displaying the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol, and it becomes possible to reduce the control load. Furthermore, even if the performance symbol 70a is displayed at the stop position (momentarily derived and displayed), the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol can inform the player that a variable performance is being performed, increasing the interest of the game. It becomes possible to improve the performance.

Furthermore, according to the above-mentioned specific example, if the production control unit 130m normally receives the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a, the icon is displayed at the normal time (when the stop command is not received). It is designed to be erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than the 10 frames of animation (1 frame of non-animation). Therefore, it is possible to make the newly executed variable performance less likely to be hindered by the deletion of the icon, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, the production control unit 130m normally issues the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a in which the pre-read notice production (icon change production, pre-read zone production) is continued (executed). If it is received, the pre-read preview performance can be executed even in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a communication error occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands, the pre-read preview performance will not end, and the game can be improved by avoiding inconveniences that may cause player dissatisfaction. It becomes possible to improve the interest of

Further, according to the above-mentioned specific example, the production control unit 130m normally issues the start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a in which the pre-read notice production (icon change production, pre-read zone production) is continued (executed). If the notification is received, it is possible to perform a new variable performance that corresponds to the scenario of the pre-read preview performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, the progress of the pre-read preview performance will not be abnormal, thereby avoiding inconveniences that may increase player dissatisfaction. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Specific example 18 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 18 in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command will be described using FIGS. 234 and 235. FIG. 234 is a timing chart when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, and FIGS. 235(a) to (j) are productions corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart of FIG. 234. This is an example.

First, at timing P0, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", the variable display of the first special symbol starts. . Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. The two pending icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing the preparation operation.

Next, at timing P1, the shift display of the pending icon is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image is continuing and the variable display of the production pattern 70a has started, the pending icon and the icon are in a state where they are performing a rotation operation (production operation).

Then, at timing P2, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2". If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control No process is performed to update the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the unit 130m, and it remains at "1".

At this time, since the winning command for which the first pending number U1 is "2" has not been received, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E is The value remains "1", and the pending icon T1 is not displayed at the second location corresponding to the first pending number "2" in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 235(a)).

Thereafter, at the timing of P3, the game ball enters the first starting port 45, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "3". When the production control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special symbol storage designation command, first starting opening winning designation command (preread designation command)) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit 130m The stored (kept) first reservation number U1 changes from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. In the second area of the area 70B, which corresponds to "2" of the first pending number U1 for which the winning command could not be received, the pending icon T1 is not displayed, and 3 corresponds to "3" of the first pending number U1. Second, one hold icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 235(b)).

Next, at timing P4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("814"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 235(c)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 235(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "2". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production symbol specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "3" to "2" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. The second pending icon T1 corresponding to the first pending number "2" for which the winning command could not be received in the area 70B is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning) and displayed. The three pending icons T1 are shifted and displayed toward the icon display area 70C as an animation of 20 frames, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 235(e)).

Thereafter, at timing P7, the shift display of the hold icon T1 is completed. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotational movement (effect movement). (See Figure 235(f)).

Next, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("225"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 235(g)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern is in a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop is made at (see FIG. 235(h)).

After that, at timing P10, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the first The variable display of special symbols begins. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". When the production control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol storage designation command, production design specification command, first special symbol variation pattern specification command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the production control unit The first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 displayed on the sub-first pending display 83 and the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the first pending icon is displayed. The two pending icons T1 displayed in the area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern is started, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing a preparatory operation (see FIG. 235(i)).

Next, at timing P11, when the shift display of the pending icon T1 is completed, the icon change effect is started. Specifically, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the winning command) changes to a blue character icon. At the same time, a changing sound is output. At this time, since the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, the icon Th is in a state where it is performing a rotational movement (effect movement) (FIG. 235). See j).

Thereafter, when the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon TH is erased at the timing when the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, at the timing of P2, although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command. The case where the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 cannot normally receive the command is the same as the case where the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the command (winning command) sent from the main control section 110m. processing will be performed.

Here, at the timing of P3, when the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received in which the first pending number becomes "3". As explained above, when the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is “1” and a winning command is received in which the first pending number U1 becomes “4”, the production control unit Regarding the case where the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by 130m is "0" and a winning command is received in which the first pending number U1 is "2", "3", or "4". The basic flow is the same as the above explanation.

In this manner, according to the 18th specific example shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the hold icon (first hold information ) is not displayed, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reservations is one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), the predetermined number of reservation icons in the reservation icon display area The hold icon is not displayed in the area corresponding to (for example, the second) the hold icon, but is displayed in the area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number of the hold icon display areas. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, a number (for example, one) smaller than a predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E. ), if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that makes the pending number one more than the predetermined number (for example, three), display the predetermined number of pending prizes. Instead, it displays a specific number of pending items. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

In this manner, according to the 18th specific example shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the hold icon (first hold information ) is not displayed, if the production control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of pending prizes is a specific number (for example, four) that is more than a predetermined number, a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed in the reserved icon display area. The hold icon is not displayed in the area (for example, the third) that corresponds to one less than the specific number from the corresponding area (for example, the second), and the hold icon is displayed in the area that corresponds to the specific number of the hold icon display areas (for example, 4), a hold icon is displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming less interested in the game by avoiding the inconvenience of having the player recognize the incorrect number of reservations.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, a number (for example, one) smaller than a predetermined number (for example, two) is displayed on the sub-first reservation display 83 or the first reservation number display area 70E. ), if the presentation control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the pending number becomes a specific number (for example, 4) that is more than the predetermined number, the predetermined number is one less than the specific number. It is designed to display a specific number of pending numbers without displaying a number of pending numbers. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. Furthermore, since the accurate number of pending games is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the pending number.

Further, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, a predetermined number of pending icons are not displayed in an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the pending icon display areas. If the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that makes the number of reservations a predetermined number while displaying a reservation icon in an area (for example, the third) corresponding to a specific number (for example, three) that is one more than A predetermined number of pending icons are displayed by additionally displaying a pending icon in an area corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, the second) of the icon display areas to display a specific number of pending icons, and then the predetermined number of pending icons are shifted and displayed. The icon is now displayed. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, according to specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, an area (for example, the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (for example, two) of the reserved icon display areas and a number (for example, the second) that is one more than the predetermined number ( If the number of pending icons is not displayed in the area corresponding to (for example, 3) and the pending icon is displayed in the area (for example, 4th) that corresponds to a specific number that is more than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the number of pending icons is specified. When the production control unit 130m receives a start command that is one less than the number, the area corresponding to the predetermined number (for example, the second) of the pending icon display areas and the number one more than the predetermined number ( For example, add hold icons to the area corresponding to 3) to display a specific number of hold icons, then shift and display those hold icons to display a hold icon that is one less than the specific number. It is supposed to be done. Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

Furthermore, according to the specific example 18 shown in FIGS. 234 and 235, the icon corresponding to the first pending memory in which the production control unit 130m could not normally receive the command at the time of winning is displayed as a pending icon. Although the icon change effect is not executed, the icon change effect can be executed while the icon is being displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the icon change effect is not executed due to failure to receive the winning command normally, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of commands occurs in the production control board 130 while the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (4 or 3) of pending memories, the first special On the symbol reservation display 63 (first display), the number of reservations continues to be displayed in a decreasing manner even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the abnormality occurs, the effect control board 130 is in a state where the main control board 110 has a reserved memory of a specific number (2 or more fewer than the main control board 110) that is smaller than the predetermined number (4 or 3). When a command is successfully received in the first image display device 70 (second display), a pending display is displayed in which the number of pending icons decreases step by step from a predetermined number to a specific number (for example, the number of pending icons decreases from 4 to 2 or 1, 3 to 1) are not displayed.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the pending display (display of the number of pending, pending icon) makes it possible to perform a pre-reading effect (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and the effect can be performed while the pre-reading effect using the pending display is being executed. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the control board 130, it is possible to continue executing the pre-read effect by displaying a hold until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the specific example described above, it is possible to perform a look-ahead effect (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a jackpot in advance by using a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a look-ahead zone background), When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 while executing a pre-reading effect using the background display, the pre-reading effect using the background display can continue to be executed until the command is normally received. .
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, it is possible to perform a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance by displaying text (for example, a caption or text such as "ZONE"), and executing the pre-reading effect by displaying the text. When an abnormality occurs in the performance control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the pre-read performance by character display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, the expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF) enables a pre-reading effect (advance notification) to increase the jackpot expectation level, and the expectation level display When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of the pre-read performance, the pre-read performance based on the expectation level display can be continuously executed until the command is normally received.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as advance notification to increase the jackpot expectation level, a pre-reading performance (for example, the first movable member 70 (such as board and frame objects, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the effect pattern, etc.), abnormal reception of commands or non-reception of commands on the effect control board 130 during the execution of the pre-read effect. When an abnormality occurs, the prefetch effect can continue to be executed until the command is received normally.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, it is possible to perform a look-ahead performance (advance notification) that increases the expectation of a jackpot in advance, and if an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of the look-ahead performance, the performance control If there is a jackpot in the pending memory that the board 130 has missed, it is possible to continue to execute the pre-read effect by displaying the pending until the command is normally received, and even if the predetermined big winning opening is opened. good.
Therefore, even when an abnormality occurs, it is possible to attract the attention of the players, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as advance notification to increase the jackpot expectation level, a pre-reading effect (for example, the first movable member 70 There are board and frame objects, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern, etc.), and commands are abnormally received or not received by the production control board 130 during the execution of the pre-read production. If a command is received normally after an error occurs, the prefetch effects that were scheduled to be executed continuously will not be performed from where they left off.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as advance notification to increase the jackpot expectation level, a pre-reading effect (for example, the first movable member 70 There are board accessories and frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern, etc.). After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a continuous look-ahead performance that spans a plurality of symbol variations based on the first pending memory, the command is stored after the first pending memory. When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, the prefetch effect that was scheduled to be executed continuously based on the predetermined pending memory is not performed from the continuation.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of commands occurs in the production control board 130 while the main control board 110 has a predetermined number (4 or 3) of pending memories, the first special The symbol reservation display 63 continues to display a decreasing number of reservations (first display) even during the occurrence of an abnormality. Then, after the abnormality occurs, the effect control board 130 is in a state where the main control board 110 has a reserved memory of a specific number (2 or more fewer than the main control board 110) that is smaller than the predetermined number (4 or 3). When a command is normally received in the first image display device 70, the number of pending items displayed in the pending number display areas 70B and 70D is displayed (a second display, for example, 4 pending icons are displayed, which gradually decreases from a predetermined number to a specific number). (from 2 or 1, from 3 to 1) is not displayed. On the other hand, in the reservation number display areas 70F and 70E of the first image display device 70, the reservation display (third display, for example, reservation number) that gradually decreases from a predetermined number to a specific number is not displayed, It is now possible to change the display to a specific number of pending items.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the performance control board 130, the performance pattern 70a whose variable performance has ended can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state (oscillating state), Even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuating performance of the performance pattern 70a, the temporary stop state (swinging state) of the performance pattern 70a is continued, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is not executed.
Therefore, it becomes easy to understand that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first suspension memory, a second suspension memory stored after the first suspension memory is stored. When the command corresponding to is normally received, in the variable display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, the pre-read performance (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory is not performed continuously. , or the pre-read effect is changed to a display with a lower level of expectation, or the pre-read effect is deleted.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs in the production control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not display the variation of the production symbols 70a. Based on the first pending memory, the command is abnormally received or not received in the performance control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect using a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a prefetch zone background). After an abnormality has occurred due to reception, when a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a will display a command corresponding to the first pending memory. The pre-reading effect (advance notification) by the background display that was scheduled to be executed continuously will not continue, or the pre-reading effect will be changed to a display with a lower expectation level, or the pre-reading effect will be deleted. It has become.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance using character displays (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE") , When a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a is executed continuously for the first pending memory. The planned pre-read effect (advance notification) by character display is not continued, the pre-read effect is changed to a display with a lower level of expectation, or the pre-read effect is deleted.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, an abnormality due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command is detected in the performance control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead performance using an expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). After the occurrence, when a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a, the command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is continuously displayed. The pre-reading effect (pre-notification) based on the expectation level display that was scheduled to be executed is not continued, or the pre-reading effect is changed to a display with a lower expectation level, or the pre-reading effect is deleted. .
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. As a prior notice to increase the expectation of a jackpot, a pre-reading performance (for example, a board accessory such as the first movable member 70, There are frame accessories, movements such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of the production pattern, etc.). Then, based on the first pending memory, abnormal reception or non-reception of a command in the production control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead production that is executed in a partial period of each variation production in a plurality of variation productions in a period before reach. After an abnormality occurs, when a command corresponding to the second pending memory stored after the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a will be performed with respect to the first pending memory. The pre-read effect (pre-notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously is not performed continuously, the pre-read effect is changed to a display with a lower expectation level, or the pre-read effect is deleted.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In addition, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the production control board 130 and there is a jackpot in the command (suspended memory) that the production control board 130 has failed to receive, the command that has been missed by the production control board 130 (suspended memory) has a jackpot, the jackpot pending memory or the jackpot pending memory is stored later. When the command corresponding to the suspended memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, a look-ahead performance (advance notification) based on the expectation display that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first suspended memory is performed. may not be performed continuously, or the pre-read effect may be changed to a display with a lower level of expectation, or the pre-read effect may be deleted.
In this case, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it becomes easier to see that there is an abnormality, and it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first pending memory, the first pending memory or the memory stored before the first pending memory is When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a, the pre-reading production (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory is displayed. can continue to be executed.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a look-ahead performance based on the first pending memory, the first pending memory or the memory stored before the first pending memory is When the command corresponding to the second pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production symbol 70a, the pre-reading production (advance notification) that was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory is displayed. It is designed not to continue running.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs in the production control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not display the variation of the production symbols 70a. Based on the first pending memory, the command is abnormally received or not received in the performance control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect using a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a prefetch zone background). After an abnormality has occurred due to reception, when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a will display the first pending memory. The pre-read effect (advance notification) by background display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory, can be executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Based on the first pending memory, the command is abnormally received or not received in the performance control board 130 during execution of the prefetch effect using a background display (for example, a background image different from that normally used, such as a prefetch zone background). After an abnormality occurs due to reception, when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a will display the first pending memory. The pre-read effect (advance notification) by background display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously for the first pending memory, is not executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance using character displays (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE") , when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the command corresponding to the first pending memory is Pre-read effects (advance notification) using character displays that were scheduled to be executed continuously can now be executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, after an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of a pre-reading performance using character displays (for example, telops and characters such as "ZONE") , when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received production pattern 70a, the command corresponding to the first pending memory is Pre-read effects (advance notification) using character displays that were scheduled to be executed continuously are not executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130, the first image display device 70 does not perform variable display of the performance symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, an abnormality due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command is detected in the performance control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead performance using an expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). After the occurrence, when a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, the first pending memory is It is now possible to continue executing the pre-reading effect (advance notification) based on the expectation level display, which was scheduled to be executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the specific example described above, when an abnormality occurs in the production control board 130 due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command, the first image display device 70 does not display the variation of the production symbols 70a. Then, based on the first pending memory, an abnormality due to an abnormal reception or non-reception of a command is detected in the performance control board 130 during execution of a look-ahead performance using an expectation level display (for example, a color effect such as a blue effect image EF). After the occurrence, if a command corresponding to the first pending memory or the second pending memory stored before the first pending memory is normally received, in the fluctuating display of the normally received performance symbol 70a, the first pending memory is The pre-reading effect (advance notification) based on the expectation level display that was scheduled to be executed continuously for 2020 will not be executed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of multiple prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) can be executed continuously, while the second pre-read effect (for example, background display, movement effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) of the plurality of pre-read effects cannot be executed continuously. There is.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of multiple prefetch effects, the first prefetch effect (for example, hold display) can be executed continuously, while the second pre-read effect (for example, background display, movement effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) of the plurality of pre-read effects cannot be executed continuously. There is.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the jackpot expectation level in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. When an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of pre-read effects, the first image display device 70 of the plurality of pre-read effects is used until the command is normally received. While the first look-ahead effect (for example, a hold display) that is executed can be continuously executed, the second look-ahead effect (for example, a hold display) that is executed using a device other than the first image display device 70 among the plurality of look-ahead effects is possible. For example, the motion performance of the first movable member 70) is not continuously performed.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during the execution of multiple prefetch effects, if the command is normally received, the first prefetch effect (for example, a pending display) among the plurality of prefetch effects ) can be executed continuously, while the second pre-read effect (for example, background display, motion effect of the first movable member 70, etc.) of the plurality of pre-read effects is not continuously executed. .
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, as a look-ahead effect (advance notice) to increase the expectation of a jackpot in advance, for example, a pending display (display of the number of holds, a hold icon), a background display (for example, a look-ahead zone background, etc.), etc. background image different from that used), character display (for example, captions and characters such as "ZONE"), expectation display (for example, color effect such as blue effect image EF), board of the first movable member 70, etc. It can be executed by combining a plurality of accessories, frame accessories, actions such as vibration of operation buttons, light emission, chance eyes of the same color of production patterns, etc. After an abnormality due to abnormal reception or non-reception of a command occurs in the performance control board 130 during execution of a plurality of pre-read effects, if a command is normally received, one of the plural pre-read effects is executed using the first image display device 70. The first look-ahead effect (for example, a hold display) can be executed continuously, while the second look-ahead effect (for example, , motion performance of the first movable member 70, etc.) are not performed continuously.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Furthermore, it is possible to avoid damaging the interests of the players. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In the above-mentioned specific example, when abnormal reception or non-reception of the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs in the production control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the variation production of the production symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect pattern 70a which is not started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T1 corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the identification part (number) constituting the production pattern 70a and the effect (EF) attached to the character are continued. ) is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In the above-mentioned specific example, if abnormal reception or non-reception of the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs in the production control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the variation production of the production symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect pattern 70a which is not started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the hold icon T1 corresponding to the hold memory is continued, and a part of the decoration (for example, a stick image SG) motion performance is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

In the above-mentioned specific example, if abnormal reception or non-reception of the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) occurs in the production control board 130 in a state where there is a pending memory, the variation production of the production symbol 70a on the first image display device 70 is changed. The effect pattern 70a which is not started and has stopped fluctuating temporarily stops in a swinging state. At this time, even if the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the display of the pending icon T corresponding to the pending memory is continued, and the motion performance of the pending icon T is executed.
Therefore, even if the performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped, it is possible to maintain the player's interest and prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

If the number of reservations stored in the main control board 110 is 2 or more smaller than the number of reservations stored in the production control board 130, the display will be displayed on the liquid crystal (first image display device, second image display device). To rewrite the number of pending icons corresponding to the number of pending commands input from the main control board 110 without performing an effect of gradually reducing the number of pending icons corresponding to the deviated number of pending icons.
Therefore, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

Advance notifications (pre-reading effects) that increase the expectation of a jackpot include, for example, pending changes, character displays for pending changes, changes in the character display for pending changes, and character displays (telops) suggesting transition to a mode consisting of multiple types. , background color change, background conversion, return of appearing characters, appearance of new characters, display of expectations based on multiple types (colors, effects, characters, etc.), predetermined effects performed during the first period (before reach) from the start of variation. (Button vibration, movement of frames and board accessories, effects, lightning, character display, specific sounds, predetermined lamp lighting) may be performed in parallel in a plurality of variable effects.

When the production control board 130 normally receives the next and subsequent stop commands through a state in which the stop command is abnormally received or not received, the production pattern 70a is displayed statically (main stop), and the production pattern 70a is displayed in a static state (main stop), and in response to the command. What is necessary is to execute display processing.

Even if the production control board 130 abnormally receives or does not receive the stop command, it is sufficient to display the background images associated with each of the plurality of production modes. At this time, in a plurality of performance modes, a common display mode (shape and color) is displayed for hold, pseudo, group notices, etc., but the degree of expectation may differ depending on the performance mode. For example, an operation image of an operation button, an operation image of an operation means such as a lever, a display of a light guide plate, a title display, etc. are displayed in a manner with different expectations for a jackpot depending on the performance mode.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, if the next command is normally received, the previous prefetch effect may not be continued and executed.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, it may be possible to execute a new effect (for example, including a change in the icon at that time) when the next command is normally received.

If the performance control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during the pre-reading performance, the pre-reading performance will continue to be displayed in the abnormally received or unreceived state. However, when the next command is normally received, it may be possible to change the display mode to a less expected display mode than the previous prefetch effect (for example, change the pending display from a blue icon to a plain display).

If the production control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving a stop command during a pre-read production that changes the background display (mode, stage), it will indicate whether the stop command is abnormally received or not received. In this state, a pre-reading effect that changes the background display (mode, stage) may be continuously displayed.

If the production control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during a look-ahead production that displays character displays (for example, telops), the production control board 130 will receive an abnormal reception or non-reception. In this state, a prefetch effect that displays text (telop) may continue to be displayed.

If the production control board 130 normally receives the next command after abnormally receiving or not receiving the stop command during the look-ahead production that displays the expected value display (color change, effect, hold), an error occurs. In the received or unreceived state, a look-ahead effect that displays an expected value display (color change, effect, pending) may continue to be executed.

When a command from the production control board 130 is missed, the display is not limited to displaying a portion of the plurality of production symbols 70a whose variable production has ended in a temporarily stopped state (swinging state), and when the variation production has ended. A part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a may be displayed in a temporarily stopped state (swinging state), and the remaining part of the plurality of effect symbols 70a may be displayed in a fully stopped state (stationary state). For example, when a command from the production control board 130 is missed, the two left and right production symbols 70a are permanently stopped while the central production symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, or the two left and right production symbols 70a are temporarily stopped. It is possible to make changes as appropriate, such as by permanently stopping the central performance pattern 70a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may be expanded/contracted. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the production pattern 70a is deviated from the stop position in the direction of shrinking (smaller than the normal size) or in the direction of expanding (smaller than the normal size). (large), it is recommended that it be displayed in the normal size at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a swings up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a does not swing and the decorative part and number part protrude from the base image. It may also be made to fluctuate as shown in FIG. In this case, if the start command is received during a temporary stop, if the decorative part or number part is out of the base image, it will fit within the base image and be displayed at the stop position. good.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state), since the effect pattern 70a is composed of only a number part (identification character), the decoration part fluctuates when the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. Although the movement (performance movement) is not performed, the performance pattern 70a is composed of a number part (identification character) and a decoration part consisting of a pattern effect image, and the design effect image is displayed when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. It may also be made to perform a fluctuating motion (direction motion).

When a command of the performance control board 130 is missed, a performance may be executed in which the identification part (number) forming the performance symbol 70a for which the variable performance has been completed is activated. In this case, the motion performance is not limited to being performed on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed, but also for performing the motion performance on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed. The motion performance may not be executed in the remaining part of the performance pattern 70a.

When a command from the production control board 130 is missed, an effect (for example, a pattern effect image ZE decorating the background of the character) accompanying a character (for example, a character image CG) constituting the production pattern 70a for which the variable production has been completed is ) is recommended. In this case, the motion performance is not limited to being performed on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed, but also for performing the motion performance on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed. The motion performance may not be executed in the remaining part of the performance pattern 70a.

When a command from the production control board 130 is missed, the decoration (for example, a stick-shaped image SG that is part of the character) attached to the character (for example, character image CG) that constitutes the production pattern 70a for which the variable production has been completed ) is recommended. In this case, the motion performance is not limited to being performed on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed, but also for performing the motion performance on a part of the plurality of performance symbols 70a for which the fluctuation performance has been completed. The motion performance may not be executed in the remaining part of the performance pattern 70a.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the production pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE, which constitute the decoration section, perform a fluctuating motion (production motion). Only one of them may be made to perform a fluctuating motion (acting motion).

When a command from the performance control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to perform a performance in which a hold display (for example, a hold icon) is activated.

When a command from the performance control board 130 is missed, it is preferable to perform a performance in which a hold display (for example, a hold icon) is activated.

When the production control board 130 fails to receive commands, it is preferable to continue changing the special symbol TZ.

When the variable presentation of the presentation pattern 70a is started based on a normal command after the command of the presentation control board 130 is missed, even if the numerical information of the presentation pattern 70a and the numerical information of the special pattern TZ are different. good.

Further, in this embodiment, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 are not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a, but the frame illumination device 76 is not mentioned during the extension of the temporary stop of the production pattern 70a. At least one of the plurality of light emitting units 10 may be set in the same manner as during the temporary stop before the extension (emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission mode with less change or movement than during fluctuation). , at least one of the plurality of light emitting parts constituting the board lighting device 76 is set in the same light emission mode as during temporary stop before extension (light emission mode with lower brightness than during fluctuation, light emission with less change or movement than during fluctuation) mode, lights out). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame illumination device 10 and the board illumination device 76 change (switch) to a light emission mode corresponding to the fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the production pattern 70a in the losing mode stops, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode ("248"), but the special symbol TZ has the same number as the production pattern 70a. The actual stop may be performed in a manner of failure. In addition, when the production pattern 70a in the jackpot mode stops, the special symbol TZ stops in a predetermined jackpot mode ("333"), but the special symbol TZ stops in the jackpot mode with the same number as the production pattern 70a. It may be stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, the start time commands (first special symbol storage designation command, performance symbol designation command, first special symbol variation pattern When the production control unit 130m receives the specified command), the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol continue to be displayed in a variable manner, but as with the production symbol 70a, they are momentarily derived and displayed, and then the variable display is started. You may start it. In this case, regarding the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ that is shifted from the predetermined stopping position at the stopping position.

In addition, in this embodiment, if a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TH is displayed, the icon TH is erased with one frame of non-animation, but when the icon TH is stopped It only needs to be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon TH based on reception of a command, 20 frames required for shift display of the pending icon T, and 10 frames required for additional display of the pending icon. You may also do so.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, if a start command is received while displaying a number of pending icons greater than the number of pending icons, the excess pending icon T1 is erased with one frame of non-animation. The number of frames may be shorter than 10 frames required for erasing the icon T1 based on reception of the stop command, 20 frames required for shift display of the hold icon HI, and 10 frames required for additional display of the hold icon, for example, 5 frames. It may be erased with a minute animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that makes the number of reservations a predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m stores (understands) the number of reservations and the number of reservations notified from the main control unit 110m. If there is an inconsistency due to a command error (an error where the number is the same, an error where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) between the number of pending and Although a predetermined number of pending icons are displayed after the display, the predetermined number of pending icons may be displayed without displaying the pending icons that are one more than the predetermined number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that makes the number of reservations a predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m stores (understands) the number of reservations and the number of reservations notified from the main control unit 110m. If there is an inconsistency due to a command error (an error where the number is the same, an error where there is a deviation in the increasing direction) with the number of pending commands, the command is executed in response to the reception of this start command. Although the icon is displayed during the fluctuating performance, the icon may not be displayed during the fluctuating performance that is executed in response to reception of the start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is the CD icon regardless of the type of performance mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or gaming state. good. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of performance mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be changed depending on the type of performance mode or game state.

In addition, when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon depending on the type of production mode or game state, the operation mode (performance movement mode) during the variable production should be made different depending on the form of the normal icon. Good too. Furthermore, even when changing the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon depending on the type of performance mode or game state, the operation mode (performance operation mode) during the variable performance can be changed depending on the form of the special icon. Good too.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but special icons that suggest a change to a special icon (displayed in the process of changing to a special icon) and specific A specific icon indicating that a reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) is to be executed may be provided. In this case, it is preferable to make the form and presentation operation of the special icon or specific icon different from the form and presentation operation of the normal icon or special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, the pending icon is displayed when both the reserved number designation command and the prefetch designation command are received as commands at the time of winning a prize, but when the reserved number designation command is received, The hold icon may be displayed if the command is not received normally, but the hold icon may not be displayed if the read-ahead designation command is normally received without the hold count specification command being received normally. Or vice versa. Note that when displaying a pending icon by receiving only one of the pending number designation command and the prefetch designation command, the icon change effect for this pending icon may not be executed.

Further, in this embodiment, the performance mode cannot be changed by operating the performance button 17 by the player, but the performance mode may be changed by operating the performance button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the production pattern 70a based on the command abnormality in which the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command, no operation for changing the production mode is accepted, that is, the production button 17 It is preferable to restrict changes in the production mode based on the operation.

Further, in this embodiment, the hold icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the hold icon is displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and An operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any one of a normal icon, a special icon, and a specific icon in response to the effect button 17 being operated while the button icon is displayed. . In this case, in the operation change production, the production button 17 is changed at a predetermined rate from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protrusion state in the production position) You can do it like this. In this case, the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change production is higher than the rate at which the production button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the dialogue preview production or final production. It is better to make the rate of change higher.

In addition, in this embodiment, the only operation part for performing the operation performance (line preview performance, final performance) is the performance button 17, but an operation part such as a performance lever is provided separately from the performance button 17, for example. During the validity period that occurs during the SP reach performance, an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever is executed, and an operation performance (decision performance, etc.) is executed in response to the operation of the performance button 17 or the performance lever. It's okay. In this case, the deciding performance in the SP reach performance that can only be executed in a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) is better than the case where the SP reach performance that can only be performed in the normal gaming state is executed. An operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 17 may be executed at a low rate (less likely to be executed).

Further, in this embodiment, during the execution period of the reach effect, the operation preview effect indicating the expectation level that the jackpot game will be executed in response to the operation of the activated effect button 17 is not executed. The operation preview performance may be executed in the first half period (for example, during the normal reach performance) and the second half period (for example, during the SP reach performance) of the reach performance. In this case, the operation preview performance performed during the second half of the reach performance is better than the operation preview performance performed during the first half of the reach performance when the performance button 17 is in the second operation mode (vibration, movement to the performance position). ) should be made high.

Further, in the present embodiment, the expectation level of the preview in the jackpot preview performance and the movement of the movable member are not linked, but the expectation level of the preview in the jackpot preview performance may be linked to the movement of the movable member. In this case, while the fluctuating effect is being executed, the movable member moves more when a preview effect with high jackpot expectations is executed than when a preview effect with low jackpot expectations is executed. It is better to make the ratio higher (easier to operate).

In the present embodiment, the first image display device 70 displays a pending icon T1 (T2) in a pending icon display area 70B (70C) and displays a pending number in a pending number display area 70E (70F) as pending storage. There is. In this way, in the pending icon display area 70B (70C), the number of pending items is displayed based on the number of displayed pending icons T1 (T2), and in the pending number display area 70E (70F), the number of pending items is displayed based on the numerical information of the pending number. it's shown. The hold icon T1 (T2) is not limited to a single picture, diagram, character, or symbol like the "CD" shape of this embodiment, but may be a combination of multiple pictures, diagrams, characters, symbols, etc. It is possible to adopt an appropriate structure, such as adding effects, decorations, etc. to main parts such as figures, characters, and symbols.

The display of the number of pending icons, such as the display of pending icon changes, is not limited to the change of the pending icon alone, but can also be displayed by changing the number due to the actions of other characters or the actions of characters, etc. good. Note that the change in the hold icon change effect is not limited to the timing of the specific example described above.

As a pre-reading effect (advance notification) using text display, we gave an example in which the text "ZONE" scrolls horizontally, but text display is not limited to meaningful character strings, but also symbols, pictures, diagrams, or any of these. It may be a combination with. Alternatively, a plurality of character displays may be provided, and the selected character display may be different depending on the level of expectation. The character display is not limited to scrolling left and right, but can be in any suitable manner that attracts the player's attention, such as zooming in or out, panning or tilting.

As a pre-reading effect (advance notification) based on the expectation level display, we have given a color effect, exemplifying a blue effect image EF, but it is not limited to color effects, for example, a light emitting effect such as a halo, a black Appropriate displays such as effects such as being sucked in like a hole or wind blowing can be adopted. Moreover, the expectation level display is not limited to being performed accompanying the performance pattern 70a or on the performance pattern 70a itself, but may be displayed on a background display or otherwise. Furthermore, the expectation level display is not limited to displaying on the first image display device 70, but can also be performed by displaying on the game board an accessory, a light emitting device, a winning device such as a starting hole, or an accessory or a light emitting device provided on a game slot. This may also be done by emitting light such as.

The pre-read performance (advance notification) based on the expectation level display may be a performance that is performed only before the reach, or a performance that is performed after the reach. Moreover, when the expectation level display is performed after reaching, it may be displayed continuously in the mode before reaching, or may be changed to be displayed in a mode different from the mode before reaching.

The pre-reading effect (advance notification) may be a variable effect or progress at an appropriate timing according to the drawn scenario, but for each variable effect, there are various factors such as whether or not it will proceed and whether or not the expectation level needs to change. It is also possible to conduct a lottery and proceed according to the result.

Examples of effects include a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of a character, and a color effect exemplified by a blue effect image EF, but the effects are not limited to color effects, such as a halo. Appropriate displays can be used, such as a light emitting effect such as a black hole or an action effect such as a black hole being sucked in or wind blowing.

In the present embodiment, a specific example has been described in which the icon TH is not displayed when the production control unit 130m returns from a predetermined state in which the command cannot be received normally, but the icon TH is not displayed. When receiving and returning, the icon TH may be displayed and then deleted.

Similar to the production control section 130m described above, if the first special symbol reservation display 63 cannot normally receive a command (signal) from the main control section 110m, the reservation displayed on the first special symbol reservation display 63 A predetermined state may occur in which the number and the number of reservations grasped (stored) by the production control unit 130m deviate from each other.
That is, the first special symbol retention display 63 (first display means) can execute a first shift display in which the retention memory is sequentially decreased by one each time a variable performance is started, and the performance control unit 130m In a state where there is a predetermined number of pending memories (for example, four), if a command (signal) for a specific number of pending memories (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number is received from the main control unit 110m, the It is possible to perform a second shift display in which the number of reserved memories is reduced from a predetermined number to a specific number in a reduction mode different from the first shift display (a mode in which the number of pending memories is directly reduced from four to two without going through three). On the other hand, the first image display device 70 (second display means) controlled by the production control unit 130m is configured to display the production symbols regardless of whether the first shift display or the second shift display is executed. Each time the variable performance of 70a is finished, the reserved memory can be sequentially decreased one by one.
According to this, it becomes possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control section 110m and the production control section 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the number of reservations. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

In a specific example, the suspended memory stored (understood) by the production control unit can be displayed at a plurality of locations. In this embodiment, the pending storage is displayed in two places, the pending icon display area 70B (70D) and the pending number display area 70E (70F) of the first image display device 70. 70 and the second image display device 71, or at a plurality of locations on the second image display device 71, the pending storage may be displayed.

In a specific example, in the hold icon display area 70B (70D), it is possible to perform a first shift display in which the hold memory is sequentially decreased by one each time a variable effect is started. In this first shift display, for example, the hold icon T1 (T2) is displayed so as to be shifted one by one each time a variable performance is performed. In addition, in a state where, for example, four pending icons T1 (T2) are displayed in the pending icon display area 70B (70D), if the production control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to, for example, two pending memories, A display similar to the first shift display in which the number of icons T1 (T2) shifts from 4 to 3 and then decreases to 3 and then shifts from 3 to 2 is not displayed, and the pending icon T1 (T2) is displayed. After the fourth item disappears, a second shift display is performed in which the number shifts from three to two. On the other hand, in the pending number display area 70E (70F) that displays pending memory using pending numbers (numeric information), the pending numbers are displayed so as to decrease one by one each time a variable effect is started. There is. For example, in a state where the pending number "4" is displayed in the pending number display area 70E (70F), if the production control unit 130m receives a command corresponding to two pending memories (the second shift display is not executed). (in the case of holding digits), instead of displaying a display that sequentially decreases the pending digits one by one, a third shift display is performed that displays the pending digit ``2'' corresponding to two pending memories, for example, from the pending digit ``4.'' It has become.

As a look-ahead performance (advance notification), by executing a related performance during a part of a period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances, it is announced that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. What you suggest is doable. "Related effects" include various effects, such as movements and light emitting effects of role objects set on the game frame and game board, movements such as vibration of operation buttons and light emitting, chance eyes of the same color on the effect pattern 70a, etc. Even if the same performance is performed in each variable performance, the content of the performance may be different for each variable performance, such as executing a different performance that increases the level of expectation as the variable performance is repeated.

When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the first image display device 70 does not increase or decrease even though the pending memory increases or decreases in the main control unit 110m, the effect related to the prefetch effect (advance notification) is continued. It doesn't matter if it is executed or not. In such a case, the player's interest can be attracted by continuing to perform related effects. Further, by not continuously executing related performances, consistency of performances can be maintained.

For example, when a predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on a pending memory stored after the target memory, it is possible to prevent the prefetch performance based on the target pending memory from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In addition, a performance related to the look-ahead performance based on the target pending memory (for example, performing a large motion performance of the first movable member 73) is replaced with another related performance (for example, the first It may be changed to (reducing the motion effect of the member 73). Furthermore, the performance related to the prefetch performance based on the target pending memory may be deleted.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the pending memory stored before the target storage, the prefetch performance based on the target pending memory can be executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, the player's sense of expectation can be improved by continuing the look-ahead performance.

For example, when the predetermined state is resolved and becomes normal based on the suspended memory stored before the target storage, it is possible to prevent the prefetch performance based on the target suspended memory from being executed from the continuation of the related performance. In this case, consistency of presentation can be maintained.

(Inspection mode of main control board 130)
For example, in a conventional gaming machine such as that disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-open No. 2018-118109, a drive source is operated to convert the big prize opening and starting opening from a closed state to an open state under the control of a main control board. ing. However, in conventional game machines, when replacing the game board at a game parlor or replacing the game board that makes up the front side of the game board, the drive source that operates under the control of the main control board does not generate an activation trigger. However, there is a problem in that it is difficult to verify the operation of these drive sources.
Therefore, the gaming machine 1 shown in FIGS. 236 to 240 has a drive source (big prize opening SOL, starting opening SOL, V distribution SOL) whose operation is controlled by the main control board 110 as a result of the game, and the main control The board 110 is configured to initially operate the drive source in a predetermined manner in a pre-start state after power supply is started and before transition to a playable state in which the game is controlled.
As a result, during a certain period limited to the state before the start of the game (pre-start state), the special electric accessory, the normal electric accessory, and the distribution mechanism in the grand prize opening are operated and the operation is confirmed, and the installation is confirmed. Also, inspection and confirmation after parts replacement can be performed more reliably.

As shown in FIG. 236, if a setting change device is installed, a pre-start state is a certain period after the end of setting change or setting confirmation. In this case, RWM clear preparation is in progress.

As shown in FIG. 237, if a setting change device is not installed, power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a, and a certain period after pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again is set as the pre-start state. . In this case, there is no RWM clear preparation in progress.

As shown in FIG. 238, if a setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state is a certain period after the power is turned on while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a. In this case, after transitioning to the pre-start state, for example, after 7 seconds have elapsed, turn on (for example, 0.512 seconds) and turn off (for example, 0.512 seconds) each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game, for example, three times. It is best to move to the playable state after doing so.

As shown in FIG. 239, if a settings change device is installed, the pre-start state is when settings are being changed or settings are being confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 240, if a setting change device is not installed, the pre-start state is the period from turning on the power while pressing the RWM clear switch 111a until pressing the RWM clear switch 111a again. In this case, when transitioning to the pre-start state, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed to turn on (for example, 0.512 seconds) and OFF (for example, 0.512 seconds) each solenoid of the mechanism that affects the result of the game, and the game becomes ready for play. You may want to repeat this until the transition is complete. Note that in this case, RWM clear preparation is in progress.

During the above-mentioned pre-start state, the prize ball is paid out by placing the game ball in the winning opening, the activation of a special symbol display device or special electric accessory by placing the game ball in the starting opening, and the normal operation of the game ball. The operation of the normal symbol display device or the operation of the normal electric accessory due to passing through the gate related to the operation of the symbol display device or winning a prize in the winning slot will be invalidated. On the other hand, during the pre-start state, the firing permission signal is output immediately after the power is turned on, so the firing of game balls is not invalidated. Furthermore, in the pre-start state, it is preferable to turn off (not display) the performance display monitor.

During the pre-start state described above, the payout of prize balls backed up on the payout board is not invalidated. Further, while the big winning opening is open in the pre-start state, the opening signal is not output from the game information output terminal board. It is preferable that a power-on/power recovery command is sent when the game mode is transitioned to the playable state, and the initial operation of the gimmick is performed after the game mode is transitioned to the game mode. Then, during the operation of the big winning hole solenoid in the pre-start state, it is preferable not to emit light from the big winning hole LED etc. like during a jackpot.

It is preferable that the performance display monitor turns on all lights for, for example, 5 seconds after the inspection mode ends, and then displays the base value. Further, it is preferable to stop firing in a state "other than power recovery" (state before start, during an unrecoverable error).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means that controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands) from the main control means. (performance control section 130m), the main control means (main control section 110m) stores a reservation memory based on the establishment of a starting condition (game ball winning in the starting openings 45, 47). Is it possible and controllable to display the reserved memory on the first display means (special symbol reserved display devices 63, 64), and perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the reserved memory? The slave control means (effect control section 130m) controls the suspended memory to be displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) on the second display means, and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of reserved memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the program is started, and in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of reserved memories are displayed. , when the slave control means receives from the main control means a signal of pending storage of a specific number (e.g., two) less than a predetermined number by two or more, the first shift display (e.g., from four to three); is capable of executing a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the number of pending memories from the predetermined number to the specific number in a different reduction mode, and the first display means (special symbol pending display 63, 64) ) is suspended every time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) is executed. It is characterized in that it is possible to display the memory in decreasing order one by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design, The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of performing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) displays a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of pending storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the pending storage is changed to the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3). ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and it is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2), indicating that the expectation level for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory. The suggested advance notification can be executed by a pending memory (for example, an icon change effect) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means (special In the symbol retention display (63, 64), the second display means (the first Even if the number of pending memories displayed on the image display device 70, second image display device 71) is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (e.g., four) does not decrease to the specific number (e.g., two), the advance notification can be executed continuously, and the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) can display the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 pieces) and the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 pieces). Regardless of which one of the above two methods is executed, each time the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be displayed in order to decrease by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design, The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of performing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) displays a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of pending storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the pending storage is changed to the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3). ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and it is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2), indicating that the expectation level for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory. The suggested advance notification can be executed by a background display (for example, a change to a look-ahead zone background) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display The means (special symbol retention display devices 63, 64) display the second display means during a period in which the retention memory is displayed to decrease by one from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2). Even if the pending memories displayed on the (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) are in a predetermined state in which they do not decrease from the predetermined number (for example, four) to the specific number (for example, two), the Pre-article notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) display the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols) and the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols). 4 to 2) is executed, each time the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be displayed in order to decrease by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design, The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of performing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) displays a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of pending storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the pending storage is changed to the predetermined number (for example, 4) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3). ) to the specific number (for example, 2) can be executed (for example, from 4 to 2), and it is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2), indicating that the expectation level for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory. The suggested advance notification can be executed by a character display (for example, "ZONE" telop) displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the first display means ( In the special symbol retention display (63, 64), the second display means (the Even if the number of pending memories displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 is in a predetermined state in which the predetermined number (for example, four) does not decrease to the specific number (for example, two), the predetermined The notification can be executed continuously, and the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) display the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3 symbols) and the second shift display (for example, 4 symbols). .

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating presentation of the presentation symbols based on undetermined pending memory. It is possible to perform advance notification suggesting that the level of expectation for the special game is high by displaying the level of expectation (for example, a look-ahead effect), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 70, second image display The device 71) is capable of executing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started, and is capable of displaying a predetermined number of pending memories (for example, 4). In the state where the memories are being displayed, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) sends a signal of a specific number (for example, two) of reserved memories that is two or more less than a predetermined number (for example, four) to the main control means. (main control unit 110m), the pending memory is changed from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3). It is possible to perform a second shift display (from 4 to 2, for example), and the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) can display a change from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number ( For example, the number of pending memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is the predetermined number during a period in which the number of pending memories is displayed to decrease by one to 2 (for example, 2 items). Even in a predetermined state in which the number of symbols does not decrease from (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces), the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the first display means (special symbol reservation display 63, 64) is executed every time the determination is completed, regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) or the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) is executed. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to sequentially decrease and display the reserved memories one by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). At the same time, the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform variable effects of the effect symbols, and each of the plurality of variable effects By performing a related performance (for example, a movement performance of the first movable member 73) during a part of the variable performance, it is possible to create a preliminary game that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a first shift to sequentially decrease the pending memory by one each time the variable effect is started. In a state in which display (for example, from 4 to 3) is possible and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories are being displayed, the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) displays a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories. ), when a specific number (e.g., two) of pending storage signals is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the first shift display (e.g., from four to three) A second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a different reduction manner, and the first display means (Special symbol holding display 63, 64) is displayed regardless of whether the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 pieces) or the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2 pieces) is executed. , each time the determination is completed, the reserved memory can be sequentially decreased by one, and the slave control means (performance control section 130m) can display a display in the first display means (special symbol retention display 63, 64). Despite the increase/decrease in the pending memory, a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, and the target of the prior notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that has become , the advance notification is not performed from the continuation of the related performance (for example, the motion performance of the first movable member 73, etc.) It is characterized by

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play an advantageous special game (jackpot) based on the reservation memory. The slave control means (effect control section 130m) displays the suspended memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can control The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of performing a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time the variable effect is started. , in a state where a predetermined number (for example, four) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) displays a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than the predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of pending storage is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the pending storage is changed from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display. A second shift display (for example, from four to two) can be performed to reduce the number of pending memories (for example, from four to two), and the number of pending memories can be displayed by numerical information, and when the second shift display is performed, the numerical information It is possible to execute a third shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that displays the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage without performing a display in which the number is sequentially decreased one by one; The first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) is used when either the first shift display (for example, 4 to 3 symbols) or the second shift display (for example, 4 to 2 symbols) is executed. However, each time the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be displayed in order to decrease by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a reservation memory based on the reservation memory, and control the reservation memory to be displayed on the first display means (special symbol reservation display devices 63, 64), and to play a special game advantageous to the player based on the reservation memory. The subordinate control means (performance control section 130m) displays the reserved memory on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). The second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design, The first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71) are capable of executing a predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect) when there is no pending memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and It is possible to execute a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) in which the number of pending memories is sequentially decreased by one each time a variable effect is started, and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories are displayed. In this state, the slave control means (effect control section 130m) sends a signal for holding storage of a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than a predetermined number (for example, four) to the main control means (main control section 110m). , a second shift that reduces the number of pending memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2) in a reduction manner different from the first shift indication (for example, from 4 to 3). It is possible to display (for example, from 4 to 2 pieces), and the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) can hold the predetermined number of pieces (for example, 4 pieces) to the specific number (for example, 2 pieces). The number of pending memories displayed on the second display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) decreases from the predetermined number (for example, four) during the period in which the memories are displayed to decrease by one. When in a predetermined state in which the number does not decrease to the specific number (for example, 2), the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed after starting the variable effect, Without executing the performance (for example, customer waiting demonstration performance), the first display means (special symbol holding display devices 63, 64) displays the first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols) and the second shift display (for example, from 4 to 3 symbols). For example, no matter which one (from four to two) is executed, each time the determination is completed, the number of pending memories can be decreased and displayed one by one.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. etc.), and even though the reserved memory increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the display on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) is possible. When a predetermined state occurs in which the suspended memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification When the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that has become, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. Performing one of the following: changing the advance notice to another advance notice having a lower level of expectation than the advance notice; and deleting the advance notice based on the target pending memory. It is characterized by

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , the reserved memory can be controlled to be displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means can display (the first image display device 70, second image display device 71) ) The display means (first image display device 70 , second image display device 71), and the display means (2nd image display device 71) can be executed by a background display (for example, a prefetch zone background). When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the previous When the pre-notification can be continuously executed and the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that was the target of the prior notification, the pre-notification based on the target pending memory is Not continuing to execute the previous article notification, changing the previous notification based on the target pending memory to another preliminary notification with a lower expectation level than the previous notification, and It is characterized by performing one of the following: erasing the pre-article notification.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) The display means (first image display device 70 , second image display device 71), and even though the reserved memory increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the display means When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the screen does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notice can be continuously executed, and the advance notice can be continued. The target pending memory does not continue to execute the preliminary notification based on the target pending memory when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that is the target of notification. any one of changing the advance notice based on the prior notice to another advance notice having a lower expectation level than the advance notice; and deleting the advance notice based on the target pending memory. It is characterized by doing the following.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and a prior notification indicating that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory is provided by displaying the degree of expectation (for example, a look-ahead effect performance). The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory, the prior notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed. It is characterized by performing one of the following: changing the notification to another advance notification with a lower expectation level than the prior announcement; and deleting the advance notification based on the target retention memory. do.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in a plurality of fluctuating performances, and by performing a related performance (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) during a part of the period of each fluctuating performance, undetermined It is possible to execute advance notification suggesting that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on the pending memory of When a predetermined state occurs in which the reserved memory displayed on the means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, The advance notification can be executed continuously, and when the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory stored after the target pending memory that was the target of the advance notification, the predetermined state can be executed based on the target pending memory. The performance related to the advance notification based on the target pending memory (for example, the operation of the first movable member 73) is not executed from the continuation of the performance related to the advance notification (for example, the movement of the first movable member 73). any one of changing the related performance to another related performance with lower expectations than the related performance, and erasing the related performance of the advance notification based on the target retention memory. It is characterized by doing.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. ) can be executed and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase or decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the suspended memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When returning from the predetermined state based on a pending memory stored after the target pending memory that has become, the previous article based on the target pending memory does not continue to execute the advance notification based on the target pending memory. Performing one of the following: changing the previous notification to another notification with a lower expectation level than the previous notification, and deleting the previous notification based on the target pending memory, and displaying the The means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) executes a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the number of pending memories by one each time the variable effect is started. is possible, and in a state where the slave control means (presentation control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) of pending memories, the slave control means (presentation control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four). When a signal of a specific number (for example, two) of pending storage that is two or more fewer is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the reduction mode is different from the first shift display (for example, from four to three). A second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) can be executed to reduce the number of reserved memories from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and the number of reserved memories can be reduced by numerical information. If display is possible and the second shift display is executed, the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage is displayed without sequentially decreasing the numerical information one by one. It is characterized in that it is possible to execute a third shift display (for example, from 4 to 2).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memory. and when there is no pending memory after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, the display means can execute a predetermined effect (for example, a customer waiting demonstration effect), and the main control means (main control means) When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease even though the pending memory increases or decreases in the control unit 110m), the While the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, the advance notification can be continuously executed, and when the predetermined state occurs, the production pattern can be displayed in a temporary stop state. In addition, the predetermined performance (e.g., customer waiting demonstration performance) is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, and the pending memory is stored after the target pending memory that is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the predetermined state, the prior notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed, and the prior notification based on the target pending memory is set to have a higher expectation level than the prior notification. The method is characterized in that one of the following is performed: changing to another advance notice with a lower value, and erasing the advance notice based on the target pending storage.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memory. can be executed, and even though the hold storage increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target that was the target of the advance notification is suspended. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to storage, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) Advance notification (e.g., background display, character display, expectation level display) that suggests that it is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memory. can be executed, and even though the hold storage increases or decreases in the main control means (main control unit 110m), the hold displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) When a predetermined state in which the memory does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target that was the target of the advance notification is suspended. It is characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to storage, the advance notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A background display (e.g. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be executed by When a predetermined state occurs in which the displayed pending memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously performed, and the advance notification can be performed continuously. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to the target pending memory, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A background display (e.g. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be executed by When a predetermined state occurs in which the displayed pending memory does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously performed, and the advance notification can be performed continuously. It is characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the targeted pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A text display (e.g. "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be executed by the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), despite the increase and decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the screen does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notice can be continuously executed, and the advance notice can be continued. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to the target pending memory that is the target of the notification, the advance notification based on the target pending memory can be continuously performed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A text display (e.g. "ZONE" telop), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can be executed by the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), despite the increase and decrease of the reserved memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m). When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the screen does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notice can be continuously executed, and the advance notice can be continued. It is characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory prior to the target pending memory that is the target of notification, the preliminary notification based on the target pending memory is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and a prior notification indicating that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory is provided by displaying the degree of expectation (for example, a look-ahead effect performance). The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is The present invention is characterized in that when the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the target pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage can be continuously performed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to execute a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the , and a prior notification indicating that the degree of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory is provided by displaying the degree of expectation (for example, a look-ahead effect performance). The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the target pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A first advance notice (for example, a pending icon change presentation) that suggests that a variation presentation of the presentation symbol (70a) can be executed and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memories; By executing a related performance (for example, a motion performance of the first movable member 73) during a part of the period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances, the degree of expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is increased. The display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the second advance notification is continued while the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state. and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory prior to the target pending memory that is the target of the prior notification, the second preliminary notification based on the target pending memory is related. It is characterized in that it can be executed from the continuation of the performance (for example, the motion performance of the first movable member 73, etc.).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) A first advance notice (for example, a pending icon change presentation) that suggests that a variation presentation of the presentation symbol (70a) can be executed and that expectations for the special game are high based on undetermined pending memories; By executing a related performance (for example, a motion performance of the first movable member 73) during a part of the period of each variable performance in a plurality of variable performances, the degree of expectation for the special game based on undetermined pending memory is increased. The display means (first image display device 70, When a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the second image display device 71) does not increase or decrease, the second advance notification is continued while the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state. and when the predetermined state is resolved based on a pending memory prior to the target pending memory that is the target of the prior notification, the second preliminary notification based on the target pending memory is related. It is characterized in that the performance (for example, the movement performance of the first movable member 73, etc.) is not executed from the continuation of the performance.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbols, and provide advance notice (for example, background display, text display, expectation level display, etc.) that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory prior to the target pending memory, the advance notification (for example, background display, text display, expectation level display, etc.) based on the target pending memory can be continuously executed. The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) includes a first shift display (for example, from four to 3), and in a state where the slave control means (effect control unit 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, four) of pending memories, the slave control means (presentation control unit 130m) can perform a predetermined number of operations (for example, four). When a signal for holding storage of a specific number (for example, 2 pieces) that is two or more smaller than 4 pieces is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m), the holding storage is stored in a decreasing manner different from the first shift display. It is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) that reduces the number of items from the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and it is possible to display the number of reserved memories by numerical information. If the second shift display is executed, the numerical information is not displayed to be sequentially decreased one by one, but the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, two) of pending storage is displayed. It is characterized by being able to perform 3-shift display (from 4 to 2).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbols, and provide advance notice (for example, background display, text display, expectation level display, etc.) that suggests that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory. The pending memory that is executable and displayed on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) despite the increase and decrease of the pending memory in the main control means (main control unit 110m) When a predetermined state in which the number does not increase or decrease occurs, the production pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed, and the target of the advance notification is When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending memory before the target pending memory, the advance notification (for example, background display, text display, expectation level display, etc.) based on the target pending memory is continuously executed. First, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) displays a first shift display (for example, from 4 to 3) that sequentially decreases the number of pending memories by one each time the variable effect is started. in a state where the slave control means (performance control section 130m) has a predetermined number (for example, 4) of pending memories, the slave control means (performance control section 130m) can execute a predetermined number of operations (for example, 4). When receiving from the main control means (main control unit 110m) a signal of a specific number (for example, 2) of pending storage that is two or more fewer than the specified number (for example, 2), the pending storage is reduced in a manner different from the first shift display. It is possible to perform a second shift display (for example, from 4 to 2) to reduce the predetermined number (for example, 4) to the specific number (for example, 2), and it is possible to display the number of reserved memories by numerical information. , when the second shift display is executed, the third shift display does not display the numerical information sequentially decreasing one by one, but displays the numerical information corresponding to the specific number (for example, two) of pending storage. It is characterized by being able to execute shift display (from 4 to 2).

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) at , it is possible to perform advance notification suggesting that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory, and it is possible to perform a preliminary notification indicating that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on the undetermined pending memory, and to start the fluctuating performance. If there is no pending memory after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since then, the display means can execute a predetermined performance (for example, a customer waiting demonstration performance), and even if the main control unit (main control unit 110m) increases or decreases the pending memory. Regardless, when a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed. and when the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect) is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and the target is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage can be continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the game machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of the game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) at , it is possible to perform advance notification suggesting that the level of expectation for the special game is high based on undetermined pending memory, and it is possible to execute a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a). If there is no pending memory after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the display means can execute a predetermined performance (for example, a customer waiting demonstration performance), and even if the main control unit (main control unit 110m) increases or decreases the pending memory. Regardless, when a predetermined state occurs in which the pending memory displayed on the display means does not increase or decrease, the effect pattern (70a) can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, while the advance notification can be continuously executed. and when the predetermined state occurs, the predetermined effect (for example, customer waiting demonstration effect) is not executed even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable effect, and the target is the target of the advance notification. When the predetermined state is resolved based on the pending storage prior to the pending storage, the advance notification based on the target pending storage is not continuously executed.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a) in the above-mentioned main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the part 110m) is different from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control part 130m), the effect pattern (70a) is When the predetermined state occurs, the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) continues to display the suspended memory, and displays the effect pattern ( 70a) is displayed in a temporarily stopped state, an effect production (for example, a pattern effect image ZE) can be performed on the production pattern (70a), and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories are displayed. , the slave control means (effect control section 130m) sends a signal (command) for holding storage of a specific number (for example, two) that is two or more smaller than a predetermined number (for example, four) to the main control means (main control section 110m). ), the display effect to reduce the number of pending memories in stages is not performed for the number of discrepancies (for example, twice) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2), and It is characterized by displaying a predetermined number (for example, two) of pending memories.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) controls the start condition (the landing of a game ball in the start openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a) in the above-mentioned main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the part 110m) is different from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control part 130m), the effect pattern (70a) is It can be displayed in a temporarily stopped state, and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 70,
When the predetermined state occurs, the image display device 71) continues to display the suspended memory, and displays at least the decorative part of the effect pattern (70a) while displaying the effect pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state. In a state in which a part (for example, the bar-shaped image SG) of the motion performance can be executed and a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (the performance control unit 130m) controls the predetermined number of motion effects (for example, 4). If a signal (command) for a specific number of pending memories (for example, 2) is received from the main control means (main control unit 110m) by two or more less than the number of pending memories (4 items), a display to reduce the number of pending memories in stages. The display is not performed for the number of discrepancies (for example, twice) between the specific number (for example, 4) and the predetermined number (for example, 2), and displays the predetermined number (for example, 2) of reserved memories. shall be.

◆The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a main control means (main control section 110m) that controls the progress of the game, and a game performance based on signals (commands) from the main control means (main control section 110m). In the gaming machine, the main control means (main control section 110m) is configured to satisfy the starting condition (the landing of a game ball in the starting openings 45, 47). It is possible to store a pending memory based on the pending memory, and to determine whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot) advantageous to the player based on the pending memory, and the slave control means (performance control unit 130m) , can be controlled so as to display the reserved memory on the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and the display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) It is possible to perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a) in the above-mentioned main control means (main control When a predetermined state occurs in which the number of pending memories of the signal transmitted from the part 110m) is different from the number of pending memories grasped by the slave control means (performance control part 130m), the production pattern (70a) is The display means (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) can display the effect pattern (70a) in a temporarily stopped state when the predetermined state occurs. In this state, it is possible to continue displaying the suspended memory and to execute the effect production of the suspended memory, and in a state where a predetermined number (for example, 4) of suspended memories are displayed, the slave control means (production control unit 130m ) receives from the main control means (main control unit 110m) a signal (command) for a specific number (for example, 2) of pending memories that is two or more smaller than a predetermined number (for example, 4), the number of pending memories The display effect of gradually reducing the number of items is not performed for the number of deviations (e.g., twice) between the specific number (e.g., four) and the predetermined number (e.g., two), and the predetermined number (e.g., two) is retained and stored. It is characterized by displaying.

(Image change effect)
The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) can display various effects according to the progress of the game. Performance displays include customer waiting demonstration performances that are executed during a customer waiting state (standby state where the game is not in progress) where special symbols are not being displayed in a variable manner, and production symbols that are executed while special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner. There is a fluctuating effect accompanied by a fluctuating display of 70a. In addition, as an effect display, on the screen of the first image display device 70 and/or the screen of the second image display device 71, an image corresponding to the entire screen and/or a partial area of the screen may be reduced, enlarged, deformed, rotated, etc. It is possible to perform an image change effect in which one or more of these are varied in combination. The image change effect can be said to be something that makes the screen itself appear to be moving, such as by shaking, depending on the image displayed on the screen. The image change effect can be executed at any timing (for example, timing during the execution period of the variable effect, timing during the execution period of the jackpot game, or timing during the execution period of the customer waiting demonstration effect).

In the following explanation, in the figures, the change display on the screen where the image change effect is executed is referred to as "SV display", and the normal screen display on which the image change effect is not executed is referred to as "normal display". It is written as. In the image change effect, the first image displayed on the screen in the normal display (for example, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, etc.: FIG. 242(a)) and the first image displayed on the screen in the change display as the first image changes. 242(c)). Note that it can be said that the second image in the changed display can be recognized as being common and/or related to the first image in the normal display, depending on its shape, information, and the like.

The image change effect can be executed at an appropriate timing during the execution period of the variable effect or the like. For example, the image change effect may be executed in synchronization with the start of the change effect, in the middle of the execution period of the change effect, or in synchronization with the end of the change effect. ). In addition, the image change effect may be triggered by an external factor such as the winning of a game ball in a prize opening or the operation of the effect button device 16, or may be triggered by a predetermined effect pattern such as selection of a predetermined game state or look-ahead effect. Execution can be triggered by various conditions, such as internal factors such as the selection of

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is configured to be able to perform an image change effect on the image display devices 70, 71 in conjunction with a light emitting effect by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. Further, the image change effect on the image display devices 70, 71 may be performed in addition to or in place of the light emission effect by the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10. , the second movable member 74). Furthermore, the image change effect on the image display devices 70 and 71 may be configured to be executable in conjunction with the audio output of the audio output device 9.

(1st movable accessory - movement)
The first movable member 73, which is a movable accessory, is moved between an upper standby position (origin position) and a lower position by the driving force of a first movable member drive motor that is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform a performance operation that moves in the vertical direction between the performance position located at . Note that the first movable member 73 can be detected to be at the original position by a first position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 73 of the embodiment does not overlap with the screen of the first image display device 70 or has a small degree of overlap in the first mode stopped at the standby position. Furthermore, as the first movable member 73 descends from the standby position to the presentation position, the degree of overlap with the screen increases. The first movable member 73 performs a predetermined performance operation, such as greatly vibrating the entire area between the standby position and the performance position, or vibrating finely in a partial range between the standby position and the performance position. It is configured to be changeable from the first aspect to the second aspect.

(First movable accessory - first light emitting area)
The first movable member 73 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The first movable member 73 is provided with one or more first light emitting regions HK1, and the first light emitting region HK1 can emit light independently from other parts of the board lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting region HK1 has a first state in which the first movable member LED emits light such as lighting, blinking, or color change, and a second state in which the first movable member LED is turned off and does not emit light. It is possible to change the light emitting state. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is turned off, the whole or a part of the first movable member 73 becomes dark, and by being in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 emits light, the first movable member 73 becomes dark. The first movable member 73 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the first movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state, the first movable member LED is made to emit light darker than in the second state, for example, the hue of the first movable member LED is made darker than in the first state. It may be made darker, the brightness lower than in the first state, or the saturation lower than in the first state. Further, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the first movable member LED to turn on or off.

(Second movable accessory - movement)
The second movable member 74, which is a movable accessory, is moved between a standby position (origin position) located in the upper right corner by the driving force of a second movable member drive motor that is a part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to perform a performance movement that moves diagonally up and down between the performance position located at the lower left. Note that the second movable member 74 can be detected to be at the original position by a second position detection sensor (not shown). Here, the first movable member 74 of the embodiment does not overlap with the screen of the first image display device 70 or has a small degree of overlap in the first state stopped at the standby position. Further, as the second movable member 74 moves diagonally downward from the standby position toward the presentation position, the degree of overlap with the screen increases. The second movable member 74 performs a predetermined performance operation, such as greatly vibrating the entire area between the standby position and the performance position, or vibrating finely in a partial range between the standby position and the performance position. It is configured to be changeable from the first aspect to the second aspect.

(Second movable accessory - first light emitting area)
The second movable member 74 is capable of emitting dramatic light by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is a part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 2), in a predetermined light emission mode. The second movable member 74 is provided with one or more first light emitting regions HK1, and the first light emitting region HK1 can emit light independently from other parts of the board lighting device 76. ing. The first light emitting region HK1 has a first state in which the second movable member LED is lit, blinks, changes color, etc. to emit a dramatic effect, and a second state in which the second movable member LED is turned off and does not emit a dramatic light. It is possible to change the light emitting state. By being in the second state in which the first light emitting region HK1 is turned off, the whole or a part of the second movable member 74 becomes dark, and by being in the first state in which the first light emitting region HK1 emits light, the first light emitting region HK1 becomes dark. The second movable member 74 becomes brighter than when the light emitting region HK1 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the second movable member LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state, the second movable member LED is made to emit light darker than in the first state, for example, the hue of the second movable member LED is made darker than in the first state. It may be made darker, the brightness lower than in the first state, or the saturation lower than in the first state. Further, the range of the first light emitting region HK1 may be changed by switching the second movable member LED such as turning on or off.

In the embodiment, the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) moves forward and backward in the second mode. It is also possible to perform a performance operation with .

(Second light emitting region)
The gaming machine 1 is provided as a part of the board lighting device 76 and/or the frame lighting device 10 in at least one of the parts different from the movable accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74). A second light emitting region HK2 is provided. The parts of the panel lighting device 76 that become the second light emitting region HK2 include, for example, the decorative frame 40, the space between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 (the area around the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46), It may be an accessory attached to the game board 5 such as a winning hole lamp NR) for emitting light in a predetermined manner, a general winning hole 43, a big winning hole 50, or the game board 5 itself. Moreover, as a part of the frame illumination device 10 that becomes the second light emitting region HK2, for example, the glass frame 4 can be mentioned. Note that parts other than movable accessories such as the handle light emitting device 15c and the effect button device 16 may function as the second light emitting region HK2. Here, the second light emitting region HK2 is provided at a plurality of locations, and in the embodiment, between the decorative frame 40, the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 (the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46). A case is illustrated in which the prize opening lamp NR for emitting light around the glass frame 4 in a predetermined manner and the frame illumination device 10 provided on the glass frame 4 function as the second light emitting region HK2. A plurality of second light-emitting regions HK2 may be provided, for example, in different members such as the decorative frame 40 and the prize opening, or may be provided in a plurality in one member such as in the decorative frame 40, for example.

The second light emitting region HK2 is capable of emitting a dramatic effect by lighting the LED (full color) in a predetermined light emitting mode. The second light emitting area HK2 is capable of emitting dramatic light independently of the first light emitting area HK1 and other second light emitting areas. The first light emitting region HK2 is capable of changing the light emitting state between a first state in which the LED is lit, flashing, color changing, etc. to emit a dramatic light, and a second state in which the LED is turned off and no dramatic light is emitted. is possible. By being in the second state in which the second light emitting region HK2 is turned off, in the embodiment, the whole or a part of the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 becomes dark, and the second light emitting region HK2 emits a dramatic light. By being in the first state, the area around the screen becomes brighter than when the first light emitting region HK2 is in the second state. In the embodiment, the LED is turned off in the second state, but in the second state the LED emits light darker than in the first state, for example, the hue is darker than in the first state, or the LED is turned off in the second state. The brightness may also be lowered, or the saturation may be lowered than in the first state. Further, the range of the second light emitting region HK2 may be changed by switching the LEDs such as turning on or off.

(Specific example 1 of image change production)
Next, a specific example 1 of the image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. FIG. 241 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. FIG. 2 is a timing chart of a first specific example showing the relationship between image change effects. FIG. Further, FIG. 242 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the first specific example is executed.

At the timing T0, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is being executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 242(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed in the first pending number U1 at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first pending number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed as the first pending number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, a background image HG is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background image HG is displayed in a predetermined manner such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is executed on the screen at the timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in a first state where they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning opening lamp NR, and the frame All of the second light emitting regions HK2 comprising the illumination device 10 are in the first state in which they are performing dramatic light emission. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., thereby producing effects using sound (music, voice). Note that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound performance may be continuously performed or the sound performance may be interrupted.

When the image change effect is executed at the timing T1, the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are changed in synchronization with the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state where the light is turned off (see FIG. 242(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, the second light emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning slot lamp NR change from the first state to the second state in which the light is turned off. Change. Further, the second light emitting region HK2 made up of the frame illumination device 10 is maintained in the first state even though the other second light emitting regions HK2 change in conjunction with the first light emitting region HK1. Furthermore, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position from the first mode to the second mode in which motion can be produced. At this time, the second movable member 74 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "pikin" is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of a normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn to the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 1, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start frame update timing of the change display, and the change from the first state to the second state is started. The change of the first movable member 73 from the first mode to the second mode is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. In this way, in specific example 1, at the same time as the start of the image change effect on the screen, the changes in the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 242(b), when transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to shrink together, and the picture frame is viewed from outside the screen. The image is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so that the outer periphery of the image is surrounded by the frame image GG, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to look like a part (or all) of the normal display has been cut out. When transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the production symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 242(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a in the change display, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed so as to swing together. In specific example 1, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, which were in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect, are switched to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect. has been set (see Figure 242(d)). Further, in the first specific example, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output halfway from the start of execution of the image change effect. Here, in specific example 1, the timing of switching the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 from the second state to the first state is adjusted (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing T3). ), but the switching timing may be shifted. In specific example 1, in the subsequent image change effect, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 emit light in the first state.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are the range in which the change display changes. It is located outside of the box, and is designed to prevent the changing display from overlapping with the pending numbers and special design TZ. Further, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed so as to continue, and the reservation icon T1 and the reservation number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode is returned to the first mode in synchronization with (synchronized with) the start of returning from the change display to the normal display at timing T4 (see FIG. 242(e)). The timing T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 1, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the update timing of the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 242(e), when transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside of the screen. When transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area enlarge and change together with the production symbol 70a. There is no problem and it is displayed in the same position.

In synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the normal display at timing T5, the first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 242(f)). The timing of T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data related to normal display (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 1, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is completed in accordance with (synchronized with) the end frame update timing.

In specific example 1, when an image change effect is performed, a light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2. It is composed of By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display on the screen, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when an image change effect is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is directed to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70. First, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the first specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the production symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change production, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position whether the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. . By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the first specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the production symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change effect, the ease of visual recognition changes depending on whether the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed in a changed manner or when they are normally displayed. On the other hand, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numerals can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are changed or displayed. By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information that does not change the visibility (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change effect (the first image and the second image).

In specific example 1, when an image change effect is executed, a change is made on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with a change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG. It is possible to display a frame image GG. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG, or it may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these, and the production pattern 70a, It may be expressed so that it changes together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 1, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the first movable member 73 changes to the second mode and the change notification sound is output in synchronization with the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 1, the first movable member 73 is changed to the first mode in synchronization with (synchronized with) the end of the image change effect. By doing this, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 2 of image change production)
Next, a second specific example of an image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. FIG. 243 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 12 is a timing chart of a second specific example showing the relationship between image change effects. Further, FIG. 244 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the second specific example is executed.

At the timing T0, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is being executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 244(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed in the first pending number U1 at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reservation number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed as the first reservation number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Then, on the screen, a background image HG is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background image HG is displayed in a predetermined manner such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is executed on the screen at the timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in a first state where they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the prize opening lamp NR, and the frame All of the second light emitting regions HK2 comprising the illumination device 10 are in the first state in which they are performing dramatic light emission. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to perform sound (music, audio) effects. Note that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound performance may be continuously performed or the sound performance may be interrupted.

When the image change effect is executed at the timing T1, the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are changed in synchronization with (synchronized with) the start of the transition from the normal display to the change display. The first light emitting region HK1 changes from the first state to the second state where the light is turned off (see FIG. 244(b)). At this time, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, the second light emitting region HK1 of the decorative frame 40 and the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning slot lamp NR change from the first state to the second state in which the light is turned off. Change. Further, the second light emitting region HK2 constituted by the frame illumination device 10 also changes from the first state in which it emits light for effect to the second state in which it is turned off. Furthermore, in accordance with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, the first movable member 73 shifts from the standby position from the first mode to the second mode in which motion can be produced. At this time, the second movable member 74 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. Furthermore, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as a "pikin" is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of a normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn to the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. The display on the device 70 is started, and the display of the change display on the screen of the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 2, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the start frame update timing of the change display, and the change from the first state to the second state is started. The change of the first movable member 73 from the first mode to the second mode is started, and the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started. In this way, in the second specific example, at the same time as the start of the image change effect on the screen, the changes in the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the operation of the first movable member 73, and the output of the change notification sound are started. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 244(b), when transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to shrink together, and the picture frame is viewed from outside the screen. The image GG is displayed so that it appears. The change display is framed so that the outer periphery of the image is surrounded by the frame image GG, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to look like a part (or all) of the normal display has been cut out. When transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the production symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 244(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a in the change display, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed so as to swing together. In specific example 2, a part of the first light emitting area HK1 (the first movable member 73) and a part of the second light emitting area HK2 (the decorative frame 40) are in the second state at the beginning of the execution period of the image change effect. is set to switch to the first state in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (see FIG. 244(d)). In addition, in specific example 2, during the execution period of the image change effect, the remaining part of the first light emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the remaining part of the second light emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR, frame lighting device 10) is set to be maintained in the second state (see FIG. 244(d)). In the second specific example, the change notification sound is output from the start to the end of the image change performance, and then output is stopped. Here, in specific example 2, the timing of switching the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2 from the second state to the first state is adjusted (synchronized) in the middle of the execution period of the image change effect (timing T3). ), but the switching timing may be shifted.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are the range in which the change display changes. It is located outside of the , and is designed to prevent the changing display from overlapping with the pending numbers and special design TZ. Further, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed so as to continue, and the reservation icon T1 and the reservation number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 in the second mode is returned to the first mode after the change display at timing T4 starts returning to the normal display (see FIG. 244(e)). The timing T4 is the frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is the predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is started at a later time than the return frame update timing of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 244(e), when transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside of the screen. When transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area enlarge and change together with the production symbol 70a. There is no problem and it is displayed in the same position.

At a timing later than the start of the normal display (end of the change display) at timing T5, the first movable member 73 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (FIG. 244(f)) reference). The first light emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) in the second state are activated at a timing later than the start of the normal display (end of the change display) at timing T5. , the frame illumination device 10) returns to the first state and emits light for effect. The timing T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data related to normal display (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 2, the change of the first movable member 73 from the second mode to the first mode is completed, and the light emitting regions HK1 and HK2 return to the first state, with a shift from the end frame update timing.

In specific example 2, when an image change effect is performed, a light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2. It is composed of By doing so, it is possible to attract the attention of the player to the image change effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when an image change effect is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is directed to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70. First, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the second specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change production, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position whether the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. . By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the second specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change effect, the ease of visual recognition changes between the case of a change display in which the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG are displayed in a changed manner, and the case of a normal display. On the other hand, in the embodiment, it is possible to display the special symbol TZ and the reserved numerals so that their visibility does not change whether they are normally displayed or changed. By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information that does not change the visibility (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change effect (the first image and the second image).

In specific example 2, when an image change effect is executed, a change is made on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG. It is possible to display a frame image GG. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG, or may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these, and the production pattern 70a, It may be expressed so that it changes together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 2, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second specific example, the first movable member 73 changes to the second mode and the change notification sound is output in synchronization with the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the second specific example, the first movable member 73 is changed to the first mode at a time shifted from the end of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 2, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state at a time when the image change effect ends. By doing this, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(Specific example 3 of image change production)
Next, a third specific example of an image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. FIG. 245 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 12 is a timing chart of specific example 3 showing the relationship between image change effects. Further, FIG. 246 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of the third specific example is executed.

At the timing T0, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is being executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 246(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed in the first pending number U1 at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reservation number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed as the first reservation number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). On the screen, a background image HG is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background image HG is displayed in a predetermined manner such as scrolling. In this way, the "normal display" is executed on the screen at the timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in a first state where they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the winning opening lamp NR, and the frame All of the second light emitting regions HK2 comprising the illumination device 10 are in the first state in which they are performing dramatic light emission. Furthermore, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc., thereby producing effects using sound (music, voice). Note that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound performance may be continuously performed or the sound performance may be interrupted.

In specific example 3, the first light emitting area HK1 (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (decorative frame 40, the prize opening lamp NR and the frame lighting device 10) change from the first state to the second state where the lights are turned off (see FIG. 246(a)). Then, at the timing T1, when the image change effect is executed, the first light emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the first light emitting area HK1 of the frame illumination device 10 are The second light emitting area HK2 changes from the second state to the first state and performs the effect light emission (see FIG. 246(b)). At this time, in synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the transition to the change display, the second movable member 74 transitions from the first mode in the standby position to the second mode in which motion production is possible. The first movable member 73 is maintained in the first mode in which it stops at the standby position. In addition, in synchronization with the start of the transition to the change display, a change notification sound such as "pikin" is output from the audio output device 9, for example. Note that the first light emitting area HK1 of the first movable member 73, the decorative frame 40, and the second light emitting area HK1 of the winning opening lamp NR are maintained in the second state over the execution period of the image change effect.

The timing T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn to the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. Display on the device 70 is started, and a change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In specific example 3, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started at a shift from the update timing of the start frame of the change display. In synchronization with the update timing of the start frame of the change display, the change of the second movable member 74 from the first mode to the second mode is started, and the change notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. Begins.

As shown in FIG. 246(b), when transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to shrink together, and the picture frame is viewed from outside the screen. The image is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so that the outer periphery of the image is surrounded by the frame image GG, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to look like a part (or all) of the normal display has been cut out. When transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the production symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 246(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a in the change display, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, the hold icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed so as to swing together. In specific example 3, the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, which have been in the second state, are set to switch to the first state when the execution of the image change effect is started (FIG. 246(d)) reference). Further, in the third specific example, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output halfway from the start of execution of the image change effect.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are the range in which the change display changes. It is located outside of the , and is designed to prevent the changing display from overlapping with the pending numbers and special design TZ. Further, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed so as to continue, and the reservation icon T1 and the reservation number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball.

The second movable member 74 in the second mode is returned to the first mode in synchronization with (synchronized with) the start of returning from the change display to the normal display at timing T4 (see FIG. 246(e)). The timing T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started. In specific example 3, the change of the second movable member 74 from the second mode to the first mode is started in accordance with (synchronized with) the update timing of the return frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 246(e), when transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to enlarge together, and the frame image GG is displayed on the screen. appears to disappear outside of the screen. When transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area enlarge and change together with the production symbol 70a. There is no problem and it is displayed in the same position.

In synchronization with (synchronizing with) the start of the normal display at timing T5, the second movable member 74 in the second mode stops at the standby position and returns to the first mode (see FIG. 246(f)). The timing of T5 is a frame update timing (end frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production pattern 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data related to normal display (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) on the first image display device 70 is started. In the third specific example, the change of the second movable member 74 from the second mode to the first mode is completed in accordance with (synchronized with) the end frame update timing.

In specific example 3, when an image change effect is performed, a light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2. It is composed of By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when an image change effect is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is directed to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70. First, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the third specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change production, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position whether the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. . By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the third specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the production symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change effect, the visibility of the effect pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG changes between the normal display and the change display. On the other hand, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numerals can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are normally displayed or changed. By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information that does not change the visibility (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change effect (the first image and the second image).

In specific example 3, when an image change effect is executed, a change is made on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG. It is possible to display a frame image GG. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG, or it may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these, and the production pattern 70a, It may be expressed so that it changes together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In the third specific example, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state at a time when the image change effect is started. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the third specific example, the second movable member 74 changes to the second mode and the change notification sound is output at a time lag from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the execution of the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the third specific example, the second movable member 74 changes to the first mode in synchronization with the end of the image change effect. By doing this, when the execution of the image change performance is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 3, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state a little before the start of the image change effect, and the change is performed in synchronization with the start of the image change effect. ) The first light emitting region HK1 and/or the second light emitting region HK2 are changed to the first state. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. It should be noted that the movable members 73 and 74 are changed to the second mode a little before the start of the image change effect, and either in conjunction with (synchronized with) the start of the image change effect or after the start of the image change effect. The movable members 73 and 74 may be returned to the first mode.

(Specific example 4 of image change production)
Next, a fourth specific example of an image change effect executed in conjunction with the effect light emission using the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 will be described. FIG. 247 shows the operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, the effect light emission of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2, the audio output of the audio output device 10, and the screen of the first image display device 70. 12 is a timing chart of a fourth specific example showing the relationship between image change effects. Further, FIG. 248 shows an example of the effect when the image change effect of specific example 4 is executed.

At the timing T0, a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect symbol 70a that is executed during the variable display of the special symbol is being executed on the screen of the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 248(a)). At this time, the icon TH is displayed in the icon display area 70C provided at the bottom of the screen, and the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed in the first pending number U1 at the bottom of the screen. It is displayed as a pending icon T1 in the icon display area 70B. Further, in the first reservation number display area 70E provided on the left side of the screen, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the production control unit 130m is displayed as the first reservation number. Further, in the special symbol display area provided at the lower right of the screen, a special symbol TZ is variably displayed in response to the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). Then, on the screen, a background image HG is displayed behind the effect pattern 70a that is being displayed in a variable manner, and the background image HG is displayed in a predetermined manner such as scrolling. In this way, the normal display is executed on the screen at the timing T0.

At timing T0, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in a first state where they are stopped at the standby position. In addition, the first light emitting region HK1 of the first movable member 73, the first light emitting region HK1 of the second movable member 74, the second light emitting region HK2 of the decorative frame 40, the second light emitting region HK2 consisting of the prize opening lamp NR, and the frame All of the second light emitting regions HK2 comprising the illumination device 10 are in the first state in which they are performing dramatic light emission. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), and the like to perform sound (music, audio) effects. Note that while the change notification sound, which will be described later, is being output, the sound performance may be continuously performed or the sound performance may be interrupted.

In specific example 4, the first light emitting area HK1 (the first movable member 73) and the second light emitting area HK2 (the decorative frame 40, the frame illumination device 10) changes from the first state to the second state where the light is turned off (see FIG. 248(a)). At this time, the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) remain in the first state. The first movable member 73 starts to change from the first mode to the second mode at timing T1a, which is before T1 when the image change effect is started. Then, at timing T1, when the image change effect is executed, a change notification sound such as a "pikin" is output from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the start of transition to the change display. At timing T1b after T1 when the image change effect is started, the first light emitting area HK1 of the second movable member 74 and the second light emitting area HK2 of the prize opening lamp NR change from the first state to the second state. do. Further, at the timing T1b, the second movable member 74 shifts from the first mode in the standby position to the second mode in which it can produce motion.

The timing T1 is a frame update timing (start frame update timing) in the middle of a normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, the first image display of the image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the change display that had started to be drawn to the frame buffer prior to the timing of T1. Display on the device 70 is started, and a change display is started on the screen of the first image display device 70. In specific example 4, the change from the first state to the second state of the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK1 is started at a shift from the update timing of the start frame of the change display. Further, the change from the first mode to the second mode of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is started at a shift from the start frame update timing of the change display. On the other hand, the output of the change notification sound from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization with the update timing of the start frame of the change display.

As shown in FIG. 248(b), when transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the production pattern 70a, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to shrink together, and the picture frame is viewed from outside the screen. The image is displayed so that the image GG appears. The change display is framed so that the outer periphery of the image is surrounded by the frame image GG, and the inside of the frame image GG is configured to look like a part (or all) of the normal display has been cut out. When transitioning from the normal display to the change display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are reduced and changed together with the production symbol 70a. It is displayed in the same position as the normal display.

As shown in FIG. 248(c), an image change effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a in the change display, the background image HG, the relevant icon TH, the pending icon T1, and the frame image GG are displayed so as to swing together. Further, in the fourth specific example, the output of the change notification sound is stopped after the change notification sound is output halfway from the start of execution of the image change effect.

When the image change effect is being executed, on the screen, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area are the range in which the change display changes. It is located outside of the box, and is designed to prevent the changing display from overlapping with the pending numbers and special design TZ. Further, the variable performance of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ is displayed so as to continue, and the reservation icon T1 and the reservation number are also displayed so as to increase in accordance with the winning of the game ball.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 in the second mode are returned to the first mode in synchronization with (synchronized with) or staggered the start of the return from the change display to the normal display at timing T4. The timing T4 is a frame update timing (return frame update timing) in the middle of the normal variation period in which the normal variation of the production symbol 70a is performed, and is a predetermined frame after the start of the variation production. At this frame update timing, display of image data (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) related to the returning change display on the first image display device 70 is started.

As shown in FIG. 248(e), when transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the effect pattern 70a, the background image HG, the icon TH, and the hold icon T1 change to enlarge together, and the frame image GG changes to the screen. appears to disappear outside of the screen. When transitioning from the change display to the normal display, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the special symbol TZ displayed in the special symbol display area enlarge and change together with the production symbol 70a. There is no problem and it is displayed in the same position.

In specific example 4, the first light emitting area HK1 (first movable member 73) and the second light emitting area HK2 (decorative frame 40, frame illumination device 10 ) changes from the second state to the first state, and the effect light emission is executed. At this time, the first light emitting region HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting region HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) remain in the second state. Also, before the timing T5a, which is before T5 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the first movable member 73 starts changing from the second mode to the first mode, and at the timing T5a, the first movable member 73 returns to the first mode and stops. At this time, the second movable member 74 remains in the second mode. Then, at timing T5, the changing display returns to the normal display, and the image changing effect ends.

At timing T5b after T5 when the image change effect is finished, the first light emitting area HK1 (second movable member 74) and the second light emitting area HK2 (winning hole lamp NR) change from the second state to the first state. The light changes and a light emission is performed. Further, at a timing before T5 when the image change effect starts to be executed, the second movable member 74 starts changing from the second mode to the first mode, and at timing T5b, the first movable member 74 changes to the first mode. Return to and stop. Note that the return of the movable members 73, 74 to the first mode may be started after the image change effect is finished, or in synchronization with (synchronized with) the end of the image change effect.

In specific example 4, when an image change effect is performed, a light emission effect that changes from the first state to the second state can be executed by linking at least one of the first light emitting area HK1 and the second light emitting area HK2. It is composed of By doing so, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the changing display, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, when an image change effect is performed, by changing from a relatively bright first state to a second state darker than the first state, the player's attention is directed to the area around the screen of the first image display device 70. First, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the image change effect executed on the screen of the first image display device 70, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the fourth specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change production, the special symbol TZ and the pending number can be displayed at the same position whether the production pattern 70a, the pending icon T1, and the background image HG are normally displayed or changed. . By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information (third image) displayed at the same position has the same content as the information (first image and second image) that changes in the image change effect.

In the fourth specific example, the special symbol TZ and the reserved number can be displayed on the screen of the first image display device 70 together with the performance symbol 70a, the reserved icon T1, the background image HG, and the like. In the image change effect, the ease of visual recognition of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG changes between the change display and the normal display. On the other hand, the special symbol TZ and the reserved numerals can be displayed so that their visibility does not change whether they are changed or displayed. By doing so, even when the image change effect is executed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the necessary information, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In particular, it is preferable for the player that the information that does not change the visibility (third image) has the same content as the information that changes in the image change effect (the first image and the second image).

In specific example 4, when an image change effect is executed, a change is made on the screen of the first image display device 70 in conjunction with the change from the normal display to the change display of the effect pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG. It is possible to display a frame image GG. By doing so, when the image change effect is executed, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved. In particular, by making the frame image GG, which is not displayed in the normal display, appear in the changing display, the changing display can be made to attract the player's attention more, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the frame image GG may be in the same image (image layer) as the production pattern 70a, the hold icon T1, and the background image HG, or it may be set as a separate image (another image layer) from these, and the production pattern 70a, It may be expressed so that it changes together with the hold icon T1 and the background image HG.

In specific example 4, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are changed to the second state at a time shifted from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the movable members 73 and 74 change to the second mode and the change notification sound is outputted at a timing shifted from the start of the image change effect. By doing so, when the image change effect is started, the change display can attract the attention of the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the fourth specific example, the change of the movable members 73 and 74 to the first mode is completed at a time when the image change effect is finished. By doing this, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In specific example 4, the first light emitting area HK1 and/or the second light emitting area HK2 are returned to the first state at a time when the image change effect ends. By doing this, when the execution of the image change effect is finished, the change from the change display to the normal display can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 249 and 250, in the image change production, an effect EF that decorates the change display may be displayed together with the change display. The effect EF may be a moving image or a fixed image, and may or may not change in accordance with the changing display. Furthermore, the effect EF is displayed so that it does not overlap with the change display, whether it is displayed in front of the change display (Figure 249(a)) or behind the change display (Figure 249(b)). (FIG. 250) or either.

In the image change production, when displaying the effect EF together with the change display, the effect EF may be displayed in a shape or color corresponding to the degree of expectation for a jackpot. For example, when the expectation level is low, a blue effect EF is displayed (FIG. 250(a)), and when the expectation level is high, a red effect EF is displayed. Note that the expectation level display using the effect EF may be changed during the period of image change production.

In the image change production, production may be performed in conjunction with a light guide plate or other production means. Further, in accordance with the image change effect performed on the screen of the first image display device 70, a linked effect may be performed on the screen of the second image display device 71. For example, the screen of the second image display device 71 is darkened in accordance with the effect of making the periphery of the screen of the first image display device 70 relatively dark by setting the first light emitting region HK1 and the second light emitting region HK2 to the second state. Examples of such activities include:

In the image change production, predetermined images such as the production pattern 70a and the pending icon are not included in the change display, and the production pattern 70a and the pending icon are fixedly displayed in the same position as the normal display, for example, in the same way as the normal display. It may be displayed (FIG. 251(a)). In the image change performance, a predetermined image such as a pending icon may not be included in the change display, and the pending icon or the like may be erased or hidden from view during the execution period of the image change performance ( Figure 251(b)). In addition, in the image change effect, predetermined images such as the effect pattern 70a and the hold icon included in the change display may be displayed in the same manner as the normal display, for example, by being fixedly displayed at the same position as the normal display. .

The system information IF1, which includes characters included in the normal display (FIG. 252(a)) that guide players to play right-handed, and the game information IF2, which includes characters that indicate the number of time savings after a jackpot game ends, are displayed on the screen. The information may be used in the image display effect as follows. For example, in the image change effect, the system information IF1 may be displayed in the same way as the normal display, such as not including the system information IF1 in the change display and displaying the system information IF1 fixedly at the same position as the normal display (FIG. 252(b)). . Furthermore, in the image change effect, the game information IF2 may be included in the change display (FIG. 252(b)). In this case, an image showing the same information as the reduced game information IF2 in the change display may be enlarged and displayed overlapping the change display.

In the image change production, an effect EF may be displayed that associates the change display with the movable members 73, 74 that perform the production operation in the second mode (FIG. 253(a)). In the image change effect, for example, the movement effect and/or effect EF of the movable members 73 and 74 in the second mode, such as a change display changing position by being pushed or pulled by the second movable member 74; It may also be made to link with the change in the change display (FIGS. 253(b) and 253(c)).

The image change effect can be executed at various timings in association with other effects. For example, an image change effect may be performed during the continuous look-ahead effect.

The start or end of execution of the image change effect (the start of reducing the normally displayed image or the return of the changed displayed image to the normal display) may be associated with the operation of an operating means such as a button operation of the effect button device 16. . For example, when the image change performance becomes executable, a button image may be displayed on the screen to guide the button operation, and when the button operation is performed, the image change performance may be started. Note that if the button image is used in common in a plurality of presentation modes, the amount of data can be compressed. Further, when a predetermined condition (for example, long press or repeated press) is established by operating the operating means such as button operation of the production button device 16, the change display or the effect EF or image displayed together with the change display is changed (for example, , the glass may break). At this time, each time a predetermined condition (for example, a long press or a repeated press) is satisfied by operating the operating means, the change display or the change in the effect EF or image displayed together with the change display progresses (for example, the glass gradually changes). ).

The image change effect may be selectable from a plurality of patterns. For example, a plurality of patterns are set, such as an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a and the background image HG change together, and an image change effect having a change display in which the effect pattern 70a is not included and the background image HG changes. You can leave it there.

The changing display may be a single image or a combination of separate images moving in sync. For example, by forming an image larger than the displayable area of the screen, the frame image GG can be made invisible in normal display (Fig. 254(a)), and a change display smaller than the displayable area of the screen can be made. By changing the frame image GG, the frame image GG may be displayed on the screen (FIG. 254(b)). The change display may be rotated or swung (Fig. 254(c)), deformed so as to be stretched horizontally (Fig. 254(d)), for example tilted and stretched (Fig. 254(e)), or reduced. - Can be executed in various ways, such as by enlarging. Then, when the image change effect is finished, the change display may be changed to be expanded beyond the displayable area of the screen (FIGS. 255(a) and 255(b)). Furthermore, at the end of the image change effect, when switching from the change display to the normal display, a switching effect such as a whiteout that momentarily displays a white image may be inserted (FIG. 255(c)). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a loss mode ("285") (FIG. 255(d)). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation). Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. In addition, the performance symbol 70a which has been temporarily stopped comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (FIG. 255(e)).

The image change effect is executed in accordance with the frame update timing. At this time, in accordance with the change in the change display, other effects (sound effects, light emission, movement of accessories) other than the change display can be performed. Alternatively, other effects may be performed at timings shifted from changes in the change display. When the change display returns from a changing state to a normal display that does not change, the end timing of other effects other than the change display (sound effects, light emission, movement of accessories) that are executed in accordance with the change display is determined. The timing can be earlier or later than the change end timing of the change display, or can be the same.

At the start of the image change performance (when the change display shrinks), multiple performances (sounds, images, lighting equipment, movable accessory operation) start at the same frame update timing, and when the image change performance ends (the change display ), multiple effects (sounds, images, lighting devices, movable accessory operations) may not start at the same frame update timing.

In the image change effect, a change display is started in which a predetermined image (for example, the effect pattern 70a, background image HG, etc.) that was in the normal position in the normal display is shrunk toward the back of the screen and changes to the change position, and the change The predetermined image that was at the changed position in the display is enlarged from the back side of the screen toward the front side and returns to the normal position, thereby returning to the normal display. Here, in the image change effect, it is preferable that the start period during which the predetermined image changes from the normal position to the changed position is longer than the return period during which the predetermined image changes from the changed position to the normal position. In other words, the number of frames when the change display is reduced at the start of the image change effect (start period) may be made larger than the number of frames when the change display is expanded at the end of the image change effect (return period). In this way, by increasing the number of frames at the start of the image change effect, it is easy for the player to understand, attracts attention to the image change effect, and improves the interest of the game. Furthermore, by reducing the number of frames at the end of the image change effect, the transition to the normal display can be made quickly, which can lead to interest in the next variable effect. Here, the operations of the movable members 73 and 74 that are executed in accordance with the reduction/enlargement change of a predetermined image in the image change effect and the changes in the light emitting areas HK1 and HK2 are also executed in conjunction with the start period. , it is preferable to make the time longer than those executed in conjunction with the return period.

Although a specific example of moving the movable members 73, 74 in the image change production has been described above, it is not necessary to move the movable members 73, 74, and the movable accessories 73, 74 may be stopped during the execution period of the image change production. You can.

(If the conditions are not met in the production control section)
Next, a case will be described in which the production control section 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control section 130m. The case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the command means, for example, that the command is not received due to a disconnection, half-disconnection, or disconnection of the command line connecting the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, or the like. , communication abnormalities such as abnormal reception of commands due to garbled commands due to noise or half-disconnection are possible. In addition, in the following explanation, the time when the production control unit 130m can normally receive a command will be expressed as “〇” in the figure, and the time when a predetermined state in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally will be expressed. , is represented by an "x" in the figure. During a predetermined period from when a predetermined state in which a command cannot be received normally occurs until before a command can be received normally, one or more commands of the same type and/or different types may not be received normally. . In addition, the command is written as "cd" in the figure.

The effect patterns 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in the normal gaming state decorate a rectangular base image, a character image CG consisting of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is a part of the character, and the background of the character. It is assumed that it is composed of a decorative part made up of a pattern effect image ZE, and an identification part made up of a hexagonal base image and a numeric part (identification characters). Further, it is assumed that the effect pattern 70a displayed on the first image display device 70 in a specific game state is composed only of an identification part consisting of a number part (identification character).

In the normal gaming state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the performance modes A to C are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion). Further, in the specific game state, it is assumed that the background images corresponding to each of the production modes D to E are scrolling left and right (reciprocating motion).

In addition, if the connector of a predetermined detection sensor (starting port detection switch 45a, 47a, magnetic detection sensor 53a, sensor 54a, etc.) is disconnected, an abnormality notification (error notification) is immediately performed. On the other hand, in the case of a command abnormality due to disconnection of the connector of the command line for communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130, no abnormality notification is performed.

In the following specific example, we will explain a case where the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive commands in the normal gaming state, but even if the gaming state is a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state), the basic The flow is similar to the normal game state.

Specifically, the first reservation number, the first special symbol memory designation command, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol reservation display 63, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-first 1 hold display 83, 1st hold count display area 70E, 1st hold icon display area 70B, 1st lamp pattern, and 1st start port 45, respectively, by 2nd hold count, 2nd special pattern storage designation command, 2 special symbol, 2nd special symbol display 61, 2nd special symbol pending display 64, sub 2nd variable display 82, sub 2nd pending display 84, 2nd pending number display area 70F, 2nd pending icon display It may be read as the area 70D, the second lamp pattern, and the second starting port 47.

(Specific example 1 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Specific example 1 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described using FIGS. 256 and 257. FIG. 256 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and FIG. 257 is an example of performance corresponding to the timing chart of FIG. 256.

At timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60, and a gaming state designation command, a performance symbol designation command, and a fluctuation pattern designation are sent as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m. When the production control unit 130m normally receives the command, variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)).

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (see FIG. 257(g)), and the sub-first variable display 81 In the first lamp pattern, the main lamp pattern stops (for example, goes out).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control section 130m normally receives the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the final stop of the performance symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and production symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, And, the period of the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 1, the production control unit 130m sets a first condition (gaming state specification command) regarding the designation of the gaming state, a second condition (production symbol specification command) regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a, and a designation of the performance pattern of the performance symbol. If the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the variation of the production pattern 70a is started, and if the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production pattern 70a is not satisfied (missed), The swing is made to fluctuate with a performance pattern 70a determined based on a second condition (performance pattern designation command). On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, although the first condition regarding the designation of the gaming state (gaming state designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a (the performance symbol designation command) and the performance If at least one of the third conditions (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding designation of the symbol production pattern is not satisfied (missed), (regardless of whether the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is satisfied (normal reception) or missing abnormality) , the variation of the effect pattern 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 2 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
With reference to FIGS. 257 and 258, a second specific example will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 258 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 2 will be described with reference to the performance example of FIG. 257.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When receiving, the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started, and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but it may be stopped (momentarily), erased, or rewritten, and then the variable display of the effect pattern 70a may be started.

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Furthermore, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production design designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variation display of the performance symbols 70a starts. At the same time, the special symbol TZ and the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are continued. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but it may be stopped (for a moment), erased, or rewritten, and then the variable display of the effect pattern 70a may be started.

At timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 257(f)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (see FIG. 257(g)), and the sub-first variable display 81 The main stop occurs when the first lamp pattern is in a losing state (for example, turned off).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 2, the performance control unit 130m sets a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol 70a (performance symbol designation command), and a first condition regarding the performance pattern (variation pattern) of the performance symbol 70a. When the 3rd condition (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the first state starts the fluctuating production, and when the 4th condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the variation of the production symbol 70a is insufficient, based on the second condition. The determined effect pattern 70a enters a second state in which swing fluctuation can be executed. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, if the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient but the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the The state is such that the same fluctuation performance as in the first state is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the state becomes a state in which the same swing fluctuation as in the second state can be executed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In specific example 2, when the performance control unit 130m satisfies the predetermined conditions regarding the performance symbols 70a (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command), regardless of whether the conditions regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) are satisfied or not. , when the fluctuation performance of the performance pattern 70a is started, and the conditions for stopping the fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a (special pattern confirmation command) are insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation is started with the performance pattern 70a determined based on the predetermined condition performance pattern designation command). It is doable. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 3 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 257 and FIG. 259, a third specific example will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 259 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 3 will be explained with reference to the performance example of FIG. 257.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Furthermore, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the processing for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation commands, performance design designation commands, and fluctuation pattern designation commands as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special pattern TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (see FIG. 257(g)), and the sub-first variable display 81 In the first lamp pattern, the main lamp pattern stops (for example, goes out).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and production symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the final stop of the performance symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the production symbol specification command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, And, the period of the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 3, the performance control unit 130m sets a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol 70a (performance symbol designation command), and a first condition regarding the performance pattern (variation pattern) of the performance symbol 70a. When the 3rd condition (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied, the variation performance of the production pattern 70a is started, and when the 4th condition (special pattern confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production pattern 70a is insufficient, the 2nd condition (production pattern It is possible to execute the swing fluctuation with the effect pattern 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient. , it is possible to control so as not to start the variable presentation of the presentation pattern 70a. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the production control section 130m, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Specific example 4 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 257 and FIG. 260, a specific example 4 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 260 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control section 130m, and specific example 4 will be described with reference to the performance example of FIG. 257.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, production design designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When not received, the fluctuating display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control section 130m normally receives the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. Therefore, the period of the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (FIG. 257(c) reference).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variation production has not started, so the production pattern 70a is The periods of the stop, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and production symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. If it cannot be received, the variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. Therefore, the period of the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (FIG. 257(c) reference).

At the timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the production pattern 70a is The periods of the stop, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When receiving, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 257(f)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/reducing the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(i)). At this time, the temporarily stopped effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a variable manner as it is, but it may be stopped (momentarily), erased, or rewritten, and then the variable display of the effect pattern 70a may be started.

The steps after P17 are as described above.

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 4, the performance control unit 130m satisfies the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), but the second condition regarding the performance symbol 70a (performance symbol designation command) and the performance pattern (variation) of the performance symbol 70a. If at least one of the third conditions (variation pattern designation command) regarding the variation pattern is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variation effect. On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, if the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient while the second condition (production symbol specification command) and third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) are satisfied, the production When the symbol fluctuation is started and the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation can be executed with the performance symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (the performance symbol designation command). By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 5 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 257 and FIG. 261, a specific example 1 in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m will be described. FIG. 261 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, and specific example 5 will be described with reference to the performance example of FIG. 257.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined loss mode ("285") (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When not received, the fluctuating display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control section 130m normally receives the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command. When not received, the fluctuating display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, The period of the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command and production symbol designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. When not received, the fluctuating display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At the timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m does not normally receive any of the game state designation commands, production symbol designation commands, and fluctuation pattern designation commands as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol The variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started, and the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 The main stop period of the first lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P14, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the game state designation command and production symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. When receiving, the fluctuating display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P17, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P18, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, The period of the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P19, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m does not normally receive the production symbol specification command. When receiving, the fluctuating display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and , the period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P20, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the first variable display on the sub-first variable display 81 The stop period of the 1 lamp pattern is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P21, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, since the variable production has not started, the main stop of the production pattern 70a, the special The period of the main stop of the fluctuation display of the symbol TZ and the main stop of the first lamp symbol on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(c)).

At timing P22, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 5, when the performance control unit 130m lacks the predetermined conditions regarding the performance symbols 70a (performance symbol designation commands, fluctuation pattern designation commands), the conditions regarding the gaming state (game state designation command) and the fluctuation stop of the performance symbols 70a are set. It is possible to control so that the variable production does not start regardless of whether the related conditions (special symbol confirmation command) are satisfied or insufficient. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the production control section 130m, and it is possible to prevent the interest in the game from decreasing.

(Specific example 6 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIGS. 257 and 262, a specific example 6 will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 262 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m, and specific example 6 will be described with reference to the example of effect shown in FIG. 257.

At the timing of P1, when the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the game state designation command, production design designation command, and variation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance design 70a, the special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is started (see FIG. 257(a)). At this time, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("285"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 257(b)).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode (“285”) (see FIG. 257(c)), and the sub-first The first lamp pattern on the variable display 81 is stopped in a losing manner (for example, turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the production symbol designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When receiving, variable display of the effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state of rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(e)).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("164"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (actual performance operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue (see FIG. 257(f)).

At timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing manner. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the variable performance will not be performed. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive any of the game state designation commands, production design designation commands, and variation pattern designation commands as start commands transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production design 70a, the special symbol The variable display of one lamp pattern on the TZ and the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the pending icon H1 and the icon TH continue, the performance symbol 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, and the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed. The period of the fluctuating display of the first lamp pattern is extended, and the BGM output is maintained during the fluctuation (see FIG. 257(f)). The temporarily stopped production pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, as well as the bar-shaped image SG and pattern effect image that make up the production pattern 70a. ZE is performing a fluctuation motion (direction motion).

At the timing of P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the temporary stop of the production symbol 70a, the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation The period of variable display of the first lamp pattern on the display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(f)).

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined losing manner (see FIG. 257(g)), and the sub-first variable display 81 In the first lamp pattern, the main lamp pattern stops (for example, goes out).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the game state designation command and production symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the fluctuation pattern specification command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P11, even if a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the final stop of the performance symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and The main stop period of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the fluctuating production has not started, so the main stop of the production symbol 70a, the special symbol The period of the main stop of the TZ fluctuation display and the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first fluctuation display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state specification command and the fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control section 110m, the production control section 130m cannot normally receive the production symbol specification command. When receiving, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started. At this time, the production pattern 70a comes to a final stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 shows a losing mode (for example, turned off). The main stop state continues (see FIG. 257(g)).

At the timing of P14, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, the main stop of the performance symbol 70a, the main stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, and the sub The period during which the first lamp pattern is permanently stopped on the first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P15, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. If the production control unit 130m can normally receive the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the final stop of the production symbol 70a, the final stop of the variable display of the special symbol TZ, And, the period of the main stop of the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is extended (see FIG. 257(g)).

At timing P16, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a, the special symbol TZ and The variable display of one lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is started. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing preparatory operations such as operating a part of the decorative part or enlarging/contracting the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(h) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation) (see FIG. 257(i)).

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 6, although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient in the performance control unit 130m, the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance symbol 70a and the performance pattern (variation) of the performance symbol 70a are insufficient. If the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the pattern) is satisfied, the fluctuating performance is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is insufficient, the second condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is satisfied. It is possible to execute the swing fluctuation with the effect pattern 70a determined based on the designated command). On the other hand, in the production control unit 130m, when the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient. , it is possible to control the variable performance so as not to start it. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 7 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 263, a seventh specific example will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 263 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control section 130m.

At timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (gaming state A), production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. Note that the internal state of the performance control unit 130m is determined to be the gaming state A based on the gaming state designation command that designates the gaming state A. In addition, the performance control unit 130m stores a reception history of gaming state designation commands.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command (gaming state A), production symbol designation command, and fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates the gaming state A received at the timing P4 has the same content as the reception history of the gaming state designation command (gaming state A) received last time (timing P1). Since it is a command, the internal state remains in gaming state A. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation).

At timing P5, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At the timing of P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the timing of P7, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, when the production control unit 130m normally receives the gaming state designation command (gaming state B), production symbol specification command, and fluctuation pattern specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the production pattern 70a , the special symbol TZ and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates the gaming state A received at the timing P7 has the same content as the reception history of the previous gaming state designation command (gaming state A) (timing P4). Since it is not a command, the internal state is switched to gaming state B. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation).

At timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At timing P10, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state designation command (gaming state A) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance control unit 130m controls the performance designation command and the fluctuation pattern designation command. When the part 130m receives the signal normally, variable display of the 1-lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates gaming state A that could not be received at timing P10 is the same as the reception history of the gaming state designation command (gaming state B) last time (timing P7). Although the content is not a command, the internal state remains in gaming state B without switching to gaming state A. Note that the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or a part as in the present embodiment (FIG. 257(d)) reference). Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, since the variable display of the performance symbol 70a has started, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (performance operation).

At timing P11, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation operation (rendering operation) of the pending icon T1 and the icon TH continue.

At the timing P12, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the performance control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) transmitted from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing for ending the variable performance is performed. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At timing P13, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state designation command (gaming state A) and the production symbol specification command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the variation pattern specification command is used for production control. When the section 130m receives the signal normally, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started, and the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1st lamp pattern are not started. The stopped state continues. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates gaming state A that could not be received at timing P10 is the same as the gaming state designation command (gaming state B) in the previous reception history (timing P7). Although the content is not a command, the internal state remains in gaming state B without switching to gaming state A.

At the timing of P15 after passing through P14, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 in a losing manner. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production has not started, so the production pattern 70a, special symbol TZ and The 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 remains in a stopped state and does not change.

At timing P16, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, the first special symbol display 60 starts to fluctuate display of the first special symbol. At this time, while the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the gaming state designation command (gaming state A) and the fluctuation pattern designation command as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, the performance control unit 130m uses the production symbol designation command to control the performance. When the part 130m receives the signal normally, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 is not started, and the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1st lamp pattern are not started. The stopped state continues. In this case, the production control unit 130m determines that the gaming state designation command that designates gaming state A that could not be received at timing P10 is the same as the gaming state designation command (gaming state B) in the previous reception history (timing P7). Although the content is not a command, the internal state remains in gaming state B without switching to gaming state A.

At the timing of P18 after passing through P17, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Even if the production control unit 130m normally receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the variable production has not started, so the production pattern 70a, special symbol TZ and The 1 lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 remains in a stopped state and does not change.

If, at the timing when the variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60, the production control section sends a gaming state designation command (gaming state A) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m. 130m normally receives, but if the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive at least one of the production symbol designation command and the variation pattern specification command, the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81. 1 The fluctuating display of the lamp pattern does not start. In this case, if the gaming state of the gaming state designation command received at this timing is the same as the gaming state designation command of the previous reception history, the production control unit 130m will execute the previous game without switching the internal state. remain in the state. On the other hand, if the gaming state of the gaming state designation command received at this timing is not the same as the gaming state designation command of the previous reception history, the production control unit 130m uses the current gaming state designation command as the gaming state designation command. The internal state is switched to the gaming state determined based on the above.

Although the production control unit 130m was able to normally receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m based on the reception of this command is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 7, when the first condition (gaming state designation command) regarding designation of the gaming state is satisfied (normal reception), the performance control unit 130m executes the game determined based on the first condition (gaming state designation command). If the state is the same gaming state as the previously designated first condition (gaming state designation command), the gaming state known by the production control unit 130m is not changed. On the other hand, if the gaming state determined based on the first condition (gaming state designation command) is different from the previously specified first condition gaming state designation command), the gaming state known to the sub The game state is changed to the one determined based on the first condition (game state designation command). In addition, in the performance control unit 130m, if the first condition (gaming state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state is not satisfied (missed), other conditions (the second condition (special symbol designation command) regarding the designation of performance symbols and the performance Regardless of the third condition (performance pattern designation command) regarding designation of the symbol performance pattern, the game state is not changed. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 8 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 264, a specific example 8 will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 264 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 264(a), at timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command (winning symbol), and variation pattern designation command (winning performance) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a winning one and the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is a winning one, a variable performance is started.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m receives a gaming state designation command, a performance design designation command (winning symbol), and a variation pattern designation command (loss performance) as a start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, The variable display of the 1-lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 does not start, and the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1st lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 stop. kept in condition. In this way, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a winning one, but the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is a losing one, the fluctuation performance is not started.

As shown in FIG. 264(b), at timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives the game state designation command, performance symbol designation command (losing symbol), and variation pattern designation command (loss performance) as the start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m. , the performance symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the variable display of one lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 are started. In this case, when the performance pattern 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a losing one and the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is a losing one, a variable performance is started.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (presentation operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, when the performance control unit 130m receives a gaming state designation command, a performance symbol designation command (losing symbol), and a variation pattern designation command (winning performance) as a start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m, The variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1st lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are stopped. kept in condition. In this way, if the performance symbol 70a determined based on the performance symbol designation command is a losing one, but the fluctuation pattern determined based on the fluctuation pattern designation command is a winning one, the fluctuation performance is not started.

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 8, the performance control unit 130m determines that the performance symbol 70a determined based on the second condition (performance symbol designation command) regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a is a winning one, and that the performance pattern of the performance symbol 70a ( When the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the variation pattern (variation pattern) is a winning one, it is possible to start varying the production symbols 70a. Similarly, in the performance control unit 130m, the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern 70a is determined to be a loss, and the performance pattern regarding the designation of the performance pattern 70a is determined. If the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is a losing one, it is possible to start varying the production symbol 70a. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, (a first condition (gaming state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, a second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a, and a performance pattern of the performance symbol 70a), Even when the third condition regarding designation (fluctuation pattern designation command) is satisfied (received), the performance pattern 70a determined based on the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern 70a, and the performance. If the hit/loss is different from the variation pattern determined based on the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding designation of the production pattern of the symbol 70a, the variation of the production pattern 70a is not started. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Specific example 9 when conditions are not met in the production control section)
Using FIG. 265, a specific example 9 will be described in which the production control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally and the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m. FIG. 265 is a timing chart when the predetermined conditions are not met in the production control section 130m.

As shown in FIG. 265(a), at timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, a game state designation command, a production symbol designation command (for the first special symbol), and a fluctuation pattern designation command (for the first special symbol) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. When received normally, variable display of the 1 lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started. In this case, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is for the first special symbol, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the first special symbol. If so, start a variable performance.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging (swinging display) so as to move up and down from a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production symbol 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, a game state designation command, a production symbol designation command (for the first special symbol), and a fluctuation pattern designation command (for the second special symbol) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. is received, the fluctuating display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1-lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are 1 lamp pattern is kept in a stopped state. In this way, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is for the first special symbol, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special symbol. If it is, the variable performance will not start.

As shown in FIG. 265(b), at timing P1, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, a game state designation command, a production symbol designation command (for the second special symbol), and a fluctuation pattern designation command (for the second special symbol) as a start command transmitted from the main control section 110m are transmitted from the production control section 130m. When received normally, variable display of the 1 lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started. In this case, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is for the second special symbol, and the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the second special symbol. If so, start a variable performance.

At timing P2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing manner. At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T1 and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation).

At timing P3, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. When the production control unit 130m successfully receives the stop command (special symbol confirmation command, abbreviated as symbol confirmation CD in the figure) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the command to end the variable production is Processing takes place. At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, the special symbol TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode, and the first lamp pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 changes to a loss mode ( For example, the main operation is stopped when the light is turned off).

At the P4 timing, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. At this time, a game state designation command, a performance design designation command (for the second special symbol), and a fluctuation pattern designation command (for the first special symbol) as a start command transmitted from the main control unit 110m are transmitted from the production control unit 130m. is received, the variable display of the 1 lamp symbol on the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the sub-first variation display 81 is not started, and the production symbol 70a, the special symbol TZ, and the 1 lamp symbol on the sub-first variation display 81 are not started. 1 lamp pattern is kept in a stopped state. In this way, the production pattern 70a determined based on the production pattern designation command is for the second special symbol, whereas the variation pattern determined based on the variation pattern designation command is for the first special symbol. If it is, the variable performance will not start.

Although the production control unit 130m was able to successfully receive the command sent from the main control unit 110m, based on the reception of this command, the production command sent from the production control unit 130m is not displayed/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/ Even when the drive control unit 150 cannot normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m, the same processing as when the production control unit 130m cannot normally receive the commands sent from the main control unit 110m is performed. become.

In specific example 9, the second condition (performance symbol designation command) regarding the designation of the production symbol 70a is selected in the production control unit 130m under a predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or for the second special symbol). In addition, if the third condition (variable pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the performance pattern of the performance symbol is selected under the predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or for the second special symbol), the production symbol 70a It is possible to start the fluctuation. On the other hand, in the performance control unit 130m, (a first condition (gaming state designation command) regarding the designation of the game state, a second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the designation of the performance symbol 70a, and a performance pattern of the performance symbol 70a). Even when the third condition for designation (variation pattern designation command) is satisfied (normal reception), the second condition for designation of the production symbol 70a (production symbol designation command) does not meet the predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol). or for the second special symbol), while the third condition (variable pattern designation command) regarding the designation of the production pattern of the production symbol 70a is selected under the predetermined winning condition (for the first special symbol or the second special symbol). (for symbols) and another winning condition (for the second special symbol or the first special symbol), the variation of the production symbol will not start. By doing so, it is easy to understand that a malfunction has occurred in the performance control section 130m, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

As mentioned above, the commands sent from the main control unit 110m are exemplified as conditions for executing a predetermined control in the production control unit 130m, but the conditions are not limited to this, and other conditions such as the passage of time and operation of operation buttons can be used. It is also possible to set the event as a condition.

As shown in FIG. 266, even when the conditions are not met in the production control unit 130m (such as the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 9), the main control unit 110m sends a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.), the above-described initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17, etc. can be executed. Specifically, during a period in which the effect pattern 70a is fluctuating even if the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m, the main control unit 110m When the predetermined signal from the production controller 130m is normally received, the initial operation of the movable accessory such as the first movable member 73 is executed. In addition, during a period in which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped because the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, the first movable member 73 etc. Execute the initial operation of the accessory. Furthermore, during a period in which the production pattern 70a is in a permanent halt due to conditions not being met in the production control unit 130m, if a predetermined signal from the main control unit 110m is normally received by the production control unit 130m, the production pattern 70a that has stopped is is displayed on the screen, the initial operation of the movable accessories such as the first movable member 73 is performed. In this way, in the embodiment, no matter which conditions are met (not met) in the production control section 130m, if the initial operating conditions based on the predetermined signal from the main control section 110m are satisfied, the production pattern 70a is displayed. Regardless of the aspect, an initial operation is performed. In addition, in the specific example 10, the relationship between the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) in the effect control unit 130m and the effect pattern 70a is the same as that in the specific example 1, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 267, the detection means detects a predetermined event (starting prize, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) even when the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m (such as the above-mentioned specific examples 1 to 10). If the main control means 110 (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) becomes disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine 1, a predetermined abnormality notification is issued. (Disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed. This abnormality notification can be performed over a predetermined period of time. Specifically, in the period when the performance pattern 70a is fluctuating even if the conditions are not met in the performance control unit 130m, if the disconnection state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) occurs, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. . In addition, when the performance control unit 130m becomes unconnected (connector disconnected, disconnected wire, etc.) during a period in which the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped due to conditions not being met, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. Furthermore, if the performance control unit 130m becomes unconnected (connector disconnection, wire breakage, etc.) during a period in which the performance pattern 70a is at a permanent halt due to conditions not being met, a predetermined abnormality notification is executed. In this way, in the embodiment, no matter which conditions are met (or not) in the production control unit 130m, as long as the abnormality notification condition for the disconnected state is satisfied, regardless of the display mode of the production pattern 70a. , abnormality notification is executed. At this time, an abnormality notification may be made on the image display devices 70, 71 overlapping the effect pattern 70a which is in the fluctuating, temporary stop or permanent stop state, or in an area overlapping the effect pattern 70a, and the image display device 70, 71 Abnormality notification can be performed using the image display devices 70 and 71 in various ways, such as turning off the image display device 70 and 71 to notify the abnormality. In addition, in the specific example 11, the relationship between the conditions that are aligned (not aligned) in the production control unit 130m and the production pattern 70a is the same as that of the specific example 1, so the explanation will be omitted.

Note that when the conditions are not met in the effect control unit 130m, other events, actions, effects, actions, notifications, etc. described in this embodiment may be executed in combination.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment I>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is acquired and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is met, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance results in a special result, a special game is executed. As such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that performs a display effect that transforms the display area of an image display device and also transforms the image being displayed within the display area (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-196126). However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆In order to solve the above problem, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment changes between a first mode (stopping at a standby position) and a second mode (performance operation). A movable accessory (movable members 73, 74) that can be used, and a light-emitting state that is provided on the movable accessory (73, 74) and has a first state (effect light-emitting state) in which light is emitted and a second state (for example, lights out). A first light emitting region (HK1) that can change the light emitting region (HK1) and a first light emitting region (HK1) that is provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (73, 74), and a first light emitting state (effect light emitting state) and a first light emitting region The second light emitting area comprises a second light emitting area (HK2) whose light emitting state can be changed between two states (for example, off), and display means (70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect. (HK2), and in the variable performance, the first image (for example, the performance pattern 70a of the normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and the first image When the fluctuating effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) that is changed and displayed on the screen and changes to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) is performed. , a light emitting effect can be executed in which at least one of the first light emitting area (HK1) and the second light emitting area (HK2) is changed to the second state (for example, turned off), and the display means A third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) can be displayed on the screen of the (image display device 70, 71) together with the first image, and whether it is either the first image or the second image, the third image Three images (for example, special design TZ) can be displayed at the same position.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (a movable member 73, 74), and a first light-emitting region provided on the movable accessory (73, 74), whose light-emitting state can be changed between a first state where light is emitted (effect light-emitting state) and a second state (for example, off). (HK1) is provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (movable members 73, 74), and is in a first state where light is emitted (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, off). The second light emitting region (HK2) is provided with a second light emitting region (HK2) whose light emitting state can be changed, and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect, and the second light emitting region (HK2) is In the variable production, a first image (for example, a production pattern 70a for normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and a screen in which the first image changes and When the variable effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) is performed, the first A light emitting effect can be executed in which the light emitting region (HK1) and at least one of the second light emitting regions (HK2) are linked to change to the second state (for example, turned off), and the display means (image display device 70, 71), a third image (for example, a special pattern TZ) can be displayed together with the first image (for example, the effect pattern 70a for normal display), and the first image (for example, the effect pattern 70a for normal display) can be displayed on the screen of etc.) is changed to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display), the ease of visual recognition is changed, while the third image (For example, special design TZ) can be displayed without changing the visibility.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a movable accessory (a movable member 73, 74), and a first light-emitting region provided on the movable accessory (73, 74), whose light-emitting state can be changed between a first state where light is emitted (effect light-emitting state) and a second state (for example, off). (HK1) is provided in at least one of a plurality of parts different from the movable accessory (movable members 73, 74), and is in a first state where light is emitted (effect light emitting state) and a second state (for example, off). The second light emitting region (HK2) is provided with a second light emitting region (HK2) whose light emitting state can be changed, and display means (image display devices 70, 71) capable of executing a predetermined variation effect, and the second light emitting region (HK2) is In the variable production, a first image (for example, a production pattern 70a for normal display) displayed on the screen of the display means (image display devices 70, 71) and a screen in which the first image changes and When the variable effect that changes to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a of the change display) is performed, the first A light emitting effect can be executed in which the light emitting region (HK1) and at least one of the second light emitting regions (HK2) are linked to change to the second state (for example, turned off), and the display means (image display device 70, 71), a third image (for example, a third image, for example) that changes in conjunction with the change from the first image (for example, the effect pattern 70a for normal display) to the second image (for example, the effect pattern 70a for change display). A frame image GG) can be displayed.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment II>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is acquired and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is met, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance results in a special result, a special game is executed. Some of these gaming machines include a main control board that controls the progress of the game, and a sub-control board that controls the performance of the game based on signals (commands) from the main control board (for example, JP 2019-033816 A). However, the gaming machine described above does not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the production control means deviate, and there is still room for improvement in order to improve the interest of the game. has been done.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and a third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a). (Fluctuating pattern designation command), the fluctuating performance is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (Variation pattern designation Although it is possible to perform swing fluctuations with the performance symbol (70a) determined based on the command), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the first condition (gaming state designation command), If at least one of the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and a third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a). (Fluctuation pattern designation command), the first state starts the fluctuation performance, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition The performance symbol (70a) determined based on the performance symbol designation command (performance symbol designation command) enters a second state in which swing fluctuation can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) controls the first condition (game state designation command). command) is insufficient, but if the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) are satisfied, the state will be in which the variable performance starts as in the first state, and the fourth state If the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the state is characterized in that the swing fluctuation can be executed as in the second state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), when the predetermined conditions (performance symbol designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) are satisfied, regardless of whether the conditions regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) are satisfied or insufficient, When the fluctuating production is started and the conditions (special symbol confirmation command) for stopping the variation of the production symbol (70a) are insufficient, the above-mentioned variation is determined based on the predetermined conditions (production symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command). It is characterized in that it is possible to perform swing fluctuations with the effect pattern (70a).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and a third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a). (Fluctuation pattern designation command), the fluctuation effect is started, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding stopping the fluctuation of the effect pattern (70a) is insufficient, the change is determined based on the second condition. It is possible to execute swing fluctuations with the performance symbols (70a) that are displayed, and in the production control means (production control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient and the second condition (production symbol If at least one of the specified command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), although the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) is satisfied, the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (the performance symbol designation command) and the third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol are satisfied. If at least one of the conditions (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the fluctuating performance, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes the first condition (gaming state designation command). If the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) are satisfied while the effect pattern designation command is insufficient, the effect pattern (70a) starts to fluctuate, and the effect pattern (70a) changes. If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, the swing fluctuation can be executed with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command). shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), if the predetermined conditions (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) are insufficient, the conditions regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command) and the performance symbol (70a) are The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to control such that the fluctuation performance is not started regardless of whether a condition regarding the fluctuation stop (special symbol confirmation command) is satisfied or insufficient.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a gaming machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), a movable performance means (first movable member 73) that can operate in a predetermined manner , a second movable member 74, and a production button 17), and the production control means (production control board 130) controls the initial operation of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17). (initial operation, initial light emission) and the production operation (production operation, production light emission) of the movable production means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, production button 17), and according to the signal. A predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is sent from the main control means (main control board 110) during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which the corresponding performance can be executed. is received, the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) can be executed, the display means (image display devices 70, 71 can perform a fluctuating effect of the effect design (70a), and the effect control means ( In the performance control board 130), although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient, the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) and the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a) are insufficient. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding is satisfied, the fluctuating performance is started, and when the fourth condition regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the second condition (effect design designation command), it is possible to execute swing fluctuations with the performance symbols determined based on the performance symbol designation command, and in the production control means (performance control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient, If at least one of the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) sets the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the performance symbol (70a) When the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variable effect is started, and the effect pattern (70a) is started. ) When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, it is possible to execute the fluctuation fluctuation with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command), In the performance control means (performance control board 130), although the first condition (gaming state designation command) is satisfied, at least the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) are satisfied. It is characterized in that control is possible so as not to start the fluctuating effect if one of the two is insufficient.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) sets the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the performance symbol When the second condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding (70a) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a) are satisfied, the first state is entered to start the variable effect, and the If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient, the fluctuation fluctuation is executed with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command). The second condition is possible, and although the first condition (playing state designation command) is insufficient in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition ( If the fluctuation pattern specification command) is satisfied, the state will be the same as the first state in which the fluctuation effect starts, and if the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the swing fluctuation can be executed as in the second state. It is characterized by being in a state of

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70, 71 can execute a variation effect of the effect pattern (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can perform a predetermined condition (effect pattern designation command, variation effect) regarding the effect pattern (70a). When the pattern specification command) is satisfied, regardless of whether the conditions related to the gaming state (gaming state specification command) are satisfied or insufficient, the fluctuating production is started, and the condition regarding stopping the variation of the production symbols (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) is satisfied. ) is insufficient, the swing variation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the predetermined conditions (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70 and 71 can execute a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) sets the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the performance symbol (70a) When the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variable effect is started, and the effect pattern (70a) is started. ) When the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation is insufficient, it is possible to execute the fluctuation fluctuation with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the effect control means (effect control means) In the control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70 and 71 can perform a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command). , If at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol is insufficient, the fluctuation performance is not started. In the production control means (production control board 130), while the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient, the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern When the specified command) is satisfied, the variation of the production symbol (70a) is started, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient, the second condition (Specification command) is satisfied. The present invention is characterized in that swing fluctuation can be executed with the effect symbol (70a) determined based on a symbol designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). The effect control means (effect control board 130) is equipped with a sound output means (sound output device 9), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (The image display devices 70, 71 can execute a variation effect of the effect pattern (70a), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) can perform a predetermined condition (effect pattern designation command, variation effect) regarding the effect pattern (70a). If the pattern specification command) is insufficient, the variation performance is started regardless of whether the conditions related to the gaming state (gaming state specification command) and the conditions related to stopping the variation of the production symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) are satisfied or insufficient. It is characterized in that it can be controlled so that it does not occur.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a In a game machine (1) equipped with a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling performances according to signals (commands, etc.), it is possible to output game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.). A sound output means (sound output device 9) is provided, and the effect control means (effect control board 130) outputs a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output device (sound output device 9). , power recovery notification sound, etc.), and the main control means ( When a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control board 110), the predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power restoration notification sound, etc.) can be outputted, and the display means (Although the image display devices 70 and 71 can perform a variable performance of the performance symbols (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) lacks the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), , when the second condition (effect pattern designation command) regarding the effect pattern (70a) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a) are satisfied, start the variable effect, and If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stop of fluctuation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient, it is possible to execute the swing fluctuation with the production symbol determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command). , in the production control means (production control board 130), the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient and at least the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) are insufficient. It is characterized in that control is possible so as not to start the fluctuating effect if one of the two is insufficient.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance control means (performance control board 130), and the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the gaming state and the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) are executed. (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a), the variable effect is started, and the fourth condition regarding the stop of variation of the effect pattern (70a) is satisfied. If the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is possible to perform swing fluctuation with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command), and the production control means (production control In the board 130), if the first condition (gaming state designation command) is satisfied but at least one of the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance control means (performance control board 130), and the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the gaming state and the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) are executed. (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a), the first state starts the variable effect, and the variation of the effect pattern (70a) If the fourth condition regarding stopping (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, a second state is entered in which swing fluctuation can be executed with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command), In the production control means (production control board 130), although the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient, the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) are satisfied. If so, the state becomes a state in which a fluctuation effect is started as in the first state, and when the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the state becomes a state in which shaking fluctuation can be executed as in the second state. shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) at the stage, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies predetermined conditions (performance design designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance design (70a). In this case, regardless of whether the conditions related to the gaming state (gaming state designation command) are satisfied or insufficient, the fluctuating performance is started, and if the conditions regarding stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbols (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) are insufficient, the above-mentioned The present invention is characterized in that swing fluctuation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on predetermined conditions (effect pattern designation command, variation pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a fluctuating performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance control means (performance control board 130), and the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the gaming state and the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) are executed. (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern (70a), the variable effect is started, and the fourth condition regarding the stop of variation of the effect pattern (70a) is satisfied. If the condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute a swing variation with the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the production control means (production control board 130) If the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient, the variation production is not started. It is characterized by being controllable.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance pattern (70a), and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), but the performance pattern (70a) If at least one of the second condition (effect design designation command) regarding the effect pattern and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the effect pattern of the effect pattern is insufficient, control is possible so as not to start the variable effect, and the effect is controlled so that the variable effect is not started. In the control means (production control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state specification command) is insufficient while the second condition (production symbol specification command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) are satisfied. , If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the start of the variation of the production symbol (70a) and the stop of the variation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient, then based on the second condition (production symbol designation command) The present invention is characterized in that a swing variation can be executed with the determined effect pattern (70a).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) displays the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a variable presentation of the presentation pattern (70a) in the case where the presentation control means (performance control board 130) lacks a predetermined condition (performance pattern specification command, variation pattern specification command) regarding the presentation pattern (70a). In this case, it is possible to control so as not to start the fluctuating production regardless of whether the conditions related to the gaming state (gaming state designation command) and the conditions related to stopping the variation of the production symbols (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) are satisfied or insufficient. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.) for detecting the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the production control means (production control board 110). ) is capable of executing a predetermined control based on an input signal from the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and when power supply to the gaming machine is started, the The main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board) and the detection means (starting opening detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) are in a disconnected state (connector disconnected, disconnection). etc.), it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) is configured to display the display means (image display devices 70, 71). It is possible to perform a variable performance of the performance symbol (70a) in the performance pattern (70a), and although the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state is insufficient in the performance control means (performance control board 130), the performance pattern (70a) can be executed. When the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the production pattern and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) are satisfied, the variation production is started and the variation of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied. If the fourth condition regarding stopping (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute swing fluctuation with the performance symbol determined based on the second condition (performance symbol designation command), and the performance control means (special symbol determination command) In the control board 130), when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, It is characterized by being controllable so as not to start the variable performance.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). The performance can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and the above-mentioned performance symbol. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied, the variation production is started, and the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied. If it is insufficient, it is possible to execute a swing variation with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect pattern designation command), and in the effect control means (effect control board 130), the first Although the condition (gaming state designation command) is satisfied, if at least one of the second condition (performance symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so as not to start the fluctuation performance. It is characterized by being possible.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). The performance can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and the above-mentioned performance symbol. When the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (70a) is satisfied, the first state starts the fluctuating performance, and the fourth condition (special symbol) regarding the stop of the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) is satisfied. If the number of confirmed commands (determined command) is insufficient, a second state is entered in which the swing fluctuation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on the second condition (effect pattern designation command), and the effect control means (effect control board) is activated. 130), if the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient but the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the first state and Similarly, if the state is to start a fluctuating effect, and the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, the state is characterized in that, like the second state, it becomes possible to perform a swing fluctuation.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). If the performance can be executed and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the predetermined conditions (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance symbols (70a), the conditions regarding the gaming state (game Regardless of whether the fluctuating effect is satisfied or insufficient (status designation command), if the condition for stopping the fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) (special symbol confirmation command) is insufficient, then the predetermined condition (the performance symbol designation command, The present invention is characterized in that a swing variation can be executed with the effect pattern (70a) determined based on a variation pattern designation command).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). The performance can be executed, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes a first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), a second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command), and the above-mentioned performance symbol. When the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied, the variation production is started, and the fourth condition (special pattern confirmation command) regarding the stop of variation of the production pattern (70a) is satisfied. If it is insufficient, it is possible to execute swing fluctuations with the performance symbols (70a) determined based on the second condition, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) executes the first condition (gaming state designation command). ) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (effect design designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern specification command) is insufficient, the variation effect can be controlled not to start. do.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). Although the performance can be executed and the performance control means (performance control board 130) satisfies the first condition regarding the gaming state (gaming state designation command), the second condition regarding the performance symbol (70a) (performance symbol designation command) is satisfied. If at least one of the command) and the third condition regarding the performance pattern of the performance symbol (fluctuation pattern designation command) is insufficient, the fluctuating performance can be controlled not to start, and the performance control means (performance control board 130) In this case, when the first condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient while the second condition (effect pattern designation command) and the third condition (fluctuation pattern designation command) are satisfied, the effect of the effect pattern (70a) is If the fourth condition (special symbol confirmation command) for stopping the variation of the production symbol (70a) is insufficient after the variation has started, the production symbol (70a) determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command) ) is characterized in that it is possible to perform shaking fluctuations.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). If the performance is executable and the performance control means (performance control board 130) lacks the predetermined conditions (performance symbol designation command, variation pattern designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a), the conditions regarding the gaming state (game The present invention is characterized in that it can be controlled so as not to start the fluctuating performance regardless of whether the conditions (special symbol confirmation command) regarding the stoppage of fluctuation of the performance symbol (70a) are satisfied or insufficient.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present embodiment, in the gaming machine (1) that can execute the game, a main control means (main control board) that can control the progress of the game is provided. 110), an effect control means (effect control board 130) capable of controlling effects according to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means (main control board 110), etc.), the main control means (main control board 110) and/or the effect control means (effect control board 130). Accordingly, it is possible to execute predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on the input signal from the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.), and supply power to the gaming machine. When the main control means (main control board 110) and the detection means (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor, radio wave detection sensor, etc.) become disconnected (connector disconnected, wire breakage, etc.), a predetermined It is possible to perform abnormality notifications (wire breakage notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.), and the effect control means (effect control board 130) controls the display means (image display devices 70 and 71 to display changes in effect patterns (70a)). Although the performance can be executed and the performance control means (performance control board 130) lacks the first condition (game state designation command) regarding the game state, the second condition (performance design designation command) regarding the performance symbol (70a) is insufficient. command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) regarding the production pattern of the production symbol (70a), the variation production is started, and the fourth condition (special symbol) regarding the stop of variation of the production symbol (70a) is satisfied. If the number of fixed commands (determined command) is insufficient, it is possible to execute swing fluctuations with the performance symbols determined based on the second condition (production symbol designation command), and the performance control means (production control board 130) When one condition (gaming state designation command) is insufficient and at least one of the second condition (production symbol designation command) and the third condition (variation pattern designation command) is insufficient, control is performed so as not to start the variation production. It is characterized by being possible.

(About time-saving gaming state)
The above-mentioned "low-probability time-saving gaming state" is a low-probability gaming state in which a specified number of special symbols change A ``low-probability time-saving gaming state triggered by a specified number of changes'' may be set, which is triggered by the execution of the game. "Low-probability time-saving gaming state triggered by a specified number of changes" is executed after a specified number of symbol changes have been made, for example, 1000 times, in a low-probability gaming state including a low-probability time-saving gaming state, and is used to determine whether it is a jackpot or not. In addition to the performance, it is possible to perform a combination of time-saving effects such as counting down the number of fluctuations until the time-saving occurs.

In addition to or in place of the "low-probability time-saving gaming state after a jackpot" and/or the "low-probability time-saving gaming state based on a specific symbol combination," the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" is defined in advance in the low-probability gaming state. A ``low-accuracy time-saving gaming state based on a specific symbol combination'' may be set, which is triggered by the display of a predetermined special symbol combination. "Low-probability time-saving gaming state based on specific symbol combinations" is a low-probability state that is executed after displaying specific symbols such as "1, 2, 3" or "7, 8, 7," and is used to determine whether or not it is a jackpot. In addition to this performance, it is possible to perform a combination of reach to see whether the time reduction will occur or other time reduction effects.

(Winning a game ball into the starting slot)
In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the left side area of the game area 5a, the game ball is played on the condition that the game ball passes through the first starting port 45 or the general figure gate 44. It is possible to win a prize through the second starting opening 47 that is opened depending on the winning result of the normal symbol winning lottery. In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, when the game ball is launched so as to pass through the right side area of the game area 5a, the game ball is played on the condition that the game ball passes through the first starting port 45 or the general figure gate 44. It is possible to win a prize through the second starting opening 47 that is opened depending on the winning result of the normal symbol winning lottery.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is easier to pass through the regular figure gate 44 when the game is launched to the right side area of the game area 5a than when it is launched to the left side area of the game area 5a. Therefore, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is in a "time-saving gaming state" (specific gaming state) in which the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in an open state than in a "non-time-saving gaming state" when the game ball passes through the general figure gate 44. In this case, it is better for the player to hit the game ball into the right side area of the game area 5a and aim to win the second starting hole 47 than to hit the game ball into the left side area of the game area 5a. It becomes possible to proceed with the game advantageously without consuming.

In the game machine 1 of the embodiment, the entrance of the warp device 41 is opened on the left side of the decorative frame 41, and the game ball is always placed directly under the stage portion 42 on which the game ball guided by the warp device 41 rolls. A first starting port 45 (ball entry) is provided. Therefore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state" (normal gaming state), which is more difficult to control than the "time-saving gaming state" in which the second starting port 47 is opened when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the left side area of the gaming area 5a It is better for the player to aim the game ball into the first starting slot 45 by hitting the game ball at the right side of the game area 5a, and to play the game more advantageously without consuming the game ball. It is possible to proceed.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is designed to have an advantage or disadvantage for the player depending on whether the player launches the ball to the left or right area of the gaming area 5a, and the game machine 1 is configured to be advantageous or disadvantageous for the player depending on the playing state. It is preferable to switch the area to be ejected in area 5a. In other words, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is required to proceed with the game with the aim of winning the starting openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state. However, since the firing operation is left up to the player's control as to whether the ball should be fired into the right or left side of the gaming area 5a, the player may proceed with the game with the aim of hitting the wrong starting openings 45, 47. There is a risk that the product may become damaged.

In addition, in both the "non-time-saving gaming state" and the "time-saving gaming state", even if the game machine only needs to launch the game ball into the same area of the gaming area 5a (for example, the left area), Since the firing operation is left up to the player's control as to which area on the left side to launch the ball into, there is a risk that the player may proceed with the game with the aim of hitting the wrong starting port 45 or 47. There is no difference.

(Example 1 of production)
FIGS. 268 and 269 are diagrams illustrating a first concrete example of an expectation level display, a hold icon change effect, a lamp change effect, a notification sound effect, a movable member operation effect, and a continuous notice effect based on these. Note that various performances that make players expect to play a jackpot game are sometimes referred to as winning hint performances.

As shown in FIG. 268(a), the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1, second display section 70B2, and third display section 70B3 of the first pending icon display area 70B. Suppose that the loss effect pattern 70a of "728" is stopped and displayed when the player is in the game.

Thereafter, when the fluctuating effect is started, as shown in FIG. The first hold icon (CD icon) displayed in 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first performance of the continuous notice performance is started by displaying the blue effect image EF around the performance symbol 70a that starts the variable display, and the first performance that is shifted and displayed on the second display section 70B2 When the display mode of the pending icon changes to a blue character icon, the pending icon change effect is started, and along with this, the winning slot lamp NR changes from an extinguished state to a blinking blue state, thereby starting a lamp change effect. will be started. Further, an operation performance in which the first movable member 73 moves in a weak operation mode in which it vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. Note that the operation performance of the first movable member 73 in the weak operation mode is started at a timing before the performance pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, and is stopped before the performance pattern 70 scrolls at high speed (for example, before the preparation operation). .

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 268(c), the effect image EF displayed around the production pattern 70a is erased, and the production pattern 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Furthermore, in the first image display device 70, a zone effect (normal zone effect) is started. Specifically, the background image changes to zone background A, a blue zone image in which the text "ZONE" scrolls in the horizontal direction is displayed, and zone BGM is output. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 268(d), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

After that, when the fluctuating effect is started, as shown in FIG. 268(e), the fluctuating display of the effect pattern 70a is started and is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. The first pending icon is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the second effect of the continuous notice effect is started by displaying the effect image EF around the effect image 70a that starts the variable display, and the pending icon change effect, lamp change effect, and zone effect continue. It will remain as it is. Further, an operation performance in which the first movable member 73 moves in a weak operation mode in which it vibrates in the vertical direction is executed for a predetermined period of time.

Then, as shown in FIG. 268(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operation of the first movable member 73 is stopped. Then, when the variable time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 268(g), after the performance symbol 70a indicating a loss is temporarily stopped and displayed, the loss performance symbol 70a of "753" and the special symbol TZ are stopped and displayed. .

Thereafter, when the fluctuation performance that becomes the fluctuation is started, as shown in FIG. 268(h), the fluctuation display of the performance symbol 70a is started, and the first pending icon displayed on the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C.

Here, the effect image EF is displayed around the effect image 70a that starts the fluctuating display, thereby starting the third effect of the continuous notice effect, but the expectation level for the jackpot game is higher than the blue color of the effect image EF. Displayed in high red. In addition, the symbol effect image ZE is displayed in a color that indicates higher expectations for the jackpot game than before. Further, the hold icon change effect is continuously displayed. In addition, by changing the winning opening lamp NR from blue lighting to red flashing, a lamp change effect is executed that has higher expectations for a jackpot than blue lighting. Further, an operation effect is performed in which the first movable member 73 moves in a strong operation mode in which the first movable member 73 moves greatly so as to fall from the upper side of the first image display device 70 to the front side of the first image display device. At this time, an operation performance in which the second movable member 74 operates in a weak operation mode in which it vibrates in an oblique direction is executed for a predetermined period of time. In this way, the advance notification executed in the variable display provides a display with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the previous notification.

Then, as shown in FIG. 269(i), the effect image EF displayed around the effect pattern 70a is erased, and the effect image 70a starts scrolling at high speed. At this time, the operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are stopped. Note that the zone effect is displayed by switching to zone background B, which is a display with higher expectations for a jackpot than zone background A.

As shown in FIG. 269(j), the mini-character MCB is displayed on the first image display device 70, and, for example, the mini-character MCB moves across the screen to create a sense of anticipation.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 269(k), for example, the line "CHANCE!" uttered by an ally is displayed in the line window displayed on the first image display device 70, and the voice output device 9 responds to the line. The dialogue preview performance is executed by displaying the voice ``Your chance has arrived!''.

Then, as shown in FIG. 269(l), while the effect pattern 70a of "3" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect (normal reach) in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed variably is executed. At this time, the display mode of the first pending icon shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red character icon, thereby executing a pending icon change effect that has higher expectations for a jackpot game than the blue character icon. . Furthermore, the winning opening lamp NR changes from lighting in red to emitting light in multiple colors (rainbow colors), thereby executing a lamp change effect that has higher expectations for a jackpot than lighting in red.

After that, when it develops into SP reach, as shown in FIG. 269(m), the SP reach effect is started, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second The pending icon display area 70D is erased. The reduced performance pattern 70a includes a rectangular base image, a character image CG made up of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, and a decoration part made up of a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character. Then, the normal display mode consisting of an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric section (identification character) changes to a simple reduced display mode of only the identification section.

Then, when the SPSP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 269(n), the SPSP reach effect is started and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 269(o), the current jackpot game (here, the first The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" indicating the type of jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (fluctuation fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

In addition, although the winning slot lamp NR remains off while SP and/or SPSP Reach is displayed, the lamp change effect may continue or it may not be used in the lamp change effect (it does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot). ) The winning slot lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (for example, white lighting).

(Expectation level display)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, in the fluctuating display of the performance symbols 70a, it is possible to perform so-called expectation display that makes players look forward to the execution of a jackpot game, such as color effects such as an effect image EF and a symbol effect image ZE. . As shown in FIG. 270, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a variable display ( (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "Special 1 variable display."), the execution rate of the expectation level display using the color effect is smaller in the Special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state (Execution rate a3 < Execution rate a1). In other words, the effect of the color effect in the special 1 variable display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to display the expectation level.

As shown in FIG. 270, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a variable display ( (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "Special 2 variable display."), the execution rate of the expectation level display using color effects is smaller in the Special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state (Execution rate a3 < Execution rate a4). In other words, the effect of the color effect in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in a specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in a specific game state. It is difficult to display the expectation level.

With such an execution rate of the expectation level display, even if you mistakenly hit the ball to the left in the specific gaming state as in the normal gaming state, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The expectation display is not limited to color effects, but may also be text or decorations superimposed on images such as background images or production designs, or around the image, and the difference in content and color can increase the chances of winning a jackpot. It may be anything that can make people look forward to playing the game.

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns in FIG. 270 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of expectation display using color effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the number of types of expectation level display using color effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of effect pattern A32 when special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific game state is "0" (or effect pattern A32 is not set), effect pattern A12 is executed when special 1 variable display is performed in a normal game state. Although it is possible to display the expectation level of the performance pattern A12, the expectation level display of the performance pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern A12 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the expectation level display of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of effect pattern A32 when special 1 variable display is performed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or effect pattern A32 is not set), effect pattern A42 is executed when special 2 variable display is performed in a specific game state. However, the expectation level display of the performance pattern A32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern A42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the expectation level display of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Zone production)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, in the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, it is possible to perform a zone effect accompanied by a scene change of the background image. The zone effect is something that makes players expect the execution of a jackpot game over a predetermined period of time, and is either a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of one starting condition or a predetermined variable display period based on the determination of multiple starting conditions. It can be executed at the timing of

As shown in FIG. 271, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (execution rate b3<execution rate b1). In other words, the zone performance in the special 1 variable display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 271, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the zone effect is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (execution rate b3<execution rate b4). In other words, the zone effect in the special 1 variable display is better when a left-handed ball is hit in a specific gaming state than when a so-called right-handed ball is hit toward the right side of the gaming area 5a in a specific gaming state. difficult to implement.

Due to the execution rate of such a zone performance, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 271 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of zone effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern B32 when special 1 fluctuation display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or performance pattern B32 is not set), performance pattern B12 is executed when special 1 fluctuation display is performed in a normal gaming state. However, the zone performance of the performance pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern B12 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a zone performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern B32 when special 1 variation display is performed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or performance pattern B32 is not set), performance pattern B42 is executed when special 2 variation display is performed in a specific game state. However, the zone performance of the performance pattern B32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern B42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a zone performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

The zone effect is not limited to being performed over a plurality of variable displays, but the zone effect may be performed in a single variable display. If it is possible to perform a win-suggesting performance such as a zone performance over a predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. However, the ratio of the number of times (including zero times) may be large. In other words, the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 fluctuation display in the regular gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state to perform hit-suggesting performances such as zone performances with patterns over a shorter number of fluctuation displays. It can be said that it is easy to

In the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to change the scene such as the background, the telop that flows on the screen, the decorative pattern change that changes to the production pattern 70a for zone production, etc. However, in the special 1 variable display of a specific game state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of scene changes such as the background, telops flowing on the screen, pattern decorative changes that change to the zone effect effect pattern 70a, etc.

Even if these steps are taken, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to let the game ball enter the first winning hole 45. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Notification sound effect)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when a CD icon is generated as a hold icon, a first generation notification sound is output as a notification sound when the icon is generated. In addition, as shown in FIG. 268(b), when a hold icon or a blue character icon is generated (changed to) as the icon, a second occurrence notification sound is used as the notification sound when the icon occurs (changes). (first change notification sound) is output. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 269(l), when a pending icon or a red character icon is generated (changed to) as the icon, a third generation notification sound ( (second change notification sound) is output. Furthermore, when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, a fourth generated notification sound (third change notification sound) is set to be output as a notification sound at the time of icon change.

In this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon are different. , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon.Alternatively, the notification sound is not output when the CD icon occurs, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. It may also be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

As shown in FIG. 272, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the change notification sound effect is higher in the special 1 fluctuation display performed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display performed in the normal gaming state. is small (execution rate c3<execution rate c1). In other words, the change notification sound in the special 1 variation display is louder when hitting the ball to the left in the specific gaming state than when hitting the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the gaming area 5a in the normal gaming state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

As shown in FIG. 272, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the change notification sound effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. is smaller (execution rate c3<execution rate c4). In other words, the change notification in the special figure 1 fluctuation display is more effective when a ball is hit to the left in a specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in a specific game state. Sound production is difficult to perform.

With such an execution rate of the change notification sound performance, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the number of types of change notification sound effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state.

The change notification sound performance is not limited to when the pending icon changes, but may also be performed with an exciting sound when winning a prize, when fluctuation starts or when fluctuation stops.

For example, if the execution rate of a specific change notification sound when displaying special 1 variation in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), then special 1 variation display in a normal gaming state Although it is possible to execute a notification sound effect using a predetermined change notification sound, a notification sound effect using a specific change notification sound corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined change notification sound will not be performed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute the notification sound performance of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of the specific change notification sound when displaying the special 1 variation in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific change notification sound is not set), the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state Although it is possible to perform a notification sound effect using a predetermined change notification sound, a notification sound effect using a specific change notification sound that corresponds to (or is the same as) the predetermined change notification sound will not be performed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute the notification sound performance of the performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The notification sound performance is not limited to being performed in association with the change of the pending (relevant) icon; for example, when a game ball enters the starting slot, when a fixed performance such as "Kyuuin" is executed, The button change sound when a buried operation button appears, the operation sound of the movable members 73, 74, the change start sound/return sound when multiple movable members are combined to form a specific design, and the specific design It can be performed in conjunction with various conditions, such as the completed sound when it is made.

If the notification sound effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is more effective when the predetermined condition is executed than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The ratio at which the notification sound effect is performed may be the same or smaller, and the ratio at which the notification sound effect is performed may be smaller.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, it is possible to perform a performance with a confirmed notification sound among the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the final notification sound It may also be possible to regulate the execution of sound effects. Note that this is not limited to the final notification sound, and the same can be done with the various notification sound productions described above. In other words, in the special 1 variation display in the regular gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform an effect using a predetermined notification sound of the notification sound effects, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state, This means that it is possible to regulate the performance of the notification sound.

By doing these things, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player can be made aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Pending icon change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, in the variable display of the performance symbols 70a, by displaying the shape and color of the pending icon in a changing manner, it is possible to perform a pending icon performance that makes players expect a jackpot game. The pending icon change in this embodiment makes the player expect the execution of the jackpot game over a predetermined period of time, and is a predetermined variation display period based on the determination of one starting condition, or a predetermined variation display period based on the determination of multiple starting conditions. It can be executed at any timing during the display period.

As shown in FIG. 273, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the reserved icon change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. is small (execution rate d3<execution rate d1). In other words, the hold icon changes in the special 1 variation display more when a player hits the game ball to the left in a specific game state than when a game ball is hit to the left toward the left side of the gaming area 5a in a normal game state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

As shown in FIG. 273, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution rate of the reserved icon change effect is higher in the Special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the Special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. is small (execution rate d3<execution rate d4). In other words, the hold icon changes in the special 1 variation display more easily when a left-handed ball is hit in a specific gaming state than when a so-called right-handed ball is hit toward the right side of the gaming area 5a in a specific gaming state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

With such an execution rate of the pending icon change effect, it is disadvantageous to enter the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 273 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of pending icon change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state.

The pending icon change effect is not limited to changing the color of the pending icon (including the icon) or changing the appearance of the icon itself, but also changes the icon itself or the effects attached to the icon, such as effects and characters attached to the icon. You can. Further, the pending icon effect is not limited to changing the round CD icon to a character icon as in the embodiment, but may also change the shape of a triangle, square, or the like.

For example, when the performance pattern D32 is executed at "0" (or the performance pattern D32 is not set) when the special 1 variation is displayed in a specific gaming state, the performance pattern D12 is executed when the special 1 variation is displayed in the normal gaming state. Although the pending icon change effect can be executed, the zone effect of the effect pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern D12 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a pending icon change performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state.

For example, if the execution rate of the performance pattern D32 when the special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the performance pattern D32 is not set), the performance pattern D42 is executed when the special 2 variable display is displayed in the specific game state. However, the pending icon change performance of the performance pattern D32 corresponding to (or the same as) the performance pattern D42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a pending icon change effect of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Tok 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of hold icons that can be displayed may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Further, in the hold icon change effect, the CD icon may change stepwise from blue to red to rainbow, or the CD icon may change selectively to blue, red, or rainbow. The number of types of display modes that can be changed from the current pending icon display mode is higher in the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state than in the normal gaming state's special 1 variation display or the special 2 variation display in a specific gaming state. may be less.

For example, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to execute a pending icon change effect, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to restrict the execution of the pending icon change effect. It may be. In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform a change effect performed when changing the pending icon change, for example, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the change It may also be possible to regulate the execution of the performance. Note that even if the pending icon presentation is not executed, icon decorations that are displayed along with the pending icon, such as a pedestal on which the pending icon is placed or a frame surrounding the pending icon, may be displayed.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(lamp change effect)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, this is a type of look-ahead preview effect that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be executed by changing the lighting mode of the winning slot lamp NR over one or more variable displays. It is possible to perform a certain lamp change effect.

As shown in FIG. 274, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the lamp change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (execution rate e3<execution rate e1). In other words, the lamp icon changes in the special 1 variation display more when a player hits the game ball to the left in a specific game state than when a game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in a normal game state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

As shown in FIG. 274, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the lamp change effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (execution rate e3<execution rate e4). In other words, the lamp change performance in the special 1 variable display is better when a player hits the game ball left-handed in a specific game state than when the user hits the game ball to the right in a specific game state. is difficult to implement.

With such an execution ratio of the lamp change effect, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The number of types and contents of the effect patterns shown in FIG. 274 may be the same or different. Here, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The lamp change effect is not limited to the winning slot lamp NR, but also other lighting such as the movable members 73, 74, the decorative frame 40, the lighting device 10 for the frame of the game board 5 and the glass frame 4, in addition to the winning slot lamp NR. It may also be executed in conjunction with a device.

For example, if the execution rate of the effect pattern E32 when the special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the effect pattern E32 is not set), the effect pattern E12 is executed when the special 1 variable display is displayed in the normal game state. However, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E12 will not be executed. At this time, when performing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a lamp change effect of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of the effect pattern E32 when the special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the effect pattern E32 is not set), the effect pattern E42 is executed when the special 2 variable display is displayed in the specific game state. However, the lamp change effect of the effect pattern E32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern E42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a lamp change performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The number of types of lamp change effects may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. In the lamp change effect, the lamp may change stepwise from no light to blue to red to rainbow, or may selectively change from no light to blue, red, or rainbow. Compared to the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the special 1 variation display in the specific game state has fewer types of light emission modes that can be changed from the current light emission mode. Good too.

In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, for example, a predetermined pattern of lamp change effects can be executed, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, a predetermined pattern of lamp changes can be executed. It may also be possible to regulate execution of the performance.

The light emission (light emission pattern) that constitutes the lamp change effect includes, for example, when the pending (relevant) icon changes, when a game ball enters the starting slot, when a decisive effect such as "Kyuuin" is executed, button change sound when a buried operation button appears, the operating sound of the movable members 73 and 74, the start of change/return sound and identification when multiple movable members are combined to form a specific design. This can be done in conjunction with various conditions, such as the final sound of the design.

If a lamp change effect can be executed in association with a predetermined condition, the predetermined condition is executed better in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. The ratio at which the lamp change effect is performed may be the same or smaller, and the ratio at which the lamp change effect is executed may be smaller.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform a lamp change effect using, for example, the prize opening lamp NR and the board lighting device (frame lighting device). , In the special 1 variable display of a specific game state, for example, it may be possible to execute an effect using a board lighting device or a frame lighting device, while restricting the execution of an effect using a prize opening lamp NR. That is, in the special 1 variable display in the regular gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform a performance using a predetermined part (area, member unit, etc.) of the lamp change performance, but the special In the 1-variation display, it is possible to restrict the performance of a predetermined part.

The pattern selected for the lamp change performance or lamp change performance is based on the timing (for example, when winning a prize, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row, the start/stop/decision of the operation of the movable member, the vibration or operation of the operation button) etc.) may be changed. In the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to perform a lamp change effect at a predetermined timing, such as when winning a prize, and at a specific timing when the movable member is activated. In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to restrict execution of the lamp change effect at a predetermined timing and a specific timing.

From the execution period of the lamp change performance (predetermined pattern of lamp change performance) performed during the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific game state, the lamp change performance performed during the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state The execution period of (predetermined pattern of lamp change effect) may be shorter.

Based on the number of types of parts (areas, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, the special 1 variation in the specific game state The number of types of parts (regions, members, etc.) that emit light in the light emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the display may be smaller. In addition, the light emitting effect (lamp change effect) performed in the special 1 variable display of a specific gaming state ( The range in which light is emitted during the lamp change effect may be smaller. Here, the light emitting effect is a mode in which the number of light emitted by the LEDs arranged side by side changes, so that the number of light emitted and the light emitting range changes in stages, and a light guide plate, etc. overlaps with an image display device, a panel lighting device, etc. This may change the light emission mode.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Production of movement of movable parts)
As shown in FIGS. 268 and 269, by operating the first movable member 73 in an operation mode including a weak operation mode and a strong operation mode in which the operation is made larger (more conspicuous) than the weak operation mode, the player It is possible to perform an operation effect that makes the user expect that a jackpot game will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 275, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is operated by the first movable member 73 more than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate in the weak performance mode is small (execution rate f31<execution rate f11). In other words, the weak activation state in the special 1 variation display is stronger when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to perform the operation.

As shown in FIG. 275, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state is operated by the first movable member 73 more than the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. The execution rate in the weak performance mode is small (execution rate f31<execution rate f41). In other words, in a specific game state, when a game ball is hit to the left in a specific game state, the action is weaker in the special figure 1 fluctuation display than when a game ball is hit to the right in the right side of the game area 5a. It is difficult to perform the action of the mode.

Due to the execution rate of such an operation effect, even if you mistakenly hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Note that the execution ratio of the strong actuation mode in the actuation presentation may be smaller than, the same as, or larger than the weak actuation mode. In addition, regarding the strong operation mode, the relationship between the winnings in the starting ports 45 and 47 and the gaming state may be the same as the weak operation mode, or may be reversed, and the execution ratio may be the same. Good too.

Here, the number of types of operation performance patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Furthermore, the number of types of operation performance patterns may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

In this embodiment, the operation performance of the first movable member 73 has been described, but the operation performance of other movable accessories such as the second movable member 74 may be made similar to that of the first movable member 73. In this case, the first movable member 73 and other movable accessories may be operated in conjunction with each other.

For example, if the execution rate of the specific operation mode is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set) when the special 1 variation is displayed in a specific gaming state, then when the special 1 variation is displayed in the normal gaming state, Although it is possible to execute an operation effect according to the predetermined operation mode, an operation effect according to a specific operation mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the predetermined operation mode will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute an operation performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of the specific operation mode is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set) when the special 1 variation is displayed in a specific game state, then when the special 2 variation is displayed in the specific game state, Although it is possible to execute an operation effect according to the predetermined operation mode, an operation effect according to a specific operation mode that corresponds to (or is the same as) the predetermined operation mode will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute an operation performance in a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The operation performance can be executed at various timings such as the start of fluctuation, the development of the performance, the occurrence of reach, the time of tilt, and the final performance (determined performance). In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform weak operation and strong operation effects at a predetermined timing such as the start of variation, and at a specific timing such as a decisive effect. In the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the strong action at a predetermined timing, and it may also be possible to execute the strong action at a specific timing. In this way, differences may be provided in the operating mode, whether or not the action effect can be executed, etc., depending on the timing.

The operation effect can be executed in association with a light emission effect by a light emitting means such as an LED provided on the movable member. In this case, the light emitting effect can be selected from a light emitting pattern, a light emitting color, a light emitting range, etc., such as blue light → red light → rainbow light, which have different expectations in stages. Then, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform an operation effect of a predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission, for example, and a specific light emission mode of rainbow light emission, for example, but in the special game state In the special 1 variable display, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the operation effect when a predetermined light emission mode is used, and at the same time make it possible to execute the operation effect when a specific light emission mode is used. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a predetermined light emission mode of blue light emission and a specific light emission mode of rainbow light emission, for example, in the operation effect, but in the special game state In the feature 1 variable display, it may be possible to restrict the execution of the light emission effect of a predetermined light emission mode in the operation effect, while also being able to execute the light emission effect of a specific light emission mode. In addition, if there is a predetermined light emitting pattern that can be executed in weak operation and a predetermined light emission pattern that can be executed in strong operation, the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state The execution ratio of the predetermined light emission pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variation display of the gaming state.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Display performance using a display means different from the first image display device)
As shown in FIG. 276, a jackpot game is executed for the player by displaying the light guide plate image DG over one or more variable displays on the light guide plate provided on the front side of the first image display device 70. It is possible to perform a light guide plate display effect, which is a type of advance notice effect that makes people look forward to something. For example, as shown in FIG. 276(a), in the first continuous preview performance, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character is displayed at the start of the variable display, and as shown in FIG. 276(b), in the second In the continuous preview performance, for example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in a pose different from the first time is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 276(c), in the third continuous preview performance, For example, at the start of the variable display, a light guide plate image DG imitating a character in the same pose as the second time but in a different color (such as a red character or a rainbow character) is displayed. Note that the timing of the light guide plate display performance is not limited to the start of the fluctuation, but may be during the fluctuation display or at the end of the fluctuation display, and the timing of successive light guide plate display performances may be different.

As shown in FIG. 277, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the light guide plate display effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. is small (execution rate g3<execution rate g1). In other words, the light guide plate display in the special 1 variable display is more accurate when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is difficult to execute the performance.

As shown in FIG. 277, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the light guide plate display effect is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific game state. is small (execution rate g3<execution rate g4). In other words, the light guide plate in the special figure 1 fluctuation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in the specific game state. Display performance is difficult to execute.

With such an execution ratio of the light guide plate display performance, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of patterns of the light guide plate display effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

In the present embodiment, the display effect of the light guide plate has been explained, but the display effect performed by a display means different from the first image display apparatus 71, such as the second image display device 71 or a 3D filter, is similar to the light guide plate display effect. However, the execution ratio may be different. In this case, the light guide plate display effect and other display effects may be linked (related) and executed.

For example, if the execution rate of performance pattern G32 when special 1 fluctuation display is performed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or performance pattern G32 is not set), performance pattern G12 is executed when special 1 fluctuation display is performed in a normal gaming state. However, the light guide plate display effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G12 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a light guide plate display effect of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of the effect pattern G32 when the special 1 variable display is displayed in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the effect pattern G32 is not set), the effect pattern G42 is executed when the special 2 variable display is displayed in the specific game state. However, the light guide plate change effect of the effect pattern G32 corresponding to (or the same as) the effect pattern G42 will not be executed. At this time, when executing the Toku 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate change effect of the effect mode that cannot be executed in the Toku 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed at various timings such as at the start of fluctuation, at the development of the effect, at the time of reach occurrence, at the time of tilting, and at the final effect (confirmed effect). In the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the light guide plate display performance at a predetermined timing such as the start of variation and at a specific timing such as a final performance, but In the feature 1 variable display, execution of the light guide plate display effect at a predetermined timing may be regulated, while execution of the light guide plate display effect at a specific timing may be possible. In this way, differences may be provided in the display mode, whether or not the light guide plate display effect can be executed, etc., depending on the timing.

The light guide plate display effect can be executed in association with other hit suggestion effects, such as an actuation effect using a movable member. In this case, the light guide plate display effects can be selected from a light emitting pattern, a light emitting color, a light emitting range, etc., such as blue light → red light → rainbow light, which have different expectations in stages. Then, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the light guide plate display effect of the predetermined display mode of blue light emission and the specific display mode of rainbow light emission, for example, is replaced with other winning hints such as operation effects. However, in the special 1 variable display of a specific game state, it is possible to restrict the execution of other winning suggestion performances when in a predetermined display mode, while it is possible to restrict the execution of other winning suggestion performances when in a specific display mode. May be executable. In other words, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform a predetermined display mode of blue light emission and a specific display mode of rainbow light emission, for example, along with the operation effect, but in the specific game state In the feature 1 variable display, while it is possible to regulate the execution of the operation effect and the light emission effect of a predetermined display mode, it may also be possible to execute a specific display mode together with the operation effect. In addition, if there is a predetermined display pattern (executable during weak operation) and a predetermined display pattern (executable during strong operation), special 1 variation display in normal gaming state or special 2 variation in specific gaming state The execution ratio of the predetermined display pattern may be smaller in the special 1 variable display of the specific game state than in the display.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The display performance performed by a device other than the first image display device 71 is not limited to the light guide plate, but may be a sub-liquid crystal provided on a game board such as a second image display device, a sub-liquid crystal provided in a frame, etc. Display effects may be performed by combining these display means including the light guide plate.

(Continuous preview performance)
As shown in FIGS. 268, 269, and 276, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment makes the player expect a jackpot game by executing a predetermined effect over one or more variable displays. It is possible to perform a continuous preview performance, which is a type of advance preview performance. In this embodiment, a color effect, a zone effect, a change notification sound effect, a hold icon change effect, a lamp change effect, a display effect using a light guide plate, etc. are executed in conjunction with each other.

Therefore, according to FIGS. 271 to 275 and 277, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate of continuous preview performances is decreasing. In other words, the continuous notice performance in the special 1 variable display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. is difficult to implement.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the continuous notice performance is smaller in the Special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the Special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. In other words, the continuous notice performance in the Special 1 variable display is better when hitting left in a specific gaming state than when hitting the game ball to the right in a specific gaming state. is difficult to implement.

Due to the execution rate of such a continuous notice performance, even if you mistakenly hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of something. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the number of types of patterns of the continuous notice performance may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. Further, the number of types of patterns of the continuous notice performance may be smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

Continuous notice performance is not only a linked performance that is performed consecutively or in conjunction with multiple fluctuating displays, but also a stage in which the level of expectation for a jackpot game increases as the number of fluctuating displays increases or as a predetermined condition such as the passage of time progresses. It may also include a development performance that becomes larger due to a target or continuous changes (development promotion performance, step-up (SU) type performance, etc.). Note that the development effect may be a change effect, such as a countdown or a timer effect, in which the mode (display mode or content) changes when a predetermined condition (e.g., elapsed time) is met.

Indirect effects, such as roulette effects, effects that increase the number of drawings when reaching, etc., that suggest different results depending on the selected options, pre-reading suggestion characters, conversation previews and cut-in notices on the LCD, and roulette effects for future development. Depending on the content, preview performances that foretell the occurrence of events that will lead to jackpots such as look-ahead and reach, and content suggestions that suggest the content of events that will be executed after the relevant performance, such as jackpot type suggestion performances (〇〇bonus). There are also effects that suggest operation, such as guidance for long button presses on the image display device, continuous press effects (the gauge accumulates during long presses, and the button vibrates for each level reached), and movable accessories (dedicated movable objects). Actions such as weak warning (suggestion) action, strong warning (suggestion) action, suggestion, development, and final performance), and vibration of operation buttons (including role objects with other functions such as role objects and light guide plates) Regarding other advance notification performances such as performances, the execution rate may be determined based on the relationship between the gaming state and the starting condition described above.

For example, if the execution rate of the continuous preview performance of the specific performance mode when displaying the special 1 variation in a specific gaming state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), then the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state At this time, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance in a predetermined performance mode, but a continuous preview performance in a specific performance mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined performance mode will not be executed. At this time, when executing the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed with the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

For example, if the execution rate of the continuous preview performance of the specific performance mode when displaying the special 1 variation in a specific game state is "0" (or the specific operation mode is not set), then the special 2 variation display in the specific game state At this time, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance in a predetermined performance mode, but a continuous preview performance in a specific performance mode corresponding to (or the same as) the predetermined performance mode will not be executed. At this time, when executing the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state, it is possible to execute a continuous preview performance of a performance mode that cannot be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, the light emitting effect of the special 1 starting hole 45 is executed at the timing when the game ball enters the first winning hole 45 and/or at the timing when the effect pattern 70a (first special pattern) starts changing. This is possible, and it is also possible to perform motion effects of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74. Similarly, in the special 2 fluctuation display of a specific game state, the special 2 starting hole 45 emits light at the winning timing of the game ball to the second winning hole 47 and/or the fluctuation start timing of the production symbol 70a (second special symbol). In addition to being able to perform a performance, it may also be possible to perform a motion performance of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74.

On the other hand, in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, the special 1 starting hole 45 The light emission effect is not performed, and the movement effect of the first movable accessory 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is not performed. That is, when the player hits left in the normal game state, the light emitting effect and action effect are executed, but when the player hits left in the specific game state, the execution of the light emitting effect and the action effect is regulated.

In this way, by making the light emitting effect and movement effect different between the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to make it possible to accidentally hit left-handed in the specific game state as well as in the normal game state. Even in such a case, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win a game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

When the three production patterns 70a appear (stop) with a specific pattern (specific number = chance number), it becomes an opportunity to enter the so-called sudden probability change (2R probability change), or SP reach (the possibility of a jackpot even in the reach) It may also develop into something with a high level of sexuality. Such a fluctuating display in which a chance roll appears may be performed by one fluctuating or by multiple fluctuating. In this case, the appearance rate of chance eyes may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Further, the ratio of chance eyes appearing in a plurality of fluctuations may be smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state.

The production pattern 70a can be displayed in various ways, such as a predetermined display mode consisting of an identification part such as numbers (1 to 9) or letters (A, B...) and a decoration part such as a character, and a specific display mode consisting of only the identification part. The display may be selected from among the modes. Note that there may be multiple types of predetermined display modes. Additionally, in addition to or in place of the production pattern 70a, a pseudo-continuation pattern such as "NEXT" is displayed, so that it appears to fluctuate multiple times regardless of one starting condition (one prize winning). You may perform a similar performance (pseudo-reaction). Also, in addition to or in place of the production pattern 70a, for example, a change pattern, a mode entry pattern, a development pattern, etc., appear, thereby changing a mode (for example, production mode) or production different from the current one. It may also be possible to expect the execution of Note that special symbols such as pseudo-continuous symbols, change symbols, mode entry symbols, and development symbols have different information (expectation level of execution of the jackpot game) from the normal performance symbols 70a. The appearance of such a special pattern can also be used as an element of the linked effect.

The appearance ratio of special symbols may be smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. In addition, the total number of types of symbols that can be displayed (normal performance symbols + special symbols) is higher in the special 1 variation display in a specific game state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. may be less. In addition, the execution rate of the linked effect that is performed in conjunction with the appearance of special symbols is higher in the special 1 variable display in a specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. It can be small.

Even with these methods, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 2 of production)
A second specific example of variable display performance is shown.

(Special 1 variation display in normal gaming state)
The special 1 variation display in the normal game state will be explained using FIGS. 278 and 279. As shown in FIG. 278, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m changes from "0" to "1". increases to At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 279(a)).

Next, at timing P1, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Ru. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging/reducing the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 279(b)).

At the timing of P2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 279(c)).

At the timing of P3, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 279(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("259"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Furthermore, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 279(e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("259") (see FIG. 279(f)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". Furthermore, the pending icons T1 displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as 20 frames of animation toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern is started, and after a preparatory operation is performed, scrolling is started (see FIG. 279(g)).

At the timing of P7, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "1" to "2". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 279(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). Further, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating operation (acting operation) (see FIG. 279(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("789") (see FIG. 279(j)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Thereafter, the special 1 variation display is performed in the normal gaming state according to the above-described flow.

We have explained the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, but the basic flow is also the special 2 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state and the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). It will be the same as shown.

Specifically, the first pending number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol pending display 63, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-first pending display 83, the first The reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern, and the first starting port 45 are respectively replaced by the second reserved number, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, and the second special symbol. Replaced with reservation display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second reservation display 84, second reservation number display area 70F, second reservation icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, and second start port 47. Bye.

(Special 1 variation display of specific gaming state)
With reference to FIGS. 280 and 281, the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state will be explained. As shown in FIG. 280, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m changes from "0" to "1". increases to At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 281(a)).

Next, at timing P1, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", the variable display of the first special symbol is started. Ru. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Note that the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (not displayed in a shifted manner). In addition, variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol on the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but the effect symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 281(b)).

At the timing of P2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 281(c)).

At the timing of P3, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 281(d)).

Thereafter, at timing P4, even if a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a remains in the stopped state (see FIG. 281(e)).

Then, at timing P5, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the effect pattern 70a remains in a stopped state. Further, the special symbol TZ comes to a final stop in a predetermined losing mode (“259”) (see FIG. 281(f)), and the first lamp symbol comes to a real stop in a losing mode (for example, turned off).

Next, at the timing of P6, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1". Variable display of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 60. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "2" to "1". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "2" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. Further, the variable display of the special symbol TZ and the first lamp symbol is started, but the performance symbol 70a remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 281(g)).

At the timing of P7, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 281(h)).

Thereafter, at timing P8, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right remains in a stopped state (see FIG. 281(i)).

Then, at the timing of P9, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the production pattern 70a remains in a stopped state, but the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing mode ("789") (see FIG. 281(j)). , the main lamp stops when the first lamp pattern fails (for example, turns off).

Thereafter, the special 1 variation display is performed in the specific game state according to the above-described flow. In addition, in the above example, although the effect pattern 70a is not varied, the effect pattern 70a may be varied.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation display in which the special symbol TZ varies without displaying the pending icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state, and the specific variation display of the present embodiment In the variation display, the effect pattern 70a is not varied. On the other hand, in the normal gaming state, the above-described specific variation display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display, and the production symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed while displaying the hold icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display. TZ is designed to fluctuate.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation display in which the special symbol TZ varies without displaying the pending icon T1 from the start to the end of the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state, and the specific variation display of the present embodiment In the variation display, the effect pattern 70a is not varied. On the other hand, in the specific game state, the above-described specific variation display is not executed from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display, and the production symbol 70a and the special symbol are displayed while displaying the hold icon T2 from the start to the end of the special 2 variation display. TZ is designed to fluctuate.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the specific variation display, at least one of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ can be made to vary. For example, even if both the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ change, the production symbol 70a may fluctuate but the special symbol TZ does not vary, or the special symbol TZ may vary but the production symbol 70a is not displayed. There may be.

In the embodiment, in the normal gaming state, a pending icon and a pending number can be displayed in a predetermined manner in accordance with an increase or decrease in the pending number based on winnings of game balls into the first starting port 45. On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, a pending icon can be displayed in a specific manner with only pending numbers different from the predetermined mode depending on an increase/decrease in the number of pending games based on winnings of game balls into the first starting port 45.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, in a specific gaming state, a pending icon and a pending number can be displayed in a predetermined manner in accordance with an increase or decrease in the number of pending games based on winnings of game balls into the second starting port 47. On the other hand, in a specific gaming state, a pending icon can be displayed in a specific manner with only pending numbers different from the predetermined mode depending on an increase/decrease in the number of pending games based on winnings of game balls into the first starting port 45.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, information regarding the number of reservations is displayed using the reservation icon, the reservation number, and the display, while in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, It is displayed with pending numbers and a display. That is, the total number of types of information regarding the number of reservations is smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. It can also be said that it is more difficult to grasp (confirm) the information regarding the number of reservations in the Special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the Special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the Special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state.

Further, the hold (relevant) icon is not limited to not being displayed in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, but may be displayed. In addition, when displaying special 1 fluctuations in a specific gaming state, even if you do not shift display the pending (relevant) icon based on an increase or decrease in the number of reservations, the special 1 fluctuation in the normal gaming state will not operate. It may be displayed in a manner different from the display or special 2 variation display of the specific game state. That is, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is possible to shift display the pending icon, but in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state, it is not possible to execute the shift display of the pending icon. Can be regulated. In addition, in the special 1 variation display of the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state, it is possible to display the pending icon in a predetermined manner, but in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the pending icon can be displayed in the predetermined manner. It is possible to control the execution of display in .

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 3 of production)
A third specific example of variable display performance is shown.

(Special 1 fluctuation display of pending number “1” in normal gaming state)
An example of special 1 fluctuation display when the number of reservations in the normal gaming state is "1" will be explained using FIG. 282. Note that the variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 282, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". Further, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames in the first pending icon display area 70B (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 282(a)).

Next, as the first reservation number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "0". Further, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging or enlarging the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 282(b)).

At this time, scrolling of the performance symbols 70a starts in the order of the left performance symbol 70a, the center performance symbol 70a, and the right performance symbol 70a (see FIGS. 282(c) to 282(e)).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the performance symbols 70a temporarily stop in the order of the left performance symbol 70a, the center performance symbol 70a, and the right performance symbol 70a (see FIGS. 282(f) to (h)). In addition, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also perform a fluctuation motion. Perform (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIGS. 282(f) to (h)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("789") (see FIG. 282(i)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

(Special 1 fluctuation display of pending number “4” in normal gaming state)
An example of special 1 fluctuation display when the number of reservations in the normal gaming state is "4" will be explained using FIG. 283. Note that the variation pattern is selected from among a plurality of variation patterns.

As shown in FIG. 283, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) in the first pending icon display area 70B (see FIG. 283(a)).

Next, as the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", variable display of the first special symbol is started. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3" and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first reservation display 83 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the hold icons T1 displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-first variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging or enlarging the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 283(b)).

At this time, scrolling of the left side effect pattern 70a, the center effect pattern 70a, and the right side effect pattern 70a starts to scroll at the same time (see FIG. 283(c)).

When the game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "3" to "4".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T1 is additionally displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) (see FIG. 283(d)).

Thereafter, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance pattern 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, the left side performance pattern 70a, the center performance pattern 70a, and the right side performance pattern 70a temporarily stop at the same time (see FIG. 283(e)). In addition, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also perform a fluctuation motion. Perform (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating action (acting action) (see FIG. 283(e)).

Then, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the first special symbol display 60. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("789") (see FIG. 283(f)), and the first lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Thereafter, special 1 variation display is performed in the normal gaming state using the variation pattern selected according to the above-described flow.

We have explained the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, but the basic flow is also the special 2 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state and the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state (time saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state). It will be the same as shown.

Specifically, the first pending number, the first special symbol, the first special symbol display 60, the first special symbol pending display 63, the sub-first fluctuation display 81, the sub-first pending display 83, the first The reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern, and the first starting port 45 are respectively replaced by the second reserved number, the second special symbol, the second special symbol display 61, and the second special symbol. Replaced with reservation display 64, sub-second variable display 82, sub-second reservation display 84, second reservation number display area 70F, second reservation icon display area 70D, second lamp pattern, and second start port 47. Bye.

In the embodiment, the three effect patterns 70a shown in FIG. 282 start scrolling in order, and the three effect patterns 70a start scrolling at the same time as shown in FIG. However, the variation pattern in which the three production symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time.

As shown in FIG. 284, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state is different between at least the number of reservations "1" and "4", and for example, as the number of reservations increases, the average fluctuation time becomes longer. . In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, the average fluctuation time is the longest when the number of reservations is "1", and the average fluctuation time is the shortest when the number of reservations is "4". Similarly, the average fluctuation time of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is different between at least the number of reservations "1" and "4", and for example, as the number of reservations increases, the average fluctuation time becomes longer. In the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, the average fluctuation time is the longest when the number of holds is "1", and the average fluctuation time is the shortest when the number of holds is "4". In addition, even if the average fluctuation time is the same or different for the number of reservations "2" and "3", or the average fluctuation time for the number of reservations "2" to "4" is the same or different, It can be either.

On the other hand, the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state is at least the same or different for the number of reservations "1" and "4". For example, if they are different, The average fluctuation time is the longest, and the average fluctuation time is the shortest when the number of reservations is "4".

Here, based on the difference between the average fluctuation display time when the number of reservations is "4" and the average fluctuation display time when the number of reservations is "1" when special 1 fluctuation display is executed in the normal gaming state, In particular, when executing the 1-variation display, the difference between the average variation display time when the number of reservations is "4" and the average variation display time when the number of reservations is "1" is smaller. That is, even if the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is different between the pending numbers "4" and "1", the difference is smaller than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state.

In addition, when executing special 2 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state, the difference between the average fluctuation display time when the number of reservations is "4" and the average fluctuation display time when the number of reservations is "1" is determined. In the case of executing the 1-variation display, the difference between the average variation display time when the number of reservations is "4" and the average variation display time when the number of reservations is "1" is smaller. That is, even if the average fluctuation time of the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is different between the pending numbers "4" and "1", the difference is smaller than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state.

In addition, in the embodiment, based on the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" of the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state and the number of reservations "1", the number of reservations of the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is "4". The difference in the average fluctuation time with the number of reservations "1" is smaller, and the difference in the average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1" in the special 2 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state is smaller. The difference in average fluctuation time between the number of reservations "4" and the number of reservations "1" in the special 1 fluctuation display is smaller (normal special 1>specific special 2>specific special 1).

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, the three effect patterns 70a shown in FIG. 282 start scrolling in order, and the three effect patterns 70a start scrolling at the same time as shown in FIG. However, the variation pattern in which the three production symbols 70a temporarily stop at the same time has a shorter variation time.

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation pattern in Figure 283 is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern in Figure 282, and when the number of reservations is "1" to "3", the fluctuation pattern in Figure 282 is easier to select. This pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 283. That is, there are a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 282 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 283, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to select (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost fixed regardless of the number of reservations. In this way, when executing the special 1 fluctuation display for loss determination in the normal gaming state, the special 1 fluctuation display for loss determination is executed in the specific gaming state based on the number of patterns of the fluctuation display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations. In this case, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the predetermined number of reservations is smaller.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 2 fluctuation display of a specific gaming state, when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 283 is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 282, and when the number of reservations is "1" to "3", the fluctuation pattern in FIG. This pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 283. That is, there are a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 282 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 283, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to select (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost fixed regardless of the number of reservations. In this way, when executing the special 2 variable display for loss determination in a specific gaming state, the special 1 variable display for loss determination is executed in the specific gaming state based on the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations. In this case, the number of variable display time patterns determined by the predetermined number of reservations is smaller.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Then, when executing the special 1 variation display for loss determination in the normal gaming state or when executing the special 2 variation display for loss determination in the specific gaming state, the pending number is determined from "4" to "1". Based on the number of patterns of variable display time, when executing the special 1 variable display for loss determination in a specific gaming state, the variable display time determined by the number of pendings determined by the number of pendings from "4" to "1" The number of patterns is smaller. In this way, when comparing the total number of variable display time patterns that can be determined by the number of holds from "4" to "1", instead of comparing by the number of holds as described above, it is possible to determine the loss in the normal gaming state. There are fewer special 1 fluctuation displays for loss determination in a specific gaming state than special 1 fluctuation displays for difference determination in a specific gaming state or special 2 fluctuation displays for difference determination in a specific gaming state. Even in this case, the above-mentioned effects can be obtained.

In the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state, when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation pattern in Figure 283 is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern in Figure 282, and when the number of reservations is "1" to "3", the fluctuation pattern in Figure 282 is easier to select. This pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 283. That is, there are a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 282 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 283, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to select (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost fixed regardless of the number of reservations. In other words, when displaying special 1 fluctuation for loss determination in a specific gaming state than when performing special 1 fluctuation display for loss determination in normal gaming state, the number of reservations is "4" and the number of reservations is "1". ”, the same variation pattern is executed at a high rate.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 2 fluctuation display of a specific gaming state, when the number of reservations is "4", the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 283 is more likely to be selected than the fluctuation pattern in FIG. 282, and when the number of reservations is "1" to "3", the fluctuation pattern in FIG. This pattern is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 283. That is, there are a plurality of variation patterns determined according to the number of reservations in the special 2 variation display of the specific gaming state. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, even if the number of reservations is "4" to "1", the variation pattern in FIG. 282 is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern in FIG. 283, and the variation pattern in FIG. is difficult to select (the selection rate may be 0). In other words, in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, the variation pattern is almost fixed regardless of the number of reservations. In other words, when displaying special 1 variation for loss determination in a specific gaming state than when performing special 2 variation display for loss determination in a specific gaming state, the number of pendings is "4" and the number of pendings is "1". ”, the same variation pattern is executed at a high rate.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, regardless of the number of reservations (the number of reservations is "4" and the number of reservations is "1"). ) The execution rate of variation patterns with the same stop or start pattern is high. Also, the total number of variation patterns with different stop modes (start modes) is smaller in the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. I can say that.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after preparatory operations such as movement of a part of the decorative part and expansion/contraction movement of the whole or part thereof. Depending on the presence or absence of the preparatory action and the type of the preparatory action, players are expected to execute a jackpot game.

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparation operation is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (execution rate h3<execution rate h1). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the preparation operation is smaller in the Special 1 variation display executed in a specific gaming state than in the Special 2 variation display executed in a specific gaming state. (execution rate h3<execution rate h4). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

Due to the execution rate of such a preparation operation, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state has fewer types of preparation operations than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (number of types of variation pattern H3<number of types of variation pattern H1). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to follow the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state has fewer types of preparation operations than the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (number of types of variation pattern H3<number of types of variation pattern H4). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to follow the same pattern.

Due to the number of types of preparatory movements, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIGS. 282 and 283, when temporarily stopping, the effect pattern 70a slightly oscillates (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, and in addition, the effect pattern 70a A stopping operation is executed in which the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE perform a fluctuation operation (production operation).

As shown in FIG. 286, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop operation is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (execution rate i3<execution rate i1). In other words, the stop operation in the special 1 variable display is more likely to occur when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. difficult to implement.

As shown in FIG. 286, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the execution ratio of the stop operation is smaller in the Special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state than in the Special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (execution rate i3<execution rate i4). In other words, the preparatory action in the special 1 variation display is better when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the game ball is hit to the right in the specific game state. difficult to implement.

Due to the execution rate of such a stopping operation, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of types of stop operations is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. (number of types of variation pattern I3<number of types of variation pattern I1). In other words, the stop operation in the special 1 variable display is more likely to occur when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to follow the same pattern.

As shown in FIG. 285, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state has fewer types of stop operations than the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. (number of types of variation pattern I3<number of types of variation pattern I4). In other words, the stop operation in the special 1 variable display is more likely to occur when the game ball is hit to the left in the specific game state than when the player hits the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. It is easy to follow the same pattern.

Due to the number of types of stopping motions like this, even if you mistakenly hit the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Note that instead of performing both the preparation operation and the stop operation, only one of them may be performed.

In the embodiment, when stopping the variable display due to a loss determination, there is a variable stop pattern in which three effect symbols 70a are sequentially stopped (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 282, and three effect symbols as shown in FIG. 283 are used. There is a variable stop pattern in which all 70a are stopped all at once. As shown in FIG. 287, from the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state and is determined to be a loss, the number of losses that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific gaming state is In the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together is smaller. In other words, it is better to hit the game ball to the left in the specific game state than to hit the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, it is difficult to execute a mode in which the three effect symbols 70a stop together.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 287, from the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state and is determined to be a loss, the display is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order is higher. In other words, it is better to hit the game ball to the left in the specific game state than to hit the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence is likely to be executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, when stopping the variable display due to a loss determination, there is a variable stop pattern in which three effect symbols 70a are sequentially stopped (temporarily stopped) as shown in FIG. 282, and three effect symbols as shown in FIG. 283 are used. There is a variable stop pattern in which all 70a are stopped all at once. As shown in FIG. 287, from the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state, the loss judgment that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state is shown. In the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together is smaller. In other words, the three performance symbols 70a stop together in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4" when the left hand is played in a specific game state than when the right hand is made in the specific game state. is difficult to implement.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 287, from the special 2 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state and is determined to be a loss, the display is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order is higher. In other words, the three effect symbols 70a stop in sequence in the special 1 fluctuation display with the number of reservations "4" when the player plays left-handed in a specific gaming state than when they play right-handed in a specific gaming state. Easy to execute.

As shown in FIG. 287, a special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal gaming state, or a loss determination that is performed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific gaming state In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes ``1'' and the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific game state and becomes a loss determination, a fluctuation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a stop together is The execution rate is the same. In addition, as shown in FIG. 287, a special 1 variation display is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal gaming state, or a special 1 fluctuation display is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific gaming state, which is a loss determination. The special 2 variation display that determines a loss and the special 1 variation display that determines a loss, which is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific gaming state, are variations in the manner in which the three performance symbols 70a stop in order. The execution rate of the patterns is the same.

In the embodiment, when starting the variable display in a loss determination, there is a variation start pattern in which three effect patterns 70a are scrolled in order as shown in FIG. 282, and three effect patterns 70a are scrolled simultaneously as shown in FIG. 283. There is a variation start pattern that causes As shown in FIG. 289, from the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state and is determined to be a loss, the number of losses that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific gaming state is The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a align and start scrolling is smaller in the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment. In other words, it is better to hit the game ball to the left in the specific game state than to hit the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, it is difficult to execute a mode in which scrolling starts when all three performance symbols 70a are aligned.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 289, from the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the normal gaming state, which determines a loss, the display is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in the specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in order is higher. In other words, it is better to hit the game ball to the left in the specific game state than to hit the game ball to the left toward the left side area of the game area 5a in the normal game state. In the variable display, the mode in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order is likely to be executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the embodiment, when the variable display is stopped due to a loss determination, a variation start pattern in which scrolling of three effect symbols 70a as shown in FIG. There is a variation start pattern in which scrolling is started. As shown in FIG. 289, from the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state, the loss judgment is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the variation pattern in which the three performance symbols 70a align and start scrolling is smaller in the special 1 variation display that becomes the judgment. That is, in the case of left-handed hitting in a specific gaming state, the three performance symbols 70a are aligned and start scrolling in the Special 1 variable display with the number of reservations “4” than in the case of right-handed hitting in a specific gaming state. aspects are difficult to implement.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 289, from the special 2 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state and is determined to be a loss, the display is executed when the number of reservations is "4" in a specific gaming state. In the special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination, the execution rate of the variation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order is higher. In other words, the three performance symbols 70a start scrolling in order in the Special 1 variable display with the number of reservations "4" when the left hand is played in a specific gaming state than when the right hand is made in the specific gaming state. is easy to execute.

As shown in FIG. 289, a special 1 variation display that results in a loss determination is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal gaming state, or a loss determination is performed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific gaming state. In the special 2 fluctuation display that becomes ``1'' and the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific game state and becomes a loss determination, a fluctuation pattern in which the three effect symbols 70a are aligned and starts scrolling. The execution rate is the same. In addition, as shown in FIG. 289, a special 1 variation display is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the normal gaming state, and is a loss determination, or a special 1 variation display is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in the specific gaming state. In the special 2 variable display that results in a loss determination and the special 1 fluctuation display that results in a loss determination that is executed when the number of reservations is "1" in a specific game state, the three effect symbols 70a start scrolling in order. The execution rate of the fluctuation patterns is the same.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, the displayed performance pattern 70a does not scroll, or there is a special display mode such as a part of the decoration such as a character disappearing from the performance pattern 70a, or the performance pattern The present invention is not limited to the case where 70a is not displayed, but may be other than the case where, for example, a decorative part such as a character of the effect pattern 70a does not perform a predetermined operation even though it is scrolled. In other words, the special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state is better than the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. It can also be said that a large proportion of the information is displayed in a special manner different from that displayed in the special 2 variable display.

A special pattern such as the above-mentioned pseudo-connected pattern may be displayed overlapping the effect pattern 70a or in place of the effect pattern 70a. In this case, by displaying a special pattern, all or part of the scrolling of the normal effect pattern 70a and the movements (preparation movement and stop movement) of the decorative part such as the character of the effect pattern become invisible. . And, the proportion or range in which normal symbols are hidden by the display of special symbols is higher in the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. is getting smaller.

By doing this, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 4 of production)
A fourth specific example of variable display performance will be described with reference to FIG. 289.

As shown in FIG. 289(a), while the effect pattern 70a of "8" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the effect is displayed in the center variable display area. It is assumed that a ready-to-win effect in which the symbol 70a is displayed in a variable manner is being executed.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 290(b), an effect display is performed in which the temporarily stopped left and right effect symbols 70a change to a display mode different from the previous display mode (FIG. 290(b), thereby It is suggested that expectations for the jackpot game are high.Then, a symbol size change effect is executed in which the effect symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and a predetermined effect such as insertion of a moving image is performed on the first image display device 70. The reduced performance pattern 70a is composed of a rectangular base image, a character image CG of a predetermined character, a bar-shaped image SG that is part of the character, and a pattern effect image ZE that decorates the background of the character. The normal display mode consisting of a decorative section, an identification section consisting of a hexagonal base image and a numeric section (identification characters) changes to a simple reduced display mode of only the identification section.

As shown in FIGS. 289(d) and (f), pseudo-effect patterns (pseudo-symbols) GZ are displayed in three rows above and below, thereby increasing expectations for a jackpot game. . After that, when the execution period of the reach effect that becomes a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special symbol confirmation command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 289(g), the current jackpot game (here, the first jackpot The jackpot effect pattern 70a of "888" indicating the type of game (game) and the special pattern TZ are temporarily stopped and displayed (shaking fluctuation) and then stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation performance ends.

In the embodiment, the fluctuating display is displayed with the performance pattern 70a in the normal mode and at a predetermined timing of the fluctuating display (for example, at the beginning of the reach performance, in the middle of the reach performance, when the fluctuation starts, during the fluctuation, when the fluctuation stops, etc.) This can be carried out with the production pattern 70a in a specific manner. The production pattern 70a of the specific mode includes not only the changed production pattern 70a (changed pattern) and the pseudo pattern GZ as shown in FIG. It may also be a development pattern that stimulates expectations.

As shown in FIG. 290, the ratio of the performance symbols 70a of the specific mode being displayed is smaller in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state (m32 <m12). In other words, it is more difficult to display the production symbol 70a in a specific manner in the special 1-figure variable display when the left-handed hit is performed in the specific game state than when the left-handed hit is performed in the normal game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 290, the ratio of the performance symbols 70a of the specific mode being displayed is smaller in the Toku 1 variation display executed in a specific game state than in the Toku 2 variation display executed in a specific game state (m32 <m42). In other words, the ratio of the performance symbols 70a in the normal mode being displayed is higher in the special 1 variation display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variation display executed in the specific game state. That is, it is more difficult to display the performance symbols 70a in a specific manner when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the right player in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 289, it is possible to perform a display size change effect in which the display size of the effect pattern 70a is changed in the variable display. As shown in FIG. 291, the display size of the performance symbol 70a is changed more in the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed in a specific gaming state and that results in a loss determination than in the special 1 fluctuation display that results in a loss determination in the normal gaming state. The execution rate of the display size change effect is small (n3<n1). That is, it is more difficult to execute the display size change performance of the performance symbol 70a in the special 1 figure variable display when the left hit is performed in the specific game state than when the left hit is performed in the normal game state.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 291, the special 1 variable display that is executed in a specific game state and that determines a loss changes the display size of the performance symbol 70a more than the special 2 variable display that determines a loss in a specific game state. The execution rate of the display size change effect is small (n3<n4). That is, the display size change performance of the performance symbols 70a is more difficult to execute when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the right hand in the specific game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The display size change effect is not limited to being executed in conjunction with the reach effect, but can be executed at a predetermined timing such as at the start of the change or during the change. The display size change effect may be executed in association with a winning suggestion effect such as an operation effect of a movable member, or a predetermined condition such as the number of reservations or operation of an operation button.

From the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is ``4'' in the normal gaming state, or the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is ``4'' in a specific gaming state, and which is the loss judgment. , the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state and is determined to be a loss may have a smaller execution rate of the symbol change performance. From the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is ``1'' in the normal gaming state, or the special 2 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is ``1'' in the specific game state, and which is the loss judgment. , the special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in a specific game state and is determined to be a loss may have a smaller execution rate of the symbol change performance.

A special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state and is a loss determination, and a special 1 variation display that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in a specific gaming state and is a loss determination. The execution rate of the symbol change effect may be the same. In addition, from the special 1 fluctuation display that is executed when the number of holds is "4" in a specific gaming state and becomes a loss judgment, the special 1 that is executed when the number of holds is "1" in a specific gaming state and becomes a loss judgment. In the variable display, the execution rate of the symbol change performance may be smaller or larger.

Production that makes people expect to execute a jackpot game by changing the symbols (symbol change production) is not limited to the display size change production, but also changes the position where the production symbols 70a are displayed, or changes the display order of the production symbols 70a. Other aspects such as changing or changing are also possible. In addition, when the symbol change effect has multiple patterns with different display sizes, display positions, display orders, etc., the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state will be better than the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state. In the case of variable display, the total number of patterns for pattern change performance may be smaller.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 290, the variable display is a reach effect (normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach, reach development promotion effect, etc.). As shown in FIG. 292, the execution ratio of the reach effect is smaller in the Special 1 variable display that is executed in a specific gaming state and that results in a loss determination than in the Special 1 fluctuation display that results in a loss determination in the normal gaming state ( o3<o1). That is, it is more difficult for the reach effect to be executed in the special 1 figure variation display when the player makes a left shot in the specific game state than when the player makes a left shot in the normal game state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 292, the execution ratio of the reach effect is smaller in the Special 1 variable display that is executed in a specific gaming state and that results in a loss determination than in the Special 2 variable display that results in a loss determination in a specific gaming state ( o3<o4). In other words, it is more difficult for the reach effect to be executed when the player hits the left hand in the specific gaming state than when the player hits the right player in the specific gaming state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Prior to reach performance, the first performance such as mode entry performance and development performance is performed, and then the second performance such as roulette performance and development performance is performed. By staging the event, expectations for the jackpot are raised. Here, the execution ratio of the advance notification performance executed before the reach performance is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. It's okay. In other words, the execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance performed from the advance notification performance is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. In addition, the special 1 variable display in a specific gaming state has fewer pre-notification effects executed before the reach effect than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in a specific gaming state. Good too. In other words, the ratio of ready-to-reach effects being executed after pre-notification effects is smaller in special 1 variation displays in specific gaming states than in special 1 variation displays in normal gaming states or special 2 variation displays in specific gaming states. .

The special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state has a lower expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game after the reach effect is executed than the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state, and the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state The special 1 variable display has a lower expectation of transitioning to a jackpot game after the reach effect is executed (special 2 variable display in a specific gaming state > special 1 variable display in a normal gaming state > special 1 in a specific gaming state) (variable display).

When selecting and executing a reach effect from multiple patterns, the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state shows the total types of reach effects better than the special 1 variation display in a normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in a specific gaming state. The number may be small.

It is possible to select from a plurality of patterns and execute related performances, such as movement effects of movable members and vibration effects of operation buttons, which are performed in association with the reach effect at appropriate timings such as during or before the reach effect. In this case, the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution ratio of related performances performed in conjunction with the ready-to-win performance than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. Furthermore, the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state has fewer types of related performances performed in conjunction with the ready-to-win performance than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state.

The special 1 variable display in a specific gaming state has a smaller rate of development from normal reach to SP reach or SPSP reach than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. The execution period of the ready-to-win effect is shorter in the special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. The execution ratio of the ready-to-win performance over a plurality of fluctuations is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state.

By doing these things, even if the game ball is accidentally hit to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning slot 45. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Specific production example 5)
Specific example 5 of variable display performance will be described with reference to FIGS. 293 and 294. In the specific example 5 of performance, the player is in a specific game state, and a first specific notification SR1 is being made in the upper right area of the first image display device 70 to guide the player to play right.

As shown in FIG. 293, at timing P0, when a game ball enters the second starting port 47, the second pending number U2 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m changes from "3" to "4". increases to At this time, the second reservation number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol reservation display 64 changes from "3" to "4". In addition, the 1st pending number which the main control part 110m memorize|stores (ascertains) is "0", and the 1st pending number U1 shown by LED in the 1st special symbol pending display 63 is "0".

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second pending display 84 changes from "3" to "4". Furthermore, one pending icon T2 is additionally displayed as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so as to gradually increase in size from a very small size) in the second pending icon display area 70D (see FIG. 294(a)). Further, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E is "0". Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 is "0", and the pending icon T1 is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B.

Next, at timing P1, as the second pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", the variable display of the second special symbol is started. Ru. Further, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol pending display 64 changes from "4" to "3". Further, the second pending number U2 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and a process is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the second reservation number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second reservation display 84 changes from "4" to "3". Furthermore, the hold icons T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. In addition, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-second variable display 81 is started, but the production pattern 70a has a part of the decorative part that operates as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging or enlarging the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 294(b)).

At the timing of P2, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "0" to "1".

At this time, the first pending number U1 indicated by the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "0" to "1". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 294(c)).

Furthermore, based on the winning in the first winning opening 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "hit right" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and the audio output device 9 Then, for example, a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which a voice output such as "Please hit right." is executed (see FIG. 294(c)).

Thereafter, at timing P3, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left center right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("789"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 294(d)).

Then, at timing P6, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the second special symbol display 61. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("789") (see FIG. 294(e)), and the second lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

Next, at timing P5, when the special symbol stop time elapses, the second pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2". 2. The variable display of special symbols starts. Further, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED on the second special symbol pending display 64 changes from "3" to "2". Further, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "2" and a process is performed to start the variable performance. Although the main control unit 110m also has a first holding memory based on winnings in the first winning opening 45, priority is given to the second holding memory based on winnings in the second starting opening 47, and variable effects are not performed. be exposed.

At this time, the second pending number U2 indicated by the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "3" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the second pending number U2 indicated by the LED of the sub-second pending display 84 changes from "3" to "2". Furthermore, the hold icons T2 displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D are shifted and displayed as animations for 20 frames toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon TH. Further, variable display of the first lamp pattern on the production pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the sub-second variable display 81 is started, but in the production pattern 70a, a part of the decorative part is operated as in the present embodiment. After performing preparatory operations such as enlarging or enlarging the entire or part of the screen, scrolling is started (see FIG. 294(f)).

At the timing of P6, when a game ball enters the first starting port 45, the first pending number U1 stored (understood) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the LED on the first special symbol reservation display 63 changes from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first reservation number U1 indicated by the first reservation number displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation. Further, the first pending number U1 indicated by the LED of the sub-first pending display 83 changes from "1" to "2". However, the hold icon T1 is not additionally displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B (see FIG. 294(g)).

Furthermore, based on the winning in the first winning opening 45, in addition to the first specific notification SR1, a display such as "hit right" is displayed in the center of the first image display device 70, and the audio output device 9 Then, for example, a second specific notification SR2 is executed in which a voice output such as "Please hit right." is executed (see FIG. 294(g)).

Thereafter, at timing P7, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the variable performance, the performance symbol 70a on the left middle right temporarily stops in a losing mode ("913"). At this time, in addition to the production pattern 70a slightly swinging motion (swinging display) so as to move up and down a predetermined stop position, the bar-shaped image SG and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the production pattern 70a also fluctuate. Perform an action (direction action). In addition, the pending icon T and the icon TH are in a state where they are performing a rotating motion (acting motion) (see FIG. 294(h)).

Then, at timing P8, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in a losing manner on the second special symbol display 61. Further, processing for ending the variable performance is performed in the performance control unit 130m.

At this time, although the scrolling of the background image continues, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as 10 frames of animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a comes to a permanent stop at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ comes to a permanent stop in a predetermined loss mode ("913") (see FIG. 294(j)), and the second lamp The book stops when the symbol is in a losing state (for example, the light goes out).

In this way, in addition to the first specific notification that suggests a specific gaming state, and based on the winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 45 while executing the first specific notification, It is possible to carry out the second specific notification. By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The second specific notification SR2 is different from the right hit notification that is notified at the start of a jackpot game, and is performed based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state.

When only the first specific notification SR1 is executed, it is possible to perform predetermined effects (win suggestion effects) such as notification sound effects, light emitting effects such as a starting port, and hold icon change effects, but it is not possible to execute the second specific notification SR1. When a prize is won at the first starting port 45 in a specific gaming state, a predetermined effect such as a notification sound effect, a light emitting effect such as a starting hole, a hold icon effect, etc. (execution of a winning suggestion effect can be regulated. It can also be said that the second specific notification SR can be executed instead of executing the performance.

Further, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (win hint effect) is smaller when both the first specific information SR1 and the second specific information SR2 are executed than when only the first specific information SR1 is executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 6 of production)
The first notification is executed at a predetermined timing (at the start of fluctuation) as a notification effect (advance notification effect) that makes people expect to play a jackpot game, and the second notification is performed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (at the time of winning the starting opening). There is. For example, in the embodiment, a first light emitting mode (see FIG. 295(a)) in which the winning opening lamp NR (starting openings 45, 47) blinks in blue when the effect pattern 70a (special symbol) starts to fluctuate; It is possible to execute the notification effect of the first notification with a second light emission mode (see FIG. 295(b)) in which the lamp NR (starting ports 45, 47) is blinked in red, for example, which is different from the first light emission mode. In addition, when a game ball enters the starting openings 45, 47, for example, a winning opening lamp NR, a lighting device for the board such as the decorative frame 41, a lighting device for the frame, etc., which is different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, It is possible to execute the notification effect of the second notification using the third light emitting mode (see FIGS. 295(d) and (e)) in which the lights emit light in combination. Note that even in the second notification, the first light emission mode and/or the second light emission mode may be executed. Furthermore, as a notification effect, it has a fourth light emitting mode (see FIGS. 296(c) and (f)), which is different from the first to third light emitting modes, and does not involve emitting light from the prize opening lamp NR, for example.

As shown in FIG. 296, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is more effective than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution rate of the light emission mode is small (p31<p11). Further, the execution ratio of the fourth light emitting mode notification performance is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, second light emission mode, and third light emission mode in the notification performance are more difficult to execute when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emitting mode in the notification performance is more likely to be executed when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state, the player will be aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As the notification effect, the first notification can be executed in the first light emission mode, the second light emission mode, and the third light emission mode, and the second notification can be executed in the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, but the second notification can be executed in the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode. The third light emission mode may be made infeasible in the notification. Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 296, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state is more effective in the first light emitting mode in the notification effect than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state. The execution ratio of the second light emission mode and the third light emission mode is small (p31<p11). Further, the execution ratio of the fourth light emitting mode notification performance is higher in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state (p32>p12). That is, the first light emission mode, second light emission mode, and third light emission mode in the notification performance are more difficult to execute when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state. Further, the fourth light emitting mode in the notification performance is more likely to be executed when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state.

In this way, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. Can be done. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 295, a vibration effect is performed using the operation button 17 in conjunction with the above-mentioned notification effect. The vibration effect makes the user expect a jackpot game by causing the operation button 17 to vibrate, and may be performed in combination with a button light emission effect that causes the operation button 17 to emit light. In the notification effect, the winning opening lamp NR (starting opening 45, 47) flashes in a first light emitting mode (see FIG. 295(a)), for example, in blue, and the winning opening lamp NR (starting opening 45, 47) flashes in the first lighting mode. It is possible to perform the notification effect of the first notification by using a second light emitting mode (see FIG. 295(b)) that is different from the mode, for example, blinking in red. In addition, a second light emitting mode that is different from the first light emission mode and the second light emission mode, for example, a combination of the prize opening lamp NR and other light emitting means such as the board lighting device 76 such as the decorative frame 41 or the frame lighting device 10, to emit light. The second notification can be performed in three light emission modes (see FIGS. 295(d) and (e)).

As shown in FIG. 297, in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state, the execution ratio of the vibration effect by the operation button 17 is higher in the second notification than in the first notification (q12>q11). That is, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, the vibration effect is more likely to be executed in combination with the second notification than in combination with the first notification. Further, the execution ratio of the vibration performance by the operation button 17 is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display performed in the normal gaming state (r3<r1). That is, it is more difficult for the vibration performance to be executed when the player hits the left hand in the specific game state than when the player hits the left hand in the normal game state.

The vibration performance may be selected from a plurality of vibration patterns, such as a pattern that is performed over a certain period of time, or a pattern that is performed intermittently at predetermined intervals. Further, the vibration effect may be selected from a plurality of effect patterns, such as a weak effect pattern in which the object itself vibrates without emitting light, and a strong effect pattern in which the object itself vibrates while emitting light. The special 1 variable display in the specific gaming state may require fewer total patterns of vibration effects than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific gaming state. In addition, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, it is possible to perform the vibration effects of the weak effect pattern and the strong effect pattern, but in the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, the weak effect pattern It may be possible to restrict the execution of the vibration effect of the above, while also allowing the execution of the vibration effect of the strong effect pattern.

By doing this, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The light emitting effect is not limited to the starting lamp NR, but other parts such as the game board or the frame may emit light.

As shown in FIG. 295, in accordance with the timing when the effect pattern 70a starts to fluctuate, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect by the prize opening lamp NR, an operation effect of the first movable member 73, and a vibration effect of the operation button 17. . Here, the light emitting effect includes a mode in which only the winning slot lamp NR emits light, a specific position of the winning slot lamp NR and the other first movable members 73, the operation button 17, the game board (board lighting device), the frame, etc. It is possible to select and execute from a plurality of patterns, such as a mode of emitting light in combination. Furthermore, the light emitting effect can be performed by selecting light emitting colors such as blue, red, and rainbow colors from a plurality of patterns. Further, the operation effect of the first movable member 73 can be selected from a plurality of patterns such as weak operation and strong operation. Further, the vibration effect of the operation button 17 can be executed by selecting from a plurality of patterns having different periods, intensities, and intervals. As shown in FIG. 295, in this embodiment, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, the light emitting effect in the winning hole lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are changed. It can be executed at the start timing. Similarly, in the special 2 variation display in a specific game state, even if the light emission effect on the prize opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are made possible to be executed at the timing of the start of variation. good. On the other hand, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, the light emitting effect on the prize opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not executed at the timing when the variation starts. It has become. In the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, the light emitting effect on the prize opening lamp NR and the operation effect of the movable accessory (movable member 73 and operation button 17) are not performed at the same time, but may be performed at different times. .

In this way, the total number of types of winning suggestion effects executed at the same time is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. . Note that the timing for performing the performance may be when winning a prize, during fluctuation, or when fluctuation is stopped.

By doing this, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Variation examples of production examples 1 to 6)
The production symbol 70a is displayed in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal game state, but the production symbol 70a is not displayed in the special 1 variation display carried out in the specific game state, and even if it is displayed, it is not scrolled. Good too. In addition, although the production pattern 70a is displayed in the special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state, the production pattern 70a is not displayed in the special 1 variation display carried out in a specific game state, and even if it is displayed, it does not scroll. You can also do this. By doing this, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. be able to. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

In the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state, even if the pending icon is not displayed, a related display such as a pedestal decorating the pending icon may be displayed.

The effect pattern 70a used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state and the effect pattern 70a used in the special 1 variable display carried out in the specific game state may be used in common or may be different. Further, the effect pattern 70a used in the Toku 2 variation display executed in the specific game state and the effect pattern 70a used in the Toku 1 variation display carried out in the specific game state may be used in common or may be different.

The special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display executed in the normal gaming state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display carried out in the specific gaming state may be separate without being shared. Further, the special symbol TZ used in the special 2 variation display executed in a specific game state and the special symbol TZ used in the special 1 variation display carried out in a specific game state may be separate without being shared. The display position of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 1 variation display in the normal game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state. Further, the display position and/or display mode of the special symbol TZ may be the same or different between the special 2 variation display in the specific game state and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state.

The reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the normal gaming state and the reserved numbers used in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific gaming state may be shared without being separated. Further, the reserved numbers used in the Toku 2 fluctuation display executed in the specific gaming state and the reserved numbers used in the Toku 1 fluctuation display executed in the specific gaming state may not be separated but may be shared.

It is possible to perform a combination of advance notice effects that are executed at different times. At the start of the variation, the degree of expectation for the jackpot game can be suggested by the action of the performance symbols themselves or the characters of the performance symbols at the time of the start of variation, the order in which the variation of the performance symbols starts, etc. Furthermore, when the variation ends (stops), the level of expectation for the jackpot game can be suggested by the action of the performance symbols themselves or the characters of the performance symbols at the time of the start of the fluctuation, the order in which the fluctuations of the performance symbols start, etc. Furthermore, in the first half of the execution period of the advance notice performance in one or more variable displays, the conversation preview, cut-in notice, development destination roulette display, Long press effect or repeated press effect of the operation button 17, pending icon change or corresponding icon change, display effect of the light guide plate, operation effect of the movable members 73, 74 (suggestion, development, decision effect), vibration effect of the operation button (suggestion/decision effect) Development/decision effects), timer effects, lamp lighting effects of the starting ports 45, 47, etc. can be executed singly or in combination. Furthermore, in the second half of the execution period of the advance notice performance using one or more variable displays, the development performance and final performance on a display means such as a liquid crystal display, and the display performance on the light guide plate (e.g., light emission according to the result of the final performance) , Vibration effects of the operation button 17 (suggestion, development, decision effects), operation effects of frame and board objects (movable members 73, 74), jackpot type suggestion effects (〇〇bonus, etc.), timer effects, pending changes It is possible to perform lamp lighting effects of the starting ports 45, 47, etc., individually or in combination.

In this case, the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. In addition, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the first half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state. The special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state has a smaller execution ratio of the advance notice performance executed in the latter half of the execution period than the special 1 variable display executed in the normal game state. In addition, the execution ratio of the advance notice effect executed in the latter half of the execution period is smaller in the special 1 variable display executed in the specific game state than in the special 2 variable display executed in the specific game state.

If there is a first performance to be performed in the first half of the execution period and a second performance to be performed in the second half of the execution period as advance notice performances, the first performance and the second performance will be performed in the special 1 variable display that is performed in the normal gaming state. However, while the first effect can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific game state, the execution of the second effect may be restricted. In addition, the first effect and the second effect can be executed in the special 2 variable display executed in a specific gaming state, but the first effect can be executed in the special 1 variable display executed in a specific gaming state. Execution of the second performance may be regulated.

In this way, the player is made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. I can do it. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The execution rate of various performances that are performed in the special 1 variable display in the aforementioned specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state or variable probability gaming state) that makes players expect to execute a jackpot game may be "0".

The various effects that make players expect to play the jackpot game described above (sometimes collectively referred to as hit suggestion effects) may have only one effect (display) pattern set, but may include multiple effects (display) patterns. You may select and execute the following. The winning suggestion effect is not limited to the fact that the execution rate is different depending on the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state, and the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, for example, The winning suggestion effect is when the execution rate of multiple patterns that can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state (special 1 variation display in the specific game state, special 2 variation display in the specific game state) is the same. may also be different.

For example, when the winning suggestion performance is selected from a plurality of patterns in the special 1 variable display in a specific game state, the execution rate of the specific pattern different from the predetermined pattern may be smaller than that of the predetermined pattern. On the other hand, when the winning hint performance is selected from multiple patterns in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the predetermined pattern of the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state Even if the same or corresponding first pattern and the second pattern that is the same or corresponds to the specific pattern of special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state have the same execution rate, special 1 fluctuation display in a specific gaming state The execution rate may be different. Due to the difference in the execution rate of the patterns in this way, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in a specific game state as in the normal game state, it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45. It is possible to make the player aware that this is the case. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

For example, when selecting the color effect expectation display from "blue", "red", and "rainbow", "red" can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state. The execution rate of the "red" color effect, which can be selected in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, may be smaller than the color effect. In this case, the execution ratios of the "blue" and "rainbow" color effects may be the same or different. It should be noted that, in addition to displaying the expectation level, the same can be applied to various effects that make players look forward to playing the above-mentioned jackpot game. In other words, when the winning suggestion performance is selected from multiple patterns, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is selected from the predetermined pattern that can be selected in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. A specific pattern that is the same as or corresponds to the selectable predetermined pattern may have a smaller execution rate. By doing this, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

Here, the pattern selected for the winning hint performance or the winning hint performance may be based on the timing (for example, when the fluctuation starts, when the fluctuation stops, how many times in a row), the game state, or other patterns (for example, the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation time, etc.). ), the execution rate may be different depending on a predetermined condition such as a combination with For example, when a variation pattern in which three performance symbols 70a stop in sequence is selected, the "red" color effect executed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display in the normal game state or the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, The execution ratio of the "red" color effect executed at the start of variation in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state may be smaller. Similarly, when a variation pattern with a short variation time of the production symbol 70a is selected, the "Red The execution rate of the "red" color light emitting effect, which is executed at the start of the variation in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state, may be smaller than the color light emitting effect. It should be noted that, in addition to the expectation level display and the start-up light emission effect, various effects that make players look forward to playing the above-mentioned jackpot game can be similarly applied. That is, when a winning suggestion performance is executed under predetermined conditions, the winning suggestion performance (predetermined pattern of the winning suggestion performance) performed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, The execution rate of the win suggestion performance (predetermined pattern of the win suggestion performance) performed in the special 1 variation display of the specific game state may be smaller. By doing this, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first prize opening 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for winning in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

From the execution period of the winning suggestion effect (predetermined pattern of winning suggestion effect) carried out in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the winning suggestion production carried out in the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state The execution period of (the predetermined pattern of the winning suggestion effect) may be shorter.

If it is possible to carry out a joint performance in which multiple types of winning hint performances are performed at the same time, the special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state is better than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in a specific gaming state. , the execution ratio of joint performance may be small. If there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning hint performances performed at the same time, the special 1 variation display in the specific gaming state is better than the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state. However, the execution ratio of the predetermined winning suggestion performance among the joint performances may be small. If there is a joint performance that is a combination of multiple types of winning hints performed at the same time, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variation display in the specific gaming state, the predetermined winning suggestion performance and the specific winning suggestion will be displayed. Although the performance can be executed, in the special 1 variation display of a specific game state, it may be possible to regulate the execution of a predetermined winning suggestion performance among the joint performances, and it may also be possible to execute a specific winning suggestion performance. .

As a guaranteed performance (including a jackpot performance), at a predetermined timing, the movable members 73 and 74 operate, the operation button 17 vibrates, and a predetermined display is performed, such as a rainbow display or rainbow light emission. There are one performance and a second performance that is performed at a timing different from the first performance (for example, when the fluctuation starts, during the fluctuation, when the fluctuation stops, etc.). The second effect is, for example, a confirmation sound that is output at the start of the change, a pending change in a rainbow pattern, or a fixed change effect that makes you expect the execution of a certain change depending on the performance such as winning a battle, etc. These may be used singly or in combination. It is executable and has multiple patterns.

The confirmed performance is the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the special 2 variation display in the specific game state, and the special 1 variation display in the specific game state, and the execution rate of the first performance and/or the first performance of the confirmed performance is It's different. In this case, the execution ratio of the first effect of the confirmed effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Further, the execution ratio of the second effect of the confirmed effect may be smaller in the special 1 variable display in the specific game state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state. Furthermore, the execution ratio of one of the first performance and second performance of the confirmed performance is smaller in the special 1 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state than in the special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 fluctuation display in the specific gaming state. You may. At this time, the execution ratio of the first performance of the confirmed performance and the other of the second performance may be the same or different.

In the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, it is possible to execute the first performance and the second performance of the confirmed performance, but in the special 1 variable performance in the specific game state, at least the second performance It is preferable to restrict the execution of predetermined patterns. For example, in the special 1 variable display in the normal game state or the special 2 variable display in the specific game state, the first effect accompanied by the operation of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17 is executed as the final effect, while the movable member 73, 74 and the second performance pattern that involves the operation of the operation button 17 is not executed.

By doing this, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first prize opening 45 even if he or she accidentally hits the ball to the left in the specific game state as in the normal game state. It can make you notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the benefits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

We have explained the hit suggestion effect in the variable display of loss judgment, but also in the variable display of hit judgment, there is a special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, a special 2 variation display in a specific gaming state, and a special 1 variation display in a specific gaming state. The relationship may be the same as in the case of loss determination.

As explained above, a player who feels uncomfortable with the degree or type of performance (win hint performance) etc. that he/she is expecting in the special 1 variation display of a specific gaming state suspects an error in the gaming machine 1 itself. It is possible that In this case, it is assumed that the hall manager checks the control parts that control the game, such as the main control board. Therefore, in addition to the above-mentioned configuration of the performance in the special 1 variation display of the specific gaming state, the configuration of the board case described later will make it easier for the hall manager to confirm, reduce stress on the players, and improve the game. can improve the interest of

◇In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a fluctuation display, and it is possible to perform an expectation display (for example, a color effect) that makes people expect to execute the special game based on the determination, and the fluctuation is based on the first starting condition in the normal game state. The variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is characterized in that the execution rate of the expectation level display (for example, color effect) is smaller than that of the display.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A special effect (for example, a zone effect) that is capable of performing a variable display and makes people expect the execution of the special game for a predetermined period of time based on the above-mentioned determination, may be displayed for a predetermined variable display period based on one of the above-mentioned determinations, or for a plurality of the above-mentioned The variable display can be executed at any timing during a predetermined variable display period based on the determination, and the variable display is based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state rather than the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution rate of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and to execute a notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when a pending icon changes) that makes people expect to execute the special game based on the determination, The execution rate of the notification sound effect (for example, notification sound when a hold icon changes, etc.) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state than in the variable display based on the starting condition. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A fluctuating display can be executed, and linked effects (for example, color effects, notification sound effects, light emitting effects, hold icon change effects, motion effects of movable members, etc.) that are performed continuously or in conjunction with each other in the plurality of variable displays are executed. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is more effective than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized by a low execution rate of notification sound effects, light emission effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A pending display in which a variable display can be executed and the display mode of the pending icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed changes from a normal mode (for example, a CD icon) to a specific mode (for example, a colored character icon) when the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an icon change effect, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized by a small execution rate of change effects.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a variable display, and it is possible to perform a light emitting effect (for example, the light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on a winning in the first winning means (first winning hole 45), and the first The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the light emitting effect (for example, the light emitting of the prize opening lamp NR) than the variable display based on the starting condition. shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. The first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means (different from the first display means) have a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) that is more advantageous than the game state. a second image display device 71, a light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning hole 45), or the second winning means. Based on a second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball into the means (second winning hole 47), the first display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (production symbol 70a) in a variable manner. is possible, and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) has a display mode including a first mode (for example, a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (for example, a rainbow color effect, etc.). A display effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect in the first mode (for example, blue effect, etc.) by the means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a variable display, and the movable accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution rate of the first operation mode (for example, weak operation) of the operation performance by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a fluctuation display, and it is possible to perform an expectation display (for example, a color effect) that makes people expect to execute the special game based on the determination, and the fluctuation is based on the second starting condition in the specific game state. The variation display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is characterized in that the execution rate of the expectation level display (for example, color effect) is smaller than that of the display.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A special effect (for example, a zone effect) that is capable of performing a variable display and makes the user expect the execution of the special game for a predetermined period based on the above-mentioned determination, may be displayed for a predetermined variable display period based on one of the above-mentioned determinations, or for a plurality of the above-mentioned It can be executed at any timing in a predetermined variable display period based on the determination, and the variable display is based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state rather than the variable displaying based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. The variable display is characterized in that the execution ratio of the special effect (for example, zone effect) is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute a notification sound effect (for example, a notification sound when a pending icon changes) that makes people expect to execute the special game based on the determination, and the second The execution ratio of the notification sound effect (for example, notification sound when a hold icon changes, etc.) is smaller in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state than in the variable display based on the starting condition. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A fluctuating display can be executed, and linked effects (for example, color effects, notification sound effects, light emitting effects, hold icon change effects, motion effects of movable members, etc.) that are performed continuously or in conjunction with each other in the plurality of variable displays are executed. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is more effective than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by a low execution rate of notification sound effects, light emission effects, hold icon change effects, movable member operation effects, etc.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A pending display in which a variable display can be executed and the display mode of the pending icon (T1, T2, TH) displayed changes from a normal mode (for example, a CD icon) to a specific mode (for example, a colored character icon) when the start condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute an icon change effect, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by a small execution rate of change effects.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and it is possible to execute a light emitting effect (e.g., light emission of the winning hole lamp NR) based on a winning in the first winning means (first winning hole 45), and the second The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state has a smaller execution rate of the light emitting effect (for example, the light emitting of the prize opening lamp NR) than the variable display based on the starting condition. shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. The first display means (first image display device 70) and the second display means (different from the first display means) have a specific game state (time-saving game state, variable probability game state) that is more advantageous than the game state.
a second image display device 71, a light guide plate, etc.), and based on the first starting condition established by winning a game ball to the first winning means (first winning hole 45), or the second winning means. Based on a second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball into the means (second winning hole 47), the first display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (production symbol 70a) in a variable manner. is possible, and the second display means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) has a display mode including a first mode (for example, a blue effect, etc.) and a second mode (for example, a rainbow color effect, etc.). A display effect can be executed, and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the display effect in the first mode (for example, blue effect, etc.) by the means (second image display device 71, light guide plate, etc.) is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to perform a variable display, and the movable accessories (first movable member 73, second movable member 74 ), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the execution rate of the first operation mode (for example, weak operation) of the operation performance by the accessory (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). If the variable display is executable and the first starting condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state, the specific variable display (for example, without displaying or operating the hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display, the production symbol 70a or the special effect symbol TZ), and when the first starting condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state, the specific variable display is not executed. .
In order to solve the above problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol is executed based on the determination. In the gaming machine (1) that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the variable display of the (performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned. It has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a game ball enters the first winning means (first winning hole 45). or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the above-mentioned symbol (effecting symbol 70a) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70). When executing the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state cannot be executed. It is characterized by being able to perform predetermined presentations (for example, color effects, zone presentations, pending icon changes, notification sounds, light emission, actuation of movable members, etc.).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). If the variable display is executable and the first starting condition is satisfied in the specific gaming state, the specific variable display (for example, without displaying or operating the hold icon from the start to the end of the variable display, the production symbol 70a or the special effect symbol TZ), and if the second start condition is satisfied in the specific game state, the specific variable display is not executed. .
In order to solve the above problems, according to another gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of a starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol is executed based on the determination. In the gaming machine (1) that can execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player when the variable display of the (performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming state is set to the normal gaming state and the above-mentioned. It has a specific gaming state (time-saving gaming state, variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the normal gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a game ball enters the first winning means (first winning hole 45). or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the above-mentioned symbol (effecting symbol 70a) is displayed on the display means (first image display device 70). When executing the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state, the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state cannot be executed. It is characterized by being able to perform predetermined presentations (for example, color effects, zone presentations, pending icon changes, notification sounds, light emission, actuation of movable members, etc.).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and in the normal gaming state, a pending display can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, an operation such as rotation) according to an increase or decrease in the number of pending based on the first starting condition, and the specified In the gaming state, a pending display can be displayed in a specific mode (for example, not operating or not displaying) that is different from the predetermined mode according to an increase or decrease in the number of pendings based on the first starting condition.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and in the specific gaming state, a pending display can be displayed in a predetermined manner (for example, an operation such as rotation) according to an increase or decrease in the number of pending based on the second starting condition, and the specific In the gaming state, a pending display can be displayed in a specific mode (for example, not operating or not displaying) that is different from the predetermined mode according to an increase or decrease in the number of pendings based on the first starting condition.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, the average variable display time and the maximum pending number at the maximum pending number (for example, 4) Based on the difference from the average variable display time at a predetermined number of holds (for example, 1) that is smaller than the number of holds, the maximum number of holds when executing the variable display of loss determination according to the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the difference between the average fluctuation display time at a predetermined number of reservations (for example, reservation 1) that is smaller than the maximum number of reservations is smaller than the average fluctuation display time at the reservation number (for example, reservation 4).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, based on the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations, the specific game The present invention is characterized in that the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations is smaller when the variable display of the failure determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and the variable display of a loss determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the specific gaming state compared to the case where the variable display of a loss determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the normal gaming state. When the variable display is executed, the rate at which the same variation pattern is executed for the first pending number (for example, 4) and the second pending number (for example, 1) is higher.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The average variable display time and the maximum pending number at the maximum pending number (for example, 4) when the variable display can be executed and the variable display of loss determination based on the second starting condition is executed in the specific gaming state Based on the difference from the average variable display time at a predetermined number of holds (for example, 1) that is smaller than the number of holds, the maximum number of holds when executing the variable display of loss determination according to the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized in that the difference between the average fluctuation display time at a predetermined number of reservations (for example, reservation 1) that is smaller than the maximum number of reservations is smaller than the average fluctuation display time at the reservation number (for example, reservation 4).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and when executing the variable display of loss determination based on the second starting condition in the specific game state, from the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of holds, the specific game The present invention is characterized in that the number of patterns of the variable display time determined by the predetermined number of reservations is smaller when the variable display of the failure determination based on the first starting condition is executed in the state.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and the variable display of a loss determination based on the second starting condition is executed in the specific gaming state. When the variable display is executed, the rate at which the same variation pattern is executed for the first pending number (for example, 4) and the second pending number (for example, 1) is higher.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A fluctuating display can be executed, and an operation performance (for example, a preparation motion or a stop motion) of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) can be executed at the start and/or end of the fluctuating display, and the first motion in the normal gaming state can be performed. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition because the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is performed at the start and/or end of the variable display. It is characterized by a low execution rate of motion effects (for example, preparation motions and stop motions).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A fluctuating display can be executed, and an operation performance (for example, a preparation motion or a stop motion) of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) can be executed at the start and/or end of the fluctuating display, and the first motion in the normal gaming state can be performed. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition because the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is performed at the start and/or end of the variable display. It is characterized by a small number of types of motion effects (for example, preparatory motions and stop motions).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and the variable display can be performed using the symbols in a first mode (for example, 1 to 9) and a second mode (for example, a special pattern that does not have numerical information) that is displayed at a predetermined timing of the variable display. symbol etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. , is characterized in that the proportion of symbols in the second mode (for example, special symbols without numerical information) being displayed is small.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and at the start and/or end of the variable display, it is possible to execute an action production (for example, a preparation motion or a stop motion) of the symbol (production symbol 70a), and the The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition because the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is performed at the start and/or end of the variable display. It is characterized by a low execution rate of motion performances (for example, preparation motions and stop motions).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and at the start and/or end of the variable display, it is possible to execute an action production (for example, a preparation motion or a stop motion) of the symbol (production symbol 70a), and the The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition because the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is performed at the start and/or end of the variable display. It is characterized by a small number of types of motion effects (for example, preparation motions and stop motions).

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and in the variable display, the symbol can be displayed as a first symbol in a predetermined manner (for example, 1 to 9) and a second symbol in a specific manner (for example, a special symbol without numerical information). and the rate at which the first symbol is displayed is higher in the variable presentation based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state than in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by a large

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A stop display mode (for example, a short time to stop) in which a variable display can be executed and the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display has a first stop display mode and a stop display period. There is a different second stop display mode (for example, a long time until the stop), and from the variable display that determines a loss based on the first start condition when the number of pending games is at the maximum in the normal gaming state, The execution rate of the first stop display mode (for example, short time until stop) is smaller in the fluctuating display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holds is reached in a specific gaming state. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A stop display mode in which a variable display can be executed and the symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display includes a first stop display mode (in which the symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped in a first pattern). For example, simultaneous stopping), and a second stop display mode (for example, stopping sequentially) in which the symbols (production symbols 70a) are stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the normal gaming state, From the fluctuation display that results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition when the number of reservations is at the maximum, the fluctuation display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition when the number of reservations is at the maximum in the specific gaming state. The display is characterized in that the execution rate of the second stop display mode (for example, stopping in sequence) is higher.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The variable display is capable of executing a variable display, and the variable display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, rather than the variable display causing a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. This is characterized in that the execution rate of the symbol change performance that changes the display size of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The variable display is capable of executing a variable display, and the variable display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, rather than the variable display causing a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. is characterized by a smaller execution ratio of reach effects.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A stop display mode (for example, a short time to stop) in which a variable display can be executed and the symbol (effect pattern 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display has a first stop display mode and a stop display period. There is a different second stop display mode (for example, a long time until the stop), and from the fluctuating display that determines a loss based on the second start condition when the number of pendings is at the maximum in the specific gaming state, The execution rate of the first stop display mode (for example, short time until stop) is smaller in the fluctuating display that results in a loss determination based on the first start condition when the maximum number of holds is reached in a specific gaming state. It is characterized by

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A stop display mode in which a variable display can be executed and the symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped and displayed in the variable display includes a first stop display mode (in which the symbol (production symbol 70a) is stopped in a first pattern). For example, simultaneous stopping), and a second stop display mode (for example, stopping sequentially) in which the symbols (production symbols 70a) are stopped in a second pattern different from the first stop display mode, and in the specific game state From the fluctuation display that results in a loss determination based on the second starting condition when the maximum number of reservations is reached, the fluctuation display results in a loss determination based on the first startup condition when the maximum number of reservations is in the specific gaming state. The display is characterized in that the execution rate of the second stop display mode (for example, stopping in sequence) is higher.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The variable display is capable of executing a variable display, and the variable display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, rather than the variable display causing a loss determination based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. This is characterized in that the execution rate of the symbol change performance that changes the display size of the symbol (performance symbol 70a) is smaller.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). The variable display is capable of executing a variable display, and the variable display results in a loss determination based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state, rather than the variable display causing a loss determination based on the second starting condition in the specific gaming state. is characterized by a smaller execution ratio of reach effects.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). It is possible to execute a variable display, and when the first specific notification (for example, right-handed game display) suggesting that the specific gaming state is in effect, and the first specific notification (right-handed game display) is being executed, the first It is characterized by being able to perform a second specific notification (display or notification different from the right-handed hitting display) in addition to the first specific notification (right-handed hitting display) based on the winning of a game ball to the winning means. shall be.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A variable display can be executed, and a light emitting effect and a movable accessory (for example, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, prize winning timing, fluctuation start timing, etc.), and at the predetermined position (for example, starting port lamp NR) based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state. It is characterized by being able to regulate the execution of the light emission effect and the movement effect of the movable accessories (for example, the first movable member 73, the second movable member 74) at a predetermined timing (for example, the prize winning timing or the fluctuation start timing). do.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A first notification that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation) and a timing different from the first notification (at the time of winning a prize in the starting slot) as a notification effect that makes it possible to perform a variable display and make people expect to execute the special game. As the first notification, a first mode (for example, the starting port lamp NR flashes blue) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, the starting port lamp NR blinks red). is executable, and as the second notification, it is executable in a third aspect different from the first aspect and the second aspect (for example, light emission of the starting port lamp NR and the lighting device for the board and/or the frame, etc.), The variable display based on the first starting condition in the specific gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. It is characterized in that the ratio is small, and the execution ratio of the notification effect in the fourth mode (for example, the starting port lamp NR does not emit light) which is different from the first to third modes is high.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A first notification that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the fluctuation) and a timing different from the first notification (at the time of winning a prize in the starting slot) as a notification effect that makes it possible to perform a variable display and make people expect to execute the special game. As the first notification, a first mode (for example, starting port lamp NR flashes blue) and a second mode different from the first mode (for example, starting port lamp NR blinking red); It is possible to implement a third aspect different from the first aspect and the second aspect (for example, light emission from the starting port lamp NR and the panel and/or frame illumination device, etc.), and as the second notification, the first aspect The specific gaming state is executable in the same manner as the first aspect and the second aspect, and is not executable in the same manner as the third aspect. In the variable display based on the first starting condition, the execution ratio of the first to third aspects in the notification effect is smaller, and the fourth aspect (for example, the starting door lamp) is different from the first to third aspects. It is characterized in that the execution ratio of the notification effect (NR does not emit light) is high.

◆In order to solve the above problems, according to the gaming machine (1) of the present invention, a determination is made based on the establishment of the starting condition (winning in the winning openings 45, 47), and a symbol ( When the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a) reaches a predetermined special result, the gaming machine (1) is capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and the gaming state is a normal gaming state, and the normal gaming state is set as the normal gaming state. It has a specific gaming state (a time-saving gaming state, a variable probability gaming state) that is more advantageous than the gaming state, and is based on a first starting condition that is established when a gaming ball enters the first winning means (first winning opening 45). , or based on the second starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the second winning means (second winning hole 47), the display means (first image display device 70) displays the symbol (effecting symbol 70a). A first light emitting mode using the first prize winning means (starting port lamp NR), and a second light emitting mode in conjunction with the first prize winning means, as a light emitting effect that can perform a variable display and make people expect the execution of the special game. A second light emitting mode using a light emitting means (for example, a lighting device for the board and/or a frame), and in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state, the first light emitting mode The second light emitting mode has a higher execution rate of the vibration effect by the vibration means (operation button), and is more likely to be executed in the specific gaming state than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the normal gaming state. The variable display based on the first starting condition is characterized in that the execution rate of the vibration effect is smaller.

(Fifth embodiment)
Hereinafter, a gaming machine 100 as a fifth embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate. Note that the embodiments described below do not limit the present invention, and not all of the elements and combinations thereof described in the embodiments are essential to the solution of the present invention. do not have. In addition, in the fifth embodiment, different symbols may be attached to the same high-profile products in the first to fourth embodiments and the sixth embodiment, but in that case, FIGS. 332 shall be applied.

[Description of gaming machine 100]
Referring to FIGS. 298 and 299, first, the configuration of gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 298 is a front view of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment. FIG. 299 is a perspective view of the gaming machine frame of the gaming machine 100 showing a state in which the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 are opened with respect to the outer frame 160. The game machine 100 is a pachinko game in which a game ball is fired based on a player's firing operation, and when a game ball wins in a specific winning device, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out to the player based on the winning. It is a machine.

In the following explanation, the left and right direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "X direction", particularly the right direction of the gaming machine 100 will also be referred to as the "+X direction", and the left direction of the gaming machine 100 will be referred to as the "-X direction". Also called "direction". Further, the vertical direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "Y direction", and in particular, the upward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "+Y direction", and the downward direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "-Y direction". Furthermore, the depth direction of the gaming machine 100 is also called the "Z direction", in particular, the direction toward the back side with respect to the gaming machine 100 is also called the "+Z direction", and the direction toward the near side with respect to the gaming machine 100 is also called the "+Z direction". - Also called "Z direction".

As shown in FIGS. 298 and 299, the gaming machine 100 includes an outer frame 160 that is attached to island equipment of a game parlor, and an inner frame that is supported rotatably with the outer frame 160 on the front side of the outer frame 160. 170, and a glass frame 150 rotatably supported on the front side of the inner frame 170. A glass member 151 is provided on the glass frame 150 so as to be detachable from the back side. Further, at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150, there is a lock unit 190 for making the glass frame 150 and the inner frame 170 openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 160, and for making the upper unit 180 detachable. It is provided. Further, a glass frame release switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the glass frame 150 to detect that the glass frame 150 is opened, and a glass frame release switch (not shown) is provided at a predetermined position of the inner frame 170 to detect that the glass frame 150 is opened. An inner frame release switch (not shown) is provided for detecting that the inner frame has been opened.

The inner frame 170 is provided with the main mechanisms, various parts, boards, etc. that make up the game machine 100, and is also provided with the game board unit 102 in a detachable manner. A gaming area 106 is provided between the glass member 151 and the gaming board unit 102. This game area 106 includes a game ball falling area where game balls flow down, and a display screen area of the main display device 131.

The game board unit 102 includes a game board 102A constituting a game area 106, an accessory unit 102B including various movable accessories, a main display device 131, and an effect control board unit 102C including an effect control board 320. The main control board unit 102D includes a main control board 300. Note that the game board 102A of the game board unit 102 has an opening 102AZ. The main display device 131 is arranged in this opening 102AZ. This makes it easier for the player to visually recognize the main display device 131. Further, in the game board unit 102, the side facing the player is also called the front side, and the back side (the opposite side to the front side) is also called the back side.

A production operation unit BSU is provided on the lower side of the glass frame 150. The performance operation unit BSU is provided with a sword handle unit 135 and a performance operation stick 136. Further, an upper plate 128 is provided on the back side of the production operation unit BSU, and a firing handle device 103 is provided on the lower right side of the production operation unit BSU. Further, an upper unit 180 is provided on the upper side of the glass frame 150 so as to cover a part of the upper part of the glass frame 150, which performs a predetermined related operation when a predetermined gaming state is entered. Note that the upper unit 180 is attached to the outer frame 160 and is configured to engage with the glass frame 150. A first side display device 132 and a second side display device 133 are provided on both left and right sides of the glass frame 150 for displaying effects during gaming and non-gaming.

The upper tray 128 is a tray for storing game balls to be fired into the game area 106. The game balls stored in the upper tray 128 are led out to a firing rail (not shown), and are guided to a guide rail (not shown) via the firing rail at a predetermined firing intensity by the firing handle device 103, so that the game ball can be played. It is fired into the area 106 (game ball falling area). In this case, depending on how the player rotates the firing handle device 103, the game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 passes through the left route 106a or the right route 106b of the game ball falling area included in the game area 106. do. Specifically, when the player rotates the firing handle device 103 relatively weakly, the game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 can pass through the left route 106a. On the other hand, when the player rotates the firing handle device 103 relatively strongly, the game ball fired from the firing handle device 103 can pass through the right route 106b.

A sword handle unit 135 imitating the shape of the handle of a sword is arranged in the center of the performance operation unit BSU. The sword hilt unit 135 includes a sword hilt button that can perform decision operations (operation input) during a game, a sword hilt button detection switch 137 that detects the operation of the sword hilt button, and a sword hilt button that can be used normally. A button drive including a button drive motor for changing the state and a protruding state located above the normal state, and a button vibration motor for changing the sword handle button between the normal state and a vibration state in which it vibrates in a predetermined manner. The device is provided with a button light emitting LED for changing the sword handle button between an off state and a lighted state in which light is emitted in a predetermined manner, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 100. . Further, on the left side of the performance operation unit BSU, there is provided a performance operation stick 136 which is a joystick operated by the player to adjust the volume of the gaming machine 100, etc.

In the game area 106, there is an upper accessory unit 154 on the back side of the upper part, a lower accessory unit 156 at the bottom of the game ball downstream area, and a position sandwiched between these units and the game board 102A. A light guide panel unit 181 including a light guide panel arranged to cover the movable accessory and the main display device 131 is provided.

The upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 are movable accessories (so-called gimmicks) provided in the accessory unit 102B, and can be moved in various ways by operating or moving in a predetermined manner as the game progresses. It is designed to perform the following effects. Further, the light guide panel unit 181 includes a light guide panel made of resin such as transparent acrylic, and a light emitting section for allowing light to enter the light guide panel. In the light guide panel unit 181, the effect display displayed on the main display device 131 is made visible through the light guide panel, and a part of the panel is made to emit light by light incident from the light emitting part, thereby displaying a design, etc. It is possible to display. In addition, in this embodiment, "movable accessory" shall be interpreted to mean a moving accessory, and "accessory" is broadly defined to include both movable accessory and immovable accessory. shall be interpreted accordingly.

A first starting device 112 having a starting area into which a game ball can enter is provided in an area approximately below the center of the gaming area 106. This first starting device 112 is a general winning device type winning device, and when a game ball wins, a jackpot random number is acquired, a jackpot determination is made, and a predetermined prize ball (for example, 3 balls) is paid out. . Moreover, above the first starting device 112, the game ball does not pass between the nails mainly in the middle of the left side route 106a in the game ball falling area, but enters the first starting device 112 by warping. A stage 140 is provided to facilitate the operation. Note that the game ball that has entered the stage 140 may return to the game ball flowing area from a predetermined notch in the stage 140 after staying on the stage 140.

Further, in the lower right area of the game area 106, a second starting device 115 having a starting area into which a game ball can enter is provided. The second starting device 115 is a so-called attacker type electric accessory, and is provided with a starting port at its lower part, and has a movable piece 115b above the starting port. It is movably controlled into a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A and a retracted state in which it is drawn into the game board 102A. When the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the game ball is guided into the second starter 115 from the starter opening, and the game ball can easily enter the second starter 115. Conversely, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, the game ball will not enter the starting hole, and the game ball will not be able to enter the second starting device 115. That is, in the second starting device 115, when the movable piece 115b is in the protruding state, there is no chance of winning the game ball, and when the movable piece 115b is in the retracted state, the chance of winning the game ball increases. In addition, when a game ball wins, the second starting device 115 acquires a jackpot random number and performs a jackpot determination, similar to the first starting device 112, and, for example, the same prize ball as the first starting device 112 (3 ) will be paid out.

In addition, in the area on the right side of the game area 106, there is a normal symbol activation gate 113b having a normal area through which game balls can pass, a first grand prize device 117 into which game balls can enter, and a first grand prize device 117 into which game balls can enter. A second grand prize winning device 127 is provided. When a game ball passes through the normal symbol operating gate 113b, a winning random number and a normal symbol random number are acquired and a winning determination is performed. In addition, even if a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a prize ball based on the passage is not paid out.

The first big prize winning device 117 is a so-called attacker type electric accessory, and has an opening in its lower part and a movable piece 117b above the opening. Similarly to the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115, the movable piece 115b is controlled to be movable between a protruding state in which it protrudes from the game board 102A and a retracted state in which it is drawn into the game board 102A. Then, when the movable piece 117b enters the retracted state, the game ball is guided into the first big prize winning device 117 through the opening, and the game ball becomes able to win in the first big winning device 117 (this state is called "open" or "open"). (also called "open state"). Further, when a game ball enters the first big winning device 117, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out. Conversely, when the movable piece 117b is in the protruding state, the game ball will not enter the opening, and the game ball will not be able to enter the first grand prize winning device 117 (this state is also called "blocked" or "blocked state") ).

The second big prize winning device 127 is a so-called attacker type electric accessory, and has an opening at its lower part and a movable piece 127b above the opening. Similar to the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115 and the movable piece 117b of the first big prize winning device 117, there is a protruding state in which the game ball cannot enter a prize in the second big winning device 127 by protruding from the game board 102A, and a protruding state where the game ball cannot enter a prize in the second big winning device 127. By pulling it into 102A, the game ball is movably controlled to a pulled-in state in which it can win a prize in the second big winning device 127. Further, when a game ball enters the second grand prize winning device 127, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out. Further, above the second big winning device 127, a winning assisting device (not shown) is provided. This winning assist device is configured such that when a plurality of game balls that have passed through the right route 106b of the gaming area 106 pass through the movable piece 127b in a closed state, they stay on the movable piece 127b for a predetermined time, The movable piece 127b is opened at predetermined time intervals to allow a plurality of staying game balls to enter the second grand prize winning device 127 at once, thereby increasing the player's interest.

In addition, at the bottom of the gaming area 106, game balls that have not entered any of the first starting device 112, second starting device 115, first big winning device 117, and second big winning device 127 are discharged. An outlet 111 is provided for this purpose. Further, in the right side area of the game area 106, a cover 116 is provided that covers the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, and the second big winning device 127 from the front side. This cover 116 is formed with a guiding portion that protrudes toward the game board 102A in order to guide the game ball to the second starting device 115, first big winning device 117, and second big winning device 127.

A main display device 131 consisting of a liquid crystal display (LCD) or the like is provided approximately in the center of the gaming area 106, and this main display device 131 displays images during standby when no games are being played. , display images according to the progress of the game. Among them, a plurality of performance symbols for notifying the jackpot determination result are variably displayed based on winning of the game balls of the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115, and a specific combination of performance symbols (for example, 777, etc.) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed stop, a jackpot is notified as a jackpot determination result. In other words, when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, the production pattern changes in the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122, which will be described later. It is displayed in a variable manner in accordance with the display, and is stopped and displayed in accordance with the stop display of the special symbol after a predetermined variable time has elapsed. That is, the timing of the variable display of the performance symbols by the main display device 131 and the variable display of the special symbols by the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 are synchronized. In addition, by displaying various images, characters, etc. during the fluctuating display of this performance symbol, or by displaying a pre-reading performance of the pending display related to the special symbol, you may win the jackpot. It also gives players a sense of expectation. In this embodiment, the main display device 131 is used as a liquid crystal display device, but a plasma display, an organic EL display, a projector, a so-called 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a rotating drum, etc. A display device may also be used.

The main display device 131 is arranged approximately at the center of the game board unit 102, and three effect symbols are displayed in a variable manner, and various effects are displayed. The effects displayed on the main display device 131 are executed based on the effect pattern described later. Hereinafter, the effects displayed on the main display device 131 will also be simply referred to as "display effects." In the display performance on the main display device 131, in the jackpot determination described later, if you win, that is, in the case of a jackpot, three performance symbols are stopped and displayed at the end, and a jackpot symbol array representing a jackpot (for example, " 7,7,7" etc.) is displayed. In addition, in the display performance, if you are unsuccessful in the jackpot determination described later, that is, if you lose, three performance symbols are stopped and displayed at the end, and a losing symbol array (for example, "2, 5 ,1" etc.) is displayed. This allows the player to recognize the result of the jackpot determination.

A display 125 is provided at the lower left side of the gaming area 106. The display 125 includes a normal symbol display 118, a normal symbol pending display 119, a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a first special symbol pending display 123, and a second special symbol display 125. It has a special symbol reservation display 124. Details of the display 125 will be described later.

When the player performs a so-called "left-handed hit" in which the firing handle device 103 is kept rotated at a small rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively weak batting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the left side area in the game area 106. On the other hand, when the player performs a so-called "right-handed hit" in which the firing handle device 103 is kept rotated at a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively strong batting force. In this case, the game ball flows down the right side area in the game area 106. Therefore, when the ball enters the normal symbol activation gate 113b, the second starting device 115, the first big winning device 117, or the second big winning device 127, it is necessary to hit the ball to the right.

The first starting device 112 is a starting device that is always open. On the other hand, the second starter 115 is normally closed by the movable piece 115b. The movable piece 115b opens the second starting device 115 based on the determination result of the hit determination, which is conditioned on the entry of the game ball into the normal symbol activation gate 113b. In this case, a condition is created in which the game ball can easily enter the ball. When the game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, a jackpot random number, various symbol random numbers (jackpot symbol random number, small winning symbol random number, time-saving symbol random number), reach random number, and fluctuation are generated. A pattern random number may be obtained and the following three decisions may be performed. (1) Determining whether or not to execute a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (hereinafter also referred to as jackpot determination). (2) On the display 125, determining a symbol (hereinafter also referred to as a special symbol) indicating whether or not it is a jackpot to notify the result of the jackpot determination (hereinafter also referred to as symbol determination). (3) In the display performance on the main display device 131, determining whether or not to perform reach (hereinafter also referred to as reach determination), and determining which variation pattern to use among multiple variation patterns (hereinafter, also referred to as reach determination). , also called fluctuation pattern determination).

Here, the "jackpot game" is composed of a plurality of round games (for example, 10R), and in each round, the first big prize winning device 117 or the second This is a special game that opens the big winning device 127. However, each round ends when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the first grand prize winning device 117 or the like. Moreover, the "small winning game" is a game in which the first big winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127 is opened in a time (for example, 1.8 seconds) in which a game ball can win a prize. Furthermore, "reach" means that, on the main display device 131, two of the three performance symbols that are variably displayed are displayed in a stopped state, and the two performance symbols are the three performance symbols that constitute the jackpot symbol array. This refers to a situation in which two of these conditions are included. For example, in the main display device 131, two of the three performance symbols that are variably displayed are displayed in a stopped state, and the two performance symbols are in the same state. In this case, the performance symbols that constitute two of the three performance symbols that constitute the jackpot symbol arrangement are also called reach symbols. In addition, in the following explanation, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball that has passed through the first starting device 112 wins is also referred to as "special 1 jackpot determination" or "first special symbol determination", The determination executed on the condition that the game ball wins is also referred to as "special 2 jackpot determination" and "second special symbol determination."

Further, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, a winning random number is obtained, and a determination is made as to whether or not to open the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115. Hereinafter, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b will also be referred to as "hit determination" and "normal symbol determination." In the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, the probability of winning in normal symbol determination, that is, the probability of determining that the movable piece 115b is released, is designed to change depending on the gaming state of the gaming machine 100.

In the first jackpot device 117, the movable piece 117b is opened depending on the result of jackpot determination. The first big winning device 117 is normally closed by this movable piece 117b. On the other hand, when the judgment result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot game is executed in which the movable piece 117b is operated to open the first jackpot prize device 117. Therefore, by performing a "right-handed hit" during a jackpot game, the player can obtain more prize balls than when a jackpot game is not being played. In addition, the movable piece 127b of the second big winning device 127 operates in substantially the same way as the first big winning device 117, and is opened at the time of a jackpot game according to the determination result of the jackpot determination.

(Description of display 125)
The display 125 mainly displays information regarding jackpot symbol determination and normal symbol determination, and includes a first special symbol display 120, a second special symbol display 122, a first special symbol reservation display 123, and a second special symbol reservation. It has a display 124, a normal symbol display 118, and a normal symbol pending display 119. Although the display 125 is not specifically illustrated, it is determined that it is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and each LED corresponds to each of the above-mentioned displays such as the first special symbol display 120. It also has an easy-to-read display.

When the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol display device 120 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying it, and the determined result of the jackpot determination in the first special symbol determination is determined by the stopped and displayed special symbol. Notify. On this first special symbol display 120, as a result of the jackpot determination, a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot or a losing symbol indicating that the result of the first special symbol determination is a loss is displayed in a stopped state. .

When the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol display 122 displays the special symbol in a variable manner and then stops displaying it, and the result of the jackpot determination in the second special symbol determination is determined by the stopped and displayed special symbol. Notify. On this second special symbol display 122, as a result of the jackpot determination, a jackpot symbol indicating a jackpot or a loss symbol indicating that the result of the second special symbol determination is a loss is displayed in a stopped state. .

By the way, in the gaming machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a new game ball enters the first starting device 112, such as during a variable display of special symbols related to special symbol determination or during a jackpot game, the game machine 100 uses this winning as an opportunity to trigger a new game ball. 1. Special symbol determination and symbol variation display are not executed immediately. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 is equipped with a suspension function that suspends the first special symbol determination and stores four pieces of random number information for the first special symbol determination as one set of suspension information. The first special symbol reservation display 123 displays the number of reservation information for the first special symbol determination stored in this way (first reservation number). Similarly, the gaming machine 100 suspends the second special symbol determination when a new game ball enters the second starting device 115, such as during a variable display of special symbols related to special symbol determination or during a jackpot game. It also has a hold function that stores four pieces of random number information for determining the second special symbol as a set of hold information. The second special symbol reservation display 124 displays the number of reservation information for second special symbol determination stored in this way (second reservation number).

When the normal symbol determination is performed, the normal symbol display 118 displays the regular symbols in a variable manner and then stops displaying them, and notifies the result of the hit determination using the stopped and displayed normal symbols. By the way, even if the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, such as during the variable display of the normal symbols on the normal symbol display 118, the normal symbol determination and the variable display of the normal symbols related to the normal symbol determination may not be executed immediately. It has become. Therefore, the gaming machine 100 is equipped with a suspension function that suspends the normal symbol determination and stores information on the normal symbol random number for the normal symbol determination as suspension information. The normal symbol reservation display 119 displays the number of reservation information for normal symbol determination stored in this way.

Note that the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment includes a right-handed ramp (not shown) and a round ramp (not shown). The right-handed lamp lights up during a jackpot game state (to be described later) and a time-saving game state (to be described later), and recommends that the player play right-handed (details will be described later). The round lamp is composed of two or more lamps, and changes from an unlit state to a lit state when a jackpot is won. The round lamp, when lit, indicates the number of round games according to the type of jackpot at the time of jackpot. For example, if there are two round lamps, one round lamp lights up to indicate that the round game will be played three times (in other words, it is a 3R jackpot), and the other round lamp lights up. By lighting up, it is suggested that the round game will be played 10 times (that is, it is suggested that there is a 10R jackpot).

(Internal configuration of gaming machine 100)
The internal configuration of gaming machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 300. FIG. 300 is a diagram showing functional blocks of the gaming machine 100. The gaming machine 100 includes a main control board 300, a payout control board 310, an effect control board 320, an image control board 330, a lamp control board 340, a firing control board 350, and a power supply board 360.

As shown in FIG. 300, the main control board 300 controls the basic operations of the gaming machine. The main control board 300 includes a one-chip microcomputer 301. The one-chip microcomputer 301 includes a main CPU 301a, a main ROM 301b, and a main RAM 301c. The main control board 300 also includes an input port and an output port (both not shown) for main control.

This main control input port includes a gate detection switch 303 that detects when a game ball enters the normal symbol activation gate 113b, and a first start switch 303 that detects that a game ball enters the first starter device 112. A device detection switch 304, a second starting device detection switch 305 that detects that a game ball has entered the second starting device 115, and a first winning device that detects that a gaming ball has entered the first big winning device 117. A detection switch 306a, a second winning device detection switch 306b that detects that a game ball has entered the second big winning device 127, and a payout control board 310 are connected. Various signals are input to the main control board 300 through this input port for main control.

In addition, the output port for main control includes symbol displays 118, 120, 122 that display special symbols and normal symbols that open and close the movable piece 115b, etc., the number of pending information for special symbol determination, and normal symbol determination. Symbol reservation display devices 119, 123, and 124 that display the number of reservation information for the game, a game information output terminal board 309 that outputs an external information signal, a payout control board 310, and an effect control board 320 are connected. Various signals are output from the main control board 300 through this main control output port.

Note that the game information output terminal board 309 is a board for outputting external information signals generated in the main control board 300 to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like. The game information output terminal board 309 is connected to the main control board 300 by wiring, and the game information output terminal board 309 is provided with a connector for connection to a hall computer of a game parlor or the like.

In the one-chip microcomputer 301 of the main control board 300, the main CPU 301a reads out programs stored in the main ROM 301b and performs arithmetic processing based on input signals from each detection switch and timer, and also directly controls each device. , or send commands to other boards according to the results of arithmetic processing.

In addition, on the front side of the main control board 110, there is an RWM ( (RAM) clear switch 302a, a setting key switch 302b for inputting a signal to move to a setting change mode or setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, and a setting key switch 302b for displaying a base value B and setting values that enable grasping the actual performance of the gaming machine. An information display 302c and other electronic components are mounted.

The information display 302c, which will be described in detail later, is composed of four 7-segment displays (302ca to 302cd) arranged in the left-right direction. These four 7-segment displays 302ca to 302cd display setting values to be described later and a base value B in the normal gaming state. In addition, when displaying the base value B, dynamic lighting is performed, and when displaying a 2-digit set value, static lighting is performed on the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd from the right. There is.

The payout control board 310 controls the launch of game balls and the payout of prize balls. This payout control board 310 includes a one-chip microcomputer including a payout CPU, payout ROM, and payout RAM (not shown), and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. The payout CPU reads out the program stored in the payout ROM and performs calculation processing based on input signals from the payout ball measurement switch 311, the door release switch 312, and the timer, which detect whether or not game balls have been paid out. At the same time, based on the processing, corresponding data is transmitted to the main control board 300. Also, connected to the output side of the payout control board 310 is a payout motor 313 of a prize ball payout device for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls from the game ball storage section to the player. The payout CPU reads a predetermined program from the payout ROM and performs arithmetic processing based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300, and also controls the payout motor 313 of the prize ball payout device to issue a predetermined prize. Dispense the ball to the player. At this time, the payout RAM functions as a data work area during calculation processing by the payout CPU.

The performance control board 320 mainly controls each display performance during gaming, standby, and the like. This production control board 320 is equipped with a sub CPU 320a, a sub ROM 320b, and a sub RAM 320c, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in one direction from the main control board 300 to the production control board 320. . The sub CPU 320a reads out programs stored in the sub ROM 320b based on various commands received from the main control board 300, various units, production operation stick 136, sword hilt button detection switch 137, and input signals from the timer. It performs arithmetic processing and transmits corresponding data to the image control board 330 and lamp control board 340 based on the processing. Note that the production control board 320 controls the volume of production sound output from the audio output device 331, display devices (main display device, first side display device, second side display device, etc.) and various lighting devices (production lighting). A changeover switch 22 is provided for switching an adjustment mode related to adjustment of the light amount of a device, etc.).

For example, upon receiving a fluctuation start command from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 320a displays the main display device 131, the first side display device 132, the second side display device 133, the audio output device 331, the sword handle unit 135, and the upper unit 180. , determines a production pattern for causing the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, the accessory mechanism section 158, the light guide panel unit 181, the lighting device 342, etc. for execution of the game performance, and executes the performance pattern. A production pattern designation command to be executed is transmitted to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Details regarding the determination of this performance pattern will be described later. Further, the sub ROM 320b stores programs for performance control, data necessary for determining various games, and a plurality of tables. Details about these tables will be described later. Furthermore, the sub RAM 320c functions as a work area for data during arithmetic processing by the sub CPU 320a, and stores game states, performance patterns, performance symbols, counting counters, firing operation information, and the like. Note that the sub-RAM 320c is provided with a plurality of storage areas. Details of these storage areas will be described later.

The image control board 330 includes an image CPU (not shown), a control ROM, a control RAM, a CGROM, a VRAM, a VDP (not shown) for controlling the image display of the main display device 131, an audio CPU, an audio ROM, and an audio RAM. . This image control board 330 is connected to the production control board 320 so as to be able to communicate bidirectionally, and has a main display device 131, a first side display device 132, a second side display device 133, and an audio output on its output side. A device 331 is connected. Further, the image CPU controls the VDP to display a predetermined image based on commands received from the production control board 320. The control RAM functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the image CPU, and temporarily stores data read from the control ROM. The control ROM also stores programs for control processing of the image CPU, animation patterns for displaying animations based on production patterns, animation scene information, and the like. The CGROM stores a large amount of image data such as production patterns and backgrounds to be displayed on the main display device 131 etc., and the image CPU executes a predetermined program based on production pattern designation commands sent from the production control board 320. At the same time, predetermined image data stored in the CGROM is developed in the VRAM, and the image data developed in the VRAM is controlled to be displayed on the main display device 131 or the like, thereby realizing a display effect. The audio ROM stores a large amount of audio data to be output from the audio output device 331, and the audio CPU reads out a predetermined program based on the performance pattern designation command sent from the performance control board 320. Audio output is controlled in the audio output devices 331 such as speakers provided in the glass frame 150, the first side display device 132, and the second side display device 133 to realize audio production.

The lamp control board 340 controls various movable accessories (such as LEDs), the sword handle unit 135 (button drive device, button light emitting LED), and the light guide panel unit 181, and the lamp built in the firing handle device 103. Control of the performance lighting device 342 such as a lamp as a decorative member provided on the glass frame 150 is executed. Specifically, the lamp control board 340 drives and controls the motors and the like provided in each of the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, the upper accessory unit 154, the lower accessory unit 156, and the accessory mechanism section 158. By doing so, it is possible to realize a movable performance using the unit's movable accessories (movable objects). In addition, the lamp control board 340 controls the light emitting LEDs of various movable accessories and the light emitting parts of the light guide panel unit 181 to realize a light emitting effect by the light guide plate panel, and to turn on/off the lighting device 342 for effect. By controlling the blinking, an illumination effect by the effect lighting device 342 is realized. Note that the lamp control board 340 is connected to be able to receive predetermined signals from the sword handle unit 135, the upper unit 180, and the like.

The firing control board 350 inputs touch signals from the touch sensor 351 provided on the firing handle device 103 and controls energization of the firing solenoid 353 and the ball feeding solenoid 354 based on the voltage supplied from the firing volume 352. I do. The touch sensor 351 is composed of a capacitive proximity switch that utilizes a change in capacitance caused by the player touching the firing handle device 103, and when it detects that the player has touched the firing handle device 103, , outputs a touch signal to the firing control board 350 to permit energization of the firing solenoid 353. The firing volume 352 is composed of a variable resistor, divides a constant voltage (for example, 5 V) applied to the firing volume 352 by the variable resistor, and supplies the divided voltage to the firing control board 350. Here, the rotational speed of the firing solenoid 353 is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control board 350. As a result, the number of game balls fired per minute is approximately 99.9 (balls/minute) because one game ball is fired every time the firing solenoid rotates once. That is, one game ball is fired approximately every 0.6 seconds. Note that the touch signal from the touch sensor 351 and the voltage signal from the firing volume 352 are input to the production control board 320. Thereby, the performance control board 320 can detect the firing of the game ball.

The power supply board 360 includes a backup power supply made of a capacitor, and supplies power supply voltage to the gaming machine 100. Specifically, power supply voltage is supplied to the main control board 300, the payout control board 310, the production control board 320, and the firing control board 350. It also monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 100 and outputs a power failure detection signal to the main control board 300 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal goes to a high level, the main CPU 301a becomes operational, and when the power interruption detection signal goes to a low level, the main CPU 301a goes into a non-operational state. Note that the backup power source is not limited to a capacitor, but may be a battery, for example, or a combination of a capacitor and a battery may be used.

(Electrical configuration of main control board 300)
The electrical configuration of the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 301 to 304. FIG. 301 is a diagram for explaining the main ROM 301b of the main control board 300. FIG. 302 is a diagram showing an example of the jackpot/hit determination table T1. FIG. 303 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol determination table T2. FIG. 304 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the main RAM 301c of the main control board 300.

As shown in FIG. 301, the main ROM 301b stores game control programs and tables necessary for various games, such as a jackpot/hit determination table T1, a symbol determination table T2, and a reach determination table T3. , a first variation pattern table T4, and a second variation pattern table T5 are stored.

The jackpot/hit determination table T1 is a table for making a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random number, and the result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 120 is determined by the jackpot, small hit, time saving 4 described later. (time-saving game state 4), the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A is referred to when determining whether to lose or not (jackpot lottery), and the result of stopping the fluctuation of the special symbols on the second special symbol display 122 is determined. It includes a special 2 jackpot determination table T1B that is referred to when playing the game, and a hit determination table T1C that is referred to in the hit determination that determines whether or not the result of stopping the variation of the normal symbol is a win. In addition, in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B in the jackpot/hit determination table T1, different jackpot random numbers are set according to multiple setting values, and the probability of being judged as a jackpot is the set value. Each has a different configuration. Specifically, for example, in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A, the setting value is set in four stages from "1" to "4", and when the setting value is "1", the probability of being judged as a jackpot is Approximately 1/300, if the setting value is "2", it will be approximately 1/290, if the setting value is "3", it will be approximately 1/280, and if the setting value is "4", it will be approximately 1/270. is set to . Also, in the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, the setting value is set in four stages from "1" to "4", and when the setting value is "1", the probability of being judged as a jackpot is about 1/30. , when the setting value is "2", it is approximately 1/29, when the setting value is "3", it is approximately 1/28, and when the setting value is "4", it is approximately 1/27. There is. Note that when these setting values are displayed on the information display 302c, they will be displayed as "01" to "04" on the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd.

The symbol determination table T2 is a table that is referred to when determining stop symbols such as special symbols on the symbol display 125 based on the jackpot symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the time-saving symbol random number, and the normal symbol random number. , a jackpot symbol determination table, a small winning symbol determination table, a loss symbol determination table, a time saving symbol determination table, and a normal symbol determination table. Details of these decision tables will be described later.

The reach determination table T3 is a table that is referred to when making a reach determination based on the reach determination random number. The reach determination table T3 includes various tables that can be selected depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol, such as special 1 normal time reach determination table, special 2 time saving reach determination table, etc. Specifically, for example, the special 1 normal reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute a reach in the display performance based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the normal gaming state, The special 2 time-saving time reach determination table is a table for selecting whether or not to execute the reach with the display performance based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2. In addition, details of various gaming states such as non-probability variable gaming state and probability variable gaming state will be described later.

The first fluctuation pattern table T4 is a table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number, and has an average fluctuation number of seconds (average performance time) shorter than the second fluctuation pattern table T5, This table is selected when the hold order information at the time of acquisition, which will be described later, is "3" or "4". The first fluctuation pattern table T4 includes four fluctuation pattern tables, namely, the first special first normal time fluctuation pattern table T4A, the first special first probability variable time fluctuation pattern table T4B, and the first special second normal time fluctuation pattern table T4C. and a first special second probability time varying pattern table T4D. These four variable pattern tables can be selected depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the first special first normal time variation pattern table T4A is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The first special first probability variable time variation pattern table T4B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variable gaming state. The first special second normal time variation pattern table T4C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The first special second probability variable time variation pattern table T4D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variable gaming state.

The second fluctuation pattern table T5 is a table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation pattern random number, and has a longer average fluctuation number of seconds than the first fluctuation pattern table T4, and is in the order of reservation at the time of acquisition, which will be described later. This table is selected when the information is "1" or "2". The second fluctuation pattern table T5 includes four fluctuation pattern tables, namely, a second special first normal time fluctuation pattern table T5A, a second special first probability variable time fluctuation pattern table T5B, and a second special second normal time fluctuation pattern table T5C. and a second special 2-probability time-varying pattern table T5D. These four variable pattern tables can be selected depending on the gaming state and the type of special symbol. Specifically, the second special first normal time variation pattern table T5A is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The second special first probability variable time variation pattern table T5B is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 in the probability variable gaming state. The second special second normal time variation pattern table T5C is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in a non-probability variable gaming state. The second special second probability variable time variation pattern table T5D is a table for selecting a variation pattern of the second special symbol based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 in the probability variable gaming state.

Note that one of the first variation pattern table T4 and the second variation pattern table T5 is selected at the time of variation pattern determination, and they are not selected at the same time. Moreover, these first variation pattern table T4 and second variation pattern table T5 have various variation patterns. Specifically, these include pseudo-continuous performance, normal loss performance, normal reach (loss or win) performance, SP reach (loss or win) performance (development performance after execution of reach formation performance), and SPSP reach (loss or win) performance ( A variation that combines various effects, such as a development effect after the execution of the SP reach effect), a SPSP reach revival (hit) effect, a effect in which a losing pattern sequence is formed, and a effect in which a jackpot pattern pattern is formed with a specific pattern. It's a pattern. Here, pseudo-continuous performance (or pseudo-continuous variation performance) means that during the variable display of the special symbol, the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner, the performance symbol is temporarily stopped, and then the performance symbol is displayed in a variable manner again. This is a performance that repeats the display of fluctuations in a pseudo manner. In this case, in the pseudo continuous performance, the performance symbols are temporarily stopped, but the present invention is not limited to this. Even if the performance symbols are slowed down without temporarily stopping, and then the performance symbols are displayed in a variable manner. good.

Here, various game states in this embodiment will be explained. First, there are "low probability state (non-probability variable gaming state)" and "high probability state (probable variable gaming state)" as states related to jackpot determination, and "non-time-saving gaming" as states related to opening and closing of the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115. state" and "time-saving game state." Therefore, in this embodiment, the "low probability non-time saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" is a low probability state and a non-time saving gaming state; 2/time-saving gaming state 3/time-saving gaming state 4)" and "high-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 1)" which is a high probability state and time-saving state, and the details will be described later. Note that the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 100 is set to the "normal gaming state", and will be set to the "normal gaming state" even during a jackpot game, but if the jackpot game is not executed. Therefore, the game state is different from the normal game state.

First of all, the "low probability state (non-probability variable gaming state)" means, for example, when the setting value (jackpot probability), which is the stage of the advantage of the game as described above, is "1", the first In the jackpot determination that is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, it refers to a gaming state in which the jackpot probability is set as low as about 1/300. On the other hand, "high probability state (probability variable gaming state)" means that if the setting value is "1" as mentioned above, the jackpot probability is set as high as about 1/30, and it is low. A gaming state that is advantageous to the player compared to a probability state. Note that the transition from the low probability state to the high probability state is performed after the end of the jackpot game.

Next, the "non-time-saving gaming state" means that the winning probability is set as low as 1/20 in the normal symbol determination that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, and the normal symbol fluctuations. This refers to a gaming state in which the average display time is set to about 30 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting device 115 in the case of a win is set to 0.180 seconds. On the other hand, in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in normal symbol judgment is set as high as 19/20, the average time of fluctuating display of normal symbols is set to about 3 seconds, and By setting the opening time of the second starting device 115 to 3 to 6 seconds, it is easier for game balls to enter the second starting device 115 compared to the "non-time saving gaming state", so consumption of game balls can be suppressed. A gaming state that is advantageous to a player who has In addition, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting device 115, and the winning probability are set to be more advantageous in the "time-saving gaming state" than in the "non-time-saving gaming state," but the normal symbols Only one of the average fluctuation time of , the opening time of the second starter 115, and the winning probability may be set to be advantageous. Further, although the winning probability in the "non-time-saving gaming state" is 1/20, the winning probability may be set to 0/20 so that no winning is determined. In such a case, the auxiliary game will not be executed in the "non-time-saving game state" and the game ball will not enter the second starting device 115 (win).

As shown in FIG. 302(a-1), in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A, the determination results of jackpot determination in each state of low probability state and high probability state based on the ball entering the first starter 112 (jackpot, A jackpot random number value corresponding to a small win, a time saver of 4, and a loss is set. The details will be described later, but for example, if you win the jackpot in the jackpot judgment, the jackpot symbol (special symbol A1, etc.) will be displayed, and if you win the small prize, the small prize symbol (special symbol K) will be displayed, and the time saving 4 will be displayed. If you win, a time-saving symbol (special symbol J1) suggesting a shift to time-saving game state 4, which will be described later, is displayed, and if you lose, a losing symbol (special symbol H) is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 302(a-2), in the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, the determination results of jackpot determination in each state of low probability state and high probability state based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 (jackpot, A jackpot random number value corresponding to a small win, a time saver of 4, and a loss is set. Note that although the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 and the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 have the same jackpot winning probability, the small winning winning probability and the time saving 4 The winning probabilities are now different. In addition, in the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, it is possible to win the time saving 4 in a low probability state, but it is not possible to win the time saving 4 in a high probability state.

Here, the jackpot determination will be described with reference to the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B. First, the main CPU 301a of this embodiment refers to the gaming state (low probability state or high probability state) of the game ball at the time of winning, and changes the gaming state in each of the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A and the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B. Select the corresponding table. Next, the main CPU 301a generates a jackpot random number (the random number range is from "0" to "598") that is obtained when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 as described above. , and the settings of the special 1 jackpot determination table T1A or the special 2 jackpot determination table T1B, and if they match, it is determined that a jackpot, small win, or time saving 4 has been won, and if they do not match, , it is judged as a loss. In addition, in the jackpot judgment with reference to the special 1 jackpot judgment table T1A and the special 2 jackpot judgment table T1B, even if the above-mentioned setting value is "1" to "4", the probability of winning a small hit, The probability of winning Time Saving 4 is the same probability.

As shown in FIG. 302(b), in the hit determination table T1C, the determination results (win, loss) of the hit determination in each state of the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b. The winning random number value corresponding to is set. Here, the hit determination with reference to the hit determination table T1C will be explained. First, the main CPU 301a of this embodiment refers to the gaming state (non-time-saving gaming state or time-saving gaming state) when the game ball wins, and selects a table corresponding to each gaming state in the hit determination table T1C. Next, the main CPU 301a inputs the winning random number (the random number range is from "0" to "19") obtained when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b as described above, and the winning determination table T1C. The settings are compared, and if they match, it is determined to be a win or a loss.

As shown in FIG. 303, the symbol determination table T2 includes a jackpot symbol determination table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol (jackpot symbol) when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination, and a jackpot symbol determination table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol (jackpot symbol) when a jackpot is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination. The small winning symbol determination table is referred to when determining the stopping symbol (small winning symbol) when the jackpot is determined to be a loss, and the small winning symbol determination table is referred to when determining the stopping symbol (losing symbol) when the jackpot judgment is determined to be a loss. It includes a loss symbol determination table and a time-saving symbol determination table that is referred to when determining a stop symbol (time-saving symbol) when a time-saving symbol 4 is determined in the jackpot determination. In addition, there is a normal symbol determination table It also includes a normal symbol determination table Y that is referred to when determining (losing symbols).

As shown in FIG. 303(a-1), in the jackpot symbol determination table, the one for the first special symbol is referred to when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112. and a second special symbol that is referred to when it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the second starting device 115. Here, symbol determination with reference to the jackpot symbol determination table will be explained. First, in the main CPU 301a of this embodiment, in response to winning of a game ball to the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, one of the first special symbol or second special symbol in the jackpot symbol determination table is selected. Select one of the tables. Next, the main CPU 301a generates a jackpot symbol random number (the random number range is from "0" to "99") that is obtained when the game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 as described above. and the settings of the jackpot symbol determination table. In addition, the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol designation command that can specify stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of variation of the special symbol.

Specifically, for example, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination and the jackpot symbol random number acquired at the time of winning to the first starting device 112 is "0" to "59", the main CPU 301a selects "01 ( By determining the special symbol A1), the special symbol A1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 120, and "E0H" and "01H" are generated as performance symbol designation commands. For example, if it is determined to be a jackpot in the jackpot determination and the jackpot symbol random number acquired at the time of winning to the second starting device 115 is "70" to "99", the main CPU 301a will set "05 (special symbol)" as the stop symbol. B2)", the special symbol B2 is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 122, and "E1H" and "02H" are generated as production symbol designation commands. In this way, after the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the display 125, the first probability variable length, first probability variable short, first normal length, second probability variable length, and second probability variable length corresponding to each special symbol are displayed on the display 125. 2. A jackpot game such as a normal long win is started. As mentioned above, a jackpot game consists of multiple round games, and a long win (for example, 10R) is made up of a larger number of rounds than a short win (for example, 3R). The total open time of the first big prize winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127 is large.

As shown in FIG. 303(a-2), in the small hit symbol determination table, the first special symbol is used when a small hit is determined in the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112. and a second special symbol that is referred to when a small hit is determined in the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the second starting device 115. Here, symbol determination with reference to the small winning symbol determination table will be explained. First, in the main CPU 301a of the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, in response to the winning of a game ball to the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, the first special symbol or the second Select one of the tables for special figures. Next, the main CPU 301a generates a small winning symbol random number (the random number range is a number from "0" to "99") that is obtained when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 as described above. ) and the settings of the jackpot symbol determination table. In addition, the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol designation command that can specify stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of variation of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, even if it is determined to be a small hit in the jackpot determination and the small winning symbol random number acquired at the time of winning to the first starting device 112 is any of "0" to "99", the main CPU 301a will stop the symbol. By determining "11 (special symbol K)" as "11 (special symbol K)", the special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 120, and "E0H" and "0AH" are generated as production symbol designation commands. . In this way, after the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the display 125, the small winning game is started.

As shown in FIG. 303 (a-3), in the loss pattern determination table, the one for the first special symbol is referred to when it is determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112. and a second special symbol to be referred to when the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the second starting device 115 is determined to be a loss. Here, symbol determination with reference to the losing symbol determination table will be explained. First, in the main CPU 301a of this embodiment, in response to the winning of a game ball to the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, one of the first special symbols or the second special symbols in the losing symbol determination table is selected. Select one of the tables to determine the stopping symbol. In addition, the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol designation command that can specify stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of variation of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, if it is determined that the jackpot determination based on winning the first starting device 112 is a loss, the main CPU 301a determines "00 (special symbol H)" as the stop symbol, and the first The special symbol K is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display 120, and "E0H" and "00H" are generated as production symbol designation commands.

As shown in FIG. 303 (a-4), the time saving symbol determination table is referred to when it is determined that the time saving symbol is 4 in the jackpot determination based on the ball entering the first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115. The first starting device 112 and the second starting device 115 are set in common. Here, symbol determination with reference to the time-saving symbol determination table will be explained. The main CPU 301a of this embodiment corresponds to the time-saving symbol random number (the random number range is from "0" to "99") obtained based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115. to determine the stopping symbol. In addition, the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol designation command that can specify stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of variation of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, when it is determined that the time is 4 in the jackpot determination, and the jackpot symbol random number obtained when winning the first starting device 112 is between "0" and "70", the main CPU 301a selects "21" as the stop symbol. (Special symbol J1)", the special symbol J1 is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 120, and "E0H" and "11H" are generated as production symbol designation commands. In this way, after the special symbols are stopped and displayed on the display 125, the game state shifts to the time-saving game state 4, as described later, and the time-saving game is started.

At this time, more specifically, for example, the first special symbol display 120 displays a variable display for about 40,000 ms, and the main display device 131 shifts to the time-saving gaming state 4 after a normal reach effect, which will be described later, is executed. is notified, or after a predetermined time-saving transition effect of approximately 40,000 ms (a presentation in which the transition to time-saving game state 4 is notified) is executed on the main display device 131, the time-saving game state 4 is shifted to. You can do it like this. Further, for example, the first special symbol display 120 displays a variable display for about 60,000 ms, and the main display device 131 switches to the time-saving gaming state 4 after the normal reach performance and SP reach performance (loss), which will be described later, are executed. After the transition is notified or a predetermined time-saving transition effect of about 60,000 ms (a presentation in which the transition to the time-saving game state 4 is notified) is executed on the main display device 131, the time-saving game state 4 is transferred. You may.

As shown in FIGS. 303 (b-1) and (b-2), in the normal symbol determination table In the normal symbol determination table Y, the symbol to be referred to when a loss is determined in the hit determination based on the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol activation gate 113b is set. Note that these normal symbol determination tables are common in various gaming states. Here, symbol determination with reference to the normal symbol determination table will be explained. The main CPU 301a of this embodiment selects either the normal symbol determination table The stopping symbol is determined by comparing it with the normal symbol random number (the random number range is from "0" to "10") obtained based on the passage. In addition, the main CPU 301a generates an effect symbol designation command that can specify stop symbol data (type of special symbol) at the start of variation of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, if it is determined to be a hit in the hit determination and the normal symbol random number acquired when the game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b is "2" to "10", the main CPU 301a selects the stop symbol as a stop symbol. By determining "02 (short open symbol)", the short open symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 118, and "E8H" and "02H" are generated as production symbol designation commands. In this way, after the special symbols (long open symbol, short open symbol, losing symbol) are stopped and displayed on the display 125, the second starting device 115 corresponding to each special symbol is opened or not opened. Ru. Note that a long opening (for example, 6 seconds) is a state in which the second starting device 115 is opened for a longer time than a short opening (for example, 3 seconds), and a failure is a state in which the second starting device 115 is opened for a longer time than a short opening (for example, 3 seconds). 115 is not opened.

As shown in FIG. 304(A), the main RAM 301c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing by the main CPU 301a, and has a plurality of storage areas, such as a pending information storage area 301cx, which will be described later, It has a pending information determination area 301cy, which is a determination area where symbol determination is executed based on the pending information. Further, the main RAM 301c has a storage area (not shown) in which various flags (such as a high accuracy flag, time saving flag, and jackpot flag to be described later) and various recorded values are stored.

As shown in FIG. 304(B), the hold information storage area 301cx includes four hold information areas (first hold information area, second pending information area, third pending information area, fourth pending information area), and four pending information areas (first pending information area, second pending information area) that can store pending information related to the second starting device 115. A pending information area, a third pending information area, and a fourth pending information area) are provided. In the reservation information area corresponding to the first special symbol of the reservation information storage area 301cx, the priority order for storing reservation information is that the first reservation information area is given the highest priority and the reservation information is stored in the first reservation information area. If stored, then the second pending information area is given priority as a storage target, then the third pending information area is given priority as a storage target, and finally, the fourth pending information area is given priority as a storage target. selected. The same applies to the reservation information area corresponding to the second special symbol. Regarding whether or not pending information is stored, "〇" is indicated in the pending information area where pending information is stored, and "-" is indicated in the pending information area where pending information is not stored. has been done. Further, the reservation order information at the time of acquisition stored in the reservation information area of the reservation information storage area 301cx is information representing the reservation order when the reservation information is acquired. Specifically, the hold order information at the time of acquisition corresponds to the number of the hold information area that is stored when hold information is acquired. For example, when hold information is acquired, if the hold information is stored only in the first hold information area, the hold information will be stored in the second hold information area, so the hold information will be stored in the hold order at the time of acquisition. The information becomes "2". When the hold information is acquired, if the hold information is stored in the first hold information area, the second hold information area, and the third hold information area, the hold information is stored in the fourth hold information area. Since it will be stored, the reservation order information at the time of acquisition will be "4". In other words, in FIG. 304(B), when the third hold information is acquired, the hold information is already stored in the second hold information area and the third hold information area, and the hold information for the third hold information is already stored in the second hold information area and the third hold information area. The information is stored in the first pending information area, and the fourth pending information is stored in the fourth pending information area.

(Electrical configuration of production control board 320)
The electrical configuration of the production control board 320 will be described with reference to FIGS. 305 and 306. FIG. 305 is a block diagram showing details of the production control board 320. FIG. 306 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 provided in the sub-RAM 320c. The production control board 320 determines a production pattern based on the commands (including variable patterns, etc.) sent from the main control board 300, and sends a production pattern designation command based on the production pattern to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340. Send. As described above, the main display device 131 and the like are electrically connected to the image control board 330, and the sword handle unit 135 and the like are electrically connected to the lamp control board 340. With this configuration, the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340 can execute display effects, audio effects, lighting effects, and movable character effects based on the effect pattern designation command sent from the effect control board 320. becomes possible.

As shown in FIG. 305, the sub ROM 320b stores a basic display performance specification table TS1, a performance symbol determination table TS2, and a chance up determination table TS3. The basic display performance specification table TS1 is based on the fluctuation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300, and displays the above-mentioned normal loss performance, normal reach (loss or win) performance, SP reach (loss or win) performance, and SPSP reach (loss or win) performance. This is a table for specifying any one of the performance (win) performance, SPSP reach revival (win) performance, etc., as the basic performance in the display performance (hereinafter also referred to as the basic display performance). In this embodiment, the variation pattern transmitted from the main control board 300 and the basic display performance have a one-to-one correspondence. Note that a plurality of basic display performances may be made to correspond to the fluctuation patterns, and the sub CPU 320a of the performance control board 320 may select the basic display performance by lottery. In this way, even if the variation pattern is the same, the content of the performance can be changed. Further, one basic display performance may be made to correspond to a plurality of variation patterns. The performance symbol determination table TS2 is a table for determining a combination of performance symbols to be temporarily stopped and displayed as a fixed stop, and a ready-to-win symbol in the case of executing a reach in the display performance based on the performance pattern. The chance-up determination table TS3 is a table for determining a predetermined chance-up effect in the display effect. Here, the chance-up performance is a performance that executes a display performance that is different from the normal performance to increase the expectation level of a jackpot compared to the normal performance.

As shown in FIG. 306, the sub-RAM 320c is provided with a reservation storage area 320c1 and a preliminary determination information storage area 320c3. The sub-RAM 320c also has a flag storage area (not shown) in which predetermined flags (continuous execution effect flag, pseudo continuous effect execution flag, etc.) are stored. The reservation storage area 320c1 includes a first reservation area, a second reservation area, a third reservation area, and a fourth reservation area corresponding to the first special symbol, and a first reservation area, a second reservation area corresponding to the second special symbol It is divided into eight areas: a reservation area, a third reservation area, and a fourth reservation area, and one reservation flag can be stored in each area. In the reservation area corresponding to the first special symbol of the reservation storage area 320c1, the priority order for storing reservation flags is that the first reservation area is given the highest priority and is the storage target, and the reservation flag is not stored in the first reservation area. For example, next, the second reservation area is selected as a storage target with priority, then the third reservation area is selected as a storage target with priority, and finally, the fourth reservation area is selected as a storage target. The same applies to the reservation area corresponding to the second special symbol. When the production control board 320 receives a hold command from the main control board 300, it specifies the hold area in which the hold flag is stored in the hold storage area 320c1, and selects a hold area that should be stored preferentially next to the hold area. Store the pending flag in . However, if the hold command is received while the hold flag is stored in the fourth hold area, the hold flag is not stored. Furthermore, the priority order for erasing the pending flags is the opposite of the priority order for storing them, that is, the fourth pending area is given the highest priority and is targeted for deletion, and if no pending flags are stored in the fourth pending area. Next, the third reservation area is selected as a priority deletion target, then the second reservation area is prioritized as a deletion target, and finally, the first reservation area is selected as a deletion target. When the production control board 320 receives the symbol confirmation command from the main control board 300, it specifies the reservation area in which the reservation flag is stored in the reservation storage area 320c1, and erases the reservation flag in the reservation area that should be erased preferentially. . Note that if the suspension flag is not stored in the first reservation area, the deletion process is not performed.

The advance determination information storage area 320c3 is a storage area for storing advance determination information (special symbols for advance determination, variation patterns for advance determination, and reservation order information at the time of acquisition). , four storage areas (a first storage area, a second storage area, a third storage area, and a fourth storage area) are provided. In addition, each storage area includes a jackpot judgment information column that stores jackpot judgment information based on the special symbol for preliminary judgment, a jackpot symbol information column that stores jackpot symbol information based on the preliminary judgment symbol, and a jackpot symbol information column that stores jackpot judgment information based on the special symbol for preliminary judgment. A variable pattern information column that stores variable pattern information based on the pattern, a pending order information column at the time of acquisition that stores information about the pending order at the time of acquisition, and continuous performance presence/absence information that stores continuous performance presence/absence information indicating whether or not continuous performance is activated. A column is provided. Note that the continuous performance presence/absence information includes continuous performance activation information and continuous performance non-activation information.

The hold command transmitted from the main control board 300 includes preliminary determination information (a special symbol for preliminary determination, a variation pattern for preliminary determination, and reservation order information at the time of acquisition). The preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 stores these pieces of preliminary determination information in association with each other. In the storage area for the first special symbol, the priority order for storing advance determination information is that the first storage area is given the highest priority and is to be stored, and if the advance determination information is stored in the first storage area, then The second storage area is selected as a storage target with priority, then the third storage area is selected as a storage target with priority, and finally, the fourth storage area is selected as a storage target. The same applies to the storage area for the second special symbol. For example, in a state where the preliminary determination information has already been stored in the third storage area of the first special symbol, the preliminary determination information of the new first special symbol (specific symbol A, variation pattern 7B, pending order information at the time of acquisition "4") is added. ") (see FIG. 306), store information representing "4" in the reservation order information column at acquisition in the fourth storage area, and store "variation pattern 7B" in the variation pattern information column of the fourth storage area. ", information representing "specific symbol A" is stored in the jackpot symbol information field of the fourth storage area, and information representing "jackpot" is stored in the jackpot determination information field of the fourth storage area.

In addition, in FIG. 306, as the preliminary determination information of the first storage area related to the first special symbol, the information of "Lose" is in the jackpot determination information column, the information of "None" is in the jackpot symbol information column, and the information of "None" is in the fluctuation pattern information column. , and information indicating "3" is stored in the acquisition hold order information column. As the preliminary judgment information in the second storage area, the information of "Loss" in the jackpot judgment information column, the information of "None" in the jackpot symbol information column, and the information of "variation pattern 2AX" in the variation pattern information column, at the time of acquisition. Information representing "1" is stored in each pending order information column. As the preliminary determination information in the third storage area, the information of "Loss" in the jackpot determination information column, the information of "None" in the jackpot symbol information column, and the information of "variable pattern 4BX" in the variable pattern information column, at the time of acquisition. Information representing "2" is stored in each pending order information column. Further, in the continuous performance presence/absence information column, continuous performance activation information indicating whether or not to execute a continuous performance is stored in a prefetch process described later. In addition, in the continuous performance presence/absence information column corresponding to the fourth storage area related to the first special symbol, "〇" is shown as continuous performance activation information, which is information indicating the activation of continuous performance, and in the other storage areas, "-" is shown as continuous performance non-activation information, which is information indicating that continuous performance is not activated.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, with reference to FIG. 307, the transition of the game state as the game progresses will be explained. FIG. 307 is a diagram illustrating the transition of gaming states.

As shown in FIG. 307, in the gaming machine 100 of this embodiment, like the conventional gaming machine, the transition is from the "normal gaming state" to the "time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 1)" via the "jackpot game". ((A) → (2)), and in the "Time-saving gaming state (Time-saving gaming state 1 or Time-saving gaming state 2)", when the jackpot determination process determines a jackpot, the "Jackpot game" is executed (( (c)), and on the other hand, if the jackpot is not determined, there is a transition to the "normal gaming state" ((e)). Furthermore, unlike conventional gaming machines, when a "predetermined condition is satisfied" in the "normal gaming state", the system shifts to the "time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 3 or time-saving gaming state 4)" without going through a jackpot game. ((b)). In addition, in the case of transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "time-saving gaming state" via the "jackpot game", the number of games that can be played in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 1)" is "100". The number of times the game can be played in the "low probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 2)" is "100". On the other hand, in the case of transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 3 or time-saving gaming state 4)" without passing through the "jackpot game", the possible number of games is "700". It becomes. In other words, the number of games that can be played when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "jackpot game" and then to the "time-saving gaming state" is greater than the number of games that can be played without going from the "normal gaming state" to the "jackpot game". The relationship is such that the number of times the game can be played in the "time saving gaming state" is greater when the player shifts to the "time saving gaming state". For example, in this embodiment, the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal gaming state is approximately 3.8 times or less of the reciprocal of the lowest probability (1/300 when the setting value is "1"). The number of times that the game can be played may be set as "700 times" in the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4, as shown in FIG.

Further, the number of times that the game can be played in "time-saving game state 4" may be set to be different depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the "time-saving gaming state", the number of times the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed may be greater than when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the "normal gaming state"; The number of times may be reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, "establishment of a predetermined condition" means that a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition are set. The first predetermined condition is a case where the cumulative number "n", which is the number of times of variable display of special symbols executed from the "starting point", reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the main RAM 301c is provided with an area for counting and storing the cumulative number "n", which is the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)". When the cumulative number of times "n" counted and stored reaches a predetermined number of times, the game will shift from the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 3)". ing. In addition, the second predetermined condition is a case where the game stops at a preset "time-saving symbol (specific losing symbol)," and in this case, the transition from "normal gaming state" to "low-accuracy time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state)" is the second predetermined condition. 4). Note that the rate at which the "time saving symbols" are determined may be any rate. For example, the probability may be the same as or similar to the probability of being judged as a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is harder to determine than the probability of being judged as a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is easier to determine. good. Furthermore, "establishment of a predetermined condition" may include only one of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition, or may include two conditions, or may include only one of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition. Conditions other than the above conditions may be provided.

In addition, as the predetermined number of times under the first predetermined condition, an arbitrary number of times can be set according to the probability of being determined to be a jackpot for each set value. For example, in this embodiment, the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal gaming state is approximately 2.5 times or more the reciprocal of the highest probability (1/270 when the setting value is "4"), and approximately The predetermined number of times may be set to "800 (times)" so as to be 3.0 times or less. Further, as the "starting point", for example, the time when the "jackpot game" ends, or the time when the RAM is cleared, such as when changing the settings described above, can be set. In other words, in the area of the main RAM 301c that counts and stores the cumulative number of times "n", the cumulative number of times "n" is counted and stored at the time of transition to the "jackpot game" or the end of the "jackpot game" or when the RAM is cleared. Initialization processing will be executed. In addition, as the "time-saving symbol" of the second predetermined condition, a plurality of types of symbols may be set in advance, and the number of times that the game can be played in time-saving game state 4 is set to a different number of times for each type of "time-saving symbol". You can leave it there.

Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with information for deciding whether or not to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the number of players who play the game blindly. Further, for example, if the predetermined number of times is about 800 (times), it is possible to provide remedial measures to a player who has not been able to win a jackpot for a long time, which leads to prevention of abandonment of the game. Furthermore, when transitioning to the "time-saving gaming state" due to "establishment of a predetermined condition", the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" is more effective than when shifting to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 2)" through the "jackpot game". Since the number of games that can be played in the gaming state (time-saving gaming state 3 or time-saving gaming state 4) increases, it can make the player want to actively play the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)". , it is possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

Here, the counting process of the cumulative number "n" in the area for counting and storing the number of times of variable display of special symbols in the main RAM 301c will be explained. Specifically, for example, when the "starting point" such as the end of the "jackpot game" is reached, the main CPU 301a initializes the cumulative number of times "n" to "800" and enters the "time-saving game state 2". ” and “normal gaming state”, each time the special symbol is displayed in a low-probability gaming state, a process of subtracting “1” from the cumulative number of times “n (800)” is executed. Then, when the cumulative number of times "n" becomes "0", it is determined that the first predetermined condition is satisfied, and the main CPU 301a executes a process of shifting the gaming state to "time-saving gaming state 3". In addition, even after the gaming state has shifted to the "time-saving gaming state 3" in this way, the main CPU 301a continues to execute the subtraction process, but it becomes the "starting point" again and the cumulative number of times "n" Unless updated to "800", the transition process to the "time saving gaming state 3" based on the second establishment of the first predetermined condition is not executed. In addition, in the jackpot determination, the subtraction process is also executed at the end of the variable display of the special symbol that results in a small hit and time saving 4. With such a subtraction process, even if the special symbol is displayed 800 times or more in a low-probability gaming state, the cumulative number "n" can be prevented from being updated unless it becomes the "starting point". Therefore, it is possible to suppress the storage capacity of the main RAM 301c, the control capacity of the main CPU 301a, etc. from increasing.

In addition, if the above-mentioned first predetermined condition or second predetermined condition is satisfied in the "time-saving game state 2 (low probability time-saving game state)" in the gaming state, "time-saving game state 2" is "time-saving game state 2". It may be controlled to shift to ``gaming state 3'' or ``time-saving gaming state 4''. With such a gaming machine, during the "time-saving gaming state 2", the "time-saving gaming state 3" or "time-saving gaming state 4" will be continued, and the game will continue in the "time-saving gaming state". Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the game. On the other hand, even if the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the "time-saving gaming state 2", only the "time-saving gaming state 2" and "time-saving gaming state 3" or " It may be controlled so as not to shift to "time saving game state 4". With such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining a significant advantage.

Furthermore, if the above-mentioned second predetermined condition is satisfied in the "time-saving game state 3 (low probability time-saving game state)" in the gaming state, the "time-saving game state 4" is changed from the "time-saving game state 3". It may be controlled to shift. Even with such a gaming machine, it is possible to continue playing the game in the "time-saving gaming state" as described above, so that the player's enjoyment of the game can be further improved. On the other hand, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the state of "time-saving game state 3", the control is performed so that the state is only "time-saving game state 3" and does not shift to "time-saving game state 4". You can. Even in such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining a significant advantage, as described above. In addition, as mentioned above, since there is no case where the first predetermined condition is satisfied in the state of "time-saving game state 3", it is possible to shift to "time-saving game state 3" in the state of "time-saving game state 3". is not controlled by.

Then, if the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition described above is satisfied in the "time-saving game state 4" state in the gaming state, "time-saving game state 3" or "time-saving game state 3" is established in the "time-saving game state 4" state. It may be controlled to shift to "gaming state 4". Specifically, for example, if the first predetermined condition is satisfied when the variable display of special symbols is executed 600 times in the "time saving gaming state 4", the "time saving gaming state 4" is ended. Without shifting to "Time-saving gaming state 3" from the 601st variable display of special symbols, the state is "Time-saving gaming state 4" and "Time-saving gaming state 4" until the 700th variable display of special symbols, and 701 Control may be performed so that the state shifts to only the "time-saving game state 3" from the second time onwards. Even with such a gaming machine, it is possible to continue playing the game in the "time-saving gaming state" as described above, so that the player's enjoyment of the game can be further improved. On the other hand, even if the first predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied in the "time-saving gaming state 4", only the "time-saving gaming state 4" and "time-saving gaming state 3" or " It may be controlled so as not to shift to "time saving game state 4". Even in such a gaming machine, it is possible to prevent the player from gaining a significant advantage, as described above.

(List of processing on main control board 300)
Next, processing executed by main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 308. FIG. 308 is an explanatory diagram showing a schematic flow of processing executed by the main control board 300.

As shown in FIG. 308, when the main CPU 301a of the main control board 300 is supplied with power, it executes main processing based on the program stored in the main ROM 301b. The main CPU 301a performs a power recovery process for restoring the gaming state from a power cutoff to the gaming state before the power cutoff as a main process, and a stage where the degree of advantage of the game is determined based on the operation of the setting key switch 302b (when a jackpot is determined as a jackpot in the jackpot judgment). A setting change process for changing (updating) the set value (probability of the occurrence of a change), a RAM clear process for initializing the main RAM 301c based on the operation of the RWM clear switch 302a, and a RAM clear process for initializing the main RAM 301c based on the operation of the setting key switch 302b. A setting confirmation process for displaying the saved setting values on the information display 302c is executed, and the initial values of various random numbers (for example, jackpot random numbers, etc.) are updated. In addition, during the execution of the main process, the main CPU 301a repeatedly performs timer interrupt processing (random number update processing, switch processing, special symbol processing, normal symbol processing, grand prize device opening control) at regular intervals (for example, 4 millisecond cycles). processing, payout processing, command sending processing). Various processes will be explained below.

In the setting change process, in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (for example, pressing it for 2 seconds or more), the setting change mode is entered, the information display 302c displays the current setting value, and the setting change mode is changed. This is a process of changing the set value according to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (for example, the number of presses for one second or less). Further, in the setting change process, when the setting key switch 302b is operated in a predetermined manner (for example, pressed for 2 seconds or more) during the setting change mode, the setting change mode is terminated and the setting value is set to the changed setting value. You can also do that. Further, in the setting confirmation process, when the setting key switch 302b is not in the setting change mode and is moved to the setting confirmation mode in response to a predetermined operation (for example, pressed for 1 second or less), the current setting is displayed on the information display 302c. Display the value, and terminate the setting confirmation mode in response to a predetermined operation of the setting key switch 302b (for example, pressing it for 1 second or less) during the setting confirmation mode, and also terminate the display of the setting value on the information display 302c. This is the process of

The random number update process is a process of updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a win random number, a reach random number, a jackpot symbol random number, a small win symbol random number, a time saving symbol random number, a normal symbol random number, and a fluctuation pattern random number. The switch process is a process that is executed when a detection signal is input from each switch, and when the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115 detects the entry of a ball, a jackpot random number, etc. is acquired and is stored as pending information. A starter switch process for storing, a gate switch process for acquiring and storing a normal symbol random number when a game ball passes through the normal symbol activation gate 113b, and a first jack process during a jackpot game (in the jackpot game state). This process includes a big winning device switch process for detecting a winning game ball in the winning device 117 or the second big winning device 127. Note that the starting device switch process includes a preliminary determination process that executes jackpot determination, jackpot symbol determination, etc. based on the pending information.

The special symbol processing is a processing related to special symbols according to the processing results in the above-mentioned switch processing (first starting device 112, second starting device 115) and special symbol special electric processing data described later, and the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. When completed, the pending information shift process shifts the pending information in the pending information storage area 301cx of the main RAM 301c and the pending order information at the time of acquisition, and the jackpot random number and win of the pending information shifted to the pending information determination area 301cy in the pending information shift process. /Jackpot determination processing that executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot determination table T1, and when the result of the jackpot determination is a jackpot, a jackpot symbol (special symbol) is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number included in the pending information and the symbol determination table T2. ), a reach determination process that executes reach determination based on the reach random number included in the pending information and the reach determination table T3, and a reach determination process that executes the reach determination based on the variable pattern table and the variable pattern random number of the pending information. A process including a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a pattern, and a special symbol stop process for stopping and displaying the variable display on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122 (details will be described later). be.

The normal symbol processing is processing related to normal symbols according to the processing result in the switch processing (normal symbol activation gate 113b), and is a hit determination process in which a hit determination is performed based on a hit random number and a hit/jackpot determination table T1. , a normal symbol determination process in which a normal symbol is determined based on the normal symbol random number and the normal symbol determination table T6 when there is pending information of a normal symbol, and an operation pattern of the movable piece 115b when a hit is determined in the normal symbol determination. This process includes an operation pattern setting process for setting the operation pattern, and an opening/closing member control process for controlling the opening and closing of the movable piece 115b of the second starting device 115 based on the operation pattern set in the operation pattern setting process.

The big prize device opening control process is a process related to the opening/closing control of the first big prize device 117 and the second big prize device 127 based on the special figure special electric processing data described later, and is opened during the opening performance at the beginning of the jackpot game. Opening pattern setting process to set a pattern, turning off the jackpot game flag when the final ending effect of the jackpot game ends, high certainty flag indicating that the game is in a high certainty gaming state, time saving game state 1/time saving game This process includes a game state setting process of turning on the time saving 1/time saving 2 flag etc. indicating that the game is in state 2, and setting the possible number of times of time saving games to a predetermined number (for example, 100 times).

The payout process is a process that controls the payout of prize balls according to the detection result (winning of the game ball) in the switch process. The command transmission process is a process of transmitting to the performance control board 320 information necessary for determining the various commands and performance contents generated in the above process.

(List of processing on the production control board 320)
Next, with reference to FIG. 309, the processing executed by the effect control board 320 will be described. FIG. 309 is an explanatory diagram showing a list of processes executed by the production control board 320.

As shown in FIG. 309, when the sub CPU 320a of the production control board 320 is supplied with power, it executes production main processing based on the program stored in the sub ROM 320b. The sub CPU 320a performs a power recovery notification process corresponding to the power recovery process executed by the main control board 300, a setting change notification process corresponding to the setting change process executed by the main control board 300, and a main control board 320a as performance main processes. A RAM clear notification process corresponding to the RAM clear process executed in 300 and a setting confirmation notification process corresponding to the setting confirmation process executed in main control board 300 are executed. In addition, the sub CPU 320a repeatedly performs production timer interrupt processing (random number update processing, command reception processing, production button processing, command transmission processing, etc.) at regular intervals (for example, 2 milliseconds) during execution of the production main processing. Execute. Various processes will be explained below.

The power recovery notification process is such that while the main control board 300 is executing the power recovery process, the power recovery screen is displayed for a predetermined period of time (( For example, the display lighting device 342 may be fully lit in a predetermined color (e.g., white) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), or the audio output device 331 may switch off the power (power outage). This process executes a power restoration notification such as outputting a power restoration notification sound (buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the power has been restored.

The RAM clear notification process is performed by displaying an initial screen (background image and The initial production pattern "135") is displayed, the production lighting device 342 is fully lit in a predetermined luminous color (for example, white) for a predetermined period of time (for example, 60 seconds), and the storage area is This is a process that executes a power-on notification such as outputting a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) to indicate that the device has been initialized. .

The setting change notification process includes displaying a setting change screen on the main display device 131 or the like to indicate that the setting value is being changed while the main control board 300 is in the setting change mode while the main control board 300 is executing the setting change process, The production lighting device 342 may be fully lit in a predetermined light emitting color (for example, white) while the settings are being changed, or the audio output device 331 may emit a settings change notification sound (“Settings are being changed”). ) is the process of executing setting change notification such as outputting the following. Further, the setting confirmation notification process may include displaying a setting confirmation screen on the main display device 131 or the like indicating that the settings are being confirmed while the main control board 300 is executing the setting confirmation process and is in the setting confirmation mode. The production lighting device 342 may be fully lit in a predetermined light emitting color (for example, white) while the settings are being checked, or the audio output device 331 may emit a settings confirmation notification sound (“Checking the settings This is a process that executes a setting confirmation notification such as outputting ".").

The random number update process is a process of updating various random numbers used for production (for example, production symbol determination random numbers, chance up random numbers). The command reception process includes a gaming state setting process that sets a gaming state based on a gaming state designation command, etc., which will be described later, and a process based on various commands transmitted from the main control board 300. A look-ahead process that determines whether to perform a continuous performance, a pseudo-continuous performance, an icon change performance, etc., and a performance that determines a performance pattern based on the basic display performance specification table TS1, the performance symbol determination table TS2, and the chance-up determination table TS3. A pattern determination process, a hold process that stores a hold flag in the hold storage area 320c1 of the sub-RAM 320c when a hold command is received, and sets a hold display command for displaying hold on the main display device 131, and a fluctuation start command. A preliminary determination information shift process that executes a shift process of the preliminary determination information in the preliminary determination information storage area 320c3 of the sub RAM 320c when a normal symbol determination is received, and a change in the normal symbol on the main display device 131 according to the determination result of the normal symbol determination. The normal pattern performance process is a process for performing the corresponding performance, the pattern confirmation process is a process for fixing and stopping displaying the fluctuating performance pattern on the main display device 131 based on the pattern confirmation command, and the pattern confirmation process in the jackpot game. This process includes a jackpot process that executes an opening performance, an ending performance, and a round performance corresponding to the opening designation command. The effect button processing is a process of detecting input via the sword handle unit 135 (sword handle button detection switch 137) or the effect operation stick 136 and performing a predetermined effect. The command transmission process is a process of transmitting various commands generated in the various processes described above to the image control board 330 and the lamp control board 340.

Here, the continuous performance is a performance that can be performed on the main display device 131, and is a performance that can be performed during the fluctuation start performance over a plurality of variable displays in the special symbol. This continuous performance may consist of only one type of performance, or may include multiple types of performance. If the continuous performance includes multiple types of performance, one of the multiple types of performance may be selected and executed. Further, the continuous performance may be executed for one variable display in the special symbol. Further, the pseudo-continuous performance may be composed of only one type of performance, or may include multiple types of performance. If the pseudo-continuous performance includes multiple types of performance, one of the multiple types of performance may be selected and executed. Furthermore, the icon change effect is a special game executed by displaying the pending icon displayed on the main display device 131 or the icon in a special display mode (special icon) different from the normal display mode (normal icon). It is a performance that suggests the degree of expectation (possibility). Special display modes (special icons) come in various colors, sizes, and shapes; for example, normal icons are white, but special icons include blue, green, red, gold, etc. , expectations are set to increase in the order of white → blue → green → red → gold.

Furthermore, as the main production process, the sub CPU 320a performs production mode update processing in addition to the above-mentioned processing. Specifically, a production mode (production stage) is defined in which production elements (background image, production image, BGM, etc.) in the audio output device 331, main display device 131, first side display device 132, second display device 133, etc. are defined. ) is determined whether the update conditions (changes in gaming status, winning of mode update lottery, execution of SP/SPSP reach effects that result in a loss, etc.) are met, and if the update conditions are met, the production mode is changed. Performs processing for updating to any of a plurality of presentation modes. Here, the "performance modes" include production modes A to C set in the normal gaming state (low-accuracy non-time-saving gaming state) and production modes set in the time-saving gaming state 1 (high-accuracy time-saving gaming state), which will be described later. Mode D, performance mode E set in time-saving game state 2 (low-accuracy time-saving game state) to be described later, and performance mode F set in time-saving game state 3 (low-accuracy time-saving game state) are provided. Note that when the power is turned on and the game is controlled to the normal gaming state (for example, after changing settings, clearing RWM, confirming settings, etc.), the first performance mode that is set is always performance mode A. Also, regarding "BGM", there are variable BGM 1 to 3 that are output during the variable display of each of production modes A to C in the normal gaming state, and variations that are output during the variable display of production mode D in the time-saving gaming state 1. BGM4, variable BGM5 output during variable display of performance mode E of time-saving game state 2, and variable BGM6 output during variable display of performance mode F of time-saving game state 3 are provided. Furthermore, normal reach BGM, SP reach BGM, SPSP reach BGM, etc. are also provided as BGM output during execution of various reach effects. Note that, as will be described later, the settings of the variable BGM can be changed according to the player's operations, and for example, the variable BGM 4 can be set to be output in production mode A.

(Explanation of special symbol stop processing)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311, the transition from the gaming state to the time-saving gaming state 3 or the time-saving gaming state 4 will be described. FIG. 310 is a flowchart illustrating special symbol stop processing, which is one of the processes in the main control board 300 described above. FIG. 311 is a flowchart illustrating the transition determination process to the time-saving gaming state and the end determination process of the time-saving gaming state, in which (a) is a flowchart explaining the time-saving 3 transition determination process, and (b) is the flowchart illustrating the time-saving 3 transition determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the transition determination process, and (c) is a flowchart explaining the time-saving gaming state end determination process.

As shown in FIG. 310, immediately after the variable display of the special symbols stops, the main CPU 301a first executes the time saving 3 transition determination process to determine whether the gaming state has transitioned to the time saving gaming state 3 ( S231), thereafter, a time saving 4 transition determination process is executed to determine whether the gaming state has transitioned to time saving gaming state 4 (S232). Note that the details of the time saving 3 transition determination process and the time saving 4 transition determination process will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 301a determines whether a display wait period (for example, about 0.5 seconds) has elapsed (S233), and when determining that the display wait period has not ended (NO in S233), , and waits until it is determined that the display wait period has ended.On the other hand, when it is determined that the display wait period has ended (YES in S233), the next step is executed. Note that the display wait period is a period provided to enable the player to recognize the stop display of special symbols in the game. In other words, the variable display (start of variation) of the special symbols in the next game is prohibited until the display wait period ends.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes a time-saving game end determination process to determine whether or not the time-saving game has ended (S234). Note that details of the time-saving game end determination process will be described later. Next, the main CPU 301a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the game state of the game in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 301c (S235), and determines whether the special symbol stopped in the game is a jackpot symbol. (S236), and when it is determined that it is a jackpot symbol (YES in S236), the special figure special electric processing data is set to "3" (big winning device opening control processing) (S237). Here, the special symbol special electric processing data refers to the special symbol display device 120, the second special symbol display device 122, and the grand prize device opening control process in order to control the operation of the movable pieces 117b and 127b of the grand prize device. The data to be used is, for example, in the case of "3", the movable piece 117b etc. is opened and closed in a predetermined pattern in the jackpot game state after the execution of the opening performance of the jackpot game, and in the case of "4", the small After execution of the opening performance of the winning game, the movable piece 117b etc. are opened and closed in a predetermined pattern of the small winning game, and in the case of "0", the movable piece 117b etc. are not opened.

Next, the main CPU 301a executes jackpot initialization processing to initialize various information (S238). In this jackpot initialization process, for example, the high-probability flag that is ON in the high-probability gaming state is changed to the OFF state while transitioning to the low-probability gaming state, or the time-saving flag that is ON in the time-saving gaming state is turned OFF. At the same time, the state changes to a non-time-saving gaming state. In addition, you can execute the initialization process to initialize the cumulative number of times "n" mentioned above to "800 (times)", or display the remaining number of possible games that indicate the (remaining) number of times that you can continue playing in the time-saving gaming state. Initialization processing is executed to initialize "M" to "0". In addition, the time-saving flag includes a first time-saving flag that is in the ON state in the time-saving game state 1, a second time-saving flag that is in the ON state in the time-saving game state 2, and a third time-saving flag that is in the ON state in the time-saving game state 3. and a fourth time-saving flag that is turned ON in the time-saving game state 4, and all the time-saving flags are changed to the OFF state in the jackpot initialization process. In addition, the number of possible games "M" includes the number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state 1 "M1", the number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state 2 "M3", the number of possible games in the time-saving gaming state 3 "M4", There is a number of possible games "M4" in time-saving gaming state 4, which corresponds to each time-saving gaming state, and all the possible number of games "M" are initialized in the jackpot initialization process. .

Next, the main CPU 301a starts a jackpot that determines a pattern regarding opening of the movable piece 117b of the first jackpot device 117 and the movable piece 127b of the second jackpot device 127 in the jackpot game according to the special symbol (type of jackpot). Preparation processing is executed (S239), an opening designation command corresponding to the type of jackpot is set in the presentation transmission data storage area (S240), an opening time is set according to the type of jackpot (S241), and a special symbol is set. Ends the stop processing. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S236 above that the special symbol that stopped in the game is not a jackpot symbol (NO in S236), the main CPU 301a determines whether or not the special symbol that stopped is a small winning symbol. (S242), and when it is determined that it is a small winning symbol (YES in S242), the special symbol special electric processing data is set to "4" (big winning device release control processing) (S243), and when the special symbol stops Finish the process. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines that the special symbol stopped in the game in step S232 is not a small winning symbol (NO in S242), the main CPU 301a sets the special symbol special electric processing data to "0" (S243). ), the special symbol stop processing ends.

In addition, in step S233 of the above-mentioned special symbol stop processing, the display wait period when transitioning to all time-saving gaming states is set to be constant, but it is not limited to this and various modes may be used. Good too. For example, the display wait period when a time-saving symbol (special symbol J1, etc.) is stopped and displayed may be longer than the normal display wait period.More specifically, the display when the time-saving symbol is stopped and displayed The time of the wait period may be made the same as the time of the ending period of the jackpot game. In addition, during the display wait period when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed, a time-saving entry performance that is a performance that suggests the transition to time-saving gaming state 4 may be executed, or after the display wait period ends. You may make it shift to time-saving game state 4. Furthermore, when the time-saving entry effect is executed when transitioning to the time-saving gaming state 4 after the end of the display wait period, the effect symbols and small symbols described later may be displayed during the display wait period, and the display It doesn't have to be done.

As shown in FIG. 311(a), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time saving 3 transition determination process, it first determines whether or not the jackpot has been won in the game (S261), and it is determined that the jackpot has been won. In this case (YES in S261), the time saving 3 transition determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines that the jackpot has not been won in step S261 (NO in S261), the main CPU 301a determines whether or not the main CPU 301a is in a low probability gaming state (normal gaming state or time-saving gaming state 2). (S262) If it is determined that the state is not a low probability gaming state (NO in S262), the time saving 3 transition determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S262 that it is a low probability gaming state (YES in S262), the main CPU 301a subtracts the numerical value "1" from the cumulative number "n" (S263), and sets the cumulative number "n". It is determined whether or not "n" has become "0" for the first time after the update (after executing the jackpot initialization process or RAM clear process in S238) (S264), and if it is not the first "0" after the update. If it is determined (NO in S264), the time saving 3 transition determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S264 that the cumulative number of times "n" has become "0" for the first time after the update (YES in S264), the main CPU 301a sets the remaining number of games M3 in the time-saving game state 3 to an initial value. "700" is set (S265), the time saving 3 flag is updated to the ON state (S266), and the time saving 3 transition determination process is ended.

In this way, if the time saving 3 transition determination process is executed immediately after the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122, the jackpot will not be won and the In the case of a probability game state, the cumulative number of times "n" is subtracted. In addition, during the period from the end of the current jackpot game to the start of the next jackpot game, unless the RAM clearing process is executed, the time saving game state 3 will be entered only once, and the time saving game state 3 will be entered only once. This means that there is no transition to gaming state 3. In addition, when the possible number of games "M3" is set to the initial value, the main CPU 301c transmits a time saving 3 remaining number of times command indicating the possible number of games "M3" to the production control board 320, or when the game ends. When starting, a time saving 3 remaining number of times command and a time saving 3 cumulative number of times command indicating the cumulative number "n" may be transmitted. With such a configuration, for example, even if the possible number of games "M3" and the cumulative number of games "n" are erased on the production control board 320, the production control board 320 periodically receives the remaining time saving 3. You can refer to commands and time saving 3 cumulative count commands.

As shown in FIG. 311(b), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time saving 4 transition determination process, it first determines whether or not the current game is in a low probability non-time saving game state (S281). If it is determined that it is not in the non-time-saving gaming state (NO in S281), the time-saving 4 transition determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S281 that it is a low probability non-time saving gaming state (YES in S261), the main CPU 301a displays the time saving symbol J1 on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122. It is determined whether or not it is stopped and displayed (S282), and if it is determined that the time-saving symbol J1 is stopped and displayed (YES at S282), the initial value "100" is set to the number of possible games "M4" in the time-saving game state 4. is set (S283), the time saving 4 flag is updated to the ON state (S286), and the time saving 4 transition determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S282 that the time-saving symbol J1 is not stopped and displayed (NO in S282), the main CPU 301a displays the time-saving symbol J2 on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122. It is determined whether the time-saving symbol J2 is stopped and displayed (S284), and if it is determined that the time-saving symbol J2 is stopped and displayed (YES at S284), the initial value "700" is set to the number of possible games "M4" in the time-saving game state 4. is set (S285), the time saving 4 flag is updated to the ON state in step S286, and the time saving 4 transition determination process is ended. On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S284 that the time saving symbol J2 is not stopped and displayed (NO in S284), the main CPU 301a directly ends the time saving 4 transition determination process.

In this way, when the time saving 4 transition determination process is executed immediately after the stop display of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122, when the time saving symbol J1 is stopped as a special symbol. , the number of games that can be played is "100 (times)" and the time-saving game state 4 is entered.If the game stops at the time-saving symbol J2, the number of games that can be played is "700 (times)" and the time-saving game state 4 is entered. will be moved to. Therefore, with such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's interest in playing the game, compared to a case where the number of possible games in the time-saving game state 4 is constant. In addition, in the same way as when executing the above-mentioned time saving 3 transition determination process, the main CPU 301c determines whether the game is possible when the number of possible games "M4" is set to the initial value or when the game ends or starts. A time saving 4 remaining number of times command indicating the number of times "M4" may be transmitted to the production control board 320.

As shown in FIG. 311(c), when the main CPU 301a starts executing the time saving end determination process, first, it determines whether the time saving 1 flag or the working time saving 2 flag is in the ON state (S301), and the time saving 1 flag Or, if it is determined that the time saving 2 flag is in the OFF state (NO in S301), it is determined whether the time saving 3 flag is in the ON state (S305), and it is determined that the time saving 3 flag is in the OFF state. (NO in S305), it is determined whether or not the time saving 4 flag is in the ON state (S309), and if it is determined that the time saving 4 flag is in the OFF state (NO in S309), the time saving end determination is made. Finish the process. That is, if the gaming state is not the time-saving gaming state, the time-saving end determination process will not be executed. In addition, as mentioned above, when the jackpot game is started in the special symbol stop processing, all the time saving flags of the time saving 1 flag, the time saving 2 flag, the time saving 3 flag, and the time saving 4 flag are set by the jackpot initialization process. is changed to the OFF state (S238 in FIG. 310), so the main CPU 301c will not execute the time saving end determination process during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines that the time saving 1 flag or the time saving 2 flag is in the ON state in step S301 (YES in S301), the number of possible games in the time saving gaming state 1 and the working time saving gaming state 2 is "M1". When the numerical value "1" is subtracted from (S302), it is determined whether or not the number of possible games "M1" is "0" (S303), and it is determined that the number of possible games "M1" is "0". If (YES in S303), the time saving 1 flag or the time saving 2 flag is turned off (S304), and the process moves to step S305. Furthermore, when the main CPU 301a determines in step S303 that the number of possible games "M1" is not "0" (NO in S303), the process proceeds to step S305. By executing the processing from step S301 to step S304, the initial value of the possible number of games "M1" in time-saving gaming state 1 and time-saving gaming state 2 is indicated by "100" unless a jackpot is won. Thus, the time-saving game in the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2 can be continued up to 100 times.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines in step S305 that the time saving 3 flag is in the ON state (YES in S305), the main CPU 301a subtracts the numerical value "1" from the possible number of games "M3" in the time saving gaming state 3 ( S306), determines whether the possible number of games "M3" is "0" (S307), and if it is determined that the possible number of games "M3" is "0" (YES in S307), the time saving 3 flag is turned off (S308), and the process moves to step S309. Further, when the main CPU 301a determines in step S307 that the number of possible games "M3" is not "0" (NO in S307), the process proceeds to step S309. By executing the processing from step S305 to step S308, unless a jackpot is won, the time-saving game is not played as shown by the initial value "700" of the possible number of games "M1" in the time-saving game state 3. The time-saving game in state 3 can be continued up to 700 times.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 301a determines that the time saving 4 flag is in the ON state in step S309 (YES in S309), the main CPU 301a subtracts the numerical value "1" from the possible number of games "M4" in the time saving gaming state 4 ( S310), determines whether the possible number of games "M4" is "0" (S311), and if it is determined that the possible number of games "M4" is "0" (YES in S311), the time saving 4 flag is turned off (S312), and the time saving end determination process is ended. The main CPU 301a also ends the time saving end determination process when determining in step S311 that the number of possible games "M4" is not "0" (NO in S311). By executing the processing from step S309 to step S312, unless a jackpot is won, the time-saving game will not be played as shown by the initial value "700" of the possible number of games "M1" in the time-saving game state 4. The time-saving game in state 4 can be continued up to 700 times.

In this way, in the time-saving end determination process, when the opportunity to end the time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 1, working-time saving gaming state 2, working-time saving gaming state 3, working-time saving gaming state 4) is established, the time-saving gaming state corresponding to the time-saving gaming state is By changing the time-saving flags (time-saving 1 flag, time-saving 2 flag, time-saving 3 flag, and time-saving 4 flag) to the OFF state, the time-saving game state is ended. In addition, in the time saving end determination process, each time the variable display is stopped on either the first special symbol display 120 or the second special symbol display 122, the number of possible games "M (M1, M2, M3, M4 )” is subtracted.

In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving end determination process, each time-saving game state is determined by the so-called first special symbol display 120 and Although it is assumed that the total number of fluctuation displays on the second special symbol display 122 reaches the number of times indicated by a predetermined initial value, it ends, but it is not limited to this, and various modes may be used. good. For example, a trigger when the total number of variable displays on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 reaches 50 times, a trigger when the number of variable displays on the second special symbol display 122 reaches 5 times. , and the opportunity of first winning a small win, each time-saving game state may be ended at the first opportunity established. Further, in each time-saving game state, the trigger for ending may be different. For example, in the time saving game state 1, when the total number of variable displays on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 reaches 50, the number of variable displays on the second special symbol display 122 is The time-saving game state 3 shall end when the first of the 5 times is reached and the first small win is won. The first of the triggers when the total number of fluctuation displays on the device 122 reaches 500, the trigger when the number of fluctuation displays on the second special symbol display 122 reaches 20, and the trigger when the small win is won four times. The time-saving game state 4 is terminated when the trigger is established, and the time-saving game state 4 is triggered when the total number of variable displays on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122 reaches 30, and the second special symbol is displayed. The process may end at the first of the triggers when the number of variable displays on the device 122 reaches six times and the triggers when the small win is won three times.

With reference to FIG. 312, the end of the above-mentioned time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4 will be described. FIG. 312 is a diagram illustrating the end of the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4, and (a) is a diagram illustrating the case where a jackpot game occurs during the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 3 is ended. (b) is a diagram illustrating a case where a jackpot game occurs during the time-saving game state 4 and the time-saving game state 4 ends. In addition, in FIG. 312, the period of the jackpot game (including the opening period and the ending period), the operation period of the time-saving game state 1, the time-saving game state 3, and the time-saving game state 4, and the possible number of games "M1", "M3" ","M4" are shown as examples.

As shown in FIG. 312(a), when the jackpot game is started at time tb1 in time-saving game state 3, the jackpot initialization process is executed at time tb1, so that the time-saving game state 3 at time tb1 The possible number of games "M3" is "500" but is updated to "0", and the time-saving game state 3 ends. In addition, at time tb2 when the jackpot game ends, the possible number of games "M1" in the time-saving game state 1 is set to the initial value "100", and the time-saving game state 1 is transferred to the time-saving game state 3. It will never be restarted. In this way, when you win a jackpot during the time-saving game state 3, you can play the maximum number of games "700 (times)" in the time-saving game state 3 without restarting the time-saving game state 3 after the jackpot game. There is a case where the time-saving game state 3 is ended without playing the maximum number of games "700 (times)".

As shown in FIG. 312(b), when the jackpot game is started at time tc1 in time-saving game state 4, since the jackpot initialization process is executed at time tc1, the game in time-saving game state 4 at time tc1 Although the possible number of times "M4" is "10", it is updated to "0", and the time-saving game state 4 ends. In addition, at time tc2 when the jackpot game ends, the number of possible games "M1" in the time-saving game state 1 is set to the initial value "100", and the time-saving game state 1 is entered, and the time-saving game state 4 is set to the initial value "100". is never restarted. In this way, even when winning a jackpot during the time-saving game state 4, the time-saving game state 4 is restarted after the jackpot game so that the maximum number of games that can be played in the time-saving game state 4 is ``700 (times)''. In some cases, the time-saving game state 4 may be ended without playing the maximum number of games "700 times".

(Description of information display 302c)
Next, the information display 302c of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 313 and 314. FIG. 313 is a diagram illustrating details of the information display 302c. FIG. 314 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of the counting period of base value B. Here, the base value B is calculated by dividing the number of outs (total number of game balls hit) by the total number of prize balls paid out in a specific section of the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state). This is a numerical value calculated by In addition, the number of outs is the number of game balls detected by an out ball detection switch (not shown), and includes, for example, game balls that have entered the out port 111, starting devices such as the first starting device 112, This is the number of game balls that entered a winning device such as the winning device 117 or a general winning hole (not shown) and were detected by the out ball detection switch.

As shown in FIG. 313(a), first, various counters (out counter for base calculation, prize ball counter for base calculation, total out counter) provided in the main RAM 301c display the base value B on the information display 302c. It is used for control. The base calculation out counter counts the number of outs in a specific section. For example, each time a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch, the value "1" is added to the base calculation out counter. That will happen. The base calculation prize ball counter counts the prize balls in a specific section. For example, when a game ball enters the general winning slot, the value "10" is added to the base calculation prize ball counter. If a winning device such as the first big prize winning device 117 is won, a numerical value of “15” will be added, and if a starting device such as the first starting device 112 is won, a numerical value of “3” will be added. The total out counter counts the number of outs (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "total number of outs") after the power is first turned on. Then, the main CPU 301a calculates the base value B of the specific section by multiplying the calculation result of dividing the value of the prize ball counter for base calculation by the value of the out counter for base calculation by the value "100", and also calculates the base value B of the specific section. Every time a predetermined section ends, the base value B of the section is memorized (saved). In this embodiment, it is assumed that the base value B is saved every time the number of outs is counted as 60,000, and specifically, in the main CPU 301a, the base value B is saved every time the number of outs is counted as 60,000. Then, the base value B is calculated and stored from the current values of the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter, and the base calculation prize ball counter and the base calculation out counter are initialized. In addition, in this embodiment, the period in which the out counter for base calculation and the prize ball counter for base calculation are added may be described as a "counting period", and the period other than the counting period may be described as a "non-counting period". .

As shown in FIG. 313(b), next, 60,000 outs are counted in section 3, 60,000 outs are counted in section 2, and 60,000 outs are counted in section 1. The display on the information display 302c in the case where the count is performed and the section L (the number of outs is less than 60,000 (0 to 59,999)) is started will be described. Here, the base value B of section 3 is "B3", the base value B of section 2 is "B2", the base value of section 1 is "B1", and the base value B of section L is "BL". . In the information display 302c in such a section L, the base value BL of the section L (real time), the base value B1 of the section 1, the base value B2 of the section 2, and the base value B3 of the section 3 are approximately equal to each other in this order. The display changes every 5 seconds. Furthermore, when the number of outs in section L reaches 60,000, the base value BL of section L is stored as the base value B of the newest section, and the base value B1 of section 1 is stored as the base value B of the next newest section. , the base value B2 of section 2 is stored as the base value B of the third newest section, and the base value B3 of the oldest section 3 is discarded. In other words, when one section ends (60,000 outs are counted), the base value B of that section is saved as the base value B of the previous section, and the base value B of the oldest section is discarded. It happens. In this embodiment, these base values B are continuously displayed on the information display 302c, including the period during which games are possible.

As shown in FIG. 313(c), the information display 302c is composed of four 7-segment displays 302ca to 302cd. In the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd, as described above, the base value BL, base value B1, base value B2, and base value B3 are displayed as the two-digit base value B in this order approximately every 5 seconds. It is displayed as if it were to be switched. Note that when the base value B is larger than the numerical value "100", "99." is displayed (the dot display section lights up). In addition, the two 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb correspond to the base value B displayed on the two 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd, and it is possible to identify which section of the base value B is displayed. Identification information “bL”, “b1”, “b2”, and “b3” are displayed. Specifically, in the two 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb of the information display 302c, the identification information "bL" is displayed during the period in which the base value BL of section L is displayed, and the base value B1 of section 1 is displayed. In the period when the base value B2 of section 2 is displayed, the identification information "b2" is displayed, and during the period when the base value B3 of section 3 is displayed, the identification information "b3" is displayed. is displayed.

Here, the manner of display on the information display 302c in each section from section L to section 3 will be explained in more detail. For example, if the total number of outs is less than 60,000 and the identification information "b1", "b2", and "b3" are displayed, the base value B may not be calculated. In this way, when the total number of outs is less than 60,000, each identification information is displayed blinking on the 7-segment displays 302ca and 302cb, and a special symbol "-" is displayed on the 7-segment displays 302cc and 302cd. Ru. In addition, if the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, the base value B1 is calculated, but the base value B2 of the identification information "b2" and the base value B3 of the identification information "b3" cannot be calculated. There is. In this way, if the total number of outs is 60,000 or more but less than 120,000, during the period in which the identification information "b1" is displayed, the identification information is displayed lit and the base value B1 is displayed lit. During the period in which the identification information "b2" and "b3" are displayed, each identification information is displayed blinking and a special symbol "-" is displayed lit. Further, if the total number of outs is 120,000 or more and less than 180,000, although the base value B1 and the base value B2 are calculated, the base value B3 of the identification information "b3" may not be calculated. In this way, if the total number of outs is 120,000 or more but less than 180,000, during the period in which the identification information "b1" or "b2" is displayed, the identification information is lit and displayed, and the base value B1 or the base value During a period in which B2 is displayed lit and identification information "b3" is displayed, the identification information is displayed blinking and a special symbol "-" is displayed lit. As described above, in this embodiment, although the real-time base value BL is displayed during the period in which the identification information "bL" is displayed, if the number of normal outs in the section L is not large enough, It may be difficult to calculate an accurate (original) base value B. In such a case, for example, if the number of normal outs in section L is less than 6,000, the identification information "bL" will be displayed blinking, and if the number of normal outs is 6,000 or more, the identification information "bL" will be displayed blinking. bL" may be displayed by lighting. With such a display mode, the administrator of the gaming machine 100 can be informed whether the number of normal outs in section L is sufficiently large or not, and the administrator of the gaming machine 100 can confirm that the number of normal outs in section L is sufficient. The base value B can be evaluated after considering whether or not.

By the way, before a player actually plays a game, the operation of the gaming machine 100 is normally checked by the administrator, and this operation check involves checking various detection switches (out ball detection switch, etc.). This includes checking whether or not game balls are detected normally. When the operation check is performed in this way, for example, in a configuration where the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are incremented immediately after the first power is turned on in the gaming machine 100, The base value B calculated immediately after the input may be different from the base value B calculated when actually playing the game. In such a case, in this embodiment, the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation are prevented from being added until the total out counter reaches a predetermined value (for example, the value "300"). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the base value from being different immediately after the first power is turned on.

Here, in one of the processes executed in the main processing on the main control board 300, the number of prize balls and the number of outs are calculated in order to calculate the base value B of the normal gaming state (low probability non-time saving gaming state). The counting process, which is the process of counting, and the base display process, which is the process of displaying the base value B on the information display 302c, will be specifically explained. When executing the counting process, the main CPU 301a sets the base calculation prize ball counter to the numerical value "When a game ball enters the general prize opening and is detected by the general prize detection switch in the normal gaming state," 10" (the number of prize balls corresponding to the general winning opening), and when a game ball is detected by the first starting device detection switch 304 or the second starting device detection switch 305, the numerical value "3" is added, and the first When a game ball is detected by the winning device detection switch 306a or the second winning device detection switch 306b, a numerical value "15" is added. Further, the main CPU 301a adds a numerical value "1" to the base calculation out counter when a game ball is detected by the out ball detection switch in the normal gaming state. In addition, in a game state other than the normal game state, no numerical value is added to the prize ball counter for base calculation and the out counter for base calculation. After executing the counting process, the main CPU 301a calculates a base value from the number of normal prize balls and the number of normal outs counted in the above-mentioned counting process, and displays the identification information and base value B on the information display 302c. Executes base display processing. By executing this base display process, the identification information and base value B are displayed on the information display 302c in the manner described above.

Next, with reference to FIG. 314, a specific example of a counting period, which is a period during which counting processing necessary for displaying the base value B on the information display 302c described above is executed, will be described. First, FIG. 314(a) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) to the time-saving gaming state 3. Further, FIG. 314(b) is a diagram for explaining a specific example of the counting period before and after the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) to the time-saving gaming state 4. Furthermore, FIG. 314(c) is a diagram for explaining another specific example of the counting period before and after the transition from the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state) to the time-saving gaming state 4. Note that the counting period in the following explanation is a period in which the above-mentioned counting process is executed, and the non-counting period is a period in which the counting process is not executed.

As shown in FIG. 314(a), here, the 800th game (variable display of special symbols) in the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is started at time tn1, and the losing symbols are stopped and displayed in the 800th game. A case will be described in which, at time tn2, the losing symbol is stopped and displayed and the cumulative number "n" of the first predetermined condition becomes "0". In such a case, the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before time tn2 becomes a counting period, and the time-saving gaming state 3 after time tn2 becomes a non-counting period. In addition, if you do not win the jackpot game in the time-saving game state 3, the final game in the time-saving game state 3 (the 700th special symbol fluctuation display) starts at time tn3, and the final game at time tn4. A case will be explained in which the losing symbols in the game are stopped and displayed and the possible number of games is "0 (times)". In such a case, the period after time tn4 becomes a low-reliability non-time-saving gaming state, and the counting period is restarted from time tn4. In addition, in the above-mentioned, although the starting point of the non-counting period at the time of transition to time-saving game state 3 was set to time tn2, it may be set to time tn1. Further, although the restart point of the counting period at the time of transition to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state 3 is set as the time tn4, it may be set as the time tn3.

As shown in FIG. 314(b), here, a case will be explained in which a game in which the time-saving symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time point to1, and time-saving symbol J2 is stopped and displayed at time point to2. do. In such a case, the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before time to2 becomes a counting period, and the time-saving gaming state 4 after time to2 becomes a non-counting period. In addition, if you do not win the jackpot game in the time-saving game state 4, the final game in the time-saving game state 4 (the 700th special symbol fluctuation display) starts at time to3, and the final game at time to4 A case will be explained in which the losing symbols in the game are stopped and displayed and the possible number of games is "0". Note that at this time, it is assumed that the cumulative number of times "n" of the first predetermined condition is not "0". In such a case, after time to4, the game becomes a low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the counting period is restarted from time to4. For example, if the time saving symbol J1 etc. is stopped and displayed in the final game of the time saving game state 4, the counting period is restarted in the same way as when the losing symbol is stopped and displayed as described above. You can do it like this. Further, when the small winning symbols are stopped and displayed in the final game of the time saving game state 4, the counting period may be restarted after the small winning game ends. Further, in the above description, the start point of the non-counting period at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming state 4 is set to time to2, but it may be set to time to1. Further, although the restart point of the counting period at the time of transition to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state 4 is set to time to4, it may be set to time to3.

As shown in FIG. 314(c), here, a case will be explained in which a game in which the time-saving symbol J2 is stopped and displayed in a low-probability non-time-saving game state is started at time tp1, and the time-saving symbol J2 is stopped and displayed at time tp2. do. In such a case, the low probability non-time-saving gaming state before time tp2 becomes a counting period, and the time-saving gaming state 4 after time tp2 becomes a non-counting period. In addition, if you do not win the jackpot game in the time-saving game state 4, the final game of the time-saving game state 4 (the 700th special symbol fluctuation display) is started at time tp3, and the final game is started at time tp4. A case will be explained in which the losing symbols in a game are stopped and displayed and the possible number of games is ``0''. Note that at this time, it is assumed that the cumulative number of times "n" of the first predetermined condition has become "0". In such a case, since the time saving game state 3 is established after the time point tp4, the non-counting period continues even after the time point tp4. In addition, in the case where the cumulative number of times "n" of the first predetermined condition becomes "0" in the final game of the time-saving game state 4, the time-saving symbol J1 etc. or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed in the game. However, the non-counting period will continue.

(Example of production display for each production mode)
With reference to FIGS. 315 and 316, examples of performance display for each performance mode (motion before fluctuation, motion before stop, etc.) on the main display device 131 and a display example of performance of the number of reservations will be described. FIG. 315 is a diagram showing an example of a performance display for each performance mode on the main display device 131 (pre-fluctuation motion, pre-stop motion, etc.), and FIG. 316 is a diagram showing an example of display of the pending number on the main display device 131 It is.

As shown in FIGS. 315 and 316, the main display device 131 displays various effects in accordance with the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is not being executed, and a fluctuation display (pre-fluctuation operation, update fluctuation) of the performance symbol 50a that is performed while the special symbol fluctuation display is being executed. There is a variable display, a variable display (update variation) of a special symbol TZ (so-called fourth symbol) performed during the execution of a variable display of a special symbol, a jackpot performance performed during a jackpot game, and the like. The display section (effective display area) of the main display device 131 shows a variable display area for displaying the three effect symbols 50a (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) and a production mode related to the execution of the variable production. A mode display area and the like are formed. The main display device 131 also includes a first pending icon display area 50b for displaying a number of first pending icons (first pending information) corresponding to the first pending number in the normal gaming state, and a first pending icon display area 50b for displaying a number of first pending icons (first pending information) in the time saving gaming state. A second pending icon display area 50d (not shown) for displaying a number of second pending icons (second pending information) corresponding to the second pending number, and an icon indicating that a variable effect is being executed. The icon display area 50c for displaying (execution information), the first pending number display area SA for numerically displaying the first pending number, and the second pending number display area for numerically displaying the second pending number Area SB etc. are formed.

The production pattern 50a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is used for the variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 120 and the second special symbol display 122. The variable display is started in response to the start, and the stop display is performed in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbol. In addition, the production pattern 50a is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a manner to notify the result of the jackpot determination (loss mode, jackpot mode). The jackpot mode is a combination of the same performance symbols 50a, such as "777" or "555," and the loss mode is any other mode. The manner in which the performance symbols 50a are displayed in a variable manner is by scrolling in the vertical direction, but it may also be scrolling in the horizontal direction, switching on the spot, rotating (rotating), etc. good. Also, during the variable display (variable effect) of the effect pattern 50a, various effect images such as background images and characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the main display device 131 etc. according to the result of the jackpot determination. This increases players' expectations for the execution of a jackpot game (special game).

The first pending icon display area 50b includes, from the side closest to the icon display area 50c, a first display section 50b1 (first area), a second display section 50b2 (second area), and a third display section 50b3 (third area). , a fourth display section 50b4 (fourth area), and a number of first pending icons corresponding to the first pending number are displayed on the first display section 50b1 to fourth display section 50b4. . Specifically, the first display section 50b1 displays a first reservation icon indicating first reservation information for which a variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 50b2 displays a first reservation icon indicating the first reservation information for which a variable display of the first special symbol is performed. A first pending icon indicating first pending information for which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed is displayed, and a first pending icon indicating first pending information for which a variable display of the first special symbol is executed third is displayed on the third display section 50b3. A first pending icon indicating pending information is displayed, and the fourth display section 50b4 displays a first pending icon indicating first pending information for which variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. The second pending icon display area 50d is divided into a first display area 50d1, a second display area 50d2, a third display area 50d3, and a fourth display area 50d4 from the side closest to the icon display area 50c. , a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second pending number are displayed on the first display section 50d1 to the fourth display section 50d4.

The icon display area 50c is larger than each display section of the first hold icon display area 50b in order to clearly distinguish it from the first hold icon display area 50b and the second hold icon display area 50d. , the displayed icon is also displayed larger than the first pending icon. Specifically, for example, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (production symbol 50a), the first pending icon displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b moves toward the icon display area 50c. The first pending icon displayed on the first display section 50b1 becomes the icon by moving (shifting) to the icon display area 50c, and the first special symbol (production symbol 50a) At the end of the variable display, the icon is displayed so as to disappear (erase) (disappearance effect (disappearance effect) of the icon). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the first special symbol (effect symbol 50a).

As shown in FIG. 315(a), in production mode A (normal game state), the mode A background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation), and the production pattern 50a is displayed in the first mode (rectangular). The special symbol TZ is displayed in a common manner (numeric image) that is common to all production modes, and the cumulative number of times described above is A cumulative number of times image RK indicating the number of games corresponding to "n" is displayed. The first aspect of the production pattern 50a performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in the variation production, but as a pre-variation motion that suggests the start of this scroll display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is designed to last for 0.75 seconds, and the character image CG shakes its head at the symbol stop position for 0.9 seconds as a pre-stop motion to suggest that the scrolling display ends. It is supposed to be done. Further, in the icon display area (the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in a first form (hexagonal shape). The normal icon in the first mode always performs a swinging motion (direction motion) from the first posture (initial posture) tilting to the left to the second posture tilting to the right and back to the first posture (direction motion) in one cycle of 2 seconds. It is designed to be repeated. Furthermore, during the variable display in production mode A, variable BGM1 is output. Furthermore, the cumulative number of times image RK is hidden before the cumulative number of times "n" in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 780 times), and is displayed after reaching the predetermined number of times. Each time the game is started and one game in the normal game state ends (the display is stopped due to a losing symbol, etc.), the image is updated to a numerical value in which "1" is added.

As shown in FIG. 315(b), in production mode B (normal game state), the mode B background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation), and the production pattern 50a is displayed in the second mode (lantern The special design TZ is displayed in a common manner (number image) common to all production modes, and the special design TZ is displayed in a common manner (number image) common to all production modes, and the above-mentioned production mode A A cumulative number image RK in the same manner as is displayed. The production pattern 50a in the second mode performs a downward scroll display (update variation) in a variable production, but as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (update operation), a reduced display of the production pattern 50a is performed. It is designed to be performed for 0.5 seconds, and as a pre-stop operation before ending this scroll display (update operation), the production pattern 50a is reduced at the pattern stop position → normal display is performed for 0.5 seconds. This is how it is done. Further, in the icon display area (the first reserved icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in a second mode (shuttle shape). The normal icon in the second mode displays a swinging motion (direction motion) on the main display device 131 from the first posture (initial posture) tilting to the left to the second posture tilting to the right and back to the first posture. During display, the display is always repeated in one cycle of 2 seconds. Further, during the variable display in production mode B, variable BGM2 is output.

As shown in FIG. 315(c), in production mode C (normal game state), the mode C background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation), and the production pattern 50a is displayed in the third mode (R A beveled rectangular base image BG, a character image CG, a number image SG surrounded by a bevelled hexagonal image), and a special design TZ is displayed in a common format (number image) common to all production modes. The accumulated number of times image RK is displayed in the same manner as the production mode A described above. The production pattern 50a of the third aspect performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in a variable production, but as a pre-variation operation before starting this scroll display (updated variation), an enlarged display of the production pattern 50a is performed. is performed for 0.5 seconds, and as a pre-stop action before ending this scroll display (update fluctuation), the rotation display of the production symbol 50a is performed for 0.7 seconds at the symbol stop position. It looks like this. Further, in the icon display area (the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), if it is a normal icon, it is displayed in a third mode (star shape). The normal icon in the third aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the top, moves to the second posture in which the specific top moves, and then returns to the first posture (direction). The operation is repeated every 3 seconds per cycle. Furthermore, during the variable display in production mode C, variable BGM3 is output.

In addition, in the above-mentioned presentation modes A to C, the cumulative number image RK has a common aspect, but it may have a different aspect depending on the presentation mode. For example, the character font may have a different aspect. Alternatively, the sizes may be different. In addition, although the cumulative number of times image RK is assumed to start displaying after the cumulative number of times in the normal gaming state reaches a predetermined number (for example, 790 times), it is assumed that the cumulative number of times image RK is always displayed during the normal gaming state. You may also do so. Further, although the cumulative number of times image RK indicates the number of games corresponding to the above-mentioned cumulative number of times "n", it is not limited thereto. For example, the display mode may be such as to show the number of games until the transition to time-saving gaming state 3. Specifically, the display mode may be such as "20 games left until play time starts (shifting to time-saving gaming state 3)!!" It may also be possible to display a message encouraging the user to expect a transition to the time-saving gaming state 3.

As shown in FIG. 315(d), in production mode D (time-saving game state 1), the mode D background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation), and the production pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth mode ( It is displayed as a rectangular base image BG, number image SG), the special symbol TZ is displayed in a common format (number image) common to all production modes, and the remaining number of games that can be played in time-saving gaming state 1 (number of possible games A remaining number of times image JK suggesting that the player is hitting the ball to the right (corresponding to “M1”) is displayed, and a right-hand hitting image MG suggesting that the player is hitting the ball to the right is displayed. The production pattern 50a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in the variation production, but as a pre-variation motion that suggests the start of this scroll display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is designed to last for 0.4 seconds, and as a pre-stop action that indicates the end of this scroll display, the bounce display that floats upwards from the symbol stop position and then falls downwards is displayed for 0.4 seconds. It is now done across the board. Note that the bounce display as the pre-stop action is similar in presentation to the floating display as the pre-fluctuation action, but in the bount display, the movement speed of the production pattern 50a is faster and the height of the float is lower. . Further, in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in a fourth mode (round shape). The normal icon in the fourth aspect rotates from the first attitude (initial attitude) in which the black dot is located at the top, moves to the second attitude in which the black dot moves, and then returns to the first attitude (direction). The operation is repeated every 3 seconds per cycle. Further, during the variable display in production mode D, variable BGM4 is output. Furthermore, the remaining number of times image JK is updated to an image with a numerical value subtracted by "1" each time one game in the time-saving game state 1 ends (stop display due to losing symbols, etc.). The right-handed player image MG is displayed while the right-handed player lamp is on, and is not displayed while the right-handed player lamp is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 315(e), in production mode E (time-saving game state 2), the mode E background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation), and the production pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth mode ( The special symbol TZ is displayed in a common format (number image) that is common to all production modes, and the remaining number of games that can be played in time-saving gaming state 2 (the number of possible games "M2 ”) is displayed, and a right-handed image MG indicating that the player is hitting right-handed is displayed. The production pattern 50a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in the variation production, but as a pre-variation motion that suggests the start of this scroll display, it floats upward from the symbol stop position. The display is designed to last for 0.4 seconds, and as a pre-stop action that suggests the end of this scroll display, the rotation (small) display of the production symbol 50a is displayed for 0.4 seconds at the symbol stop position. This is how it is done. Further, in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in a fourth mode (round shape). The normal icon in the fourth aspect rotates from the first attitude (initial attitude) with the black dot at the top, moves to the second attitude where the black dot moves, and then returns to the first attitude (direction). The operation is repeated every 3 seconds per cycle. Furthermore, during the variable display in production mode E, variable BGM5 is output. Further, the remaining number of times image JK is updated to an image with a numerical value subtracted by "1" each time one game in the time-saving game state 2 ends (stop display due to losing symbols, etc.). The right-handed player image MG is displayed while the right-handed player lamp is on, and is not displayed while the right-hand player lamp is turned off.

As shown in FIG. 315(f), in production mode F (time-saving game state 3), the mode F background image is always displayed in a horizontally scrolled or scene-changed state (production operation), and the production pattern 50a is displayed in the fourth mode ( The special symbol TZ is displayed in a common format (numerical image) common to all production modes, and the remaining number of games in time-saving game state 3 (possible number of games "M3") A remaining number of times image JK suggesting a right-handed hit (corresponding to ) is displayed, and a right-handed hitting image MG suggesting a right-handed hit is displayed. The production pattern 50a of the fourth aspect performs a downward scroll display (updated variation) in the variable production, but as a pre-variation action that suggests that this scroll display starts, the production pattern 50a is reduced to 0. .It is designed to last for 4 seconds, and as a pre-stop action that indicates the end of this scroll display, a bounce (small) display that floats upward from the symbol stop position will be displayed for 0.4 seconds. It has become. Further, in the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the normal icon is displayed in a fifth form (pentagonal shape). The normal icon in the fifth aspect rotates from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific top is located at the top, moves to the second posture in which the specific top moves, and then returns to the first posture (direction). The operation is repeated every 3 seconds per cycle. Furthermore, during the variable display in production mode F, variable BGM6 is output. Further, the remaining number of times image JK is updated to an image with a numerical value subtracted by "1" each time one game in the time-saving game state 3 ends (stop display due to losing symbols, etc.). The right-handed player image MG is displayed while the right-handed player lamp is on, and is not displayed while the right-hand player lamp is turned off.

In addition, even if the performance pattern 50a performs any of the multiple types of pre-fluctuation movements (levitation display, enlarged display, reduced display) in the fluctuation performance, the pre-fluctuation movement or scroll display (updated display) of the three performance patterns 50a The start order of the fluctuations) is set to be the same (left → middle → right), but the pre-fluctuation movements and scroll display (updated fluctuations) of the three production symbols 50a are performed according to the types of multiple types of pre-fluctuation movements. The starting order may be different (elevating display: left → middle → right, enlarged display: middle → left → right, reduced display: right → middle → left, etc.). Further, a plurality of types of pre-fluctuation motions of the performance symbols 50a may be provided for each performance mode so that the jackpot expectation level is different. In addition, when the performance pattern 50a performs any of multiple types of pre-stop actions (head shaking display, reduction → normal display, rotation display, bound display, rotation (small) display, bounce (small) display) in the variable production. However, the order of the pre-stop motions and temporary stops of the three performance symbols 50a is the same (left → right → center), but the order of the pre-stop motions and temporary stops of the three production symbols 50a is the same (left → right → center), The order of the pre-stop motion or temporary stop of the effect pattern 50a may be changed (head shaking display: left → right → center, rotating display: left → center → right, etc.). Further, a plurality of types of pre-stop motion of the performance symbol 50a may be provided for each performance mode so that the jackpot expectation level is different.

Further, although the details of the performance mode corresponding to the time-saving game state 4 are not explained, it may be the same as the performance mode F corresponding to the time-saving game state 3, and the above-mentioned performance modes A to F are different from each other. It may be of a different form, for example, as the performance mode G, the background image and BGM of the performance mode F may be composed of the mode G background image and BGM7. The mode of the performance symbols 50a in the time-saving game states 1 to 4 may also be different in each state. In this way, the background images, BGM, etc. are different in time-saving gaming states 1 to 4, so after transitioning to time-saving gaming states 1 to 4, the player can check the current time-saving gaming state type. can be easily recognized. In addition, in the above-mentioned time-saving game states 1 to 4, although the production mode is different for each, the game is executed in the same production mode during each time-saving game, but depending on the possible number of games during each time-saving game. The presentation mode may be changed by changing the presentation mode. For example, in time-saving game state 3, when the possible number of games "M3" reaches "100" (when the game in time-saving game state 2 is played 600 times), the production mode F is changed to a different production mode. This may be the case.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned performance modes D to F, etc. (time-saving game states 1 to 4), the remaining number of times image JK is of a common form, but it may be of a different form depending on the performance mode. For example, the character fonts may be in different formats, or the character sizes may be in different formats. Further, depending on the above-mentioned performance modes D to F (time saving game states 1 to 4), it may be set whether the remaining number of times image JK is displayed or not. Furthermore, the remaining number of times image JK may be always displayed during each time-saving gaming state, or may be displayed until a predetermined number of games are played after transitioning to each time-saving gaming state, M" may be displayed only after a predetermined number of times or during a predetermined period during a time-saving gaming state. For example, in time-saving game state 1 (performance mode D) and time-saving game state 2 (performance mode E), the remaining number of times image JK is displayed, and in the early game after transition, such as time-saving game state 3 (performance mode F), the remaining number of times image JK is displayed. The remaining number of times image JK may be displayed without displaying the number of times image JK, and after the possible number of games "M3" in the time-saving gaming state 3 is subtracted to "100", the display of the remaining number of times image JK may be started.

The first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the second pending icon display area 50d are assumed to have a common aspect in each performance mode, but may have different aspects depending on the performance mode, for example. For example, they may have different colors, decorations, or shapes. In addition, in the above-mentioned performance modes D to F, a display indicating the current gaming state may be displayed, such as "time saving 1 mode", "time saving 2 mode", "time saving 3 mode", etc. The display may be displayed at the top of the main display device 131. Furthermore, in the above-mentioned first reservation number display area SA, second reservation number display area SB, and special symbol TZ, the display position in production modes A to C and the display position in production modes D to F are different. Although different embodiments are shown, they may be displayed at the same position, for example, at the lower right corner or lower left corner of the main display device 131.

Here, a time-saving effect pattern that corresponds to the time-saving pattern and is composed of three predetermined effect patterns 50a will be explained. As mentioned above (see Fig. 303 (a-4)), the time-saving symbols include the special symbol J1 corresponding to the transition to time-saving gaming state 4 where the possible number of games is 100, and the special symbol J1 which corresponds to the transition to time-saving gaming state 4 where the number of possible games is 700. A special symbol J2 corresponding to the transition to the time-saving gaming state 4 is set. The time-saving effect patterns corresponding to these special patterns J1 and J2 may be composed of the same effect pattern 50a (for example, "151"), or may be composed of the same effect pattern 50a (for example, "151"), or may be composed of different effect patterns 50a (for example, " 151" and "515"), or a plurality of types of time-saving effect symbols corresponding to each special symbol may be set.

Further, the time-saving effect pattern is mainly composed of a effect pattern 50a that is composed of a pattern showing numbers, etc., but is not limited to this and may have various forms. For example, the time-saving effect design may include a special design mainly composed of only characters such as "time-saving". Specifically, the time-saving effect pattern may be composed of a ``1'' effect pattern 50a, a ``time-saving'' exclusive pattern, a ``1'' effect pattern 50a, etc., and especially during a variable effect using the effect pattern 50a. , after the two "1" production symbols 50a are temporarily stopped, the "time saving" exclusive symbol may be temporarily stopped. In such a mode, in the case of a game with a variable pattern in which a reach effect is executed, the special symbols are not included in the performance symbols 50a that are being displayed in a variable manner during a period in which the reach effect is not executed, and the exclusive symbols are included after the execution of the reach effect. may be displayed. In addition, in a game in which the time saving design is not stopped and displayed (a game determined in the jackpot determination process that the time saving 4 has not been won), the temporarily stopped special symbol changes to the normal performance symbol 50a. Good too. With such a mode, even if the game is not stopped and displayed with the time-saving symbol, the expectation level for transition to the time-saving game state 4 can be improved by the stop-display of the time-saving symbol. Furthermore, in the transition to the time-saving game state 3 according to the cumulative number of times, the effect pattern 50a is stopped and displayed in a pattern such as the above-mentioned dedicated pattern (a mode different from the effect pattern 50a corresponding to the time-saving effect pattern or the jackpot/small win). For example, a pattern consisting of the words "Start time-saving game!") may be stopped and displayed at the time of transition.

As shown in FIG. 316(a), first, when the number of reservations is "0" and the customer is waiting, no icon is displayed in the first reservation icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c, and the number of reservations is "0". “0” is displayed in each of the display area SA and the second reservation number display area SB.

As shown in FIG. 316(b), next, when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 and the first pending number becomes "1", the first display section of the first pending icon display area 50b will display the normal The pending icon HI in the display mode is additionally displayed (increased display), and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" (increased display). At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the production motion (swinging motion) is started from there.

As shown in FIG. 316(c), next, when the first pending number decreases to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b. Shift display (decreasing display, change display) of the pending icon HI toward the icon display area 50c is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "0" (decreasing display). At this time, the pending icon HI changes its transparency from opaque and is displayed semi-transparently, but the presentation action (shaking action) continues.

As shown in FIG. 316(d), next, when the shift display of the pending icon HI is completed, the pending icon HI is displayed as the relevant icon TI in a larger size than the pending icon HI and is opaque, and the presentation operation (shaking) is performed. operation) is performed continuously.

As shown in FIG. 316(e), when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 and the first pending number becomes "1", a normal display is displayed on the first display section of the first pending icon display area 50b. Additional display (increasing display) of the pending icon HI of the mode is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" (increasing display). At this time, the additionally displayed pending icon HI starts its production operation (shaking operation) in synchronization with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and the semi-transparent minimal The image will be enlarged from normal size to normal size. In other words, in a state where the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner, the display of the pending icon HI may not start from the first attitude (initial attitude).

As shown in FIG. 316(f), next, when the additional display (increasing display) of the pending icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the additionally displayed pending icon HI in the normal display mode is normal size and opaque. is displayed, and the effect movement (shaking movement) continues to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(g), when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 and the first pending number becomes "2", it is determined that the icon change effect is to be executed. Additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is started on the second display section of the first hold icon display area 50b, and the hold number in the first hold number display area SA is "2". will be updated (increased display). At this time, the additionally displayed pending icon HI has a production motion (rotation motion) that is not synchronized with the icon in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI) from the first posture (initial posture) in which the specific part is located at the top. The screen is enlarged from a translucent, extremely small size to a normal size along with an effect image.

As shown in FIG. 316(h), when the additional display (increasing display) of the hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is completed, the additional display of the hold icon HI in the first special display mode (blue) is completed. The HI is displayed in a normal size and opaque, and the presentation operation (rotation operation) continues.

As shown in FIG. 316(i), when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished and the display is stopped, erasure display of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c is started. At this time, the icon TI that is displayed as disappearing gradually becomes more transparent and disappears along with the effect image, but even during the disappearing display, the effect operation (shaking motion) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(j), next, when the first pending number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b. Shift display (decreasing display) for the two pending icons HI toward the icon display area 50c is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" (decreasing display). At this time, the two pending icons HI change their transparency from opaque and are displayed semi-transparently, but the performance operations (shaking motion, rotation motion) continue to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(k), next, when the shift display of the two hold icons HI is completed, the hold icon HI in the normal display mode that was displayed in the first display part of the first hold icon display area 50b changes. The icon TI has a larger size than the pending icon HI and is displayed in an opaque manner, and the effect motion (shaking motion) is continuously performed. Further, the hold icon HI in the first special mode that had been displayed on the second display part of the first hold icon display area 50b is displayed in the first display part in a normal size and opaque, and along with this, the icon change effect is displayed. Although the display mode changes to the second special display mode (red), the presentation operation (rotation operation) continues.

As shown in FIG. 316(l), when a game ball enters the first starting device 112 and the first pending number becomes "2", a normal display is displayed on the second display section of the first pending icon display area 50b. Additional display (increasing display) of the pending icon HI of the mode is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "2" (increasing display). At this time, the additionally displayed pending icon HI starts its production operation (shaking operation) in synchronization with other icons in the normal display mode (here, the icon TI), and the semi-transparent minimal The image will be enlarged from normal size to normal size.

As shown in FIG. 316(m), next, when the additional display (increasing display) of the pending icon HI in the normal display mode is completed, the additionally displayed pending icon HI in the normal display mode is normal size and opaque. is displayed, and the effect movement (shaking movement) continues to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(n), when the variable display of the first special symbol ends and is stopped, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c starts to disappear. At this time, the icon TI that is displayed as disappearing gradually becomes more transparent along with the effect image and disappears, but even during the disappearing display, a performance operation (shaking motion) is performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(o), next, when the first pending number decreases to "1" and the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first pending icon is displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b. Shift display (decreasing display) toward the icon display area 50c for the two pending icons HI during performance operation is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1" (decreasing display). Ru. At this time, the two pending icons HI change their transparency from opaque and are displayed semi-transparently, but the performance operations (shaking motion, rotation motion) continue to be performed.

As shown in FIG. 316(p), for example, if the conditions for switching from production mode A to production mode B are satisfied, the main display device 131 displays a shielding image (blackout image BO, A whiteout image WO, etc.) is displayed, and while the pending numbers in the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB remain visible, the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c are displayed. Visibility of icons is restricted.

As shown in FIG. 316(q), in the layer behind the occluded image, the display mode and presentation action (rotation action) of the icon TI are maintained, while the pending icon HI is displayed as normal display corresponding to presentation mode B. The mode is switched to the hold icon HI. At this time, the hold icon HI is displayed in a first posture (initial posture) tilted to the left, and the production motion (swinging motion) is started from there.

As shown in FIG. 316(r), when the shielding image is erased, the pending icon HI in the normal display mode displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b and the second pending icon HI displayed in the icon display area 50c are displayed. The icon TI in the special display mode can be visually recognized.

In addition, when two or more pending icons in the normal display mode are displayed, the normal display mode is The presentation operation is performed so that the plurality of pending icons in the display mode are synchronized. In addition, here, we have mainly explained the hold display example in production mode A, but other production modes also differ in the display mode of the hold icon and the operation production mode, but basically the same number of pending displays (production (including display when switching modes). Further, the timing at which the display of a decrease in the number on hold may start may be made earlier than the timing at which the change display of the hold icon to the corresponding icon (shift display of the hold icon to the hold icon) starts. The timing at which the reduction display of the pending number is completed may be earlier than the timing at which the change display of the icon to the corresponding icon (shift display of the pending icon to the pending icon) is completed. Further, the timing at which the increasing display of the pending number starts and ends earlier than the timing at which the increasing display of the pending icon starts. In addition, not only the transparency but also the shape or the like may be made different between the start of increasing display of pending icons and the end of increasing display.

Furthermore, the timing at which the presentation action of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new starting prize is synchronized with the presentation action of other pending icons may be at the start of the display, or after a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the display. It may be the time, the start of the shift display, or the completion of the shift display. In addition, when restarting the performance operation of the hold icon after the shift display of the hold icon, even if the hold icon resumes the performance operation from the initial posture at the position after the shift display (the hold icon display area, the icon display area). good.

In addition, even when the special symbol (production symbol) is stopped and displayed and the icon disappears, the icon continues to perform the production operation. The operation may be terminated. In addition, multiple icons displayed in the normal display mode (pending icons, a pending icon and the relevant icon) are designed to synchronize and perform their effects, but they do not perform their effects in complete synchronization. , the performance operations may be performed substantially synchronously. Note that the timing at which the presentation behavior of the pending icon displayed in the normal display mode based on a new start-up win is approximately synchronized with the presentation behavior of other pending icons may be at the start of the display, or within a predetermined period of time from the start of the display. It may be at the elapsed time, at the start of the shift display, or at the completion of the shift display.

(Example of effect display for each time-saving game state)
With reference to FIGS. 317 to 319, specific examples of display effects in time-saving game states 1 to 4 will be described. FIG. 317 is a diagram illustrating the time-saving entry effect executed at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2, and the display effect executed before the end of the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2, ( a-1) and (a-2) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the time-saving game state 1, etc. when transitioning to the time-saving game state 1, etc., and (a-3) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the time-saving game state 1, etc. before the end of the time-saving game state 1, etc. It is a figure which shows an example of the display mode of the display effect in, and (b) is a figure explaining various display effects before and after transition to time-saving game state 1 etc. FIG. 318 is a diagram explaining the display effects executed before and after the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3 or the time-saving gaming state 4, and (a-1) and (a-2) are diagrams for explaining the display effects executed before and after the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3. It is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of display effects before and after, (b-1) is a diagram explaining various display effects before and after transition to time-saving game state 3, and (b-2) is a figure illustrating various display effects before and after transition to time-saving game state 3. 4 is a diagram illustrating various display effects before and after the transition to 4. FIG. FIG. 319 is a diagram illustrating the display performance at the end of the time-saving game states 1 to 4, and (a) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode at the end of the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2, (b-1) is a diagram explaining the display mode before and after the end of the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2, and (b-2) is a diagram explaining the display mode before and after the end of the time-saving game state 3. , (b-3) is a diagram explaining the display mode before and after the end of the time-saving game state 4.

As shown in FIGS. 317(a-1) and (a-2), when the jackpot gaming state ends and the transition is made to the time-saving gaming state 1 or the time-saving gaming state 2, the time-saving gaming state 1, etc. is started. Execute a time-saving rush effect that suggests. In a time-saving entry performance such as time-saving game state 1, for example, a background image at the time of entry corresponding to the time-saving entry performance is displayed as a background image on the main display device 131, and a transition to time-saving game state 1 is indicated. A rush image CT which is an image to notify, a prevention image CH which is an image to notify of prevention of forgetting to take out a game card inserted into a gaming device, and a right-handed hitting image MG which is an image suggesting right-handed hitting. Is displayed. After that, instead of the prevention image CH, a warning image nh, which is an image that warns against gaming addiction, is displayed. In addition, the right-handed game image MG is displayed from the start of the jackpot game to the jackpot game after shifting to the jackpot game state, and continues to be displayed even after the shift to the time-saving gaming state 1 or the like.

As shown in FIG. 317(a-3), before the end of the time-saving gaming state 1 or the time-saving gaming state 2, the main display device 131 displays, for example, the remaining number of games that can be played in the time-saving gaming state 1, etc. A remaining number image GJ, which is an image notifying the number of times (corresponding to "M1"/"M2"), is displayed. In addition, the remaining number of times image GJ starts to be displayed when the number of possible games becomes less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), and when one game in the time-saving game state 1 etc. ends (it stops displaying when a losing symbol etc. ), the number of times "1" has been subtracted is displayed. At this time, since the main display device 131 is in the time-saving game state 1, the mode D background image, the remaining number of times image JK, and the effect pattern 50a (variable display) are displayed as described above (see FIG. 315(d)). or stop display), special symbol TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB), icon display area (second pending icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c), The icon TI and the like are displayed, and the remaining number image GJ is displayed in a large size in the front so as to cover the effect pattern 50a at approximately the center of the main display device 131. In addition, in the last game in the time-saving game state 1, etc., the remaining number of times image GJ may be displayed in the form of "LAST". In addition, the remaining number of times image GJ is displayed before the end of the time-saving gaming state 1 or the time-saving gaming state 2, but it is also displayed in a similar manner before the end of the time-saving gaming state 3 and the time-saving gaming state 4. You may also do so.

As shown in FIG. 317(b), before and after the transition to the time-saving gaming state 1 and the time-saving gaming state 2, display performances are executed in the order of jackpot medium performance → time-saving entry performance → time-saving medium performance. Here, the time th1 is the time when the round period in the jackpot game ends and the ending period starts, and the time th2 is the time when the ending period ends. First, in the round period of the jackpot game before the time point th1, the production pattern 50a, the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are hidden, and the jackpot background image corresponding to the jackpot production is displayed. In this state, a jackpot effect consisting of a video or the like in a predetermined manner is executed. Next, during the period from time th1 to time th2, the effect pattern 50a is not displayed, the background image at the time of entry is displayed, and the entry image CT, prevention image CH, and warning image nh are displayed. A time-saving rush effect is executed (see FIGS. 317(a-1) and (a-2)). However, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh during this period are such that only the prevention image CH is displayed for a predetermined period from the start, and after that, the prevention image CH is hidden after the predetermined period has passed, and the prevention image CH is The prevention image CH and the warning image nh are not displayed at the same time, such as the warning image nh being displayed instead of CH. Then, in the period during the time saving game state 1 after the time saving th2, the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are hidden, and the time saving background image such as the mode D background is displayed. A variable display based on the fourth aspect of the performance symbol 50a is displayed, and a time saving medium performance consisting of a moving image or the like in a predetermined manner is executed. Note that the period during which the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are displayed is not limited to the period described above, and may be any other period. For example, during the period in which the prevention image CH is displayed, the warning image nh may also be displayed in at least part of the period. Further, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh may be displayed at the start of execution of the time-saving effect or immediately before the end of the time-saving game state 1 or the like. Furthermore, in the period from time th1 to th2, after displaying the entry image CT for a predetermined period on the main display device 131, the mode D background image, the effect pattern 50a of the fourth aspect, etc. A right-handed hitting start image suggesting a right-handed hitting start, such as "Please start!", may be displayed in a size that covers substantially all of the three performance symbols 50a. Then, when displaying the right-handed game starting image, a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started may also be output.

As shown in FIG. 318(a-1), next, before the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3, the main display device 131 displays, for example, the cumulative number of games played in the normal gaming state (the cumulative number "n"). A cumulative number of times image AK is displayed, which is an image that notifies the user of the corresponding action). In addition, the cumulative number of times image AK notifies the remaining number of games until the transition to time-saving gaming state 3, and is started to be displayed when the cumulative number of times reaches a predetermined number (for example, 795 times). Each time one game in a gaming state or the like is completed (stopped and displayed due to a losing symbol, etc.), the number of times "1" has been subtracted is displayed to notify you. At this time, since the main display device 131 is in the normal gaming state, the mode A background image, the accumulated number of times image RK, and the performance symbol 50a (variable display or stop display), special symbol TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB), icon display area (first pending icon display area 50b, relevant icon display area 50c), relevant Icons TI, etc. are displayed, and the cumulative number of times image AK is displayed in a large size in the front so as to cover the effect pattern 50a at approximately the center of the main display device 131. Further, the cumulative number of times image AK is displayed immediately after the start of the game, and is hidden after a predetermined time (for example, a time shorter than the variation time of the variation pattern with the shortest variation time) has elapsed. With such a display time of the cumulative number of times image AK, it is possible to suppress the inconvenience that the cumulative number of times image AK displayed in the game in question is also displayed during the next game. In addition, the cumulative number of times image AK may be displayed in the form of "LAST" in the game immediately before shifting to the time-saving game state 3, or it may be displayed in the form of "LAST", or it may be displayed in the form of "2 more plays until chance time". It may also be possible to display a message encouraging the user to expect a transition to state 3.

As shown in FIG. 318(a-2), when the normal game state ends and the time-saving game state 3 is entered, a time-saving entry effect indicating that the time-saving game state 3 is started is executed. Then, in the time-saving entry performance of the time-saving game state 3, for example, a background image at the time of entry corresponding to the time-saving entry performance is displayed as a background image on the main display device 131, and the transition to the time-saving game state 3 is notified. A rush image CT is displayed. At this time, in order to shift to the time-saving game state 3, the main display device 131 displays the performance symbols 50a of the fourth mode (fluctuating display or stop display), the right Striking image MG, special symbol TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB), icon display area (first pending icon display area 50b, relevant icon display area 50c), relevant Icons TI and the like are displayed, and the entry image CT is displayed in a large size in the front so as to cover the effect pattern 50a at approximately the center of the main display device 131. The entry image CT was assumed to be displayed during the time-saving entry effect when transitioning to the time-saving game state 3, but it is also displayed in a similar manner during the time-saving entry effect when transitioning to the time-saving game state 4. It is also possible to do so.

As shown in FIG. 318 (b-1), before and after the transition to time-saving game state 3, the normal medium performance → time-saving entry performance → time-saving medium performance as shown in FIG. 318 (a-1) above. Display effects are executed in order. Here, the time ti1 is the time when the normal game state shifts to the time-saving game state 3. First, during the normal game state before time ti1, the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are not displayed, and the normal background image (mode A background image, etc.) is displayed, and the first Effect pattern 50a (fluctuating display or static display) such as mode, cumulative number image AK (predetermined period as described above), cumulative number image RK, special symbol TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, The second pending number display area SB), the icon display area (the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Next, in the period after time ti1, first, a time-saving entry effect is executed, and for example, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are not displayed, and the normal background image is replaced with the entry background image as the background image. In the displayed state, the entry image CT, the production pattern 50a of the fourth mode switched from the first mode, etc., the special symbol TZ, the reserved number display area (the first reserved number display area SA, the second reserved number display area SB) ), the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Then, when the time-saving entry effect ends, the time-saving medium effect is executed, and for example, the entry image CT is hidden while the prevention image CH and the warning image nh remain hidden, and the entry image is changed from the entry background image as a background image. In the state displayed instead of the time-saving background image (Mode F background), the production pattern 50a of the fourth mode, the special pattern TZ, the pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB) , the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. The time-saving entry performance is executed regardless of whether or not the first game after the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3 is executed (whether or not there is a hold at the time of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state 3). In addition, when there is a hold at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 3, and when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the time of transition, and a variable display of the effect pattern 50a is displayed, the background image of the time-saving medium effect is displayed. It may also be used as a time-saving background image (mode F background). Furthermore, in the time-saving entry performance, after displaying the entry image CT for a predetermined period on the main display device 131, the mode D background image, the performance pattern 50a of the fourth aspect, etc. A right-handed hitting start image suggesting a right-handed hitting start such as "Please!" may be displayed in a size that covers substantially all of the three performance symbols 50a. Then, when displaying the right-handed game starting image, a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started may also be output.

Furthermore, in the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 3 as described above (the variable display of the game when the cumulative number of times "n" becomes "0"), the variable time is neither longer nor shorter than usual, and a dedicated variable time that corresponds only to the transition to the time-saving game state 3 is not set. On the other hand, after the transition to the time-saving game state 3, in the game in the time-saving game state 3, a dedicated variation such as a variation time of the second special symbol display 122 that is longer or shorter than usual. A time may be set. Specifically, in the case of transitioning to the time-saving gaming state 3 after RAM clear processing, a dedicated variable time is not set for the time-saving gaming state 3, and in the case of shifting to the time-saving gaming state 3 after the jackpot state. , a dedicated variable time may be set for the time-saving game state 3.

As shown in FIG. 318 (b-2), before and after the transition to time-saving game state 4, the order is as follows: normal medium performance (time-saving transition performance) in which time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed → time-saving entry performance → time-saving medium performance. A display effect is executed. Here, the time tj1 is the time when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the previous game, and the normal game state shifts to the time-saving game state 4. First, during the normal game state before time tj1, the rush image CT, the prevention image CH, and the warning image nh are not displayed, and with the normal background image (mode A background image, etc.) being displayed, the first Effect patterns 50a such as modes (fluctuating display, stop display, stop display with time-saving symbols), cumulative number image RK, special symbol TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB) ), the icon display area (the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Next, in the period after time tj1, first, a time-saving entry effect is executed, for example, the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are hidden, and the normal background image is replaced by the entry background image as the background image. In the displayed state, the entry image CT, the production pattern 50a of the fourth mode switched from the first mode, etc., the special symbol TZ, the reserved number display area (the first reserved number display area SA, the second reserved number display area SB) ), the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Then, when the time-saving entry effect ends, the time-saving medium effect is executed, and for example, the entry image CT is hidden while the prevention image CH and the warning image nh remain hidden, and the entry image is changed from the entry background image as a background image. In the state displayed instead of the time-saving background image (Mode F background), the production pattern 50a of the fourth mode, the special pattern TZ, the pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB) , the icon display area (the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c), the icon TI, etc. are displayed. Incidentally, the time-saving entry performance is executed regardless of whether or not the first game after the transition to the time-saving game state 4 is executed (whether or not there is a hold at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 4). In addition, when there is a hold at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 4, and when the special symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the time of transition, and a variable display of the effect pattern 50a is displayed, the background image of the time-saving medium effect is displayed. It may also be used as a time-saving background image (mode F background). Furthermore, in the time-saving entry performance, after displaying the entry image CT for a predetermined period on the main display device 131, the mode D background image, the performance pattern 50a of the fourth aspect, etc. A right-handed hitting start image suggesting a right-handed hitting start such as "Please!" may be displayed in a size that covers substantially all of the three performance symbols 50a. Then, when displaying the right-handed game starting image, a sound instructing that the right-handed game should be started may also be output.

In addition, in the normal medium performance before the transition to time-saving game state 3 (see FIG. 318 (a-1)), the icon display area is displayed even while the cumulative number of times image AK is being displayed. Display performance of pending changes can be executed. Here, for example, during the display of the accumulated number of times image AK in the normal performance before shifting to the time-saving game state 3, execution of the display performance of the pending change may be restricted. If this is the normal performance before the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3, the player will be able to watch the progress until the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3 by displaying the cumulative number of times image AK without paying attention to the performance of the pending change. It becomes easier to understand the remaining number of games. In addition, in the normal performance before transition to time-saving gaming state 3, which restricts the execution of the display performance of pending changes while the cumulative number of times image AK is displayed, the cumulative number of times image AK is not displayed, and the cumulative number of times image JK is displayed. It is also possible to display only the Even in the normal medium performance before the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3, the player does not pay attention to the performance of the pending change, but by displaying the accumulated number of times image JK, the player can play until the transition to the time-saving gaming state 3. It becomes easier to understand the remaining number of games.

Here, the time-saving rush performance at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 1 and the time-saving game state 2 is compared with the time-saving rush performance at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4. First, in the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to the time-saving game state 1, etc., although the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are displayed, the performance symbol 50a, special symbol TZ, pending number display area, etc. are hidden. . On the other hand, in the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to the time-saving game state 3 etc., although the prevention image CH and the warning image nh are hidden, the performance pattern 50a, special symbol TZ, pending number display area, etc. are displayed. That's what I do. This is a time-saving effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 1, which is executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, and for the player, the jackpot judgment by the effect pattern 50a, special symbol TZ, pending number display area, etc. This is because there is no need to check the results, and on the contrary, there is a strong need for alerting using the prevention image CH and the warning image nh. On the other hand, in the time-saving rush effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 3, etc., which is executed during a period other than the ending period of the jackpot game, it is necessary for the player to be alerted by the prevention image CH and the warning image nh. This is because it is highly necessary to check the result of the jackpot determination based on the performance symbol 50a, the special symbol TZ, the reserved number display area, etc. In addition, in the time-saving rush effect when transitioning to the time-saving game state 3, etc., by hiding the prevention image CH and the warning image nh, which are less necessary for the player to check, the main display device 131 can display them. Based on the excessive amount of image information, it is also possible to prevent the player from failing to check information that is highly necessary. Furthermore, in the time-saving entry performance at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 3, etc., although the performance symbol 50a is not displayed, a special symbol TZ may be displayed. Even in this mode, it is possible to prevent the player from failing to check information that is highly necessary based on the excessive amount of image information displayed on the main display device 131.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to the time-saving gaming states 1 to 4 described above, the entry image CT is mainly displayed so that the player can recognize that the transition has been made to the time-saving gaming states 1 to 4. However, the present invention is not limited to this mode, and various other modes may be used as long as the player can recognize the mode. For example, the special symbol TZ may always be displayed in the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to any of the time-saving game states 1 to 4. More specifically, in the time-saving rush effect when transitioning to time-saving gaming state 1 or time-saving gaming state 2, a stop display of the special symbol TZ corresponding to the jackpot symbol is displayed, and when transitioning to time-saving gaming state 3, the time-saving rush effect is displayed. In the entry performance, a stop display of the special symbol TZ corresponding to the losing symbol is displayed, and in the time-saving entry performance at the time of transition to time-saving game state 4, a stop display of the special symbol TZ corresponding to the time-saving symbol is displayed. Become. With such an aspect, the player can easily recognize the type of time-saving game state after the transition by displaying the special symbol TZ during the time-saving entry effect.

In addition, in the time-saving entry performance at the time of transition to the above-mentioned time-saving game state 3, the performance pattern 50a, the right-handed image MG, the special symbol TZ, the icon display area, the icon TI, etc. are displayed, and the performance pattern 50a is displayed. However, even if the rush image CT is displayed with only the effect pattern 50a hidden among these displayed images, etc. good. In such a mode, the time-saving entry performance at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming state 1 and the time-saving gaming state 2 in a mode in which the special symbol TZ, icon display area, etc. are not displayed (Fig. 317 (a-1) etc.) and the time-saving entry performance at the time of transition to time-saving gaming state 3, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the type of time-saving gaming state to which the transition has been made. Moreover, in each of the time-saving entry performances at the time of transition to the above-mentioned time-saving gaming states 1 to 4, any mode may be used as long as it is easy for the player to recognize the type of time-saving gaming state. For example, in the time-saving entry performance when transitioning to the time-saving game state 3, at least one element among the performance symbol 50a, the right-handed image MG, the special symbol TZ, the icon display area, the icon TI, etc. is displayed. Similarly, in the time-saving entry effect at the time of transition to the time-saving game state 4, elements different from those displayed in the time-saving game state 3 may be displayed. . In such a mode, although the rush image CT is displayed in the time-saving rush performance when transitioning to each time-saving gaming state, the elements displayed other than the rush image CT will be different, so that the player The type of time-saving gaming state after the transition can be easily recognized.

As shown in FIG. 319(a), at the end of the time-saving gaming state 1 and the time-saving gaming state 2, the main display device 131 displays, for example, information regarding the profits earned during the periods of the jackpot gaming state and the time-saving gaming state 1, etc. A result image GP is displayed. In addition, the result image GP includes the number of jackpot games (e.g., 3 times) during the period (advantageous period) from winning the first jackpot game to transitioning to the low probability non-time-saving gaming state, and the number of jackpot games (for example, 3 times) during the said advantageous period. The total number of paid out prize balls (for example, 4515 balls) is displayed. At this time, the main display device 131 displays the result image GP, the right-handed image MG, the special symbol, and the result image GP, the right-handed image MG, and the special symbol. TZ, pending number display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB), icon display area (second pending icon display area 50d, relevant icon display area 50c), relevant icon TI, etc. are displayed. Ru. In addition, the total number of prize balls in the result image GP includes prize balls based on winnings for the big prize winning device such as the first big winning device 117, and prize balls for starting devices such as the first starting device 112 and general winning holes. Prize balls paid out based on pitches are not included. However, the total number of prize balls in the result image GP may include prize balls paid out by balls entering the general winning hole.

As shown in FIG. 319 (b-1), next, at the end of the time-saving gaming state 1 and the time-saving gaming state 2, the time-saving gaming state 1, etc. is normally changed to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state). to move to. Here, the time tk1 is the time when the last game in the time saving game state 1 etc. (the game determined to be a loss in the jackpot determination) is started, and the time tk2 is the time when the end of the last game is suggested ( The time tk3 is the time when the time-saving game state 1, etc. ends and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. First, at time tk1, the result image GP is not displayed, and a time-saving medium performance in the time-saving game state 1, etc., and a variable display using the performance symbols 50a of the fourth mode are displayed. Next, at time tk2, the result image GP is displayed as described above. Then, at time tk3, the result image GP is hidden, and a left-handed hitting start image that suggests the start of left-handed hitting, such as "Please return to left-handed hitting!", covers almost all of the three performance symbols 50a. The game is displayed in a size similar to the above, and a normal performance such as a normal game state is also displayed. That is, the result image GP is displayed from the middle of the last game in the time saving game state 1 until the end. In addition, the left-handed game start image is displayed after the transition from the time-saving gaming state 1 to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state, regardless of whether the first game is executed or not (regardless of whether there is a pending number of games). Ru. Furthermore, when displaying the left-handed game start image, a sound instructing that the left-handed game should be started may also be output.

As shown in FIGS. 319(b-2) and (b-3), at the end of the time-saving game state 3 or the time-saving game state 4, normally, from the time-saving game state 3 or the time-saving game state 4, the Shift to gaming state (normal gaming state). Here, the time point tl is the time point when the time-saving game state 3 or the time-saving game state 4 ends and shifts to the low-probability non-time-saving game state. Before and after time tl, the result image GP is not displayed, so in time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4, although the left-handed starting image is displayed at the end, the result image GP is not displayed. It will end. In addition, as described above, the left-handed game start image is displayed after the transition from the time-saving game state 3 to the low-probability non-time-saving game state, regardless of whether or not the first game is executed (depending on the presence or absence of the number of reservations). (regardless) is displayed. Further, when displaying the left-handed game start image, a sound instructing that the left-handed game should be started may also be output. Here, the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4 are different from the time-saving game state 1, etc., and are not states transferred after the jackpot game, so the first big winning device There is no chance of winning a prize in a big prize winning device such as 117. Therefore, the number of jackpot games displayed in the result image GP is "0" and the total number of prize balls is "0". In other words, at the end of the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4, the result image GP indicating that the number of jackpot games is "0" and the total number of prize balls is "0" is not displayed. , it is possible to prevent the player's desire to play the game from being lost when such a result image GP is displayed. In addition, at the end of the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4, an image may be displayed on the main display device 131 to notify the end of the time-saving game state 3, such as "time-saving end".

Although the result image GP is not displayed at the end of the above-mentioned time-saving game state 3 and time-saving game state 4, the result image GP may be displayed. In this way, when the result image GP that the number of jackpot games is "0" and the total number of prize balls is "0" is displayed at the end of the time-saving game state 3 and the time-saving game state 4, In this case, the player can easily recognize that the time-saving game state 3, etc. has ended. Further, although the result image GP displayed at the end of the time-saving gaming state 1 etc. is displayed in the predetermined period as described above, the predetermined period may be any other various period. . For example, the result image GP starts to be displayed at the end of the last game in the time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming state 1 to 4), and then the second pending number is subtracted to "0", and the second special symbol is displayed. The result image GP may be hidden after the variable display on the device 122 stops. In other words, the result image GP may continue to be displayed until the first variable display of the first special symbol display 120 can be started after the transition to the low probability non-time saving gaming state. Furthermore, the above-mentioned left-handed hitting start image is displayed regardless of whether or not the first game in the low-probability non-time-saving game state is executed; however, it is not limited to this mode, and can be displayed in various modes. There may be. For example, on the condition that the first game after transitioning from the time-saving gaming state (time-saving gaming states 1 to 4) to the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state is executed, a left-handed game is started with the display of the left-handed game start image. It may also be possible to output a voice instructing what to do.

Here, a case will be described after the time-saving game state 3 ends, such as when the time-saving game state 3 ends without winning a jackpot during the time-saving game state 3 and the possible number of games ``M3'' becomes ``0''. As mentioned above, in the period from the end of a jackpot game until the start of the next jackpot game, unless the RAM clearing process is executed, the time saving game state 3 will be entered only once, and the transition will be made twice or more. The configuration is such that there is no transition to the time-saving game state 3. Therefore, for example, after the end of the time-saving game state 3, a notification may be made that the time-saving game state 3 has already ended.In such a mode, the player can enter the time-saving game state. It can be easily recognized that 3 has been completed. Specifically, during the low-probability non-time-saving gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state 3, by displaying the cumulative number of times image RK displayed on the main display device 131 as a number of times exceeding "800", The mode may be such that it is notified that the time-saving game state 3 has already ended. In addition, after the time-saving game state 3 ends, the main display device 131 displays a transition completion notification image such as "Time-saving 3 completed" indicating that the time-saving game state 3 has been completed. It may also be possible to be notified that state 3 has ended. In addition, the accumulated number of times image RK and the transferred notification image that are displayed after the end of the time-saving game state 3 are displayed until the RAM clearing process is executed or the jackpot game is performed after the end of the time-saving game state 3. It may be configured to always be displayed. In addition, the accumulated number of times image RK and the transferred notification image displayed after the end of the time-saving game state 3 are displayed on the main display device 131 after the power is supplied even if the power is once turned off and then the power is supplied during the display. You can do it like this. Furthermore, after the time-saving game state 3 ends, when the power is once turned off and then the power is supplied, a transition notification image of a size that spans the entire surface of the main display device 131 may be displayed, or notification may be made by audio or the like. It may be possible to do so. Furthermore, in the normal gaming state after the end of the time-saving gaming state 3, a production mode different from the production modes A to C in the normal gaming state before transition to the time-saving gaming state 3 (for example, after the end of the time-saving gaming state 3) A normal performance may be executed in a performance mode unique to the normal game state. With such an aspect, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the normal game state after the end of the time-saving game state 3.

[Summary of display mode on main display device 131 after fluctuation stops]
With reference to FIG. 320 and FIG. 321, the transition of the state of the gaming machine 100 after the fluctuation is stopped and the outline of the display mode of the main display device 131 will be explained. FIG. 320 is a diagram illustrating an overview of the state transition of the gaming machine 100 and the display mode of the main display device 131 after the fluctuation is stopped. FIG. 321 is a diagram illustrating an overview of the customer waiting demonstration performance.

As shown in FIG. 320, when the variable display of the special symbols stops and, for example, the number of reservations such as the first number of reservations is "0" and there is no winning of a game ball to the first starting device 112, etc. is in a customer waiting state, and the demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds) → customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) → second demo waiting period B1 (100 seconds) → second customer waiting demo period B2 (80 seconds) →... The demonstration waiting period B1 and the customer waiting demonstration period B2 are alternately repeated. The demonstration standby period B1 is a period in which the three performance symbols 50a are displayed in a stopped state on the main display device 131, and is a period in which the display of a customer waiting demonstration performance described later is in a standby state. Further, the customer waiting demonstration period B2 is a period during which the customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed on the main display device 131. The duration of the demo waiting period B1 is such that the first demo waiting period B1 is longer than the second and subsequent demo waiting periods B1, and the second and subsequent demo waiting periods B1 are of the same length. It is a period. On the other hand, the customer waiting demonstration period B2 has the same length as the first customer waiting demonstration period B2 and the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration periods B2.

As shown in FIG. 320(a), first, on the main display device 131 while the special symbols are changing, a background image such as a horizontally scrolling mode A background image, for example, and three performance symbols 50a in front of the background image are displayed. A state in which two of the performance symbols 50a are displayed in a stopped state and one performance symbol 50a is scrolled is displayed. In addition, in front of the background image, a first pending icon display area 50b in which a first pending icon HI corresponding to the first pending number is displayed, and an image of the icon TI, which is an animation that swings from side to side, are displayed. The corresponding icon display area 50c is displayed. Furthermore, in front of the background image, a first pending number display area SA and a second pending number display area SB are displayed, in which numbers corresponding to the first pending number and the second pending number are displayed, and the special symbol TZ is scrolled. It will be displayed when the

As shown in FIG. 320(b), next, the main display device 131 during the demonstration standby period B1 displays three background images, one in which the mode A background image etc. scrolls horizontally, and the other in a stopped state in front of the background image. A performance pattern 50a is displayed. Further, in front of the background image, a first pending icon display area 50b in which the first pending icon HI is not displayed and a corresponding icon display area 50c in which the image of the corresponding icon TI is not displayed are displayed. Furthermore, in front of the background image, the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB are displayed, which indicate that the first pending number and the second pending number are "0", and the special symbol TZ stops. The numbers of the combination corresponding to the three performance symbols 50a in the state are displayed in a stopped state. Then, in front of the background image and the three performance symbols 50a, a sound adjustment image OC indicating that the volume of BGM or the like can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136 is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 320(c), next, during the customer waiting demonstration period B2, the main display device 131 displays a customer waiting demonstration effect, which will be described later. A first reservation number display area SA and a second reservation number display area SB are displayed, which indicate that the first reservation number and the second reservation number are "0". The main display device 131 during the customer waiting demo period B2 includes the three production symbols 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the special symbol TZ that were displayed during the demo waiting period B1. is not displayed. In addition, on the main display device 131 during the customer waiting demonstration period B2 (during the display of the customer waiting demonstration performance), the special symbol TZ is also displayed together with the first pending number display area SA and the second pending number display area SB. Good too.

With reference to FIG. 321, the display mode of the customer waiting demonstration performance will now be described. The customer waiting demo performance (80 seconds) is: "Variation performance demo (25 seconds)" → "Character introduction (25 seconds)" → "Model name (5 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (5 seconds)" → "Immersion" The display consists of messages such as "Caution for prevention (10 seconds)" → "Demonstration of movable accessories (10 seconds)" and is displayed in this order. In other words, these contents are displayed on the main display device 131 during the customer waiting demonstration period B2 (80 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 321(a), first, the "variable effect demonstration" in the customer waiting demonstration effect is a mode in which various variable effects are displayed on the main display device 131 during the variable display of special symbols. It's a performance. Specifically, on the main display device 131, various variable performances such as SPSP reach revival performance, SPSP reach performance, SP reach performance, pseudo continuous performance, normal reach performance, etc. are displayed in descending order of the degree of expectation of a jackpot. In addition, when displaying each variable effect in this "demonstration of variable effects," it may be displayed in such a manner that characters are added to explain the content of the effect and the level of expectation.

As shown in FIG. 321(b), next, the "character introduction" in the customer waiting demonstration performance introduces a plurality of characters displayed during various variable performances and a plurality of characters that are part of the configuration of the performance pattern 50a. This is a presentation of the manner in which characters and the like are displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a character introduction background including an image simulating a stage as a background image is scrolled and displayed, and in front of the background image, images of each moving character and letters of each character's name are displayed. Character displays CP1 to CP3 are displayed. Furthermore, the character display CP1 includes a character that is displayed in a highly anticipated variable performance such as an SPSP reach effect, and the character display CP2 is displayed in a relatively highly anticipated variable effect such as an SP reach effect. The character display CP1 includes characters displayed in a variable performance such as a normal reach performance, for example. While the "character introduction" is being displayed, the character display CP1 is displayed for a longer time than the other character displays CP2 and CP3. That is, while the "character introduction" is being displayed, the character display CP1 is displayed at a higher rate than the character displays CP2 and CP3. Note that in the character displays CP1 to CP3, the image of each character and the character display of the name may be animated in various manners that are different from each other.

As shown in FIG. 321(c), next, the "model name" in the customer waiting demo performance is a performance in which a model name display KH indicating the model name of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, for example, a model name background composed of a gradation of white and blue is scrolled and displayed as a background image, and the model name display KH is displayed so as to suddenly appear in front of the background image. be done. Here, a description will be given of a change in the appearance during the 5 seconds which is the display time of the "model name". During the 5-second display time of the "model name", the main display device 131 starts displaying the model name KH (switching the display from "character introduction") until the display is completed (for example, 1 second). The display mode is changed such that the model name display KH becomes hidden.

As shown in FIG. 321(d), next, the "manufacturer name" in the customer waiting demo performance is a performance in which a manufacturer name display MH indicating the name of the manufacturer that manufactured the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Specifically, on the main display device 131, a white manufacturer name background is displayed as a background image, a frame portion of the manufacturer name display MH is displayed so as to suddenly appear in front of the background image, and a "surprise." , "Co., Ltd." and "Logo mark" are displayed in order from the left. Further, all the shading of "Bikkuri. Co., Ltd. (logo mark)" may be displayed so that it gradually becomes darker from a light state. Here, a description will be given of changes in the appearance during the 5 seconds which is the display time of the "manufacturer name". During the 5-second display time of the "manufacturer name", the main display device 131 starts displaying the manufacturer name MH (switching the display from the "model name") until the display is completed (for example, 3 seconds). , the display mode is changed such that the manufacturer name display MH is hidden.

As shown in FIG. 321(e), next, the "Caution to prevent addictive behavior" in the customer waiting demonstration performance consists of characters that warn players against playing excessively on the gaming machine 100. This is an effect in which a warning display NH is displayed. Specifically, in the main display device 131, a white attention-calling background is displayed as a background image, and in front of the background image, a first stage portion NB1 is displayed as the top row, and a first stage portion NB1 is displayed below the first stage portion NB1. The attention-calling display NH is displayed so as to appear in order from the top. In addition, the first stage part NB1 consists of a red frame and the red text "Be careful not to get addicted to it." The third section NB3 is composed of black text, and the third section NB3 is composed of a black frame and black text such as ``Enjoy the game in moderation.'' inside the frame.

As shown in FIG. 321(f), in the "movable accessory demo" in the customer waiting demo performance, movable accessories such as the upper accessory unit 154 and the lower accessory unit 156 operate during various fluctuating performances. This is a production that operates in the same manner as the mode. Specifically, for example, on the main display device 131, a movable accessory demonstration background composed of radial lines is displayed as a background image, and the lower accessory unit 156 operates in front of the background image in an SPSP reach effect, etc. It moves to the desired position and operates in the same manner as the SPSP reach effect (a mode that combines movement and the like with an LED light emitting effect, etc.). In addition, in the "movable accessory demo", various performances may be performed not only by the lower accessory unit 156 but also by the upper accessory unit 154 and the light guide plate panel unit 181.

According to the customer waiting state as described above, the second demo waiting period B1 (100 seconds) is longer than the demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds), which is the period from the stop of fluctuation to the start of the first customer waiting demonstration performance. is becoming shorter. In such a customer waiting state, there is a possibility that the player continues playing immediately after the fluctuation stops, so by lengthening the time until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance, Compared to the case where the customer waiting demonstration performance is started at the same time, the player's discomfort such as the trouble caused by the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance immediately after the fluctuation is stopped can be reduced. On the other hand, while waiting for a customer, by shortening the interval at which multiple customer waiting demonstration effects are displayed and increasing the frequency of displaying the customer waiting demonstration effects, the game becomes more appealing and the customer wait state becomes more appealing. It is possible to improve the interest of the performance. In addition, as a mode in which the game can be strongly appealed by the customer waiting demonstration performance that is frequently displayed in this way, after the first customer waiting demonstration period B2 has elapsed (after the first customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed), the second customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed. Even if you do not go through the first demonstration waiting period B1, you can continue waiting for customers as follows: demo waiting period B1 (120 seconds) → customer waiting demonstration period B2 (80 seconds) → second customer waiting demonstration period B2 (80 seconds) →... The demo period B2 may be executed continuously. In such a mode, since two customer waiting demonstration performances are displayed in succession in the customer waiting state, the content of the customer waiting demonstration performance can be more impressive to the player, and as described above, It is possible to make a strong appeal of the game.

According to the customer waiting demonstration performance as described above, while the "character introduction" is being displayed, the character display CP1 is displayed for a longer time and at a higher rate than the character displays CP2 and CP3. In such a customer waiting demonstration performance, the character (for example, character display CP1) related to the highly anticipated variable performance is displayed for a long time and at a high rate, so that the customer waiting demonstration performance is visually recognized. A player can easily recognize characters that are likely to be displayed in a highly anticipated variable performance.

According to the above-mentioned customer waiting demonstration performance, the display time of the ``caution to prevent addicts'' is longer (10 seconds) than the display time of the ``model name'' (5 seconds). With such a customer waiting demonstration performance, it is possible to effectively call attention by "calling for attention to prevent addiction," which is more important than information about the model name.

According to the above-described customer waiting demonstration performance, the movable accessory is moved to the advancing position during the variable performance as a "movable accessory demonstration" and a demonstration of the movable performance is executed. With such a customer-waiting demonstration performance, the game machine can appeal to players more effectively than conventional gaming machines that do not operate movable accessories during the customer-waiting demonstration performance.

According to the customer waiting demonstration performance as described above, since the first pending number display area SA, the second pending number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ are displayed on the main display device 131, the current pending number (pending The player can easily recognize not only that the number is "0") but also that the variable display is not in progress. In particular, in the customer waiting demonstration performance, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes to various types as described above (FIGS. 321(a) to 321(f)). Nevertheless, the player may misunderstand that it is a variable performance during a variable display, and by displaying the first pending number display area SA, the second pending number display area SB, and the special symbol TZ, such a Misunderstandings by players can be prevented.

According to the above-mentioned customer waiting demonstration performance, compared to the time from the start of display of the model name display KH to the completion of display in "model name", the time from the start of display to the completion of display of the manufacturer name display MH in "manufacturer name" is longer. The time can be increased. In this kind of customer waiting demonstration performance, the information that the player is aware of at the time of starting the game, etc. is more important than the information about the "model name" which the player is likely to recognize at the time of starting the game or during the game. It is possible to make a strong impression on the player with information regarding the "manufacturer name", which is unlikely. Note that various modes may be used to make the information regarding the "manufacturer name" more strongly impressive to the player than the information regarding the "model name". For example, in the customer waiting demo performance mentioned above, the display time of the "manufacturer name" is longer than the display time of the "model name", such as "model name (3 seconds)" and "manufacturer name (5 seconds)". It may also be a long form. Specifically, during the 3-second display time of the "model name", the main display device 131 starts displaying the model name KH (switching the display from "character introduction") until the display is completed (for example, 1 second ), the display mode is changed such that the model name display KH is hidden. On the other hand, the display time of the "manufacturer name" of 5 seconds is the same as described above. In other words, not only is the display time of the manufacturer name display MH in the "manufacturer name" longer than the display time of the model name display KH in the "model name", but also the display of the model name display KH in the "model name" is completed. The time from when the manufacturer name display MH in "Manufacturer Name" is completed to non-display is longer than the time from when the display becomes non-display. Therefore, even in such a customer waiting demonstration performance, the information regarding the "manufacturer name" can be made to impress the player more strongly than the information regarding the "model name."

[Specific example 1 when the variable performance in the normal gaming state ends and the player enters the customer waiting state]
Using FIGS. 322 to 324, a specific example 1 will be described in which the fluctuating performance in the normal gaming state ends and the demo waiting period changes to the customer waiting demo period. FIG. 322 is a timing chart (1) when the fluctuating performance in the normal gaming state ends and the state enters the customer waiting state, and FIGS. 323 and 324 are diagrams showing examples of performances at various timings in FIG. 322. . Note that, here, a description will be given of the case of production mode A, but since production modes B and C are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 322, first, at timing T0, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 120 with the first pending number being "0". At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 123 and the first reservation number display area SA are displaying "0". Further, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the central one of the three performance symbols 50a and the three special symbols TZ are updated and fluctuated (scroll display, switching display). Further, the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c are displayed, and although the pending icon HI is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c is in the normal display mode. The relevant icon TI is displayed. Further, variable BGM1 corresponding to production mode A is audibly output (see FIG. 323(a)).

Next, at timing T1, when the central performance symbol 50a that was being scrolled at a low speed (update fluctuation) temporarily stops, the characters of the three performance symbols 50a perform a performance motion as a pre-stop motion (shaking their heads before stopping). The three performance symbols 50a are brought to a temporary stop with a losing result ("537"). Then, at timing T2, when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the production control board 320, and the first special symbol display 120 is sent. The special losing symbol will be stopped and displayed. Furthermore, the variable BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is continuously output audibly (see FIG. 323(b)).

Next, at timing T3, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c starts to disappear, and the effect pattern 50a ("537") and special symbol TZ ("537") Stop display starts. Thereafter, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends. Further, the variable BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is continuously output audibly (see FIG. 323(c)).

Then, at timing T5, when the special symbol stop time has elapsed, a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320, and the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a customer waiting state. There will be a waiting period for the demo. At this time, as for the background image, the mode A background image similar to that during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 is being scrolled horizontally, and as for the BGM, it is sufficient that some kind of BGM is continuously output. For example, if the same variable BGM1 as before the stop display on the first special symbol display 120 is being output audibly, or if it is different from before the stop display on the first special symbol display 120, the demo standby period ( A predetermined BGM (for example, BGM8) corresponding to the customer waiting state may have started to be output. In addition, here, it is assumed that the same variable BGM6 as before the stop display of the first special symbol display 120 is continuously outputted audibly (see FIG. 323(d)).

Next, at timing T6, when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol display 120, the variable BGM1 that had been audibly output is stopped and becomes silent (Fig. 323 ( (see e)). Note that during the period from T4 to T6 when the variable BGM1 is being output, the volume of the variable BGM1 is changed in accordance with the operation of the performance operation stick 136 by the player, and the setting of the output volume is changed. It is possible.

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol display 120, it is suggested that the volume of variable BGM, etc. can be adjusted by operating the production operation stick 136. A sound adjustment display OC is displayed in front of the effect pattern 50a (see FIG. 323(f)). The sound adjustment display OC displays the currently set volume level (volume gauge) and the direction in which the performance operation stick 136 is operated. In addition, in accordance with the operation of the production operation stick 136, the display of the volume level (volume gauge) during the sound adjustment display changes, and the setting of the output volume level is changed.

Next, at timing T8, when the demonstration standby period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, a customer waiting demonstration performance start command is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the performance control board 320, and a predetermined A customer waiting demonstration performance that lasts for a period of 80 seconds begins. Specifically, a customer waiting demonstration is performed for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) in front of the production pattern 50a and behind the pending display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB). The fade-in of the image (gradually changing from a transparent state to an opaque state) is started, and the fade-out ( The opaque state gradually changes to a transparent state, and erasing (erasing) begins. That is, a disappearing display in which the three production symbols 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, and the special symbol TZ gradually disappear, and the customer waiting demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background) ) will be displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the occurrence display that gradually appears. Note that the hold display areas (first hold count display area SA, second hold count display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, so they are not visible (shielded) by the customer waiting demo image. (See Figure 324(g)).

Then, after the timing of T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is completed, the production pattern 50a etc. become hidden (invisible state), and "Fluctuating production demonstration (20 seconds)" → "Character introduction (20 seconds)" )" → "Model name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" → "Demonstration of movable accessories (10 seconds)" and so on. The demonstration performance is started (see FIG. 324(h)). In other words, if there is no winning game ball etc. in the customer waiting state, after the demonstration standby period (120 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demonstration performance to appeal the game to the player will be performed. is started, and further, if there is no winning of game balls during execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance, the customer waiting demonstration performance will be displayed for a predetermined time (80 seconds).

Referring to FIG. 324(i), a case will be described in which the volume of the variable BGM1 is changed by the player operating the performance operation stick 136 during the period T5 to T6.

As shown in FIG. 324(i), when the production operation stick 136 is operated during the period from T5 to T6 when the variable BGM1 is being output, the display of the sound adjustment display OC is started on the main display device 131 ( The currently displayed sound adjustment display OC ends the display if there is no operation of the production operation stick 136 for a predetermined period (2 seconds), and the predetermined sound effects and listening sounds are constant on the audio output device 331. It is output in a period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, predetermined sound effects and listening sounds accompanying the start of display of the sound adjustment display OC are output at a timing corresponding to the timing of starting the display of the sound adjustment display OC (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131). However, even if the timing does not correspond to the timing at which the display of the sound adjustment display OC ends (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, the timing before the end of the display of the sound adjustment display OC) ) output is terminated. In addition, based on the operation of the production operation stick 136 while the sound adjustment display OC is displayed, the volume of the variable BGM1 changes, and the display of the volume level (volume gauge) on the sound adjustment display OC changes, and the output The setting of the volume of BGM etc. that is played can be changed. Further, in accordance with the display of changes in the volume gauge based on the operation of the production operation stick 136, a predetermined viewing sound at the volume whose setting has been changed is outputted at the audio output device 331 for a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). Ru. Here, although the predetermined audiovisual sound is output at a timing corresponding to the timing at which the change in the volume gauge starts to be displayed based on the operation of the production operation stick 136 (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131), the volume Even if the timing is not in accordance with the timing at which the display of the change in the gauge is completed (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131), the output may be terminated (for example, at the timing before the display of the change in the volume gauge is completed). Ru.

With reference to FIGS. 324(j-1) and (j-2), a case will be described in which menu images MN1a and MN1b are displayed by operating the sword handle unit 135 while waiting for a customer. As mentioned above, in the customer waiting state, the effective period for operating the sword hilt unit 135 (sword hilt button) is set by the production control board 320 that has received the customer waiting state designation command, and during the valid operation period, When the sword handle unit 135 is operated, a predetermined signal based on the operation of the sword handle button detected by the sword handle button detection switch 137 is transmitted to the production control board 320, and a predetermined signal from the production control board 320 is transmitted. Based on this, the sword handle unit 135 is made to vibrate in a predetermined manner by the lamp control board 340 and the button drive device. Further, when the display of the menu image MN1a etc. is started based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135, or when the mode changes due to the operation of the sword handle unit 135 while the menu image MN1a etc. is being displayed, a predetermined sound effect is constant in the audio output device 331. It is output in a period (for example, 0.5 seconds). Here, the predetermined sound effect is produced at a timing corresponding to the timing at which the display of the menu image MN1a etc. and the display of changes in the mode based on the operation of the sword handle unit 135 are started (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131). Although the output is performed, even if the timing is not in accordance with the timing at which the display of the menu image MN1a etc. or the display of the change in the aspect is completed (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131) (for example, the display of the menu image MN1a etc. (timing before the display of the change in aspect is completed) Output is terminated.

As shown in FIG. 324 (j-1), for example, if the sword hilt unit 135 is operated while "Character Introduction" is being displayed during the valid operation period in the customer waiting state, the character will be displayed in front of the "Character Introduction" display. Menu image MN1a is displayed. In the menu image MN1a, a "model description" tag, a "performance customization" tag, and a "pachilog" tag are displayed, and it is possible to select and decide on any of the tags according to the operation of the production operation stick 136. It becomes. When the "Model Description" tag is selected and determined, an explanation regarding the game flow and features of the gaming machine 100 will be displayed. When the "Pachilog" tag is selected and determined, the information regarding today's or the previous day's information regarding the gaming machine 100 will be displayed. Data regarding the gaming results of the gaming machine 100, such as the number of jackpots, is displayed. The operation validity period is set to continue while the user is waiting for a customer, and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated again while the menu image MN1a is displayed, the menu image MN1a disappears. There is.

As shown in FIG. 324(j-2), when "Customize Effect" is selected and determined while menu image MN1a is being displayed, menu image MN1b is displayed. In the menu image MN1b, tags with a plurality of character names that can be selected and determined according to the operation of the production operation stick 136 are displayed together with the words "Select favorite character." For example, when a tag with one character name is selected in this menu image MN1b, when the effect pattern 50a including the selected character is displayed during the game, the effect pattern 50a is displayed with text such as "Oshi character". will be displayed with . Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated while the menu image MN1b is being displayed, the menu image MN1b disappears.

According to the customer waiting state described above, the display time of the customer waiting demonstration performance (80 seconds) is longer than the time from when the fluctuation stops until the output of the fluctuating BGM stops (30 seconds). It is. If the player is in such a customer waiting state, there is a high possibility that the player will continue playing the game immediately after the fluctuation stops, so it is possible to encourage the player to continue playing the game by continuously outputting the fluctuation BGM. In addition, since the output time of the fluctuating BGM after the fluctuation stops is shorter than the display time of the customer waiting demonstration performance, other games in the surrounding area may be affected by the continuous output of the fluctuating BGM after the fluctuation stops for too long. It is also possible to suppress discomfort among players of the machines, and to appeal to players of other gaming machines in the vicinity by displaying a long-term customer waiting demonstration performance.

According to the customer waiting state as described above, the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed after the sound adjustment display OC is displayed, rather than the time (40 seconds) from when the fluctuation stops until the sound adjustment display OC is displayed. (80 seconds or 60 seconds) is the longer period. In such a customer waiting state, the sound adjustment display OC is not displayed for a predetermined period after the fluctuation stops, so the player who is playing the game is forced to pay close attention to the fluctuation effects, etc., and continues playing immediately after the fluctuation stops. It is possible to reduce the annoyance caused by the display of the sound adjustment display OC for players who play the game. In addition, the period from when the sound adjustment display OC is displayed to when the customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed is sufficiently long, and because the display of the customer waiting demonstration effect does not make it difficult for the customer to see the sound adjustment display OC, the customer This makes it easy for the player in the waiting state to recognize that the volume of BGM, etc., can be adjusted.

According to the customer waiting state as described above, the main display device 131 may display the sound adjustment display OC, display changes in the volume gauge, display the menu image MN1a, etc., and display changes in the mode. The timing of outputting a predetermined sound effect or a predetermined preview sound in the audio output device 331 is made to be earlier than the timing of a change in display mode (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131). I can do it. If you are in such a state of waiting for a customer, for example, in order to adjust the volume to a desired level, you may operate the performance operation stick 136 while the sound adjustment display OC or the like is displayed, hoping to quickly enter the first starting device 112 or the like to win a prize. For a player who seems to be operating the firing handle 103, the fluctuating display by the effect pattern 50a starts before the display of changes in the volume gauge is completed on the main display device 131, and the player is unable to control the volume gauge. Even if the user no longer pays attention to the change display, a predetermined listening sound that is output before the change display on the volume gauge is completed allows the user to recognize that the adjustment to the desired volume has been completed. . In other words, the player can change the settings on the gaming machine 100 according to the player's operation using a predetermined sound effect or preview sound without visually confirming the completion of the change in the display mode on the main display device 131 based on the player's operation. It is possible to recognize that the process has been completed.

(Example of performance when winning a prize while waiting for a customer)
Referring to FIG. 325, an example of presentation when winning a prize while waiting for a customer will be described. FIG. 325 is a diagram showing an example of presentation when winning a prize while waiting for a customer. Here, an example of performance will be described in the case where the player is waiting for a customer and wins a prize during the demonstration waiting period T4 to T6.

As shown in FIG. 325(a), during the customer waiting state and the demonstration waiting period T4 to T6, as described above, the special symbol stop time has passed and the effect is controlled from the main control board 300. A customer waiting state designation command is sent to the board 320, and a demonstration waiting period is started in which the production pattern 50a is stopped and displayed. At this time, in the main display device 131, as a background image, a mode A background image similar to that during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 is being scrolled horizontally, and as for BGM, the first special symbol display 120 is scrolling horizontally. The same fluctuating BGM1 as before the stop display continues to be audibly output.

As shown in FIG. 325(b), when the game ball enters the first starting device 112, the first pending number becomes "1" and the first display section of the first pending icon display area 50b is displayed. Additional display of the pending icon HI in the normal display mode is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "1". Further, the variable BGM1 is continuously output audibly, and a sound effect indicating that a prize has been won is output. Further, as the background image, horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image is continuously output. In other words, if a game ball wins a prize in the first starting device 112 during the demo standby period when the customer is waiting and variable BGM is being output, the variable BGM that was output before winning continues. will be output.

As shown in FIG. 325(c), when the first reservation number decreases to "0" and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the reservation displayed in the first reservation icon display area 50b Shift display (decreasing display, change display) of the icon HI toward the icon display area 50c is started, and the pending number in the first pending number display area SA is updated to "0" (decreasing display). In addition, in front of the horizontal scrolling of the mode A background image, the three performance symbols 50a that have been stopped and displayed are displayed floating as a pre-fluctuation operation, and the scrolling display of the special symbol TZ is started. Furthermore, at this time as well, the variable BGM1 continues to be audibly output. At this time, for example, if the production mode is changed, the variable production is displayed with the background image, the production pattern 50a, the pending icon HI, the icon TI, the variable BGM, etc. changed. Good too.

(Example of effect when operating sword handle unit 135 during variable display)
Referring to FIG. 326, an example of the effect when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the variable display of special symbols will be described. FIG. 326 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the variable display. Here, a case will be described in which the first special symbol is determined to be a jackpot, and then the SPSP ready-to-win performance is set as the variable performance pattern. Further, in the performance control board 320, when the SPSP reach performance (jackpot) is set as a variable performance pattern, a valid operation period (10 seconds) during which the operation of the sword handle unit 135 is valid is set. Furthermore, the operation valid period (10 seconds) is not limited to SPSP reach effect (jackpot), but can be set for multiple types of variable effect patterns such as SPSP reach effect (miss), SP reach effect (jackpot), pseudo continuous effect, etc. It is something that will be done.

As shown in FIG. 326(a), first, in the final stage of the SPSP reach performance, when the output of the SPSP reach BGM is stopped and the decisive performance is started, a promotion image prompting the operation of the sword handle button of the sword handle unit 135 is displayed. is displayed and the valid period (10 seconds) for operating the sword hilt button begins. Specifically, an operation promotion image SSG imitating a sword hilt button is displayed on the main display device 131, the output of SPSP reach BGM is stopped (non-output), and an effect saying "Press" is displayed from the audio output device 331. Sound is output. At this time, the reduced performance symbol 50a is being displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the main display device 131.

As shown in FIG. 326(b), next time the sword handle button of the sword handle unit 135 is operated during the valid operation period (10 seconds), a success effect indicating that a jackpot game will be executed will be displayed. executed. Specifically, as the lower accessory unit 156 moves to the performance position, the plurality of light emitting LEDs provided on the lower accessory unit 156 blink. Further, the successful decision image SEF is displayed in front of the SPSP reach background on the main display device 131, and the sound effect “Kyuinkyin” is output from the audio output device 331. Furthermore, the sword handle unit 135 is vibrated by the button drive device. Then, by temporarily stopping the reduced performance pattern 50a at the upper left corner of the main display device 131 at "5", the three performance symbols 50a become temporarily stopped at the jackpot ("555"). It should be noted that if the sword handle unit 135 is not operated during the valid operation period, the above-mentioned operation promotion image SSG disappears, and the success effect is executed.

As shown in FIG. 326(c), when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect has passed, the effect before stopping (the background image, the effect image 70a, etc. is After the display of the shielding image (the eye-catching image including the model name) is executed, horizontal scrolling of the Mode A background image is restarted, and the effect pattern 50a is moved to the position before the start of the SPSP reach effect and the first position. The mode returns to the state where the display is temporarily stopped. Further, the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c in which the icon TI is displayed are redisplayed. At this time, the audio output device 331 is in a state in which no audio is output for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the performance symbol 50a stops being displayed).

In the case of a variable performance that has a valid operation period as described above, the valid operation period (10 seconds) that is set according to the variable performance pattern is set in multiple types of variable performance patterns, so it is not possible to wait for a customer. It can be set for a larger number of times than the operation valid period (one time) set during the customer waiting state, and compared to the operation valid period set during the customer waiting state (set throughout the customer waiting state). It can be for a short period of time. In the case of such a fluctuating performance, the fluctuating performance by setting the valid operation period during the fluctuating performance will improve the expectation level of the player, and it is recommended that the fluctuating performance be implemented with many types of fluctuating performance patterns with a short valid operation period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the variable performance. Furthermore, since the long operation validity period is set for a small number of times (one time) when the operation period is set while waiting for a customer, it is possible to reduce the boredom of the player, and It is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

[Specific example of when the variable performance in time-saving game state 3 ends and the player enters the customer waiting state]
Using FIGS. 327 to 329, a specific example of a case where the variable performance in time-saving game state 3 ends and the demo waiting period changes to the customer waiting demo period when the possible number of games "M3" is not "0" I will explain about it. FIG. 327 is a timing chart when the variable performance in the time-saving game state 3 ends and the player waits for a customer, and FIGS. 328 and 329 are diagrams showing examples of performances at various timings in FIG. 327. In addition, although the case of production mode F will be explained here, production modes D and E, which are production modes in the time-saving gaming state, are basically the same, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 327, first, at timing T0, a variable display of the second special symbol is executed on the second special symbol display 122 with the second pending number being "0". At this time, the second special symbol reservation display 124 and the second reservation number display area SB are displaying "0". In addition, in front of the mode F background image during horizontal scrolling, the central one and three special symbols TZ of the three effect symbols 50a of the fourth aspect are updated and fluctuated (scroll display, switching display). In addition, a remaining number of times image JK (an aspect that notifies that the remaining number of possible games in time-saving gaming state 3 is "101") is displayed, and the second pending icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50c is displayed, and although the pending icon HI is not displayed in the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon TI in the normal display mode is displayed in the icon display area 50c. Further, the right-handed image MG is displayed, and the variable BGM6 corresponding to the production mode F is audibly output (see FIG. 328(a)).

Next, at timing T1, when the central performance symbol 50a that was scrolling at a low speed (update fluctuation) temporarily stops, the three performance symbols 50a perform a performance motion (bounce (small) display) as a motion before stopping. Then, the three performance symbols 50a come to a temporary stop with a losing result ("537"). Then, at timing T2, when the special symbol fluctuation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the production control board 320, and the second special symbol display 122 is sent. The special losing symbol will be stopped and displayed. In addition, the right-handed hit image MG and the remaining number of times image JK are displayed, and the variable BGM 6 corresponding to the production mode F is continuously output audibly (see FIG. 328(b)).

Next, at timing T3, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c starts to disappear, and the effect pattern 50a ("537") and special symbol TZ ("537") Stop display starts. Thereafter, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends. In addition, the right-handed hit image MG and the remaining number of times image JK are displayed, and the variable BGM 6 corresponding to the production mode F is continuously output audibly (see FIG. 328(c)). Although not shown, in the remaining number of times image JK, when the disappearance display of the icon TI ends, an image of ``100 remaining times'' is displayed with an animation such that ``1'' is subtracted from the possible number of games ``101''. Become so.

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, a demonstration standby period occurs in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a customer waiting state, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 300 to the production control board 320. is sent. At this time, as for the background image, the mode F background image similar to that during the variable display of the second special symbol display 122 is being scrolled horizontally, and as for the BGM, it is sufficient that some kind of BGM is continuously output. For example, the same fluctuating BGM 6 as before the stop display on the second special symbol display 122 is continuously outputted audibly, or it is different from before the stop display on the second special symbol display 122, and during the demonstration standby period ( Predetermined BGM (for example, BGM8) corresponding to the customer waiting state may have started to be output. Here, it is assumed that the same fluctuating BGM6 as before the second special symbol display 122 stops displaying continues to be audibly output. Further, the right-handed hit image MG and the remaining number of times image JK are continuously displayed (see FIG. 328(d)).

Next, at timing T6, when a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the second special symbol display 122 stopped displaying, the fluctuating BGM6 that had been audibly output is stopped and becomes silent. In addition, the right-handed hit image MG and the remaining number of times image JK are continuously displayed (see FIG. 328(e)). Note that during the period from T4 to T6 when the variable BGM 6 is being output, the volume of the variable BGM 6 is changed according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136 by the player, and the setting of the output volume is changed. It is possible.

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display on the second special symbol display 122, it is suggested that the volume of variable BGM, etc. can be adjusted by operating the production operation stick 136. A sound adjustment display OC is displayed in front of the effect pattern 50a. Further, the right-handed hit image MG and the remaining number of times image JK are continuously displayed (see FIG. 328(f)). The sound adjustment display OC displays the currently set volume level (volume gauge) and the direction in which the performance operation stick 136 is operated. In addition, in accordance with the operation of the production operation stick 136, the display of the volume level (volume gauge) during the sound adjustment display changes, and the setting of the output volume level is changed.

Next, at timing T8, when a demonstration standby period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state specifying command, a customer waiting demonstration performance for a predetermined period (80 seconds) is started. Specifically, a customer waiting demonstration for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) is performed in front of the performance symbol 50a and behind the pending display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB). Image fade-in (from a transparent state to an opaque state gradually) is started, and the effect pattern 50a, right-handed image MG, remaining number of times image JK, second pending icon display area 50d, icon display area 50c, mode F The background image and the special design TZ begin to fade out (gradually change from an opaque state to a transparent state and disappear). In other words, a disappearing display in which the three production symbols 50a, the right-handed image MG, the remaining number of times image JK, the second pending icon display area 50d, the icon display area 50c, the mode F background image, and the special symbol TZ gradually disappear, and the customer waiting The demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background) will be displayed so as to at least partially overlap with the occurrence display that gradually appears. Note that the hold display areas (the first hold count display area SA, the second hold count display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, so they are not visible (occluded) by the customer waiting demo image. This will not happen (see Figure 329(g)).

Then, after the timing of T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is completed, the production pattern 50a etc. become hidden (invisible state), and "Fluctuating production demonstration (20 seconds)" → "Character introduction (20 seconds)" )" → "Model name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" → "Demonstration of movable accessories (10 seconds)", etc. The demonstration performance is started (see FIG. 329(h)). In other words, if there is no winning game ball etc. in the customer waiting state, after the demonstration standby period (120 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demonstration performance to appeal the game to the player will be performed. is started, and furthermore, if no game ball wins during execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance, the customer waiting demonstration performance will be displayed for a predetermined time (80 seconds).

Referring to FIG. 329(i), a case will be described in which the volume of the variable BGM 6 is changed by the player operating the performance operation stick 136 during the period from T5 to T6. As shown in FIG. 329(i), when the production operation stick 136 is operated during the period from T5 to T6 when the variable BGM 6 is being output, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed. Then, in accordance with the operation of the production operation stick 136, the volume of the variable BGM 6 changes, and the volume display (volume gauge) in the sound adjustment display OC changes, and the volume of the output BGM, etc. changes. The settings will be changed. At this time, as the display of the volume changes according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, a predetermined viewing sound is output at the volume whose setting has been changed. Further, if the performance operation stick 136 is not operated for a predetermined period (2 seconds), the sound adjustment display OC disappears.

With reference to FIGS. 329(j-1) and (j-2), a case in which menu images MN2a and MN2b are displayed by operating the sword handle unit 135 while waiting for a customer will be described. Note that when the display of the menu image MN2a, etc. starts, or when the mode changes due to the operation of the sword handle unit 135 while the menu image MN2a, etc. is being displayed, a predetermined sound effect is output for a certain period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). . Regarding this sound effect, similarly to the relationship between the menu image MN1a etc. and the sound effect described above, the timing of the change in the display and appearance of the menu image MN2a etc. (that is, the frame update timing of the main display device 131) and the predetermined The timing of outputting sound effects may not match.

As shown in FIG. 329 (j-1), in the customer waiting state, the operational validity period of the sword hilt unit 135 (sword hilt button) is set by the performance control board 320 that has received the customer waiting state designation command, For example, if the sword hilt unit 135 is operated during the demonstration standby period during this valid operation period, the mode F background image, the three stopped effect symbols 50a, the right-handed image MG, the remaining number of times image JK, A menu image MN2a is displayed in front of the second pending icon display area 50d and the icon display area 50c. In the menu image MN2a, a "model description" tag and a "MUSIC selection" tag are displayed, and it is possible to select and determine either tag according to the operation of the production operation stick 136. When the "model description" tag is selected and determined, an explanation regarding the game flow, features, etc. of the gaming machine 100 is displayed. Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated again while the menu image MN2a is being displayed, the menu image MN2a disappears.

As shown in FIG. 329(j-2), when the "MUSIC selection" tag is selected and determined while menu image MN2a is being displayed, menu image MN2b is displayed. In the menu image MN2b, tags with a plurality of song names that can be selected and determined according to the operation of the production operation stick 136 are displayed together with the words "MUSIC SELECTION". For example, when a tag with one song name is selected in this menu image MN2b, the BGM of the selected song name is output, and the volume of the BGM of the selected song name is adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136. Can be adjusted. Note that if the sword handle unit 135 is operated while the menu image MN2b is being displayed, the menu image MN2b disappears. Furthermore, the sound adjustment image OC may be displayed when adjusting the volume of the BGM of the selected song name while the menu image MN2b is being output.

Here, in the normal gaming state (before the cumulative number of times "n" reaches "0") as described above, when the customer is waiting for a customer (see FIGS. 322 to 324), and when the time-saving gaming state 3 (cumulative After the number of times "n" reaches "0"), the state of waiting for a customer (see Figures 327 to 329) is compared with the state of waiting for a customer in , and different elements and the same element are compared. I will explain about. In addition, in the following explanation, for convenience, the case where the customer is waiting in the normal gaming state is referred to as "normal customer waiting", and the case where the customer is waiting in the time-saving gaming state 3 is referred to as "time-saving 3 customer waiting". ”.

First, elements that differ between normal customer waiting and time-saving three customer waiting will be explained. The first element is that the background image displayed from the time the fluctuation stops until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is different between the normal customer waiting and the time-saving three customer waiting. Specifically, in the normal customer waiting mode, it is a mode background image corresponding to any one of performance modes A to C, and in the time-saving 3 customer waiting mode, it is the mode F background corresponding to the performance mode F dedicated to time-saving game state 3. It is an image. As a second element, the mode of the performance pattern 50a that is displayed from the time when the variation stops until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is different between the normal customer waiting and the time-saving three customer waiting. Specifically, when waiting for regular customers, one of the first to third modes is used, and when waiting for three customers to save time, the fourth mode is used. The third factor is that the BGM that is output for a predetermined period after the fluctuation stops is different between normal customer waiting and short-time three customer waiting. Specifically, when waiting for normal customers, the music is one of BGM1 to BGM3, and when waiting for 3 customers to save time, it is BGM6. The fourth element is that the mode of the hold icon display area that is displayed from the time the fluctuation stops until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance differs between the normal customer waiting and the time-saving three customer waiting. Specifically, when waiting for a regular customer, it is the first hold icon display area 50b, and when waiting for three customers in a time saving mode, it is the second hold icon display area 50d. As described above, if the display modes of the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, and the second pending icon display area 50d are different in each performance mode, the normal customer waiting and the time-saving three customer waiting are different. The mode is different depending on the situation. In addition, in the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode, the right-hand hit image MG and the remaining number of times image JK are displayed from the time the fluctuation stops until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts, but they are not displayed in the normal customer waiting mode. Furthermore, in the time-saving 3-customer waiting mode, when a display indicating the current gaming state is displayed as described above, the "time-saving 3-customer mode" is displayed, but it is not displayed in the normal customer waiting mode. In the above-mentioned first to fourth elements, although the normal customer waiting and the short-time three customer waiting are different, they may be the same.

Next, the elements that are the same in the normal customer waiting and the time-saving three customer waiting will be explained. The first element is that the sound adjustment image OC that is displayed from the time the variation stops until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the same in the normal customer waiting and time-saving three customer waiting. The second element is the display of the volume level (volume gauge) in the sound adjustment image OC that is displayed between the time when the fluctuation stops and the start of the customer waiting demonstration production in the normal customer waiting and time-saving 3 customer waiting. The preview sound (short sound) output when adjusting the volume is in the same manner. The third element is that the customer waiting demonstration performance that is displayed after the demonstration waiting period after the fluctuation is stopped is the same for the normal customer waiting and short-time three customer waiting. The fourth element is that the special symbol TZ that is displayed from the time the variation stops until the start of the customer waiting demonstration performance is the same in the normal customer waiting and time-saving three customer waiting. The fifth element is the period when the BGM is output after the fluctuation stops, the period from when the fluctuation stops until the display of the sound adjustment image OC starts, for the normal customer waiting and time-saving 3 customer waiting. The demo standby period B1 is the same time. In addition, as mentioned above, if the display position of the special symbol TZ is the same in each performance mode, the display position will be the same in the normal customer waiting and the time saving three customer waiting. Further, in the first to fifth elements described above, the normal customer waiting and the short-time three customer waiting are the same, but they may be different. In particular, in the fifth element, all three periods may be different times, or at least one or two of the three periods may be different times. You can. Specifically, when waiting for three customers in a short time, the period during which the BGM is output after the fluctuation stops and the period from when the fluctuation stops until the display of the sound adjustment image OC starts is compared with when waiting for a normal customer. By making it shorter, players who want to adjust the output sound volume before starting a game in game state 3 can save time by checking the BGM volume and adjusting the volume earlier than when they are normally waiting for customers. Since the game can be played in the game state 3, the interest of the game is not lost. In addition, if the demo waiting period B1 is made longer in the time-saving 3-customer waiting period compared to the normal customer waiting period, a customer-waiting demonstration performance will be displayed for players who wish to immediately play the game in the time-saving gaming state 3. It is possible to reduce the decrease in interest in the game due to the annoyance of the player.

In addition, when the customer is waiting in the normal gaming state (the state in which the time saver 4 has not been won in the jackpot determination process) (see Figures 322 to 324), A comparison will be made between the state in which the player is waiting for a customer in the state in which the player has won a prize and the state in which the player is waiting for a customer in the state in which the player has won the prize. The elements that are different or the same in these customer waiting situations are the same as those in the case of comparing the above-mentioned normal customer waiting and time-saving three customer waiting.

[Specific example 2 when the variable performance in the normal gaming state ends and the player enters the customer waiting state]
With reference to FIGS. 330 and 331, a second specific example will be described in which the fluctuating performance in the normal gaming state ends and the demo waiting period changes to the customer waiting demo period. FIG. 330 is a timing chart (2) when the fluctuating performance in the normal gaming state ends and the state is set to wait for a customer, and FIG. 331 is a diagram showing examples of performances at various timings in FIG. 330. Note that, here, a description will be given of the case of production mode A, but since production modes B and C are basically the same, the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 330, first, at timing T0, a variable display of the first special symbol is executed on the first special symbol display 120 with the first pending number being "0". At this time, the first special symbol reservation display 123 and the first reservation number display area SA are displaying "0". Further, in front of the mode A background image during horizontal scrolling, the central one of the three performance symbols 50a and the three special symbols TZ are updated and fluctuated (scroll display, switching display). Further, the first pending icon display area 50b and the icon display area 50c are displayed, and although the pending icon HI is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c is in the normal display mode. The relevant icon TI is displayed. Further, variable BGM1 corresponding to production mode A is audibly output.

Next, at timing T1, when the central performance symbol 50a that was scrolling at a low speed (updating fluctuation) temporarily stops, the characters of the three performance symbols 50a perform a performance motion as a pre-stop motion (shaking their heads before stopping). The three performance symbols 50a are brought into a temporarily stopped state with a losing result ("537"). Then, at timing T2, when the special symbol variation time has elapsed, a stop command (design confirmation command) is transmitted from the main control board 300 to the production control board 320, and the first special symbol display 120 is sent. The special losing symbol will be stopped and displayed. Further, the variable BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is continuously outputted audibly.

Next, at timing T3, the animation of the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 50c starts to disappear, and the effect pattern 50a ("537") and special symbol TZ ("537") Stop display starts. Thereafter, at timing T4, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from the start of the animation disappearing display of the icon TI, the animation disappearing display of the icon TI ends. Further, the variable BGM1 corresponding to the production mode A is continuously outputted audibly.

Then, at timing T5, when the stop time of the special symbols has elapsed, a demonstration standby period occurs in which the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a customer waiting state, and a customer waiting state designation command is sent from the main control board 300 to the production control board 320. is sent. At this time, regarding the background image, the same Mode A background image as during the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 is being scrolled horizontally, and regarding the BGM, the same as before the first special symbol display 120 is stopped and displayed. The fluctuating BGM1 is continuously output audibly (see FIG. 331(d)).

Next, at timing T6, when a predetermined period of time (30 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol display 120, the production operation stick 136 is operated while the variable BGM1 is being continuously output audibly. A sound adjustment display OC indicating that the volume of variable BGM etc. can be adjusted is displayed in front of the production pattern 50a. The sound adjustment display OC displays the currently set volume level and the direction in which the production operation stick 136 is operated. In addition, in accordance with the operation of the production operation stick 136, the display of the volume level during the sound adjustment display changes, and the setting of the output volume level is changed (see FIG. 331(e)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined period of time (40 seconds) has elapsed since the stop display of the first special symbol display 120, the variable BGM1 that had been audibly output is stopped and becomes silent (FIG. 323) f)). Note that even if the variable BGM 1 is not output after T7, the volume of the variable BGM 1 is changed according to the player's operation of the performance operation stick 136, and the output volume is set. Changes are possible. For example, when the production operation stick 136 is operated in a silent state, a short tone (preview sound) of the set volume is output, and the player can confirm the volume set by the player. It is now possible to do so.

Next, at timing T8, when a demonstration standby period (120 seconds) has elapsed since the reception of the customer waiting state specifying command, a customer waiting demonstration performance for a predetermined period (80 seconds) is started. Specifically, a customer waiting demonstration for a predetermined period (0.5 seconds) is performed in front of the performance symbol 50a and behind the pending display area (first pending number display area SA, second pending number display area SB). The fade-in of the image (from a transparent state to a gradually opaque state) is started, and the effect pattern 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, and the special pattern TZ are faded out ( The opaque state gradually changes to a transparent state, and erasing (erasing) begins. In other words, a disappearing display where the three production symbols 50a, the first pending icon display area 50b, the icon display area 50c, the mode A background image, and the special symbol TZ gradually disappear, and the customer waiting demo image (character image, customer waiting demo background) ) will be displayed so as to overlap at least partially with the occurrence display that gradually appears. Note that the hold display areas (the first hold count display area SA, the second hold count display area SB) are displayed in front of the customer waiting demo image, so they are not visible (occluded) by the customer waiting demo image. It won't happen.

Then, after the timing of T8, when the fade-in of the customer waiting demo image is completed, the production pattern 50a etc. become hidden (invisible state), and "Fluctuating production demonstration (20 seconds)" → "Character introduction (20 seconds)" )" → "Model name (10 seconds)" → "Manufacturer name (10 seconds)" → "Warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" → "Demonstration of movable accessories (10 seconds)" and so on. The demonstration performance is started (see FIG. 324(h)). In other words, if there is no winning game ball etc. in the customer waiting state, after the demonstration standby period (120 seconds) has elapsed from the reception of the customer waiting state designation command, the customer waiting demonstration performance to appeal the game to the player will be performed. is started, and further, if there is no winning of game balls during execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance, the customer waiting demonstration performance will be displayed for a predetermined time (80 seconds).

[Operations and effects of this embodiment]
According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time after the variable display ends (120 seconds), a demonstration including scrolling of mode background images according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed until the second time period has passed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration performance even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period ( 40 seconds), a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and in the customer waiting state, even if the variable display ends, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed. It is possible to make the variable BGM continue to be output until the time (30 seconds) has elapsed. With such a gaming machine, BGM that increases the interest of the game is continuously output for a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the end of the fluctuating display, so the BGM stops immediately after the fluctuating display ends and the customer Compared to a conventional game machine in which BGM or the like is not output during a waiting state, it is possible to increase the appeal of continuing the game and improve the interest of the performance during the waiting state.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time after the variable display ends (120 seconds), a demonstration including scrolling of mode background images according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed until the second time period has passed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration performance even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period ( 40 seconds), a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and in the customer waiting state, even if the variable display ends, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed. It is possible to output the variable BGM continuously until the time (30 seconds) has elapsed, and at the fourth time, the player can press the effect operation stick 136 while the variable BGM can be checked. The volume of the variable BGM can be adjusted according to the operation of the user. With such a gaming machine, a player can change the volume to the desired volume while listening to BGM while waiting for a customer, and then continue playing with the BGM at the desired volume. Compared to a conventional game machine in which a player cannot adjust the volume while listening to BGM, etc., it is possible to increase the appeal of continuing the game and improve the interest of the performance while waiting for a customer.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIG. 320 and FIG. It is possible to display a second display (``Caution to prevent addiction'') which is a display that urges players to be careful about becoming addicted to the game, and a third display (sound adjustment display OC) can be displayed while waiting for a customer. The demonstration waiting period is executed until a first period of time (120 seconds) has elapsed after the end of the variable display, and the customer waiting demonstration performance is executed for a second period of time (80 seconds) after the first period has elapsed. seconds) have elapsed, the first display is displayed before the second display, and the third display is displayed after the third time (40 seconds) has elapsed after the variable display ends. , the second performance (the second customer waiting demonstration performance) can be performed again after the second time period has elapsed. In such a gaming machine, after the first display regarding the title of the gaming machine that includes the player's favorite content, etc., a second display that calls for attention is displayed. Compared to conventional gaming machines in which the first display related to the title of the gaming machine is displayed after the prompting display, the first display related to the title of the gaming machine, etc. is displayed later for the player who remains focused on the first display that is displayed first. It is possible to effectively call attention by the second display, and by extension, it is possible to appropriately improve the interest of the performance while waiting for customers.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended. A demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration waiting period until the demonstration mode is reached, and after the first time period has elapsed, a demonstration performance is displayed while waiting for the customer until a second time period (80 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration effects even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended. Later, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and while the variable display is being performed, the first character (character display CP1) is displayed on the main display device 131. ) or the second character (character display CP2, CP3), and during execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance in the customer waiting state, the first character is displayed at a higher rate than the second character on the main display device 131. can do. With such a gaming machine, a player who confirms the customer waiting demonstration performance can continue playing after recognizing the first character with high expectations. Compared to conventional gaming machines in which the display ratio of the first character and the second character is approximately the same, it is possible to increase the sense of anticipation when the first character appears in the presentation during the game, and to improve the presentation while waiting for a customer. can improve the interest of

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time (120 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended. A demonstration including scrolling of a mode background image according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration waiting period until the demonstration mode is reached, and after the first time period has elapsed, a demonstration performance is displayed while waiting for the customer until a second time period (80 seconds) has elapsed. Furthermore, the customer waiting demonstration effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration effects even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period (40 seconds) has elapsed since the variable display ended. Later, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136, and a "preventing addiction" is displayed to warn players about becoming absorbed in the game during the customer waiting demonstration performance. This display can include a first display section NB1 and a second display section NB2 below the first display section NB1. In such a gaming machine, the display of "Caution to prevent addiction" is composed of multiple columns of text, so for example, a single column of text displayed as a long text in the horizontal direction of the main display device 131 is displayed. Compared to the case where the player is in a standby mode, it is easier for the player to recognize the content of the display in a short time, so the display can effectively call attention to the player, and in turn, the performance while waiting for a customer can be improved. Interest can be appropriately improved.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 and 326 as described above, in the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, A performance including scrolling of mode background images according to the performance mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period until the first time (120 seconds) has elapsed, and after the first time has elapsed, a second time (80 seconds) is displayed. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the second time period has elapsed, and the customer waiting demonstration effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration effects even after the second time period has elapsed. After a period of time (40 seconds) has elapsed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and during the valid operation period during the variable display, the player If the sword hilt unit 135 is operated by the player, the first mode effect (FIG. 326(b)) is executed, and if the sword hilt unit 135 is operated by the player during the valid operation period during the customer waiting state, , the second mode presentation (display of menu image MN1) can be executed. In such a gaming machine, there is no set operation validity period while waiting for a customer, and even if a performance button such as the sword handle unit 135 is operated while waiting for a customer, the performance such as the second mode performance will not be performed. Compared to conventional gaming machines that do not perform the following, it is possible to prevent players who are waiting for a customer from losing interest in the gaming machine, and by extension, to improve the interest of the performance while waiting for a customer. Can be done.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time after the variable display ends (120 seconds), a demonstration including scrolling of mode background images according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed until the second time period has elapsed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration performance even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period ( 40 seconds), a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and continues even if the variable display ends in the customer waiting state. It is possible to output variable BGM until a fourth time (30 seconds) has elapsed, and the third time is longer than the fourth time and seems to be shorter than the first time. It can be done. With such a gaming machine, the sound adjustment display OC can be displayed from the time the fluctuation stops until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts, so for players who want to pay close attention to the customer waiting demonstration performance, the customer waiting demonstration performance is The user can set the desired volume while checking the sound adjustment display OC before starting the game, and continue playing the game thereafter, thereby improving the interest of the game.

According to the gaming machines of the embodiments shown in FIGS. 320, 321, 330, and 331 as described above, the main display device 131 does not finish the variable display in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed. An effect including scrolling of the mode background image according to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed, and after the first time has elapsed, a second time (120 seconds) is displayed. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the second time period (80 seconds) has elapsed, and the customer waiting demonstration effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration effects even after the second time period has elapsed, and the variable display ends. After a third period of time (30 seconds) has elapsed, a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and the variable display is displayed while waiting for a customer. It is possible to continue outputting variable BGM even after the end of the process until a fourth time (40 seconds) has elapsed, and the third time is shorter than the first time and the fourth time. can do. With such a gaming machine, the sound adjustment display OC can be displayed from the time the fluctuation stops until the customer waiting demonstration performance starts, so for players who want to pay close attention to the customer waiting demonstration performance, the customer waiting demonstration performance is Before starting the game, the user can set the desired volume while checking the sound adjustment display OC and continue playing the game thereafter, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, while waiting for a customer, the player can change the volume to the desired volume while listening to BGM, etc., and then continue playing with the BGM, etc. at the desired volume. Compared to conventional game machines in which the volume cannot be adjusted while listening to the music, it is possible to increase the appeal of continuing the game and improve the interest of the performance while waiting for a customer.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 325 as described above, in the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time after the variable display ends (120 seconds), a demonstration including scrolling of mode background images according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed until the second time period has passed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration performance even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period ( 40 seconds), a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136, and in the customer waiting state, even if the variable display ends, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed. It is possible to output variable BGM1 continuously until the time (30 seconds) has elapsed, and if the variable display is started based on a winning prize before the fourth time has elapsed, The variable BGM1 can be output continuously even after the variable display is started. With such a gaming machine, even if a prize is won while the BGM is being output while waiting for a customer, the game continues without interruption of the BGM, so the winnings may occur while the BGM is being output while the customer is waiting. Compared to conventional gaming machines where the BGM being output is cut off or changed when the display starts, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to interruptions in the BGM, and even when the player is waiting for a customer. It is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time after the variable display ends (120 seconds), a demonstration including scrolling of mode background images according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed until the second time period has passed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration performance even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period ( 40 seconds), and at a time other than the second time, a sound adjustment display OC that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136 can be displayed. With such a gaming machine, the sound adjustment display OC, which is not related to the content, is hidden during the customer waiting demonstration performance, so for players who want to pay close attention to the customer waiting demonstration performance, it is difficult to understand the content of the customer waiting demonstration performance. The customer-waiting demonstration performance can be viewed without worrying about the unrelated sound adjustment display OC, and the interest of the performance during the customer-waiting state can be improved.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time after the variable display ends (120 seconds), a demonstration including scrolling of mode background images according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed until the second time period has passed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration performance even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period ( 40 seconds), a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136, and the volume is adjusted according to the performance mode set before the end of the variable display. The demo standby period can be executed in different ways depending on the mode background image. With such a gaming machine, for example, the production mode before the fluctuation stop is a production mode with high expectations, and a demonstration standby period can be set with a mode background image corresponding to the production mode as it is, so the game To encourage players to continue playing the game while maintaining the expectation that if they win a prize during the demo standby period, they will win a jackpot. Therefore, compared to conventional gaming machines in which when a prize is won during the demo standby period, a variable display starts in a specific presentation mode regardless of the presentation mode before the variation is stopped, the appeal to continue playing the game is enhanced. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the performance while waiting for customers.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 as described above, in the main display device 131, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, the first time after the variable display ends (120 seconds), a demonstration including scrolling of mode background images according to the production mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period, and after the first time has passed, a second time (80 seconds) has elapsed. The customer waiting demonstration performance is displayed until the second time period has passed, and the customer waiting demonstration performance can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration performance even after the second time period has elapsed, and the third time period ( 40 seconds), a sound adjustment display OC is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136, and during the customer waiting demonstration performance, a "character introduction" display is displayed. It is possible to display multiple characters, and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player while multiple characters are being displayed, one of the multiple characters may be selected as a favorite character or selected as a favorite character depending on the player's actions. Can be configured. With such gaming machines, for example, by displaying the "Character Introduction" screen during the demonstration while waiting for a customer, the player can check the characters and then customize the player's favorite character according to their preferences. Compared to conventional gaming machines in which it is not possible to customize the performance while checking the content of the demo performance while waiting for a customer, it is possible to improve the interest of the performance while waiting for a customer.

According to the gaming machine of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 320 to 324 and 327 to 329 as described above, the main display device 131 does not finish the variable display in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed. An effect including scrolling of the mode background image according to the effect mode is displayed as a demonstration standby period until a first time (120 seconds) has elapsed, and after the first time has elapsed, a second time (120 seconds) is displayed. The customer waiting demonstration effect is displayed until the second time period (80 seconds) has elapsed, and the customer waiting demonstration effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration effects even after the second time period has elapsed, and the customer waiting demonstration effect can be displayed as the second and subsequent customer waiting demonstration effects. The period B1 and the demonstration standby period B1 in the time-saving gaming state are displayed in different ways, and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the demonstration standby period B1 in the normal gaming state, the first setting is displayed. (favorite character selection), and if the sword handle unit 135 is operated by the player during the demo standby period in the time-saving gaming state, the second setting (MUSIC selection) can be performed. It is. With this kind of gaming machine, it is possible to customize the gaming machine according to the player's preferences depending on the gaming status of the gaming machine, so compared to conventional gaming machines that cannot be customized in multiple ways, it is possible to customize the gaming machine while waiting for a customer. It is possible to improve the interest of the performance.

[Other embodiments]
Other embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. 332. FIG. 332 is a diagram showing an example of production in another embodiment. As shown in FIG. 332, in this embodiment, the scroll symbol SZ is displayed at a position that does not obstruct the visibility of the performance symbol 50a, etc. of the main display device 131 during the fluctuating performance. The scroll pattern SZ is composed of three patterns, and in each pattern, "■", "□", "●", "○", and "◎" are displayed in a fluctuating manner (scrolling display) and then stopped. be done. Although FIG. 332 describes the case of production mode A, the same applies to other production modes B to F, so the explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 332(a), first, after the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the scroll symbols SZ is started at the timing of the start of the variable display of the three performance symbols 50a. As shown in FIG. 332(b), before the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the scroll symbol SZ is stopped and displayed while at least one of the three performance symbols 50a is being displayed in a variable manner. At this time, the order in which the three symbols of the scrolling symbol SZ are stopped and displayed may be stopped in order from the left side, or may be stopped in order from the right side. In other words, when the game ball enters the first starting device 112 or the second starting device 115, a variable display of the scroll symbols SZ will be performed. In addition, in the stop display of the scrolling symbols SZ, the number of times three symbols are stopped and displayed in the same symbol combination is stored in the sub-RAM 320c of the performance control board 320.

As shown in FIG. 332(c), for example, when the "Pachilog" tag is selected and determined by operating the production operation stick 136 while the menu image MN1a is being displayed while waiting for a customer, the menu image MN3 is displayed. You may also do so. The menu image MN3 displays a list of the number of times the three symbols in the scroll symbols SZ for the past three days were stopped and displayed in the same combination and the types of the symbols that were stopped and displayed. With such an embodiment, the player can check information such as the number of times the same three symbols in the scroll pattern SZ are stopped and displayed while waiting for a customer, and furthermore, based on this information, the player can Since it is possible to estimate the setting value of the gaming machine 100, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed while waiting for a customer, but even during a variable performance, a sound adjustment display smaller than the sound adjustment display OC is displayed according to the operation of the performance operation stick 136. It is also possible to display a small number on the main display device 131 and to disappear if the effect operation stick 136 is not operated for a predetermined period (5 seconds). In such an embodiment, the sound adjustment display small during the fluctuating performance is smaller than the sound adjustment display OC in the customer waiting state and has a shorter display period, which obstructs the visual recognition of the fluctuating performance on the main display device 131. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game. Note that the sound adjustment display during the fluctuating performance may be in various forms that do not interfere with the display of the fluctuating performance on the main display device 131; for example, the sound adjustment display may be displayed on the first side display device 132 or the second side display device 133. It is also possible to do so. Even with such an embodiment, the same effects as described above can be achieved.

Also, a case will be described in which the volume of output sound such as BGM is adjusted by operating the performance operation stick 136 when changing to the customer waiting state from before the special symbols stop changing. Specifically, while the special symbols are changing, the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the production operation stick 136 while the small sound adjustment display is displayed, and the special symbols stop changing and the state shifts to a customer waiting state. At this timing, the small sound adjustment display disappears and the volume cannot be adjusted, and after the transition to the customer waiting state, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed and the volume can be adjusted by operating the production operation stick 136. . With such an embodiment, the player can adjust the volume at a timing of his/her choice, regardless of whether the gaming machine is in a state where the special symbols are changing or in a waiting state for a customer.

In the above-mentioned embodiment, the "model name" display during the customer waiting demo performance was displayed earlier than the "warning to prevent addiction" display and was displayed for a shorter time. The message may be displayed before the message "Caution" and the display time may be longer. In this embodiment, the display time of the "model name" is longer than that of the "warning to prevent addiction", which makes it possible to make a stronger impression on the player about the contents of the gaming machine. Since the display of ``Caution to prevent addiction'' is displayed after the display of the ``model name'', it is possible to sufficiently impress the player with the alert by the display of ``Caution to prevent addiction''.

In the above-described embodiment, the "manufacturer's name" and the "warning to prevent addictive behavior" were displayed separately in the customer waiting demonstration performance. A warning to prevent addiction may be displayed at the same time, or a warning to prevent addiction may be displayed in the middle of the manufacturer's name display. Specifically, "Manufacturer's name & warning to prevent addiction (10 seconds)" or "Caution to prevent addiction" may be displayed 3 seconds after the "manufacturer name" starts to be displayed. In this embodiment, since the "manufacturer's name" and "advice prevention warning" can be displayed at the same time, which are the contents that the player wants to impress, it is possible to make a better impression on the player, and By shortening the display time of the customer waiting demonstration performance, it is also possible to prevent players from getting bored with the display of the customer waiting demonstration performance for a long time. In addition, since a warning to prevent addictive play is displayed halfway through the display of the manufacturer's name, the demonstration performance while waiting for customers is more varied than that of conventional gaming machines where the displays are simply displayed one after the other. Can make an impression.

In the above-described embodiment, only the warning display NH was displayed during the display time of the "warning to prevent hooking" in the customer waiting demonstration performance, but there were other warnings to the players. An image with content such as notification or warning may be displayed. For example, as an image with a content that notifies caution other than the caution display NH, a prevention image CH (Fig. 317 (a-1) ), images warning about illegal activities with gaming machines, etc., and images warning about smoking only in designated areas. At least one of these images may be displayed during the display time of the "Caution to prevent hooking" in the customer waiting demo production, or each image may be displayed in turn. good. In other words, during the display time of the "Caution to prevent getting addicted" in the customer waiting demonstration performance, the caution display NH may be displayed at all times, and images informing other cautions etc. may be displayed. . In such a mode, by changing the mode during the display time of the "Caution to prevent getting addicted" in the customer waiting demonstration production, compared to a mode in which only the caution display NH is displayed, It is possible to make the attention-calling display NH, which has the highest degree of importance, easily leave an impression on the player.

In the embodiment described above, in the customer waiting state, the sound adjustment display OC is displayed after a predetermined period (10 seconds) has elapsed after stopping the fluctuating BGM that has been continuously output after the fluctuation has stopped. However, the sound adjustment display OC may be displayed at the same time as the variable BGM stops. In this embodiment, by displaying the sound adjustment display OC at the same time as the variable BGM stops, it is more effective for the player to be able to adjust the volume than by displaying only the sound adjustment display OC. can be recognized as such.

In the embodiments of FIGS. 327 to 329 described above, the specific case when the possible number of games "M3" is not "0", that is, when the fluctuating performance in the time-saving game state 3 ends and the customer waiting state is entered Although an example has been described, the timing of entering the customer waiting state may vary. Here, for example, a case will be described in which the game enters a customer waiting state when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state 3. In this way, if the customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state 3, the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 in the game where the cumulative number of times "n" becomes "0" stops. At this time, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from any of the above-mentioned presentation modes A to C (see FIGS. 315(a) to 315(c)) to presentation mode F (see FIG. 315(c)). f)), and becomes a customer waiting state in the display mode of time-saving game state 3 (see FIGS. 328(d) to (f) and FIG. 329). Further, at this time, the right-handed hitting lamp is turned on, and the main display device 131 starts displaying the right-handed hitting image MG, and displays the remaining number of times image JK such as "700 remaining times." Then, when a player wins in the second starting device 115 while waiting for a customer in the time-saving game state 3, the performance corresponding to the first game in the time-saving game state 3 is executed, and the main display device 131 displays In this case, the right-handed player image MG is continuously displayed (the right-handed player lamp is also continuously lit). However, when the player is in the customer waiting state in the time-saving game state 3, the above-mentioned time-saving rush performance is not executed, but the time-saving rush performance is executed by winning the first second starting device 115 in the time-saving game state 3. It looks like this. It should be noted that although the time-saving effect is not executed when the player is in the customer waiting state in the time-saving game state 3, the time-saving effect may be executed. Furthermore, for example, on the main display device 131, the cumulative number of times image RK that was displayed in the normal gaming state before entering the customer waiting state may be "800 times" even when the customer waiting state is in the time-saving gaming state 3. It may be displayed and then hidden at the same time as the start of the first game in the time-saving game state 3, and a remaining number of times image JK such as "700 times remaining" may be displayed.

In addition, in the case where the customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state 3, the timing at which the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from any of production modes A to C to production mode F is In addition to the above-mentioned timing, this may be the time when the first variable display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time saving game state 3 starts. In such an embodiment, the display mode on the main display device 131 remains in the normal gaming state (any of production modes A to C), and the right-handed game mode as described above remains (although the right-handed lamp is lit). The user is in a waiting state (see FIGS. 323(d) to 323(f) and FIG. 324) without displaying the punching image MG or remaining count image JK. If a prize is won in the second starting device 115 in such a customer waiting state, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from any of presentation modes A to C to presentation mode F (FIG. 315(f)). Then, the display of the right-handed game image MG is started, the remaining number of times image JK such as "700 times left" is displayed, and the performance corresponding to the first game in the time-saving game state 3 is executed. Further, for example, on the main display device 131 in the customer waiting state as described above, the accumulated number of times image RK such as "800 times" remains displayed, and is hidden at the same time as the first game in the time-saving game state 3 starts. , "700 remaining" images JK may be displayed.

Next, for example, a case will be described in which the game enters a customer waiting state when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state 4. In this way, when the customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from the normal gaming state to the time saving game state 4, when the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 stops in the game where the time saving 4 is won in the jackpot determination process. , the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from one of the above-mentioned performance modes A to C (see FIGS. 315(a) to 315(c)) to the performance mode corresponding to the time-saving game state 4. The state changes to G, and the state becomes a customer waiting state in the display mode of time-saving game state 4. In such a mode, the mode on the main display device 131 etc. changes when the customer waiting state is entered at the time of transition from the above-mentioned normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state 3, and the cumulative number "n" is "0". This is the same as the case where the mode changes when the variable display of the first special symbol display 120 stops in a game where "." Also, for example, when the normal gaming state is in a waiting state for a customer at the time of transition to the time-saving gaming state 4, and when the first variable display of the second special symbol display 122 in the time-saving gaming state 3 starts, The display mode on the main display device 131 changes from any of the above-mentioned performance modes A to C (see FIGS. 315(a) to 315(c)) to the performance mode G corresponding to the time-saving game state 4. It may change. In such a mode, the mode on the main display device 131 etc. changes when the customer waiting state is entered at the time of transition from the above-mentioned normal gaming state to the time-saving gaming state 3, and when the first time in the time-saving gaming state 3 This is similar to the case where the mode changes when the variable display of the second special symbol display 122 starts.

Next, for example, a case will be described in which the game enters a customer waiting state when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state 3 to the normal gaming state. In this way, when the customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state 3 to the normal gaming state, when the variable display of the second special symbol display 122 stops in a game where the possible number of games is "0". , the display mode on the main display device 131 is set to any one of the above-described production modes F (FIG. 315(f)) to production modes A to C (see FIGS. 315(a) to (c)). 323(d) to 323(f) and FIG. 324). Further, at this time, the right-handed hitting lamp is turned off, the right-handed hitting image MG and the remaining number of times image JK are not displayed on the main display device 131, and the left-handed hitting start image is displayed for a predetermined period. Then, after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the left-handed game start image is hidden, the transition notification image is displayed, and the game enters a customer waiting state in the display mode of the normal gaming state. Also, for example, on the main display device 131, the remaining number of games image JK that was displayed in the time-saving gaming state 3 before entering the customer waiting state may be changed to "0 times remaining" when it is in the customer waiting state in the normal gaming state. may also be displayed, and then hidden at the same time as the start of the first game in the normal gaming state, and a transitional notification image such as "Time Saving 3 Finished" may be displayed.

In addition, in the case where the customer waiting state occurs when transitioning from the time-saving gaming state 3 to the normal gaming state, the timing at which the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from production mode F to any of production modes A to C is In addition to the above-mentioned timing, this may be the time when the first variable display of the first special symbol display 120 in the normal gaming state starts. In such an embodiment, the display mode on the main display device 131 remains in the time-saving game state 3 (production mode F), the left-handed game start image is displayed for a predetermined period, and the right-handed game lamp is turned off. The right hit image MG and the remaining number of times image JK as described above are hidden and the user is in a waiting state. When a prize is won in the first starting device 112 while waiting for a customer, the display mode on the main display device 131 changes from production mode F to one of production modes A to C, and a transition notification image is displayed. is started, and the performance corresponding to the first game in the time-saving game state 3 is executed. Further, for example, on the main display device 131 in the customer waiting state as described above, the cumulative number image RK such as "800 times" remains displayed, and is hidden at the same time as the first game in the normal gaming state starts. A migrated notification image such as "Time saving 3 completed" may be displayed.

◇A gaming machine having a first configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode. , a gaming machine capable of executing special games advantageous to players, includes a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a predetermined sound (BGM). ), a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs sound, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by the player's operation. ), and the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, causes the first customer to wait until a first time (demonstration waiting period) elapses after the variable display ends. The performance (Fig. 323(d) to (f), Fig. 328(d) to (f)) is executed until the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the first time elapses. A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demo performance: Fig. 321) different from the first customer waiting performance is executed, and furthermore, the second customer waiting performance can be executed even after the second time period has elapsed. (Second customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321), and it is recognized that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means after the third time has elapsed after the end of the fluctuating display. The sound control means executes a possible sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC), and in the customer waiting state, the sound control means continues to display the predetermined sound until a fourth time elapses even after the variable display ends. The gist is to be able to output sound (FIGS. 323(d) and 328(d)). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine with a second configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode. , a gaming machine capable of executing special games advantageous to players, includes a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a predetermined sound (BGM). ), a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs sound, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by the player's operation. ), and the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, causes the first customer to wait until a first time (demonstration waiting period) elapses after the variable display ends. The performance (Fig. 323(d) to (f), Fig. 328(d) to (f)) is executed until the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the first time elapses. A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demo performance: Fig. 321) different from the first customer waiting performance is executed, and furthermore, the second customer waiting performance can be executed even after the second time period has elapsed. (Second customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321), and it is recognized that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means after the third time has elapsed after the end of the fluctuating display. The sound control means executes a possible sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC), and in the customer waiting state, the sound control means continues to display the predetermined sound until a fourth time elapses even after the variable display ends. The sound can be outputted (FIGS. 323(d) and 328(d)), and at the fourth time, in a state where the predetermined sound can be confirmed by the player, the sound is output in accordance with the operation of the volume adjusting means. The gist is to make it possible to adjust the volume of a predetermined sound (FIGS. 324(i) and 329(i)). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine with a third configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and when the variable display is not executed and is waiting for a customer, In a gaming machine that can execute the first performance (Fig. 323(d) to (f), Fig. 328(d) to (f)) and the second performance (customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321), the second performance is The first display (model name display KH) and the second display (warning display NH) can be displayed while the performance is being performed, and while waiting for customers, the third display (different from the first and second displays) can be displayed. The first effect is executed until a first time (demonstration standby period) elapses after the end of the variable display, and the second effect is executed after the first time (demonstration standby period) has elapsed. The first display is displayed before the second display, and the third display is executed after the variable display ends until a second time (customer waiting demo period) has elapsed. is displayed after a period of time has elapsed, the second display can be executed again after the second time has elapsed, the first display is a display regarding the title of the gaming machine, and the second display is a display regarding the title of the gaming machine. , the gist is that the display is a display that urges players to be careful about becoming addicted to the game. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine with a fourth configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, In a gaming machine that can execute special games advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a sound control board 320 that controls a display means that can display a predetermined image and a sound The display control means is equipped with a volume control means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the output means (sound output device 331), and the display control means is configured to display the display in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed. Displaying the first customer waiting effect (FIGS. 323(d) to (f), FIG. 328(d) to (f)) until a first time (demonstration waiting period) has elapsed after the variable display ends; A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance: Figure 321) that is different from the first customer waiting performance is displayed until a second time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the first time has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer waiting performance can be displayed even after the second time period has elapsed (second customer waiting demonstration performance: Figure 321), and after the third time period has elapsed after the fluctuating display ends. , displays a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means, and while the variable display is being performed, the first character (character Display CP1) or a second character (character display CP2, CP3) can be displayed, and during execution of the second customer waiting effect in the customer waiting state, the first character is displayed at a higher rate than the second character in the display means. The gist is to display. With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine with a fifth configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, In a gaming machine that can execute special games advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a sound control board 320 that controls a display means that can display a predetermined image and a sound The display control means is equipped with a volume control means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the output means (sound output device 331), and the display control means is configured to display the display in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed. Execute the first customer waiting effect (FIGS. 323(d) to 323(f), FIG. 328(d) to (f)) until a first time (demonstration waiting period) has elapsed after the end of the variable display, A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321) that is different from the first customer waiting performance is executed until a second time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the first time has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer waiting performance can be performed even after the second time period has elapsed (second customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321), and the second customer waiting performance can be executed after the third time period has elapsed after the variable display ends. , executes a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted in accordance with the operation of the volume adjustment means, and, in the second customer waiting presentation, warns players about getting absorbed in the game. A warning display (warning display NH) is executed to urge the user to etc.). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ A gaming machine having a sixth configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode. In a gaming machine capable of executing special games advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and A volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (sound output device 331), a motion detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the player's motion, and a valid period setting means (performance control board 320) capable of setting a valid period during which the movement of the player can be detected by the movement detection means during the variable display and the customer waiting state, and the display control means In the customer waiting state where the fluctuating display is not executed, the first customer waiting performance (FIGS. 323(d) to (f) ) and FIGS. 328(d) to (f)), and after the first time has elapsed, a second time (customer waiting demonstration period) different from the first customer waiting demonstration period is executed. A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance: Figure 321) is executed, and the second customer waiting performance can be performed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demonstration performance: Figure 321). 321), and after a third period of time has elapsed since the end of the variable display, a sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC) is executed, and if the movement of the player is detected by the movement detection means during the validity period during the variable display, the first mode effect (FIG. 326) is executed, and the player's movement is executed during the customer waiting state. During the validity period, if a movement of the player is detected by the movement detection means, a second mode presentation (FIGS. 324 (j-1), (j-2), FIG. 329 The gist is to execute (j-1), (j-2)). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine having the 7-1 configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and displays the identification information in a predetermined special mode. When stopped, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a predetermined sound A sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation and a stick 136), and the display control means, in a customer waiting state where the fluctuating display is not executed, displays a first display until a first time period (demonstration standby period) elapses after the fluctuating display ends. A second period of time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the customer waiting effect (FIGS. 323(d) to (f), FIG. 328(d) to (f)) is executed and the first period of time has elapsed. A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321) that is different from the first customer waiting performance is executed until the second customer waiting performance is executed, and the second customer waiting performance is performed even after the second time period has elapsed. be executable (second customer waiting demonstration performance: FIG. 321), and be able to adjust the volume in accordance with the operation of the volume adjustment means after a third time has elapsed after the end of the fluctuating display. The sound control means executes a sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC) that allows the user to recognize the sound, and in the customer waiting state, the sound control means continues to display the sound until a fourth time elapses even after the fluctuating display ends. A predetermined sound can be output (FIGS. 323(d) and 328(d)), and the third time is longer than the fourth time and shorter than the first time. The gist is that (FIGS. 322 and 327). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆The gaming machine having the 7-2 configuration to solve the above problem executes variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of the starting condition, and displays the identification information in a predetermined special mode. When stopped, in a gaming machine that can execute a special game advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a predetermined sound A sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs (BGM), and a volume adjustment means (performance operation and a stick 136), and the display control means, in a customer waiting state where the fluctuating display is not executed, displays a first display until a first time period (demonstration standby period) elapses after the fluctuating display ends. A second period of time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the customer waiting effect (FIGS. 323(d) to (f), FIG. 328(d) to (f)) is executed and the first period of time has elapsed. A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321) that is different from the first customer waiting performance is executed until the second customer waiting performance is executed, and the second customer waiting performance is performed even after the second time period has elapsed. be executable (second customer waiting demonstration performance: FIG. 321), and be able to adjust the volume in accordance with the operation of the volume adjustment means after a third time has elapsed after the end of the fluctuating display. The sound control means executes a sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC) that allows the user to recognize the sound, and in the customer waiting state, the sound control means continues to display the sound until a fourth time elapses even after the fluctuating display ends. The gist is that a predetermined sound can be output (FIG. 331), and the third time is shorter than the first time and the fourth time (FIG. 330). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having an eighth configuration for solving the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode. , a gaming machine capable of executing special games advantageous to players, includes a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a predetermined sound (BGM). ), a sound control means (performance control board 320) that controls a sound output means (sound output device 331) that outputs sound, and a volume adjustment means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the predetermined sound by the player's operation. ), and the display control means, in a customer waiting state in which the variable display is not executed, causes the first customer to wait until a first time (demonstration waiting period) elapses after the variable display ends. The performance (Fig. 323(d) to (f), Fig. 328(d) to (f)) is executed until the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the first time elapses. A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demo performance: Fig. 321) different from the first customer waiting performance is executed, and furthermore, the second customer waiting performance can be executed even after the second time period has elapsed. (Second customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321), and it is recognized that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means after the third time has elapsed after the end of the fluctuating display. The sound control means executes a possible sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC), and in the customer waiting state, the sound control means continues to display the predetermined sound even after the variable display ends until a fourth time elapses. If a sound is output (FIGS. 323(d) and 328(d)), and the variable display of the identification information is started based on the establishment of the starting condition before the fourth time elapses, The gist is to continue outputting the predetermined sound even after the fluctuating display is started (FIG. 325). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a ninth configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode. In a gaming machine capable of executing special games advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and A volume control means (performance operation stick 136) capable of adjusting the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (sound output device 331), and the display control means is configured to control the display control means when the customer is waiting for the customer who is not performing the variable display. In the state, the first customer waiting effect (Fig. 323 (d) to (f), Fig. 328 (d) to (f)) is performed until the first time (demonstration waiting period) elapses after the end of the variable display. is executed, and a second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance) different from the first customer waiting performance is performed until a second time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the first time has elapsed. : Fig. 321) is executed, and furthermore, the second customer waiting performance can be performed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321), and the fluctuating display ends. After a third time period has elapsed since then, and at a time other than the second time period, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment display) that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. The gist is to execute the image OC). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having a tenth configuration for solving the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode. , in a gaming machine capable of executing special games advantageous to the player, displaying predetermined images including mode images (performance modes A to G: FIG. 315) corresponding to a plurality of modes set according to the game state. A display control means (effect control board 320) that controls possible display means (main display device 131), and a volume that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output means (audio output device 331) by the player's operation. and an adjusting means (performance operation stick 136), and the display control means is configured to control whether a first time period (demonstration standby period) has elapsed since the end of the fluctuating display in a customer waiting state in which the fluctuating display is not being performed. The first customer waiting effect (FIGS. 323(d) to 323(f), FIG. 328(d) to (f)) is executed until the first time period elapses, and the second time A second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance: FIG. 321), which is different from the first customer waiting performance, is executed until the demo period (demonstration period) has elapsed, and further, the second customer waiting performance is performed during the second time period. can be performed even after the third time has elapsed (second customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321), and after the third time has elapsed after the end of the variable display, the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume control means. A sound adjustable display (sound adjustment image OC) that allows the user to recognize that the variable display is adjustable is executed, and the first customer waiting presentation is performed in a different manner depending on the mode image corresponding to the mode set before the end of the variable display. The gist is to execute (Fig. 323(d) to (f), Fig. 328(d) to (f)). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine having an eleventh configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, In a gaming machine that can execute special games advantageous to the player, a display control means (effect control board 320) that controls a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image, and a sound control board 320 that controls a display means that can display a predetermined image and a sound A volume control means (performance operation stick 136) that can adjust the volume of the sound output from the output means (sound output device 331), and a motion detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the player's motion. In preparation, the display control means, in the customer waiting state where the variable display is not executed, displays the first customer waiting effect (FIG. 323(d)) until a first time (demonstration waiting period) has elapsed after the variable display ends. ~ (f), Figures 328 (d) ~ (f)) are executed, and after the first time has passed, the second time (customer waiting demonstration period) has elapsed, which is different from the first customer waiting performance. The second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance: Figure 321) is executed, and the second customer waiting performance can also be executed after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demonstration performance: Figure 321) ), and after a third period of time has elapsed since the end of the variable display, a sound adjustment display (sound adjustment image OC) is displayed that allows the user to recognize that the volume can be adjusted according to the operation of the volume adjustment means. During execution of the second customer waiting effect, multiple characters can be displayed (FIG. 321(b)), and if a movement of the player is detected by the movement detection means while the plurality of characters are being displayed, , displaying one of the plurality of modes selected according to the player's motion detected by the motion detection means (FIG. 324 (j-1), (j-2),); The gist is: With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆A gaming machine with a twelfth configuration to solve the above problem executes a variable display of identification information (special symbol) based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the identification information stops in a predetermined special mode, the game starts. In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player and shifting to an advantageous game state more advantageous than a normal game state after the end of the special game, a display means (main display device 131) capable of displaying a predetermined image is controlled. The display control means includes a display control means (performance control board 320) that can detect the player's motion, and a motion detection means (sword handle unit 135) that can detect the player's motion. , the first customer waiting effect (Fig. 323(d) to (f), Fig. 328(d) to (f)) is executed until the first time (demonstration waiting period) has elapsed after the variable display ends. , a second customer waiting performance (first customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321) that is different from the first customer waiting performance is performed until a second time (customer waiting demonstration period) elapses after the first time has elapsed. Furthermore, the second customer waiting performance can be performed even after the second time has elapsed (second customer waiting demonstration performance: Fig. 321), and is similar to the first customer waiting performance in the normal gaming state (Fig. 323). , if the first customer waiting effect in the advantageous gaming state (FIG. 328) is executed in a different manner, and the movement of the player is detected by the movement detection means during the execution of the first customer waiting effect in the normal gaming state. , it is possible to perform the first setting (FIG. 324 (j-1), (j-2)), and during the execution of the first customer waiting effect in the advantageous gaming state, the movement detection means detects the player's movement. The gist is that if this is detected, it is possible to perform a second setting different from the first setting ((j-1), (j-2) in FIG. 329). With such a gaming machine, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Sixth embodiment)
(About gaming status)
Next, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the sixth embodiment, the same components as in the fifth embodiment may be given different symbols, but in that case, the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 293 are applied.
As shown in FIG. 333, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, like the conventional gaming machine, the state changes from the "normal gaming state" to the "jackpot gaming" to the "time-saving gaming state (first advantageous gaming state)". In the case of transition ((a) → (ii)) and in the "time-saving gaming state (first advantageous gaming state or second advantageous gaming state)", when it is determined to be a jackpot by the jackpot determination process, a "jackpot game" is executed. On the other hand, if it is not determined that there is a jackpot, there is a case where the game shifts to the "normal gaming state" ((e)). Furthermore, unlike conventional gaming machines, when a ``predetermined condition is satisfied'' in the ``normal gaming state'', the system shifts to the ``time-saving gaming state (second advantageous gaming state)'' without going through a jackpot game ((b) ). In addition, when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "time-saving gaming state" via the "jackpot gaming", the possible number of games in the "high-accuracy time-saving gaming state (first time-saving gaming state)" is, for example, "80 times". or "100 times", and the possible number of games in the "low-probability time-saving game state (second time-saving game state)" is a predetermined number of times, such as "80 times" or "100 times". . On the other hand, in the case of transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state or fourth time-saving gaming state)" without passing through the "jackpot game", the possible number of games may be reduced to, for example, " 700 times.” In other words, the number of games that can be played when transitioning from the "normal gaming state" to the "jackpot game" and then to the "time-saving gaming state" is greater than the number of games that can be played without going from the "normal gaming state" to the "jackpot game". The relationship is such that the number of times the game can be played in the "time saving gaming state" is greater when the player shifts to the "time saving gaming state". For example, in this embodiment, the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal gaming state is approximately 3.8 times or less of the reciprocal of the lowest probability (1/300 when the setting value is "1"). The number of times that the game can be played may be set as "700 times" in the third time-saving gaming state and the fourth time-saving gaming state. The first time-saving gaming state and/or the second time-saving gaming state may be referred to as a first advantageous gaming state. The third time-saving gaming state and/or the fourth time-saving gaming state may be referred to as a second advantageous gaming state.

Further, the number of times that the game can be played in the "fourth time-saving game state" may be set to be different depending on the game state in which the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed. For example, when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the "time-saving gaming state", the number of times the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed may be greater than when the time-saving symbols are stopped and displayed in the "normal gaming state"; The number of times may be reduced.

Here, in the present embodiment, "establishment of a predetermined condition" means that a first predetermined condition and a second predetermined condition are set. The first predetermined condition is a case where the cumulative number "n", which is the number of times of variable display of special symbols executed from the "starting point", reaches a predetermined number. Specifically, the main RAM 301c is provided with an area for counting and storing the cumulative number "n", which is the number of times the special symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)". When the cumulative number of times "n" counted and stored reaches a predetermined number of times, the game will shift from the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state)". It has become. In addition, the second predetermined condition is a case where the game stops at a preset "time saving symbol (specific losing symbol)", and in this case, from the "normal gaming state" to the "low probability time saving gaming state (fourth time saving symbol)". The game mode is now set to ``game state''. Note that the rate at which the "time-saving symbols" are determined may be any rate. For example, the probability may be the same as or similar to the probability of being judged as a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is harder to determine than the probability of being judged as a jackpot for each set value, or it may be a probability that is easier to determine. good. Furthermore, "establishment of a predetermined condition" may include only one of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition, or may include two conditions, or may include only one of the first predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition. Conditions other than the above conditions may be provided.

In addition, as the predetermined number of times under the first predetermined condition, an arbitrary number of times can be set according to the probability of being determined to be a jackpot for each set value. For example, in this embodiment, the probability of determining a jackpot in the normal gaming state is approximately 2.5 times or more the reciprocal of the highest probability (1/270 when the setting value is "4"), and approximately The predetermined number of times may be set to "800 (times)" so as to be 3.0 times or less. Further, as the "starting point", for example, the time when the "jackpot game" ends, or the time when the RAM is cleared, such as when changing the settings described above, can be set. In other words, in the area of the main RAM 301c that counts and stores the cumulative number of times "n", the cumulative number of times "n" is counted and stored at the time of transition to the "jackpot game" or the end of the "jackpot game" or when the RAM is cleared. Initialization processing will be executed. In addition, as the "time-saving symbol" of the second predetermined condition, a plurality of types of symbols may be set in advance, and the number of times that the game can be played in time-saving game state 4 is set to a different number of times for each type of "time-saving symbol". You can leave it there.

Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with information for deciding whether or not to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the number of players who play the game blindly. Further, for example, if the predetermined number of times is about 800 (times), it is possible to provide remedial measures to a player who has not been able to get a jackpot for a long time, which leads to prevention of abandonment of the game. Furthermore, when transitioning to the "time-saving gaming state" due to "establishment of a predetermined condition", the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" is lower than the case of shifting to the "low-probability time-saving gaming state (second time-saving gaming state)" through the "jackpot game". Since the number of times you can play in the "time-saving gaming state (third time-saving gaming state or fourth time-saving gaming state)" increases, it will make you want to actively play the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state (normal gaming state)" This makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Mode of first advantageous gaming state)
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is capable of executing a first advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player in a variable display of a predetermined number of variations (for example, 80 times, 100 times, etc.) after executing a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 334, the first advantageous gaming state is executed from among a predetermined number of types (for example, a plurality of types, such as three types) of modes (bonus modes). Each mode of the first advantageous gaming state is different in whole or in part, for example, in the background image, the effect pattern 70a, the type and number of types, the effect mode, etc. of effects such as previews and suggestions executed in the variable display. . The mode of the first advantageous gaming state may be selectable by the player's operation, or may be set internally based on the performance of the jackpot game or other predetermined conditions, regardless of the player's selection. You can do things like

(Transition to first advantageous gaming state)
When transitioning to (entering) the first advantageous gaming state, a bonus entry image BTG is displayed on the first image display device 70 (see FIG. 335(a)). At this time, the background image is a background at the time of entry, which is different from a bonus background described later. Note that the bonus entry image BTG may be changed for each mode. Furthermore, the first image display device 70 displays a right-handed game image MUG that informs you that you will play right-handed game, and a remaining number of times image ZKG that informs you of the variable number of times that the first advantageous gaming state can be executed (Fig. 335 ( b)). Then, a bonus background whose background image corresponds to the mode is displayed, and if necessary, after the effect pattern 70a (confirmed pattern) that triggered the jackpot game to transition to the first advantageous gaming state is displayed (Fig. 335(c) ), a variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 2 variable display) is executed based on the starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning hole 47. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 47, a second reservation icon is displayed to display a number of second reservation icons corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2), which is the current number of second reservation memory. After the second pending icon is displayed in the area 70D, the pending icon is moved to the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) being executed. Then, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 335(d-1)). Further, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 47, the second reserved number is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). Ru. Furthermore, with the start of the variable display, the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is changed to decrease.

When a game ball enters the first winning hole 45 by hitting the ball left instead of right, etc., the number corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number in the current first reservation memory, is won. The first pending icon is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B for displaying the first pending icon (see FIG. 335(d-2)). In addition, there is no effect in which the pending icon moves to the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed, and the icon is displayed. The variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 1 variable display) is started based on the starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 45 without being played, and the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started. It is executed (see FIG. 335(d-2)). On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 45, the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1). be done. Furthermore, with the start of the variable display, the display is changed so that the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is decreased.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can display the number of pending memories based on the fulfillment of the special 1 start condition based on winning in the first winning hole 45 as the number of pending icons on the first image display device 70. Further, the number of pending memories based on the establishment of the special 2 starting condition based on winning in the second winning opening 47 can be displayed as the number of pending icons on the first image display device 70. Then, when the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, it is possible to display the pending icon, but when the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, the display of the pending icon (the icon) can be restricted. It has become. In this way, in the case of special 1 variable display, by restricting the display of the pending icon, it is possible to make the player aware that an operation error or abnormality has occurred, such as the player aiming at the wrong winning opening. can. In addition, when the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, even if the hold icon (the icon) is displayed, the hold icon may not be shifted or displayed according to the variable display, or may not disappear, etc. The mode may be different from the case where the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, a hold icon is displayed, and when the variable display based on the special 2 starting condition is displayed, the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is decreased. It is possible to perform a count performance. On the other hand, when the special 1 starting condition is met in the first advantageous gaming state, the hold icon is not displayed, but when displaying a variable based on the special 1 starting condition, it is possible to perform a count effect in which the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is reduced. It is. By doing so, it is possible to inform the player that the game is progressing while making him/her aware that an operational error or abnormality has occurred, such as hitting the wrong winning opening.

(Example 1 of production in the first advantageous gaming state)
As shown in FIGS. 336 and 337, in the fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state, a first advantageous predetermined performance that suggests a shift to a situation advantageous for the player, such as a jackpot or a reach, is displayed at the start of the fluctuation. It can be executed at a predetermined timing such as during the period, just before the fluctuation stops, or when the fluctuation stops. Such first advantageous predetermined effects include, for example, a cut-in effect using a cut-in effect image CIG that is executed during fluctuation (FIGS. 336(b) and 337(b)), and a pending icon in which the pending icon changes. Performances (FIGS. 336(c) and 337(d)), movable member performance in which the movable member 73 operates (FIG. 337(d)), and skill performance image HWG according to the motif of the gaming machine 1 (FIG. 337(c)) ), a pattern enlargement effect (FIG. 337(e)) in which the effect pattern 70a is enlarged and displayed to return to its original size, and other effects can be executed alone or in combination. More specifically, the first advantageous predetermined presentation includes a weak first advantageous predetermined presentation (for example, a pending icon change presentation or a cut-in presentation), a weak first advantageous predetermined presentation, and a player's expectation level (jackpot). There is a strong first advantage predetermined performance that has a different level of confidence (for example, a high level of expectation (level of confidence) for a jackpot). For example, in the case of a pending icon change effect, a rainbow color change or a character change is more powerful than a blue color change, and if it is a moving part effect, it is more powerful to move in front of the liquid crystal than to move small around the liquid crystal. The stronger the movements, the more they overlap, the stronger the effect will be.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the first advantageous gaming state, if the first advantageous gaming state can be executed in the variable display a specific number of times (for example, 80 times), the first advantageous gaming state is executed (40 times in the first half). The second period (for example, the last 40 periods of the variable display), which is a period different from the first period, is better than the period (for example, the first 40 periods of the variable display). The first advantageous predetermined effect is easily executed at the right timing (see FIG. 338). In addition, the first period may be in the middle or latter half of the first advantageous gaming state, the second period may be a period earlier than the first period, or there may be a period different from the first period and the second period. You can. In this way, in the second period of the first advantageous gaming state, the first advantageous predetermined effect is likely to be executed, which makes it possible to increase or decrease expectations for each period, attracting the player's interest, and increasing the interest of the game. can be improved.

In the first advantageous gaming state, if the second advantageous gaming state can be executed in the variable display a specific number of times (for example, 80 times), from the first period (for example, the first 40 times of the variable display), It is preferable that the strong first advantage predetermined effect is more likely to be executed at a predetermined timing in the variable display during the second period (for example, the latter 40 periods of the variable display) which is a period different from the first period. For example, in the second half of the first advantageous gaming state, the predetermined strong first advantageous effect is likely to be executed, which can arouse the player's expectations and attract his interest, thereby improving the interest of the game. Can be done.

In the first advantageous gaming state, the execution rate of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, the execution rate of the predetermined effect changes between the first period and the second period. They may be the same. Furthermore, in the first advantageous gaming state, the execution rate of the predetermined effect is higher in the second period than in the first period, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, the execution rate of the predetermined effect is higher in the second period than in the first period. The magnitude relationship of the proportions may be different, such as a lower proportion. At this time, the same type of predetermined effect may be executable in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state.

In the first advantageous gaming state, when the number of pending memories is the same, the length of the loss fluctuation display time may be different between the fluctuation display in the first period and the fluctuation display in the second period. That is, in the first advantageous gaming state, when the number of pending memories is the same, the variable display time of the second period is longer (or shorter) than the variable display time of the first period, even if the losing variable display time is longer (or shorter). good. For example, in the first half period of the first advantageous gaming state, it is difficult to execute the strong first advantageous predetermined effect, which takes longer than the weak first advantageous predetermined effect, so that the fluctuating display in the first advantageous gaming state can be digested more quickly. This allows players to have more opportunities per hour. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment makes it easier to select effects and fluctuation patterns that take a relatively short time in the period before the first advantageous gaming state, thereby making it easier to digest the fluctuation display, and after the first advantageous gaming state. It can be said that by allowing the execution of performances and variable patterns that take relatively long periods of time, it is possible to attract players' interest for a long time.

In the first advantageous gaming state, even if the number of pending memories is the same in the first period and the second period, the loss fluctuation display time tends to change, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, the first period and the second period are Then, if the number of pending memories is the same, the loss fluctuation display time may be made to be likely to be the same. In addition, in the first advantageous gaming state, when the number of pending memories is the same, the loss fluctuation time is likely to be longer (shorter) in the second period than in the first period, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, the same number of pending memories In the case of numbers, the magnitude relationship of the times may be different, such as making the loss fluctuation time easier to be shorter (longer) in the second period than in the first period. At this time, the same type of predetermined effect may be executable in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the second advantageous gaming state, if the variable display can be performed a specific number of times (for example, 80 variable displays), the second advantageous gaming state can be executed during the first period (for example, the first half of the variable display). 40 times period) and a second period which is a period different from the first period (for example, the second half of the 40 times period of the fluctuating display), the first advantageous predetermined performance is executed at a predetermined timing in the fluctuating display. The number of types may be different. In particular, in the second advantageous gaming state, the variable display is executed a specific number of times (for example, if the second advantageous gaming state can be executed in 80 variable displays, the first 40 times). The second period that is different from the first period (for example, the second 40 periods of the fluctuation display) is more volatile than the first period (for example, the first 40 periods of the fluctuation display). The number of types of first advantageous predetermined effects that can be executed at a predetermined timing in the display may be increased.

For example, in the first half period of the first advantageous gaming state, since the number of types of the first advantageous predetermined performance is relatively small, the fluctuating display in the first advantageous gaming state can be digested quickly, and the player can save time per hour. You can have more chances. In the second half period of the first advantageous gaming state, the number of types of first advantageous predetermined performances is relatively large, which can arouse the expectations of the players and attract their interest, thereby improving the interest of the game. I can do it.

In the first advantageous gaming state, in the case of variable displays that start with the same number of reservations, the variable display that starts in the second period (for example, the second half) is better than the variable display that starts in the first period (for example, the first half). However, the losing symbol variation time may be shortened. It should be noted that the first advantageous gaming state may have fewer types of effects (notice of the variation, pre-reading, etc.) than the normal gaming state. Further, in the first advantageous gaming state, the execution ratio of the predetermined effect (notice, pre-reading, etc. in the variation) may be higher in the special 2 variation display than in the special 1 variation display. Note that in the special 1 variable display, a predetermined effect (for example, a preview, a pre-reading, etc.) may not be executed. In addition, in the first half of the first advantageous gaming state, if the number of pending memories is other than 4, the left → middle → right stop mode is likely to be executed, whereas in the second half, the left → right → middle stop mode is executed. easy to be

In the first advantageous gaming state, the number of types of predetermined effects differs between the first period and the second period, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, the number of types of predetermined effects differs between the first period and the second period. They may be the same. Furthermore, in the first advantageous gaming state, there are more (fewer) types of predetermined performances in the second period than in the first period, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state, there are more predetermined effects in the second period than in the first period. The number of types may be different, such as fewer (or more) types of effects. At this time, the same type of predetermined effect may be executable in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state.

Note that the specific number of times is not limited to 40 times and may be any other number of times, and the first period is not limited to the first half, but may be other periods such as the second half of the first advantageous gaming state, the middle, etc. .

(Example 2 of production in the first advantageous gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 338, the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, in the first advantageous gaming state, changes the display from the variation display before the specific number of variations before reaching the executable number of variations set in the first advantageous gaming state. Execution of the first advantageous predetermined performance can be restricted. The specific number of fluctuations is set to, for example, "4", which is the same as the number of pending memories that can be held. For example, if the number of times that the variable display set in the first advantageous gaming state can be executed is 80 times, the first advantageous predetermined performance can be executed in the first to 75th variable display, but the first advantageous predetermined effect can be executed in the 76th time. In the variable display from to the 80th time, execution of the first advantageous predetermined effect is restricted. In addition, in the first advantageous gaming state, a performance (for example, reach) that exceeds a specific condition is executed from the specific number of fluctuations (76 rotations) to 80 rotations, and if the performance is successful, it will be a win.

By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the inconsistency in which the fluctuating display after the expiration of the possible number of executions of the first advantageous gaming state suggests that an advantageous situation will occur for the player, and it is possible to It is possible to prevent this from creating a sense of expectation.

In the first advantageous gaming state, a predetermined number of fluctuations indicating a jackpot execution is determined from the fluctuation display before the specific number of fluctuations before reaching the executable number of fluctuations set in the first advantageous gaming state, to the fluctuation display after the executable number of times. It is possible to limit the execution of the performance, and in the second advantageous gaming state, from the variation display before the predetermined number of variations before reaching the executable number of variations set in the second advantageous gaming state, to after the number of executable variations set in the second advantageous gaming state. It may also be possible to limit the execution of a predetermined effect that suggests a jackpot by changing the display. The specific number of changes in the first advantageous gaming state and the predetermined number of changes in the second advantageous gaming state may be the same or different.

In addition, in the first advantageous gaming state, from the fluctuation display before the specific number of fluctuations reaching the executable number of fluctuation displays set in the first advantageous gaming state, to the fluctuation display after the executable number of times, a jackpot execution is suggested. While it is possible to limit the execution of a predetermined effect, in the second advantageous gaming state, after the predetermined number of changes before the variable display reaches the executable number of times set in the second advantageous gaming state, Even if there is, the predetermined effect may be executed. In the second advantageous gaming state, a predetermined performance that suggests a jackpot execution from a variable display before the predetermined number of changes that reach the possible number of times of variation set in the second advantageous gaming state, to a variable display after the number of possible changes. While it is possible to limit the execution of the variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, even after the variable display is performed a specific number of times before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the first advantageous gaming state. , it may be possible to execute a predetermined effect.

(Example 3 of production in the first advantageous gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 338, in the first advantageous gaming state, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment performs a final round production in a variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the first advantageous gaming state. is now executable. For example, if the number of times that the variable display set in the first advantageous gaming state can be executed is 80 times, the final effect will be executed in the 80th variable display. Specifically, at the start of the final round fluctuating display in the first advantageous gaming state, the final round image "LAST" is displayed (FIG. 339(c)), and scrolling of the performance symbols 70a is started (FIG. 339(c)). d)). During the fluctuating display, a cut-in effect in which a cut-in image CIG is displayed is executed (FIG. 339(e)), and after the left effect pattern 70a stops, when the right effect pattern 70a temporarily stops, the cut-in image CIG is displayed. A reach-increasing effect is executed using a symbol inciting effect ZAEF that emphasizes the symbol 70a (FIG. 339(f)). Then, when a reach is established, a predetermined reach effect is executed, and when a reach is not established, the effect pattern 70a inside stops, and a variable display is displayed for the number of possible executions set in the first advantageous gaming state. has been executed. In this way, by executing the reach-stimulating effect that arouses expectations for the reach in the final game's variable display, the player will not be bored until the end.

In the first advantageous gaming state, it is possible to display the final image in the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the first advantageous gaming state; In the gaming state, the final image may or may not be displayed in the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the second advantageous gaming state. In the first advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute a reach-increasing performance in the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the first advantageous gaming state, whereas in the second advantageous gaming state In this case, the reach stimulation effect may or may not be executed in the variable display immediately before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the second advantageous gaming state (if the execution rate is the first (This also includes being higher or lower than the advantageous gaming state.) At this time, in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, the display manner of the effect symbols 70a may be the same or different, or the types of reach promotion effects may be the same or different.

(Example 4 of production in the first advantageous gaming state)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the first advantageous gaming state, when the variable display is executed for the number of executable times set in the first advantageous gaming state, the remaining variable display cannot be completed by the final round of variable display. Based on the hold (starting condition) that has been set, a variable display can be (additionally) executed (hereinafter referred to as the remaining hold lottery) with a number of changes equal to the number of remaining hold memories (for example, a maximum of 4). Specifically, when the fluctuating display of the final round stops losing (Figure 340(g)), a result display screen is displayed that displays the number of game balls acquired so far in the first advantageous gaming state (Figure 340(g)). 341(a)). At this time, if there is a pending memory, the first display (result background A: (Figure 341 (b-2-1))) and the second display (result background B: (Figure 341 (b-2-2))) However, when there is no pending memory, only the first display (result background A: (Fig. 341(b-2-1))) can be executed. By doing so, even if there is no pending memory (remaining pending lottery is not executed), the common first display is displayed, thereby making it possible to maintain the player's expectations. It should be noted that a result screen is displayed during the loss fluctuation in the final round of the first advantageous gaming state (for example, when the loss fluctuation stops), and this result screen is continuously displayed during the remaining pending lottery. If the final fluctuating display of the first advantageous gaming state is a win, the result screen is not displayed in the final fluctuating display.

While the remaining reservation lottery can be executed in the first advantageous gaming state, in the second advantageous gaming state, when a variable display is performed for the number of times that can be executed in the second advantageous gaming state, the final Based on the holds (starting conditions) that remained undigested by the time of the change display, even if the change display is executed for the number of changes equal to the number of remaining hold memories (for example, up to 4), it will not be executed. Good too. In addition, while it is possible to display the result display screen in the first advantageous gaming state, in the second advantageous gaming state, when a variable display is performed for the number of times that can be executed in the second advantageous gaming state, , the result display screen may be displayed without being displayed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, a win in the remaining reservation lottery is suggested depending on the type of result display screen. Specifically, the second display (result background B: (Figure 341 (b-2-2))) is better than the first display (result background A: (Figure 341 (b-2-1))). , the expectation level (reliability) of a jackpot in the remaining reservation lottery is set high (the second display is more likely to win). To explain an example of the process to win, for example, the second display result display screen is displayed, and the small symbols LZ are varied (FIGS. 342(a) and 342(b)). Then, the operation button 17 vibrates and a winning suggestion image is displayed (FIG. 342(c)). Win confirmation effects such as the display of a win confirmation image, the light emission effect of the operation button 17, and the operation effect of the movable member 73 are executed (FIG. 342(d)). In addition, in the case of a hit, the reach stimulation effect and the reach effect of the small symbol LZ are not executed. The type of win is displayed (FIG. 342(e)), and at this time, a third display result display screen that is different from the first display or the second display is displayed. Then, on the display screen displaying the game balls etc. to be acquired, the determined winning small symbol LZ is displayed (FIG. 342(f)). Here, in the remaining reservation lottery, a small symbol LZ is displayed in a variable manner in place of the performance symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ at a position different from the performance symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ. In the embodiment, the three small symbols LZ on the left and right start to fluctuate at the same time and stop fluctuating at the same time, regardless of the number of pending memories. Note that the special symbol TZ may be used as the small symbol LZ in the remaining pending lottery.

Even if the result display screen of the first display is displayed, it may be possible to win the jackpot. In this case, it does not matter whether the player wins the jackpot after going through the above-mentioned presentation process or the jackpot without going through the above-mentioned presentation process. When the first advantageous gaming state is in a specific state after the predetermined number of variable displays set in the first advantageous gaming state have been executed, the second display is displayed from the time the first display is displayed. It can be said that it is easier to carry out a specific effect (for example, display of a winning suggestion image, vibration effect of the operation button 17, motion effect of the movable accessory 73, etc.) in the remaining reservation lottery when

In the normal game state, the effect pattern 70a consisting of numbers and characters is used as a variation mode when displaying the effect pattern 70a, and is changed in a predetermined order or simultaneously according to conditions such as the number of pending memories and advance notice. It is executed in a predetermined order or at the same time in a first variation mode in which the process starts and changes and stops at the same time depending on conditions such as the number of pending memories, reach, and advance notice. In the first advantageous game state other than the remaining reservation lottery, the performance pattern 70a mainly consisting of numbers is used as a variation mode when performing the performance display of the performance symbol 70a, depending on the conditions such as the number of reservations stored and the notice, etc. It is executed in a second variation mode in which fluctuations start in a predetermined order or at the same time, and fluctuate and stop in a predetermined order or at the same time depending on conditions such as the number of pending memories, reach, and advance notice. On the other hand, after the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 rotations) in the first advantageous gaming state (result display screen), the variable display based on the suspended memory in a state where the predetermined number of times has been reached. In the case of a specific state (remaining pending lottery) in which is executed, a variable display is executed in a third variation mode by variation of only the small symbol LZ, which is not executed in the first variation mode and the second variation mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the surprise of winning in the remaining reservation lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Note that the variation mode includes the structure of the symbols, the display mode, the order of start and stop of variation of the symbols, the mode of variation such as scrolling, and the display position, arrangement, and size.

In the normal game state, when performing a variable display with the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, it is possible to execute a first performance (reach promotion performance in the normal game state) that increases the possibility that the performance symbol 70a or the special symbol TZ becomes a reach. It is. In addition, in the first advantageous gaming state other than the remaining reservation lottery, when performing a variable display with the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the first performance (first It is possible to perform a reach-increasing effect in an advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, after the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 80 rotations) in the first advantageous gaming state (result display screen), the variable display based on the suspended memory in a state where the predetermined number of times has been reached. In the case of a specific state in which is executed (remaining pending lottery), the first effect (reach-increasing effect in the normal gaming state by the effect pattern 70a or special pattern TZ) and the second effect (the first advantageous effect by the effect pattern 70a or special pattern TZ) A third performance different from the first performance and the second performance (for example, no reach stimulation, a direct hit of the small symbol LZ, and a fluctuation start performance of the small symbol LZ) is not executed. etc.) can be executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the surprise of winning in the remaining reservation lottery, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in the remaining reservation lottery in the first advantageous gaming state, if the remaining reservation number is the same, the display time of the result display screen when winning is constant. In the remaining reservation lottery in the first advantageous gaming state, in the case of the same remaining reservation number, the display time of the result display screen when losing is constant. By doing this, it becomes difficult to tell whether it is a win or a loss depending on the display length of the result display screen, and it is possible to improve the surprise of a win in the remaining reservation lottery, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

(Example 1 of normal gaming state immediately before entering the second advantageous gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 343, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment executes a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 200 fluctuations) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (missing fluctuation) under which a jackpot game is not performed (for example, reaching the ceiling 300 times). A second advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display of times). In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to limit the execution of a normal predetermined performance (notice, pre-reading performance, etc.) from a specific number of fluctuations (296 rotations) before a predetermined condition is satisfied (reaching the ceiling 300 times). It has become. The specific number of fluctuations is set to, for example, "4", which is the same as the number of holds that can be held. For example, if the predetermined condition is 300 times, the normal predetermined effect can be executed in the variable display from the 1st time to the 295th time, but the normal predetermined effect can be executed in the variable display from the 296th time to the 300th time. Execution is restricted. In addition, in the normal game state, a performance that exceeds a specific condition (for example, reach) is executed from the specific number of fluctuations (296 rotations) until a predetermined condition is satisfied (reaching the ceiling of 300 rotations), and if the performance is successful, the player wins.

By doing this, it is possible to eliminate the contradiction that the fluctuating display after the expiration of the possible number of executions in the normal gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) suggests an advantageous situation to the player, and the player This can prevent giving false expectations to people.

In the first advantageous gaming state, a predetermined number of fluctuations indicating a jackpot execution is determined from the fluctuation display before the specific number of fluctuations before reaching the executable number of fluctuations set in the first advantageous gaming state, to the fluctuation display after the executable number of times. In addition to being able to restrict the execution of effects, in the normal gaming state, the execution of normal predetermined effects (effects such as previews and pre-reading) can be restricted from a specific number of fluctuations (296 rotations) before a predetermined condition is met (reaching the ceiling 300 times). It may also be possible to limit it. At this time, the type or number of types of predetermined effects to be restricted may be different between the first advantageous gaming state and the normal gaming state. for example,
In the first advantageous gaming state, in the normal gaming state, the predetermined condition is The predetermined effect may be more (or less) than the specific number of fluctuations (296 rotations) before it is established (reaching the ceiling 300 times). Note that the specific number of fluctuations in the first advantageous gaming state and the specific number of fluctuations in the normal gaming state may be the same or different.

In addition, in the first advantageous gaming state, from the fluctuation display before the specific number of fluctuations reaching the executable number of fluctuation displays set in the first advantageous gaming state, to the fluctuation display after the executable number of times, a jackpot execution is suggested. While it is possible to restrict the execution of the predetermined effect, it may also be possible to execute the predetermined effect even during a specific variation number of times before the predetermined condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state. In the first advantageous gaming state, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect even from a variable display before a specific number of variations before reaching the executable number of variable displays set in the first advantageous gaming state; In the gaming state, it may be possible to limit the execution of a predetermined effect from a specific number of fluctuations before a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Example 2 of normal gaming state immediately before entering the second advantageous gaming state)
FIG. 344(a) shows a situation in which the loss fluctuation has stopped at the 296th rotation from a predetermined starting point (jackpot game, memory clear, etc.) in the normal gaming state. The hold icon is shifted and displayed, and the fluctuation number image GSG indicating the number of losing fluctuations from the starting point is added by 1, and the countdown image CDG showing the number of losing fluctuations until entering the second advantageous gaming state is subtracted by 1. It is assumed that the calculated performance is performed, the 297th fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is started (FIGS. 344(b) and (c)), and the fluctuation is stopped due to a loss (FIG. 344(d)). Then, the hold icon is shifted and displayed, and the fluctuation number image GSG indicating the number of losing fluctuations from the starting point is added by 1, and the countdown image CDG indicating the number of losing fluctuations until entering the second advantageous gaming state is subtracted by 1. The calculated effect is performed, and the 298th variation of the effect pattern 70a is started (FIGS. 344(e) and 344(f)). In this way, in the normal gaming state, the first image display device 70 can display the calculated performance up to the start of the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, by performing a calculation effect that displays the countdown to the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to attract the player to continue playing the game. Note that the calculation effect may be performed using a display means other than the first image display device 70, or may be performed using another means recognizable to the player, such as audio output.

(Example 3 of the normal gaming state immediately before entering the second advantageous gaming state)
Calculation effects can be hidden or hidden depending on operations or settings by the administrator or player. For example, when the power is turned on, the calculation effects (countdown) can be hidden (if the RAM has not been cleared). It may also be displayed. FIG. 345(a) shows a situation in which the loss fluctuation has stopped at the 296th rotation from a predetermined starting point (jackpot game, memory clear, etc.) in the normal game state where the calculated performance is not displayed. Even if the pending icon is shifted and displayed and the variable display is repeated, the calculation performance is not displayed, so the number of losing changes from the starting point and the number of changes to the second advantageous gaming state are not known. However, in the embodiment, when the 297th fluctuation display is started, the number of fluctuations up to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed by the notification effect using the chance preview image CHCG "Two more times" (Fig. 345(a) )). in this way. In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the calculated effect is not displayed on the first image display device 70, when the number of times until the start of the second advantageous gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, a predetermined notification different from the calculated effect is displayed. This makes it possible to notify that the start of the second advantageous gaming state is near. Note that the number of times until the start of the second advantageous gaming state is not limited to two times, but may be one time or three or more times. Circular notifications may also be made. Furthermore, the notification is not limited to numerical information, and may be notification that does not include numerical information such as letters or mini characters. By doing so, it is possible to attract the player to continue playing by suggesting that the second advantageous gaming state is near.

(Example of production when entering the second advantageous gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 346, the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment, when the final variable display stops (main stop) under a predetermined condition (reaching the ceiling 300 times), the normal game starts before the next variable display starts. The internal state is switched from the state to the second advantageous gaming state. Furthermore, when the final fluctuating display stops (main stop) under a predetermined condition (for example, reaching the ceiling 300 times), a right-handed hit notification by the first right-handed hit image MUG1 and a rush suggestion effect TNEF are displayed (Fig. 347(b)). In this way, by enabling the right-handed display to be executed when the final variation display stops (main stop) under predetermined conditions, it is possible to quickly notify the player of the need to switch the game ball launch route. This can contribute to the profits of players.

Then, at the start of the next variable display of the final round, specific notification is performed using the chance entry image CTG indicating that the game has moved to the second advantageous gaming state (FIG. 347(d)). That is, the specific notification is not executed until the next variable display after the final round (the first variable display after shifting to the second advantageous gaming state) is started. By doing this, the value of shifting to the second advantageous gaming state is increased, and the benefits of the second advantageous gaming state can be enjoyed from the beginning.

As shown in FIG. 347(d), in a variable display in which a specific notification for notifying the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is executed by the chance entry image CTG, a first right-hitting notification by the first right-hitting image MUG1, It is possible to perform the second right-handed hitting notification using the second right-handed hitting image MUG2. The first right-handed hit notification and the second right-handed hit notification are displayed so that a part (embodiment) or all of the notification period overlaps, and in the embodiment, the first right-handed hit notification is displayed before the second right-handed hit notification. Once executed, the first right-handed hit notification and the second right-handed hit notification are terminated at the same time. Moreover, in the embodiment, the second right-handed notification is executed in the same period as the specific notification by the chance entry image CTG indicating that the second advantageous gaming state has been entered. In this way, by being able to execute the first right-handed hit notification and the second right-handed hit notification, it is possible to more reliably convey to the player that it is necessary to switch the launch route of the game ball, which increases the player's interests. can contribute to

As shown in FIG. 346, when entering the second advantageous gaming state, the first stage (the stage in the normal gaming state) shifts to the second stage (the stage in the second advantageous gaming state). Then, the specific (initial) right-handed hitting notification (right-handed hitting notification by the first right-handed hitting image MUG1) in the second advantageous gaming state is started in the first stage and ends before moving to the second stage. Furthermore, at the start of the next variable display of the final round, after a specific notification is executed by the chance entry image CTG indicating that the state has shifted to the second advantageous gaming state (FIG. 347(d)), the variable display by the second stage is executed. is performed, and at this time, a third right-hand hit display is performed using the third right-hand hit image MUG3 (FIG. 348(f)). In the second stage, a chance time display image CTHG indicating the second advantageous gaming state is displayed (FIG. 348(g)).

As shown in FIG. 347(e), after the specific notification for notifying the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is made using the chance entry image CTG, it is possible to determine in what mode the second advantageous gaming state will be executed. , is notified by the chance mode image CMF.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment switches from the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state when the final round of fluctuation display in which the condition for transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, 300 fluctuations from the starting point) stops in the normal gaming state. It is possible to switch from the state to the second advantageous gaming state. Then, when the final fluctuating display stops, before starting the next fluctuating display, it is possible to execute the first right-handed hit notification by displaying the first right-handed hit image MUG1. Here, even if the internal state is switched to the second advantageous gaming state when the variable display stops in the final game, various effects such as the stopped effect symbol 70a, background image, and audio output such as music remain in the normal gaming state. It has become. Furthermore, the chance entry image CTG is not displayed until the next variable display is started, and there is basically no change from the normal gaming state other than the first right hit notification being executed. That is, if there is no pending memory when the variable display is stopped in the final round, various performances in the normal game state are held while the first right hit notification is being performed. Furthermore, if there is no hold memory, a demonstration performance (standby performance) may be executed based on standby transition conditions such as no operation for a set time or no winnings, but even if the standby transition conditions are met, the demo Execution of the performance may be restricted. Note that even if the display on the image display device does not switch to the demonstration effect, the audio may be changed to one for the demonstration.

The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment is capable of executing a transition suggestion effect by displaying a rush suggestion effect TNEF, for example, before starting the next variation display when the final variation display stops. The transition suggestion performance is executed before the chance entry image CTG that clearly indicates the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed. In addition, the rush suggestion effect TNEF and the chance rush image CTG are displayed superimposed on the background image of the normal gaming state, and when the final variation display stops, the transition suggestion effect is executed with the background image of the normal gaming state. Ru.

In the normal gaming state, when the condition for transitioning to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, 300 fluctuations from the starting point) is met and the final variation display stops, the normal gaming state is switched to the second advantageous gaming state. It is possible. On the other hand, in the first advantageous gaming state, when the condition for transitioning to the normal gaming state (for example, 80 fluctuations from the starting point) is satisfied and the final variation display stops, the first advantageous gaming state Switching to the normal gaming state can be restricted. Specifically, if there is a pending memory when the last round's fluctuating display stops, it is possible to execute the remaining pending lottery while remaining in the first advantageous game state, and when the final round's fluctuating display stops, there is a pending memory. If not, the internal state may be switched to the normal gaming state.

When the condition for transitioning from the normal gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state is met (for example, 300 fluctuations from the starting point), when starting the next variation display of the final game, it is determined that the transition to the second advantageous gaming state has been made. It is possible to perform a specific notification (for example, display of a chance time entry image). On the other hand, when the condition for transitioning from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state is met (for example, 80 fluctuations from the starting point), when starting the next variation display of the final round, the transition to the normal gaming state occurs. It is possible to restrict the execution of a predetermined notification indicating that the Specifically, when starting the next variation display of the final game in which the conditions for transitioning from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state (for example, 80 variations from the starting point) are met, if there is a pending memory. The remaining lottery is held, and at this time, the result background is displayed as an image. Even if there is no pending memory, when starting the next variation display after the last game where the conditions for transitioning from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state (for example, 80 variations from the starting point) are met, A predetermined notification indicating a transition to a gaming state is not executed. In this way, when switching from a gaming state other than the normal gaming state to the normal gaming state, a predetermined display indicating that the game has transitioned to the normal gaming state may not be executed in the initial variable display after switching to the normal gaming state. .

In the normal gaming state, when the final round of fluctuation display in which the conditions for shifting to the second advantageous gaming state (for example, 300 fluctuations from the starting point) is satisfied, the right-handed display can be executed. On the other hand, in the first advantageous gaming state, when the final variation display stops when the conditions for transitioning to the normal gaming state (for example, 80 variations from the starting point) are met, the execution of the right-handed display is Can be restricted. When the fluctuating display of the final round is stopped and the result background is displayed, the right-handed hit display that has been displayed up to now will be erased.

In the variable display in which the notification image (chance time entry image) that notifies the transition to the second advantageous gaming state is displayed, different modes (for example, differences in display mode, difference in display position, and notification means (for example, images, sounds, etc.) It is possible to perform multiple types of right-handed notifications, such as differences in In the variable display (remaining hold lottery) in which a notification image (result background image) suggesting a transition from the first advantageous gaming state is displayed, different modes (for example, differences in display mode, difference in display position, and notification means (for example, It is possible to restrict the execution of multiple types of right-handed notifications, including differences in images, sounds, etc.).

When the normal gaming state changes to the second advantageous gaming state, the first stage of the normal gaming state shifts to the second stage of the second advantageous gaming state. Specifically, when the variable display stops in the final round when changing from the normal gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state, it switches to the second advantageous gaming state, and at this time, the first stage remains, but the right-hand hit notification (second 1 right-handed image) is started. Then, when the next variable display of the final round starts and the transition to the second stage occurs (after displaying the chance mode image and screen switching effects such as white (black) out), the right-handed hit notification ends. Ru. In this way, the game has a right-handed notification that can be executed over a plurality of stages when changing from the normal gaming state to the second advantageous gaming state. When changing from the first advantageous gaming state to the normal gaming state, the game moves from the normal stage of the first advantageous gaming state to the special stage for displaying results, and then to the normal stage of the normal gaming state. At this time, when the last round of variable display in the first advantageous gaming state is stopped, the right hit display is displayed in the normal stage, but this right hit display is not continuously displayed in the special stage and the normal stage.

In the second advantageous gaming state, by performing a so-called right-handed hit, a variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 2 variable display) is displayed based on the starting condition established by the winning of a game ball to the second winning hole 47. executed. When a game ball enters the second winning hole 47, a second reservation icon is displayed to display a number of second reservation icons corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2), which is the current number of second reservation memory. After the second pending icon is displayed in the area 70D, the pending icon is moved to the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a) being executed. Then, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started (see FIG. 348 (X-1)). Further, when a game ball enters the second winning hole 47, the second reserved number is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F for displaying the second reserved number indicating the second special symbol reserved number (U2). Ru. Furthermore, with the start of the variable display, the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is changed to decrease.

In the second advantageous gaming state, if a game ball enters the first winning slot 45 by hitting left instead of right, etc., the first special symbol reservation number (U1 ) The first pending icon is not displayed in the first pending icon display area 70B for displaying the number of first pending icons corresponding to (see FIG. 348 (Y-1)). In addition, there is no effect in which the pending icon moves to the icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed, and the icon is displayed. The variable display (hereinafter sometimes referred to as special 1 variable display) is started based on the starting condition established by the winning of the game ball to the first winning hole 45 without being played, and the variable display of the production symbol 70a is started. It is executed (see FIG. 348 (Y-2)). On the other hand, when a game ball enters the first winning hole 45, the first reserved number is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E for displaying the first reserved number indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1). be done. Furthermore, with the start of the variable display, the display is changed so that the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is decreased.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can display the number of pending memories based on the fulfillment of the special 1 start condition based on winning in the first winning hole 45 as the number of pending icons on the first image display device 70. In addition, the number of pending memories based on the establishment of the special 2 starting condition based on winning to the second winning opening 47 or the number of pending memories based on the establishment of the special 2nd starting condition based on winning to the second winning opening 47, The number of pending icons can be displayed on the single image display device 70. Then, when the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to display the pending icon, but when the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, the display of the pending icon (the icon) can be restricted. It has become. In this way, in the case of special 1 variable display, by restricting the display of the pending icon, it is possible to make the player aware that an operation error or abnormality has occurred, such as the player aiming at the wrong winning opening. can. In addition, when the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state, even if the hold icon (the icon) is displayed, the hold icon may not be shifted or displayed according to the variable display, or may not disappear, etc. The mode may be different from the case where the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the advantageous gaming state.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the special 2 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state, a hold icon is displayed, and when the fluctuation display based on the special 2 starting condition is displayed, the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is decreased. It is possible to perform a count performance. On the other hand, when the special 1 starting condition is met in the second advantageous gaming state, the hold icon is not displayed, but when displaying a variable based on the special 1 starting condition, it is possible to perform a count effect in which the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is reduced. It is. By doing so, it is possible to notify the player that the game is progressing while making him/her aware that an operational error or abnormality has occurred, such as hitting the wrong winning opening.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment displays the hold icon (the icon) regardless of whether the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the first advantageous gaming state or the special 1 starting condition is satisfied in the second advantageous gaming state. The display mode (including not displaying) is the same. In addition, the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state are the same in that it is possible to execute a count performance such that the number of the remaining number of times image ZKG is reduced during the variable display based on the first starting condition.

(Second advantageous gaming state mode)
As shown in FIG. 349, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can select and execute modes (chance modes) from a predetermined number of types (for example, one type, two or more types, etc.) in the second advantageous gaming state. be. Each mode of the second advantageous gaming state is different in, for example, the background image, the effect pattern 70a, and effects such as previews and suggestions executed in the variable display. The mode of the second advantageous game state can be selected by the player's operation, or can be internally selected based on the performance of the jackpot game or other predetermined conditions. Here, part or all of the mode of the first advantageous gaming state may be shared as the mode of the second advantageous gaming state. For example, the mode executed in the second advantageous gaming state may be one of the modes selectable in the first advantageous state. Further, in the second advantageous gaming state, only a specific mode may be executed (the mode cannot be selected).

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the number of selectable modes is greater at the start of the first advantageous gaming state than at the start of the second advantageous gaming state. By doing so, it is possible to increase variations by creating a difference between the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the number of selectable modes may be smaller at the start of the first advantageous gaming state than at the start of the second advantageous gaming state.

After clearing the RAM, it is not possible to select the pattern for executing the second advantageous gaming state in the fluctuation display of a specified (for example, 300) rotation as a predetermined condition, but after the jackpot is completed, the fluctuation of a specified (for example, 300) rotation is displayed as a predetermined condition. A pattern for executing the second advantageous gaming state can be selected on the display.

Some or all of the previews, pre-reading, and other performances that are executed in the first advantageous gaming state may be executed in the second advantageous gaming state, or vice versa.

In the case of the first advantageous gaming state, the mode may be selected, while in the case of the second advantageous gaming state, the mode may not be selectable. Furthermore, the same type of mode may be executable in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state.

(Example of production - continuous production)
As shown in FIG. 350(a), it is assumed that, for example, in a normal game state, a continuous effect entry image is displayed and a continuous effect is started. In the embodiment, at the start of the continuous performance, the operation performance of the movable member 73 is also performed. The icon TH is changed to one for continuous performance (FIG. 350(b)), and the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner. The variable display of the effect pattern 70a can be performed a predetermined number of times including 1 (for example, 7 times) during a predetermined period notified by the countdown of the timer image TMG ((FIGS. 350(b) to 350(e)) In each of the variable displays of the performance pattern 70a executed in a predetermined period, an acquisition performance for obtaining a predetermined right can be executed, and when the acquisition performance is executed, the right is displayed as the middle performance pattern 70a. ((Fig. 350(c) to (e)). Also, if the acquisition effect is not executed, the fluctuation of the middle effect pattern 70a is stopped in the normal display mode (numbers + characters) ((Fig. 350( b)) There are one or more types of rights, and in the embodiment, four types of rights are set, but the invention is not limited to this.

For example, when the first right is acquired, a display image imitating the operation button 17 (first acquisition display) is displayed ((FIG. 350(c)), and when the second right is acquired, the production pattern A display image (second acquisition display) suggesting execution of the pseudo continuous fluctuation of 70a is displayed ((FIG. 350(e)), and when the third right is acquired, gaming machine 1 A display image (third acquisition display) that suggests a relationship with the motif is displayed ((FIG. 350(f)).The first acquisition display to third acquisition display are displayed as the middle effect pattern 70a. After that, they are displayed in order to be accumulated on the side of the screen.In addition, it is possible to display multiple (for example, 3) accumulation displays from the 1st acquisition display to the 3rd acquisition display, and they all display the same acquisition display. Displays are accumulated, acquisition displays that are different in whole or in part are accumulated, and changes depending on the result of acquisition performance.In addition to the first acquisition display to third acquisition display, when the fourth right is acquired, A display image (fourth acquisition display) suggesting a change in the predetermined effect is displayed ((Fig. 350(d)), and when the fourth acquisition display is displayed, the icon TH changes color, shape, etc. A pending icon effect is executed. Note that, unlike the first to third acquisition displays, no accumulation effect is performed in the fourth acquisition display.

In the acquisition effect and the accumulation effect of the embodiment, the effect pattern 70a changes multiple times in a period in which the lamp pattern 81, the special pattern 60, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a variable manner once. Note that the relationship between the number of fluctuations between the performance symbol 70a and other symbols is not limited to the embodiment.

When the predetermined period during which the acquisition effect can be executed has elapsed, as shown in FIG. Extinguishing effects are performed in the order in which they are performed. Note that the executed acquisition display is erased, grayed out, or canceled out to make it clear that it has been executed. For example, when the first right indicated by the first acquisition display is executed, the first acquisition display appears in the center of the screen, and the color change effect, the operation guidance effect of the operation button 17, the icon change, and the background image change. A predetermined performance such as a change in performance is performed (FIG. 351(a)). For example, when the second right indicated by the second acquisition display is executed, the second acquisition display appears in the center of the screen, suggesting that a pseudo continuous variation of the production symbol 70a will be executed, and the color Predetermined performances are performed, such as change performances, operation guidance performances for the operation button 17, operation guidance performances for the operation buttons 17, changes in the icons, changes in the background image, and changes in performances such as reach stimulation performances (FIG. 351(c)). ). For example, when the second right indicated by the third acquisition display is executed, the third acquisition display appears in the center of the screen, indicating that a special effect will be executed, and includes a color change effect and an operation button 17. A predetermined effect is performed, such as an operation guidance effect or a change in effect such as a change in the icon or a change in the background image (FIG. 351(e)).

Here, the level of expectation of a jackpot may be the same among the first right, second right, and third right, but it is preferable to change the level of expectation of a jackpot, for example, the first right < The degree of expectation may be increased in the order of second right < third right. Further, even if the contents of the rights are different, part or all of the types of performances to be executed may be the same. In addition, the expectation level of a jackpot may be higher when the same right is used multiple times than when one right is used. For example, the performance based on the right used for the first time may be performed with a weak performance. After that, the performance based on the right of subsequent digestion may be made stronger than the first time.

The extinguishing effect of the embodiment is a period in which the lamp pattern 81, the special pattern 60, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a variable manner once, and the effect pattern 70a changes multiple times. Further, in the continuous performance (acquisition, accumulation, and consumption performance) of the embodiment, the performance pattern 70a fluctuates multiple times in a period in which the lamp pattern 81, the special pattern 60, and the special pattern TZ are fluctuated and displayed once. Note that the relationship between the number of fluctuations between the performance symbol 70a and other symbols is not limited to the embodiment. Note that the continuous performance of the embodiment can also be said to be a type of pseudo continuous performance.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the performance pattern 70a based on the second acquisition display and/or the third acquisition display is changed from the variable display of the performance symbol 70a based on the first acquisition display of the rights acquired in the acquisition performance of the continuous performance. With the variable display, it is easier to execute a specific performance (for example, a color change performance among the common performances set for the first right to third right) in a continuous performance. By doing so, expectations can be differentiated depending on the acquired rights, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the present invention is not limited to the color change effect, and may be other effects.

A variable display that uses the right to execute the first effect (for example, a pseudo pattern other than the operation button 17, an image related to the motif of the gaming machine 1, etc.) is better than a variable display that uses the right to execute the second effect (for example, the operation button 17). It may be possible to make it easier to execute a specific performance (for example, a performance suggesting operation of the operation button 17) in a consumption performance that uses the rights acquired in the acquisition performance. Similarly, the rights to the first effect (for example, operation buttons 17 other than the pending change, pseudo symbols, images related to the motif of the gaming machine 1, etc.) are extinguished from the variable display that expires the right to execute the second effect (reserved change). The variable display may make it easier to execute a specific performance (suspended change performance) in a consumption performance in which the rights acquired in the acquisition performance are used up. In this way, by making it difficult for the content indicated by the right to be digested to appear in the content of the specific performance in the digest performance, it is possible to increase the surprise of the game.

In addition, the variation display that uses the right to execute the first effect (for example, the operation button 17) is more effective than the variable display that uses the right to execute the second effect (for example, a pseudo pattern other than the operation button 17, an image related to the motif of the gaming machine 1, etc.) The display may make it easier to execute a specific performance (for example, a performance suggesting the operation of the operation button 17) in the consumption performance of extinguishing the rights acquired in the acquisition performance. Similarly, the right to execute the first performance (pending change) is extinguished by the variable display that depletes the right to execute the second performance (for example, operation buttons 17 other than the pending change, pseudo symbols, images related to the motif of the gaming machine 1, etc.). The variable display may make it easier to execute a specific performance (suspended change performance) in a consumption performance in which the rights acquired in the acquisition performance are used up. In this way, by making it easier for the content indicated by the right to be digested to appear in the content of the specific performance in the consumption performance, it is possible to increase the sense of satisfaction in the game.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the fourth right is acquired in the acquisition performance, it is possible to execute the hold icon change performance in the acquisition performance, but when the first to third rights are obtained in the acquisition performance, the storage After performing the performance, it is possible to execute the pending icon change performance in the digestion performance. By doing so, expectations can be differentiated depending on the acquired rights, and the interest in the game can be improved. Note that the present invention is not limited to the holding icon change effect, and may be a vibration effect of the operation button 17, air blowing with a steering wheel, or other effects.

In the extinguishing performance, no matter which of the rights to the first performance (for example, a pending change) or the second performance (operation buttons 17 other than the pending change, pseudo symbols, images related to motifs of the gaming machine 1, etc.) is exhausted, the specific performance is still valid. (For example, a pending change effect) can be executed. When executing a specific performance by exhausting the right to execute the first performance (pending change) in the consumption performance, the consumption performance is executed without going through the accumulation performance during the acquisition performance, and the pending change performance is executed. It's getting easier. On the other hand, if the right to execute the second performance (operation buttons 17 other than pending changes, pseudo symbols, images related to the motif of the gaming machine 1, etc.) is exhausted and a specific performance is executed, the acquired performance is The rate at which the extinguishing performance is executed during the execution is lower than the right of the first performance, or the extinguishing performance is not executed during the acquisition performance. Then, when the right to execute the second performance (operation buttons 17 other than pending changes, pseudo symbols, images related to the motif of the gaming machine 1, etc.) is exhausted and a specific performance is executed in the consumption performance, after the acquisition performance ends. It is executed (after the accumulation effect). Therefore, in the case where the right to execute the first effect is exhausted and the specific effect is executed with the consumption effect, and when the right to execute the second effect is exhausted and the specific effect is executed with the emission effect, the acquired effect is different. The time from when the right to be executed is acquired to when the specific performance is executed in the consumption performance is different.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the fourth right is obtained in the acquisition performance, execution of the accumulation performance is restricted, but when the first to third rights are obtained in the acquisition performance, the accumulation performance can be executed. It has become.

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a second right based on a second acquisition display that has a weaker relationship with the operation button 17 than a first right based on the first acquisition display imitating the operation button 17, and/or a second right based on the second acquisition display that imitates the operation button 17. The vibration effect of the operation button 17 is more likely to be executed for the third right based on the third acquisition display, which is less related.

Note that the above-described continuous performance is not limited to being executed in the normal gaming state, but may be executed in the first advantageous gaming state and/or the second advantageous gaming state.

(Example of production - Hold change production)
As shown in FIG. 352, the gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment can repeatedly execute a change suggestion performance that suggests execution of a pending icon change performance a predetermined number of times. Specifically, a change suggestion image HSG that suggests the possibility that a change effect of the pending icon will be executed is displayed at a position away from the pending icon on the screen, and a light streak, etc., is directed from the change suggestion image HSG toward the pending icon. A change suggestion effect is executed which suggests that the change in the movement of the change suggestion image HSG is related to the hold icon, such as the flow of the change suggestion image HSG (FIGS. 352(a) and 352(b)). The number of times the change-suggesting performance is performed is performed in multiple patterns, making it difficult to determine the timing of the change. There may be a plurality of types of contents of the change suggestion performance. Then, at a predetermined timing of the plurality of change suggestion performances, a suspension change rendering in which the color, shape, etc. of the suspension icon changes is executed (FIGS. 352(c) and 352(d)). In this way, the pending icon change performance can be executed at a predetermined timing after the change suggestion performance has been executed a plurality of times. By doing so, it is possible to increase the expectation of the pending change performance and improve the interest of the game. Note that in the embodiment, the icon TH is changed, but other pending icons may be changed.

In the pending change performance, the reliability of hitting the jackpot is set in multiple stages depending on the color and shape of the pending icon. It is better to perform the pending change performance at a relatively late timing among the multiple change suggestion performances than when the suspended change performance is executed at a relatively early timing among the multiple change suggestion performances. Pending changes with high reliability are likely to be executed. In addition, even if the pending change effect is executed at a relatively early timing among the multiple change suggestion effects, if the content of the pending change effect is of a predetermined type (for example, a rainbow change), the game will move to the jackpot. The reliability may be increased.

In addition, the above-mentioned pending change performance is not limited to being executed in the normal gaming state, but may be executed in the first advantageous gaming state and/or the second advantageous gaming state.

(Example of production - reach promotion production)
The gaming machine of the embodiment is capable of executing the reach promotion performance in multiple types of modes. As an example of a reach promotion effect, when a production pattern 70a of a certain number "for example 7" temporarily stops on the left side, and the production pattern 70a on the right side is about to stop, the production pattern 70a is emphasized by a reach promotion effect or the like. (Figure 353(a-1)). Then, if the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at the same number as the left performance symbol 70a, a reach is established (Fig. 353 (a-2)), and a predetermined reach performance (SP, SPSP, etc.) is executed. (Figure 353(a-3)). Further, if the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at a number different from the left performance symbol 70a, the reach becomes unsuccessful.

For example, when the production pattern 70a of a certain number "for example 2" temporarily stops on the left side and the production pattern 70a on the right side is about to stop, the production pattern 70a is emphasized by the reach stimulation effect etc. (Fig. 353(b) -1)). At this time, a specific stirring effect such as a shake vision in which the screen shrinks, shakes, and returns to its original state can be executed (FIG. 353(b-2)). Then, if the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at the same number as the left performance symbol 70a, a reach is established and a predetermined reach performance (normal, SP, SPSP) is executed (FIG. 353(b-3)) .Furthermore, if the right performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at a number different from the left performance symbol 70a, the reach will not be established.

In this way, in the variable display, the performance symbol 70a having the second numerical information (for example, 2) is more likely to become a reach than the first performance that increases the possibility that the performance symbol 70a having the first numerical information (for example, 7) becomes a reach. The second performance that stimulates the possibility of becoming a person is more likely to be executed as a specific stimulation performance (for example, Shake Vision). In this way, the ease with which a specific inciting effect in the reach inciting effect is executed differs depending on the difference in the numerical information of the effect pattern 70a, which makes it possible to give meaning to the numerical information and further improve the interest of the game. It is possible.

Here, the reach promotion performance and specific promotion performance are not limited to the above-mentioned shake vision, but are also limited to pending change productions, effects, text (for example, "Maybe it will become a reach?"), the operation and light emission of the movable members 73 and 74, and the operation. Vibration and light emission of the button 17, light emission of the prize opening lamp, etc. may be performed using the image display device 70, accessories, etc. alone or in combination.

In the variable display, the second effect that increases the possibility that the effect pattern 70a having the second numerical information (e.g. 2) becomes the reach, increases the possibility that the effect pattern 70a having the first numerical information (for example 7) becomes the reach. The first effect that incites may be a more reliable effect as a reach effect (SP or SPSP is more likely to be executed than normal). That is, although the second effect of the second numerical information is more likely to execute a specific inciting effect, the first numerical information is more likely to execute a highly reliable reach effect when it becomes a reach.

In addition, in the variable display, the effect pattern 70a having the second numerical information (for example, 2) is more likely to become a reach than the first effect that increases the possibility that the effect pattern 70a having the first numerical information (for example, 7) becomes a reach. The second performance that stimulates sex may be more likely to be performed as a highly reliable performance (SP or SPSP is more likely to be performed than normal) as a reach performance. That is, the second effect of the second numerical information is more likely to execute a specific inciting effect, and furthermore, the second numerical information is more likely to execute a highly reliable reach effect when it becomes a reach.

In the first advantageous gaming state and/or the second advantageous gaming state, the specific inciting performance may be executable with any numerical information performance symbol 70a. That is, the specific reach-inciting effect is executed more in the second reach-increasing effect in the variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and/or the second advantageous gaming state than in the first reach-inciting effect in the variable display in the normal gaming state. easy.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the reach promotion effect of the performance symbol 70a of the second numeric information is more likely to be executed and the reach is more likely to be achieved in the high accuracy medium than in the low accuracy medium. In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the reach promotion effect of the effect pattern 70a of the first numerical information is more likely to be executed in the high accuracy medium than the low accuracy medium, and it is difficult to achieve the reach.

In addition, the above-mentioned reach promotion performance is not limited to being executed in the normal gaming state, but may be executed in the first advantageous gaming state and/or the second advantageous gaming state.

(Example of production - continuous production 2)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, as an example of a continuous performance, the special performance symbol (NEXT) 70a is stopped and displayed (FIG. 354(a)), so that one variable performance (a period in which the special symbol 60 fluctuates once) ), it is possible to perform a pseudo fluctuation performance in which the fluctuation start of the performance symbol 70a (symbol fluctuation performance) can be executed multiple times. Specifically, the first special effect pattern (NEXT) 70a is stopped and displayed (FIG. 354(a)), and a continuous inciting effect using the discrimination effect image etc. is executed (FIG. 354(b)). If the continuous stirring performance fails, the pseudo fluctuation performance ends. Furthermore, if the continuous excitement performance is successful, the pseudo fluctuation performance is continued. In the variable display that follows after the first continuous inciting effect is successful, the second special effect symbol (NEXT) 70a is stopped and displayed (FIG. 355(a)), so that the continuous inciting effect using the discrimination effect image, etc. is executed. (Figure 355(b)). If the continuous stirring performance fails, the pseudo fluctuation performance ends. Furthermore, if the continuous excitement performance is successful, the pseudo fluctuation performance is continued. In the variable display that follows after the second continuous inciting effect is successful, the third special effect symbol (NEXT) 70a is stopped and displayed (FIG. 356(a)), and the continuous inciting effect using the discrimination effect image, etc. is executed. (Figure 356(b)).

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of Embodiment 1 has a higher rate of success in the first inciting effect at the first time in one pseudo fluctuation effect than in the second inciting effect executed after the first inciting effect is successful. 2 The success rate of inciting performance is higher than the success rate of inciting performance. In addition, when the second continuous inciting performance is successful, execution of the third pseudo-fluctuation performance may be determined.

The pseudo fluctuation performance can be executed before and/or after the reach, and the successive inciting performance is easier to succeed when executed after the reach, than when executed before the reach.

Note that the above-described continuous performance is not limited to being executed in the normal gaming state, but may be executed in the first advantageous gaming state and/or the second advantageous gaming state. Note that the continuous performance of the embodiment can also be said to be a type of pseudo continuous performance.

(Example of production - specific image production)
In the production example shown in FIG. 357, a first image CRCG1 and a second image CRCG2 are displayed, and the display of the first image CRCG1 and second image CRCG2 is in a predetermined state (for example, the first image is pushing the second image). etc.), and the fluctuation of the loss of the production pattern 70a is stopped. Here, when a predetermined state is reached, the percentage of losses may be higher than the percentage of hits.

In the production example shown in FIG. 358, a first image CRCG1 and a second image CRCG2 are displayed, and the display of the first image CRCG1 and second image CRCG2 is in a specific state different from the above-mentioned predetermined state (for example, the second image is (e.g. pressing the first image). In the production example shown in FIG. 358, when the specific state is reached, the display production using the specific image is executed, and then the third image CRCG3 is additionally displayed (FIG. 358(e)). A specific effect in which the display of the first image CRCG1, second image CRCG2, and third image CRCR3 is in a special state different from a predetermined state or a specific state (for example, the first image and the third image are pressing the second image, etc.) has been carried out and has been a success. Note that even if the predetermined state is reached, the transition to the special state does not always occur, and the transition to the special state may fail. If the specific state does not change to the special state, the probability of losing the game may be higher than winning. Also, it may be removed after entering a special state.

The first image CRCG1 and the third image CRCG3 can use characters etc. that suggest an advantageous situation for the player, and the second image CRCG2 can use characters etc. that suggest a disadvantageous situation for the player. Can be used. That is, the predetermined state appears to be progressing to a situation that is advantageous to the player, the specific state appears to be progressing to a situation that is disadvantageous to the player, and the special state is the predetermined state. The game is set so that it appears to be progressing to a situation that is more advantageous to the player than the specific state.

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment executes a specific image effect in which either a display effect of a predetermined state that is advantageous to the player or a display effect of a specific state that is disadvantageous to the player is selectively displayed in the variable display. It is possible. In the specific image production, the specific effect (the first Display effect using image CRCG1, second image CRCG2, and third image CRCR3) can be easily executed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, a reach effect executed immediately after a special state display effect is more reliable than a reach effect executed immediately after a display effect of a predetermined state or a specific state. For example, SPSP Reach) is likely to be executed.

Note that the aforementioned specific image effect is not limited to being executed in the normal gaming state, but may be executed in the first advantageous gaming condition and/or the second advantageous gaming condition. Further, although the embodiment has been described as a type of reach performance, it may be applied to a performance before the reach.

In the variable display, there are two types of losses: random losses where the reach is not established and the winnings are missed, and reach losses where the winnings are lost after the reach is established. The fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) is set longer for the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state than the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state. For example, if multiple types of variation patterns with different variation times are set for each of the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the first advantage It can be said that a variation pattern with a long variation time is more likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 variation display of a loss in the gaming state. Note that when the number of pending memories (for example, 1) is small, the one with a long variation time is likely to be executed, and when the number of pending memories (for example, 2 or more) is relatively large, the one with a short variation time may be more likely to be executed. .

The special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state can be executed with a plurality of types of variation patterns having different variation times. In addition, although the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state can be executed with multiple types of fluctuation patterns with different variation times, the fluctuation pattern that can be executed with the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state fewer than the number of types. For example, the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state can be executed with two types of fluctuation patterns with different variation times, whereas the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state can be It can be made executable with one type of variation pattern with different times. In this case, the special 1 variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state will always be displayed in the same variable time even if the conditions such as the number of pending memories and whether or not the performance is executed change.

The execution ratio may be the same between the advance notice performance performed with the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the advance notice performance performed with the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state. In addition, the number of executable types is the same between the preview performance performed with the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the preview performance performed with the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. It's okay. Note that the preview performance may not be executed.

The preview performance performed with the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state may be easier to execute than the preview performance performed with the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. In addition, the number of types of preview effects that can be executed is smaller than the number of types of preview effects that can be executed when the special 1 variation display of a loss is displayed in the second advantageous gaming state than the preview effect that is performed with the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state. You can leave it there.

The above-mentioned effects are not limited to those based on images, but may be replaced with events that can be recognized by the player, such as movable members, sounds, operation buttons, prize openings, and other lamps, singly or in combination.

(Example 1 of production)
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment will be further explained.

(Basic performance)
The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is capable of executing a basic performance in which the performance symbols 70a are displayed (symbol display) and a background image (for example, a movie or an image that is repeatedly displayed) is displayed (background display) in the variable display. . The basic performance can be executed in each of the normal gaming state, the first advantageous gaming state, and the second advantageous gaming state in the manner (content) set for each state (see FIGS. 359, 360, and 361). Here, the basic performance is a performance that is normally (minimally) executed when playing a game using a variable display, and may include audio output, light emission, and the like. Note that the basic performance can also be said to be a performance that does not include any performance that makes the player expect (suggest) the execution of a jackpot game, such as a preview performance or a promotion performance.

(Preview performance)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of preview performances (which may include pre-reading) that make players expect (suggest) a jackpot (transition to a jackpot game). As shown in FIG. 359, for a specific performance among the plurality of types of preview performances, special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state (variable display based on the starting condition established by winning the game ball to the first winning hole 45). It is executable. Specific effects include, for example, a light emission effect such as a starting lamp (FIG. 362(a)), a holding change effect (FIG. 362(b)), and a character action change effect of the effect pattern 70a (FIG. 362(a)). )), a pseudo-notice effect (Fig. 362(c)) that suggests that the change in the effect pattern 70a will continue, button effects such as vibration and light emission of the operation button 17 (Fig. 363(c)), and movable parts. Examples include the operation of 73 and 74 and the effects of movable members such as light emission (FIG. 363(b)). Incidentally, the variable display based on the starting condition established by the winning of the game ball into the second winning hole 47 may be referred to as the special 2 variable display.

As shown in FIG. 360, execution of a specific performance (all types of preview performances may be possible) among the plurality of types of preview performances is restricted by special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state. This is different from the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 361, the execution of a specific performance (all types of preview performances may be possible) among the plurality of types of preview performances is restricted in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. This is the same as the first advantageous gaming state, but it is different from the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 359(a), in the normal game state, during the entire period of one variation (the period from when the special symbol starts to change once until it stops), the symbol fluctuation display performance and image by the performance symbol 70a It is possible to perform basic effects using background effects (for example, a continuous movie, a repeating background, etc.) on the display device 70. As shown in FIG. 360, in the first advantageous gaming state, the symbol fluctuation display performance and image display by the performance symbol 70a during the entire period of one fluctuation (the period from when the special symbol starts to fluctuate once until it stops) The device 70 can perform basic effects using background effects (for example, a continuous movie, a repeating background, etc.). As shown in FIG. 361, in the second advantageous gaming state, the symbol fluctuation display performance and image display by the performance symbol 70a during the entire period of one fluctuation (the period from when the special symbol starts to fluctuate once until it stops) The device 70 can perform basic effects using background effects (for example, a continuous movie, a repeating background, etc.).

(Specific fluctuation)
The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment can perform the basic performance during the entire period of one fluctuation (the period from when the special symbol starts changing once until it stops), but restricts the execution of all preview performances. It is now possible to execute specific variations (FIGS. 360 and 361). Note that although it is not necessary to execute the specific variation in the normal gaming state, the specific variation may be executed (FIG. 359(b)).

The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is capable of storing a plurality of suspended memories based on the starting condition when a game ball enters the first winning hole 45. A plurality of pending memories can be stored based on the starting condition caused by the winning of a game ball into the second winning hole 47. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can perform a variable display in the same variable time even when the pending memory is at its minimum or maximum, and can execute the basic effect during the entire period of one variable display. In addition, it is possible to perform specific fluctuations that limit the execution of multiple types of preview performances. In other words, the variation time is constant regardless of the number of pending memories in the variation display in which the specific variation is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 360, the preview effect can be executed in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, but it may be possible to restrict the execution of the preview effect in the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. Further, as shown in FIG. 361, the preview performance can be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, but it may be possible to restrict the execution of the preview performance in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 1-1)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the length of the variation time of the specific variation is different between the special 1 variation display of a loss in the normal gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. In the embodiment, a performance with a long specific variation is more likely to be selected in the loss special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the loss special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state. From the special 1 fluctuation display of loss in the normal gaming state when the number of pending items is 1 (2 to 3), the special 1 fluctuation of loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. In the display, effects with longer specific fluctuations are more likely to be selected. In addition, the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4 is better than the special 1 variation display of a loss in the normal gaming state when the number of pending items is 4. It is easier to select long productions.

By doing so, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player can be informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 1-2)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the length of the variation time of the specific variation is the same between the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. There is. In the embodiment, specific fluctuations of the same length are likely to be selected in the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. Special 1 fluctuation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and special 1 fluctuation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. 1 variation display makes it easier to select a specific variation of the same length. In addition, the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4 is the same as the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4. Specific variations in length are more likely to be selected.

By doing this, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in both the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, it is known that it is disadvantageous to enter the first winning slot 45 with the game ball. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 1-3)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the length of the variation time of the specific variation is different between the special 2 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. In the embodiment, an effect with a long specific fluctuation is more likely to be selected in the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 fluctuation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state. From the special 2 fluctuation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), the special 2 fluctuation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. In the 1-variation display, a performance with a long specific variation is more likely to be selected. In addition, the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4 is better than the special 2 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4. Performances with long specific fluctuations are more likely to be selected.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 1-4)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the length of the variation time of the specific variation is different between the special 2 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. In the embodiment, an effect with a long specific fluctuation is more likely to be selected in the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. From the special 2 fluctuation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), the special 2 fluctuation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. In the 1-variation display, a performance with a long specific variation is more likely to be selected. In addition, the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4 is better than the special 2 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4, Performances with long specific fluctuations are more likely to be selected.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 2-1)
As shown in FIG. 364, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which special 1 variable display of loss in the normal gaming state is executed is the first rate (aa1). The rate at which special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the second rate (aa5). The first rate and the second rate are different in execution rate (aa1≠aa5). In the embodiment, the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state is more likely to execute a fluctuation performance with a specific fluctuation than the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the normal gaming state (aa1<aa5) . This is better than the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the normal gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and the difference in the loss of the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. In the special 1 variation display, it is easier to execute a variation effect with a specific variation. In addition, the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4 is better than the special 1 variation display of a loss in the normal gaming state when the number of pending items is 4. This makes it easier to execute certain fluctuation effects.

By doing so, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player can be informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 2-2)
As shown in FIG. 364, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which special 1 variation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state is executed is the first rate (aa3). The rate at which special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the second rate (aa5). The first rate and the second rate have the same execution rate (aa3=aa5). In the embodiment, the ratio of execution of a variation performance with a specific variation is the same for the loss special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and the loss special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state (aa3 =aa5). This is the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. The rate at which the special 1 variation display of loss and the variation performance with a specific variation are executed are the same. In addition, the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4, and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4 are specified. The rate at which variable performances with variations are executed is the same.

By doing this, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in both the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, it is known that it is disadvantageous to enter the first winning slot 45 with the game ball. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 2-3)
As shown in FIG. 364, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state is executed is the first rate (aa4). The rate at which special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the second rate (aa5). The first rate and the second rate are different in execution rate (aa4≠aa5). In the embodiment, the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state is easier to execute a fluctuation effect with a specific fluctuation than the special 2 fluctuation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state (aa4< aa5). This is better than the special 2 fluctuation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. The special 1 variation display of loss makes it easier to execute a variation performance with a specific variation. In addition, the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4 is better than the special 2 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4. It is easier to execute a variation effect with a specific variation.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 2-4)
As shown in FIG. 364, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the rate at which special 2 variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the first rate (aa6). The rate at which special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state is executed is the second rate (aa5). The first rate and the second rate are different in execution rate (aa6≠aa5). In the embodiment, the special 1 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state is easier to execute a fluctuation effect with a specific fluctuation than the special 2 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state (aa6< aa5). This is better than the special 2 fluctuation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. The special 1 variation display of loss makes it easier to execute a variation performance with a specific variation. In addition, the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4 is better than the special 2 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of pending items is 4, It is easier to execute a variation effect with a specific variation.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 3-1)
As shown in FIG. 365, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation in the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state, but it is possible to execute a specific variation in the special 1 variation display of a loss in the normal gaming state. It is possible to limit The specific fluctuation is limited in the loss special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. A specific variation can be executed in the loss special 1 variation display. In addition, it is possible to limit the specific fluctuation in the loss special 1 fluctuation display in the normal gaming state when the number of reservations is 4, but when the number of reservations is 4, it is possible to limit the special fluctuation 1 of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state. Specific changes can be executed in the change display.

By doing so, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state as in the normal gaming state, the player can be informed that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning slot 45. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 3-2)
As shown in FIG. 365, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation in both the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. It is. A specific variation can be executed in the special 1 fluctuation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), and the second when the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. A specific variation can be executed in the special 1 variation display of loss in an advantageous gaming state. In addition, it is possible to execute a specific variation in the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4, and the characteristic of loss in the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4. A specific variation can be executed in the 1 variation display.

By doing this, even if you accidentally hit the ball to the left in both the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, it is known that it is disadvantageous to enter the first winning slot 45 with the game ball. It is possible to make the player aware of this. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 3-3)
As shown in FIG. 365, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation in the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state, but in the special 2 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state. It is possible to limit specific fluctuations. The second advantageous game when the specific fluctuation is limited in the special 2 fluctuation display of loss in the first advantageous game state when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3) and the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. A specific variation can be executed in the special 1 variation display of the state's loss. In addition, it is possible to limit the specific fluctuation in the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4, but when the number of reservations is 4, it is possible to limit the specific fluctuation of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state. Special 1 It is possible to execute a specific variation in the variation display.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 3-4)
As shown in FIG. 365, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment can execute a specific variation in the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state, but in the special 2 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state. It is possible to limit specific fluctuations. The second advantageous game when the number of reservations is 1 (2 to 3), the specific fluctuation is limited in the special 2 fluctuation display of loss in the second advantageous game state, and the number of reservations is the same as the special 1 fluctuation display. A specific variation can be executed in the special 1 variation display of the state's loss. In addition, it is possible to limit the specific fluctuation in the special 2 fluctuation display of the loss of the second advantageous gaming state when the number of reservations is 4, but when the number of reservations is 4, the specific fluctuation of the loss of the second advantageous gaming state is limited. Special 1 It is possible to execute a specific variation in the variation display.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 2 of production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of preview effects that make players expect a big win, and these types of preview effects are executed singly or in combination. Examples of such preview effects include effects executed on images (characters, effects, backgrounds, etc.) and displays on the image display device 70 (referred to as the first display effects when specifically distinguished). There are background change effects such as the background changing to SP or SPSP backgrounds, text preview effects that display text such as ``Chance has arrived?'', and effect preview effects that display different effects than usual. Mode entry effects that suggest or notify a change from one mode to another can be executed singly or in combination. The preview performance includes a display performed on a display means other than the image display device (referred to as a second display performance when distinguished), such as a 3D filter preview performance performed on a display using a 3D filter, etc. , a light guide plate preview performance, etc. performed by display on the light guide plate, etc. can be executed alone or in combination. As the preview performance, it is possible to perform an action performance performed by the movement of a movable accessory such as a movable member that performs a predetermined action. As the preview performance, it is possible to perform a vibration performance performed by vibrating the operation button 17 or the like. As the preview performance, a sound preview performance using sound output from the speaker 9 can be executed. As a preview performance, it is possible to execute a light-emitting performance that is performed by emitting light from a light-emitting device installed on a game board, a game frame, movable parts, operation buttons, prize openings, and other accessories, and an operation handle. .

The preview performances may be of the same type or may be further subdivided depending on reliability. For example, if it is a hold change effect, the color of the hold icon may be set so that the reliability increases in the order of "blue" < "red" < "rainbow", or if it is an action effect, the color of the hold icon is set so that the reliability increases in the order of "blue" < "red" < "rainbow". For example, the reliability may be set so that the reliability increases in the order of the stronger operation. Note that the reliability may be changed by combining a plurality of types of preview performances.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 4-1)
As shown in FIG. 366, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more likely to hit the jackpot in the variable display in which the background change effect is executed than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state. is likely to hold true (bb1<bb5). In particular, it is easier to achieve a jackpot in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, in the variable display in which a background change effect other than normal (for example, for SP) is executed. ing. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, and the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. It has become easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The background change performance may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state. In this way, although the background change effect is likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, it is easy to lose even if the background change effect is executed, and the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to win, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot if the background change effect is executed.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 4-2)
As shown in FIG. 366, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and a special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state in the variable display in which the background change effect has been executed. It is easier to achieve a jackpot (bb3=bb5). In particular, between the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the percentage of jackpots is higher in the variable display where a background change effect other than normal (for example, for SP) is executed. It's the same. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to hit the jackpot, and when the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state. Once the performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the background change effect may be set to be the same between the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although it is difficult for the background change effect to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, it is easier to hit the jackpot when the background change effect is executed, and the background change in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state Although it is difficult to execute the effect, if the background change effect is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 4-3)
As shown in FIG. 366, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is better than the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. It is easier to achieve a jackpot in (bb4<bb5). In particular, a jackpot is more likely to be achieved in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, in which a background change effect other than normal (for example, for SP) is executed. It's getting easier. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the background change effect is executed in the special 2 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state, and the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state. If you do so, it will be easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The background change effect may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the background change effect is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to lose even if the background change effect is executed, and the background change effect is likely to be lost in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to execute, if the background change effect is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

The rate at which the background change effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution rate of the background change performance in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state is the same as in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, even if the background change performance is executed, it is easy to lose, Although the execution rate of the background change effect in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is the same as that in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous game state, when the background change effect is executed, it becomes easier to hit a jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 4-4)
As shown in FIG. 366, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more sensitive to the variable display in which the background change effect has been executed than the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. A jackpot is more likely to occur in (bb6<bb5). In particular, the jackpot is more likely to be achieved in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, in which a background change effect other than normal (for example, for SP) is executed. It's getting easier. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the background change effect is executed in the special 2 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state, and the background change effect is executed in the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state. If you do so, it will be easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The background change effect may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the background change effect is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, it is easy to lose even if the background change effect is executed, and the background change effect is likely to be lost in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to execute, if the background change effect is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

The rate at which the background change effect is executed may be the same between the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution rate of the background change performance in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, even if the background change performance is executed, it is easy to lose, Although the execution rate of the background change effect in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is the same as that in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous game state, when the background change effect is executed, it becomes easier to hit a jackpot.

In a normal game state, a highly reliable preview performance may be relatively difficult to execute, and even if a highly reliable preview performance is executed, it may be relatively easy to lose. In the first advantageous gaming state and/or the second advantageous gaming state, a highly reliable preview performance may be relatively easily executed, and when the highly reliable preview performance is executed, it may be relatively easy to win a jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 5-1)
As shown in FIG. 367, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, a specific preview performance among the preview performances is executed more in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state. A jackpot is more likely to occur in the variable display (cc1<cc5). Here, the specific notice performances include, for example, a text notice production, an effect notice production, a 3D filter notice production, a light guide plate notice production, a mode entry production, a notice production using movable members (motions and light emission by movable members, etc.), and a sound notice. Examples include a presentation, a vibration warning presentation of the operation button 17, and the like. For example, in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, a jackpot is more likely to occur in the variable display in which the text preview effect is executed than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the specific preview performance is executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, and the specific preview performance is executed in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. It has become easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special notice performance may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state. In this way, although the specific notice performance is likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, it is easy to lose even if the specific notice performance is executed, and the specific notice performance is executed in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to win, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot if the specific preview effect is executed.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 5-2)
As shown in FIG. 367, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and a special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, in the variable display in which the specific preview performance has been executed. It is easier to achieve a jackpot (cc3=cc5). For example, the proportion of jackpots in the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is the same in the variable display in which the text preview effect is executed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is easy to hit a jackpot when the specific notice performance is executed in the special 1 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, and it is easy to hit the jackpot when the special notice performance is executed in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Once the performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the specific preview performance may be set to be the same between the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although it is difficult for the specific notice effect to be executed in the special 1 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to hit the jackpot when the specific notice effect is executed, and the specific notice effect is easily executed in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Although the performance is difficult to execute, if the specific preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 5-3)
As shown in FIG. 367, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more sensitive to the special 1 variable display in which the specific preview performance has been executed than the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. It is easier to achieve a jackpot in (bb4<bb5). For example, in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, it is easier to achieve a jackpot in the variable display in which the text preview effect is executed than in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the specific preview performance is executed in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, and the specific notice performance is executed in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. If you do so, it will be easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special notice performance may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the specific notice performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to lose even if the specific notice performance is executed, and the specific notice performance is likely to be lost in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to execute, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot if the specific preview effect is executed.

The rate at which the specific preview performance is executed may be the same between the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution ratio of the specific notice performance in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, even if the specific notice performance is executed, it is easy to lose, Although the execution rate of the specific preview performance in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, when the specific preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 5-4)
As shown in FIG. 367, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is more sensitive to the special 1 variable display in which the specific preview performance has been executed than the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. A jackpot is more likely to occur in (bb6<bb5). For example, it is easier to achieve a jackpot in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state in the variable display where the text preview performance is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the specific preview performance is executed in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, and the specific notice performance is executed in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. If you do so, it will be easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special notice performance may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the specific notice performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, it is easy to lose even if the specific notice performance is executed, and the specific notice performance is likely to be lost in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to execute, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot if the specific preview effect is executed.

The rate at which the specific preview performance is executed may be the same between the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution rate of the specific notice performance in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, even if the specific notice performance is executed, it is easy to lose, Although the execution rate of the specific preview performance in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, when the specific preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 6-1)
As shown in FIG. 368, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the display means (image display device 70, but also includes display means such as sub-liquid crystals and light guide plates), a jackpot is more likely to occur in a variable display in which a display means advance notice effect that can be executed is executed (dd1<dd5). Here, the display means preview performance includes, for example, a background change performance, a text preview performance, an effect preview performance, a 3D filter preview performance, a light guide plate preview performance, a mode entry performance, and the like. Among the preview performances, other than the display means preview performances, there are, for example, advance notice performances using movable members (motions and light emission by movable members, etc.), sound preview performances, and vibration notices of the operation button 17, which are executed in places other than the display means. Examples include performances. For example, in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, it is easier to achieve a jackpot in the variable display in which the background change notice effect is executed than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the display means preview performance is executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, and the display means advance notice performance is executed in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. If you do so, it will be easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state may be made more difficult to execute the display means preview performance than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state. In this way, although the display means advance notice performance is likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, even if the display means advance notice performance is executed, it is easy to lose, and the display means advance notice in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to perform the performance, if the display means preview performance is performed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 6-2)
As shown in FIG. 368, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and a special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, and a variable display in which the display means advance notice performance has been executed. It is easier to achieve a jackpot in (dd3=dd5). For example, the ratio of jackpots in the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is the same in the variable display in which the background change effect is executed. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the display means preview performance is executed in the special 1 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to hit the jackpot, and the game machine 1 that is displayed in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state When the means preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the display means preview performance may be set to be the same between the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although it is difficult for the display means advance notice performance to be executed in the special 1 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to hit the jackpot when the display means advance notice performance is executed, and in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to execute the display means advance notice performance, if the display means advance notice performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 6-3)
As shown in FIG. 368, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state is more sensitive to the fluctuation in which the display means advance notice performance has been executed than the special 2 fluctuation display in the first advantageous gaming state. The display makes it easier to win a jackpot (dd4<dd5). For example, it is easier to achieve a jackpot in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state in the variable display in which the background change effect is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the display means advance notice performance is executed in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, and the display means advance notice performance during the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. When executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state may be made more difficult to execute than the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the display means preview performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, even if the display means preview performance is executed, it is easy to lose, and the display is displayed in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to execute the means advance notice effect, if the display means advance notice effect is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

The rate at which the display means preview performance is executed may be the same between the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution rate of the display means preview performance in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, even if the display means notice performance is executed, there is no loss. Although the execution rate of the display means advance notice performance in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot when the display means advance notice performance is executed. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 6-4)
As shown in FIG. 368, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state is more sensitive to the fluctuation in which the display means advance notice performance was executed than the special 2 fluctuation display in the second advantageous gaming state. The display makes it easier to win a jackpot (dd6<dd5). For example, it is easier to achieve a jackpot in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state in the variable display in which the background change effect is executed. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the display means advance notice performance is executed in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, and the display means advance notice performance during the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. When executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The special 1 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state may be made more difficult to execute the display means preview effect than the special 2 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the display means advance notice performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, even if the display means advance notice performance is executed, it is easy to lose, and the display means is easily displayed in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to execute the means advance notice effect, if the display means advance notice effect is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

The rate at which the display means preview performance is executed may be the same between the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution rate of the display means preview performance in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, even if the display means notice performance is executed, there is no loss. Although the execution rate of the display means advance notice performance in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot when the display means advance notice performance is executed. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 7-1)
As shown in FIG. 369, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state is better than the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state during the advance notice performance. A movable accessory preview effect that can be executed with the operation button 17 (not limited to the movements of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button 17, but may also include light emission of the movable members 73, 74 and the operation button) is executed. A jackpot is more likely to occur in the variable display (ee1<ee5). Here, the preview performances other than the movable character preview performances include, for example, a background change performance, a text preview performance, an effect preview performance, a 3D filter preview performance, a light guide plate preview performance, a mode entry performance, a sound preview performance, and the operation button 17. Examples include a vibration warning performance. For example, it is easier to achieve a jackpot in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state in the variable display where the movable accessory preview effect is executed by the movable member 73. . As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is likely to lose even if the movable accessory preview performance is executed in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, and the movable accessory preview performance in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. When executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The movable accessory preview performance may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state. In this way, although the movable accessory preview performance is likely to be executed in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, even if the movable accessory preview performance is executed, it is easy to lose, and the movable accessory is likely to be lost in the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state. Although it is difficult to execute the accessory preview performance, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot if the movable accessory preview performance is executed.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 7-2)
As shown in FIG. 369, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state and a special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, and the variation in which the movable accessory preview performance is executed. It is easier to achieve a jackpot in the display (ee3=ee5). For example, in the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the proportion of jackpots in the variable display in which the movable accessory preview performance by the movable member 73 is executed is the same. be. As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, when the movable accessory preview performance is executed in the special 1 fluctuation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to hit the jackpot, and in the special 1 fluctuation display of the second advantageous gaming state, When the movable accessory preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution ratio of the movable accessory preview performance may be set to be the same between the special 1 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although it is difficult to execute the movable accessory notice performance in the special 1 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, it is easy to hit the jackpot when the movable accessory notice performance is executed, and the special 1 variation of the second advantageous gaming state Although it is difficult to execute the movable accessory preview performance in the display, if the movable accessory preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 7-3)
As shown in FIG. 369, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the movable accessory preview effect is executed more in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. It is easier to achieve a jackpot in the variable display (ee4<ee5). For example, a jackpot is more likely to occur in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state in the variable display in which the movable accessory preview effect is executed by the movable member 73. ing. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is easy to lose even if the movable accessory preview performance is executed in the special 2 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state, and the movable accessory is easy to lose in the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state. Once the preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The movable accessory preview performance may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the movable accessory preview performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, even if the movable accessory preview performance is executed, it is easy to lose, and the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state Although it is difficult to execute the movable accessory preview performance in , if the movable accessory preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

The rate at which the movable accessory preview performance is executed may be the same between the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution rate of the movable accessory preview performance in the special 2 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 1 variation display in the second advantageous gaming state, the movable accessory preview performance is executed. It is also easy to lose, and although the execution rate of the movable accessory preview performance in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, when the movable accessory preview performance is executed. It becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 7-4)
As shown in FIG. 369, in the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, the movable accessory preview performance is executed more in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. It is easier to achieve a jackpot in the variable display (dd6<dd5). For example, a jackpot is more likely to be achieved in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state in the variable display in which the movable accessory preview effect is executed by the movable member 73. ing. As described above, the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment is easy to lose even if the movable accessory preview performance is executed in the special 2 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state, and the movable accessory is easy to lose in the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state. Once the preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot. By doing so, it is possible to enjoy the merits of each gaming state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The movable accessory preview performance may be made more difficult to execute in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state than in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the movable accessory preview performance is likely to be executed in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, even if the movable accessory preview performance is executed, it is easy to lose, and the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state Although it is difficult to execute the movable accessory preview performance in , if the movable accessory preview performance is executed, it becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

The rate at which the movable accessory preview performance is executed may be the same in the special 2 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state. In this way, although the execution rate of the movable accessory preview performance in the special 2 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state, the movable accessory preview performance is executed. It is also easy to lose, and although the execution rate of the movable accessory preview performance in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state is the same as the special 2 variation display of the first advantageous gaming state, when the movable accessory preview performance is executed. It becomes easier to hit the jackpot.

(Example 3 of production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notification performances (for example, advance notice, pre-reading, etc.) that make players expect a big win, and these notification performances are executed singly or in combination. The notification performance is a first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a starts) and a first notification performed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when the game ball enters the winning hole). There is a second notification. Examples of such notification effects include a hold change effect in which the mode of the hold icon or the effect associated with the hold icon changes, an effect change effect in which the action of an effect that acts on the display of the effect pattern 70a, etc. changes, and a prize-winning effect. It can be executed in combination with a light-emitting effect of the mouth.

For example, if the execution timing of the first notification is at the start of the variable display, if the pending memory is "0", the fluctuation will start at the same time as winning a prize, and the second notification will be executed at the winning timing of the winning opening. As a result, they may be executed at the same (same time) timing. At this time, when the execution timing of the first notification is at the start of the variable display, if there is a pending memory, the timing of the second notification and the first notification, which are executed at the winning timing in the winning opening, is different. The timings of the first notification and the second notification may or may not overlap. Further, the first notification and the second notification may have the same opportunity but different timings, or the first notification and the second notification may have the same opportunity but have different timings.

For example, the notification effect includes a first aspect as the first notification, a second aspect different from the first aspect, and a third aspect different from the second aspect, and from the third aspect to the first aspect or the second aspect. It is possible to perform changing effects that change. In the first mode of the first notification, for example, the pending icon, the icon, the pending or prize opening lamp, etc. blinks singly or in combination, or changes in color to blue, etc., and changes in a manner different from the normal mode. do. In the second mode of the first notification, for example, the pending icon, the icon, the pending or prize opening lamp, etc., singly or in combination, change color from the normal color or the blue of the second mode to red, rainbow color, etc. It changes to be different from the normal mode or the first mode. In the third mode of the first notification, for example, the hold icon or the icon is hidden, the prize opening lamp is turned off, etc., and changes differently from the first mode and the second mode. Further, the third aspect is the basic (initial) form of the icon, and the character, color, etc. may be changed from the basic third aspect to become the first aspect or the second aspect. Note that the pending icon and the non-display of the icon in the third aspect can be executed regardless of whether there is a pending memory.

The notification performance can be a second notification other than the first notification, for example, a notice based on the above-mentioned preview effect. Note that the notification performance is not limited to the example described above, and may be the performance exemplified as the preview performance or other forms.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 8-1)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification performance is executed in the first mode is the first rate (ff11). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the second ratio (ff51), and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. is set (ff11<ff51).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variable display in the normal gaming state, the ratio at which the first notification in the notification performance is executed in the third mode is the third ratio (ff13). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the first notification in the notification effect being executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (ff53), and the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. is set (ff13<ff53).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 8-2)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the first variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification performance is executed in the first mode is the first rate (ff31). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the second rate (ff51), which is the same rate as the first rate and the second rate. is set (ff31=ff51).

By doing this, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45 even if the game ball is hit to the left in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 370, in the first variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification performance is executed in the third mode is the third rate (ff33). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio at which the first notification in the notification performance is executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (ff53), and the third ratio and the fourth ratio are the same ratio. (ff33=ff53).

By doing this, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45 even if the game ball is hit to the left in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 8-3)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (ff41). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the second ratio (ff51), and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. is set (ff41<ff51).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 370, in the first variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (ff43). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the first notification in the notification effect being executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (ff53), and the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. is set (ff43<ff53).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 8-4)
As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (ff61). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the second ratio (ff51), and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. is set (ff61<ff51).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 370, in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the first notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (ff63). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the first notification in the notification effect being executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (ff53), and the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. is set (ff63<ff53).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 4 of production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notification performances (for example, advance notice, pre-reading, etc.) that make players expect a big win, and these notification performances are executed singly or in combination. The notification performance is a first notification performed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a starts) and a first notification performed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when the game ball enters the winning hole). There is a second notification. Examples of such notification effects include a hold change effect in which the mode of the hold icon or the effect associated with the hold icon changes, an effect change effect in which the action of an effect that acts on the display of the effect pattern 70a, etc. changes, and a prize-winning effect. It can be performed in combination with lighting effects for the mouth, etc.

For example, if the execution timing of the first notification is at the start of the variable display, if the pending memory is "0", the fluctuation will start at the same time as winning a prize, and the second notification will be executed at the winning timing of the winning opening. As a result, they may be executed at the same (same time) timing. At this time, when the execution timing of the first notification is at the start of the variable display, if there is a pending memory, the timing of the second notification and the first notification, which are executed at the winning timing in the winning opening, is different. The timings of the first notification and the second notification may or may not overlap. Further, the first notification and the second notification may have the same opportunity but different timings, or the first notification and the second notification may have the same opportunity but have different timings.

For example, the notification effect has a first aspect, a second aspect different from the first aspect, and a third aspect different from the second aspect as the second notification, and the third aspect is changed to the first aspect or the second aspect. It is possible to perform changing effects that change. In the first mode of the second notification, for example, the pending icon, the icon, the pending or prize opening lamp, etc. blinks singly or in combination, or changes in color to blue, etc., and changes in a manner different from the normal mode. do. In the second mode of the second notification, for example, the pending icon, the icon, the pending or prize opening lamp, etc., alone or in combination, change color from the normal color or the blue of the second mode to red, rainbow color, etc. It changes to be different from the normal mode or the first mode. In the third mode of the second notification, for example, the pending icon or the icon is hidden, the prize opening lamp is turned off, etc., and changes differently from the first mode and the second mode. Further, the third aspect is the basic (initial) form of the icon, and the character, color, etc. may be changed from the basic third aspect to become the first aspect or the second aspect. Note that the pending icon and the non-display of the icon in the third aspect can be executed regardless of whether there is a pending memory.

As the first notification, the notification effect can be a notice other than the second notification, for example, the above-mentioned notice effect. Note that the notification performance is not limited to the example described above, and may be the performance exemplified as the preview performance or other forms.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 9-1)
As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification performance is executed in the first mode is the first rate (gg11). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect being executed in the first mode is the second ratio (gg51), and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. is set (gg11<gg51).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification performance is executed in the third mode is the third rate (gg13). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect being executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (gg53), and the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. is set (gg13<gg53).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 9-2)
As shown in FIG. 371, in the first variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification performance is executed in the first mode is the first rate (gg31). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the second rate (gg51), which is the same rate as the first rate and the second rate. is set (gg31=gg51).

By doing this, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45 even if the game ball is hit to the left in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 371, in the first variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (gg33). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the fourth rate (gg53), and the third rate and the fourth rate are the same rate. (gg33=gg53).

By doing this, the player will be made aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning slot 45 even if the game ball is hit to the left in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state. can be set. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 9-3)
As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 2 variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (gg41). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect being executed in the first mode is the second ratio (gg51), and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. is set (gg41<gg51).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 371, in the first variable display in the first advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (gg43). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect being executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (gg53), and the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. is set (gg43<gg53).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 9-4)
As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the first mode is the first rate (gg61). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect being executed in the first mode is the second ratio (gg51), and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. is set (gg61<gg51).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

As shown in FIG. 371, in the special 1 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the rate at which the second notification in the notification effect is executed in the third mode is the third rate (gg63). In the special first variable display in the second advantageous gaming state, the ratio of the second notification in the notification effect being executed in the third mode is the fourth ratio (gg53), and the fourth ratio is larger than the third ratio. is set (gg63<gg53).

By doing so, even if the player hits left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to win the game ball into the first winning hole 45. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 5 of production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notification effects that make players expect a big win, and these types of notification effects are executed singly or in combination. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a setting means that allows the player to change settings by operating the cross button or the like. The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment has a setting means that allows the setting device to select, for example, normal which is preset as an initial setting, customization where the player can change the settings arbitrarily, selection of an arbitrary mode from a plurality of modes, and presence or absence of 3D display. It is now possible to change various settings, such as adjusting the display.

As shown in FIG. 372(a), when the setting means is in the first setting, a specific performance among the plurality of types of preview performances can be executed at the normal execution rate. Such specific effects include, for example, a pending change effect, a character action change effect such as a zebra pattern attached to a character or figure, a light guide plate notice, a 3D display, etc., and can be executed by changing the setting means. This is a performance that is influenced by proportions. For example, if the first setting is set to normal by the setting means, effects such as 3D display will be executed at a normal rate. When the player performs a predetermined change process using the setting means, a specific performance can be executed at a specific rate different from the normal rate. For example, when a certain ratio is reached, the execution ratio of pending change effects will be lower than the normal rate, the execution rate of character action change effects will be higher than the normal rate, or the execution rate of light guide plate preview effects will be lower than the normal rate. The ratio differs from the normal ratio, such as by increasing the ratio or by reducing the execution ratio of 3D display from the normal ratio.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 10-1)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 1 fluctuation display of loss in the normal game state in which the specific performance is executed becomes the normal ratio. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of a loss in the normal gaming state, the specific performance is executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is at a ratio different from the normal ratio. This will be the third special ratio. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is not executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting, but at the third special rate. is executed. Here, by switching from the normal ratio to the third special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the third special ratio remains as the first setting. Note that when the third special ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 10-2)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 1 fluctuation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the normal ratio. The first special ratio is a ratio different from . That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting, but at the first special rate. is executed. In addition, in the state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 1 fluctuation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the third special, which is a ratio different from the normal ratio. Take it as a percentage. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is not executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting, but at the third special rate. is executed. Here, by switching from the normal ratio to the first special ratio or the third special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the first setting remains the same as the first special ratio or the third special ratio. In addition, when the first special ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state. When the third special ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed in the special first variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. In this case, in the state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state are executed. At this time, it becomes possible to restrict the execution of specific effects.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to enter the first winning slot 45 with the game ball. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 10-3)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the normal ratio. Become. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is at a ratio different from the normal ratio. This will be the third special ratio. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is not executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting, but at the third special rate. is executed. Here, by switching from the normal ratio to the third special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the third special ratio remains as the first setting. Note that when the third special ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 10-4)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in the state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 2 variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the normal ratio. Become. That is, when it is set to the first setting, in the special 2 variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the normal ratio (first setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is at a ratio different from the normal ratio. This will be the third special ratio. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is not executed at the normal rate as set in the first setting, but at the third special rate. is executed. Here, by switching from the normal ratio to the third special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the third special ratio remains as the first setting. Note that when the third special ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 11-1)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state where the specific ratio is set in the setting means (second setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the normal game state where the specific performance is executed becomes the specific ratio. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variable display of loss in the normal gaming state, the specific performance is executed at a specific rate as set in the first setting. On the other hand, in a state where the specific ratio is set in the setting means (second setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is at a ratio different from the specific ratio. This is the fourth special ratio. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific rate as set in the first setting, but at the fourth special rate. is executed. Here, by switching from the specific ratio to the fourth special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the fourth special ratio remains as the second setting. Note that when the fourth special ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 11-2)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state where the setting means is set to a specific ratio (second setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which a specific performance is executed is This is a second special ratio that is different from . That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific rate as set in the first setting, but at the second special rate. is executed. In addition, in the state where the specific ratio is set in the setting means (second setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the fourth special, which is a ratio different from the specific ratio. Take it as a percentage. That is, when set to the first setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific rate as set in the second setting, but at the fourth special rate. is executed. Here, by switching from the specific ratio to the second special ratio or the fourth special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the second special ratio or the fourth special ratio remains as the second setting. In addition, when the second special ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state. When the fourth special ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special first variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. In this case, in a state where the specific ratio is set in the setting means (second setting), a special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and a special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state are executed. At this time, it becomes possible to restrict the execution of specific effects.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to enter the first winning slot 45 with the game ball. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 11-3)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state where the setting means is set to a specific ratio (second setting), the special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is set to the specific ratio. Become. That is, when set to the second setting, in the special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is executed at a specific rate as set in the second setting. On the other hand, in a state where the specific ratio is set in the setting means (second setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is at a ratio different from the specific ratio. This is the fourth special ratio. That is, when set to the second setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific rate as set in the second setting, but at the fourth special rate. is executed. Here, by switching from the specific ratio to the fourth special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the fourth special ratio remains as the second setting. Note that when the fourth special ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 11-4)
As shown in FIG. 372(b), in a state where the setting means is set to a specific ratio (second setting), the special 2 variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is set to the specific ratio. Become. That is, when set to the second setting, in the special 2 variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is executed at a specific rate as set in the second setting. On the other hand, in a state where the specific ratio is set in the setting means (second setting), the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is at a ratio different from the specific ratio. This is the fourth special ratio. In other words, when set to the second setting, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the specific rate as set in the second setting, but at the fourth special rate. is executed. Here, by switching from the specific ratio to the fourth special ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the third special ratio remains as the second setting. Note that when the fourth special ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Example 6 of production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, it is possible to execute a plurality of types of notification effects that make players expect a big win, and these types of notification effects are executed singly or in combination. The gaming machine 1 of the embodiment has a setting means that allows the player to change settings by operating the cross button or the like. The gaming machine 1 according to the embodiment has a setting means that allows the setting device to select, for example, normal which is preset as an initial setting, customization where the player can change the settings arbitrarily, selection of an arbitrary mode from a plurality of modes, and presence or absence of 3D display. It is now possible to change various settings, such as adjusting the display.

As shown in FIG. 373(a), when the mode is selected by the setting means to be in the first mode (for example, normal), a specific performance among a plurality of types of preview performances can be executed at a first rate. Such specific effects include, for example, a pending change effect, a character action change effect such as a zebra pattern attached to a character or figure, a light guide plate notice, a 3D display, etc., and can be executed by changing the setting means. This is a performance that is influenced by proportions. For example, if the first mode is set to normal by the setting means, effects such as 3D display will be performed at the first rate. When the player performs a predetermined change process using the setting means, the specific effect can be executed in a second mode different from the first mode. For example, in the second mode, the execution rate of pending change effects may be lower than the first rate, the execution rate of character action change effects may be greater than the first rate, or the execution rate of light guide plate preview effects may be lower than the first rate. The second ratio is different from the first ratio, such as the ratio being greater than 1 or the execution ratio of 3D display being lower than the first ratio.

(Comparison of production in gaming state 12-1)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the first mode is set in the setting means, the special 1 variable display of loss in the normal game state in which the specific performance is executed becomes the first ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, the specific performance is executed at the first rate as set in the first mode in the loss special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the second mode, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the fifth percentage that is different from the first percentage. shall be. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but at the fifth rate. Runs in percentage. Here, by switching from the first ratio to the fifth ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the fifth ratio remains in the first mode. Note that when the fifth ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 12-2)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in a state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the percentage different from the first percentage. This is the third ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but at the third rate. Runs in percentage. Further, in a state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific performance is executed is a fifth ratio that is different from the first ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but at the fifth rate. Runs in percentage. Here, by switching from the first ratio to the third ratio or the fifth ratio, the mode setting of the setting means is not switched, but remains in the first mode and becomes the third ratio or the fifth ratio. In addition, when the third ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state. When the fifth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the second advantageous gaming state. In this case, when the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss in the second advantageous gaming state are executed with the first mode set in the setting means, the specific performance It becomes possible to restrict the execution of

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to enter the first winning slot 45 with the game ball. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 12-3)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the first mode is set in the setting means, the special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed becomes the first ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is executed at the first rate as set in the first mode. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special first variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the fifth percentage that is different from the first percentage. becomes. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but at the fifth rate. Runs in percentage. Here, by switching from the first ratio to the fifth ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the fifth ratio remains in the first mode. Note that when the fifth ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 12-4)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in a state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special 2 variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed becomes the first ratio. That is, when the first mode is set, the specific performance is executed at the first rate as set in the first mode in the loss special 2 variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the first mode, the special first variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is the fifth percentage that is different from the first percentage. becomes. That is, when the first mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the first rate as set in the first mode, but at the fifth rate. Runs in percentage. Here, by switching from the first ratio to the fifth ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the fifth ratio remains in the first mode. Note that when the fifth ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 13-1)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in a state where the second mode is set in the setting means, the special 1 variable display of loss in the normal game state in which the specific performance is executed becomes the second ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, the specific performance is executed at the second rate as set in the second mode in the loss special 1 variation display in the normal gaming state. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the second mode, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the sixth rate which is a rate different from the second rate. becomes. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the sixth rate. Runs in percentage. Here, by switching from the second ratio to the sixth ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the sixth ratio remains in the second mode. Note that when the sixth ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 13-2)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in a state where the second mode is set in the setting means, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed is a percentage different from the second percentage. This is the fourth ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the fourth rate. Runs in percentage. Further, in a state where the setting means is set to the second mode, the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous game state in which the specific performance is executed becomes a sixth ratio that is different from the second ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the sixth rate. Runs in percentage. Here, by switching from the second ratio to the fourth ratio or the sixth ratio, the mode setting of the setting means is not switched, but remains in the second mode and becomes the fourth ratio or the sixth ratio. In addition, when the fourth ratio is "0", the specific effect is not executed in the special 1 variable display of the first advantageous gaming state. When the sixth ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed in the special 1 variation display of the second advantageous gaming state. In this case, when the special 1 variation display of a loss in the first advantageous gaming state and the special 1 variation display of a loss of the second advantageous gaming state are executed with the second mode set in the setting means, the specific performance It becomes possible to restrict the execution of

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the first advantageous gaming state and the second advantageous gaming state, the player is informed that it is disadvantageous to enter the first winning slot 45 with the game ball. can be made to notice. Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 13-3)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in the state where the second mode is set in the setting means, the special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed becomes the second ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 2 variable display of loss in the first advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is executed at the second rate as set in the second mode. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the second mode, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the sixth rate which is a rate different from the second rate. becomes. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the sixth rate. Runs in percentage. Here, by switching from the second ratio to the sixth ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the sixth ratio remains in the second mode. Note that when the fifth ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

(Comparison of production in gaming state 13-4)
As shown in FIG. 373(b), in a state where the second mode is set in the setting means, the second variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific performance is executed becomes the second ratio. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 2 variable display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific performance is executed at the second rate as set in the second mode. On the other hand, in a state where the setting means is set to the second mode, the special 1 variation display of the loss in the second advantageous gaming state in which the specific effect is executed is the sixth rate which is a rate different from the second rate. becomes. That is, when the second mode is set, in the special 1 variation display of loss in the second advantageous gaming state, the specific effect is not executed at the second rate as set in the second mode, but at the sixth rate. Runs in percentage. Here, by switching from the second ratio to the sixth ratio, the setting of the setting means is not changed, and the sixth ratio remains in the second mode. Note that when the sixth ratio is "0", the specific performance is not executed.

By doing this, even if the player mistakenly hits the ball to the left in the second advantageous gaming state, it is possible to make the player aware that it is disadvantageous to land the game ball in the first winning hole 45. . Then, the player can be guided to aim for a prize in the second winning hole 47 in a specific gaming state. Therefore, according to the gaming machine 1 of the embodiment, by aiming at the appropriate winning openings 45, 47 according to the gaming state, the player can enjoy the merits of each gaming state and improve the interest of the game. .

The fluctuation time (average fluctuation time) of the fluctuation display can be set as follows, for example. In the special 1 variation display in the first advantageous gaming state, the length of the specific variation is the loss variation with the number of pending memories of 1 (2, 3) and the loss variation with the number of pending memories of 4. They may be the same. In addition, even if the variation time changes a predetermined number of times from the start of the first advantageous gaming state in the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a variation pattern in which the average variation time becomes longer is likely to be selected), the second advantageous gaming state In this state, it is possible to prevent the fluctuation time from switching after a specific number of fluctuations from the start of the second advantageous gaming state. The variation time of the variable display in the first advantageous gaming state may be different from the variation time of the variable display in the second advantageous gaming state. For example, the variation time of the variable display in the second advantageous gaming state executed after the RAM is cleared may be longer than the variation time of the variable display in the first advantageous gaming state. The fluctuation times may be different or the same between the first rotation and the final rotation of the first advantageous gaming state.

Regarding the ratios such as the execution ratios described above, the lower ratio in the comparison may be 0.

The configuration such as the performance of the first advantageous gaming state may be applied to the second advantageous gaming state, and the configuration such as the performance of the second advantageous gaming state may be applied to the first advantageous gaming state.

The embodiments of the present disclosure should be considered in all respects as illustrative and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving), the first period in the second gaming state (for example, the first half of the first advantageous gaming state) can be controlled to In the second period (for example, the latter half of the first advantageous gaming state), where the difference is different, the predetermined effect (for example, symbol enlargement effect, accessory It is characterized by being easy to execute (action effects, non-special move effects, etc.).

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving), and the first period of the second gaming state (for example, the first half of the first advantageous gaming state) and the first period of the second gaming state. is a different second period (for example, the latter half of the first advantageous gaming state), and a predetermined performance (for example, a symbol enlargement performance, It is characterized by a different number of types (actual object action effects, non-special move effects, etc.).

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving), and in the second gaming state (first advantageous gaming state), a predetermined effect can be controlled from the fluctuation display before the specific number of fluctuations reaching the predetermined number of fluctuations. (For example, the execution of pre-reading effects, etc.) can be restricted.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving) and a third gaming state advantageous to the player (second advantageous gaming state, b), and in the first gaming state, it is possible to restrict the execution of a predetermined effect (for example, a look-ahead effect) from the variable display before the specific number of changes that reach the predetermined condition. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving) and a third gaming state advantageous to the player (second advantageous gaming state, b), and the number of selectable modes is greater when the second gaming state is started than when the third gaming state is started. do.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving) and a third gaming state advantageous to the player (second advantageous gaming state, In the first gaming state (normal gaming state), a display means (such as a countdown) until the third gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) is started. image display device 70), and if the calculated effect is not displayed on the display means, when the number of fluctuations until the start of the third gaming state reaches a predetermined number of times, the calculated effect is different from the calculated effect. The present invention is characterized in that it is possible to notify that the start of the third game state is near by a predetermined notification (change in color or size of an image, appearance of a character, etc.).

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving) and a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which the special game is not executed in the first gaming state, a third gaming state (second an advantageous gaming state; b) time saving), and when the fluctuating display of the final round under the predetermined conditions stops, the first gaming state can be switched to the third gaming state; The present invention is characterized in that when the next variable display starts, a specific notification (such as a chance entry image) indicating that the third gaming state has been entered can be executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving) and a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which the special game is not executed in the first gaming state, a third gaming state (second an advantageous gaming state; b) time saving), and when the fluctuating display of the final round under the predetermined conditions stops, the first gaming state can be switched to the third gaming state; The present invention is characterized in that a right-handed hit display can be executed when the variable display of innings stops.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving), and when performing the fluctuating display in the first gaming state, the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols among the symbols can be controlled in a first fluctuating mode (number + When performing the fluctuating display in the second gaming state, the fluctuating presentation of the performance symbols can be performed in a second fluctuating manner (such as a display format mainly consisting of numbers). A specific state (during result display) in which the variable display is executed based on the pending memory after the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times in the second gaming state and after the predetermined number of times has been reached. In this case, it is characterized in that the variation performance of the performance symbols can be executed in a third variation mode (for example, a display mode of small symbols, etc.) that is not executed in the first variation mode and the second variation mode.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving), and when performing a variable display with the first symbol (production symbol 70a) and second symbol (special symbol TZ) in the first gaming state, the It is possible to execute a first effect (increasing reach in the normal gaming state) that increases the possibility that the first symbol or the second symbol becomes a reach, and in the second gaming state, the first symbol (the effect symbol 70a) and the second symbol When performing a variable display with two symbols (special symbol TZ), it is possible to execute a second effect (increase the reach in the first advantageous gaming state) that increases the possibility that the first symbol or the second symbol becomes a reach. and after the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times in the second gaming state, and after the predetermined number of times has been reached, the variable display based on the pending memory is executed (such as when displaying results). ) is characterized in that a third performance (such as a direct hit) that is different from the first performance and the second performance can be executed without executing the first performance and the second performance.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving), and when in a specific state (during result display) after the variable display has been executed a predetermined number of times in the second gaming state, the pending memory is At a certain time, the display means can execute a first display (first result background) or a second display (second result background), and when there is no suspended memory, only the first display can be executed. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and in the variable display, it is possible to acquire the right to execute a first effect (for example, NEXT or timer) or a second effect (for example, an operation button). It is possible to execute a possible acquisition performance, it is possible to execute a consumption performance that allows the right to execute the first performance or the second performance acquired by the acquisition performance to be exhausted, and the second performance is executed. The variable display that exhausts the right to the first performance is better than the variable display that exhausts the right acquired in the acquired performance when a specific performance (for example, a pending change, etc.) is executed. It is characterized by being easy.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to acquire the right to execute the first effect (for example, NEXT or timer) or the second effect (operation button) in the variable display. It is possible to execute an acquisition performance, and it is possible to execute a digestion performance that allows the right to execute the first performance or the second performance acquired in the acquisition performance to be executed, and in the digestion performance, the right to execute the first performance or the second performance acquired in the acquisition performance can be executed. Even if the right to perform the first performance or the second performance is exhausted, a specific performance (for example, a pending change, etc.) can be executed, and the right to execute the first performance can be exhausted by the consumption performance and the specific performance can be executed. , and when executing the specific performance by exhausting the right to execute the second performance in the digestion performance, after acquiring the right to be executed in the acquired performance, The feature is that the time required for specific effects to be executed is different.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to repeat a change suggestion performance that suggests the possibility that a change performance (for example, a pending change) will be executed a predetermined number of times, and the change The performance is characterized in that it can be executed at a predetermined timing after the change suggestion performance has been executed a plurality of times.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and in the variable display, the symbol having the first numerical information (for example, 7) is more likely to be a reach than the first effect, which is a second effect. The second performance that stimulates the possibility that the symbol having numerical information (for example, 2) becomes a reach is characterized in that a specific stimulation performance (for example, shake vision, etc.) is more likely to be executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and by displaying a predetermined display in a stopped state, the start of the fluctuating performance of the performance symbols among the symbols in one fluctuating display can be started multiple times. An executable pseudo fluctuation performance can be executed, and the pseudo fluctuation performance can be an inciting performance in which there are cases where the stop display (NEXT symbol) of the predetermined display is successful and cases where the stop display fails. Yes, in one fluctuating display, the second inciting performance executed after the first inciting performance is successful is better than the first inciting performance in the pseudo fluctuation performance. It is characterized by a high success rate.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a predetermined effect in which a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and in the variable display, either a first display that is advantageous to the player or a second display that is disadvantageous to the player is displayed; For example, it is possible to perform a specific performance (such as a battle performance) when the predetermined condition (advantageous/disadvantageous) is not satisfied than when the predetermined condition (advantageous/disadvantageous) is satisfied. ) is characterized by ease of execution.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving) and a third gaming state advantageous to the player (second advantageous gaming state, In the variable display in which a notification image (chance entry image) notifying the transition to the third gaming state is displayed, the first right-handed hit notification, the second right-handed hit notification and It is characterized by being executable.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving) and a third gaming state advantageous to the player (second advantageous gaming state, b), and the number of pending memories based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition can be displayed as the number of pending icons on the display means (image display device 70). and when the second starting condition is met in the third gaming state, the pending icon is displayed, and when the first starting condition is met in the third gaming state, the pending icon is not displayed. do.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure makes a determination based on the establishment of the starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the winning hole), and when the variable display of symbols executed based on the determination results in a predetermined special result. , a first gaming state (normal gaming state) in which a special game advantageous to the player (jackpot game) can be executed and disadvantageous to the player, and a second gaming state advantageous to the player after execution of the special game. (first advantageous gaming state, a time saving) and a third gaming state advantageous to the player (second advantageous gaming state, b), and the specific right-handed notification in the third gaming state is started in the first stage (normal gaming state stage), and in the second stage (second advantageous gaming state). It is characterized in that it can be terminated when the process transitions to the stage of

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of preview performances (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and the preview performance is executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. However, in the second game state, execution can be limited by a variable display based on the first starting condition, and an effect that makes the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one variable display can be provided. It is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances as well as execute the basic production not including the above, and display a variation of a loss based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state; The variation display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is characterized in that the length of the variation time of the specific variation is different.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of preview performances (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and the preview performance is executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. However, in the second game state, execution can be limited by a variable display based on the first starting condition, and an effect that makes the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one variable display can be provided. In addition to executing the basic effects that do not include the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview effects, and the specific variation is performed by a variation display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. The rate at which the variation is executed is a first rate, the rate at which the specific variation is executed in the loss variation display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is a second rate, and the rate at which the specific variation is executed is a second rate. It is characterized in that the first ratio and the second ratio are different.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and A special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole). It is possible to store a plurality of suspended memories, and when a predetermined condition (missing fluctuation) under which the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, the player can It is possible to execute a second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to For example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) can be executed, and the preview performance can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state, In a second gaming state, the execution can be limited by a variable display based on the first starting condition, and the variable display can be executed in the same variable time even when the pending storage is at a minimum and at a maximum, During the entire period of the variable display of times, the basic performance that does not include the performance that makes the player expect to execute the special game can be executed, and the specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances can be executed. In the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state, the specific variation can be executed, but in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state, the specific variation can be executed. It is characterized by being able to restrict the execution of fluctuations.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (e.g., lighting of prize opening lamps, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and does not include performances that make the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one fluctuating display. In addition to executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview effects, and the preview effects include a first effect (background change for SP) and a first effect different from the first effect. 2 effects (text notice, effect notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and changes based on the first starting condition in the first game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is characterized in that the special game is more easily executed from the variable display in which the first effect is executed than the display.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (e.g., lighting of prize opening lamps, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and does not include performances that make the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one fluctuating display. In addition to executing the basic performance, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances, and the preview performance includes a first performance (for example, background change for SP, etc.) and a first performance that is different from the first performance. It has a different second effect (for example, a text notice, an effect notice, a 3D filter notice, a light guide plate notice, a mode entry effect, a movable accessory notice, a sound notice, an operation button vibration, etc.), and the second effect in the first game state is The special game is more likely to be executed from the variable display in which the second effect has been executed in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state than in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (e.g., lighting of prize opening lamps, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and does not include performances that make the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one fluctuating display. In addition to executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview effects, and the preview effect is a first effect (for example, (SP background change, text notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.), and a second production (movable character notice, sound notice, etc.) that is executed in a different manner from the first production. , operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. It is characterized in that the special game is likely to be executed from the variable display in which the first performance has been executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (e.g., lighting of prize opening lamps, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and does not include performances that make the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one fluctuating display. In addition to executing the basic performance, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances, and the preview performance includes a first performance (SP background change, text preview, effect notice, 3D filter notice, (light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, sound notice, etc.) and a second effect (movable accessory notice, operation button vibration, advance notice, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is better than the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. It is characterized in that the special game is likely to be executed from the variable display in which the performance has been executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuation display, and a first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change at the time of pending movement) that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) change, etc.), and a second notification (change when winning a prize) that can be executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning a prize), and the first notification can be performed in a first manner (change when winning a prize). a second aspect that is different from the first aspect (for example, a different color), and a third aspect that is different from the second aspect (lights out, non-display, basic form display, etc.). It is possible to execute a change effect that changes from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode, and in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. The execution ratio of is a first ratio, and the execution ratio of the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is a second ratio, and the execution ratio of It is characterized in that the second ratio is smaller.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuation display, and a first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, It is possible to perform an announcement performance using a second notification (change when winning a prize) that can perform a look-ahead presentation at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning a prize), and a second notification (change when winning a prize). , a first aspect (a prize opening lamp, a hold, or blinking of the icon, etc.), a second aspect different from the first aspect (color change, etc.), and a third aspect different from the second aspect (lights out, non-display, etc.) basic form display, etc.), and the execution ratio of the first form in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state is a first ratio, and the In the second gaming state, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition is a second ratio, and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. .

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific performance (a pending change, a zebra pattern, The execution rate of light guide plate announcements, 3D, etc.) can be changed to a first rate (normal rate, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second rate (with 3D, etc.) that is different from the first rate by a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.). It has a setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to the first ratio (fewer hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.), and the setting means sets the first ratio. In this state, the execution rate of the specific performance executed in the first gaming state with a variable display of losses based on the first starting condition is the first rate, and the setting means sets the In a state where the ratio is set to 1, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed in the second gaming state with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific performance (a pending change, a zebra pattern, The execution rate of light guide plate announcements, 3D, etc.) can be changed to a first rate (normal rate, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second rate (with 3D, etc.) that is different from the first rate by a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.). It has a setting means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to the second ratio (fewer pending changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.), and the setting means sets the second ratio. In the state in which the execution ratio of the specific performance is executed in the first gaming state with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition is the second ratio, and the setting means In a state where the ratio is set to 2, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed in the second gaming state with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition is set to a predetermined ratio different from the second ratio. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific performance (a pending change, a zebra pattern, The execution rate of light guide plate notices, 3D, etc.) can be changed between the first mode and a second mode (on hold, for example, with 3D) that is different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D) by a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.). It has a setting means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to the first mode (less changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.), and the first mode is set by the setting means. In this state, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state is set as a first ratio, and the setting means sets the execution ratio to the first mode. In the set state, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. Features.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific performance (a pending change, a zebra pattern, The execution rate of light guide plate notices, 3D, etc.) can be changed between the first mode and a second mode (on hold, for example, with 3D) that is different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D) by a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.). It has a setting means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to the second mode (less changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.), and the second mode is set by the setting means. In this state, the execution rate of the specific performance executed in the first gaming state with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition is set as a first rate, and the setting means sets the execution rate to the second mode. In the set state, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. Features.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. The preview performance can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state, but can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. and executes the basic performance that does not include a performance that makes one expect the execution of the special game, and restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances during the entire period of one variation display. The specific variation can be executed by displaying a variation in loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state and displaying variation in losing based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state. is characterized in that the lengths of the fluctuation times are the same.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. The preview performance can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state, but can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. and executes the basic performance that does not include a performance that makes one expect the execution of the special game, and restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances during the entire period of one variation display. The rate at which the specific variation is executed in the loss variation display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is a first percentage, and the rate at which the specific variation is executed in the first starting condition in the third gaming state is The rate at which the specific variation is executed in the failure variation display based on the starting condition is a second rate, and the first rate and the second rate are the same.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and A special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole). It is possible to store a plurality of suspended memories, and when a predetermined condition (missing fluctuation) under which the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, the player can A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to the player after execution of the special game, and the fluctuation display , it is possible to perform a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, hold changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game, and the above notice The performance can be executed in the first gaming state with a variable display based on the first starting condition, but the execution can be limited in the second gaming state with a variable display based on the first starting condition, The variable display can be executed in the same variable time even when the suspended memory is at its minimum or maximum, and the variable display does not include any effect that makes one expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one variable display. A basic performance can be executed and a specific variation that restricts execution of the plurality of types of preview performances can be executed, and a variation display based on the first starting condition in the second game state and the third game In the variation display based on the first starting condition in the state, execution of the specific variation can be restricted.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. possible, and during the entire period of one variation display, execute the basic performance that does not include a production that makes people expect the execution of the special game, and execute a specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. It is possible, and the preview performance includes a first performance (SP background change) and a second performance different from the first performance (text preview, effect notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry performance, movable character notice, sound advance notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state, The present invention is characterized in that the rate at which the special game is executed is the same from the variable display in which the first performance is executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. possible, and during the entire period of one variation display, execute the basic performance that does not include a production that makes people expect the execution of the special game, and execute a specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. It is possible, and the preview effects include a first effect (for example, SP background change, etc.) and a second effect that is different from the first effect (for example, a text notice, an effect notice, a 3D filter notice, a light guide plate notice, a mode entry effect). , a movable accessory notice, a sound notice, an operation button vibration, etc.), a variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state, and a variable display based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state. The variable display based on the variable display is characterized in that the rate at which the special game is executed is the same from the variable display in which the second performance is executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. possible, and during the entire period of one variation display, execute the basic performance that does not include a production that makes people expect the execution of the special game, and execute a specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. The preview performance is a first performance that can be executed by the display means (image display device 70) (for example, background change for SP, text notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.). ), and a second performance (movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.) that is executed in a different manner from the first production, and the first starting condition in the second game state. The variable display based on the variable display based on the first starting condition in the third game state is the same in the rate at which the special game is executed from the variable display in which the first performance is executed. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. possible, and during the entire period of one variation display, execute the basic performance that does not include a production that makes people expect the execution of the special game, and execute a specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. The above-mentioned preview performance includes a first performance (SP background change, text notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, sound notice, etc.) and a movable production means (movable member 73, operation button 17), and has a second performance different from the first performance (movable accessory notice, operation button vibration notice, etc.), and is based on the first starting condition in the second game state. The variable display and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state are characterized in that the rate at which the special game is executed from the variable display in which the second performance is executed is the same. shall be.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. A first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change at the time of pending movement, etc.) that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation), and a second notification that can be executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning a prize) (Change when winning a prize), and the first notification includes a first aspect (change at start of variation, character action change, etc.) and a second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, color There is a third mode different from the second mode (lights out, non-display, basic form display, etc.), and a change effect that changes from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode. executable, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state is a first percentage, and the first starting condition in the second gaming state The execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on is a second ratio, and the first ratio and the second ratio are the same.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. The first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change when moving on hold, etc.) that can perform a look-ahead effect at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of a fluctuation), and the look-ahead effect at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning a prize). An executable second notification (change when winning a prize) is possible, and the second notification includes a first aspect (a winning opening lamp, a hold, or blinking of the icon, etc.) and the first aspect. A change effect can be executed by a second mode different from the second mode (color change, etc.) and a third mode different from the second mode (lights out, non-display, basic form display, etc.), and in the third game state, the change effect can be executed. The execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition is a first ratio, and the execution in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state The ratio is a second ratio, and the first ratio and the second ratio are the same.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. , and performs a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.) on the execution ratio of a specific effect (pending change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among the plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display. Settings that can be set to a first ratio (normal ratio, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second ratio that is different from the first ratio (less hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.) means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state where the first ratio is set by the setting means, variation in loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. The present invention is characterized in that execution of the specific performance can be restricted by a display and a variable display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. , and performs a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.) on the execution ratio of a specific effect (pending change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among the plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display. Settings that can be set to a first ratio (normal ratio, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second ratio that is different from the first ratio (less hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.) means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state where the setting means is set to the second ratio, variation in loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. The present invention is characterized in that execution of the specific performance can be restricted by a display and a variable display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. , and performs a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.) on the execution ratio of a specific effect (pending change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among the plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display. A setting means that can set a first mode and a second mode (less hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.) that is different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D). (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state where the first mode is set by the setting means, a fluctuation display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state Further, execution of the specific performance can be restricted by a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. , and performs a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.) on the execution ratio of a specific effect (pending change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among the plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display. A setting means that can set a first mode and a second mode (less hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.) that is different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D). (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state where the second mode is set by the setting means, a fluctuation display of the loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state Further, execution of the specific performance can be restricted by a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition in the third gaming state.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. The preview performance can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state, but can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. , and executes the basic performance that does not include a performance that makes people expect to execute the special game during the entire period of one variation display, and limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. can be executed, and the specific fluctuation can be executed by displaying a change in loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state and displaying a change in loss based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state. It is characterized by the fact that the length of the fluctuation time is different.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. The preview performance can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state, but can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. and executes the basic performance that does not include a performance that makes one expect the execution of the special game, and restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances during the entire period of one variation display. The rate at which the specific variation is executed in the loss variation display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is a first percentage, and the rate at which the specific variation is executed in the second gaming state is a first percentage. The rate at which the specific variation is executed in the failure variation display based on the starting condition is a second rate, and the first rate and the second rate are different.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and A special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole). It is possible to store a plurality of suspended memories, and when a predetermined condition (missing fluctuation) under which the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, the player can A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to the player after execution of the special game, and the fluctuation display , it is possible to perform a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of advance notice effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, hold changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game, and the above notice The performance can be executed in the first gaming state with a variable display based on the first starting condition, but the execution can be limited in the second gaming state with a variable display based on the first starting condition, The variable display can be executed in the same variable time even when the suspended memory is at its minimum or maximum, and the variable display does not include any effect that makes one expect the execution of the special game during the entire period of one variable display. A basic effect can be executed, and a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview effects can be executed, and in the variation display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state, the specific variation However, in the variation display based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state, execution of the specific variation can be restricted.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. possible, and during the entire period of one variation display, execute the basic performance that does not include a production that makes people expect the execution of the special game, and execute a specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. It is possible, and the preview performance includes a first performance (SP background change) and a second performance different from the first performance (text preview, effect notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry performance, movable character notice, sound advance notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state, It is characterized in that the special game is likely to be executed from the variable display in which the first performance has been executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. possible, and during the entire period of one variation display, execute the basic performance that does not include a production that makes people expect the execution of the special game, and execute a specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. It is possible, and the preview effects include a first effect (for example, SP background change, etc.) and a second effect that is different from the first effect (for example, a text notice, an effect notice, a 3D filter notice, a light guide plate notice, a mode entry effect). , movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and from a variable display based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state, to the first starting condition in the second gaming state. The variable display based on the variable display is characterized in that the special game is more likely to be executed from the variable display in which the second performance has been executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. possible, and during the entire period of one variation display, execute the basic performance that does not include a production that makes people expect the execution of the special game, and execute a specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. The preview performance is a first performance that can be executed by the display means (image display device 70) (for example, background change for SP, text notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.). ), and a second performance (movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.) that is executed in a different manner from the first production, and the second start condition in the third game state. A variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is characterized in that the special game is more easily executed from the variable display in which the first effect is executed than a variable display based on the first start condition in the second game state. .

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. and, in the variable display, performs a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) that make people expect the execution of the special game. possible, and during the entire period of one variation display, execute the basic performance that does not include a production that makes people expect the execution of the special game, and execute a specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances. The above-mentioned preview performance includes a first performance (SP background change, text notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, sound notice, etc.) and a movable production means (movable member 73, operation button 17) and is different from the first performance (movable accessory notice, operation button vibration notice, etc.), and is based on the second start condition in the third game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is characterized in that the special game is more easily executed from the variable display in which the second performance is executed than the variable display.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. A first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change at the time of pending movement, etc.) that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation), and a second notification that can be executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning a prize) (Change when winning a prize), and the first notification includes a first aspect (change at start of variation, character action change, etc.) and a second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, color There is a third mode different from the second mode (lights out, non-display, basic form display, etc.), and a change effect that changes from the third mode to the first mode or the second mode. executable, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state is a first percentage, and the first starting condition in the second gaming state The execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on is a second ratio, and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. The first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change when moving on hold, etc.) that can perform a look-ahead effect at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of a fluctuation), and the look-ahead effect at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning a prize). An executable second notification (change when winning a prize) is possible, and the second notification includes a first aspect (a winning opening lamp, a hold, or blinking of the icon, etc.) and the first aspect. A change effect can be executed by a second mode different from the second mode (color change, etc.) and a third mode different from the second mode (lights out, non-display, basic form display, etc.), and in the third game state, the change effect can be executed. The execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the second starting condition is a first rate, and the execution in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state The ratio is a second ratio, and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. , and performs a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.) on the execution ratio of a specific effect (pending change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among the plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display. Settings that can be set to a first ratio (normal ratio, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second ratio that is different from the first ratio (less hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.) means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state where the first ratio is set by the setting means, there is a possibility of losing based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state. The first starting condition is set in the second gaming state in a state where the execution ratio of the specific performance executed in a variable display is the first ratio, and the setting means sets the execution ratio to the first ratio. The execution ratio of the specific performance executed in the variable display of losses based on the loss is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. , and performs a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.) on the execution ratio of a specific effect (pending change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among the plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display. Settings that can be set to a first ratio (normal ratio, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second ratio that is different from the first ratio (less hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.) means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state where the second ratio is set by the setting means, there is a possibility of losing based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state. The first starting condition is set in the second gaming state in a state where the execution ratio of the specific performance executed in the variable display is the second ratio, and the setting means is set to the second ratio. The execution rate of the specific performance executed in the variable display of losses based on the second rate is set to a predetermined rate different from the second rate.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. , and performs a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.) on the execution ratio of a specific effect (pending change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among the plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display. A setting means that can set a first mode and a second mode (less hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.) that is different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D). (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state where the first mode is set by the setting means, variation in loss based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state The execution rate of the specific performance executed on the display is a first rate, and in a state where the first mode is set by the setting means, there is a loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. The execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player in the variable display and a third gaming state (first advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player after execution of the special game are executable. , and performs a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.) on the execution ratio of a specific effect (pending change, zebra pattern, light guide plate notice, 3D, etc.) among the plurality of types of predetermined effects that can be executed in the variable display. A setting means that can set a first mode and a second mode (less hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.) that is different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D). (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.), and in a state where the second mode is set by the setting means, variation in loss based on the second starting condition in the third gaming state The execution rate of the specific performance executed on the display is a first rate, and in a state where the second mode is set by the setting means, there is a loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. The execution ratio of the specific effect executed in the variable display is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of preview performances (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and the preview performance is executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. However, in the second game state, execution can be limited by a variable display based on the first starting condition, and an effect that makes the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one variable display can be provided. It is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances in addition to executing the basic production that does not include the above, and displaying a variation of a loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state; The variation display of the loss based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state is characterized in that the length of the variation time of the specific variation is different.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute a plurality of types of preview performances (for example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and the preview performance is executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state. However, in the second game state, execution can be limited by a variable display based on the first starting condition, and an effect that makes the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one variable display can be provided. In addition to executing the basic effects that do not include the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview effects, and the specific variation is performed by a variation display of a loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state. The rate at which the variation is executed is a first rate, the rate at which the specific variation is executed in the loss variation display based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state is a second rate, and the rate at which the specific variation is executed is a second rate. It is characterized in that the first ratio and the second ratio are different.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and A special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and is based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of the game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole). It is possible to store a plurality of suspended memories, and when a predetermined condition (missing fluctuation) under which the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, the player can It is possible to execute a second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) that is advantageous to For example, winning opening lamp lighting, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.) can be executed, and the preview performance can be executed with a variable display based on the first starting condition in the first gaming state, In a second gaming state, the execution can be limited by a variable display based on the first starting condition, and the variable display can be executed in the same variable time even when the pending storage is at a minimum and at a maximum, During the entire period of the variable display of times, the basic performance that does not include the performance that makes the player expect to execute the special game can be executed, and the specific variation that restricts the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances can be executed. In the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state, the specific variation can be executed, but in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state, the specific variation can be executed. It is characterized by being able to restrict the execution of fluctuations.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (e.g., lighting of prize opening lamps, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and does not include performances that make the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one fluctuating display. In addition to executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview effects, and the preview effects include a first effect (background change for SP) and a first effect different from the first effect. 2 effects (text notice, effect notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, movable accessory notice, sound notice, operation button vibration, etc.), and changes based on the second starting condition in the second game state. The variable display based on the first starting condition in the second game state is characterized in that the special game is more easily executed from the variable display in which the first effect is executed than the display.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (e.g., lighting of prize opening lamps, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and does not include performances that make the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one fluctuating display. In addition to executing the basic performance, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances, and the preview performance includes a first performance (for example, background change for SP, etc.) and a first performance that is different from the first performance. It has a different second effect (for example, a text notice, an effect notice, a 3D filter notice, a light guide plate notice, a mode entry effect, a movable accessory notice, a sound notice, an operation button vibration, etc.), and the second effect in the second game state is The special game is more likely to be executed from the variable display in which the second effect has been executed in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state than in the variable display based on the starting condition of No. 2. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (e.g., lighting of prize opening lamps, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and does not include performances that make the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one fluctuating display. In addition to executing the basic effect, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview effects, and the preview effect is a first effect (for example, (SP background change, text notice, effect notice, 3D filter notice, light guide plate notice, mode entry notice, etc.), and a second production (movable character notice, sound notice, etc.) that is executed in a different manner from the first production. , operation button vibration, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state. It is characterized in that the special game is likely to be executed from the variable display in which the first performance has been executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuating display, and in the fluctuating display, a basic effect of displaying symbols and a background, and making the player expect to execute the special game. It is possible to execute multiple types of preview performances (e.g., lighting of prize opening lamps, pending changes, effects, pseudo, etc.), and does not include performances that make the execution of the special game expected during the entire period of one fluctuating display. In addition to executing the basic performance, it is possible to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances, and the preview performance includes a first performance (SP background change, text preview, effect notice, 3D filter notice, (light guide plate notice, mode entry effect, sound notice, etc.) and a second effect (movable accessory notice, operation button vibration, advance notice, etc.), and the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is better than the variable display based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state. It is characterized in that the special game is likely to be executed from the variable display in which the performance has been executed.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuation display, and a first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, change at the time of pending movement) that can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of fluctuation) change, etc.), and a second notification (change when winning a prize) that can be executed at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning a prize), and the first notification can be performed in a first manner (change when winning a prize). a second aspect that is different from the first aspect (for example, a different color), and a third aspect that is different from the second aspect (lights out, non-display, basic form display, etc.). It is possible to execute a change effect that changes from the third aspect to the first aspect or the second aspect, and in the first aspect in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state. The execution ratio of is a first ratio, and the execution ratio of the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is a second ratio, and the execution ratio of It is characterized in that the second ratio is smaller.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the fluctuation display, and a first notification (change at the start of fluctuation, It is possible to perform an announcement performance using a second notification (change when winning a prize) that can perform a look-ahead presentation at a timing different from the predetermined timing (for example, when winning a prize), and a second notification (change when winning a prize). , a first aspect (a prize opening lamp, a hold, or blinking of the icon, etc.), a second aspect different from the first aspect (color change, etc.), and a third aspect different from the second aspect (lights out, non-display, etc.) basic form display, etc.), and the execution ratio in the first form in the variable display based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state is a first ratio, and the In the second gaming state, the execution ratio in the first mode in the variable display based on the first starting condition is a second ratio, and the second ratio is smaller than the first ratio. .

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific performance (a pending change, a zebra pattern, The execution rate of light guide plate announcements, 3D, etc.) can be changed to a first rate (normal rate, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second rate (with 3D, etc.) that is different from the first rate by a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.). It has a setting means (normal, customization, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to the first ratio (fewer hold changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.), and the setting means sets the first ratio. In this state, the execution rate of the specific performance executed in the second gaming state with a variable display of losses based on the second starting condition is the first rate, and the setting means sets the In a state where the ratio is set to 1, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed in the second gaming state with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific performance (a pending change, a zebra pattern, The execution rate of light guide plate announcements, 3D, etc.) can be changed to a first rate (normal rate, for example, with 3D, etc.) and a second rate (with 3D, etc.) that is different from the first rate by a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.). It has a setting means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to the second ratio (fewer pending changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.), and the setting means sets the second ratio. In this state, the execution rate of the specific performance executed in the second gaming state with a variable display of losses based on the second starting condition is the second rate, and the setting means sets the In a state where the ratio is set to 2, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed in the second gaming state with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition is set to a predetermined ratio different from the second ratio. It is characterized by

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific performance (a pending change, a zebra pattern, The execution rate of light guide plate notices, 3D, etc.) can be changed between the first mode and a second mode (on hold, for example, with 3D) that is different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D) by a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.). It has a setting means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to the first mode (less changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.), and the first mode is set by the setting means. In this state, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed with a variable display of loss based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state is set as a first ratio, and the setting means sets the execution ratio to the first mode. In the set state, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. Features.

■The gaming machine 1 of the present disclosure performs variable display of symbols based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition (the winning of a game ball in the first winning hole or the second winning hole), and If a predetermined condition (loss fluctuation) in which it is possible to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player and the special game is not executed in the first gaming state (normal gaming state) which is disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a predetermined number of A second gaming state (second advantageous gaming state) advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display, and a specific performance (a pending change, a zebra pattern, The execution rate of light guide plate notices, 3D, etc.) can be changed between the first mode and a second mode (on hold, for example, with 3D) that is different from the first mode (normal mode, for example, with 3D) by a predetermined change process (player selection, etc.). It has a setting means (normal, customized, mode selection, 3D selection, etc.) that can be set to the second mode (less changes, more zebra patterns, more light guide plate notices, no 3D, etc.), and the second mode is set by the setting means. In this state, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed with a variable display of loss based on the second starting condition in the second gaming state is set as a first ratio, and the setting means sets the execution ratio to the second mode. In the set state, the execution ratio of the specific performance executed with a variable display of loss based on the first starting condition in the second gaming state is set to a predetermined ratio different from the first ratio. Features.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the embodiments and modifications, the embodiments of the invention described above are for facilitating understanding of the present invention, and do not limit the present invention. The present invention may be modified and improved without departing from the spirit and scope of the claims, and the present invention includes equivalents thereof.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

1,100 Game machine 5 Game board 44 Normal figure gate 45 First starting port 47 Second starting port 50 Big prize opening 70 First image display device 70a Performance symbol 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
110m Main control unit 120 Payout control board 130, 320 Production control board 130a Sub CPU
130m Production control section 131 Main display device 136 Production operation stick 331 Audio output device

Claims (1)

A special game advantageous to the player can be executed by displaying symbols in a variable manner based on the establishment of the first starting condition or the second starting condition,
When a predetermined condition that does not involve the execution of the special game in the first gaming state disadvantageous to the player is satisfied, a second gaming state advantageous to the player can be executed in the variable display a predetermined number of times;
After executing the special game, a third game state advantageous to the player can be executed,
In the variable display, it is possible to perform a basic effect of displaying a symbol and a background, and a plurality of types of preview effects that make the player look forward to the execution of the special game,
During the entire period of one variation display, it is possible to execute the basic performance that does not include a performance that makes people expect to execute the special game, and to execute a specific variation that limits the execution of the plurality of types of preview performances;
The aforementioned preview performance is
It has a first performance that can be executed by the display means, and a second performance that is executed in a different manner from the first performance,
In the variable display based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition in the second gaming state and the variable display based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition in the third gaming state, the first effect is executed. the ease with which the special game is executed from the variable display is the same;
It is possible to execute a special effect that changes the symbol to a predetermined mode when the fluctuating display starts and/or ends, and satisfies at least one of the following (i) and (ii). A gaming machine featuring:
(i) The variable display based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition in the first gaming state is greater than the variable display based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition in the second gaming state or the third gaming state. The number of types of special effects performed when the variable display starts is larger.
(ii) The variable display based on the fulfillment of the first starting condition in the first gaming state is greater than the variable display based on the satisfaction of the first starting condition in the second gaming state or the third gaming state. The number of types of special effects performed when the variable display ends is larger.

Images